Bansal CLasses Physics Study Material For IIT JEE

BANSAL CLASSES
TARGET LIT JEE 2007

XI (PQRS)
CALORIMETRY & HEAT TRANSFER
CONTENTS KEYCONCEPT EXERCISE-I EXERCISE-II EXERCISE-III ANSWER KEY
THERMAL
Definition of Heat:
EXPANSION
Heat is a form of energy which is transferred between a system and its surroundi
ng as a result of temperature difference only. due to increase in temperature. F
or temperature change At change in length Al = l0a At Area AA= AÂt volume AV =
V yAt
0
Thermal Expansion : Expansion 1. Type of thermal
expansion
Coefficient of expansion (i) Linear (ii) Superficial (iii) Volume (a) (b)
2.
. a = At—>0 / 1 A/t Lim A
T
0
P = Lim 1 AA
At—A0 At
y = At—>o v1 AV Lim At
0
For isotropic solids otj = a = a = a (let) so P =2a and y = 3a For anisotropic s
olids p = otj + a and y = a, + a + a Here , a and a are coefficient of linear ex
pansion in X , Y and Z directions. Variation in density : With increase of tempe
rature volume increases so density decreases and vice-versa. H d =(1 + yAt)
2 3 2 2 3 2 3 0 3
Note For solids values of y are generally small so we can write d = d (1-yAt) (u
sing bimomial expansion) (0 (ii) y for liquids are in order of 10~ For water den
sity increases from 0 to 4°C so y is -ve (0 to 4° C) and for 4° C to higher temperatur
e y is +ve. At 4° C density is maximum. 3. Thermal Stress: Arod of length 1 is cla
mped between two fixed walls with distance 1 . If temperature is changed by amou
nt At then F stress A (area assumed to be constant)
0 0 :
so, or
A/ strain = I F/A F/ Y = A/// AAI F =YAa A t
0 0
F AaAt
(!l Bansal Classes
Calorimetry & Heat Transfer
[3]
4.
If a is not constant
(i)
(a varies with distance) Let a = ax+b Total expansion =
Jexpansion of length dx
i = |(ax + b)dxAt
" x
1
(ii)
( a varies with tempearture) Let a = f (T)
T2
0
dx
A/ _ j"a/ dT T i Caution: If a is in °C then put Tj and T in °C. similarly if a is i
n K then put Tj and T in K.
2 2
CAL ORIMETR
Quantity of heat transfered and specific heat
Y
The amount ofheat needed to incerase the temperature of 1 gmofwaterfrom 14.5°Cto 1
5.5°CatSTP is 1 calorie dQ = mcdT Q = m [ C dT (be careful about unit of temperatu
re, use units according to the given units of C) T i
Heat transfer in phase change
'h
Q = rnL
L = latent heat of substance in cal/ gm/ °C or in Kcal/ kg/ °C L = 80 cal/ gm for ic
e
ice
L
steam
=
5 4 0
C a l /
g
m
(A) (i)
(ii) Note: 1.
vibration and collision of medium particles. Steady State : In this state heat a
bsorption stops and temperature gradient throughout the rod dT becomes constant
i.e. — = constant. dx Before steady state : Temp of rod at any point changes If sp
ecific heat of any substance is zero, it can be considered always in steady stat
e. Let the two ends of rod of length 1 is maintained at temp Tj and T ( Tj > T )
dQ i ~ 2 I Thermal current D 1 = K-XH L T
2 2 T T
1
Conduction : Due to
HEAT-
TRANSFER
Ohm's law for Thermal Conduction in Steady State :
/
Where thermal resistance R = K A
Th 1 1
2.
Differential form of Ohm's Law
T-dT
dQ dT — =KA— dT dx
dT — = temperature gradient dx
dx
(!lBansal Classes
[3]
(B) (Q 1.
Heat transfer due to movement ofmedium particles. Radiation: Every body radiates
electromagnetic radiation of all possible wavelength at all temp>0 K. Stefan's
Law: Rate of heat emitted by a body at temp T K from per unit area E = GT J/sec/
m d = P = oAT watt Q Radiation power — dl If a body is placed in a surrounding of
temperature T dQ
Convection:
4
2
4
s
valid only for black body heat from general body Emissmty or emmisive power e =
~ Iftemp ofbody falls by dT in time dt dT _ _ j4x (dT/dt=rate of cooling) dt ~ m
S
h e a t f r o m s
^
=cA(T -T )
4 s 4
Newton's law of cooling
Iftemp difference ofbody with surrounding is small i.e. T = T eA then, dT 4mS -a
T ( T - T ) dt dT a ( T - T ) so dt
rr3/ 2
s
Average form of Newtons law of cooling
If a body cools from T j to T in time 51 T - T _ K T, +T, -T (used generally in
objective questions) 5t mS
s 2
dt
4.
mS
(for better results use this generally in subjective)
At every temperature (>0K) a body radiates energy radiations ofall wavelengths.
According to Wein's displacement law if the wavelength corresponding to maximum
energy is X then X T = b where b = is a constant (Wein's constant) T=temperature
of body
m m
Wein's black body radiation
T3>T2>T,
ess
(!l Bansal Classes
[3]
EXERCISE
-1
Q. 1 An aluminium container of mass 100 gm contains 200 gm of ice at - 20°C. Heat
is added to the system at the rate of 100 cal/s. Find the temperature of the sys
tem after 4 minutes (specific heat of ice = 0.5 and L = 80 cal/gm, specific heat
of A1 = 0.2 cal/gm/°C) Q. 2 A U-tubefilledwith a liquid ofvolumetric coefficient
of 10 /°C lies in a vertical plane. The height of liquid column in the left vertic
al limb is 100 cm. The liquid in the left vertical limb is maintained at a tempe
rature = 0°C while the liquid in the right limb is maintained at a temperature = 1
00°C. Find the difference in levels in the two limbs.
_5
Q.3
A thin walled metal tank of surface area 5m is filled with water tank and contai
ns an immersion heater dissipating 1 kW. The tank is covered with 4 cm thick lay
er of insulation whose thermal conductivity is 0.2 W/m/K. The outer face of the
insulation is 25°C. Find the temperature of the tank in the steady state
2
Q.4
A glassflaskcontains some mercury at room temperature. It is found that at diffe
rent temperatures the volume of air inside the flask remains the same. If the vo
lume of mercury in the flask is 300 cm , thenfindvolume of the flask (given that
coefficient of volume expansion of mercury and coefficient oflinear expansion o
f glass are 1.8 x 10^(°C) and9x 10~ (°C) respectively)
3 _1 6 _1
Q.5 Q.6 Q.7
A clock pendulum made of invar has a period of 0.5 sec at 20°C. If the clock is us
ed in a climate where average temperature is 30°C, aporoximately. How much fast or
slow will the clock run in 10 sec. (a =lxlO /°C)
6 ilwar -6
A pan filled with hot food cools from 50.1 °C to 49.9 °C in 5 sec. How long will it
take to cool from 40.1 °C to 39.9°C if room temperature is 30°C? A composite rod made
of three rods of equal length and cross-section as shown in the fig. The thermal
conductivities of the materials of the rods are K/2, 5K and K respectively. The
end A and end B are at constant temperatures. All heat entering the face A goes
out of the end B there being no loss of heat from the sides of the bar. Find th
e effective thermal conductivity of the bar
A
I Q.8 Q.9
K/2
I
11
5K
2 6
1
K
1
B
An iron bar (Young's modulus = 10 N/m , a = 10" /°C) 1 m long and 10~ m in area is
heated from 0°C to 100°C without being allowed to bend or expand. Find the compress
ive force developed inside the bar.
3 2
A solid copper cube and sphere, both of same mass & emissivity are heated to sam
e initial temperature and kept under identical conditions. What is the ratio of
their initial rate of fall of temperature?
Q. 10 A cylindrical rod with one end in a stream chamber and other end in ice ca
use melting of 0.1 gm of ice/sec. If the rod is replaced with another rod of hal
f the length and double the radius of first and thermal conductivity of second r
od is 1/4 that of first, find the rate of ice melting in gm/sec
(!l Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.ll Three aluminium rods of equal length form an equilateral triangle ABC. Taki
ng O (mid point of rod BC) as the origin. Find the increase in Y-coordinate per
unit change in temperature ofthe centre ofmass of the system. Assume the length
of the each rod is 2m, and a = 4 v3 x10" /°C
d 6
Q.12 Three conducting rods of same material and cross-section are shown in figur
e. Temperature of A, D and C are maintained at 20°C, 90°C and 0°C. Find the ratio of l
ength BD and BC if there is no heat flow in AB
20°C 90'C
0°C
Q. 13 If two rods of layer L and 2 L having coefficients of linear expansion a a
nd 2a respectively are connected so that total length becomes 3 L, determine the
average coefficient of linear expansion of the composite rod. Q.14 A volume of
120 ml of drink (half alcohol + half water by mass) originally at a temperature
of 25°C is cooled by adding 20 gm ice at 0°C. If all the ice melts, find the final t
emperature of the drink, (density of drink = 0.833 gm/cc, specific heat of alcoh
ol = 0.6 cal/gm/°C) Q.15 A solid receives heat by radiation over its surface at th
e rate of 4 kW. The heat convection rate from the surface of solid to the surrou
nding is 5.2 kW, and heat is generated at a rate of 1.7 kW over the volume of th
e solid. The rate of change of the average temperature of the solid is 0.5 Cs .
Find the heat capacity of the solid.
o -1
Q.16 The figure shows the face and interface temperature of a composite slab con
taining offour layers oftwo materials having identical thickness. Under steady s
tate condition, find the value of temperature 6.
20°C 10°C
E
-5°C -10°C
2k
2k
k = thermal conductivity
Q.17 Two identical calorimeter A and B contain equal quantity of water at 20°C. A
5 gm piece of metal X of specific heat 0.2 cal g (C°) is dropped into A and a 5 gm
piece of metal Y into B. The equilibrium temperature in A is 22°C and in B 23°C. Th
e initial temperature of both the metals is 40°C. Find the specific heat of metal
Y in cal g" (C°)~ 4 _1 1 l
Q.18 Two spheres of same radius R have their densities in the ration 8 . 1 and t
he ratio of their specific heats are 1 : 4. If by radiation their rates of fall
of temperature are same, thenfindthe ratio of their rates of losing heat. Q.19 I
n the square frame of side I of metallic rods, the corners A and C are maintaine
d at Tj and T respectively. The rate of heat flow from A to Cisa. IfA and D are
instead maintained Tj & T respectivleyfind,findthe total rate ofheat flow.
2 2
Q.20 A hot liquid contained in a container of negligible heat capacity loses tem
perature at rate 3 K/min, just before it begins to solidify. The temperature rem
ains constant for 30 min, Find the ratio of specific heat capacity of liquid to
specific latent heat of fusion is in Kr (given that rate of losing heat is const
ant).
1
(!l Bansal Classes
[3]
Q. 21 A thermostatted chamber at small height h above earth's surface maintained
at 30°C has a clock fitted in it with an uncompensated pendulum. The clock design
er correctly designs it for height h, but for temperature of 20°C. Ifthis chamber
is taken to earth's surface, the clock in it would click correct time. Find the
coefficient oflinear expansion ofmaterial of pendulum, (earth's radius is R) Q.2
2 The coefficient of volume expansion of mercury is 20 times the coefficient of
linear expansion of glass. Find the volume of mercury that must be poured into a
glass vessel ofvolume V so that the volume above mercury may remain constant at
all temperature. Q. 23 Two 50 gm ice cubes are dropped into 250 gm ofwater ion
a glass. Ifthe water was initially at a temperature of 25°C and the temperature of
ice -15°C. Find the final temperature of water, (specific heat ofice = 0.5 cal/gm
/°C and L = 80 cal/gm) Q.24 Water is heated from 10°C to 90°C in a residential hot wat
er heater at a rate of 70 litre per minute. Natural gas with a density of 1.2 kg
/m is used in the heater, which has a transfer efficiency of 32%. Find the gas c
onsumption rate in cubic meters per hour, (heat combustion for natural gas is 84
00 kcal/kg)
3
Q.25 A metal rod A of 25cm lengths expands by 0.050cm. When its temperature is r
aised from 0°C to 100°C. Another rod B of a different metal of length 40cm expands b
y 0.040 cm for the same rise in temperature. A third rod C of 50cm length is mad
e up of pieces of rods A and B placed end to end expands by 0.03 cm on heating f
rom 0°C to 50°C. Find the lengths of each portion of the composite rod. Q.26 A subst
ance is in the solid form at 0°C. The amount of heat added to this substance and i
ts temperature are plotted in the following graph. If the relative specific heat
capacity of the solid substance is 0.5, find from the graph (i) the mass of the
substance; (ii) the specific latent heat of the melting process, and (iii) the
specific heat of the substance in the liquid state. Q. 27 One end of copper rod
ofuniform cross-section and of length 1.5 meters is in contact with melting ice
and the other end with boiling water. At what point along its length should a te
mperature of200°C be maintained, so that in steady state, the mass ofice melting i
s equal to that of steam produced in the same interval oftime? Assume that the w
hole system is insulatedfromthe surroundings. Q.28 Two solids spheres are heated
to the same temperature and allowed to cool under identical conditions. Compare
: (i) initial rates of fall of temperature, and (ii) initial rates of loss of he
at. Assume that all the surfaces have the same emissivity and ratios of their ra
dii of, specific heats and densities are respectively 1 : a, 1 : p, 1 : y. Q.29
A vessel containing 100 gm water at 0°C is suspended in the middle of a room. In 1
5 minutes the temperature of the water rises by 2°C. When an equal amount of ice i
s placed in the vessel, it melts in 10 hours. Calculate the specific heat offusi
on ofice. Q. 3 0 The maximum in the energy distribution spectrum of the sun is a
t 4753 A and its temperature is 6050K. What will be the temperature of the star
whose energy distribution shows a maximum at 9506 A.
(!l Bansal Classes
[3]
EXERCISE-II
Q. 1 A copper calorimeter of mass 100 gm contains 200 gm of a mixture of ice and
water. Steam at 100°C under normal pressure is passed into the calorimeter and th
e temperature of the mixture is allowed to rise to 50°C. If the mass of the calori
meter and its contents is now 330 gm, what was the ratio of ice and water in the
beginning? Neglect heat losses. Given : Specific heat capacity of copper = 0.42
x 10 J kg K" , Specific heat capacity of water = 4.2 x 10 J kg^Kr , Specific he
at of fusion of ice = 3.36 x 10 J kg Latent heat of condensation of steam = 22.5
x 1Q Jkg"
3 _1 x 3 1 5 -1 5 1
Q.2
base and two thin rods each of length l and coefficient of linear expansion a fo
r the two pieces, ifthe distance between the apex and the midpoint ofthe base re
main unchanged as the temperatures /, varied show that 7
2 2
l
A
n isoscetes triangte is form ed w ith a rod of length l and coefficient of linea
r expansion OTJ for the
x
2
Q.3
A solid substance of mass 10 gm at - 10°C was heated to - 2°C (still in the solid st
ate). The heat required was 64 calories. Another 880 calories was required to ra
ise the temperature ofthe substance (now in the liquid state) to 1°C, while 900 ca
lories was required to raise the temperature from -2°C to 3°C. Calculate the specifi
c heat capacities of the substances in the solid and liquid state in calories pe
r kilogram per kelvin. Show that the latent heat of fusion L is related to the m
elting point temperature t by L = 85400 + 200 t .
m m
Q.4 (a) (b) Q. 5 Q.6 Q. 7
A steel drill making 180 rpm is used to drill a hole in a block of steel. The ma
ss of the steel block and the drill is 180 gm. If the entire mechanical work is
used up in producing heat and the rate of raise in temperature of the block and
the drill is 0.5 °C/s. Find the rate of working of the drill in watts, and the tor
que required to drive the drill. Specific heat of steel = 0.1 and J = 4.2 J/cal.
Use ;P = i o A brass rod of mass m = 4.25 kg and a cross sectional area 5 cm in
creases its length by 0.3 mm upon heatingfrom0°C. What amount ofheat is spent for
heating the rod? The coefficient of linear expansic 1 for brass is 2xl0 /K, its
specific heat is 0.39 kJ/kg.K and the density of brass is 8.5 x 10 kg/m . A subm
arine made of steel weighing 10 g has to take 10 g of water in order to submerge
when the temperature of the sea is 10°C. How much less water it will have to take
in when the sea is at 15°C? (Coefficient of cubic expansion of sea water = 2 x 10
"V°C, coefficient of linear expansion of steel = 1.2 x 10- /°C) A flow calorimeter i
s used to measure the specific heat of a liquid. Heat is added at a known rate t
o a stream of the liquid as it passes through the calorimeter at a known rate. T
hen a measurement of the resulting temperature difference between the inflow and
the outflow points of the liquid stream enables us to compute the specific heat
of the liquid. A liquid of density 0.2 g/cm flows through a calorimeter at the
rate of 10 cm /s. Heat is added by means of a 250-W electric heating coil, and a
temperature difference of 25 °C is established in steady-state conditions between
the inflow and the outflow points. Find the specific heat of the liquid.
2 -5 3 3 9 8 5 3 3
(!lBansalClasses
[3]
Q.8
Toluene liquid of volume 300 cm at 0°C is contained in a beaker an another quantit
y of toluene of volume 110 cm at 100°C is in another beaker. (The combined volume
is 410 cm ). Determine the total volume of the mixture ofthe toluene liquids whe
n they are mixed together. Given the coefficient of volume expansion y = 0.001/C
and all forms of heat losses can be ignored. Also find the final temperature of
the mixture. Q. 9 Ice at -20°C isfilledupto height h = 10 cm in a uniform cylindr
ical vessel. Water at temperature 9°C is filled in another identical vessel upto t
he same height h= 10 cm. Now, water from second vessel is poured into first vess
el and it is found that level of upper surface falls through Ah = 0. 5 cm when t
hermal equilibrium is reached. Neglecting thermal capacity of vessels, change in
density of water due to change in temperature and loss of heat due to radiation
, calculate initial temperature 0 of water. Given, Density of water, p = 1 gm cm
Density of ice, p. =0.9gm/cm Specific heat of water, s = 1 cal/gm °C Specific hea
t of ice, s = 0.5 cal/gm°C Specific latent heat of ice, L = 80 cal/gm Q. 10 A comp
osite body consists of two rectangular plates of the same dimensions but differe
nt thermal conductivities K and Kg. This body is used to transfer heat between t
wo objects maintained at different temperatures. The composite body can be place
d such that flow of heat takes place either parallel to the interface or perpend
icular to it. Calculate the effective thermal conductivities K. and Kj Of the co
mposite body for the parallel and perpendicular orientations. Which orientation
will have more thermal conductivity?
3 3 3 w -3 3 w ; A
Q. 11 Two identical thermally insulated vessels, each containing n mole of an id
eal monatomic gas, are interconnected by a rod of length I and cross-sectional a
rea A. Material of the rod has thermal conductivity K and its lateral surface is
thermally insulated. If, at initial moment (t = 0), temperature of gas in two v
essels is T, and T (< T ), neglecting thermal capacity of the rod, calculate dif
ference between temperature of gas in two vessels as a function of time.
2 }
Q. 12 A highly conducting solid cylinder of radius a and length I is surrounded
by a co-axial layer of a material having thermal conductivity K and negligible h
eat capacity. Temperature of surrounding space (out side the layer) is T , which
is higher than temperature of the cylinder. If heat capacity per unit volume of
cylinder material is s and outer radius of the layer is b, calculate time requi
red to increase temperature of the cylinder from T to T Assume end faces to be t
hermally insulated.
0 t r
Q. 13 A vertical brick duct(tube) is filled with cast iron. The lower end of the
duct is maintained at a temperature T, which is greater than the melting point
T of cast iron and the upper end at a temperature T which is less than the tempe
rature ofthe melting point of cast iron. It is given that the conductivity of li
quid cast iron is equal to k times the conductivity of solid cast iron. Determin
e the fraction ofthe duct filled with molten metal. Q.14 Water is filled in a no
n-conducting cylindrical vessel of uniform cross-sectional area. Height of water
column is h and temperature is 0°C. Ifthe vessel is exposed to an atmosphere havi
ng constant temperature of- 0°C (< 0°C) at t = 0, calculate total height h ofthe col
umn at time t .Assume thermal conductivity ofice to be equal to K.Density ofwate
r is p and that of ice is p.. Latent heat offusion ofice isL.
m 2 0 ffi
(!l Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.15 A lagged stick of cross section area 1 cm and length 1 m is initially at a
temperature of 0°C. It is then kept between 2 reservoirs of tempeature 100°C and 0°C.
Specific heat capacity is 10 J/kg°C and linear mass density is 2 kg/m. Find 100°C o°c
(a) temperature gradient along the rod in steady state. (b) total heat absorbed
by the rod to reach steady state. Q.16 A cylindrical block of length 0.4 m an ar
ea of cross-section 0.04m is placed coaxially on a thin metal disc ofmass 0.4 kg
and ofthe same cross-section. The upper face of the cylinder is maintained at a
constant temperature of 400K and the initial temperature of the disc is 300K. I
f the thermal conductivity of the material of the cylinder is 10 watt/m-K and th
e specific heat of the material of the disc in 600 J/kg-K, how long will it take
for the temperature of the disc to increase to 350K? Assume, for purposes of ca
lculation, the thermal conductivity of the disc to be very high and the system t
o be thermally insulated except for the upper face of the cylinder.
2 2
Q.17 A copper calorimeter of negligible thermal capacity isfilledwith a liquid.
The mass of the liquid equals 250 gm. A heating element of negligible thermal ca
pacity is immersed in the liquid. It is found that the temperature of the calori
meter and its contents risesfrom25°C to 30°C in 5 minutes when a or rent of 20.5 amp
ere is passed through it at potential difference of 5 volts. The liquid is throw
n off and the heater is again switched on. It is now found that the temperature
ofthe calorimeter alone is constantly maintained at 32°C when the current through
the heater is 7A at the potential difference 6 volts. Calculate the specific hea
t capacity ofthe liquid. The temperature ofthe surroundings is 25°C. Q.18 A solid
copper sphere cools at the rate of 2.8°C per minute, when its temperature is 127°C.
Find the rate at which another solid copper sphere oftwice the radius lose its t
emperature at 327°C, ifin both the cases, the room temperature is maintained at 27°C
. Q.19 A calorimeter contains 100 cm of a liquid of density 0.88 g/cm in which a
re immersed a thermometer and a small heating coil. The effective water equivale
nt of calorimeter, thermometer and heater may be taken to be 13 gm. Current of 2
A is passed through the coil. The potential difference across the coil is 6.3 V
and the ultimate steady state temperature is 55°C. The current is increased so th
at the temperature rises slightly above 55°C, and then it is switched off. The cal
orimeter and the content are found to cool at the rate of 3.6°C/min. (a) Find the
specific heat of the liquid. (b) The room temperature during the experiment was
10°C. If the room temperature rises to 26°C, find the current required to keep the l
iquid at 55°C. You may assume that Newton's law is obeyed and the resistance of th
e heater remains constant.
3 3
Q.20 End A of a rod AB of length L = 0.5 m and of uniform cross-sectional area i
s maintained at some constant temperature. The heat conductivity of the rod is k
= 17 J/s-rn°K. The other end B of this rod is radiating energy into vacuum and th
e wavelength with maximum energy density emitted from this end is XQ = 75000 A.
If the emissivity of the end B is e = 1, determine the temperature of the end A.
Assuming that except the ends, the rod is thermally insulated. Q.21 A wire of l
ength 1.0 m and radius 10" m is carrying a heavy current and is assumed to radia
te as a blackbody. At equilibrium temperature of wire is 900 K while that of the
surroundings is 300 K. The resistivity of the material of the wire at 300 K is
n x 10" O-m and its temperature coefficient of resistance is 7.8 x 10' /°C. Find t
he current in the wire, [a = 5.68 x 10" w/m K ].
3 2 8 3 8 2 4
(!l Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.22 The temperature distribution of solar radiation is more or less same as tha
t of a black body whose maximum emission corresponds to the wavelength 0.483 jam
. Find the rate of change of mass due to radiation. [Radius of Sun = 7.0 x 10 m]
8
Q.23 A black plane surface at a constant high temperature T , is parallel to ano
ther black plane surface at constant lower temperature T . Between the plates is
vacuum. In order to reduce the heatflowdue to radiation, a heat shield consisti
ng oftwo thin black plates, thermally isolated from each other, it placed betwee
n the warm and the cold surfaces and parallel to these. After some time stationa
ry conditions are obtained. By what factor r) is the stationary heatflowreduced
due to the presence of the heat shield? Neglect end effects due to thefinitesize
of the surfaces.
h ;
Q.24 The shell of a space station is a blackened sphere in which a temperature T
= 500K is maintained due to operation of appliances of the station. Find the te
mperature of the shell if the station is enveloped by a thin spherical black scr
een of nearly the same radius as the radius of the shell.
Blackened envelop
Q.25 A liquid takes 5 minutes to coolfrom80°C to 50°C. How much time will it take to
coolfrom60°C to 30°C ? The temperature of surrounding is 20°C. Use exact method. Q .2
6 Find the temperature of equilibrium of a perfectly black disc exposed normally
to the Sun's ray on the surface of Earth. Imagine that it has a nonconducting b
acking so that it can radiate only to hemisphere of space. Assume temperature of
surface of Sun = 6200 K, radius of sun = 6.9 * 10 m, distance between the Sun a
nd the Earth = 1.5 x lo m. Stefan's constant = 5.7 x i0~ W/m .K . What will be t
he temperature ifboth sides of the disc are radiate?
s 11 s 2 4
(!l Bansal Classes
[3]
Q. 1 Q.2
The temperature of 100 gm of water is to be raised from 24° C to 90° C by adding ste
am to it. Calculate the mass of the steam required for this purpose. [JEE '96] T
wo metal cubes A & B of same size are arranged as shown in figure. The extreme e
nds of the combination are maintained at the indicated temperatures. The arrange
ment is thermally insulated. The coefficients of thermal conductivity of A & B a
re 300 W/m°C and 200 W/m°C respectively. After steady state is reached the temperatu
re T of the interface will be . [JEE' 96]
2
EXERCISE - III
o
A
B
Q.3
A double pane window used for insulating a room thermally from outside consists
of two glass sheets each of area 1 m and thickness 0.01 m separated by a 0.05m t
hick stagnant air space. In the steady state, the room glass interface and the g
lass outdoor interface are at constant temperatures of 27°C and 0°C respectively. Ca
lculate the rate of heat flow through the window pane. Also find the temperature
s of other interfaces. Given thermal conductivities of glass and air as 0.8 and
0.08 W nr'K- respectively. [JEE'97]
1
Q. 4
The apparatus shown in the figure consists of four glass columns connected by ho
rizontal sections. The height of two central columns B & C are 49 cm each. The t
wo outer columns A & D are open to the atmosphere. A & C are maintained at a tem
perature of 95° C while the columns B & D are maintained at 5° C. The height of the
liquid in A & D measured from the base line are 52.8 cm & 51 cm respectively. De
termine the coefficient ofthermal expansion ofthe liquid, [JEE '97]
A
95°
C
95°
Q.5 Q.6 Q.7
A spherical black body with a radius of 12 cm radiates 450 W power at 500 K . If
the radius were halved and the temperature doubled, the power radiated in watt
would be : (A) 225 (B) 450 (C) 900 (D) 1800 Earth receives 1400 W/m of solar pow
er . If all the solar energy falling on a lens of area 0.2 m is focussed on to a
block of ice of mass 280 grams, the time taken to melt the ice will be minutes.
(Latent heat of fusion of ice = 3.3 x 10 J/kg) [JEE '97]
2 2 5
A solid body X of heat capacity C is kept in an atmosphere whose temperature is
T = 300K. At time t = 0, the temperature of X is T = 400K. It cools according to
Newton's law of cooling. At time tj its temperature is found to be 3 5 OK. At t
his time t the body X is connected to a larger body Y at atmospheric temperature
T , through a conducting rod of length L, cross-sectional area A and thermal co
nductivity K. The heat capacity of Y is so large that any variation in its tempe
rature may be neglected. The cross-sectional area A of the connecting rod is sma
ll compared to the surface area of X. Find the temperature of X at time t = 3t [
JEE' 98]
A 0 p A r
Q.8
A black body is at a temperature of2880 K. The energy ofradiation emitted by thi
s obj ect with wavelength between 499 nm and 500 nm is U between 999 nm and 1000
nm is U and between 1499 nm and 1500nmisU . TheWienconstantb = 2.88 x 10 nmK. T
hen [JEE' 98] (A) Uj = 0 (B)U = 0 (C) Uj > U (D)U >U
p 2 3 6 3 2 2 1
(!l Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.9
A bimetallic strip is formed out oftwo identical strips one ofcopper and the oth
er ofbrass. The coefficient of linear expansion ofthe two metals are a and ctg.
On heating, the temperature ofthe strip goes up by AT and the strip bends to for
m an arc of radius of curvature R. Then R is: (A) proportional at AT (B) inverse
ly proportional to AT [JEE' 99] (C) proportional to lOg - a | (D) inversely prop
ortional to |a - a |
c c B c
Q.10 A block of ice at - 10°C is slowiy heated and converted to steam at 100°C. Whic
h of the following curves represents the phenomenon qualitatively? [JEE (Scr) 20
00] (A)
Heat supplied
(B)
Heat supplied
\
(C)
Heat supplied
(D)
Heat supplied
Q. 11 The plots of intensity versus wavelength for three black bodies at tempera
ture T, , T and T, respectively are as shown. Thentemperatures are such that [JE
E (Scr) 2000] (A)T >T >T (B) T j > T > T (C) T > T > T (C) T. > T > T
2 1 2 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 t
Q.12
Three rods made of the same material and having the same cross-section have been
joined as shown in the figure. Each rod is of the same length. The left and rig
ht ends are kept at 0°C and 90°C respectively. The temperature of the junction of th
e three rods will be [JEE(Scr)2001 ] o°c(A) 45°C (B) 60°C (C) 30°C (D)20°C
,S0°C
"90°C
Q. 13 An ideal black body at room temperature is thrown into a furnace. It is ob
served that (A) initially it is the darkest body and at later times the brightes
t. (B) it the darkest body at all times (C) it cannot be distinguished at all ti
mes. (D) initially it is the darkest body and at later times it cannot be distin
guished. [JEE(Scr)2002] Q. 14 An ice cube of mass 0.1 kg at 0°C is placed in an is
olated container which is at 227°C. The specific heat S of the container varies wi
th temperature T according the empirical relations = A + BT, where A= 100 cal/kg
-K and B = 2 x 10~ cal/kg-K . If the final temperature of the container is 27°C, d
etermine the mass of the container. (Latent heat of fusion for water = 8 x \ o c
al/kg. Specific heat of water = 103 cal/kg-K) [JEE' 2001]
2 2 4
Q.15 Two rods one of aluminium of length /, having coefficient of linear expansi
on a , and other steel of length l having coefficient of linear expansion a are
joined end to end. The expansion in both the
a 2 s
[JEE (Scr) 2003] rods is same on variation of temperature. Then the value of , h
is . n +/2 ac a0 (D) None of these (A) a + a (B) a s (C) Otc
r a s
a - a
(!l Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.16 2 kg ice at - 20°C is mixed with 5 kg water at 20°C. Thenfinalamount ofwater in
the mixture would be; Given specific heat of ice = 0.5cal/g°C, specific heat ofwa
ter = 1 cal/g°C, Latent heat of fusion of ice = 80 cal/g. [JEE (Scr) 2003] (A) 6 k
g (B) 5 kg (C) 4 kg (D) 2 kg Q.17 If emissivity of bodies X and Y are e and e an
d absorptive power are A and Ay then [JEF (Scr) 2003] (A) e > e ; Ay > A (B) e <
e ; A < A (C)e >e ;A <A (D) e = e ; Ay = A Q.18 Hot oil is circulated through a
n insulated container with a wooden lid at the top whose conductivity K = 0.149
J/(m-°C-sec), thickness t = 5 mm, emissivity = 0.6. Temperature of the top of the
lid in steady state is at T =27°C T, = 127°. If the ambient temperature T = 27°C. Calc
ulate -=• Hot oil (a) rate ofheat loss per unit area due to radiationfromthe lid.
17 _ [JEE 2003] temperature ofthe oil. (Given a = — 10 ) (b)
x y x y x x y x y x y x y x y x x
V.a
a
x
8
Q.19 Three discs A, B, and C having radii 2 m, 4 m and 6 m respectively are coat
ed with carbon black on their outer surfaces. The wavelengths corresponding to m
aximum intensity are 300 nm, 400 nm and 500 nm respectively. The power radiated
by them are QA, QB and QC respectively, (a) Q is maximum (B) QB is maximum [JEE'
2004 (Scr.)] (C) QC is maximum (D) QA = QB = QC Q.20 Two identical conducting r
ods are first connected independently to two vessels, one containing water at 10
0°C and the other containing ice at 0° C. In the second case, the rods are joined en
d to end and connected to the same vessels. Let qj and q g/s be the rate of melt
ing of ice in the two cases respectively. The ratio q /q is (A) 1/2 (B) 2/1 (C)
4/1 (D) 1/4 [JEE'2004 (Scr.)] Q.21 Liquid oxygen at 50 K is heated to 300 K at c
onstant pressure of 1 atm. The rate of heating is constant. Which of the followi
ng graphs represents the variation of temperature with time?
a 2 9 T
Temp.f
Temp.f
,
Temp.f
Temp.
(A)
[JEE' 2004 (Scr.)] Q.22 A cube of coefficient of linear expansion a is floating
in a bath containing a liquid of coefficient of volume expansion yt When the tem
perature is raised by AT, the depth upto which the cube is submerged in the liqu
id remains the same. Find the relation between a and y showing all the steps. [J
EE 2004] Q.23 One end of a rod of length L and cross-sectional area A is kept in
a furnace of temperature T The other end of the rod is kept at a temperature T
. The thermal conductivity ofthe material of the rod is K and emissivity ofthe r
od is e. It is given that T = T + AT where AT Insulated « T , T being the temperat
ure ofthe surroundings. IfAT oc (Tj - T ), Furance T Rod * L * find the proporti
onality constant. Consider that heat is lost only by radiation Insulated at the
end where the temperature ofthe rod is T . [JEE 2004]
s s b r 2 2 s s s s
f
Time
(B)
Time
(C)
Time
(D)
Time
2
(!l Bansal Classes
[3]
Q. 24 Three graphs marked as 1,2,3 representing the variation of maximum emissiv
e power and wavelength of radiation of the sun, a welding arc and a tungsten fil
ament. Which ofthe following combination is correct (A) 1-bulb, 2 —> welding arc,
3 —> sun (B) 2-bulb, 3 —» welding arc, 1 -» sun (C) 3-bulb, 1 —» welding arc, 2 —» sun (D)
b, 1 -> welding arc, 3 sun [JEE' 2005 (Scr)] Q. 25 In which of the following phe
nomenon heat convection does not take place (A) land and sea breeze (B) boiling
ofwater (C) heating ofglass surface due to filament ofthe bulb (D) air around th
e furance
[JEE' 2005 (Scr)]
Q.26 2 litre water at 27°C is heated by a 1 kW heater in an open container. On an
average heat is lost to surroundings at the rate 160 J/s. The time required for
the temperature to reach 77°C is (A) 8 min 20 sec (B)10min (C)7min (D)14min [JEE'
2005 (Scr)] Q.27 A spherical body of area A and emissivity e = 0.6 is kept insid
e a black body. What is the rate at which energy is radiated per second at tempe
rature T (A) 0.6 a AT (B)0.4aAT (C)0.8cAT (D)l.OaAT [JEE 2005 (Scr)] Q. 28 1 cal
orie is the heat required to increased the temperature of 1 gm ofwater by 1 °C fro
m (A) 13.5°Cto 14.5°C at 76 mm of Hg (B) 14.5°Cto 15.5°Cat760mmofHg (C) 0°C to 1°C at 760 m
of Hg (D) 3°C to 4°C to 760 mm of Hg [JEE* 2005 (Scr)]
4 4 4 4
(!l Bansal Classes
[3]
ANSWER KEY Q.i Q.5 Q.9 Q.12 Q.16 Q.20 Q.24 Q.27 Q.I Q.4 Q.7 25.5°C 5 sec slow /6M/
3 .71. 7/2 5°C 1/90 104.2 10.34 cm Q.2 Q.6 0.1 cm 10 sec
EXERCISE -1
Q.3 Q.7 65°C 15K/16 Q.ll Q.14 Q.18 Q.22
Q.4 Q.8
2000 cm 10, 000 N
3
Q.10 0.2 Q.13 5 a/3 Q.17 27/85 Q.21 h/5R Q.25 10cm, Q.28 ctPy:
4 x 10 m/°C 4°C Q.15 1000 J (C )2:1 Q.19 (4/3)© 3Y/20 Q.23 0 °C
-6 0
1
:a
2
Q.29 80 k cal/kg
1 1 1 -1
Q.30 3025 K
Q.3 800 cal kg" K , 1000 cal kg" K 1 : 1.26 (a) 37.8 J/s (Watts), (b) 2.005 N-m
Q.5 25 kJ 5000 J/°C kg Q.8 decrease by 0.75 cm ,25°C . K +K 2K K Q.10 K„ > Kj_, K| = K
1 B
3 T A R V A B ; x
EXERCISE-II
Q.6 Q.9 Q.ll
t m m m
9.02 x 10 gm 45°C
5
\n i (T, ~T )e "3 R J
2 2
( 4KAt N |
Q.12
a s. ^log
2
(-) l0geV. 0 ~ 2 J
T T
Q 1 3
k(T - T ) I k(T -T ) + (T -T )
1
Q.14 h +
0
Q.17 21000 Jkg^Kr Q.20 T = 423 K
a
1 - JBL V
/
\ 1
-
\ Pi f
L
12k;6t
Q.15 (a) 100 °C/m, (b) 1000 J Q.18 9.72°C/min Q.21 36A
0 x
Q.16 166.3 sec
9
1
Q.19 (a)0.42 cal/gm°C, (b) 1.6A
Q.23 r| = 3 Q.25 10 minutes Q.I Q.4 Q.7 12 gm
e
Q.22 ~dt = 5.06 x 10 kg/s Q.24 T" = 500 = 600 K Q.26 T = 420 K, T = 353.6 K Q.2
60° C
EXERCISE-III
Q.3 Q.6
0
41.53 Watt; 26.48 °C;0.55°C 5.5 min Q.14 0.5 kg Q.19 B Q.24 A
2 x 10^ C Q.5 D log 2 ; T = 300 + 50 exp. k= Q.9 B, D Q.10 Q.16 A Q.17 Q.21 C Q.
26 A Q.22 Q.27
Q.8 D Q.15 A Q.20 D Q.25 C
(!l Bansal Classes
[LC tj A Q.ll B Q.12 B Q.13 D A Q.18 (a) 595 watt/m , ( b ) T * 4 2 0 K K y,= 2a
s Q.23 4eaLTf+K A Q.28 B
2 0
[3]
BA
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XII (ALL)
COHTENTS
KEYCONCEPTS EXERCISE-1 EXERCISE-II EXERCISE-III ANSWER KEY
KEY
1. CAPACITANCE O F A N
0 (
CONCEPTS
C = 471 e e R in a medium
ISOLATED SPHERICAL CONDUCTOR :
C = 47C G „ R in air
This sphere is at infinite distance from all the conductors. The Capacitance C =
4T E R exists between the surface of the sphere & earth . 7 Q It consists of tw
o concentric spherical shells as shown infigure.Here capacitance of region betwe
en the two shells is C and that outside the shell is C . We have 471 e ab C = an
d C = 471 e b b-a Depending on connection, it may have different combinations of
C, and -C .
t 2 n 2 Q 2
SPHERICAL CAPACITOR :
3.
PARALLEL PLATE CAPACITOR :
If two parallel plates each of area A & separated by a distance d are charged wi
th equal & opposite charge Q, then the system is called a parallel plate capacit
or & its capacitance is given by, ^ S)6 A C = — ; — .in a medium C= with air as medi
um
r
(i)
UNIFORM DI-ELECTRIC M E D I U M :
This result is only valid when the electricfieldbetween plates of capacitor is c
onstant,
(ii) M E D I U M PARTLY A I R : C =
U
d-lt-i
r
So A
When a di-electric slab of thickness t & relative permittivity e is l l l l intr
oduced between the plates of an air capacitor, then the distance between P3 the
plates is effectively reduced by irrespective ofthe position of BSSSSii® V ^rJ the
di-electric slab .
(iii) COMPOSITE M E D I U M :
c=
GA I I -rl r2
0
r3
4.
CYLINDRICAL CAPACITOR :
It consist oftwo co-axial cylinders ofradii a& b, the outer conductor is earthed
. The di-electric constant ofthe mediumfilledin the space between the cylinder i
s Farad e . The capacitance per unit length is C = 2ne-ne m in
r y r
(fe^Bansal Classes
CAPACITANCE
121
CONCEPT o r VARIATION OF PARAMETERS:
6.
e kA , ifeither ofk, A or d varies in the region between As capacitance ofa para
llel plate capacitor isC = the plates, we choose a small dc in between the plate
s and for total capacitance of system. dx -, If all dC's are in parallel C = } d
C If all dC's are in series 1 e k(x)A(x)
0 T J 0
COMBINATION (i)
OF
CAPACITORS SERIES :
:
In this arrangement all the capacitors when uncharged get the same charge Q but
the potential difference across each will differ (if the capacitance are unequal
). 1 — +1 1 1 —+ — + + 1 (ii)
CAPACITORS I N
rIMHh v, v, v,
Q Q Q
C| C2 C3
C
3
When one plate of each capacitor is connected to the positive terminal of the ba
ttery & the other plate of each capacitor is connected to the negative terminals
of the battery, then the capacitors are said to be in parallel connection. The
capacitors have the same potential difference, V but the charge on each one is d
ifferent (if the capacitors are unequal).
eq.
C
CAPACITORS I N
PARALLEL :
I
+
C
2
+ C
3
+
+c
s 1 jC3,y 1 Q + v
% 1Cj.V c,,v
%
ENERGY
Capacitance C, charge Q & potential difference V; then energy stored is 1 U = -1
CV = — QV = 1 Q . This energy is stored in the electrostatic field set up in the
di-electric - — medium between the conducting plates of the capacitor .
2 2
STORED IN A
CHARGED CAPACITOR
:
HEAT PRODUCED IN SWITCHING IN CAPACITIVE CIRCUIT
Due to charge flow always some amount of heat is produced when a switch is close
d in a circuit which can be obtained by energy conservation as Heat = Work done
by battery - Energy absorbed by capacitor.
9.
10
When two charged conductors of capacitance C & C at potential V & V respectively
are connected by a conducting wire, the charge flows from higher potential cond
uctor to lower potential conductor, until the potential of the two condensers be
comes equal. The common potential (V) after sharing of charges; C,V C V q + V =n
etnet charge _ C,j + q capacitance C C+C charges after sharing qj = C,'V & q = C
V. In this process energy is lost in the connecting wire C C (V,-V ) as heat. T
his loss of energy is U - U = ^ r ^ g
s 2 } 2
2 1+ 2 2
SHARING O F
CHARGES
:
2 2
t
2
2
2
2
2
initial
eal
<§Bansal Classes
(i) The energy of a charged conductor resides outside the conductor in its EF, w
here as in a condenser it is stored within the condenser in its EF. (ii) The ene
rgy of an uncharged condenser = 0 . (iii) The capacitance of a capacitor depends
only on its size & geometry & the di-electric between the conducting surface .(
i.e. independent ofthe conductor, like, whether it is copper, silver, gold etc)
REMEMBER :
CAPACITANCE
Q.i A solid conducting sphere ofradius 10 cm is enclosed by a thin metallic shel
l of radius 20 cm. A charge
Q.2
EXERCISE # I
Q.3 Q.4
q = 20pC is given to the inner sphere. Find the heat generated in the process, t
he inner sphere is connected to the shell by a conducting wire The capacitor eac
h having capacitance C = 2pF are connected with a .CO, battery of emf 30 V as sh
own infigure.When the switch S is closed. Find (a) the amount of chargeflownthro
ugh the battery (b) the heat generated in the circuit (c) the energy supplied by
the battery '30V (d) the amount of chargeflownthrough the switch S The plates o
f a parallel plate capacitor are given charges +4Q and -2Q. The capacitor is the
n connected across an uncharged capacitor of same capacitance asfirstone (= C).
Find thefinalpotential difference between the plates of thefirstcapacitor. +i, I
n the given network if potential difference between p and q is 2V and C = 3C The
nfindthe potential difference between a&b.
2 r
H M q
C, C.
c
Q.5 Find the equivalent capacitance of the circuit
between point A and B.
c
2C 11 11 - C 11 11 2C
4C 11 11 :: C 11 11 4C :
8C 111 ! r 11 II 8C
c
\ \ \ \ \
Infinite / section/
y-
Q.6 The two identical parallel plates are given charges as shown infigure.Ifthe
plate area of either face of each plate is A and separation between plates is d,
thenfindthe amount ofheat liberate after closing the switch. Q. 7 Find heat pro
duced in the circuit shown infigureon closing the switch S.
+3q +q
Q.8 In the following circuit, the resultant capacitance between A and B is 1 pF.
Find the value of C. Three capacitors of 2pF, 3pF and 5|iF are independently ch
arged with batteries of emf's 5V, 20V and 10V respectively. After disconnectingf
romthe voltage sources. These capacitors are connected as shown infigurewith the
ir positive polarity plates are connected to A and negative polarity is earthed.
Now a battery of 20V and an uncharged capacitor of4jaF capacitance are connecte
d to the junction A as shown with a switch S. When switch is closed,find: (a) th
e potential of the junction A. (b) final charges on all four capacitors. Q.9
T
T^
2
f
^Slr
2\xV
5NF
\
I —I I — ' 20V^ 4|I.— jF 4r
(fe^Bansal Classes
CAPACITANCE
121
Q.10 Find the charge on the capacitor C = 1 pF in the circuit shown in the figur
e. Iph IjxIK C-luF l(iF IpF pF :pnF yUlF::IMF : Q.ll Find the capacitance ofthe
system shown in figure. Q.12 Thefigureshows a circuit consisting offour capacito
rs. Find the effective capacitance between X and Y. Q. 13 Five identical capacit
or plates, each of area A, are arranged such that adjacent plates are at a dista
nce'd* apart, the plates are connected to a source of emf V as shown infigure.Th
e charge on plate 1 is and that on plate 4 is . Q.14 In the circuit shown in the
figure,intially SW is open. When the switch is closed, the charge passing throug
h the switch in the direction to Q.15 In the circuit shown infigure,findthe amou
nt ofheat generated when switch s is closed. Q.16 Two parallel plate capacitors
ofcapacitance C and 2C are connected in parallel then following steps are perfor
med. (i) Abattery of voltage V is connected across points A and B. (ii) A dielec
tric slab of relative permittivity k is slowly inserted in capacitor C. (iii) Ba
ttery is disconnected. (iv) Dielectric slab is slowly removed from capacitor. Fi
nd the heat produced in (i) and work done by external agent in step (ii) & (iv).
Q.17 The plates of a parallel plate capacitor are separated by a distance d = 1
cm. Two parallel sided dielectric slabs ofthickness 0.7 cm and 0.3 cmfillthe sp
ace between the plates. Ifthe dielectric constants ofthe two slabs are 3 and 5 r
espectively and a potential difference of440V is applied across the plates. Find
: (i) the electricfieldintensities in each ofthe slab s. (ii) the ratio of elect
ric energies stored in thefirstto that in the second dielectric slab. Q.18 A 10
pF and 20 pF capacitor are connected to a 10 V cell in parallel for some time af
ter which the capacitors are disconnectedfromthe cell and reconnected at t = 0 w
ith each other, in series, through wires offinite resistance. The +ve plate of t
hefirstcapacitor is connected to the -ve plate ofthe second capacitor. Draw the
graph which best describes the charge on the +ve plate ofthe 20 pF capacitor wit
h increasing time. List of recommended questions from LE. Irodov. 3.101, 3.102,
3.103, 3.113, 3.117, 3.121, 3.122, 3.123,3.124, 3.132,3.133, 3.141,3.142, 3.177,
3.184, 3.188. 3.199. 3.200,3.201. 3.203, 3.204. 3.205 121
AE60 V SW
7
k= 1 k=2 k=3 k=4
V- + 2 nF1
3
X 60 V
I
J
(fe^Bansal Classes
CAPACITANCE
EXERCISE # II
Q. 1 (a) For the given circuit. Find the potential difference across all the cap
acitors, (b) How should 5 capacitors, each of capacities, lpF be connected so as
to produce a total capacitance of 3/7 pF. Q.2
6oF,
Ih-H^f — I 8(xF —h '
9|iF
+. 25V
The gap between the plates of a plane capacitor isfilledwith an isotropic insula
tor whose di-electric constant varies in the direction perpendicular to the plat
es according to the law K = K j 1 + sin 71 X — L d where d is the separation, betw
een the plates & K is a constant. The area of the plates is S. Determine the cap
acitance of the capacitor.
t
Q.3
(i) (ii) Q.4 (j) (ii) (iii) Q.5
Five identical conducting plates 1,2,3,4 & 5 arefixedparallel to and equdistantf
romeach other (seefigure).Plates 2 & 5 are connected by a conductor while 1 & 3
are joined by another conductor. The junction of 1 & 3 and the plate 4 are conne
cted to a source of constant e.m.f. V . Find; the effective capacity of the syst
em between the terminals ofthe source. the charges on plates 3 & 5. Given d = di
stance between any 2 successive plates & A= area of either face of each plate .
5 0
Apotential difference of300 Vis applied between the plates of a plane capacitor
spaced 1 cm apart. A plane parallel glass plate with a thickness of 0.5 cm and a
plane parallel paraffin plate with a thickness of 0.5 cm are placed in the spac
e between the capacitor platesfind: Intensity of electricfieldin each layer. The
drop ofpotential in each layer. The surface charge density of the charge on cap
acitor the plates. Given that: k = 6, k =2
glass paraffin
A charge 200pC is imparted to each of the two identical parallel plate capacitor
s connected in parallel. At t =0, the plates of both the capacitors are 0.1 m ap
art. The plates of first capacitor move towards each other with relative velocit
y 0.001 m/s and plates of second capacitor move apart with the same velocity. Fi
nd the current in the circuit at the moment. A parallel plate capacitor has plat
es with area A & separation d . A battery charges the plates to a potential diff
erence ofV . The battery is then disconnected & a di-electric slab of constant K
& thickness d is introduced. Calculate the positive work done by the system (cap
acitor + slab) on the man who introduces the slab.
0
Q.6
Q.7
A capacitor of capacitance C is charged to a potential V and then isolated. A sm
all capacitor C is then chargedfromC , discharged & charged again, the process b
eing repeated n times. The potential ofthe large capacitor has now fallen to V.
Find the capacitance of the small capacitor. If V = 100 volt, V=35volt, find the
value ofn for C = 0.2 pF & C = 0.01075 pF . Is it possible to remove charge on
C this way?
0 0 0 0 0 0
Q. 8
When the switch S in thefigureis thrown to the left, the plates of capacitors C,
acquire a potential difference V. Initially the capacitors C C are uncharged. T
hw switchis now thrown to the right. What are thefinalcharges q q & q on the cor
responding capacitors.
2 3 p 2 3
.V
TLPI
Ic T
(fe^Bansal Classes
CAPACITANCE
121
Q.9
(1) (ii) (lii)
A parallel plate capacitor with air as a dielectric is arranged horizontally. Th
e lower plate isfixedand the other connected with a vertical spring. The area of
each plate is A. In the steady position, the distance between the plates is d .
When the capacitor is connected with an electric source with the voltage V, a n
ew equilibrium appears, with the distance between the plates as d Mass of the up
per plates is m. Find the spring constant K. What is the maximum voltage for a g
iven K in which an equilibrium is possible ? What is the angularfrequencyofthe o
scillating system around the equilibrium value dj. (take amplitude of oscillatio
n « d )
0 r {
Q.10 An insolated conductor initiallyfreefromcharge is charged by repeated conta
cts with a plate which after each contact has a charge Q due to some mechanism.
If q is the charge on the conductor after the first
Qq operation, prove that the maximum charge which can be given to the conductor
in this way is ~
Q.ll A parallel plate capacitor is filled by a di-electric whose relative permit
tivity varies with the applied voltage according to the law = aV, where a = 1 pe
r volt. The same (but containing no di-electric) capacitor charged to a voltage
V = 156 volt is connected in parallel to thefirst"non-linear" uncharged capacito
r. Determine thefinalvoltage V across the capacitors.
f
Q.12 A capacitor consists oftwo air spaced concentric cylinders. The outer ofrad
ius b isfixed,and the inner is of radius a If breakdown ofair occurs atfieldstre
ngths greater than E^, show that the inner cylinder should have (i) radius a = b
/e ifthe potential of the inner cylinder is to be maximum (ii) radius a = b/Ve i
f the energy per unit length of the system is to be maximum.
,.JT
5V-r-
46F =n
5V :d=6nf
Q. 13 Find the charge flown through the switchfromAto B when it is closed. Q.14
Figure shows three concentric conducting spherical shells with inner and outer s
hells earthed and the middle shell is given a charge q. Find the electrostatic e
nergy of the system stored in the region I and II.
6mF
Jr~
Q.15 The capacitors shown infigurehas been charged to a potential difference of
V volts, so that it carries a charge CV with both the switches Sj and S remainin
g open. Switch Sj is closed at t=0. At t=R,C switch Sj is opened and S is closed
. Find the charge on the capacitor at t=2RjC + R^C.
2 2
s, Hi
s,
Q.16 In the figure shown initially switch is open for a long time. Now the switc
h is closed at t = 0. Find the charge on the rightmost capacitor as "yv a functi
on oftime given that it was intially unchanged.
(fe^Bansal Classes
CAPACITANCE
121
Q.17 In the given circuit, the switch is closed in the position 1 at t = 0 and t
hen moved , I V to 2 after 250 p,s. Derive an expression for current as a functi
on oftime for Jôv [ t > 0. Also plot the variation of current with time. I X40V
VL Q.18 Find the charge which flowsfrompoint Ato B, when switch is closed. 5(IF
5NF 5^F 5(.IF 5(IF
2
:500FJ :0.5 NF
EXERCISE # III
2 2
120V
Q. 1 Two parallel plate capacitors A&B have the same separation d=8.85 x lO^m be
tween the plates. The plate areas of A & B are 0.04 m & 0.02 m A B respectively.
A slab of di-electric constant (relative permittivity) K=9 has dimensions such
that it can exacdy 10V fill the space between the plates ofcapacitor B. (i) the
di-electric slab is placed inside A as shown in thefigure(i) Ais then charged to
a potential difference of 110 volt. Calculate the capacitance ofA and the energ
y stored in it. (ii) the battery is disconnected & then the di-electric slab is
removedfromA. Find the work done by the external agency in removing the slabfrom
A. (iii) the same di-electric slab is now placed inside B,fillingit completely.
The two capacitors A& B are then connected as shown in figure (iii). Calculate t
he energy stored in the system. [ JEE '93,7] Q.2 Two square metallic plates of 1
m side are kept 0.01 m apart, like a parallel plate capacitor, in air in such a
way that one oftheir edges is perpendicular, to an oil surface in a tankfilledw
ith an insulating oil. The plates are connected to a battery of e.m.f. 500 volt.
The plates are then lowered vertically into the oil at a speed of 0.001 m/s. Ca
lculate the current drawn from the battery during the process, [di-electric cons
tant of oil = 11, e = 8.85 x 10" C /N m ] [ JEE '94, 6 ] Q.3 A parallel plate ca
pacitor C is connected to a battery & is charged to a potential difference V. An
other capacitor of capacitance 2C is similarly charged to a potential difference
2V volt. The charging batteiy is now disconnected & the capacitors are connecte
d in parallel to each other in such a way that the positive terminal of one is c
onnected to the negative terminal of other. Thefinalenergy ofthe configuration i
s: 25 (B) - CV (D) - CV [JEE'95, 1 ] (A) zero (C) — CV
0 12 2 2 2 2
2
2
Q.4
The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with plate area 'A' & separation d
is C. The space between the plates isfilledwith two wedges of di-electric const
ant Kj & K respectively. Find the capacitance ofthe resulting capacitor. [JEE'96
, 2]
2
Q.5
©
(fe^Bansal Classes
Two capacitors A and B with capacities 3 pF and 2 pF are charged to a potential
difference of 100 V and 180 V respectively. The plates of the capacitors are con
nected as shown in figure with one wire from each 2nF capacitorfree.The upper pl
ate of a is positive and that of B is negative, an 1-. uncharged 2 pF capacitor
C with lead wires falls on thefreeends to complete IOOV B 180V the circuit. Calc
ulate: thefinalcharges on the three capacitors The amount of electrostatic energ
y stored in the system before and after the completion ofthe circuit. [JEE'97 (c
ancelled)]
CAPACITANCE
121
Q.6
An electron enters the region between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor a
t a point equidistant from eitherplate. The capacitor plates are 2* 10 mapart& 1
0 m long. A potential difference of300 volt is kept across the plates. Assuming
that the initial velocity of the electron is parallel to the capacitor plates, c
alculate the largest value ofthe velocity ofthe electron so that they do notflyo
ut ofthe capacitor at the other end. [ JEE '97, 5 ]
_2 -1
Q. 7
For the circuit shown, which ofthe following statements is true ? (A) with S, cl
osed, Vj = 15 V, V = 20 V (B) with S closed, Vj = V = 25 V (C) with & S closed,
Vj = V = 0 (D) with Sj & S closed, V = 30 V, V = 20 V
2 3 2 2 2 2 l 2
V, =30V
[JEE'99, 2]
Q.8
Calculate the capacitance of a parallel plate condenser, with plate area A and d
istance between plates d, whenfilledwith a medium whose permittivity varies as;
0<x< | e (x)= e + P x [REE2000, 6] 4 < x < d. S(X)=G + P (d-x)
0
0
Q. 9
Two identical capacitors, have the same capacitance C. One of them is charged to
potential V and the other to V . The negative ends ofthe capacitors are connect
ed together. When the positive ends are also connected, the decrease in energy o
f the combined system is [ JEE 2002 (Scr), 3 ]
t 2
(A) Mvf-vl)
(B)Mv,2+v22)
(qIc^-vJ
0 0
(D^cfa+vJ 1—m— s/ + c^ " v T
Q.10 In the given circuit, the switch S is closed at time t = 0. The charge Q on
the capacitor at any instant t is given by Q (t) = Q (l-e" *). Find the value o
f Q and a in terms of given parameters shown in the circuit. [JEE 2005]
0
Q.ll Given: Rj = ID , R2 = 2Q, Cx = 2pF, C = 4pF The time constants (in pS) for
the circuits I, n, HI are respectively .C, !!—i— R,: K "C2 hi r . - T T-r. k v ,vV '
h-—
2
(A) 18, 8/9, 4 (C) 4, 8/9, 18
(II.)
(B) 18, 4, 8/9 (D) 8/9, 18,4
(in)
[JEE 2006]
(fe^Bansal Classes
CAPACITANCE
121
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE # I
Q.l Q.3 Q.7 Q.9
9J 3Q/2C 0
100
Q.2 Q.4 Q.8
(a) 20 pC, (b) 0.3 mJ, (c) 0.6 mJ. (d) 60 [iC 30 V 32 -MF Q.5 C
Q-6
1 qd iZT
2
(a) — volts; (b) 28.56 |iC, 42.84 pC, 71.4 jnC, 22.88 pC Q.10 10 pC 2A e V 25 e„A Q.
13 A G V Q.14 60 (ic,AtoB Q.ll 24 d Q.12 ^ F
0 0
Q.15 150 mJ
4
Q.16 (i) | C V ; (ii) - ~ CV2(K- 1); ^ (K + 2) (K - l ^ V ;
2 2
q(nC), Q. 17 (i) 5 X 10 V/m, 3 x 10 V/m; (ii) 3 5/9
4
Q.18
200
EXERCISE # II
HHI Q.l (a) 12 V, 9 V, 3 V, 13 V, 16 V, (b)
GSTIK,
m
T TT
,Q5 = t
7 2
Q.2 C = 2d Q.5
2[iA
5 fe A^ Q.3 (i) 3 v " y ;(ii)Q3=T
0 4 4
IAV„
,AV
Q.4 (i) 1.5 x 10 V/m, 4.5 x 10 V/m, (ii) 75 V, 225 V, (iii) 8 x 10" C/m Q.6 W =
\ C V
0 0 2
q.8 q i -
Ci2V(C2+C3) CiC +C C +Cj c
2 2 3 2 0 0
3
c c +c c +c c
1 2 2 3 3
K CCCV
1 2 3
1-
Q.7 C = C
1
f\v T
n
V V
o \ -1 = 0.01078 |iF,n = 20
1 / n
SpAV 2d (d -d!)'v As ^3
2
\3/2
Kdf-e AV
0
2
1/2
MDJ
Q.ll 12 volt
r 2
Q.13 69 mC
Q.14
U,
3kg, lOr
2
where
q, = ~
; Uu
O CV = 2K(q + ) / 3 5 r Q.15 q = CE 1 — +
qi
v
e
y
Q.16 q
CV 1-—e~t/RC
2
(fe^Bansal Classes
CAPACITANCE
121
I(ajnp)
Q.17 For t < 250 ps, I = 0.04 e^° amp ; For t > 250 ps, I = - 0.1 i -4000(t-250)xi
(r
00t e
0.04 0.015 -o.n
6
a m p ;
•t(xIO^s)
Q.18
400 ^ - — P €
EXERCISE # III
Q.l Q.2
Q.5
(i) 0.2 x 10"
9
8
F,
1.2 x lO" J ; (ii) 4.84 x 10" J ; (iii) 1.1 x 10"
5 5
5
J
4.425 x 10~ Ampere
QA = 90
Q.3
B
q.4
F
C K ^ /n K, (Ka-KO K,
= 18 MJ
pC,
Q B = 150
pC, Q
C
= 210
pC, UJ = 4 7 . 4 MJ, U D Q= 0 CVR,
Q
'
6
2^9A
V48 C
&
Q.7
Q.10
Q.8
Ri+R2
^ 2 e0
2 s0
Q.9
R1+R2 anda=
Q.ll
XII (ALL)
quesjjommm.
<M
QUESTION FOR SHORT
ANSWER
Q.l The electric strength of air is about 30,000 V/cm. By this we mean that when
the electricfieldintensity
Q.2 Q.3
Q.4
exceeds this value, a spark will jump through the air. We say that "electric bre
akdown" has occurred. Using this value, estimate the potential difference betwee
n two objects where a spark jumps. Atypical situation might be the spark that ju
mps between your body and a metal door handle after you have walked on a deep ca
rpet or slid across a plastic car seat in very dry weather. Ifyou grasp the two
wires leadingfromthe two plates of a charged capacitor, you may feel a shock. Th
e effect is much greater for a 2-pF capacitor than for a 0.02p,F capacitor, even
though both are are charged to the same potential difference. Why? <T(+) a(-) T
hree infinite nonconducting sheets, with uniform surface charge densities a, 2a
and 3ct are arranged to be parallel like the two sheets in Fig. What is their or
der,fromleft to right, if the electricfieldE produced by the arrangement has mag
nitude E = 0 in one region and E = 2a/e in another region? As shown in the figur
e plots of charge versus potential difference for three parallel plate capacitor
s, which have the plate areas and separations given in the table. Which of the p
lots goes with which ofthe capacitors?
0
Capacitor 1 2 3 Q.5
Area Separation A d 2A d A 2d
t 2 1 t
Q.6
Initially, a single capacitance C is wired to a battery. Then capacitance C is a
dded in parallel. Are (a) the potential difference across C and (b) the charge q
j on C now more than, less than, or the same as previously? (c) Is the equivalen
t capacitance C of Cj and C more than, less than, or equal to Cj? (d) Is the tot
al charge stored on C^ and C , together more than, less than, or equal to the ch
arge stored previously on Cj? As shown in thefigurethree circuits, each consisti
ng of a switch and two capacitors, initially charged as 6q_ indicated. After the
switches have been closed, in which 6q_ _ Jq 6q__ C 3C 2C 2C circuit (ifany) wi
ll the charge on the left-hand capacitor 2 C (a) increase, (b) decrease and (c)
remain the same?
12 2 == :=
(fe Bansal Classes
Cap-monster maze. Inthe Figure all the capacitors have a capacitance -- I I h f¥T
of 6.0 pF, and all the b atteries have an emf of 10V What is the charge | J_ J ^
on capacitor C? (Ifyou canfindthe proper loop through this maze, you T ~ , 4 ,
4 4 T , , = I can answer the question with a few seconds of mental calculation.)
-r I c 1 H H Q8 An oilfilledcapacitor has been designed to have a capacitance C
and to operate safely at or below a certain maximum potential difference V with
out arcing over. However, the designer did not do a good job and the capacitor o
ccasionally arcs over. What can be done to redesign the capacitor, keeping C and
V unchanged and using the same dielectric? Q.9 One of the plates of a capacitor
connected to battery is earthed. Will the potential diffrence between the plate
s change if the earthing wire is removed?
m m
Q.7
Question Bank on Capacitance
[13]
ONLY ONE OPTION IS CORRECT. Take approx. 2 minutes for answering each question.
Cond.
Diele.
Q. 1 The distance between plates of a parallel plate capacitor is 5d. Let the po
sitively charged plate is at x=0 and negatively charged plate is at 1 * x=5d. Tw
o slabs one of conductor and other of a dielectric of equal thickness d are inse
rted between the plates as shown in figure. Potential versus distance graph will
look like: v A) Q.2 w v
(B) (C)
x=0 x=d x=2d x=3d x=4d x=5d VI
(D)
A parallel plate capacitor has two layers of dielectric as shown in figure. This
capacitor is connected across a battery. The graph which shows the variation of
electricfield(E) and distance (x)fromleft plate. y y y
(A)
k=2 k=4
(d,0) (3d,0)
(D)
(d,0) (3d,0) "
1
(B)
(d,0) (3d,0) "
(C)
(d,0) (3d,0)~
(d,0) (3d,0)
Q.3
The distance between the plates of a charged parallel plate capacitor is 5 cm an
d electricfieldinside the plates is 200 Vcnr . An uncharged metal bar of width 2
cm is fully immersed into the capacitor. The length of the metal bar is same as
that of plate of capacitor. The voltage across capacitor after the immersion of
the bar is (A) zero (B)400V (C)600V (D)100V Three large plates are arranged as s
hown. How much charge will flow through the key k if it is closed? 5Q 4Q 3Q (D)
none (A) (C) ( B ) F
2Q
Q.4
2d
L Q.5
1
E
Five conducting parallel plates having area Aand separation between them d, are
placed as shown in the figure. Plate number 2 and 4 are connected wire and betwe
en point A and B, a cell of emfE is connected. The charge flown through the cell
is u 3 e AE 2 s AE 4s AE e AE (A) (C) (D) (B) 4 d 3 d 2d
0 0 0 0 5
Q.6 ->
If charge on left plane of the 5 pF capacitor in the circuit segment shown in th
e figure is -20pC, the charge on the right plate of 3 pF capacitor is (A) +8.57
pC (B) -8.57 pC (C)+11.42pC (D)-11.42pC Five identical capacitor plates are arra
nged such that they make capacitors each of Q.7 2 pF. The plates are connected t
o a source of emf 10 V. The charge on plate C is (B) + 40 pC (C) + 60 pC (D) + 8
0pC u (A) + 20 pC
|3nF UjiF
w
|ffH
2(iF
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
Q.8 A capacitor of capacitance C is charged to a potential difference V from a c
ell and then disconnected
L
+
from it. Acharge +Q is now given to its positive plate. The potential difference
across the capacitor is now (C)v Q f (D) V - ^ , if V < CV (B) V + (A) V of cap
acity 5 pf is (A) 60 pC (C) 30 pC
M^lfP^lf.
100 V
Q.9 In the circuit shown infigurecharge stored in the capacitor
(B) 20 pC (D) zero
2 3
Q.10 A conducting body 1 has some initial charge Q, and its capacitance is C. Th
ere are two other conducting bodies, 2 and 3, having capacitances : C = 2C and C
-» Q . Bodies 2 and 3 are initially uncharged. O "Body 2 is touched with body 1.
Then, body 2 is removed from body 1 and touched with body 3, and then removed."
This process is repeated N times. Then, the charge on body 1 at the end must be
(A) Q / 3 (B) Q / 3 (C)Q/N (D) None
N N _ 1 3
Q.ll Condenser A has a capacity of 15 pF when it isfilledwith a medium of dielec
tric constant 15. Another condenser B has a capacity 1 pF with air between the p
lates. Both are charged separately by a battery C of 100V. After charging, both
are connected in parallel without the battery and the dielectric material being
removed. The common potential now is
(A) 4 0 0 V (B) 800V (C) 1200V (D) 1600V
Q.12 In the adjoiningfigure,capacitor (1) and (2) have a capacitance C' each. Wh
en the dielectric of dielectric consatnt K is inserted between the plates of one
ofthe capacitor, the total charge flowing through battery is ,c KCE KCE h from
B to C from C to B (B) K + l t (A) K + l (K-l)CE (K-l)CE (C) ^ FROM B to C (D) f
rom C to B
A
+
2 ( K + 1)
-WUr Q. 13 Two identical capacitors 1 and 2 are connected in series toabatteryas
shown in 1 figure. Capacitor 2 contains a dielectric slab of dielectric constan
t k as shown. Q and Q are the charges stored in the capacitors. Now the dielectr
ic slab is removed and the corresponding charges are Q' j and Q' . Then H^ Q^_k
+1 k q; = k+i 2 (A) (B) Q _ k + l ( C ) Q ~ 2k (D) 01 2 Qi k Qi
t 2 2 2
Q. 14 The area ofthe plates of a parallel plate capacitor is A and the gap betwe
en them is d. The gap is filled with a non-homogeneous dielectric whose dielectr
ic constant varies with the distance 'y'fromone plate • as : K = ^sec(7ty/2d), whe
re X is a dimensionless constant. The capacitance ofthis capacitor is (A) 7ie ^
A/2d (B)7rs XA/d (C) 27te k A/d (D)none
0 0 0
Q.15 A capacitor stores 60pC charge when connected across a battery. When the ga
p between the plates is filled with a dielectric, a charge of 120pC flows throug
h the battery. The dielectric constant of the material inserted is: i (A) 1 (B)
2 . (C) 3 (D) none
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
Q.16 In the above question, if the initial capacitance ofthe capacitor was 2pF,
the amount of heat produced when the dielectric is inserted. £ • (A) 3600pJ (B) 2700
pJ (C) 1800pJ (D)none Q.17 A capacitor of capacitance C is initially charged to
a potential difference of V volt. Now it is connected •j to a battery of 2V with o
pposite polarity. The ratio of heat generated to the final energy stored in the
capacitor will be (A) 1.75 (B) 2.25 (C) 2.5 (D) 1/2
AQ.18 Three plates A B and C each of area 0.1 m are separated by 0.885 Bmmfromea
ch other as shown in the figure. A10 V battery is used to Ccharge the system. Th
e energy stored in the system is (A)lpJ (B) 10 pj (C) 10' pJ (D) 10" pJ
2 _1 2 3
hH 10V
Q.19 A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is connected to a battery and i
s charged to a potential difference V. Another capacitor of capacitance 2C is si
milarly charged to a potential difference 2V. The charging battery is now discon
nected and the capacitors are connect in parallel to each other in such a way th
at the positive terminal of one is connected to the negative terminal of the oth
er. Thefinalenergy I ofthe configuration is 2 „ 5 (A)zero (D)-CV ( B ) - CV (C)yCV
2 2 2
Q.20 A 2 pF capacitor is charged to a potential = 10V. Another 4 pF capacitor is
charged to a potential = 20V. The two capacitors are then connected in a single
loop, with the positive plate of one ; connected with negative plate of the oth
er. What heat is evolvecl in the circuit? (A) 300 pj (B) 600 pJ (C) 900 pj (D)45
0pJ Q.21 The plates S and T of an uncharged parallel plate capacitor are connect
ed across a battery. The battery is then disconnected and the charged plates are
now connected in a system as shown in thefigure.The system shown is in equilibr
ium. All the strings are insulating and massless. The magnitude of charge on one
ofthe capacitor plates is: [Area ofplates=A] -^svtvw 4mgA (A) pmgA (B) 77777777
7777777777ininiii (C)VmgA
(D)
2mgA e
m
0
Q.22 In the circuit shown, the energy stored in 1 pF capacitor is (A) 40 pJ (B)
64 pJ (D)none (C) 32 pJ
3nF
I^ HF
Q.23 Four metallic plates arearranged as shown in thefigure.Ifthe distance betwe
en each plate then capacitance of the given system between points A and B is (Gi
ven d « A) 2s A I - , _ S pA sA / , I (A) d (B) 3s A 4s o A (C) d (D)
n 0n 1 0
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
£
Q.24 What is the equivalent capacitance of the system of capacitors between A &
B
W~6c
.A
2.
B Q.25 From a supply ofidentical capacitors rated 8 pF, 250 V, the minimum numbe
r of capacitors required to form a composite 16 pF, 1000 Vis : (A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 1
6 (D) 32 cP
(B) 1.6 C
(C)C
(D) None
£.
Q.26 The minimum number ofcapacitors each of3 pF required to make a circuit with
an equivalent capacitance 2.25 pF is (A) 3 (B)4 (C)5 (D)6
0
Q.29 A capacitor of capacitance 1 pF withstands the maximum voltage 6 kV while a
capacitor of 2 pF withstands the maximum voltage 4 kV. What maximum voltage wil
l the system of these two capacitor withstands if they are connected in series? £
(A) lOkV (B)12kV (C) 8 kV (D)9kV Q.30 Four identical plates 1,2,3 and 4 are plac
ed parallel to each other at equal distance as shown in the figure. Plates 1 and
4 are joined together and the space between 2 and 3 is filled with a dielectric
of dielectric constant k = 2. The capacitance of the system between 1 and 3 & 2
and 4 are Cj and C2 C, respectively. The ratio — is : C-2 3 (B)l (A)-: (D) 5
( C )
£
Q.27 The capacitance (C) for an isolated conducting sphere of radius (a) is give
n by 47ts a. Ifthe sphere is enclosed with an earthed concentric sphere. The rat
io ofthe radii of the spheres being n then the (n-1) Icapacitance of such a sphe
re will be increased by a factor n (n-1) (A)n (D) a. n (B) (n-1) (C) n -' Q.28 T
wo capacitor having capacitances 8 pF and 16 pF have breaking voltages 20 V and
80 V. They are combined in series. The maximum charge they can store individuall
y in the combination is (A) 160 pC (B) 200 p,C (C) 1280 p,C (D) none ofthese
y
Q.31
#
In the circuit shown infigure,the ratio ofcharges on 5pF and 4pF capacitor is: (
A) 4/5 (B)3/5 (C) 3/8 (D) 1/2
3jiF
•JL— 5(iF
4nF
6V
Q.32 In the circuit shown, a potential difference of 60V is applied across AB. T
he potential difference between the point M and N is (A) 10 V (B) 15V (C) 20 V (
D) 30 V
60V
B I
Li
r - Cr ^ h r
2d
H
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
v
15 (B) y p F (D)none Q, 3 4 A capacitor ofcapacitance 1 pF with stands the maxim
um voltages 6 KV while a capacitor of capacitance 2.0 pF with stands the maximum
voltage = 4KV. if the two capacitors are connected in series, then the ~t. two
capacitors combined can take up a maximum voltage of V (A) 2.4 KV (B) 5 KV (C) 9
KV (D) 10 KV
t
Q. 3 3 Find the equivalent capacitance across A& B (A) y pf (C) 15 pF
28
23NF 7(iF —'h —1 IpF B !3pF A 12pF L—IK —1 1— UiF lOtlF
Q. 3 5 The diagram shows four capacitors with capacitances and break down voltag
es as mentioned. What should be the maximum value of the external emf source suc
h that no capacitor breaks down?[Hint: First of allfindout the break down voltag
es of each branch. After that compare them. ] (A)2.5kV (B)10/3kV (C)3kV (D) 1 kV
3C;lkV —H
2C;2kV H
7C;lkV
3C;2kV
Q.36 Three capacitors 2 pF, 3 pF and 5 pF can withstand voltages to 3V, 2V and I
V respectively. Their series combination can withstand a maximum voltage equal t
o (A) 5 Volts (B) (31/6) Volts (C) (26/5) Volts (D)None Q.37 Find equivalent cap
acitance across AB (all capacitances in pF) (A) 20p F y (B) 9pF (C) 48 pF (D) No
ne
B
Q. 3 8 Three long concentric conducting cylindrical shells have radii R, 2R and
2^2 R. Inner and outer shells are connected to each other. The capacitance acros
s middle and inner shells per unit length is: (D) None (C) 2/n2 /2 n Q.39 A char
ged capacitor is allowed to discharge through a resistance 2Q by closing the swi
tch S at the instant t = 0. At time t = In 2 ps, the reading of the ammeter fall
s halfof its initial value. The resistance ofthe ammeter equal to (A) 0 (B)2Q (C
)°o (D) 2MQ Q. 40 A capacitor C = 100 pF is connected to three resistor each of re
sistance 1 kf2 and a battery of emf 9V. The switch S has been closed for long ti
me so as to charge the capacitor. When switch S is opened, the capacitor dischar
ges with time constant (A) 33 ms (B) 5 ms (C) 3.3 ms (D) 50 ms (A)
(B) In 2
a
I
6^0
0.5 |JF
Hh IkSl ikn
rH^n Q. 41 A capacitor C = 100 pF is connected to three resistors each of resist
ance 1 kW and AW ikn A battery of emf 9V. The switch S has been closed for long
time so as to charge the pvWv— ikn ^ t { capacitor. When switch S is opened, the c
apacitor discharges with time constant. LAWvH S ^ O \ \ (A) 33 ms (B) 5 ms (C) 3
.3 ms (D) 50 ms ikn
t
* ' r/r
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
Q. 42 In the transient shown the time constant of the circuit is:
V
(A)~RC
(B)-RC (D)|RC
2 2 2
Q.43 In the circuit shown in figure C,=2C . Switch S is closed at time t=0. Let
ij and i be the currents flowing through Cj and C at any time t, then the ratio
i ^ (A) is constant (B) increases with increase in time t (C) decreases with inc
rease in time t (D)firstincreases then decreases Q.44 Find heat produced in the
capacitors on closing the switch S 20V 0.0002 (B) 0.0005 J £ (A) 0.00075J (D) zero
L \ (C)
—If c I I I I c
VWWv R
Q.45 In the circuit shown, when the key k is pressed at time t = 0, which of the
following statements about current I in the resistor AB is true K r| I ÎOOOSI
IT —^V — V— (A) I = 2mA at all t 2V .1000Q (B) I oscillates between 1 mA and 2mA (C) 1
= 1 mA at all t i (D) At t = 0,1 = 2mA and with time it goes to 1 mA Q.46 In the
R-C circuit shown in thefigurethe total energy of 3.6 *10~ J is dissipated in t
he 10 Q resistor when the switch S is closed. The initial charge on the capacito
r is 60 ' !0Q (A) 60 pC (B) 120 pC (C) 60 ^ pC (D) ^ pC
3
c
C = 0.5(JF Q. 47 A charged capacitor is allowed to discharge through a resistor
by closing the key at the instant t =0. At the instant t = (In 4) ps, the readin
g ofthe.ammeter yijc falls halfthe initial value. The resistance of the ammeter
is equal to (A) 1 MO (B) ID (C)2H (D) 2MQ Hg)- - W2W — Q
Q.48 In the circuit shown, the cell is ideal, with emf= 15 V. Each resistance is
of 3Q. The potential difference across the capacitor is (A) zero (B)9V <y (C) 1
2 V (D) 15 V
10nF 4|iF 6uF +i
In the circuit shown infigure,four capacitors are connected to a battery. Q.49 T
he equivalent capacitance ofthe circuit is (A) 25 pF (B) 6 pF (C) 8.4 pF
Question No. 49 to 52 (4 questions)
5HFV
(D)none
TOY
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
Q. 5 0 The charge on the 5 pF capacitor is > (A) 60 pC (B) 24 pC
(C) 12 pC
(D)20pC (D)none (D)4pF
Q. 51 The potential difference aero ss the 6 pF capacitor is (A) 6V (B)4V (C)5V
Q. 5 2 The maximum energy is stored in the capacitor of - (A)10pF (B) 6 uF (C) 5
pF
5
Q, 5 3 A parallel plate capacitor has an electricfieldof 10 V/m between the plat
es. Ifthe charge on the capacitor plate is 1 pC, then the force on each capacito
r plate is (A)O.lNt (B) 0.05Nt (C) 0.02Nt (D)0.01Nt Q. 54 A capacitor is connect
ed to a battery. The force of attraction between the plates when the separation
between them is halved (A) remains the same (B) becomes eight times (C) becomes
four times (D) becomes two times
ONE OR MORE THAN ONE OPTION MAY BE CORRECT Take approx. 3 minutes for answering
each question.
Q. 1 A parallel plate capacitor A isfilledwith a dielectric whose dielectric con
stant varies with applied voltage as K=V. An identical capacitor B of capacitanc
e C with air as dielectric is connected to voltage source V = 3 0V and then conn
ected to thefirstcapacitor after disconnecting the voltage source. The charge an
d voltage on capacitor. (A) A are 25C and 25 V (B) A are 25C and 5 V (C) B are 5
c and 5V (D) B are 5C and 25 V
0 0 0 0 0 0
Q.2
Q.3
Two capacitors of 2 pF and 3 pF are charged to 150 volt and I.5HF 120 volt respe
ctively. The plates of capacitor are connected as '' ° shown in thefigure.A discha
rged capacitor ofcapacity 1.5 pF falls to the free ends ofthe wire. Then 150V 2n
F 3|^F 120V (A) charge on the 1.5 pF capacitors is 180 pC \ ^J (B) charge on the
2pF capacitor is 120 pC (C) chargeflowsthrough Afromrightto left. (D) chargeflo
wsthrough Afrom left to right. In the circuit shown, each capacitor has a capaci
tance C. TheemfofthecellisE. Ifthe switch S is closed
0 A
(C) the amount of chargeflowingthrough the cell will be CE. (D) the amount of ch
argeflowingthrough the cell will be 4/3 CE. Q.4 In the circuit shown initially C
,, C are uncharged. After closing the switch (A) The charge on C is greater that
onC (B) The charge on Cj and C are the same (C) The potential drops across C, a
nd C are the same (D) The potential drops across C is greater than that across C
,
2 2 1 2 2 2
. £a T
I —SLIP JC=8
——11 12V =J= c,=4nF
6V
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
Q.5
A parallel plate air-core capacitor is connected across a source of constant pot
ential difference. When a dielectric plate is introduced between the two plates
then: (A) some charge from the capacitor willflowback into the source. (B) some
extra charge from the source willflowback into the capacitor. (C) the electricfi
eldintensity between the two plate does not change. (D) the electricfieldintensi
ty between the two plates will decrease. A parallel plate capacitor has a parall
el sheet of copper inserted between and parallel to the two plates, without touc
hing the plates. The capacity ofthe capacitor after the introduction ofthe coppe
r sheet is: (A) minimum when the copper sheet touches one of the plates. (B) max
imum when the copper sheet touches one of the plates. (C) invariant for all posi
tions of the sheet between the plates. (D) greater than that before introducing
the sheet. In the circuit shown in the figure, the switch S is initially open an
d the . 2Q r—wij capacitor is initially uncharged. Ij, \ and I represent the curre
nt in the 812*6VTT resistance 2Q, 4fl and 8Q respectively. (A) Just after the sw
itch S is closed, Ij = 3 A I2 ^ A and I = 0 (B) Just after the switch S is close
d, I, = 3 A, I = 0 and I = 0 (C) long time after the switch S is closed, Ij = 0.
6 A, I = 0 and I = 0 (D) long after the switch S is closed, =I = I = 0.6 A.
3 = 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
Q.6
Q.7
rjz 2|xF
>412
Q.8
The circuit shown in thefigureconsists of a battery of emf s = 10 V; a capacitor
of capacitance C = 1.0 pF and three resistor ofvalues R, = 2Q, 1^ = 2 0 and R =
i n . Initially the capacitor is completely uncharged and the switch S is •±"E R. o
pen. The switch S is closed at t = 0. (A) The current through resistor R at the
moment the switch closed is zero. (B) The current through resistor R a long time
after the switch closed is 5 A. (C) The ratio of current through Rj and I^ is a
lways constant. (D) The maximum charge on the capacitor during the operation is
5pC.
3 3 3
Q.9 Q.10 A capacitor of capacity C is charged to a steady potential difference V
and connected in series with an open key and a pure resistor 'R'. At time t = 0
, the key is closed. If I = current at time t, a plot of log I against't' is as
shown in (1) in the graph. Later one of the parameters i. e. V, R or C is change
d keeping the other two constant, and the graph (2) is recorded. Then (A) C is r
educed (B) C is increased (C) R is reduced (D) R is increased
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
The charge across the capacitor in two different RC circuits 1 and 2 are plotted
as shown in figure. Q.ll Choose the correct statement(s) related to the two cir
cuits. (A) Both the capacitors are charged to the same charge. (B) The emf s of
cells in both the circuit are equal. (C) The emf s of the cells may be different
. (D) The emf E is more than E Q.12 Identify the correct statement(s) related to
the R,, R^ Cj and C„ of the two RC circuits. (A)R >R ifE,=E (B)C <C ifE =E
t 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2
< ^ 2 1 Q.13 Aparallel plate capacitor is charged by connecting it to a battery.
The battery is disconnected and the plates of the capacitor are pulled apart to
make the separation between the plates twice. Again the capacitor is connected
to the battery (with same polarity) then (A) Chargefromthe batteryflowsinto the
capacitor after reconnection (B) Chargefromcapacitorflowsinto the battery after
reconnection. (C) The potential difference between the plates increases when the
plates are pulled apart. (D) After reconnection ofbattery potential difference
between the plate will immediately becomes half of the initial potential differe
nce. (Just after disconnecting the battery) Q. 14 The plates of a parallel plate
capacitor with no dielectric are connected to a voltage source. Now a dielectri
c of dielectric constant K is inserted tofillthe whole space between the plates
with voltage source remaining connected to the capacitor. (A) the energy stored
in the capacitor will become K-times (B) the electricfieldinside the capacitor w
ill decrease to K-times (C) the force of attraction between the plates will incr
ease to K -times (D) the charge on the capacitor will increase to K-times
1 C 2
(C) RjCJ > R.C,
(D) f
Q. 15 Four capacitors and a batteiy are connected as shown. The potential drop a
cross the 7 pF capacitor is 6 V. Then the : J (A) potential difference across th
e 3 pF capacitor is 10 V (B) charge on the 3 pF capacitor is 42 pC (C) e.m.f. of
the battery is 3 0 V (D) potential difference across the 12 pF capacitor is 10
V.
A
H
3.9(.IF
Jn 7F "puF
2
Q. 16 A circuit shown in the figure consists of a battery of emf 10 V and two ca
pacitance C, and C of capacitances 1.0 pF and 2.0 pF respectively. The potential
difference V - V is 5 V (A) charge on capacitor Cj is equal to charge on capaci
tor C Ao—| |—| | — | | o B (B) Voltage across capacitor Cj is 5V. c' e q, (C) Voltage
across capacitor C is 10 V (D) Energy stored in capacitor C. is two times the en
ergy stored in capacitor C .
B 2 2 2
Q.17 A capacitor C is charged to a potential difference V and batteiy is disconn
ected. Now if the capacitor plates are brought close slowly by some di stance: (
A) some +ve work is done by external agent (B) energy of capacitor will decrease
(C) energy of capacitor will increase (D) none of the above
(fe Bansal Classes
Question Bank on Capacitance [13]
Q.18 The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor is C when the region between
the plate has air. This region is nowfilledwith a dielectric slab of dielectric
constant k. The capacitor is connected to a cell of emf E, and the slab is taken
out (A) charge CE(k - 1 ) flows through the cell (B) energy E C(k - 1) is absor
bed by the cell. (C) the energy stored in the capacitor is reduced by E C(k - 1
) (D) the external agent has to do Ê C(k -1) amount ofwork to take the slab out
.
2 2 2
Q.19 Two capacitors of capacitances 1 pF and 3 pF are charged to the same voltag
es 5 V. They are connected in parallel with oppositely charged plates connected
together. Then: (A) Final common voltage will be 5 V (B) Final common voltage wi
ll be 2.5 V (C) Heat produced in the circuit will be zero. (D) Heat produced in
the circuit will be 37.5 pJ Q. 20 The two plates X and Y of a parallel plate cap
acitor of capacitance C are given a charge of amount Q each. X is now joined to
the positive terminal and Yto the negative terminal of a cell of emfE = Q/C. (A)
Charge of amount Q willflowfromthe negative terminal to the positive terminal o
fthe cell inside it (B) The total charge on the plate X will be 2Q. (C) The tota
l charge on the plate Y will be zero. (D) The cell will supply CE amount of ener
gy.
2
Q.21 A dielectric slab is inserted between the plates of an isolated charged cap
acitor. Which of the following quantities will remain the same? (A) the electric
fieldin the capacitor (B) the charge on the capacitor (C) the potential differen
ce between the plates (D) the stored energy in the capacitor. Q.22 The separatio
n between the plates of a isolated charged parallel plate capacitor is increased
. Which of the following quantities will change? (A) charge on the capacitor (B)
potential difference across the capacitor (C) energy of the capacitor (D) energ
y density between the plates. Q.23 Each plate ofa parallel plate capacitor has a
charge q on it. The capacitor is now connected to a battery. Now, (A) the facin
g surfaces of the capacitor have equal and opposite charges. (B) the two plates
of the capacitor have equal and opposite charges. (C) the battery supplies equal
and opposite charges to the two plates. (D) the outer surfaces ofthe plates hav
e equal charges. Q. 24 Following operations can be performed on a capacitor: X -
connect the capacitor to a battery of emf E. Y - disconnect the battery Z - rec
onnect the battery with polarity reversed. W - insert a dielectric slab in the c
apacitor (A) In XYZ (perform X, then Y, then Z) the stored electric energy remai
ns unchanged and no thermal energy is developed. (B) The charge appearing on the
capacitor is greater after the action XWY than after the action XYW. (C) The el
ectric energy stored in the capacitor is greater after the action WXY than after
the action XYW. (D) The electricfieldin the capacitor after the action XW is th
e same as that after WX. Q.25 A parallel plate capacitor is charged and then dis
connectedfromthe source of potential difference. Ifthe plates of the condenser a
re then moved farther apart by the use of insulated handle, which one of the fol
lowing is true? (A) the charge on the capacitor increases (B) the charge on the
capacitor decreases (C) the capacitance of the capacitor increases (D) the poten
tial difference across the plate increases
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
Q.26 Aparallel plate capacitor is charged and then disconnected from the source
steady E.M.F. The plates are then drawn apart farther. Again it is connected to
the same source. Then: (A) the potential difference across the plate increases,
while the plates are being drawn apart. (B) the charge from the capacitorflowsin
to the source, when the capacitor is reconnected. (C) more charge is drawn to th
e capacitor from the source, during the reconnection. (D) the electric intensity
between the plates remains constant during the drawing apart of plates. Q.27 Wh
en a parallel plates capacitor is connected to a source of constant potential di
fference, (A) all the charge drawnfromthe source is stored in the capacitor. (B)
all the energy drawnfromthe source is stored in the capacitor. (C) the potentia
l difference across the capacitor grows very rapidly initially and this rate dec
reases to zero eventually. (D) the capacity of the capacitor increases with the
increase of the charge in the capacitor. Q.28 When two identical capacitors are
charged individually to different potentials and connected parallel to each othe
r, after disconnecting themfromthe source: (A) net charge on connected plates is
less than the sum of initial individual charges. (B) net charge on connected pl
ates equals the sum of initial charges. (C) the net potential difference across
them is differentfromthe sum ofthe individual initial potential differences. (D)
the net energy stored in the two capacitors is less than the sum ofthe initial
individual energies. Q. 29 Aparallel plate capacitor of plate area A and plate s
eperation d is charged to potential difference V and then the battery is disconn
ected. A slab of dielectric constant K is then inserted between the plates ofthe
capacitor so as tofillthe space between the plates. If Q, E and W denote respec
tively, the magnitude of charge on each plate, the electricfieldbetween the plat
es (after the slab is inserted) and the work done on the system, in question, in
the process of inserting the slab, then e AV s KAV V AV 1 - 1 K Q. 3 0 A parall
el plate capacitor is connected to a battery. The quantities charge, voltage, el
ectricfieldand energy associated with the capacitor are given by Q , V , E and U
respectively. A dielectric slab is introduced between plates of capacitor but b
attery is still in connection. The corresponding quantities now given by Q, V, E
and U related to previous ones are (A)Q>Q (B) V > V (C) E > E (D)U<U Q.31 A par
allel-plate capacitor is connected to a cell. Its positive plate A and its negat
ive plate B have charges +Q and -Q respectively. A third plate C, identical to A
and B, with charge +Q, is now introduced midway between A and B, parallel to th
em. Which of the following are correct? 3Q (A) The charge on the inner face of B
is now —— (B) There is no change in the potential difference between A and B. (C) T
he potential difference between A and C is one-third of the potential difference
betweenB and C. (D) The charge on the inner face ofA is now Q/ 2. Q.32 Two capa
citors Cj = 4 pF and C = 2pF are charged to same potential V = 500 Volt, but wit
h opposite polarity as shown in thefigure.The switches S and S are closed. (A) T
he potential difference across the two capacitors are same and is given by 500/3
V (B) The potential difference across the two capacitors are same and is given
by 1000/3 V (C) The ratio offinalenergy to initial energy of the system is 1/9.
(D) The ratio offinalenergy to initial energy ofthe system is 4/9.
0 0 £ 2 0 Q 0 0 0 0 q 0 2 t 2
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
Q. 33 A parallel plate capacitor is charged to a certain potential and the charg
ing battery is then disconnected. Now, if the plates of the capacitor are moved
apart then: (A) The stored energy of the capacitor increases (B) Charge on the c
apacitor increases (C) Voltage ofthe capacitor decreases (D) The capacitance inc
reases Q. 34 If a battery of voltage V is connected across terminals I of the bl
ock box shown infigure,an ideal voltmeter connected to terminals II gives a read
ing of V/2, while ifthe battery is connected to terminals II, a voltmeter across
terrninals I reads V. The black box may contain (A)
i O-J I ! l
O—I—vwvR
iR
-o
1
1
11
(B) (D)1.
2
1
Tc
(C) O—i—vwvl R
' R O—I—vwv-
ER
-o
-o
11
i ii 1 j£) J1 !
11 T
Q.35 Two capacitors of equal capacitance (Cj = C ) are shown in the figure. Init
ially, while the switch S is open, one ofthe capacitors is uncharged and the oth
er carries charge Q . The energy stored in the charged capacitor is U . Sometime
s after the switch is closed, the capacitors Cj and C carry charges Qj and Q , r
espectively; the voltages across the capacitors are V and V ; and the energies s
tored in the capacitors are Uj and U . Which of the following statements is INCO
RRECT ?
0 0 2 2 { 2 2
4 C = o
(A) Q0 = - (Qj + Q2) (C)Vj=V (E)U = U j + U
2 0 2
(B) Qj = Q2 (D)Uj = U
2
Thefigureshows a diagonal symmetric arrangement of capacitors and a battery Q. 3
6 Identify the correct statements. (A) Both the 4pF capacitors carry equal char
ges in opposite sense. (B) Both the 4pF capacitors carry equal charges in same s
ense. (C)V -V >0 (D)V -V >0
B D B d
Question No. 3 6 to 39 (4 questions)
fi
2\xF
h 2 (F ° 4i i |F E=20V
T 2(xF
Q. 3 7 If the potential of C is zero, then (A) V = + 20V ( C ) 2 ( V - V ) + 2 (
V - V ) = 4V
A A d B d B B
D
( B ) 4 ( V - V ) + 2 ( V - V ) = 2V (D)V = V + V
A B D B A B D
B
Q. 3 8 The potential of the point B and D are (A) V = 8 V (B) V = 12V
(C) V = 8 V
D
(D)V =12V
d
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
Q.39 The value of charge q q and q as shown in the figure are (A) qj = 32 pC ; q
= 24 pC ; q = - 8 pC (B) q = 48 pC ; q = 16 pC ; q = + 8 pC (C) qj = 32 pC ; q
= 24 pC ; q = + 8 pC (D) q = 3 pC ; q = 4 pC ; q = + 2 pC
1; 2 3 2 3 { 2 3 2 3 ( 2 3
qi 1 2 - P B •i-l ^ H q 2
D
qi
Q.40 If Q is the charge on the plates of a capacitor of capacitance C, V the pot
ential difference between the plates, A the area of each plate and d the distanc
e between the plates, the force of attraction between the plates is (A) — v 7
2V o
8 A
E=20V
(B)
r
CV2
A
<oj
CV2
v o J
A s
7IE0d'
-J.
(fe Bansal Classes
[13]
l9ll
djuvjpvdvj
uo yjuvg uoijS3ri()
S3SSVJ3 jvsuvg^
ONLY ONE OPTION IS CORRECT
Q.l Q.7 Q.13 Q.19 Q.25 Q.31 Q.37 Q.43 Q.49 Q.l Q.5 Q.9 Q.13 Q.17 Q.21 Q.25 Q.29
Q.33 Q.37
B B C B D C B B B
Q.2 Q.8 Q.14 Q.20 Q.26 Q.32 Q.38 Q.44 Q.50
A C A B B D B D D Q.2 Q.6 Q.10 Q.14 Q.18 Q.22 Q.26 Q.30 Q.34 Q.38
Q.3 Q.9 Q.15 Q.21 Q.27 Q.33 Q.39 Q.45 Q.51 AB,C C,D B A,C,D AB,D B,C AB,D A D B,
C
C D C A A B A D
h
Q.4 Q.10 Q.16 Q.22 Q.28 Q.34 Q.40 Q.46 Q.52 Q.3 Q.7 Q.ll Q.15 Q.19 Q.23 Q.27 Q.3
1 Q.35 Q.39
A A C C A C D B B AD B A,C B,C,D B,D AC,D A,C E
Q.5 Q.ll 0.17 Q.23 Q.29 Q.35 Q.41 Q.47 Q.53
B B B B D A D C B Q.4 Q.8 Q.12 Q.16 Q.20 Q.24 Q.28 Q.32 Q.36 Q.40
Q.6 Q.12 Q.18 Q.24 Q.30 Q.36 Q.42 Q.48 Q.54
A D B B B B C C C
ONE OR MORE THAN ONE OPTION MAY BE CORRECT
B,C B,C B,D B,C B B D A,C,D A A,B,C,D
AB,C,D
B A,BX\D D AD A,B,C.D B,C,D B,C,D A,C
B,C
c
AB
A 3)1 X3MSNV
This Question Bank will be discussed after the Rakshabandhan vacation. Time Limi
t: 2 Sitting Each of 60 Minutes duration approx.
(RJl XjStfA <BA
AW
HOME
ASSI^NM 5 5 C EV T
FRIENDS FOR YOUR SELF ANALYSIS
Making your concepts stronger.
Requires slight mind scratching.
Requires recollection of various concepts.
Requires calculation skill. Easy life.
SITTING—I
@ (EASYLIFE) @
When an electronic transition occurs in an atom from higher energy state to a lo
wer energy state with energy difference equal to AE electron volts, the waveleng
th of the radiation emitted is approximately equal to 10 12397xlO~ . ^ 12397 xlO
" 12397x10 cm (B) A (Q m (D) 12397x10 cm (A) AE AE AE Q.2 In each ofthe followin
g questions two statements are given as Assertion A and Reason R. Examine the st
atements carefully and answer the questions according to the instructions given
below: (A) if both A and R are correct and R is the correct reason ofA. (B) if b
oth A and R are correct and R is not the correct reason of A. (C) if A is correc
t and R is wrong. (D) if A is wrong and R is correct. JE) if both A and R are wr
ong. (a) Assertion A. The gases which are isosteres diffuse at the same rate und
er similar conditions. Reason R. Diffusion and effusion do not follow the same l
aw. (b) Assertion A. The value of van der Waal constant b is higher for N than f
or NH . Reason R. NH molecules are associated withH-bonds. Assertion A. K.E. of
all the gases approach zero as their temperature approach zero kelvin. (c) Reaso
n R Molecular motion ceases at absolute zero. Assertion A. Helium shows only pos
itive deviationfromideal behaviour. (d) Reason R Helium is chemically inert nobl
e gas.
Q.L
-10
10 10 2 3 3
^Bansal Classes
RAkslia Bandhan Holidays Assignment
[3]
Q.3
V vs T curves at differnt pressure P j and P for an ideal gas are shown below. V
Which one ofthe following is correct? (A) Pj > P (B) P < P
2 2 t 2
(C)Pj=P Q.4 Q.5
2
(D)
1 1
]_ 2
Q.6
Q.7 Q.8
Q.9
The units of compressibility factor are (A) atm L~ (B)atnr (C)L(D)unitless Which
of the following statements is most appropriate for a real gas. (A) Force of at
traction between the molecules exists at low pressure only. (B) Force of attract
ion between the molecules exists at high pressure only. (C) Force of attraction
between the molecules affect gaseous property at high temperature. (D) Force of
attraction between the molecules affect gaseous property at low pressure. Which
among the following has rate of effusion less than the moist air? (A) He (B) Dry
air (C)NH (D) Heavy hydrogen The behaviour ofreal gas is generally depicted by
plotting which ofthe following parameter vs pressure (A) critical volume (B)dens
ity (C)T /T (D)V /V The 'atom utilization' is obtained by dividing molar mass of
the desired product by the sum ofthe molar masses of all substances produced acc
ording to the reaction equations. The "E factor" is the amount (in kg) of by pro
duct per kg of products. Calculate "atom utilization" and "E factor". Identify X
, the desired product. (NH ) S 0 + MnS0 + 21^0 > (NH ) S0 + X + 2H2S0 D~ & Calcu
late molality of a solution containing 72 gm Buckminster Fullerene (C ) in one k
g water.
l 3 ldd real real ideal 4 2 2 8 4 4 2 4 4 60 3(s) 3 3
Q. 10 The density of CaC0 is 2.71 g/cm . What is molarity of solid CaC0 .
STRENGTHENING CONCEPTS
Q.ll If in the hydrogen atom P.E. at co is chosen to be 13.6eVthenwhatwouldbeP.E
. &K.E. of e~ in the first Bohr orbit. Q.12 The value of (nj +1^) and (n - n ) f
or He ion in atomic spectrum are 4 and 8 respectively. Identify the series and f
ind v of corresponding line in emission sp.
2 2 +
^Bansal Classes
[3]
itU
0
BRAIN TEASERS °<W° (0,0) /o,o\ Q. 13 For a polymerisation reaction involving gaseous
reactant and product A ^ nB, 'A'undergoes polymerisation to an extent of'a' as
degree of polymerisation at a temp Tj. From this info calculate the following in
terms ofn and a. (a) P /P ratio where P is the pressure with the given extent o
f polymerisation and P is the pressure before polymerisation when temperature wa
s T in a constant volume container (b) V /V ratio in a chamber where V is volume
when polymerisation occurs and V is before polymerisation. Both volume measured
under similar condition ofpressure & temperature. (c) Vapour density ofthe mixt
ure ifthe molecular weight ofAis M . (d) Compare rate of effusions before polyme
risation and after the polymerisation. /
T () T 0 0 T 0 T 0 A
o
o0
y^r
-JU ir
0
o
o0
U*
QUKîj
f-Uy - ^ 6t .^WL L-^rUMMX = yPf, fD
'
RECALLING
VARIOUS CONCEPTS AT ONE PLACE
Q.14 Calculate IE of oxygen atom.
8
Q.15 Calculate percentage dissociation ofH 0 into H & OH at 298 K of a neutral w
ater sample [pH=7]
2 +
Q.16 A compound gave on analysis of 60 g sample 44.8 / ofa gas at STP which turn
s lime water milky & other gas which increased the wt, of white. CuS0 crystal by
36 gm. Deduce the molecular formula of the compound.
4
Q.17 Elemental As, a poison that kills humans and animal pests may be obtained b
y reacting As 0 with carbon to give As and CO. Compute masses ofAs and CO formed
if 49.5 gm ofAs 0 reacts completely with 7.20 gm of C. [Given at. wt. As = 75]
'jj> + Co )
2 3 2 3
M
CALCULATION
SKILL
Q.18 Under identical experimental conditions which ofthe following pairs ofgases
will be the most easy to separate by using diffusion process (A) H and D (B) U
F and U F (C) C0 and C H (D) 0 and N Q.19 A solution of palmitic acid (M =256) i
n benzene contains 5 gm acid per litre. When this solution is dropped on surface
, C H gets evaporated and acid forms aunimolecular layer on the surface. Ifwe wi
sh to cover an area 5000 cm withunimolecularfilm.What volume of solution in ml s
hould be used? Area covered by one molecule of acid is 0.32 nm ,
2 2 235 6 238 6 2 3 8 2 2 6 6 2 2
Q.20 105 ml ofpure water at 4° C is saturated with NH gas, producing a solution of
density 0.9 gm/ml. Ifthis solution contains 3 0% ofNH by wt., calculate its vol
ume.
3 3
^Bansal Classes
[3]
SITTING-II
@ EASY LIFE @
Q.l
(a) (b) Q.2
In each ofthe following questions two statements are given as Assertion A and Re
ason R. Examine the statements carefully and answer the questions according to t
he instructions given below: (A) if both A and R are correct and R is the correc
t reason ofA. (B) if both A and R are correct and R is not the correct reason of
A. (C) if A is correct and R is wrong. (D) ifA is wrong and R is correct. (E) if
both A and R are wrong. Assertion A. a-particles have quite less penetrating po
wer. Reason R a-particles are di-positive ions having appreciable mass. Assertio
n A. Isotopes of an element can be identified with the help of a mass spectrogra
ph. Reason R Amass spectrograph can differentiate between ions having different
charge to mass (e/m) ratio. If the mean free path is I at one bar pressure then
its value at 5 bar pressure, if temperature is kept constant. (A) 5 / (B) 11 (C)
j (D)/. Open end manometer was connected to gas chanber. The Hg level stood 15
mm higher in the open end as compared to the end connected to gas chamber. If th
e atmospheric pressure is 101.3 kPa. The gas pressure in k Pa is
Q.3
(A) 103.3
(B) 101.3
2
(C) 94.3
(D) 115.3
(D)N
2
Q.4 Whichofthefollowinggashashighestvalueof'a'? (A) Ne (B)0 (C) Clj Q.5
Three gases of densities A(0.82),B (0.26), C (0.51) are enclosed in a vessel of
4L capacity. Pick up the correct statement assuming ideal gas behaviour: I. Gas
A will tend to lie at the bottom II. The number of atoms ofvarious gases A B, C
are same III. The gases will diffuse to form homogeneous mixture IV The average
kinetic energy of each gas is same (A) I, IV (B) only ID (C) III, IV (D) I, in R
atio of C and C of a gas 'X' is 1.4. The number of atoms of the gas 'X' present
in 11.2 litres of it at STPwillbe
p u
Q.6 Q.7 Q.8
(A) 6.02 x 10
3
23
(B) 1.2 x 10
23
(C) 3.01 x io
23
(D) 2.01 x 10
23
The moles o f 0 required for reacting with 8960 mLg of ammonia at STP is (A) 5
XNH + y 0 ^ aNO + MÔ is
2
2
(B) 2.5
(C)l
(D) 0.5
Find the number of spectral lines in Paschen series emitted by atomic H, when el
ectron is excited from ground state to n energy level returns back.
th
^Bansal Classes
[3]
0
0
0
0
° ° B R A I N TEASERS
° W°
0<
0
Q. 9
For calculating lattice energy of an ionic crystal, the variation of potential e
nergy was studied following . • t n B the relation, Uw(r) = a e n A + — r r where 'a
', 'e', n, Aand x are constants depending upon type of crystal and 'r' is the di
stance between the ions. Calculate expression ofB in terms ofgiven constant for
a stable crystal lattice given that ions are at a distance of r . Calculate pote
ntial energy ofthe crystal in terms ofr and other given constants. Plot an appro
priate graph ofU (r) v/s r indicating r in the graph.
2 2 0 0 0 (g) (g) (g)
Q.10 For a gaseous reaction; A - > B + 2C total pressure at various timefromthe
start ofreaction is studied. Complete the following table and calculate degreee
of dissociation ofAattime t = 50 min. Given that reaction is 40% complete at tim
e t =100 min. and 100% complete after a long time. What can be said about averag
e of dissociate ofAbetween 0 to 50 min & between 50 to 100 min. Can you give a p
ossible reason for this. lime t = 0 min t = 50min. t-lOOmin. t = oo 100 mm 150 m
m P(Total) 100 mm P
A
where P and P are the partial pressures ofAand B.
A B
PB
RECALLING
VARIOUS CONCEPTS AT ONE PLACE
7
Q.ll A beam of some kind of particle of velocity 2.1 x 10 m/s is scattered by a
gold (z = 79) foil. Find specific charge ofthis particle (charge/mass) if the di
stance of closest approach is 2.5 x 10~ m.
14
Q. 12 Show that for large value ofprincipal Q. no. the frequency of an electron
rotating in adjacent energy levels of H-atom and the radiant frequency for trans
ition between these value all approach the same value. Q.13 Find molality ofmerc
urous ion, ifthe concentration of aqueous solution containing it is 160 ppm.
I m CALCULATION SKILL
Q.14 Which of the following gaves have meanfreepath longer than oxygen under sim
ilar conditions?
I.H2
(A)l,m
ii. co
2
(B) II, IV
m.ci
2
iv. N
(C)I,IV
-3
2
(D)n,IH
Q.15 By what factor does water expand when converted into vapour at 100°C and 1 at
m pressure. The density of liquid water at 100°Cand 1 atm is 0.96 gem . (A) 815 (B
) 2000 (C) 1630 (D) 500
^Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.16 The empirical formula of an organic compound containing carbon and hydrogen
is CFLj. The mass of one litre ofthis organic gas is exactly equal to that of o
ne litre ofN . Therefore the molecular formula of the organic gas is (A)C H (B)C
H (C)C H (D)C H
2 2 4 3 6 6 12 4 8
Q.17 In a photoelectric experiment, it was found that the stopping potential dec
reases from 1.85 V to 0.82V as the X of incident light is varied from 3 00 nm to
400 nm. Calculate planks constant in eVs. Q. 18 0.015 mol K Cr 0 oxidises 2.18
gm of a mix of XO and X ^ into X0 " in acidic medium. If 0.0187 mol of X 0 are f
ormed. Calculate atomic weight of X. 6XO + 5Cr 0 - + 24H -> 6X0 ~ + 10Cr + 171^0
3 X ^ 3 + 4Cr 0 " + 26H -> 6X0 - + 8Cr + 13H 0
2 2 7 4 4 2 7 2 + 4 3+ 2 7 2 + 4 3+ 2
Q.19 Near Mount Kailash is the sacred lake, Mansorvar. In the crystal clear wate
r of the lake, things at the bottom of the lake are also clearly visible. On a h
ot sunny day, when the temperature at the surface is 27°C an algae at the bottom o
fthe lake produces a 25 ml bubble ofpure oxygen. As the bubble rises to the top,
it gets saturated with the water vapours and has a volume of 100 ml of the surf
ace. The pressure at the surface is 720 mm Hg. Ifthe depth ofthe lake is 27.2 m,
findthe temperature at the bottom of the lake. Vapour pressure of water at 27°C is
20 mm Hg. dj^ci = 1 gm/ml, d = 13.6 g/ml.
Hg
Q.20 A beam of light Ijas three X, 4144 A, 4972 A and 6216 A with a total intens
ity of 3.6 x 10~ Wnr equally distributed amongst the three X. The beam falls nor
mally on an area 1.0 cm of a clean metallic surface ofwork function 2.3 eV Assum
e that there is no loss oflight by reflection etc. Calculate the no. of photoele
ctrons emitted in 2 sec.
3 2
2
J E E Humour. A Physics teacher, a Maths teacher and a Chemistry teacher were wa
lking on a sea shore. Fascinated by sea waves the physics teacher said, "I want
to study the wave nature of sea waves" and went into the sea and never returned
back. The maths teacher said, "I want to measure the volume of sea water" and we
nt into the Sea and never returned back. The chemistry teacher concluded "Both p
hysics and maths teacher are soluble in sea water under condition of 1 atm and 2
98 K.
^Bansal Classes
[3]
ANSWER KEY
soxbj§^61 VZ,£ z,l'b SITTING-I e/oos orb pneero 6ib o1ho 9ib %z,-0i x 8'i srb I r»(i-u
)+ii z p= i Yn A
1a
A3
E J
0 . M' b Z 8 (p)
V 8 I'D
d ,[X)(l-u)+l] = 0 erb 0 ld
a z/b g £b
xua Z6 6 8 = A '£ = %'l = Tu nt) - r /96 E A 0 = 3X 'A3 9'£I = 'A9 9'£l~ = H lib 9 d '
raro wrzz orb 6b ss'o'ao 8 b a 9b a sb a Kb q (p) vc>) 'a(q)'a00 rb o rb SITTIN
G—II
9'862 x n orb V sASgi-oixzrt? z,rb 6 8I"b 6 S/Da01x8> 7 v srb r V H'6 rat>-0l x
t £l'b > ? X 0 1 '0i7 '0 '0 '09 'SL ' 0 '081' % SZ 0lbJxyu^v 0 0£ T-x D V 9"b £ <u 'Z/
(.£~u) (fr-n) 8'b a z/b y(q) V00 o rb V £'b o Kb
Tloi
6l'b 9rb irb 6b sb rb 'Ii
^Bansal Classes
[3]
Q. 1 The bob of a simple pendulum of length I is releasedfrompoint P. What is th
e angle made by the net acceleration of the bob with the string at point Q. Q.2
(CIRCULAR MOTION & WORK POWER ENERGY) //////////////// EXERCISE-I
Aballofmass 1 kg is released from position A inside a wedge with a hemispherical
cut ofradius 0.5 m as shown in the figure. Find the force exerted by the vertic
al wall OM on wedge, when the ball is in position B. (neglectfrictioneverywhere)
. Take(g = 10m/s )
2
Q.3
A particle P is moving on a circle under the action of only one force acting alw
ays towards fixed point O on the circumference. Find ratio of ere & 'de^2 dt v d
t j
2
Q.4 Q.5
A particle is moving in x direction, under the influence of force F = 7T sin nx.
Find the work done by another external agent in slowly moving a particlefromx =
0 to x = 0.5 m. A particle moves in a circle of radius R with a constant speed
v. Then, find the magnitude of average 7R 1 acceleration during a time interval
. umuuu
? y
Q.6 Q.7 Q.8 Q.9
In the figure shown, pulley and spring are ideal. Find the potential energy stor
ed in the spring (m, > m ).
2
Ik
A spring of mass m is pulled such that a given instant,, velocity of both of its
end is v in the opposite direction. Find the kinetic energy ofthe spring. A par
ticle of mass 3 kg is rotating in a circle ofradius 1 m such that the angle rota
ted by its radius is given by 0 = 3 (t + sint). Find the net force acting on the
particle when t = n/2. For a particle rotating in a vertical circle with unifor
m speed, the maximum and minimum tension in the string are in the ratio 5 :3. If
the radius of vertical circle is 2m, then find the speed of revolving body.
Q.10 Two strings of length /=0.5 m each are connected to a block of mass m=2 kg
at one end and their ends are attached to the point A and B 0.5 m apart on a ver
tical pole which rotates with a constant angular velocity co=7 rad/sec. Find the
ratio T, oftension in the upper string (T,) and the lower string (T ). [Use g =
9.8 m/s ]
2 2
0.5
Q.ll A force F = -k(x i + y j) [where k is a positive constant] acts on a partic
le moving in the x-y plane. Startingfromorigin, the particle is taken to (a, a)
and then to (a/V2,o). Find the total work done by the force F on the particle.
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[13]
Q.12 A bead of mass m is attached to one end of a spring ofnatural length -J3 R
and spring constant k= (V3 +l)mg . The other end ofthe spring is fixed at point
A R on a smoothfixedverticalringofradius R as shown in thefigure.What is the nor
mal reaction at B just after the bead is released?
3
(60°
Q.13 Water is pumped from a depth of 10 m and delivered through a pipe of cross
section 10~ m upto a height of 10 m. If it is needed to deliver a volume 0.2 m p
er second,findthe power required. [Use g= 10m/s ] Q.14 A mass m rotating freely
in a horizontal circle of radius 1 m on a fiictionless smooth table supports a s
tationary mass 2m, attached to the other end ofthe string passing through smooth
hole O in table, hanging L vertically. Find the angular velocity ofrotation. • 2m
2 2 2
Q.15 Consider the shown arrangement when a is bob of mass'm' is suspended by mea
ns of a string connected to peg P. Ifthe bob is given a horizontal velocity u ha
ving magnitude • /3g7, find the minimum speed of the bob in subsequent motion.
N
mg Q.16 A bead of mass m is tied at one end of a spring of spring constant R R a
nd unstretched length — and other end tofixedpoint O. The smooth semicircular wire
frameisfixedin vertical plane. Find the normal reaction between bead and wire ju
st before it reaches the lowest point. Q.17 A particle of mass m is hanging with
the help of an elastic string of unstretched length a and force mg constant — . T
he other end isfixedto a peg on vertical wall. String is given an additional ext
ension of a 2a in vertical downward direction by pulling the mass and releasedfr
omrest. Find the maximum height reached by it during its subsequent motion above
point of release. (Neglect interaction with peg if any) Q.18 A particle ofmass
1 kg is given a horizontal velocity of 4 m/s along a horizontal surface, with wh
ich it has a coefficient offriction(both static and kinetic) of 0.4. e=10m/s The
particle strikes afixedideal spring of force constant 6 N/m after travelling a
4 m/s distance of 0.25 m. Assume acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s . Find th
e final | 1 kg | |i=0.4 0.25m displacement ofthe particlefromits starting point.
Q.19 A particle P of mass m is placed inside a hemispherical bowl which rotates
about its vertical axis with constant angular velocity co. The particle is just
preventedfromsliding down when the radius vector OP joining it to the centre of
the bowl O makes an angle of45° with the axis. The radius ofthe bowl is \ 0V2 and
the coefficient offrictionbetween the particle and the bowl is 0.5. Find the val
ue of angular velocity co. Q.20 A point moves along a circle having a radius 20
cm with a constant tangential acceleration 5 cm/s . How much time is needed afte
r motion begins for the normal acceleration of the point to be equal to tangenti
al acceleration ?
!
2
2
(S§Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[12]
Q.21 A body of mass 2 kg is moving under the influence of a central force whose
potential energy is given by U (r) = 2r Joule. If the body is moving in a circul
ar orbit of 5m,then find its energy. Q.22 A ring rotates about z axis as shown i
n figure. The plane of rotation is xy. At a certain instant the acceleration ofa
particle P (shown in figure) on the ring is (6 i-8 j) m/s . find the angular ac
celeration of thering& the angular velocity at that instant. Radius ofthe ring i
s 2m.
3 y 2
Q.23 A particle is revolving in a circle of radius lm with an angular speed of 1
2 rad/s. At t = 0, it was subjected to a constant angular acceleration a and its
angular speed increased to(480/7i) rpm in 2 sec. Particle then continues to mov
e with attained speed. Calculate (a) angular acceleration of the particle, (b) t
angential velocity ofthe particle as a function of time. (c) acceleration of the
particle at t = 0.5 second and at t = 3 second (d) angular displacement at t =
3 second. Q.24 The member OA rotates in vertical plane about a horizontal axis t
hrough O with a constant counter clockwise velocity co = 3 rad/sec. As it passes
the position 9 = 0, a small mass m is placed upon it at a radial distance r=0.5
m. If the mass is observed to slip at 0=37°, find the coefficient of friction bet
ween the mass & the member. Q.25 AparticlePis sliding down afiictionlesshemisphe
rical bowl. It passes the point A at t=0. At this instant of time, the horizonta
l component of its velocity is v. A bead Q ofthe same mass as P is ejectedfromA
at t=0 along the horizontal string AB, with the speed v. Friction between the be
ad and the string may be neglected. Which bead reaches point B earlier? Q. 1 (a)
(b) (c) Q.2 Q.3 A particle is confined to move along the +x axis under the acti
on ofa force F(x) u that is derivable from the potential U(x) =ax -bx. Find the
expression for F(x) When the total energy ofthe particle is zero, the particle c
an be trapped with in / the inteivalx= otox= x.. For this casefindthe values of
x,. Determine the maximum kinetic energy that the trapped particle has in its mo
tion. Express all answers in terms a and b. A particle of mass 2kg is subjected
to a two dimensional conservative force given by Fx =-2x+2y, Fy=2x-y . (x,y in m
and F in N) If the particle has kinetic energy of (8/3) J at point (2,3), find
the speed of the particle when it reaches (1,2). A square plate isfirmlyatached
to a fiictionless horizontal plane. One end of a taut cord is attached to point
A ofthe plate and the other end is attached to a sphere of mass m. In the proces
s, the cord gets wrapped around the plate. The sphere is given an initial veloci
ty v on the horizontal plane perpendicular to the cord which causes it to make a
complete circuit of the plate and return to point A. Find the velocity ofthe sp
here when it hits point A again after moving in a circuit on the horizontal plan
e. Alsofindthe time taken by the spheretocomplete the circuit. A coin is placed
on the horizontal surface of a rotating disc, If the disc startsfromrest and is
given a constant acceleration a = l/V2 rad/s ,findthe number ofrevolution throug
h which the disc turns before the coin slips. The distance of coinfromaxis is 1
m initially and the coefficient offrictionp=0.5.
3 2 Q 2
EXER CISE-II
Q.4
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[13]
A small bead of mass m is free to slide on a fixed smooth vertical wire, as indi
cated in the diagram. One end of a light elastic string, of unstretched length a
and force constant 2mg/a is attached to B. The string passes through a smooth f
ixed ring R and the other end of the string is attached to the fixed point A, AR
being horizontal. The point O on the wire is at same horizontal level as R, and
AR=RO = a. In the equilibrium position, find OB. (i) ® The bead B is raised to a
point C of the wire above O, where OC = a, and is released from rest. Find the s
peed ofthe bead as it passes O, and find the greatest depth below O ofthe bead i
n the subsequent motion. Q.6 A particle of mass 5 kg is free to slide on a smoot
h ring of radius r = 20 cm fixed in a vertical plane. The particle is attached t
o one end of a spring whose other end is fixed to the top point O of the ring. I
nitially the particle is at rest at a point A of the ring such that Z OCA=60°, C b
eing the centre ofthe ring. The natural length of the spring is also equal to r
= 20cm. After the particle is released and slides down the ring the contact forc
e between the particle & the ring becomes zero when it reaches the lowest positi
on B. Determine the force constant of the spring. Q.7 A small block of mass m is
projected horizontally from the top of the smooth hemisphere of radius r with s
peed u as shown. For values of u > u , it does not slide on the hemisphere (i.e.
leaves the surface at the top itself). O (a) For u = 2u , it lands at point P o
n ground Find OP. (b) For u = u /3, Find the height from the ground at which it
leaves the hemisphere. (c) Find its net acceleration at the instant it leaves th
e hemisphere. Q.8 The track in Fig is straight in the horizontal section AB and
is a semicircle of radius R in the vertical part BCD. A particle of mass m is gi
ven a velocity of /(22gR)/5 to the left along the track. The particle moves up t
he vertical section JZL and ultimately loses contact with it. How far from point
B will the mass land. Q.9 A small particle of mass 1 kg slides without friction
from height H=45 cm shown in figure and then loops the vertical loop of radius
R from where a section of angle 6 = 60° has been removed. Find R such that after l
osing contact at A and flying through the air, the particle will reach at the po
int B. Also find the normal reaction between particle and path at A. Q.10 A ring
of mass m slides on a smooth vertical rod. A light string is attached to the ri
ng and is passing over a smooth peg distant a from the rod, and at the other end
ofthe string is a mass M (> m). The ring is held on a level with the peg and re
leased: Show that it first comes to rest after falling a distance: =0 2mMa M
Q 0 0 A M
Q.5
Q.ll Ablock ofmass m is held at rest ona smooth horizontal floor. Alight fiictio
nless, small pulley isfixedat aheight of 6 mfromthe floor. Alight inextensible s
tring of length 16 m, connected with Apasses over the pulley and another identic
al block B is hungfromthe string. Initial height of B is 5mfromthe floor as 6m s
hown in Fig. When the system is releasedfromrest, B starts to move vertically do
wnwards and A slides on the floor towards right. (i) Ifat an instant string make
s an angle 0 with horizontal, calculate relation between velocity u ofA and v of
B Calculate v when B strikes the floor.
M 2 -m2
l i l t 7 777
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[13]
Q.12 A small block can move in a straight horizontal linea along AB. Flash light
s from ^ one side projects its shadow on a vertical wall which has horizontal cr
oss section as a circle. Find tangential & normal acceleration of shadow of the
block on the ^ v=! const./ wall as a function of time ifthe velocity of the bloc
k is constant (v). <0 Tp View \\u\u o Q.13 In fig two identical springs, each wi
th a relaxed length of 50cm and a spring constant of 500N/m, are connected by a
short cord of length 1 Ocm. The upper string is attached to the ceiling, a box t
hat weighs 100N hangsfromthe lower spring. Two additional cords, each 85cm long,
are also tied to the assembly; they are limp (i.e. slack). (a) If the short cor
d is cut, so that the box then hangsfromthe springs and the two longer cords, do
es the box move up or down? (b) How far does the box move before coming to rest
again? Q.14 The small pendulum ofmass m is suspendedfroma trolley that runs on a
horizontal rail. The trolley and pendulum are initially at rest with 9 = 0. Ift
he trolley is given a constant acceleration a=g determine the maximum angle 9 th
rough which the pendulum swings. Also find the tension T in the cord in terms of
9. Q.15 A weightless rod of length I with a small load of mass m at the end is
hinged at point A as shown in the figure and occupies a strictly vertical positi
on, touching a body of mass m M. A light j erk sets the system in motion. For wh
at mass ratio M/m will the rod form an o M angle a = re/6 with the horizontal at
the moment of the separationfromthe body? TTwmvmr What will be the velocity u o
f the body at this moment? Friction should be neglected. Q.16 The blocks are of
mass 2 kg shown is in equilibrium. At t = 0 right spring in fig (i) and right st
ring in fig (ii) breaks. Find the ratio of instantaneous acceleration of blocks?
//////w/. itmuLuq^m) •um
max
2 kg figure (i) Q.l
<!§ Bansal Classes
A smooth semicircular wire track of radius R isfixedin a vertical plane. One end
of a massless spring of natural length (3R/4) is attached to the lowest point O
of the wire track. A small ring of mass m, which can slide on the track, is att
ached to the other end of the spring. The ring is held stationary at point P suc
h that the spring makes an angle of 60° with the vertical. The spring constant K=m
g/R. Consider the instant when the ring is released and (i) draw the free body d
iagram of the ring. (ii) determine the tangential acceleration of the ring and t
he normal reaction. [JEE 96] Q.2 Two blocks of mass m,=l 0kg and m =5kg connecte
d to each other by a massless inextensible string of length 0.3m are placed alon
g a diameter of a turn table. The coefficient offrictionbetween the table and m,
is 0.5 while there is nofrictionbetween m and the table. The table is rotating
with an angular velocity of 1 Orad/sec about a vertical axis passing through its
centre. The masses are placed along the diameter ofthe table on either side oft
he centre O such that m, is at a distance of 0.124mfromO. The masses are observe
d to be at rest with respect to an observer on the turn table. (i) Calculate the
frictionalforce on m, (ii) What should be the minimum angular speed ofthe turn t
able so that the masses will slipfromthis position. (iii) How should the masses
be placed with the string remaining taut, so that there is nofrictionalforce act
ing on the mass m,. [JEE 97]
2 2
EXERCISE-III
2 kg figure (ii)
Particle Dynamics
[13]
Q.3
A small block of mass m slides along a smooth frictional track as shown in the f
ig. (i) If it starts from rest at P, what is is the resultant force acting on it
at Q? (ii) At what height above the bottom of the loop should the block be rele
ased so that the force it exerts against the track at the top of the loop equals
its weight. [REE 97]
. At rest 5R
Q.4
Q.5
A force F = - K (y i + xj) where K is a positive constant, acts on a particle mo
ving in the x-y plane. Startingfromthe origin, the particle is taken along the p
ositive x-axis to the point (a,0) and then parallel to the y-axis to the pint (a
,a). The total work done by the force F on the particle is [JEE 98] (A) - 2Ka (B
) 2Ka (C) - Ka (D) Ka A stone is tied to a string of length I is whirled in a ve
rtical circle with the other end of the string at the centre. At a certain insta
nt of time, the stone is at its lowest position and has a speed u. The magnitude
of the change in its velocity at it reaches a position where the string is hori
zontal is [JEE98]
2 2 2 2
(A)
- 2gl)
( B ) V 2 Jl
( C ) 4(u2 - gl)
(D)
(u2-gl)
I A
Q.6 A particle is suspended verticallyfroma point O by an inextensible massless
Q.7
string of length L. A vertical line AB is at a distance L/8fromO as shown. The o
bject given a horizontal velocity u. At some point, its motion ceases T «-L/8 to b
e circular and eventually the object passes through the line AB. At the instant
of crossing AB, its velocity is horizontal. Find u. [JEE'99,10] A long horizonta
l rod has a bead which can slide along its length, and initially placed at a dis
tance L from one end ofA of the rod. The rod is set in angular motion about A wi
th constant angular acceleration a. If the coefficient offrictionbetween the rod
and the bead is p and gravity is neglected, then the time after which the bead
starts slipping is [JEE'2000] (A)^ (B)^ (C)^= (D) infinitesimal
Q.8
A small block is shot into each of the four tracks as shown below. Each of the t
racks risks to the same height. The speed with which the block enters the track
is the same in all cases. At the highest point ofthe track, the normal reaction
is maximum in [JEE(Scr) '2001 ]
(A) (B) (D)
Q.9
An insect crawls up a hemispherical surface very slowly (see the figure). The co
efficient offrictionbetween the insect and the surface is 1/3. Ifthe line j oini
ng the centre of the hemispherical surface to the insect makes an angle a with t
he vertical, the maximum possible value of a is given by [JEE(Scr.)'2001 ] (A) c
ot a = 3 (B) tan a = 3 (C) sec a = 3 (D) cosec a = 3 A small ball ofmass 2x 10~
Kg having a charge of 1 pc is suspended by a string of length 0. 8m. Another ide
ntical ball having the same charge is kept at the point of suspension. Determine
the minimum horizontal velocity which should be imparted to the lower ball so t
hat it can make complete revolution. [JEE'2001 ]
3
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[13]
Q.ll A simple pendulum is oscillating without damping. When the displacement oft
he bob is less that maximum, its acceleration vector a is correctly shown in [JE
E (Scr.)'2002]
/////////
/////////
/////////
/mm
(A)
(C)
Q.12 A particle, which is constrained to move along the x-axis, is subjected to
a force in the same direction which varies with the distance x of the particle x
of the particle from the origin as F(x) = - kx + ax . Here k and a are positive
constants. For x > 0, the functional form of the potential energy U (x) of the
particle is [JEE (Scr.)'2002]
2
U(x)
U(x)
U(x)f » X
U(x) » X
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
» X
Q.13 An ideal spring with spring-constant k is hung from the ceiling and a block
of mass M is attached to its lower end. The mass is released with the spring in
itially unstretched. Then the maximum extension in the spring is [JEE (Scr.)'200
2] (A) 4 Mg/k (B) 2 Mg/k (C)Mg/k (D)Mg/2k Q.14 A spherical ball of mass m is kep
t at the highest point in the space between two fixed, concentric spheres Aand B
(see figure). The smaller sphere A has a radius R and the space between the two
spheres has a width d. The ball has a diameter veiy Sphere B slightly less than
d. All surfaces are frictionless. The ball is given a gentle push (towards the
right in the figure). The angle made by the radius vector ofthe ball with Sphere
A the upward vertical is denoted by 9 (shown in the figure). [JEE' 2002] (a) Ex
press the total normal reaction force exerted by the spheres on the ball as a fu
nction of angle 9. (b) Let N and N denote the magnitudes of the normal reaction
force on the ball exerted by the spheres A and B, respectively. Sketch the varia
tions of N and N as functions of cos0 in the range 0 < 9 < T by T drawing two se
parate graphs in your answer book, taking cos9 on the horizontal axes. Q.15 In a
region of only gravitational field of mass 'M' a particle is shifted from Ato B
via three different paths in the figure. The work done in different paths are W
,, W , W respectively then [JEE (Scr.)'2003] (A) W, = W = W (B) W, = w > w (C) W
j > W~ > w (D) Wi < W < W Q.16 A particle ofmass m, moving in a circular path of
radius R with a constant V2 V L speed v is located at point (2R, 0) at time t =
0 and a man starts moving with a velocity v, along the +ve y-axisfromorigin at t
ime t=0. (0,0) Calculate the linear momentum ofthe particle w.r.t. the man as a
function oftime. [JEE 2003] Q.17 A particle is placed at the origin and a force
F = kx is acting on it (where k is a positive constant). If U(0)=0, the graph of
U(x) versus x will be (where U is the potential energy function)
a B A B 2 3 2 3
2
3
3
2
3
2
U(x)
U(x)
U(x)
U(x)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
[JEE' 2004(Scr)]
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[13]
CENTRE OF MASS MOMENTUM & COLLISION The action of force with respect to time is
defined in terms of Impulse, that is, 1= j*Fdt = mv -mv =Ap
f i
In the absence of a net external force, the momentum of a system is conserved. d
P ^ ¥=Fe*t = 0 p = Pj + p + + p = constant
2 N
Graphically, impulse is the area under the F-t graph
o
~t
1. 2. (i) (ii) (iii) 3.
1.
Collision is a kind of interaction between two or more bodies which come in cont
act with each other for a very short time interval. Types of collision: Elastic
and Inelastic Collisions may be either elastic or inelastic. Linear momentum is
conserved in both cases. A perfectly elastic collision is defined as one in whic
h the total kinetic energy of the system is conserved. In an inelastic collision
, the total kinetic energy of the system changes. In a completely inelastic coll
ision, the two bodies couple or stick togehter. Coefficient of Restitution : It
is defined as the ratio of the velocity of separation to the velocity of approac
h of the two colliding bodies. rel. velocity of separation rel. velocity of appr
oach For a perfectly elastic collision, e = 1 For an inelastic collision, 0 < e
< 1 For completely inelastic collision, e = 0 Note that the velocity of approach
and the velocity of separation are always taken along the normal to the strikin
g surface. y CENTRE OF MASS f r. Discrete System : The position vector of the ce
ntre of mass is m r,+m r + +m r 3 y'H T HI3 ® ni4 c m!+m + m where fj, r ,..., r a
re the position vectors of masses m m ,..... m respectively. The components of t
he position vector of centre of mass are defined as
—
1
2
2
n
n
r
2
n
\
2
n
p
2
n
X
c
=
Zmixi . M '
Y c
_ Zm.yi . M '
Z
_ Zmizi ° M
2.
Continuous system: The centre of mass of a continuous body is defined as r = — fr
dm M In the component form
c c J
— Jfx dm '• M
v = M Jfydm '• —
c
z
c = — Jfzdm M
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[13]
3. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) 4.
Centre of Mass of Some Common Systems : A system oftwo point masses. The centre
of mass lie closer to the heavier mass. A circular cone h yc 4 A semi-circular r
ing 2R y = — ; x =0 TI
c
c c
I*
m,+m
M nii+mj
im
2
A semi-circular disc 4R yc = 3tt ;x = o A hemispherical shell R y c = 7 ;xc=0 A
solid hemisphere 3R
0!
X*
0'
®
(iii) (iv)
Motion of the centre of mass : Velocity: The instantaneous velocity of the centr
e of mass is defined as mv v„ X i i M Acceleration: The acceleration of the centre
of mass is defined as Xmia> c = M Momentum : The total momentum of a system of
particles is p = Mv Kinetic Energy: The kinetic energy of a system ofparticles c
onsisits of two parts. K = K + K' 1 2 where K - — Mv , kinetic energy due to motio
n of c.m. relative to the fixed origin O,
c
a
c
c
c
c
5.
<!§ Bansal Classes
Vand K' = 2_, ^1 i i2> kinetic energy of the particles relative to the c.m. Note
that the term K' may involve translational, rotational or vibrational energies
relative to the centre of mass. Newon's Laws of a system of particles: The first
and second laws of motion for a system of particles are modified as: First law:
The centre of mass of an isolated system is at rest or moves with constant velo
city. Second law: The net external force acting on a system of total of mass M i
s related to the acceleration of centre of mass of the system. I S ext M < l
m v
cm
Particle Dynamics
[13]
Q.l
A hemisphere ofradius R and ofmass 4m isfreeto slide with its base on a smooth h
orizontal table. A particle ofmass m is placed on the top ofthe hemisphere. Find
the angular velocity ofthe particle relative to hemisphere at an angular displa
cement 0 when velocity of hemisphere has become v.
(CENTRE OF MASS MOMENTUM & COLLISION) EXERCISE-I
A man whose mass is m kg jumps vertically into airfroma sitting position in whic
h his centre of mass is at a height hjfromthe ground. When his feet are just abo
ut to leave the ground his centre of mass is h from the ground andfinallyrises t
o h when he is at the top ofthe jump, (a) What is the average upward force exert
ed by the ground on him? (b) Find work done by normal reactionfromground. Q.3 In
thefigureshown, each tiny ball has mass m, and the string has length L. One of
the ball is imparted a velocity u, in the position shown, in which the initial d
istance between the balls is l / V3 . The motion ofball occurs on smooth horizon
tal plane. Find the impulse ofthe tension in the string when it becomes taut. Q.
4 Two trolleys A and B arefreeto move on a levelfiictionlesstrack, and are init
ially stationary. A man on trolley A throws a bag of mass 10 kg with a horizonta
l velocity of 4 m/s with respect to himself on to trolley B of mass 100 kg. The
combined mass of trolley A (excluding bag) and the man is 140 kg. Find the ratio
of velocities of trolleys A and B, just after the bag lands on trolley B.
2 3
Q.2
Q.5 Q.6 Q.7
A bob of mass m attached with a string of length I tied to a point on ceiling is
released from a position when its string is horizontal. At the bottom most poin
t of its motion, an identical mass m gently stuck to it. Find the anglefromthe v
ertical to which it rises. Two balls of equal masses are projected upward simult
aneously, one from the ground with speed 50 m/s and otherfroma 40 m high tower w
ith initial speed 30 m/s. Find the maximum height attained by their centre of ma
ss. 3 blocks of mass 1kg each kept on horizontal smooth ground are connected by
2 taut strings of length/as shown. Bis pulled with constant —' L-r-' — acceleration
a in direction shown. Find the relative velocity of A & C just before striking.
<>
A B 0 a
Q. 8 Q. 9
Find the distance of centre of mass from O of a composite solid cone and sol cyl
inder made of same material. Two blocks ofmass 3 kg and 6 kg respectively are pl
aced on a smooth horizontal surface. They are connected by a light spring. Initi
ally the spring is unstretched and the velocity of 2 m/s is imparted to 3 kg blo
ck as shown. Find the maximum 2.0m/s-6OT555W5V 6kg 3kg velocity of 6 kg block du
ring subsequent motion. i h I m h it / um m 11 h i n t n
Q.10 Two planks each ofmass m and length L are connected by africtionless,massle
ss hinge as shown in the figure. Initially the system is at rest on a level fiic
tionless surface. The vertical plank falls anticlockwise and fmaly comes to rest
on the top ofthe horizontal plank. Find the displacement ofthe hinge till the t
wo planks come in contact.
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[13]
Q.ll 2 bodies m, & m of mass 1 and 2 kg respectively are moving along x-axis und
er (' ) the influence of mutual force only. The velocity of their centre of mass
at a given instant is 2 m/s. The x coordinate of m is plotted against time. The
n plot the x coordinate of m against time. (Both are initially located at origin
)
2 x n m t 2
2 t(in sec)
Q.12 Two masses, nm and m, start simultaneouslyfromthe intersection oftwo straig
ht lines with velocities v and nv respectively. It is observed that the path of
their centre of mass is a straight line bisecting the angle between the given st
raight lines. Find the magnitude of the velocity of centre of inertia, (here 6 =
angle between the lines) Q.13 Two blocks of equal masses m are releasedfromthe
top of a smooth fixed wedge as shown in the figure. Find the magnitude ofthe acc
eleration of the centre of mass of the two blocks. Q.14 From a uniform circular
disc of radius R, a square is cut out with radius R as its diagonal. Find the ce
ntre of mass of remainder is at a distance, (from the centre) Q.15 A sphere of m
ass m j in motion hits directly another sphere of mass m, at rest and sticks to
it, the total kinetic energy after collision is 2/3 oftheir total K.E. before co
llision. Find the ratio ofm,: m .
2
Q.16 Two bodies of same mass tied with an inelastic string of length I lie toget
her. One of them is projected vertically upwards with velocity ^/6g/ . Find the
maximum height up to which the centre of mass of system of the two masses rises.
Q.17 Disc A of mass m collides with stationary disk B of mass 2m as shown in fi
gure. Find the value of coefficient of restitution for which the two disks move
in perpendicular direction after collision. Q.18 A force time (F -1) graph for l
inear motion is shown in the following figure. The segments shown are circular.
Find the linear momentum gained between 4 and 8 second.(Assume S.I. units) Q.19
A platform of mass m and a counter weight of mass (m + M) are connected by a lig
ht cord which passes over a smooth pulley. A man of mass M is standing on the pl
atform which is at rest. If the man leaps vertically upwards with velocity u,fin
dthe distance through which the platform will descend. Show that when the man me
ets the platform again both are in their original positions. Q.20 The figure sho
ws the positions and velocities of two particles. If the 5m/s 3 m/s ncg ^kg part
icles move under the mutual attraction of each other, thenfindthe x=2m x=8m « posi
tion of centre of mass at t = 1 s. Q.21 After scaling a wall of 3 m height a man
of weight W drops himself to the ground. If his body comes to a complete stop 0
.15 sec. After his feet touch the ground, calculate the average impulsive force
in the vertical direction exerted by ground on his feet, (g = 9.8 m/s ) Q.22 A h
eavy ball of mass 2m moving with a velocity u collides elastically 2 m head-on w
ith a cradle of three identical balls each of mass m as shown @@© in figure. Deter
mine the velocity of each ball after coll ision.
2 Q
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[13]
Q.L
Q.2
Q.3
(a)
(b) Q.4
A billiard table is 15 cm by 20 cm. A smooth bail of coefficient of restitution
e = 4/9 is projected from a point on the shorter side so as to describe a rectan
gle and return to the point ofproj ection after rebounding at each of the other
three cushions. Find the position ofthe point and the direction of projection. I
n a game of Carom Board, the Queen (a wooden disc of radius 2 cm and mass 50 gm)
is placed at the exact center of the horizontal board. The striker is a smooth
plastic disc of radius 3 cm and mass 100 gm. The board is fiictionless. The stri
ker is given an initial velocity 'u' parallel to the sides BC or AD so that it h
its the Queen inelastically with coefficient ofrestitution=2/3. The impact param
eter for the collision is'd' (shown in the figure). The Queen rebounds from the
edge AB of the board inelastically with same coefficient ofrestitution - 2/3 and
enters the hole D following the dotted path shown. The side of the board is L.
Find the value of impact parameter' d' and the time which the Queen takes to ent
er hole D after collision with the striker. Two particles each of mass m are con
nected by a light inextensible string and a particle of mass M is attached to th
e midpoint of the string. The system is at rest on a smooth horizontal table wit
h the string just taut and in a straight line. The particle M is given a velocit
y V along the table perpendicular to the string. Prove that when the two end par
ticles are about to collide: MV the velocity of M is (M + 2m) \ j 2M(M + m) the
speed of each of the other particles is (M + 2m) ~ V The Atwood machine in fig h
as a third mass attached to it by a limp string. After being released, the 2m ma
ss falls a distance x before the limp string becomes taut. Thereafter both the m
ass on the left rise at the same speed. What is the final speed ? Assume that pu
lley is ideal.
miiiiiiiiiiiiiii
EXERCISE-II
Q.5
Q.6
Q.7
<!§ Bansal Classes
Two scale pans, each of mass m, are connected by a light inelastic string which
passes over a small smooth fixed light pulley. On one scale pan there is an inel
astic particle A of mass 2m. The system is released from rest with the hanging p
arts of the string vertical. Find the tension in the string and the acceleration
of either scale pan. At the instant when motion begins, a particle of mass 3 m
is allowed tr fallfromrest and after t seconds it strikes, and adheres to, A. Fi
nd the impulsive tension in the string and the velocity of either scale pan imme
diately after the impact. Three spheres, each of mass m, can slidefreelyon afiic
tionless,horizontal surface. Spheres A and B are attached to an inextensible ine
lastic cord of length / and are at rest in the position shown when sphere B is s
truck directly by sphere C which is moving to the right with a velocity v . Know
ing that the cord is taut when sphere B is struck by sphere C and assuming perfe
ctly elastic impact between B and C, determine the velocity of each sphere immed
iately after impact. A wedge ofmass M=2m rests on a smooth horizontal plane. A s
mall block of mass m rests over it at left end A as shown in figure. A sharp imp
ulse is B applied on the block, due to which it starts moving to the right with
velocity ? cm v, 6 ms . At highest point ofits traj ectory, the block collides w
ith a particle of same mass m moving vertically downwards with velocity v=2 ms a
nd J A M gets stuck with it. If the combined body lands at the end point A of bo
dy of A rrn,// mass M, calculate length /. Neglectfriction(g=10 ms )
Q -1
2 0
-1
/7777777777777777V
7/V7//777 7 7 7
-2
Particle Dynamics
[13]
Q.8
Q.9
(a)
(b) Q.10 Q.ll Q.12 Q.13
Q.14 (a) (b) Q.15
Q.16 Two towers AB and CD are situated a distance d apart as shown in fig. AB is
20 m high and CD is 3 0 m highfromthe ground. An obj ect of mass m is thrown fr
om the top ofAB horizontally with a velocity 10 m/s towards CD. Simultaneously a
nother object of mass 2m is thrown from the top of CD at an angle of 60° to the ho
rizontal towards AB with the same magnitude of initial velocity as that of the f
irst object. The two objects move in the same vertical plane, collide in mid air
and stick to each other (a) Calculate the distance d between the towers and (b)
findthe position where the objects hit the ground?
<!§ Bansal Classes
A ball of mass = 1 Kg is hung vertically by a thread of length / = 1.50 m. Upper
end ofthe thread is attached to the ceiling of a trolley of mass M = 4 kg. Init
ially, 1.50m trolley is stationary and it isfreeto move along horizontal rails w
ithoutfriction.A m M J C shell ofmass m = 1 kg moving horizontally with velocity
v =6ms" collides with //////////////////////// the ball and gets stuck with it.
As a result, thread starts to deflect towards right. mWuummuHumrmmi Calculate i
ts maximum deflection with the vertical, (g = 10m s ) A 70g ball B droped from a
height h = 9 m reaches a height h = 0.25m after bouncing twice from identical 2
1 Og plates. W/W//M ' (X Plate A rests directly on hard ground, while plate C re
sts on a foam-rubber mat. Determine CV b the coefficient of resitution between t
he ball and the plates, AV the height h, of the ball's first bounce. A sphere of
mass m is moving with a velocity 41 - j when it hits a smooth wall and rebounds
with velocity i + 3 j. Find the impulse it receives. Find also the coefficient o
frestitution between the sphere and the wall. A sphere A is of mass m and anothe
r sphere B of identical size but of mass 2m, move towards each other with veloci
ty [ + 2 j and - i + 3 j respectively. They collide when their line of centre is
parallel to i - j. If e = 1/2, find the velocities of A and B after impact. A b
all of mass m = 1 kg falling vertically with a velocity v =2 m/s strikes a wedge
of mass M = 2kg kept on a smooth, horizontal surface as shown in figure. The co
efficient ofrestitution between the ball and the wedge is e = 112. Find the velo
city ofthe wedge and the ball immediately after collision. A cannon isfixedon a
plank of mass nij which is kept on smooth horizontal surface. On smooth surface
of plank, a mass m is kept as shown above. If m? u = 0 shells of mass m each are
firedfromcanon at the rate ofN per second with m, velocity u relative to mj, an
d the mass of shell is « mass m find velocity of m & m as function of time. A chai
n of length I and m lies in a pile on the floor. It its end A is raised vertical
ly at a constant speed v , express in terms of the length y of chain which is of
f the floor at any given instant. the magnitude of the force P applied to end A.
the reaction of the floor, (c) energy lost during the lifting of the chain. Two
blocks A and B of masses m and 2m respectively are connected by a spring of for
ce constant k. The masses are moving to the right with uniform velocity v each,
the heavier mass leading the lighter one. The spring in between them is of natur
al length during the motion. Block B B collides with a third block C of mass m,
at rest. The collision being K 2m v m completely inelastic. Calculate the maximu
m compression ofthe spring. - m
() 1
m
-2
0
2
7777777777777777777
Q
2
p
1
?
0
A
>
77/777777777777777
Particle Dynamics
[13]
EXERCISE-III
Q.l
A set of n-identical cubical blocks lie at rest parallel to each other along a l
ine on a smooth horizontal surface. The separation between the near surfaces of
any two adj acent blocks is L. The block at one end is given a speed V towards t
he next one at time t = 0. All colisions are completely inelastic, then (i) the
last block starts moving at t = n(n -1 )L/(2v) (ii) the last block starts moving
at t= (n -1 )L/v (iii) the centre of mass of the system will have a final speed
v/n (iv) the centre of mass of the system will have a final speed v. [IIT 95] A
small bucket of mass M (=10~ kg) is attached to a long cord of length L (= 5 x
10~ m). The bucket is released from rest when the cord is in a horizontal positi
on. In its lowest position the bucket scoops up m(= 10 kg) of water, what is the
height of the swing above the lowest position [REE 95]
2 2 _3
Q.2 Q.3
A small sphere of radius R is held against the inner surface of a larger sphere
of radius 6R. The masses of large and small spheres are 4M and M respectively. T
his arrangement is placed on a horizontal table. There is no friction between an
y surfaces of contact. The small sphere is now released. Find the coordinates of
the centre of the large sphere when the smaller sphere reaches the other extrem
e position. [IIT 96] Q.4 A body of mass 5kg moves along the x axis with a veloci
ty 2m/s. A second body of mass 1 Okg moves along the y axis with a velocity V3 m
/s. They collide at the origin and stick together. Calculate (i) the final veloc
ity ofthe combined mass after collision (ii) the amount of heat liberated in the
collision. [REE 96] Q.5 An isolated particle of mass m is moving in a horizonta
l plane (x-y) along the x-axis at a certain height above the ground. It suddenly
explodes into twofragmentsof masses m/4 and 3m/4. An instant later the smaller
fragment is at y = +15 cm. The largerfragmentat this instant is at [IIT 97] (A)
y = -5cm (B)y = + 20cm (C)y = + 5cm (D)y = -20cm Q.6 A cart is moving along +x d
irection with a velocity of 4m/s. A person in the cart throws a stone with a vel
ocity of 6m/s relative to himself. In theframeof reference of the cart the stone
is thrown in y-z plane making an angle of 3 0° with the vertical z-axis. At the h
ighest point of its trajectory, the stone hits an object of equal mass hung vert
icallyfrombranch of a tree by means of a string of length L. A completely inelas
tic collision occurs, in which the stone gets embedded in the object. Determine
(a) the speed ofthe combined mass immediately after the collision with respect t
o an observer on the ground. (b) the length L of the string such that the tensio
n in the string becomes zero when the string becomes horizontal during the subse
quent motion ofthe combined mass. [IIT 97] Q.7 A particle ofmass m and velocity
v collides elastically and obliquely with a stationary particle ofmass m. Calcul
ate the angle between the velocity vectors of the two particles after the collis
ion. [REE 97] Q. 8 Two blocks of mass 2kg and M are at rest on an indiclined pla
ne and are separated by a distance of 6.0m as shown. The coefficient of friction
between each of the blocks and the inclined plane is 0.25. The 2kg block is giv
en a velocity of 10.Om/s up the inclined plane. It collides with M, comes back a
nd has a velocity of 1.0m/s when it reaches its initial position. The other bloc
k M after the collision moves 0.5m up and comes to rest. Calculate the coefficie
nt of restitution between the blocks and the mass of the block M. [Take sin9 * t
anG = 0.05 and g = 10m/s ] [IIT 99]
2
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[13]
Q.9 Two trolleys A and B of equal masses M are moving in oppsite directions with
velocities y and - v respectively on separate horizontal fiictionless parallel
tracks. When they start crossing each other, a ball of mass m is thrownfromB to
A and another of same mass is thrown from A to B with velocities normal to y • The
balls may be thrown in following two ways: (i) ballsfromA to B and B to A are t
hrown simultaneously. (ii) ball is thrown from A to B after the ball thrown from
B reaches A. Which procedure would lead to a larger change in the velocities of
the trolleys? [REE 2000] Q.10 A wind-powered generator converts wind energy int
o electrical energy. Assume that the generator converts a fixed fraction of the
wind energy intercepted by its blades into electrical energy. For wind speed v,
the electrical power output will be proportional to: [IIT (Scr) 2000] (A)v (B) v
(C) v (D) v
2 3 4
Q. 11 Two particles of masses m, and m in projectile motion have velocities v, a
nd v respectively at time t=0. They collide at time t . Their velocities become
vj and v, at time 2t while still moving in air. The value of [(nijVj + m v ) - (
nijVj + m,v )j is [IIT (Scr) 2001] (A) zero (B) (m, + m )gt (C) 2(1X1, + m )gt (
D) ^(m, + m )gt
2 2 0 0 2 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0
Q.12 A car P is moving with a uniform speed of 5(3 ) m/s towards a carriage of m
ass 9 Kg at rest kept on the rails at a point B as shown infig.The height AC is
120 m. Cannon balls of 1 Kg arefiredfrom the car with an initial velocity 100 m/
s at an angle 30° with the horizontal. Thefirstcanon ball hits the stationary carr
iage after a time t and sticks to it. Determine t . At t , the second cannon bal
l isfired.Assume that the resistive force between the rails and the carriage M M
is constant and ignore the vertical motion of the carriage throughout. If the ~
p second ball also hits and sticks to the carriage. What will be the horizontal
1 velocity ofthe carriage just after the second impact? [IIT 2001] A B
1/2 0 0 0
Q.13 Two block of masses 10 kg and 4 kg are connected by a spring of negligible
mass and placed on a fiictionless horizontal surface. An impulse gives a velocit
y of 14 m/s to the heavier block in the direction of the lighter block. The velo
city of the centre of mass is: [IIT (Scr) 2002] (A) 30 m/s (B) 20 m/s (C) 10 m/s
(D)5m/s
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[13]
ANSWER KEY (NEWTONS LAW FORCE & FRICTION) EXERCISE-I
Q.l Q.3 Q.4 Q.7 Q.8
contact force between the block and the belt is 10.5 N 306 N , 4.7 m/s
2
Q.2 Q.6 Q.ll
35 kg
2 sec Q.5 1 sec 100 N towards left Q.9
2
x > x , > x x j : x : x : 1 5 :18 :10
2 3 2 3
1kg
Q.10 3 N Q.15 300 N 4 Q.19 - sec Q.23 a
Q.12 12 N Q.13 7.5 msQ.17 5 Q.21 40 N
^m] - 2 m ^ 2m 2 J
2
Q.14 10/3 kg Q.18 2 sec Q.22 tan1 v
Q.16 55 Q-20 | 1 Q.25 5 sec and - m
3V3y
Q.24 1/2 sec
EXERCISE-II
m sin 0 cos 9 (a) a = g cotO, (b) u Q.2 2V2 mcos 0 + M a = 12g/25 , ag = 9g/25 ,
N = 12mg/25 3mg Q.4 (a) a =3g^= a ; a =0; T=mg/2; (b) a =2gt, a =2g4, a=0, T=0;
(c) a =a = g/2t, a =gl, T=—7 T=2mg -^ '2 Q.5 2g/23 15x300 Q.6 T = 32 Q.7 (a) r) =
—; (b) acceleration = 4 m/s ' | Q.l Q.3
2 A A A H c A B A B N a = m / s 2 2
Q.8
(a) 2ra/s*
<45"
2
(b) 22.5 m/s ; (c) -275 m; (d) —
2 2
sec
2 2 2
Q.9 (a) (i) a, = a, = 3.2 m/s , (ii) a, = 5.75 m/s , a, = 2m/s ; (b) a, = 5 m/s
,a = -l0/3 m/s Q.10 (i)90N,(ii) 112.5N(iii) 15ON Q.ll =0.4 , = 0.3 mg cot a Q.12
Ar=——5-—,1cm 4ft k
2
Q.13 F
mgu Q.3 B A
[13]
2(1 - n K ) EXERCISE-III
Q.l B Q.2 (i) zero, (ii) can't be determined, (iii) can't be determined Q.4 (b)
a = 3/5 m/s , T = 18 N, F = 60N Q.5 C Q.6 D Q.7 Q.8 11.313m
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
(CIRCULAR MOTION & WORK POWER EXERCISE-I
ENERGY)
CD X «
Q.l Q.5 Q.9
Q.2 Q.6
2
1 2 2
Q.3 Q.7 Q.ll Q.15 3 V 3
2 tan6 -1 m v2 -ka /4
2
Q.4 Q.8
- 1J 9 VTo m/s
2
Q.13 80 kW Q.17
9a/2
Q.22 - 3k rad/s , - 2k rad/s Q.21 625 J Q.23 (a) 2 rad/s , (b) 12+2t for t < 2s,
16 for t>2s,(c) ^28565 ~ 169,256 m/s (d) 44rad Q.24 0.1875 Q.25 P
2 2 2
T^. -+->
2 4
2V2V 71R 4^5 m/s
2m g k Q.10 9 Q.14 ^2g rad/s Q.18 — m
i IS
Q.12 (l-V3/2)mg Q.16 6mg Q.20 2 sec
1 Q.19 - j T rad/s
EXERCISE-II
Q.l Q-
F = -3ax + b, x
2
, KE
2
2b b 3V3
Q.2
2 m/s
Q.3
v = v , 57ia/v
0
0
N=^^ /ra) -l
g
Q.5 Q.6
(i) ^,(ii)2V^g, 2a 500N/m
:
Q.7 40
(a) V2 r, (b) h =
2
19r
, (c) g Q.8
N
1.19R Q.9
V 2
R=0.2m, ION R(vt-R)v.1/2 (2Rt-vt )
2 3/2
Q.ll u = vsec9, v A/41 m/s Q.13 up, 10cm N Q.l Q.3 Q.8
mg
max
R Q.12 a = (2Rt-vt ) '
EXERCISEIII
Q.14 9 =7r/2, T=mg(3sin9+3cos9-2)
Q.15 4, -J^fis
25 Q.16 24
> Vo> , a=5V3 g/8, N=3mg/8 if C
Q.2 Q.5
(i)36N,(ii) 11.66rad/sec,(iii) 0.1m, 0.2m D Q.6 V u = - J g | 3 2 3 y Q.7 Q.13 B
Q.12 D
L + 2
F=-8mgi-mgj, h=3R Q.4 A Q.9 A
A
Q.10 5.79 m/'s
Q.ll C
<!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[13]
Q.14 (a) N=3mg cosG - 2mg, (b)
p = m v
mg
Mng
PM
P M
I CS O0 cos0~ 2/3 0=| COS0--1 cos0— 2/3 =-mv sincoti+m(v cosa)t-v )j
COS 2 2 1
Q.15 A Q.17 A
COS0
(CENTRE OF MASS & MOMENTUM) EXERCISE-I
Q.l
5v RcosG
1
Q-2 Q.6
-6m
(a)
mg(h -h ) _ ;(b)0
3 2 ( h 2 h ; )
Q.3 2^2V
Q 1 3
[muV3] —-— Q.8 e/
2 Q
Q.4 Q.9 R 4 ^
11/14 4/3 m/s
Q
Q.5 cos" (3/4) Q.10 L/4 Q.16 I Q.21 6.21 W Q.l Q.2
Q
100m Q.12
Q.7
5h ~ '
1 4
Q.ll
2J
1 2
0
2nvcos(0/2) T H
Q.19 v
-
1 5 2 : 1
Q.17 1 2
Q.18
+2TI N - s
=
Q.22 v,heavy ball }h ' 27 Q.4 M -A
Vfirst
Mu^ „ 2g(M + 2m) Q.20 x = 6m 4Ur 4u 4Ur ball 27 ' Second ball g ' third ball 3
.
N
=
f
=
V
x = 3 units, tanG = 2/3 5/VT7 cm, 153L/80U V208 '0
1 5
EXERCISE-II
'
6
8 4v 0
1 5
Q.5
22
14
7
9_
16
Q.7
40cm
Q.8
37°
Q.9
(a) 0.66, (b)4 m Q.10 impulse = m(-3i + 4j), e
22 ? 2
Q.ll I ( - i + 7 j ) i ( - i + 9j) Q.12 Vj = ^/J m/s, vv = m/s, = m Q.14 (a)y(gy
+ v 2),(b)mg
0 N n 2
V
(m,+m ) m/s Q.13 v=u /n| mj+m -Nmt , mv y ^ ,„ mv2 ^ 27~ Vllk ' (0 10V3, (ii)l 1.5
4 from AB IJ '
Q Q 1 6
EXERCISE-III
2
Q.l (iX (iii) Q.5 A Q.8 e= •5 + V3
8
Q.2 4.13 x 10~ m Q.3(L + 2R,0) Q.6 2.5 m, 0,319 m Q.7 90° , M=^kg,
11 26
Q.4
4/3 m/s, 35/3 J
Q.9
2 in case I
Q.10 C
Q.ll C
Q.12 t = 12 sec, v = 100V3
<!§ Bansal Classes
Q.13 C
Particle Dynamics
[13]
| BANSALCLASSES
^ TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XII (ALL)
QUESTION BANK ON
QUESTION FOR SHORT
ANSWER
Q. 1 Fluorescent light bulbs are usually more efficient light emitters than inca
ndescent bulbs. That is, for the same input energy, the fluorescent bulb gives o
ffmore light than the incandescent bulb. Carefully touch a fluorescent bulb and
in an incandescent one after each has been lit for a few minutes. Explain why th
e incandesent bulb is a less efficient light emitter. Q. 2 Birds perch on high t
ension wires all the time. Why are they not electrocuted, even when they perch o
n a part ofthe wire where the insulation has worn off? Q.3 Explain why touching
an exposed circuit wire when you are in a damp basement is much more dangerous t
han touching the same wire when you are on the second floor. Q.4 Initiallly, a s
ingle resistor R, is wired to a battery. Then resistor R is added in parallel. A
re (a) the potential difference across R, and (b) the current through R, now mor
e than, less than, or the same as previously? (c) Is the equivalent resistance R
ofR, and R, more than, less than, or equal to Rj? (d) Is the total current thro
ugh R, and R, together more than, less than, or equal to the current through R p
reviously? Q.5 A current enters the top of a copper sphere of radius R and leave
s through the diametrically opposite point, are all parts equally effective in d
issipating joule heat? Q. 6 How can an electric heater designed for 220 V be ado
pted for 110 V without changing the length ofthe coil and also without a change
in the consumed power? Q. 7 The brilliance oflamps in a room noticeably drops as
soon as a high power electric iron is switched on and after a short interval, t
he bulbs regain their original brilliance. Explain. Q. S Consider a circuit cont
aining an ideal battery connected to a resistor. Do "work done by the battery" a
nd " the thermal energy developed" represent two names of the same physical quan
tity? Q.9 A current is passed through a steel wire which gets heated to a dull r
ed. then halfthe wire is immersed in cold water. The portion out of the water be
comes brighter. Why? Q.10 Anon ideal battery is connected to a resistor. Is work
done by the battery equal to the thermal energy developed in the resistor? Does
your answer change ifthe battery is ideal? Q.ll For manual control ofthe curren
t ofa circuit, two rheostats in parallel are preferable to a single rheostat. Wh
y? Q.12 The drift velocity of electrons is quite small. How then does a bulb lig
ht up as soon as the switch is turned on, although the bulb may be quite farfrom
the switch? Q.13 Some times it is said that "heat is developed" in a resistance
when there is an electric current in it. Recall that heat is defined as the ener
gy being transferred due to the temperature difference. Is the statement under q
uotes technically correct? Q.14 Does emfhave electrostatic origin? Q.15 The resi
stance ofthe human body is about lOkQ. Ifthe resistance ofour body is so large,
why does one experience a strong shockfroma live wire of220 V supply ? Q.16 Woul
d you prefer a voltmeter or a potentiometer to measure the emf of a battery? Q.1
7 Can the potential difference across a battery be greater than its emf?
2 12
<!§Bansal
Classes
Question Bank On Current Electricity
[3]
Q. 1 A storage battery is connected to a charger for charging with a voltage of
12.5 Volts. The internal resistance of the storage battery is lfi. When thecharg
ing current is0.5A,theemfofthe storage batteryis: (A) 13 Volts (B) 12.5 Volts (C
) 12 Volts (D) 11.5 Volts Q. 2 Under what condition current passing through the
resistance R can be El r, ft increased by short circuiting the battery ofemfE .
The internal resistances —| I—.AAA/* 1 I—J\AAA— of the two batteries are r and r respect
ively. (A)E rj >Ej (R + r ) (B) E r > E 2 ( R + r l ) • wR w (C) E r >E1(R + r ) (
D) E ^ > E (R + r,)
2
r
2
L
2
2
2
t
2
2
2
2
2
Q.3
£
Q.4
A battery consists of a variable number n ofidentical cells having internal resi
stance connected in series. The terminals of the battery are short circuited and
the current I measured. Which one of the graph below shows the relationship bet
ween I and n?
(B) -
(C)2 o
(E)S o
i X
Q.5 Q.6
In previous problem, if the cell had been connected in parallel (instead of in s
eries) which of the above graphs would have shown the relationship between total
current I and n? (C)(D)(E) -
n identical cells are j oined in series with its two cells A and B in the loop w
ith reversed polarities. EMF of each shell is E and internal resistance r. Poten
tial difference across cell A or B is (here n>4) r 2E 4E (B)2E 1 —1 (D)2E (A) n (C
) n v n, v n In the figure shown, battery 1 has emf = 6 V and internal resistanc
e = 1 O. Battery 2 has emf = 2V and internal resistance=3 Q. The wires have negl
igible resistance. What is the potential difference across the terminals ofbatte
ry 2 ? (A) 4 V (B) 1.5 V (C) 5 V (D)0.5V
\ \1-Wv-
in
3Q
Q. 7 The terminal voltage across a battery of emfE can be fy m^-(A)0 (B)>E (C)<E
cjf
Q.8
s t
\v
A circuit is comprised of eight identical batteries and a resistor R = 0.8Q. Eac
h battery has an emf of 1.0 V and internal resistance of 0.2Q. The voltage diffe
rence across any ofthe battery is (A) 0.5 V (B)1.0V (C) 0 V (D) 2 V
iwy^
<!§Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.9
Q.10 Q.ll 0*
€
9/
Q.12
£-
Q.13
In order to determine the e.mf. of a storage battery it was connected in series
with a standard cell in a certain circuit and a current Ij was obtained. When th
e batteiy is connected to the same circuit opposite to the standard cell a curre
nt \ flow in the external circuit from the positive pole ofthe storage battery w
as obtained. What is the e.m.f. s of the storage battery? The e.m.f. of the stan
dard cell is s . (C)s,= I1-I2 (D)e 1 , - 1 ( B ) M+h (A) 6,= h+h I2-I1 I, +u I1-
I2 In the network shown the potential difference between A and B A-^jwv is(R = r
= r = r i a , E = 3Y,E = 2 V E = l V ) (B) 2 V (A) 1 V (D)4 V (C) 3 V Two batte
ries one ofthe emf 3 V, internal resistance 1 ohm and the other of emf 15 V, int
ernal resistance 2 ohm are connected in series with a resistance R as shown. If
the 3V,IQ 15V.2Q potential difference between a and b is zero the resistance ofR
in ohm is R VvVv (A) 5 (B)7 (C)3 (D)l A wire oflength L and 3 identical cells o
fnegligible internal resistances are connected in series. Due to the current, th
e temperature of the wire is raised by AT in time t. N number of similar cells i
s now connected in series with a wire ofthe same material and cross section but
of length 2L. The temperature of the wire is raised by the same amount AT in the
same time t. The value ofN is : (A) 4 (B) 6 (C) 8 (D) 9 A cell of emf E has an
internal 1 esistance r & is connected to rheostat. When resistance R of rheostat
is changed correct graph of potential difference across it is
} 2 6l 1 2 3 1 2 ; 3
(A)
v
(B)
R
(D)
Q.14 The battery in the diagram is to be charged by the generator G. The generat
or has a terminal voltage of 120 volts when the charging current isl 0 amperes.
The battery has an emf of 100 volts and an internal resistance of 1 ohm. In orde
r to charge the battery at 10 amperes charging current, the resistance R should
be set at (A) 0.1 Q (B) 0.5 H (cjl.on (D)5.0Q Q.15 Two current elements P and Q
have current voltage characteristics as shown below: a, 1 r
10
100 V, l f i
y?
r
10 P.D. (Volt) P.D. (Volt) Which ofthe graphs given below represents current vol
tage characteristics when P and Q are in series. 2 '/ " E 1, Ii _ J i1 (A) (B) ~
10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 P.D. rvoit) P.P. Ofclt)
2
2 r
P.D. (Volt)
P.D.fVWt)
<!§Bansal
Classes
[3]
Q. 16 A wire of cross-section area A, length L,, resistivity p and temperature c
oefficient of resistivity otj is connected to a second wire oflength L , resisti
vity p , temperature coefficient of resistivity a and the same area A, so that w
ire carries same current. Total resistance R is independent of temperature for O
small temperature change if (Thermal expansion effect is negligible) (A) a ! =
- a (B)p L a +p L a = 0 (C) Lj a j + L a = 0 (D)None
t 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
Q.17 Resistances Rj and R each 600 are connected in series as shown in figure. T
he Potential difference between A and B is kept 120 volt. Then what will be the
reading of voltmeter connected between the point C & D if resistance of voltmete
r is 120fi. (A) 48 V (B) 24 V (C) 40V (D) None
2
R, R, WA Xww-T^
C
Q.18 The resistance of all the wires between any two adjacent dots is R. Then eq
uivalent resistance between A and B as shown infigureis : £ . (A) 7/3 R (B) 7/6 R
(C) 14/8 R (D) None of these Q.19 Consider an infinte ladder network shown infig
ure.A voltage V is applied between the points A and B. This applied value ofvolt
age is halved after each section.
(A^/R^l
(B) Rj/R^ -1/2
(QR^-2
(0)^/^ =3
See
Q.20 AB CD is a square where each side is a uniform wire of resistance 1Q. A poi
nt E lies on CD such that if a uniform wire of resistance 1Q is connected across
AE and constantpotentialdifferenceisappliedacrossAandCthenBandEareequipotential
. CE CE 1 CE CE CD) -V2 ED " i5= < ' e 5 VI
( A ) 1 ( B ) 2 c = S
'V
Q.21 In order to increase the resistance of a given wire of uniform cross sectio
n to four times its value, a 3 fraction ofits length is stretched uniformly till
the full length of the wire becomes — times the original length what is the value
ofthis fraction? 1 1 (A) 4 (C) 16 8 Ri Q. 22 In the given circuit the current f
lowing through the resistance 20 ohms is 0.3 — W v ampere while the ammetre reads
0.8 ampere. What is the value ofRj ? —*•—VvVV (A) 30 ohms (B) 40 ohms (C) 50 ohms (D)
60 ohms 150 —WvV
I
<!§Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.23 The circuit diagram shown consists of a large number of element (each eleme
nt has two resistors R, and R^). The resistance of the resistors in each subsequ
ent element differs by a factor of K = 1/2 from the resistance ofthe resistors i
n the previous elements. The equivalent reistance between A and B shown in / fig
ure is:
(A) (C)
RJ - R J
(B)
A 2 1 2
(R -R ) +
1 2
V6R R
1
2
(Rj - R ) + /Rf + R + 6R R
2
(D) None of these
Q.24 Abrass disc and a carbon disc of same radius are assembled alternatively to
make a cylindrical conductor. The resistance of the cylinder is independent of
the temperature. The ratio of thickness ofthe brass disc to that of the carbon d
isc is [a is temperature coefficient of resistance & Neglect linear expansion ]
>
(A)
a
a
BPl3
cPc
(B)
a PB
c
«BPC
(C)
a Pc
B
O-CPB
(D) c P c
B a
a PB
Q.25 In the circuit shown, what is the potential difference V Q?
(A) + 3 V (B) + 2 V (C)-2V
P
rVWV 2Ci ^2V ,4V iy (D)none -WA—'-VAVH
3R 6R
S
<
V
R Q.26 In the circuit shown infigurereading ofvoltmeter is Vj when only S j is h
v w w H closed, reading ofvoltmeter is V when only S is closed. The reading _ o
fvoltmeter is V when both S and S are closed then L-® (B)V >V >V (A)V >V >V (D)V >
V >V (C)V >V >V
2 2 3 l 2 2 1 3 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 3
2
Q.27 One end of a Nichrome wire of length 2L and cross-sectional area Ais attatc
hed to an end of another Nichrome wire oflength L and cross-sectional area 2A. I
fthefreeend ofthe longer wire is at an electric potential of 8.0 voits, and the
free end of the shorter wire is at an electric potential of 1.0 volt, the potent
ial at the junction of the two wires is equal to (A) 2.4 V (B) 3.2 V (C)4.5V (D)
5.6V
i
Q.28 In the diagram resistance between any two junctions is R. Equivalent resist
ance across terminals Aand B is 11R 18R 7R 11R CD) 18 (C) 11 (A) (B) 11 Q.29 Pow
er generated across a uniform wire connected across a supply is H. If the wire i
s cut into n equal parts and all the parts are connected in parallel across the
same supply, the total power generated in the wire is H H (C)nH (B)n H (D) n (A)
"a n <!§Bansal Classes Question Bank On Current Electricity [3]
2
t
Q.30 A constant voltage is applied between the two ends of a uniform metallic wi
re. Some heat is developed in it. The heat developed is doubled if (A) both the
length and the radius ofthe wire are halved. (B) both the length and the radius
of the wire are doubled (C) the radius of the wire is doubled (D) the length oft
he wire is doubled Q.31 When electric bulbs of same power, but different marked
voltage are connected in series across the power line, their brightness will be:
(A) proportional to their marked voltage Is (B) inversely proportional to their
marked voltage (C) proportional to the square oftheir marked voltage (D) invers
ely proportional to the square oftheir marked voltage (E) the same for all ofthe
m Q.32 Two bulbs rated (25 W - 220V) and (100W- 220V) are connected in series to
a 440 Vline. Which one is likely to fuse? (A) 25 W bulb (B) 100 W bulb (C) both
bulbs (D)none Q.33 Rate of dissipation of Joule's heat in resistance per unit v
olume is (symbols have usual meaning) (A)oE (B)oJ (C) JE (D) None Q.34 The charg
e flowing through a resistance R varies with time as Q = 2t - 8t . The total hea
t produced in the 1 resistance is (for 0 < t <—)
2
R (A) — joules
R (B) — joules
R (C) — joules
(D)Rjoules
Q.35 A total charge Q flows aero ss a resistor R during a time interval = T in s
uch a way that the current vs. time graph for 0 -» T is like the loop of a sin cur
ve in the range 0 -» n. The total heat generated in the \ resistor is (A) Q27C R /
8T (B)2Q ti R/T (C)2Q TIR/T (D) Q V R / 2 T
2
2
2
2
Q.36 If the length of thefilamentof a heater is reduced by 10%, the power ofthe
heater will (A) increase by about 9% (B) increase by about 11 % (C) increase by
about 19% (D) decrease by about 10% Q.37 Aheater Agives out 300 W of heat when c
onnected to a 200 V d.c. supply. A second heater B gives out 600 W when connecte
d to a 200 v d.c. supply. If a series combination of the two heaters is connecte
d C (r '} O "to a 200 V d.c. supply the heat output will be (A) 100 W (B) 450 W
(C) 300 W (D)200W Q.38 Two bulbs one of200 volts, 60 watts & the other of200 vol
ts, 100 watts are connected in series to a £ 200 volt supply. The power consumed w
ill be (A) 37.5 watt (B) 160 watt (C) 62.5 watt (D) 110 watt
.
<!§Bansal
Classes
[3]
£
39 In the circuit shown the cells are ideal and of equal emfs, the capacitance o
f the capacitor is C and the resistance of the resistor is R. X isfirstjoined to
Y and then to Z. After a long time, the total heat produced in the resistor wil
l be -ji+A (A) equal to the energyfinallystored in the capacitor (B) half ofthe
energyfinallystored in the capacitor SIIM^t'(C) twice the energyfinallystored in
the capacitor (D) 4 times the energyfinallystored in the capacitor t-ws— Q 40 Thr
ee 60 W light bulbs are mistakenly wired in series and connected to a 120 V powe
r supply Assume the light bulbs are rated for single connection to 120 V With th
e mistaken connection, the power dissipated by each bulb is: (A) 6.7 W (B) 13.3
W (C)20W (D)40W
R
Q.41 The ratio of powers dissipatted respectively in R and 3R, as shown is: (A)
9 (B) 27/4 (C) 4/9 (D) 4/27 Q. 42 In thefigureshown the power generated in y is
maximum wheny=5Q. Then R is C (A) 2 H (B)6Q (C) 5f2 (D) 3 Q
2R
3R
lOV^r 2Q
R 3
R: :3on
£
^
Q. 43 In the circuit shown, the resistances are given in ohms and the so n i—VWvba
tteiy is assumed ideal with emfequal to 3.0 volts. The resistor i R ^60 Q that d
issipates the most power is % $50 Q i — 3V(C)R (d)R
3 4
Q. 44 What amount ofheat will be generated in a coil ofresistance R due to a cha
rge q passing through it if the current in the coil decreases to zero uniformly
during a time interval At 1 (2At) 2q R (B)/n ^ R (D)ln (A) (C) 3At 2At
2
Q.45 The variation ofcurrent (I) and voltage (V) is as shown infigureA. The vari
ation of power P with current / is best shown by which ofthe following graph P"
. T . (B) / (C) T I T 20Q Q. 46 In a galvanometer, the deflection becomes one ha
lfwhen the galvanometer is A/WVshunted by a 20Q resistor. The galvanometer resis
tance is i/2 £ (A) 5Q (B) 10Q (C) 40H (D) 20Q - i i/2 Rg
P
<!§Bansal
Classes
[3]
tig
Sx
Q.47 When a galvanometer is shunted with a 4 0 resistance, the deflection is red
uced to one-fifth. If the galvanometer is further shunted with 2 0 wire, the fur
ther reduction in the deflection will be (the main current remains same) (A) —~ of
the deflection when shunted with 4 0 only 5 (B) ~ of the deflection when shunte
d with 4 0 only 3 (C) — ofthe deflection when shunted with 4Q only 3 (D) — of the de
flection when shunted with 4 0 only Q. 48 A galvanometer has a resistance of 200
and readsfoil-scalewhen 0.2 V is applied across it. To convert it into a 10 A a
mmeter, the galvanometer coil should have a (A) 0.010 resistor connected across
it (B) 0.020 resistor connected across it (C) 2000 resistor connected in series
with it (D) 2000 O resistor connected in series with it
« Q .49 A milliammeter of range 10 mA and resistance 9 O is joined in a circuit as
shown. The metre gives full-scale deflection for current I when A and B are use
d as its terminals, i. e., current enters at A and leaves at B (C is left isolat
ed). The value ofI is (A) 100 mA (B) 900 mA (C) 1A (D)1.1A 9 Q 10 mA
8
—V#v— -WA— 0.9 Q 0.1 Q
B
C
Q. 50 Agalvanometer coil has a resistance 90 O and full scale deflection current
10 mA. A 9100 resistance is connected in series with the galvanometer to make a
voltmeter. Ifthe least count of the voltmeter is 0. IV, the number of divisions
on its scale is (A) 90 (B) 91 (C) 100 (D) none Q.51 In the circuit shown the re
sistance ofvoltmeter is 10,000 ohm and that ofammeter pvw—<§>is 20 ohm. The ammeter
reading is 0.10 Amp and voltmeter reading is 12 volt. Q Then R is equal to (A) 1
22 O (B) 140 O (C) 116 O (D)1000 Q 52 By error, a student places moving-coil vol
tmeter V (nearly ideal) in series with the resistance in a circuit in order to r
ead the current, as shown. The voltmeter reading will be (A) 0 (B)4V (C)6V (D) 1
2V
E = 12V, R = 2Q 4FI
Q.53 In a balanced wheat stone bridge, current in the galvanometer is zero. It r
emains zero when; [1] battery emf is increased [2] all resistances are increased
by 10 ohms \ [3 ] all resistances are madefivetimes [4] the battery and the gal
vanometer are interchanged (A) only [ 1 ] is correct (B) [ 1 ], [2] and [3 ] are
correct (C) [ 1 ], [3] and [4] are correct (D) [1] and [3] are correct <!§Bansal
Classes
[3]
Q. 54 A Wheatstone's bridge is balanced with a resistance of625 Q in the third a
rm, where P, Q and S are in the 1 , 2 and 4 arm respectively. If P and Q are int
erchanged, the resistance in the third arm has to be increased by 5 lO to I\ sec
ure balance. The unknown resistance in the fourth arm is (A) 625 Q (B)650n (C)67
6Q (D)600fi
st nd th
' 625C2
Q. 55 In thefigureshown for gives values of Rj and Rj the balance point for Jock
ey is at 40 cmfromA. When R2 is shunted by a resistance of 10 Q, balance shifts
to 50 cm. Rj and Rj are (AB = 1 m): A 10 (B)2on,3on (C) 10 Q, 15 Q (D)5n, y f i
3
HH
-wB
Q. 56 A 6 V battery of negligible internal resistance is connected across a unif
orm wire oflength 1 m. The positive terminal ofanother battery of A\ emf4V and i
nternal resistance 1 Disjoined to the pointAas shown in y figure. The ammeter sh
ows zero deflection when the jockey touches the wire at the point C. The AC is e
qual to (A) 2/3 m (B) 1/3 m (C) 3/5 m (D) 1/2 m
6V
H4v, in
g
Q. 57 The figure shows a metre-bridge circuit, withAB = 100 cm, X= 12Q and R = 1
8Q, and the jockey J in the position of balance. lfR is now made 80, through wha
t distance will J have to be moved to obtain balance? (A) 10 cm (B) 20 cm (C) 30
cm (D) 40 cm
5EM
Q.58 A potentiometer wire has length 10 m and resistance 100. It is connected to
a battery ofEMF 11 volt and internal resistance 10, then the potential gradient
in the wire is (A) 10 V/m (B) 1 V/m (C) 0.1 V/m (D)none Q. 59 The length of a p
otentiometer wire is I. Acell of emfE is balanced at a length 113fromthe positiv
e end of the wire. Ifthe length ofthe wire is increased by 1/2. At what distance
will the same cell give a balance fW p o ^ * " point. (A)
21
Ptu cbGut
(B)
I
I
(D)y
41
Q.60 Inthefigure, the potentiometer wire AB oflength Land resistance 9r is joine
d to the cell D of emf s and internal resistance r. The cell C's emf is s/2 and
its internal resistance is 2r. The galvanometer G will show no deflection when t
he A length AJ is 11L 4L 7L 5L x(C) 18 (D) 18 (B) (A)
T
2r
o
<!§Bansal
Classes
[3]
&
s
Q.61 An ammeter A offiniteresistance, and a resistor R are joined in series to a
n ideal cell C. A potentiometer P is joined in parallel to R. The ammeter readin
g is I and the potentiometer reading is V . P is now replaced by a voltmeter of
finite resistance. The ammeter reading now is I and the voltmeter reading is V.
(D) I I , V < V (B) I > I , V = V (C) I = I , V < V
0 0 Q 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
Q.62 In the given potentiometer circuit length ofthe wire AB is 3 m and resistan
ce is R=4.5 O. The length AC for no deflection in galvanometer is (A) 2 m (B) 1.
8 m (C) dependent on r (D) none ofthese
t 0
E=5V
r=0.5n
E!=3V i Q.63 A battery of emf E = 12 Vis connected across a 4m long uniform wire
having resistance 4Q/m. The cells of small emfs = 2V and e = 4V having internal
R=8Q resistance 2Cl and 6 0 respectively, are connected as shown in the figure.
If f — I galvanometer shows no deflection at the point N, the distance ofpoint N
from the point Ais equal to Hi W/k—| VAV-J £1 2 '2 (B)|m (C) 25 cm (D) 50 cm CA) «
l 2 h 5
Q.64 In the arrangement shown infigurewhen the switch S is open, the galvanomete
r shows no deflection for I=L/2. When the switch S is j closed, the galvanometer
shows no deflection for/= 5L/12. The internal resistance (r) of 6 V cell, and t
he emf E of the other battery are respectively (A)3Q,8V (B) 2Q, 12V (C)2Q,24V (D
)3Q, 12V
2 2
ion
Hi—VvVWi
6V
r
1* T
HHH
E
S,
Q.65 The diagram besides shows a circuit used in an experiment to determine the
emf and internal resistance of the cell C. Agraph was plotted ofthe potential di
fference V between the terminals of the cell against the current I, which was va
ried by adjusting the rheostat. The graph is shown on the right; x and y are the
intercepts of the graph with the axes as shown. What is the internal resistance
ofthe cell ? (A)x (C)x/y (B)y (D)y/x
V(V)
-<Y>-
L-VWV
!
y
i
T(A)
Q.66 Which ofthe following wiring diagrams could be used to experimentally deter
mine R using ohm's law? Assume an ideal voltmeter and an ideal ammeter. R R R R — —w
p r—- W\ r <SH v —W H W i (A) (B) — S M (C) (D)
1
—
-AA
|h
AA
|f
-AA
|h
Q. 67 A current of (2.5 ± 0.05) Aflowsthrough a wire and develops a potential diff
erence of (10 ± 0.1) volt. Resistance of the wire in ohm, is (A) 4 ±0.12 (B) 4 ±0.04 (
C) 4 ± 0.08 (D) 4 ± 0.02 <!§Bansal Classes Question Bank On Current Electricity [3]
Q. 68 Two wires each of radius of cross section r but of different materials are
connected together end to end (in series). Ifthe densities of charge carriers i
n the two wires are in the ratio 1 : 4, the drift velocity of electrons in the t
wo wires will be in the ratio: (A) 1:2 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 4 : 1 (D)l:4 Q. 69 In a wir
e of cross-section radius r, free electrons travel with drift velocity v when a
current I flows through the wire. What is the current in another wire ofhalfthe
radius and ofthe same material when the ® \ drift velocity is 2v? Tm^VO ( ) (B) (C
) 1/2 CD) 1/4
H A 2 1 1
A
Q. 70 Read the following statements careMy: Y: The resistivity of a semiconducto
r decreases with increases oftemperature. Z: In a conducting solid, the rate of
collision betweenfreeelectrons and ions increases with increase of temperature.
' Select the correct statementfromthe following: (A) Yis true but Z is false (B)
Yis false but Z is true. (C) Both Y and Z are true. (D) Yis true and Z is the c
orrect reason for Y. Q. 71 A piece of copper and another ofgermanium are cooledf
romroom temperature to 80 K. The resistance of: (A) each of them increases (B) e
ach of them decreases ^ (C) copper increases and germanium decreases (D) copper
decreases and germanium increases.
Q. 72 An insulating pipe of cross-section area A contains an electrolyte which h
as two types of ions™» their / charges being -e and +2e. A potential difference appl
ied between the ends of the pipe result in the _\t drifting ofthe two types ofio
ns, having drift speed =v(-ve ion) and v/4(+ve ion). Both ions have the ,V , sam
e number per unit volume=n. The currentflowingthrough the pipe is (A) nevA/2 (B)
nevA/4 (C) 5nevA/2 (D)3nevA/2 Q.'73 As the temperature of a conductor increases
, its resistivity and conductivity change, Hie ratio ofresistivity to conductivi
ty C'\\ (A) increases (B) decreases (C) remains constant (D) may increase or dec
rease depending on the actual temperature.
1
Q.74 Current density in a cylindrical wire of radius R is given as J C\ • The curr
entflowingin the wire is:
y
- 1 jforO < x R J 2 , x„ R J —for— < x < _ R R 2
n
fx
R
V '
,
(A) ~ 7tJ R2
0
(B) ~ tcI R
0
2
(C) ~ 7tJ R2
0
(D) ~ TC^R
2
Q. 75 A current Iflowsthrough a uniform wire of diameter d when the mean electro
n drift velocity is V The q same current willflowthrough a wire of diameter d/2
made ofthe same material ifthe mean drift velocity ofthe electron is: (A)v/4 (B)
v/2 (C)2v (D)4v
<!§Bansal Classes
[3]
£
Q.76 A wire has a non-uniform cross-section as shown infigure.A steady current f
lows through it. The drift speed of electrons at points P and q is v and v .
p Q
(A) v
(C) v > v
p
p
= Vq
Q
(D) Data insufficient
(B)VP<VQ
Q. 77 When an ammeter of negligible internal resistance is inserted in series wi
th circuit it reads 1 A. When the voltmeter ofvery large resistance is connected
across X it reads 1V. When the point A and B are shorted by a conducting wire,
the voltmeter measures 10 V across the battery. The internal resistance of the b
attery is equal to (A) zero (B) 0.5 Q — i f '12V 1 W * - (C) 0.2 O (D) 0.1 £2 Q.78 I
n the box shown current i enters at H and leaves at C. If / = ~ , /' = —.
AB Dc
1
2i
V
r
/
/ = - , /qp = —, / = 6—, choose the branch in which current is zero (B) FC (C)ED (D)
none (A)BG
H A HE 2
i
i
i
o
D y
Q.79 The current in a metallic conductor is plotted against voltage at two diffe
rent temperatures Tj and T . Which is correct Q.80 Auniform copper wire carries
a current i amperes and has p carriers per metre . The length ofthe wire is £ metr
es and its cross-section area is s metre . If the charge on a carrier is q coulo
mbs, the drift Bvelocity in ms is given by (A) i/^sq (B) i/psq (C)psq/i (D) i/ps
^q
3 2 -1
£•
(C)T,=T
( A ) TJ > T 2
2
(D) none
(B)T,<T
2
Voltage
Q.81 If X, Y and Z infigureare identical lamps, which ofthe following changes to
the brightnesses ofthe lamps occur when switch S is closed? (A) X stays the sam
e, Y decreases (B) X increases, Y decreases (C) X increases, Y stays the same (D
) X decreases, Y increases
Thefigureshows a network offiveresistances and two batteries Q.82 The current th
rough the 30V battery is (A) 3 A (B) 1A (C)2A Q.83 The current through the 15 V
battery is (A) zero (B) 1A (C)3A Q.84 Which ofthe batteries is getting charged.
(A) 30V (B) 15 V (C) both Q.85 The total electrical power consumed by the circui
t is (A) 15W (B) 75W (C) 105W <!§Bansal
B r-Wr-^-Wf-zP 30 V A
R3 A
15 V
(D)none (D)none (D)none (D) 90W
Classes
[3]
The figure shows a network of resistances in which the point Ais earthed. Q. 8 6
The point which has the least potential is (A) A (B)B Q. 87 The current through
the 3 Q resistor is (A) 2A from D to A (C) 3.33 Afrom Ato D Q. 8 8 The current
through the 4fi resistor is (A) 0.5 Afrom B to C (C) lAfromCtoB
(C)C (B) 2A from A to D (D) 3.33 A from D to A (B) 0.5 A from C to B (D) 1AfromB
to C
(D)D
The figure shows a network of four resistances and three batteries Q. 89 Choose
the correct alternative (A) The potential difference V -'V = 6V. (B) No currentf
lowsin the branch CF. (C) Currentflowsin the branch from F to C. (D) Both (A) an
d (C)
c F
B -m30 V" AL
^
"6 V
D Ml— E
15 V
Q. 90 Mark the incorrect statement. (A) The currentflowingin the icft loop is in
dependent ofthe right loop. (B) The currentflowingin the right loop is independe
nt ofthe left loop. (C) Both 3 0V and 15 V batteries do not produce current in t
he branch CF (D) both (A) and (B) Q.91 Which ofthe battery is getting charged. (
A) Only 6V (B) both 6Y and 15V (C) Only 15V Q. 92 The current through the branch
CF is (A) 4A (B) 3 A Q. 93 The electrical power dissipated as heat is (A) 207 W
(B) 123 W (C)7A (C) 165 W (D) None (D) 1A (D)none
<!§Bansal
Classes
Question Bank On Current Electricity [3]
each question.
Q.l
A battery is of emfE is being chargedfroma charger such that positive terminal o
fthe batteiy is connected to terminal A of charger and negative terminal ofthe b
attery is connected to terminal B of charger. The internal resistance of the bat
tery is r. (A) Potential difference across points A and B must be more than E. (
B) Amust be at higher potential than B (C) In battery, current flowsfrompositive
terminal to the negative terminal (D) No currentflowsthrough battery A battery
of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across a resistance R. (volt) Re
sistance R can be adjusted to any value greater than or equal to zero. A graph j
o is plotted between the current (i) passing through the resistance and potenti
al difference (V) across it. S elect the correct alternative(s). (A) internal re
sistance of battery is 5Q (B) emf ofthe battery is 20 V (C) maximum current whic
h can be taken from the battery is 4A (D) V- i graph can never be a straight lin
e as shown in figure.
1
Q.2
(ampere)
Q. 3
The equivalent resistance ofa group ofresistances is R. If another resistance is
connected in parallel to the group, its new equivalent becomes R, & ifit is con
nected in series to the group, its new equivalent becomes Rj we have : (A)Rj >R
(B)Rj <R (C)R2>R (D)R2<R Two identical fuses are rated at 10A. Ifthey are joined
(A) in parallel, the combination acts as a fuse ofrating 20A (B) in parallel, t
he combination acts as a fuse ofrating 5A (C) in series, the combination acts as
a fuse ofrating 10A. (D) in series, the combination acts as afiiseofrating 20A.
Two circuits (shown below) are called' Circuit A' and' Circuit B'. The equivale
nt resistance of' Circuit a' is x and that of 'Circuit B' is>' between 1 and 2.
Q.4
Q.5
Circuit A
Circuit B
(A)y>x Q.6
(B)^ = (V3 + 1 ) R
(C) x>' = 2R
2
The value ofthe resistance Rinfigureis adjusted such that power dissipated in th
e 2Q resistor is maximum. Under this condition (A) R = 0 (B)R=8H (C) power dissi
pated in the 2 O resistor is 72 W. (D) power dissipated in the 2 O resistor is 8
W.
(D)x-j> = 2R 8Q -WW
12V
<!§Bansal
Classes
[3]
Q. 7
A galvanometer may be converted into ammeter or voltmeter. In which ofthe follow
ing cases the resistance of the device will be the largest ? (Asssume maximum ra
nge of galvanometer = 1 mA) (A) an ammeter of range 1 OA (B) a voltmeter of rang
e 5 V (C) an ammeter of range 5 A (D) a voltmeter of range 10 V Mark out the cor
rect options. (A) An ammeter should have small resistance. (B) An ammeter should
have large resistance. (C) A voltmeter should have small resistance. (D) A volt
meter should have large resistance. In the circuit shown the readings of ammeter
and voltmeter are 4A and 20V respectively. The meters are non ideal, then R is:
(A) 5Q (B) less than 5H (C) greater than 5Q (D) between 4Q&5Q ^ R maVTAWV-r* ~®~
L J
Q. 8
Q.9
Q.10 A micrometer has a resistance of 100Q and a full scale range of 50pA. It ca
n be used as a voltmeter or a higher range ammeter provided a resistance is adde
d to it. Pick the correct range and resistance combinations). (A) 50 V range wit
h 10 kC2 resistance in series. (B) 10 V range with 200 kQ resistance in series.
(C) 5 mA range with 1 Q resistance in parallel. (D) 10 mA range with 1 kQ resist
ance in parallel. Q.ll In a potentiometer arrangement. Ej is the cell establishi
ng current in primary circuit. E is the cell to be measured. AB is the potentiom
eter wire and G is a galvanometer. Which ofthe following are the essential condi
tion for balance to be obtained. (A) The emf ofEj must be greater than the emf o
f E . (B) Either the positive terminals of both Ej and E or the negative termina
ls ofboth Ej and E must be joined to one end of potentiometer wire. (C) The posi
tive terminals ofE, and E must be joined to one end of potentiometer wire. (D) T
he resistance of G must be less than the resistance ofAB.
2 2 2 2 2
• !l
Q.12 In a potentiometer wire experiment the emf of a battery in the primary circ
uit is 20V and its internal resistance is 5Q. There is a resistance box in serie
s with the battery and the potentiometer wire, whose resistance can be variedfro
m120Q to 170Q. Resistance ofthe potentiometer wire is 75 Q. The following potent
ial differences can be measured using this potentiometer. (A) 5 V (B)6V (C)7V (D
)8V Q.13 In the given potentiometer circuit, the resistance of the potentiometer
wire AB is Rq . C is a cell ofinternal resistance r, —F—vLThe galvanometer G does n
ot give zero deflection for any position ofthe jockey J. Which of the following
cannot be a l—pcl reason for this? o (A)r>R (B)R>>Ro (C) emf of C > emf of D (D) T
he negative terminal of C is connected to A.
D 0
Q.14 Which ofthe following quantities do not change when a resistor connected to
a battery is heated due to the current? (A) drift speed (B) resistivity (C) res
istance (D) number offreeelectrons <!§Bansal
Classes
Question Bank On Current Electricity [3]
Q.15 Ametallic conductor of irregular cross-section is as shown in thefigure.A c
onstant potential difference is applied across the ends (1) and (2). Then : (A)
the current at the cross-section P equals the current at the cross-section Q (B)
the electricfieldintensity at P is less than that at Q. (C) the rate of heat ge
nerated per unit time at Q is greater than that at P (D) the number of electrons
crossing per unit area of cross-section at P is less than that at Q. Q.16 A con
ductor is made of an isotropic material and has shape of a truncated cone. A bat
tery of constant emfis connected across it and its left end is earthed as shown
in figure. Ifat a section distant xfromleft end, electricfieldintensity, potenti
al and the rate ofgeneration of heat per unit length are E, V and H respectively
, which of the following graphs is/are correct? Vi i
/
»E
(D)
Ol
\
Q.17 A simple circuit contains an ideal battery and a resistance R. If a second
resistor is placed in parallel with the first, (A) the potential across R will d
ecrease (B) the current through Rwill decreased (C) the current delivered by the
battery will increase (D) the power dissipated by Rwill increased. Q.18 In the
circuit shown E, F, G and H are cells of e.m.f. 2V, IV, 3 V and IV respectively
and their internal resistances a• I C Z , i i , I i i , 3Q and 1Q respectively. (
A ) V - V = -2/13V ( B ) V - V = 2/13V (C) V = 21 /13 V = potential difference a
cross G. (D) V = 19/13 V=potential difference across H. 5n 3Q A 3Q rAWv-rVWv—r-^VW
v— Q.19 Consider the circuit shown in the figure (A) the current in the 5 Q resist
or is 2 A 28 Vr >ion < ion 4Q (B) the current in the 5 D resistor is 1A (C) the
potential difference V - V is 10 V LAAAVJ-VÂV-J-AWV—I (D) the potential differenc
e V - V is 5 V 4 n B 2Q 3Q
d b d b G H A B A B
Q. 20 A current passes through a wire of nonuniform cross section. Which of the
following quantities are independent ofthe cross-section? (A) the charge crossin
g in a given time interval. (B) drift speed (C) current density (D) free-electro
n density.
<!§Bansal
Classes
[3]
1Q B —"VNWTHVW VyA/W D The figure shows a network of resistors and a battery. If 1
A >6Q current flows through the branch CF, then answer the f 1A following questi
ons H G F E Q.21 The current through (A) branch DE is 1A (B) branch BC is 2A (C)
branch BG is 4A (D) branch HG is 6 A Q.22 The emfE ofthe batteiy is (C) 18V (D)
6V (A) 24 V (B) 12 V If a zero resistance -wire is connected in parallel to bran
ch CF Q.23 The current through (B) branch BC is zero (A) branch DE is zero (D) b
ranch AB is 1.5 A (C)branchBGis0.5A Q.24 The emfE of the battery is (D) 10.5V (E
) 12V (C) 5.25 V (A) 9V (B) 6.6V
T
11
Inside a super conducting ring six identical resistors each of resistance R are
connected as shown in figure. Q.25 The equivalent resistance(s) (A) between 1 &
3 is zero. (B) between 1 & 3 is R/2 (C) between 1 & 2, 2 & 3, 3 & 1 are all equa
l. (D) between 1 & 3 is two times that between 1 & 2. Q.26 The equivalent resist
ance(s) (A) between 0 & 1 is R. (B) between 0 & 1 is R/3 (C) between 0 & 1 is ze
ro. (D) between 0 & 1, 0 & 2 and 0 & 3 are all equal. Q.27 Imagine a battery of
emf E between the point 0 and 1, with its positive terminal connected with O. (A
) The current entering at O is equally divided into three resistances. (B) the c
urrent in the other three resistances R , R , R^ is zero. (C) The resistances R^
and R^ have equal magnitudes of current while the resistance Rq, have different
current. (D) Potential V = V >V,.
12 13 2 3
The figure shows a tetrahedron, each side ofwhich has a resistance r Q.28 Choose
the correct statements) related to the resistance between any two points.
( ) AB ( ) AB
A R B R
= = R R
(C) R is the least
c d
BD AC
= =
R R
BC AD BC
= =
R R
CD BD
R
= =
R R
CA AD BC * ^ D
= R R
( ) AB
D R
=
R
AC
=
R
A N D
CD
=
AD
=
R
BD
<!§Bansal
Classes
[3]
Q, 29 Choose the correct diagram(s), which show two-dimensional equivalent ofthe
tetrahedron.
D
> ->R Q.30 If a battery is connected between any two points ofthe tetrahedron, t
hen identify the correct statement(s). (A) The potentials of the other two point
s are always equal. (B) There always exists a branch through which no current fl
ows. (C) The current coming out ofthe battery in each case is same. (D) None oft
hese 40/\4fi Question No, 31 to 33 (3 questions) A ^ tAC The givenfigureshows a
network of resistances and a battery. Q.31 Identify the correct statements) E=!2
V (A) The circuit satisfies the condition of a balanced Wheatstone bridge. (B) V
- V - 0 (C) V - V = 8 (D) no currentflowsin the branch BD
B D b d
Q.32 Which ofthe two batteries is getting charged? (A) 8V battery (B) 12 V batte
ry (C) none Q.33 Choose the correct statement(s). (A) The current coming out oft
he 8V battery is 2A (B) The current coming out of the 12V battery is 3 A (C) The
currentflowingin all the 4 0 branches is same. (D) The currentflowingin the dia
gonally opposite branches is same
(D) can't be said
<!§Bansal
Classes
[3]
ANSWER KEY
Q.4 Q.ll Q.18 Q.25 Q.32 Q.39 Q.46 Q.53 Q.60 Q.67 Q.74 Q.81 Q.88 A C B B A D D C
B A D B C
Q.l Q.8 Q.15 Q.22 Q.29 Q.36 Q.43 Q.50 Q.57 Q.64 Q.71 Q.78 Q.85 Q.92
C C C D B B A C B B D B C C
Q.2 Q.9 Q.16 Q.23 Q.30 Q.37 Q.44 Q.51 Q.58 Q.65 Q.72 Q.79 Q.86 Q.93
B A B C B D A D B D D B B B
Q.3 Q.10 Q.17 Q.24 Q.31 Q.38 Q.45 Q.52 Q.59 Q.66 Q.73 Q.80 Q.87
D B A A C A B D B B A B A
Q.5 Q.12 Q.19 Q.26 Q.33 Q.40 Q.47 Q.54 Q.61 Q.68 Q.75 Q.82 Q.89
D B B A C A A B A C D A A
Q.6 Q.13 Q.20 Q.27 Q.34 Q.41 Q.48 Q.55 Q.62 Q.69 Q.76 Q.83 Q.90
C D D A A D B A D C C B C
Q.7 Q.14 Q.21 Q.28 Q.35 Q.42 Q.49 Q.56 Q.63 Q.70 Q.77 Q.84 Q.91
D C B D A D C A C C C D A
Q.l Q5 Q9 Q.13 Q.17 Q.21 Q.25 Q.29 Q.33
AB,C AB,C C A C AB AC,D AB,C,D AB,D
Q2 Q.6 Q.10 Q.14 Q.18 Q.22 Q.26 Q.30
A AC B,C D AC,D B B,D AB,C
Q.3 Q.7 Q.ll Q.15 Q.19 Q.23 Q.27 Q.31
B,C D AB AB,C,D A A AB C
Q.4 Q.8 Q.12 Q.16 Q.20 Q.24 Q.28 Q.32
AC AD AB,C B,C AD E AD C
<!§Bansal
Classes
[3]
BANSALCLASSES
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XII (ALL)
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CONTENTS
KEYCONCEPTS EXERCISE-I EXERCISE-II EXERCISE-HI ANSWER KEY
CURRENT
1. ELECTRIC CURRENT :
ELECTRICITY
Electric charges in motion constitute an electric current. Any medium having pra
ctically free electric charges,freeto migrate is a conductor of electricity. The
electric charge flowsfromhigher potential energy state to lower potential energ
y state. Positive charge flows from higher to lower potential and negative charg
e flowsfromlower to higher. Metals such as gold, silver, copper, aluminium etc.
are good conductors. In absence of potential difference across a conductor no ne
t current flows through a corss section. When a potential difference is applied
across a conductor the charge carriers (electrons in case of metallic conductors
) flow in a definite direction which constitutes a net current in it. These elec
trons are not accelerated by electric field in the conductor produced by potenti
al difference across the conductor. They move with a constant drift velocity. Th
e direction of current is along the flow ofpositive charge (or opposite to flow
of negative charge), i = nv eA where V = drift velocity.
d d
2.
ELECTRIC CURRENT I N A CONDUCTOR :
3.
The strength ofthe current i is the rate at which the electric charges are flowi
ng. If a charge Q coulomb passes through a given cross section ofthe conductor i
n t second the current I through the conductor is , Q gtven by I = — = Coulomb =Q
ampere . — t second t dq Ampere is the unit of current. If i is not constant then
/ = — , where dq is net charge transported at . . . dt a section.in time dt. In a
current carrying conductor we can define a vector which gives the direction as c
urrent per unit normal, cross sectional area. Thus J = ^ n or I = J • S Where n is
the unit vector in the direction of theflowof current.
T
CHARGE A N D CURRENT :
> > For random J or S, we use 1= - J • -ds
f
4.
In conductors drift vol. of electrons is proportional to the electric field in s
ide the conductor as- v = pE where p is the mobility of electrons current densit
y is given as J = — = ne v = ne(pE) = aE
d
RELATION IN J , E AND V D :
d
where a = neu is called conductivity of material and we can also write p = — -> re
sistivity a of material. Thus E = p J. It is called as differential form of Ohm'
s Law.
5.
Dry cells, secondary cells, generator and thermo couple are the devices used for
producing potential difference in an electric circuit. The potential difference
between the two terminals ofa source when no energy is drawn from it is called
the " Electromotive force" or " EMF " ofthe source. The unit of potential differ
ence is volt. 1 volt = 1 Amphere x 1 Ohm.
il.Bansal Classes
SOURCES O F POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE & ELECTROMOTIVE FORCE :
Current Electricity
[5]
6.
ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE :
The property of a substance which opposes theflowof electric current through it
is termed as electrical resistance. Electrical resistance depends on the size, g
eometery, temperature and internal structure ofthe conductor.
LAW O F RESISTANCE :
7.
The resistance R offered by a conductor depends on the following factors : R a y
(cross section area of the conductor)
R a L (length of the conductor) ;
at a given temperature R= P ~ . Where p is the resistivity ofthe material of the
conductor at the given temperature. It is also known as specific resistance of
the material.
8.
[
The resistance ofmost conductors and all pure metals increases with temperature,
but there are a few in which resistance decreases with temperature. If R & Rbe
the resistance of a conductor at 0° C and 6° C, then it is found that R = R (1 +aG).
c 0
DEPENDENCE O F RESISTANCE O N TEMPERATURE :
Here we assume that the dimensions ofresistance does not change with temperature
if expansion coefficient ofmaterial is considerable. Then instead of resistance
we use same property for resistivity as p = p (1 + a0) The materials for which
resistance decreases with temperature, the temperature coefficient of resistance
is negative.
0
Where a is called the temperature co-efficient of resistance. The unit of a is K
" of °C reciprocal of resistivity is called conductivity and reciprocal ofresistan
ce is called conductance (G). S.I. unit of G is ohm.
1 _1
9.
Ohm's law is the most fundamental of all the laws in electricity. It says that t
he current through the cross section or the conductor is proportional to the app
lied potential difference under the given physical condition. V = R I . Ohm's la
w is applicable to only metalic conductors. I - Law (Junction law or Nodal Analy
sis) :This law is based on law of conservation of charge. It states that" The al
gebric sum of the currents meeting at a point is zero" or total currents enterin
g a junction equals total current leaving the junction. I I = I I . It is also k
nown as KCL (Kirchhoffs current law).
in out
O H M ' S LAW :
10.
KRICHHOFF'S LAW'S :
EL - Law(Loop analysis) :The algebric sum ofall the voltages in closed - v, circ
uit is zero. I I I R + 2 EMF = 0 in a closed loop. The closed loop can be traver
sed in any direction . While traversing a loop if higher potential point is > en
tered, put a + ve sign in expression or if lower potential point is i + 4 entere
d put a negative sign. -Vj -V +V -V = 0. Boxes may contain resistor or batteiy o
r any other element (linear or non-linear). It is also known as KVL (Kirchhoffs
voltage law).
+
e
V
2
3
4
il.Bansal Classes
Current Electricity
[5]
11.
A number of resistances can be connected and all the v. V, V„ complecated combinat
ions can be reduced to two different types, namely series and parallel. V (i) RE
SISTANCE IN SERIES : When the resistances are connected end toend then they are
said to be in series, The current through each resistor is same. The effective r
esistance appearing across the batter}', R = RJ + R J + R + + R and
r/WV\—fyWv—A-WV3
N
COMBINATION O F RESISTANCES :
••-VWV-H +
Rn
V = VJ + V 2 + V 3 +
The voltage across a resistor is proportional to the resistance R„ i V V;V = R,+R„+.
.+R R,+R-+. +R_
R
2
+V„.
(ii)
Aparallel circuit of resistors is one in which the same voltage is applied acros
s all the components in a parallel grouping of resistors R R,, R3, , R,,.
1;
RESISTANCE IN PARALLEL :
CONCLUSIONS :
(a) (c)
Potential difference across each resistor is same. I = Ij + I + I + I 1 Effectiv
e resistance (R) then ±-J_ ^ Current in different resistors is inversally proporti
onal to the resistance. ,,.111; I,:l : R_ Rj R , R
2 3 2 3
(b)
(d)
1
R.n
A
-WW-iR -WW
12.
I, etc, I,l G,+G~+. + _ G G . + G2 + . . . . . . . . . + G _ 1 n I where G - — = C
onductance ofa resistor. R Ij =
1 2
0
13.
If a cell of emf E an d internal resistance r be connected with a resistance R t
he total resistance of the circuit is (R+r). £,r E,RE,R E,? upton I = — AB ^ 7 R+r ;
E = Terminal voltage of the batten .If r 0, cell is Ideal & V -> E. AVvV
V = WHERE
E M F O F A CELL & ITS INTERNAL RESISTANCE :
7
GROUPING O F CELLS : (i)
If n r « R t h e n I
Let there be n cells each ofemf E, arranged in series,Let r be the internal resi
stance of each cell, nE The total emf = n E. Current in the circuit I R+nr
nE R
CELLS IN SERIES :
If nr » K then I E
» Series combination should be used. Series combination should not be used
Current Electricity
il.Bansal Classes
[5]
(ii)
C E L L S I N PARALLEL :
If m ceils each of emf E & internal resistance r be connected in parallel and if
this combination be connected to an external resistance then the emf ofthe circ
uit=E. Internal resistance ofthe circuit = m -^1—wU— mE 1= R+— mR+r m R •m— mE Parallel co
mbination should be used. If m R « r ; 1 = If m R » r : 1 = R -» Parallel combination
should not be used.
upto
(iii)
mn=number ofidentical cells. n=number of rows m=number of cells in each rows. Th
e combination ofcells is equivalent to single cell of: mr (a) emf = mE & (b) int
ernal resistance = n For maximum current N = mr or R Current I = mE
R+mr n
C E L L S LN M U L T I P L E A R C :
12 3 m HHH>m R
HHH»
mr R= — = internal resistance of battery. T _ nE_mE ~ 2r~2R '
m a x
W H E A T STONE N E T W O R K :
When current through the galvanometer is zero (null point or balance point) — = — .
When PS > QR; V < V & PS <QR; V > V or Q S PS = QR => products of opposite arms
are equal. Potential difference between C & D at null point is zero. The null po
int is not affected by resistance of G & E. It is not affected even ifthe positi
ons of G & E are inter changed. I a (QR-PS).
c D c D C D
14.
A potentiometer is a linear conductor ofuniform cross-section with a steady curr
ent set up in it. This maintains a uniform potential gradient along the length o
fthe wire. Any potential difference which is less then the potential difference
maintained across the potentiometer wire can be measured using this. The • • i Ii po
tentiometer equation is — =— . 2 I2
E L E
POTENTIOMETER :
il.Bansal Classes
Current Electricity
[5]
15.
AMMETER :
It is a modified form of suspended coil galvanometer it is used to measure curre
nt . A shunt (small resistance) is connected in parallel with I-Rgalvanometer to
convert into ammeter. S = ; An ideal ammeter has zero resistance. where I = Max
imum current that canflowthrough the galvanometer. I = Maximum current that can
be measured using the given ammeter.
g
i
J« -vwv
g
16.
A high resistance is put in series with galvanometer. It is used to measure pote
ntial difference. V I R I = — ^ g —WW— R„+R " * + v R-»oo , Ideal voltmeter.
8 s 8 0
VOLTMETER :
17.
While solving an electric circuit it is convinient to chose a reference point an
d assigning its voltage as zero. Then all other potential are measured with resp
ect to this point, This point is also called the common point. The energy libera
ted per second in a device is called its power. The electrical power P delivered
by an electrical device is given by P = VI , where V=potential difference acros
s device & I = current. Ifthe current enters the higher potential point ofthe de
vice then power is consumed by it (i.e. acts as load). If the current enters the
lower potential point then the device supplies power (i.e. acts as source). V P
ower consumed by a resistor P = I R = VI = — .
2 2
RELATIVE POTENTIAL :
18.
ELECTRICAL POWER :
19.
When a current is passed through a resistor energy is wested in over coming the
resistances ofthe wire . This energy is converted into heat. V W = Vlt Joule; =
I Rt Joule ;= — t Joule. R
2 2
HEATING EFFECT O F ELECTRIC CURRENT :
20.
The heat generated (in joules) when a current ofI ampere flows through a resista
nce of R ohm for T second is given by: I H = I RT Joules ; = —RT Calories. 4.2 If
current is variable passing through the conductor then we use for heat produced
in resistance in time t 0 tot is: =jl Rdt
2 2 H 2
JOULES LAW O F ELECTRICAL HEATING :
21.
UNIT O F ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSUMPTION :
1 unit of electrical energy = Kilowatt hour = 1 KWh = 3.6 x 10 Joules.
6
il.Bansal Classes
Current Electricity
[5]
EXERCISE # I
Q. 1 Anetwork ofnine conductors connects six points A B, C, D, E and F as shown
infigure.Thefiguredenotes resistances in ohms. Find the equivalent resistance be
tween A and D. Q.2
1
In the circuit shown infigurepotential difference between point A and B is 16 V.
Find the current passing through 2Q resistance. " a 2n Find the current I & vol
tage V in the circuit shown.
AO 4fi 9V i n 3V 4n VW-r-4 I I—I I W OB
so "1
T 20V
la
,60V
Q. 3 Q. 4 Q.5 Q.6 Q. 7
0.443 -
4Q3
2Q<
Find the equivalent resistance of the circuit between points A and B shown in fi
gure is: (each branch is ofresistance = 10) ^ |10V |SV J 2 0 V J30V Find the cur
rent through 25V cell & power supplied by T ~r 20V cell in thefigureshown. 9s If
Ss
t
25V
Ifa cell of constant E.M.F. produces the same amount ofthe heat during the same
time in two independent resistors R and R^,, when they are separately connected
across the terminals of the cell, one after the another,findthe internal resista
nce ofthe cell. Find the effective resistance ofthe network (seefigure)between t
he points A and B. Where R is the resistance of each part.
R
Q.8 Q. 9
In the circuit shown infigure,all wires have equal resistance r. Find the equiva
lent resistance between A and B. Find the resistor in which maximum heat will be
produced.
Q. 10 For what value of Rin circuit, current through 4f2 resistance is zero. Q.l
l In the circuit shown infigurethe reading of ammeter is the same with both swit
ches open as with both closed. Thenfindthe resistance R. (ammeter is ideal)
4y loon _
—wwh—®—f, . — w wJWt w
1
(
ison
[5]
il.Bansal Classes
Current Electricity
W^tlv
Q.12 Ifthe switches S , S and S in thefigureare arranged such that current throu
gh the battery is minimum,findthe voltage across points A and B.
t 2 3
>J
6D -r-Vv
24V
6n - 9fJ w
h
3£!
Q.13 Thefigureshows a network ofresistor each heaving value 12H. Find the equiva
lent resistance between points Aand B.
Q.14 A battery of emfs = 10 Vis connected across a i m long uniform wire having
resistance 1 OQ/m. Two cells ofemfgj = 2V and e = 4V having internal resistances
1Q and 5Q respectively are connected as shown in thefigure.If a galvanometer sh
ows no deflection at the point P,findthe distance ofpoint P from the point a.
0 2
Q.15 A potentiometer wire AB is 100 cm long and has a total resistance of lOohm.
If the galvanometer shows zero deflection at the position C, thenfindthe value
ofunknown resistance R. Q.16 In thefigureshown for gives values ofRj and fL the
balance point for Jockey is at 40 cmfromA When R, is shunted by a resistance of
10 O, balance shifts to 50 cm.findR, and R,. (AB = lm):
-w
R
3
-W2
R
Q.17 A part of a circuit is shown in figure. Here reading of ammeter is 5 R -A/W
WWV ampere and voltmeter is 96V & voltmeter resistance is 480 ohm. Then find the
resistance R Q.18 An accumulator of emf 2 Volt and negligible internal resistan
ce is connected across a uniform wire of length 10m and resistance 30Q. The appr
opriate terminals ofa cell of emf 1.5 Volt and internal resistance 10 is connect
ed to one end ofthe wire, and the other terminal ofthe cell is connected through
a sensitive galvanometer to a slider on the wire. What length ofthe wire will b
e required to produce zero deflection of the galvanometer ? How will the balanci
ng change (a) when a coil ofresistance 5fi is placed in series with the accumula
tor, (b) the cell of 1.5 volt is shunted with 5Q resistor ? Q.19 The resistance
ofthe galvanometer G in the circuit is 25f2. The meter deflects Ri R-, full scal
e for a current of 10 mA. The meter behaves as an ammeter of -v-AVrvWv- 'vVvVthr
ee different ranges. The range is 0-10 A ifthe terminals O and P are taken; rang
e is 0 - 1 A between O and Q; range is 0 - 0.1A between O 10A 1A 0.1 A R and R.
Calculate the resistance Rj, R2 and R . List of recommended questions from I.E.
Irodov, 3,147, 3.149, 3.150,3.154,3.155,3.169, 3.175, 3.176, 3.179,3.186, 3.189,
3.190, 3.194,3.196, 3.207
3
il.Bansal Classes
Current Electricity
[5]
Q. 1 Atriangle is constructed using the wires AB, BC & CAof same material and of
resistance a, 2a & 3a respectively. Another wire of resistance a/3 from A can m
ake a sliding contact with wire BC. Find the maximum resistance ofthe network be
tween points A and the point of sliding wire with BC. Q.2(a) The current density
across a cylindrical conductor of radius R varies according to the equation , w
here r is the distancefromthe axis. Thus the current density is a maximum J at t
he axis r = 0 and decreases linearly to zero at the surface r = R. Calculate the
current in terms of J and the conductor's cross sectional areaisA=7iR Suppose t
hat instead the current density is a maximum J at the surface and decreases line
arly to zero at the axis so that J = J —. Calculate the current.
0 0 2 0 0
EXERCISE # II
(b) Q.3 Q4
What will be the change in the resistance of a circuit consisting of five identi
cal conductors iftwo similar conductors are added as shown by the dashed line in
figure. The current I through a rod of a certain metallic oxide is given by 1 =
0.2 V , where V is the potential difference across it. The rod is connected in
series with a resistance to a 6V battery ofnegligible internal resistance. What
value should the series resistance have so that: the current in the circuit is 0
.44 the power dissipated in the rod is twice that dissipated in the resistance.
5/2
© 00
Q.5
Q.6
(I) 01) Q.7 Q. 8
Apiece ofresistive wire is made up into two squares with a common side of length
10 cm. A currant enters the rectangular system at one ofthe corners and leaves
at the diagonally opposite corners. Show that the current in the common side is
l/5th of the entering current. What length of wire connected between input and o
utput terminals wouid have an equivalent effect. A network of resistance is cons
tructed with R, & R^ as shown inthefigure.The potential at the points 1,2,3,..,
N are Vj, V , V ,.., V respectively each having a potential k tune smaller than
previous one Find: Rj R p and p in terms of k current that passes through the re
sistance R2 nearest to the V in terms V , k &R .
2 3 R 2 0 0
A hemisphere network ofradius a is made by using a conducting wire of resistance
per unit length r. Find the equivalent resistance across OP. Three equal resist
ance each of R ohm are connected as shown infigure.A battery of2 volts of intern
al resistance 0.1 ohm is connected across the circuit. Calculate Rfor which the
heat generated in the circuit is maximum.
c
3
r
XL. R
/
2V
il.Bansal Classes
Current Electricity
[5]
Q.9
A person decides to use his bath tub water to generate electric power to run a 4
0 watt bulb. The bath tube is located at a height of 10 m from the ground & it h
olds 200 litres ofwater. If we install a water driven wheel generator on the gro
und, at what rate should the water drain from the bath tube to light bulb? How l
ong can we keep the bulb on, ifthe bath tub was full initially. The efficiency o
f generator is 90%. (g= lOm/s" )
2
|36V
Q.10 C O
m
en: In the circuit shown infigure,calculate the following: Potential difference
between points a and b when switch S is open. Current through S in the circuit w
hen S is closed. 3Q-"
•6Q
Q.ll The circuit shown infigureis made of a homogeneous wire ofuniform cross-sec
tion. ABCD is a square. Find the ratio ofthe amounts of heat liberated per unit
time in wire A-B and C-D.
T
Q.12 Arod oflength L and cross-section area Alies along the x-axis between x = 0
and x = L. The material obeys Ohm's law and its resistivity varies along the ro
d according to p (x) = p e . The end ofthe rod at x = 0 is at a potential V and
it is zero at x = L. (a) Find the total resistance of the rod and the current in
the wire. (b) Find the electric potential in the rod as a function ofx.
0 _xL 0
Q.13 In the figure. PQ is a wire of uniform cross-section and of resistance Rq.
Ais an ideal ammeter and the cells are ofnegligible resistance. Thejockey J canf
reelyslide over the wire PQ making contact on it at S. If the length ofthe wire
PS is f= l/n* ofPQ, find the reading on the ammeter. Find the value of'f for max
imum and minimum reading on the ammeter. Q.14 An ideal cell having a steady emfo
f2 volt is connected across the potentiometer wire oflength 10 m. The potentiome
ter wire is ofmagnesium and having resistance of 11.5 Q/m. An another cell gives
a null point at 6.9 m. Ifa resistance of 5£2 is put in series with potentiometer
wire,findthe new position ofthe null point. Q.15 Find the equivalent resistance
of the following group of resistances between A and B. Each resistance of the ci
rcuit is R (a) -w-*A v Vr—, v»—— -oB -Vyx 2
Q.16 An enquiring physics student connects a cell to a circuit and measures the
current drawn from the cell to Ij. When he joins a second identical cell is seri
es with the first, the current becomes I . When the cells are connected are in p
arallel, the current through the circuit is I,. Show that relation between the c
urrent is 31 1 = 2 I (I +1 ) iv iv iv iv
3 2 t 2 3 n
Q.17 Find the potential difference V - V for the circuit shown in the figure.
A B
il.Bansal Classes
Current Electricity
[5]
Q.18 A resistance R of thermal coefficient of resistivity = a is connected in pa
rallel with a resistance = 3R, having thermal coefficient of resistivity = 2a. F
ind the value of a . 40 -AV-2Q. w 2/3 f2 -W- 4nw Q.19 Find the current through — O
resistance in thefigureshown. 2Q
eff
I
Q.20 A galvanometer having 50 divisions provided with a variable shunt s is used
to measure the current when connected in series with a resistance of 90 Q and a
battery of internal resistance 10 Q. It is observed that when the shunt resista
nce are 10Q, 500, respectively the deflection are respectively 9 & 30 divisions.
What is the resistance ofthe galvanometer? Further ifthe full scale deflection
ofthe galvanometer movement is 300 mA find the emf ofthe cell. Q.21 In the prima
ry circuit of potentiometer the rheostat can be variedfrom0 to 100. Initially it
is at minimum iov ion resistance (zero). ^-HpvWv vwv (a) Find the length AP oft
he wire such that the galvanometer shows zero 9n deflection. 12m (b) Now the rhe
ostat is put at maximum resistance (100) and the switch S is closed. New balanci
ng length is found to 8m. Find the internal resistance r 4.5V ofthe 4.5 V cell.
2n Q.22 A galvanometer (coil resistance 99 D) is converted into a ammeter using
a shunt of 1Q and connected as shown in thefigure(i). The ammeter reads 3 A The
same galvanometer is converted into a voltmeter by connecting a resistance of 10
1 O in series. This voltmeter is connected as shown infigure(ii).Its reading is
found to be 4/5 of the full scale reading. Find 12V r 12 V r |H' VWv—| H'—VWV—I intern
al resistance r ofthe cell (a) 2n (b) range ofthe ammeter and voltmeter -AAAA —W/v
I full scale deflection current ofthe galvanometer 2n (c) (ii) G)
1£1
10 V
V.
il.Bansal Classes
Current Electricity
[5]
EXERCISE # III
Q. 1 An electrical circuit is shown in the figure. Calculate the potential diffe
rence across the resistance of400 ohm, as will be measured by the voltmeter V of
resistance 400 ohm, either by applying Kirchhoffs rules or otherwise. [JEE'96,
6]
4000 -VvVv100Q 100Q 200£1 rwv-WAVi—vwv-h
-Wr
100Q
MV O
Q.2(i) A steady current flows in a metallic conductor ofnonuniform cross-section
. The quantity /quantities constant along the length ofthe conductor is / are: [
JEE' 97,1 +2+5] (A) current, electricfieldand drift speed (B) drift speed only (
C) current and drift speed (D) current only (ii) The dimension of electricity co
nductivity is . (iii) Find the emf (E) & internal resistance (r) ofa single batt
ery which is equivalent to a parallel combination oftwo batteries ofemfs V, &V &
internal resistances r. & r respectively with their similar polarity connected
to each other ^Wr-Wr-rW, Q.3 In the circuit shown in thefigure,the current throu
gh: (A) the 3fi resistor is 0.50 A (B) the 3Q resistor is 0,25 A ^yL sq| 40(C) 4
Q resistor is 0.50 A (D) the 4Q resistor is 0.25 A 20 2£1 2SI M/W^wM-VM [JEE'98,2
]
2 2
Q.4
In the circuit shown, P # R, the reading ofthe galvanometer is same with switch
S open or closed. Then L-VWV L-—(g> (A)I = I (B) I = I (C)I = I (D)I = I [JEE'99,2
]
r 0 p G Q G Q r
r-Wv
p
Q Wr—
•K I;
Q. 5
The effective resistance between the points P and Q of the electrical circuit sh
own in thefigureis (A)2Rr/ (R+r) (B) 8R(R+r)/(3R+r) (C)2r + 4R (D) 5 R/2 + 2r [J
EE 2002 (Scr), 3]
2 3
2R —WW-^-WA-
:2R
t2R
2R -Wv
-VWv—f-AMA
2R
VM2R
Q.6
A100 W bulb Bj, and two 60 W bulbs B and B , are connected to a 250 V source, as
shown in the figure. Now W W and W are the output powers ofthe bulbs B,,B and B
respectively. Then (A) W > W = W (B) W, > W > W (C)Wj < w = w (D) Wj <W < W [JE
E 2002 (Scr), 3]
p 2 3 2 3 5 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
B,
^ ?50V
h
il.Bansal Classes
Current Electricity
[5]
Q.7
(a) (b) (c) Q. 8
A thin uniform wire AB oflengthlm, an unknown resistance X and a resistance of 1
2 Cl are connected by thick conducting strips, as shown infigure.Abattery and a
galvanometer (with a sliding jockey connected to it) are also available. Connect
ions are to be made to measure the unknown resistance X using the x 12 n princip
le ofWheatstone bridge. Answer the following question. B C D Are there positive
and negative terminals on the galvanometer? A Copy thefigurein your answer book
and show the battery and the galvanometer (withjockey) connected at appropriate
points. After appropriate connections are made, it is found that no deflection t
akes place in the galvanometer when the sliding jockey touches the wire at a dis
tance of 60 cmfromA. Obtain the value of resistance X. [JEE' 2002, 1+2 + 2] Arra
nge the order of power dissipated in the given circuits, ifthe same current is p
assing through all circuits and each resistor is 'r' [JEE' 2003 (Scr)]
(ffl)
A/V
2 3 4 1 3 2 4 4 3 2 1 2 3 4
(A)P >P >P >P (B)P >P >P >Pj (C)P >P >P >Pj (D)P >P >P >P Q.9 In the given circu
it, no current is passing through the galvanometer. If the cross-sectional diame
ter of AB is doubled then for null point of galvanometer the value ofAC would [J
EE' 2003 (Scr)] (A)x (B)x/2 (C)2x (D) None
Q.10 How a battery is to be connected so that shown rheostat will behave like a
potential divider? Also indicate the points about which output can betaken. [JEE
'2003] Q.ll Six equal resistances are connected between points P, Q and R as sho
wn in thefigure.Then the net resistance will be maximum between (A) P and Q (B)
Q and R (C) P and R (D) any two points [JEE' 2004 (Scr)]
AWv—*B
r
c
Q
Q.12 In an RC circuit while charging, the graph of In I versus time is as shown
by the dotted line in the adjoining diagram where I is the current. When the val
ue ofthe resistance is doubled, which of the solid curves best represents the va
riation of In I versus time? [JEE' 2004 (Scr)] (A)P (B)Q (C)R (D)S "
M 1
-R
-s
"Q •p
il.BansalClasses
Current Electricity
[5]
Q.13 For the post office box arrangement to determine the value ofunknown resist
ance, the unknown resistance should be connected between [JEE' 2004 (Scr)] (A) B
and C (B)CandD (C) A and D (D)B andC
1 1
»ooo*oogTi 'jaTotoo o o fESuSsjEEOQi
3
Q. 14 Draw the circuit for experimental verification of Ohm's law using a source
ofvariable D.C. voltage, a main resistance of 100 O, two galvanometers and two
resistances ofvalues 10 Q and 10* O respectively. Clearly show the positions oft
he voltmeter and the ammeter. [JEE' 2004]
6
Q.15 In thefigureshown the current through 2Q resistor is (A) 2 A (B) OA (C) 4 A
(D) 6 A
, 10V
f50
—VWv—
10Q
2fJ Wr
20V
[JEE' 2005 (Scr)]
Q.16 An uncharged capacitor of capacitance 4pF, a battery of emf 12 volt and a r
esistor of 2.5 MO are connected in series. The time after which v = 3v is (take
/n2 = 0.693) (A) 6.93 sec. (B) 13.86 sec. (C) 20.52 sec, (D) none of these [JEE'
2005 (Scr)]
c R
Q.17 A galvanometer has resistance 100Q and it requires current lOOpAforfull sca
le deflection. Aresistor 0. ID is connected to make it an ammeter. The smallest
current required in the circuit to produce the full scale deflection is (A) 1000
.1mA (B) 1.1mA (C) 10.1mA (D) 100.1mA [JEE' 2005 (Scr)] Q.18 An unknown resistan
ce X is to be determined using resistances R,, R or R,. Their corresponding null
points are A, B and C. Find which of the above will give the most accurate read
ing and why? [JEE 2005]
2
—1|
VWv
-sC or R 3
A B R=R, or R 2
Q.19 Consider a cylindrical element as shown in thefigure.Current , flowing the
through element is I and resistivity ofmaterial ofthe 4 cylinder is p. Choose th
e correct option out * the following. (A) Power loss in second half is four time
s the power loss infirsthalf. (B) Voltage drop infirsthalfis twice ofvoltage dro
p in second half. (C) Current density in both halves are equal. (D) Electricfiel
din both halves is equal.
r
B $2r
1/2
1/2
[JEE 2006]
il.Bansal Classes
Current Electricity
[5]
ANSWER KEY
Q I
in
12A-20W 4Q 9n 20 ohm
Q.2
Q.5 Q.9 Q.13 Q.17 Q.l Q.4
22 I = 2.5 A V = 3.5 Volts Q.4 ^n 3r Q.7 8/7R Q.8 — Q.6 V i 2 Q.10 lQ Q.ll 600n Q.
12 I V 10 Q.16 y n , 5 n Q.14 46.67 cm Q.15 4 ohm Q.18 7.5 m, 8.75m, 6.25m Q.19
Rj = 0.0278 n , R2 = 0.25 n , R = 2.5 n 3.5 A
R
EXERCISE # I
Q.3
R
R _3 Q.3 R! 5 (3/1 l)a Q.2 (a)J A/3;(b)2J A/3 Q.5 7/5 times the length of any si
de of the square (i)10.52n;(u)0.3125n (2 + 7i)ar Q.6 (i) (k - l ) ' ( kk- l )(ii
) ((k-l)/k )v Q7 R 8 Q.8 0.3n Q.9 4/9 kg/sec., 450 sec Q.10 (i) V = - 12 V, (ii)
3 amp from b to a Q.ll II + 6V2 < ^ V Af - ^ Q.12 R PoL . - I ; i = ;v = V" (e"
1 - e -1 ) A Po e - l , £ Q.13 r + R ( f - f ) ' m a f = 0 , l ; I f = l / 2 Q.14
7.2m Q.15 (a) 5/7R, (b) 9R/14 22 Q eff ^ Q.19 1A Q.20 233.3n; 144V Q.21 (a) 6m,
(b) i n Q.17 - — V Q.22 (a) 1.01 W, (b) 0-5A 0-10V, (c) 0.05 A
2 0 0 2 2 0 k w 3 ab n 0
e
EXERCISE # II
3
L
v
0
2
f o r I
X
m in
1 8
a
=
a
EXERCISE # III
Vir +V r! l 2
2 2 r + r
Q. 1 20/3 V
Q-4
Q.2 (i) D; (ii) M L~ T A ; (iii) Q.5 Q.6 D
_1 3 3 2
( Y )
rr
t
+ r
2
r
l
2
Q.3
D
Q.7 (a) No, (b) A
J 0-y) ^ B •VWV—
12 O
D (c)8n
Q.8
A
Q9
Q.10 Battery should be connected across Aand B. Out put can be taken across the
terminals Aand C or B and C Q.ll A Q.12meterB Q.13 C Volt 10' n\ r t ® - ^ Q.14
t 2
Q.15 B
Q.16 B
Q.17 D Q.19 A
[5]
Q.18 This is true for r = r ; So R, given most accurate value
il.BansalClasses
Current Electricity
XII (ALL)
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION ALTERNATING CURRENT
CONTENTS
&
KEY CONCEPTS EXERCISE-I EXERCISE-II EXERCJSE-llI ANSWER KEY
When a conductor is moved across a magnetic field, an electromotive force (emf)
is produced in the conductor. If the conductors forms part of a closed circuit t
hen the emf produced caused an electric current to flow round the circuit. Hence
an emf (and thus a current) is induced in the conductor as a result of its move
ment across the magnetic field. This is known as "ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION."
1. MAGNETIC FLUX :
KEY CONCEPTS
(]) = B . A ^BA cos 9 weber for uniform B . (j) = j B . d A for non uniform B .
2.
(i) (ii)
An induced emf is setup whenever the magnetic flux linking that circuit changes.
The magnitude of the induced emf in any circuit is proportional to the rate of
change of the magnetic flux linking the circuit, s a — . dt The direction of an in
duced emf is always such as to oppose the cause producing it.
LAW O F EMI: LENZ'S LAWS :
FARADAY'S LAWS O F ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION :
3.
4.
e = - — . The neaative sign indicated that the induced emf opposes the change of t
he flux. dt
5.
E = BLV sin 0 voltwhere B = flux densi ty in wb/m ; L = length of the conductor
(m); V=velocity of the conductor (m/s); 9 = angle between direction of motion of
conductor & B .
2
E M F INDUCED IN A
STRAIGHT CONDUCTOR IN UNIFORM MAGNETIC FIELD :
6.
COIL ROTATION IN MAGNETIC FIELD SUCH THAT A X I S O F ROTATION I s
PERPENDICULAR T O
Instantaneous induced emf. N = number of turns in the coil ; B = magnetic induct
ion ; E = maximum induced emf.
0
THE MAGNETIC FIELD :
A = area of one turn; ©= uniform angular velocity ofthe coil;
E = NABco sin cot = EQ sin cot,
where
7.
When a current flowing through a coil is changed the flux linking with its own w
inding changes & due to the change in linking flux with the coil an emf is induc
ed which is known as self induced emf & this phenomenon is known as self inducti
on. This induced emf opposes the causes ofInduction. The property ofthe coil or
the circuit due to which it opposes any change ofthe current coil or the circuit
is known as SELF - INDUCTANCE . It's unit is Henry. Coefficient of Self inducta
nce L = — or 4> = Li
s
SELF INDUCTION &
SELF
INDUCTANCE :
fe Bansal Classes
Electromagnetic Induction
[10]
L depends only on; (i) (ii) shape of the loop & medium i = current in the circui
t. <j) = magnetic flux linked with the circuit due to the current i. dtj) d di s
elf induced emf e„ = —— = - — (Li) = - L — (ifL is constant) dt dt dt
s s s
8.
If two electric circuits are such that the magneticfielddue to a current in one
is partly or wholly linked with the other, the two coils are said to be electrom
agnetically coupled circuits . Than any change of current in one produces a chan
ge of magnetic flux in the other & the latter opposes the change by inducing an
emfwithin kself. This phenomenon is called MUTUAL INDUCTION & the induced emfin
the latter circuit due to a change of current in the former is called MUTUALLY I
NDUCED E M F . The circuit in which the current is changed, is called the primar
y & the other circuit in which the emf is induced is called the secondary. The c
o-efficient of mutual induction (mutual inductance) between two electromagnetica
lly coupled circuit is the magnetic flux linked with the secondary per unit curr
ent in the primary. , ^m linked „ , Mutual..inductance = M = -7— =fluxcurrent inwith
secondary mutually .induced emf. l the primary
p
MUTUAL INDUCTION :
E = ^ = - ~ (MI) = (If M is constant) M depends on (1) geometery of loops (2) me
dium (3) orientation & distance of loops .
m
9.
There is a uniform magneticfieldalong the axis the solenoid (ideal: length » diame
ter) B = p ni where; u = magnetic permeability of the core material; n = number
of turns in the solenoid per unit length; i = current in the solenoid ; Self ind
uctance of a solenoid L - p n A1; A = area of cross section of solenoid.
0 2
SOLENOID :
>
II
axis of solenoid
J
0
vj 1H
Q)re
10.
R = 0 ; E = 0. Therefore (j) = constant. Thus in a superconducting loop flux nev
er changes, (or it opposes 100%)
total
SUPER CONDUCTION LOOP IN
MAGNETIC FIELD :
11.
(i)
ENERGY STORED IN A N INDUCTOR :
(ii)
W = -2 LI . Energy of interation of two loops U = l,(j) = I ^ , = M I j I , wher
e M is mutual inductance .
2 2
2
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
12.
GROWTH O F A
Rt/L
CURRENT IN A N L - R
CIRCUIT :
I = — (1 - e~ ) . [ If initial current = 0 ] R L R = time constant of the circuit.
E
(i) (ii)
13.
L behaves as open circuit at t = 0 [If /' = 0 ] L behaves as short circuit at t
= oo always. L Curve (1) > — Large R L Curve (2) — Small R
0
DECAY O F CURRENT :
Initial current through the inductor = I ;
Current at any instant i = I e~ M
0
Rt/L
^Bansal Classes
[4]
EXJER
CISE—I
Q.l Q.2
The horizontal component ofthe earth's magneticfieldat a place is 3 x 10^T and t
he dip is tan '(4/3). A metal rod of length 0.25 m placed in the north-south pos
ition is moved at a constant speed of lOcm/s towards the east. Find the e.rnf. i
nduced in the rod. A wire forming one cycle of sine curve is moved in x-y plane
with velocity V = V i + V j. There exist a magneticfieldB = - B k Find the motio
nal emf develop across the ends PQ of wire.
x y 0
Q.3
A conducting circular loop is placed in a uniform magneticfieldof0.02 T, with it
s plane perpendicular to thefield.If the radius ofthe loop starts shrinking at a
constant rate of 1.0 mm/s, thenfindthe emfinduced in the loop, at the instant w
hen the radius is 4 cm. Find the dimension of the quantity 7-7-7 , where symbols
have usual meaimng. RCV A rectangular loop with a sliding connector of length I
= 1.0 m is situated in a uniform magnetic field B = 2T perpendicular to the pla
ne of loop. Resistance of connector is r = 2 f l Two resistances of 6 0 and 3Q a
re connected as shown infigure.Find the external force required to keep the conn
ector moving with a constant velocity v = 2m/s. ©B —» 3Q:?
Q. 4 Q.5
>6Cl
Q. 6
Two concentric and coplanar circular coils have radii a and b(»a)as shown in figur
e. Resistance of the inner coil is R. Current in the outer coil is increased fro
m 0 to i, thenfindthe total charge circulating the inner coil. A horizontal wire
isfreeto slide on the vertical rails of a conductingframeas shown infigure.The
wire has a mass m and length I and the resistance ofthe circuit is R. If a unifo
rm magneticfieldB is directed perpendicular to the frame, thenfindthe terminal s
peed ofthe wire as it falls under the force ofgravity.
Q, 7
*B x
-yww
xR
X
Q.8
Q.9
A metal rod of resistance 200 isfixedalong a diameter of a conducting ring of ra
dius 0.1 m and lies on x-y plane. There is a magnetic field B = (50T)k- The ring
rotates with an angular velocity 0 = 20 rad/ sec about its axis. An external re
sistance of 10Q is connected across the centre of the ring andrim.Find the curre
nt through external resistance. 6Q r-VW\A 2 mH In the given current,findthe rati
o of i, to i where i, is the initial (at t = 0) current and i i s steady state (
at t = 0 ) current through the battery. 0
2 2 10
Q 10 In the circuit shown, initially the switch is in position 1 for a long time
. Then the switch is shifted to position 2 for a long time. Find the total heat
produced in R,.
R. -WVV-
fe Bansal Classes
H HVWVR;
[10]
Q.ll Two resistors of 1OQ and 20Q and an ideal inductor of 1 OH are connected to
a 2V battery as shown. The key K is shorted at time t = 0. Find the initial (t
= 0) and final (t —» oo) currents through battery.
L = 10H I—W-j
I V V • —W
R= ion
H>-
J
2on
Q.12 There exists a uniform cylindrically symmetric magneticfielddirected along
the axis ofa cylinder but varying with time as B = kt. Ifan electron is released
fromrest in thisfieldat a distance of' r'fromthe axis of cylinder, its accelerat
ion, just after it is released would be (e and m are the electronic charge and m
ass respectively) Q.13 An emf of 15 volt is applied in a circuit containing 5 H
inductance and 10 Q resistance. Find the ratio of the currents at time t = oo an
d t = 1 second. Q. 14 A uniform magnetic field of 0.08 T is directed into the pl
ane of the page and perpendicular to it as shown in thefigure.A wire loop in the
plane of the page has constant area 0.010 m . The magnitude ofmagneticfielddecr
ease at a constant rate of 3.0x10 Ts . Find the magnitude and direction ofthe in
duced emf in the loop.
2 4 -1
X
x x x
Q.15 In the circuit shown infigureswitch S is closed at time t = 0. Find the cha
rge which passes through the battery in one time constant.
r ^ Li M Rn
Q.16 Two coils, 1 & 2, have a mutual inductance=M and resistances R each. A curr
ent flows in coil 1, which varies with time as: Ij = kt , where K is a constant
and't' is time. Find the total charge that has flown through coil 2, between t =
0 and t = T.
2
Q.17 In a L-R decay circuit, the initial current at t = 0 is I. Find the total c
harge that hasflownthrough the resistor till the energy in the inductor has redu
ced to one-fourth its initial value. Q.18 A charged ring of mass m = 50 gm, char
ge 2 coulomb and radius R=2m is placed on a smooth horizontal surface. Amagnetic
fieldvarying with time at a rate of(0.21) Tesla/sec is applied on to theringin a
direction normal to the surface of ring. Find the angular speed attained in a t
ime t = 10 sec.
x
Q. 19 A capacitor C with a charge Q is connected across an inductor through a sw
itch S. If at t = 0, the switch is closed, thenfindthe instantaneous charge q on
the upper plate of capacitor.
0
Q^ ^
0 c
Q.20 A uniform but time varying magneticfieldB = K t - C ; ( 0 < t < C/K), where
K and C are constants and t is time, is applied perpendicular to the plane ofth
e circular loop of radius' a' and resistance R. Find the total charge that will
pass around the loop. Q.21 A coil ofresistance 3000 and inductance 1.0 henry is
connected across an alternating voltage of frequency 3 00/271: Hz. Calculate the
phase difference between the voltage and current in the circuit. Q.22 Find the
value of an inductance which should be connected in series with a capacitor of 5
pF, a resistance of 10Q and an ac source of 50 Hz so that the power factor of t
he circuit is unity.
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
Q.23 In an L-R series A. C circuit the potential difference across an inductance
and resistance j oined in series are respectively 12 V and 16V. Find the total
potential difference across the circuit. Q.24 When 100 volt D.C. is applied acro
ss a coil, a current of one ampere flows through it, when 100 V ac of 5 0 Hz is
applied to the same coil, only 0.5 amp flows. Calculate the resistance and induc
tance of the coil. Q.25 A 50W, 100V lamp is to be connected to an ac mains of200
V, 50Hz. What capacitance is essential to be put in seirs with the lamp. List of
recommended questions from I.E. Irodov. 3.288 to 3.299, 3.301 to 3.309, 3.311,
3.313, 3.315, 3.316, 3.326 to 3.329, 3.331, 3.333 to 3.335, 4.98, 4.99, 4.100, 4
.134, 4.135, 4.121, 4.124, 4.125, 4.126, 4.136, 4.137, 4.141, 4.144
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
EXERCISE—II
Q. 1 Two straight conducting rails form a right angle where their ends are joine
d. A conducting bar contact with the rails starts at vertex at the time t = 0 &
moves symmetrically with a constant velocity of 5.2 m/s to the right as shown in
figure. A 0.35 T magnetic field points out ofthe page. Calculate: (i) The flux
through the triangle by the rails & bar at t = 3.0 s. (ii) The emf around the tr
iangle at that time. (iii) In what manner does the emf around the triangle vary
with time. Q. 2
5.2m/s
Two long parallel rails, a distance I apart and each having a resistance X per u
nit length are joined at one end by a resistance R. A perfectly conducting rod M
N of mass m is free to slide along the rails without friction. There is a unifor
m magnetic field of induction B normal to the plane of the paper and directed in
to the paper. A variable force F is applied to the rod MN such that, as the rod
moves, a constant current i flows through R. Find the velocity ofthe rod and the
applied force F as function of the distance x of the rod from R Q.3 A wireisben
t into 3 circular segments ofradiusr = 10 cm as shown in figure. Each segment is
a quadrant of a circle, ab lying in the xy plane, be lying in the yz plane & ca
lying in the zx plane. (i) if a magnetic field B points in the positive x direc
tion, what is the magnitude of the emf developed in the wire, when B increases a
t the rate of 3 mT/s ? (ii) what is the direction ofthe current in the segment b
e. Q. 4 Consider the possibility of a new design for an electric train. The engi
ne is driven by the force due to the vertical component ofthe earths magneticfie
ldon a conducting axle. Current is passed down one coil, into a conducting wheel
through the axle, through another conducting wheel & then back to the source vi
a the other rail. (i) what current is needed to provide a modest 10 - KN force ?
Take the vertical component of the earth'sfieldbe 10 pT & the length of axle to
be 3.0 m. (ii) how much power would be lost for each Q, of resistivity in the r
ails ? (iii) is such a train unrealistic ? Q.5 A square wire loop with 2 m sides
in perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field, o• o © ©o•(s © a©o« © © o o ©o with halfthe
e loop in the field. The loop contains a 20 V battery with « © © 'i negligible interna
l resistance. If the magnitude of the field varies with time S according to B =
0.042 - 0.871, withB in tesla&tin sec. V ' / (i) What is the total emf in the ci
rcuit ? \ /\ (ii) What is the direction of the current through the battery ? Q.6
A rectangular loop of dimensions I & w and resistance R moves with constant vel
ocity V to the right as shown in the figure. It continues to move with same spee
d through a region containing a uniform magnetic field B directed into the plane
ofthe paper & extending a distance 3 W. Sketch the flux, induced emf & external
force acting on the loop as a function ofthe distance.
! : 0 0 0 v
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
Q.7 Q.8
A rectangular loop with current I has dimension as shown in figure. Find the mag
netic flux $ through the infinite region to the right of line PQ. A square loop
of side 'a' & resistance R moves with a uniform velocity v away from a long wire
that carries current I as shown in the figure. The loop is moved awayfromthe wi
re with side AB always parallel to the wire. Initially, distance between the sid
e AB of the loop & wire is 'a'. Find the work done when the loop is moved throug
h distance 'a' from the initial position. Two long parallel conducting horizonta
l rails are connected by a conducting wire at one end. A uniform magneticfieldB
exists in the region of space. A light uniform ring of diameter d which is pract
ically equal to separation between the rails, is placed over the rails as shown
in thefigure.Ifresistance of ring is X per unit length, calculate the force requ
ired to pull theringwith uniform velocity v.
B ic c
a
'I'D
a
»| C 0 D
* A
Q.9
Q.10
Q.ll
\ x x x x x x x x x x y. x x
Q.12 Available magneticfieldcreates a constant emf E in a conductor ABCDA. The r
esistances of portion ABC, CDA and AMC are R R and R respectively. What current
will be shown by meter M? The magnetic field is concentrated near the axis ofthe
circular conductor.
p 2 3
Q .13 In the circuit shown in the figure the switched S and S are closed at time
t = 0. After time t = (0.1) In 2 sec, switch S is opened. Find the current in t
he circuit at time t = (0.2) In 2 sec.
t 2 2
#100V
40£1«
S
2
IH j
Q.14 (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
Find the values of / and i immediately after the switch S is closed. long time l
ater, with S closed. immediately after S is open. long time after S is opened.
C ion i
30Q
iîoov
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
Q.15 Consider the circuit shown infigure.The oscillating source ofemf deliver a
sinusoidal emfof amplitude e andfrequencyco to the inductor L and two capacitors
Cj and C . Find the maximum instantaneous current in each capacitor.
max 2
R i(t) Q.16 Suppose the emfofthe battery, the circuit shown varies with timet so
the current WvV ~ is given by /'(t) = 3 + 5t, where i is in amperes & t is in s
econds. Take R = 4Q, L = 6H &findan expression for the battery emf as function o
f time. Q.17 A current of 4 A flows in a coil when connected to a 12 Vdc source.
Ifthe same coil is connected to a 12V, 50 rad/s ac source a current of 2.4 A fl
ows in the circuit. Determine the inductance ofthe coil. Also find the power dev
eloped in the circuit if a 2500 pF capacitor is connected in series with the coi
l.
Q.18 An LCR series circuit with 1000 resistance is connected to an ac source of2
00 V and angular frequency 300 rad/s. When only the capacitance is removed, the
current lags behind the voltage by 60°. When only the inductance is removed, the c
urrent leads the voltage by 60°. Calculate the current and the power dissipated in
the LCR circuit. Q.19 A box P and a coil Q are connected in series with an ac s
ource ofvariable frequency. The emf of source at 10 V. Box P contains a capacita
nce of 1 pF in series with a resistance of 32Q coil Q has a self-inductance 4.9
mH and a resistance of 68Q series. The frequency is adjusted so that the maximum
current flows in P and Q. Find the impedan-^ of P and Q at this frequency. Also
find the voltage across P and Q respectively. Q.20 A series LCR circuit contain
ing a resistance of 120Q has angular resonancefrequency4 x 10 rad s' . At resona
nce the voltages across resistance and inductance are 60 V and 40 V respectively
. Find the values of L and C. At whatfrequencythe current in the circuit lags th
e voltage by 45°?
5 1
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
EXERCISE—III
Q. 1 Arectangular frame ABCD made of auniform metal wire has a straight connecti
on B between E & F made ofthe same wire as shown in thefigure.AEFD is a square x
x x x of side 1 m & EB = FC = 0.5 m. The entire circuit is placed in a steadily
X X X X X y increasing uniform magneticfielddirected into the place ofthe paper
& normal X IK X X X to it. The rate of change of the magneticfieldis 1 T/s, the
resistance per unit D length ofthe wire is 1 O/m. Find the current in segments
AE, BE & EF. [JEE'93, 5] Q.2 An inductance L, resistance R, battery B and switch
S are j—©—i H 3 H connected in series. Voltmeters V and V are connected across L and
R respectively. When switch is closed: (A) The initial reading in V will be grea
ter than in V . (B) The initial reading in V will be lesser than V . (C) The ini
tial readings in V and V will be the same. s (D) The reading in V will be decrea
sing as time increases. [JEE'93, 2] Q.3 Two parallel vertical metallic rails AB
& CD are separated by 1 m. They are connected at the two ends by resistance R &
R as shown in the figure. A horizontally metallic bar L of mass 0.2 kg slides wi
thoutfriction,vertically down the rails under the action of gravity. There is a
uniform horizontal magnetic field of 0.6T perpendicular to the plane of the rail
s, it is observed that when the terminal velocity is attained, the power dissipa
ted inRj & R, are 0.76 W & 1.2 W respectively. Find the terminal velocity of bar
L & value R, & R [JEE '94, 6]
v
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
}
2
n
Q. 4
Two different coils have self inductance 8mH and 2mH. The current in one coil is
increased at a constant rate. The current in the second coild is also increased
at the same constant. At a certain instant of time, the power given to the two
coils is the same. At that time the current, the induced voltage and the energy
stored in thefirstcoil are I Vj and respectively. Corresponding values for the s
econd coil at the same instant are I , v and W, respectively. Then: [JEE' 94,2]
]_ Ij 1 2 „ Ii Yl. (B) (D) V, 4 IT4
p 2 2 W ( A )
Q.5
(a) (b)
A metal rod OA of mass m & length r is kept rotating with a constant angular spe
ed co in a vertical plane about a horizontal axis at the end O. Thefreeend Ais a
rranged to slide withoutfrictionalong afixedconducting circular ring in the same
plane as that ofrotation. Auniform & constant magnetic induction § is applied per
pendicular & into the plane ofrotation as shown in figure. An inductor L and an
external resistance R are connected through a switch S between the point O & a p
oint C on the ring to form an electrical circuit. Neglect the resistance ofthe r
ing and the rod. Initially, the switch is open. What is the induced emf across t
he terminals of the switch ? (i) Obtain an expression for the current as a funct
ion of time after switch S is closed. (ii) Obtain the time dependence ofthe torq
ue required to maintain the constant angular speed, given that the rod OA was al
ong the positive X-axis at t = 0. [JEE '95,10]
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
Q.6 Q.7
A solenoid has an inductance of 10 Henry & a resistance of 2 D. It is connected
to a 10 volt battery. How long will it take for the magnetic energy to reach 1 /
4 of its maximum value ? [JEE'96, 3] Select the correct alternative. X X X A thi
n semicircular conducting ring of radius R is falling with its plane vertical in
X :•X B x • a horizontal magnetic induction B. At the position MNQ the speed of the
ring is x /\ A x v & the potential difference developed across the ring is: M B
VTCR (A)zero & M is at higher potential (B) (D) 2 RB V & Q is at higher potentia
l (C) k RB V & Q is at higher potential Fill inthe blank. A metallic block carry
ing current I is subjected to a uniform magnetic induction which results B j. Th
e moving charges experience a force F given by in the lowering of the potential
of the face [JEE '96, 2] [assume the speed of the carrier to be v]
.«'
N
>: x
V V
*
, VI A X x x xY x
\
X
Q.8
[JEE'96,2]
A pair ofparallel horizontal conducting rails ofnegligible resistance shorted at
one end is fixed on a table. The distance between the rails is L. A conducting
massless rod of resistance R can slide on the rails frictionlessly. The rod is t
ied to a massless string which passes over a pulleyfixedto the edge of the table
. Amass m, tied to the other end of the string hangs vertically. A constant magn
eticfieldB exists perpendicular to the table. If the system is releasedfromrest,
calculate: the terminal velocity achieved by the rod. 0) the acceleration ofthe
mass at the instant when the velocity ofthe rod is halfthe terminal velocity. (
") [JEE '97, 5] Q.10 Acurrent/ = 3.36 (1 +2t) x 10" A increases at a steady rate
in a long straight wire. A small circular loop of radius 10~ m is in the plane
of the wire & is placed at a distance of 1 m from the wire. The resistance of th
e loop is 8.4 x 10" D. Find the magnitude & the direction of the induced current
in the loop. [REE '98, 5] Q.ll Select the correct alternative(s). [ JEE '98, 3
x 2 = 6,4x2=8] The SI unit of inductance, the Henry, can be written as : (i) (A)
weber/ampere (B) volt-second/ampere (C) joule/(ampere) (D) ohm-second of side I
is placed inside a large square wire of © A small square loop ofwirecentres coinc
ide. The mutual inductanceloop ofsystem isside L(L » I ) .toThe loop are co-planar
& their of the proportional : (D)K (A) ( B )i Q9
2 3 2 2 2
(iii)
fe Bansal Classes
A metal rod moves at a constant velocity in a direction perpendicular to its len
gth. A constant, uniform magneticfieldexists in space in a direction perpendicul
ar to the rod as well as its velocity. Select the correct statement(s)fromthe fo
llowing (A) the entire rod is at the same electric potential (B) there is an ele
ctricfieldin the rod (C) the electric potential is highest at the centre of the
rod & decreases towards its ends (D) the electric potential is lowest at the cen
tre of the rod & increases towards its ends.
[10]
(iv)
An inductor of inductance 2.0mH,is connected across a charged capacitor of capac
itance 5.0pF,and the resulting LC circuit is set oscillating at its naturalfrequ
ency.Let Q denote the instantaneous charge on the capacitor, and I the current i
n the circuit. It is found that the maximum value of Q is 200 pC. (a) when Q= 10
0 pC, what is the value of | dl / dt| ? (b) when Q=200 pC ,what is the value of
I ? (c) Find the maximum value of I. (d) when I is equal to one half its maximum
value, what is the value of | Q| Q.12 Two identical circular loops of metal wir
e are lying on a table without touching each other. Loop-A carries a current whi
ch increases with time. In response, the loop-B [JEE' 99] (A) remains stationary
(B) is attracted by the loop-A (C) is repelled by the loop-A (D) rotates about
its CM, with CM fixed Q.13 A coil of inductance 8.4 mH and resistance 6Q is conn
ected to a 12V battery. The current in the coil is 1.0 A at approximately the ti
me (A) 500 s (B) 20 s (C)35 ms (D) 1 ms [ JEE'99 ] Q.14 A circular loop of radiu
s R, carrying current I, lies in x-y plane with its centre at origin. The total
magnetic flux through x-y plane is (A) directly prop ortional to I (B) directly
proportional to R (C) directly proportional to R (D) zero [JEE' 99]
2
Q.15 A magneticfieldB = (B y / a) k is into the plane ofpaper in the +z directio
n. B and a are positive constants. A square loop EFGH of side a, mass m and resi
stance R in x-y plane, starts falling under the influence of gravity. Note the d
irections ofx and y axes in the figure. Find (a) the induced current in the loop
and indicate its direction, (b) the total Lorentz force acting on the loop and
indicate its direction, (c) an expression for the speed ofthe loop, v(t) and its
terminal value.
0 0
<g>E, ® F ® I ®GMH 8 — 0 0 0
1 1
[JEE '99]
Q.16 Two circular coils can be arranged in any ofthe three situations shown in t
hefigure.Their mutual inductance will be (A) maximum in situation (a) <=> 0 (B)
maximum in situation (b) ^ —-^Q (C) maximum in situation (c) <a) (b) <c) (D) the s
ame in all situations [JEE'2001, (Scr)]
g c
Q.17 An inductor of inductance L = 400 mH and resistors of resistances R, = 2Q a
nd II, = 2D. are connected to a battery of e.m.f. E= 12V as shownin thefigure.Th
e internal resistance of the battery is negligible. The switch S is closed at ti
me t = 0. What is the potential drop across L as a function oftime? After the st
eady state is reached, the switch is opened. What is the direction and the magni
tude of current through R as a function of time? [JEE'2001]
:
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
Q 18 As shown inthefigure,P and Q are two coaxial conducting loops separated by
some distance. When the switch S is closed, a clockwise current I flows in P (as
seen by E) and an induced current I flows in Q. The switch remains closed for a
long time. When S is opened, a current I flows in Q. Then the directions of I a
dn I (as seen by E) are: (A) respectively clockwise and anti-clockwise (B) both
clockwise Battery' (C) both anti-clockwise (D) respectively anti-clockwise and c
lockwise [JEE 2002(Scr), 3] Q.19 A short -circuited coil is placed in a time var
ying magneticfield.Electrical power is dissipated due to the current induced in
the coil. Ifthe number ofturns were to be quadrupled and the wire radius halved,
the electrical power dissipated would be [JEE 2002(Scr), 3] (A) halved (B) the
same (C) doubled (D) quadrupled
p Q2 Q! Q2
Q . 20 A square loop of side 'a' with a capacitor of capacitance C is located be
tween two current carrying long parallel wires as shown. The value of I in the i
s given as I = I sincot. (a) calculate maximum current in the square loop. (b) D
raw a graph between charge on the lower plate of the capacitor v/s time. Q.21 Th
e variation of induced emf (s) with time (t) in a coil if a short bar magnet is
moved along its axis with a constant velocity is best represented as
0
[JEE 2003]
mm
[JEE 2004(Scr)]
(A)
(B)
(C)
0
(D)
Q.22 In an LR series circuit, a sinusoidal voltage V = V sin cot is applied. It
is given that L = 3 5 mH, R = 11 O, co V = 220 V,' 2% 50 Hz and % = 22/7. Find t
he amplitude of current in the steady state and obtain the phase difference betw
een the current and the voltage. Also plot the variation of current for one cycl
e on the given graph. [JEE 2004]
Q.23 An infinitely long cylindrical conducting rod is kept along + Z direction.
A constant magneticfieldis also present in+Z direction. Then current induced wil
l be (A) 0 (B) along +z direction (C) along clockwise as seen from + Z (D) along
anticlockwise as seen from+Z [JEE' 2005 (Scr)] Q.24 A long solenoid of radius a
and number ofturns per unit length n is enclosed by cylindrical shell of radius
R, thickness d (d « R ) and length L. A variable current i = i sin cot flows thro
ugh the coil. Ifthe resistivity of the material of cylindrical shell is p,findth
e induced current inthe shell. [JEE 2005]
Q
JT"
3
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
Q.25 In the given diagram, a line offeree of a particular force field is shown.
Out ofthe following options, it can never represent (A) an electrostatic field (
B) a magnetostatic field (C) a gravitationalfieldof a mass at rest (D) an induce
d electric field [JEE 2006] Comprehension -/ The capacitor of capacitance C can
be charged (with the help of a resistance R) by a voltage source V, by closing s
witch S[ while keeping switch S open. The capacitor can be connected in series w
ith an inductor 'L' by closing switch S and opening S j.
2 2 2
Q. 26 Initially, the capacitor was uncharged. Now, switch Sj is closed and S is
kept open. If time constant of this circuit is x, then (A) after time interval x
, charge on the capacitor is CV/2 (B) after time interval 2x, charge on the capa
citor is C V( l-e~ ) (C) the work done by the voltage source will be half of the
heat dissipated when the capacitor is fully charged. (D) after time interval 2x
, charge on the capacitor is C V( 1-e ) [JEE 2006]
2 1
-npmw
!
Q.27 After the capacitor gets fully charged, Sj is opened and S is closed so tha
t the inductor is connected in series with the capacitor. Then, (A) at t = 0, en
ergy stored in the circuit is purely in the form of magnetic energy (B) at any t
ime t > 0, current in the circuit is in the same direction (C) at t > 0, there i
s no exchange of energy between the inductor and capacitor
2
(D) at any time t > 0, instantaneous current in the circuit may V j—
1
[JEE 2006]
Q.28 If the total charge stored in the LC circuit is Q , then for t > 0 (r 71 tt
(A) the charge on the capacitor is Q = Q cos V2 VLC (B) the charge on the capac
itor is Q = Q cosf it t 2 VLC
0
tt
0
+
0
(C) the charge on the capacitor is Q = -LC d Q dt (D) the charge on the capacito
r is Q = - 1 d Q V L C dt
2 2 2
[JEE 2006]
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
Comprehension —IV Magler Train: This train is based on the Lenz law and phenomena
of electromagnetic induction. In this there is a coil on a railway track and mag
net on the base of train. So as train is deviated then as is move down coil on t
rack repel it and as it move up then coil attract it. Disadvantage of magler tra
in is that as it slow down the forces decreases and as it moves forward so due t
o Lenz law coil attract it backward. Due to motion oftrain current induces in th
e coil of track which levitate it. Q.29 What is the advantage ofthe train? (A) E
lectrostatic force draws the train (C) Electromagnetic force draws the train (B)
Gravitational force is zero. (D) Dissipative force due to friction are absent [
JEE 2006]
Q.30 What is the disadvantage of the train? (A) Train experience upward force du
e to Lenz's law. (B) Friction force create a drag on the train. (C) Retardation
(D) By Lenz's law train experience a drag Q.31 Which force causes the train to e
levate up (A) Electrostatic force (C) magnetic force Q.32 Match the following Co
lumns Column 1 (A) Dielectric ring uniformly charged (B) Dielectric ring uniform
ly charged rotating with angular velocity. (C) Constant current inringi (D) Curr
ent i = i cos cot in ring
0 0
[JEE 2006] [JEE 2006]
(B) Time varying electric field (D) Induced electric field
Column 2 (P) Time independent electrostaticfieldout of system (Q) Magnetic field
(R) Induced electric field (S) Magnetic moment [JEE 2006]
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
ANSWER
Q.l 10 n V Q.2 XVB0 Q.3
EXERCISE-I
5.0 p V
KEY
Q.4 I"
1
Q.5
2N
LE
Q.6
Q.ll
p ia % 2Rb
0
Q.7
mgR B/
2 2
Q8
-A
Q.9
O.J
Q.10 2Rr
erk Q12 — Q-13 2 _
e
d i r e c t e d a i o n
g tangent to the circle of radius r, whose centre lies on the axis of cylinder.
Q.15 EL Q.16 kMT /(R)
2
1
Q.14 3nV, clockwise
f
Q.17 LI/2R
Q.21 7t/4
T" ^ Q.18 200 rad/sec Q.19 q = Q sin LC t + 7C 1 2J
0
A
Q.20 C7ta /R
2
nrr Q.22 — = 2H Q 23 20 V
2 0
K
Q.24 R= 100W, V3/71 Hz
Q.25 C = 9.2 pF
EXERCISE-II
Q.l © 85.22Tm ;(ii)56.8 V; (iii)linearly
2
Q.2
8
Bd
Bd
17
+
Q.3 (i) 2.4 x 10-5
v
(ii)
from to b Q.4 (i) 3.3 x 10 A,(ii) 1.0 x 10 W,(iii) totally unrealistic
c
4-
Q.5 21.74 V, anticlockwise
Q.6 ~1 rl
3
Q.7 <|) = 271 L /n a+b ~I a Q.9 4B vd
2
Q.8 ô I a V (n 3a a 4 4n R
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
ô I aV , 2tt R 3 4
2 2 1 2
nX
Q.lO^^/n• 271 a
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
Q.ll
v
/ dB L 2 - — R / 2 dt v 4
2 2 2
Q.12
R
E Rj 1 2 2 3 3 1
R + R R + R R 2 2
Q.13
67/32 A
Q. 14 (i) ij = i = 10/3 A, 00 ii = 50/11 A; i = 30/11A (iii) h = 0, i = 20/11 A,
(iv) = i = 0
2
Q.15 C =
2
i r- f r V 1 1+M v coL-- 1 Ca fflL©(Q+Cs). ©(Cj + C ) Ci V 2 A V 2 A
r c c C 2
Q.16 42 + 20t volt
Q.17 0.08 H, 17.28 W Q.20 0.2 mH, ^ F , 8 > < 10 rad/s
5
Q.18 2A 400W
Q.19 77Q, 97.6Q, 7.7V, 9.76V
EXERCISE-III Q h \ 22 '
1 A I b e
11
A ; i p E
22
A
Q.2 A, D
Q.3 V= 1 ms , i = 0.47 0 , R^, = 0.30D
_1 R
Q.4ACD 1 Bor [l-e" J mgr Q.5 (a) E= - Bror (b) (i) 1= ^ , (ii) x= - f - coscot +
coB r (l-e~ )
o 2 Rt/L 2 4 2 J 4 R Rt/L
Q.6 t = — /n2 = 3.47 sec R mgR Q-9© V
terminal
Q.7 D o
Q.8 evBk , ABDC
=
; (ii) f
Q.10 1.6 71 x 10-13 A= 50.3 pA
4
Q. 11 (i) A, B, C, D, (ii) B, (iii) B, (iv) (a) 10 A/s (b) 0 (c) 2A (d) 100^3 pC
Q.12 C Q.13 D Q.14 D Q.15 (a) i = —~— in anticlockwise direction, v=velocity at tim
e t, (b) F =B a V/R, R
nett 0 2 2 ( C ) V
mgR ' 1 - e Ba
2 2
Bpa 2 t ^
m R
fe Bansal Classes
[10]
Q.16 A Q.18 D
Q.17 I2e" , 6e
5t
_10t
Q.19 B
2
Q-20 ( a ) I = ^ C I G ) / n 2 , (b)
m a x 0
Q.21 B v = 220V2 sin cot
i = 20 sin (at-n'4)
V,I
Q.22 20A,7, •'• Steady state current i = 20sin 71 lOOt-
71
2
?>
•W-J2
r/8 r/4 ™\sr/8"
T
9TIS
Q.23 A Q.25 A,C Q.29 D Q.26 B Q.30 D
Q.24 1 = Q.27 D Q.31 C
(H ni (Dcoscot)7ta (Ld)
0 0
p27iR
Q.28 C
Q.32 (A) P; (B) P, Q, S; (C) Q,S ; (D) Q, R, S
XII (ALL)
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION & ALTERNATING CURRENT
QUESTION BANK ON
QUESTION FOR SHORT
ANSWER
Q.l Q.2 Q.3 Q.4 Q.5
Are induced emfs and currents different in any way from emfs and currents provid
ed by a battery connected to a conducting loop? Can a charged particle at rest b
e set in motion by the action of a magnetic field? If not, why not? If so, how?
Consider both static and time-varying fields. In Faraday's law of induction, doe
s the induced emf depend on the resistance ofthe circuit? If so, how? Figure sho
ws a copper ring that is hung from a ceiling by two threads. Describe in detail
how you might most effectively use a bar magnet to get this ring to swing back a
nd forth. Two conducting loops face each other a distance d apart, as shown in f
igure. An observer sights along their common axis from left to right. A clockwis
e current i is suddenly established in the larger loop by a battery not shown, (
a) What is the direction of the induced current in the smaller loop? (b) What is
the direction ofthe force (if any) that acts on the smaller loop? A circular lo
op moves with constant velocity through regions where uniform magneticfieldsofth
e same magnitude are directed into or out ofthe plane of the page, as indicated
infigure.At which ofthe seven indicated positions will the induced current be (a
) clockwise, (b) counterclockwise, and (c) zero?
Q.6
IX
X
X
Q.7 Q.8 Q. 9
Can an induced current ever establish a magneticfieldB that is in the same direc
tion as the magnetic field inducing the current? Justify your answer. A plane cl
osed loop is placed in a uniform magneticfield.In what ways can the loop be move
d without inducing an emf? Consider motions both oftranslation and rotation. Fig
ure (a) shows a top view of the electron orbit in a betatron. Electrons are acce
lerated in a circular orbit in the xy plane and then withdrawn to strike the tar
get T. The magneticfieldB is along the z axis (the positive z axis is out ofthe
page). The magneticfieldB along this axis varies sinusoidally as shown in figure
(b). Recall that the magneticfieldmust (i) guide the electrons in their circula
r path and (ii) generate the electricfieldthat accelerates the electrons. Which
quarter cycle(s) infigureare suitable (a) according to (i), (b) according to (ii
), and (c) for operation of the betatron?
z
2
5/-\6 '4 7\
(a)
| | Bansal Classes
(b)
Question Bank on EMI
[2]
Q.10 (i) A piece of metal and a piece of non-metallic stone are droppedfromthe s
ame height near the surface of the earth. Which one will reach the ground earlie
r? (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) A metallic loop is placed in a nonuniform magneticfield,w
ill an emf be induced in the loop ? A wire loop is held with its plane horizonta
l. Amagnet with its north pole downward is allowed to fall through itfromsome he
ight. Will the magnet fall with constant acceleration? What will happen ifthe po
les are reversed? A magnet is dropped down into long vertically copper tube. Sho
w that, even neglecting air resistance the magnet will reach a constant terminal
velocity. A magnet is droppedfromthe ceiling along the axis of a copper loop ly
ingflaton thefloor.Ifthe falling magnet is photographed with a time sequence cam
era, what differences, if any will be noted if, (i) the loop is at room temperat
ure© the loop is packed in dry ice ?
Q.ll A copper ring is suspended in a vertical plane by a thread. A steel bar is
passed through the ring in the horizontal direction which is perpendicular to th
e plane of the loop. Then a magnet is similarly passed through the loop. Will th
e motion ofthe magnet and the bar affect the position of the ring? Q.12 If the m
agneticfieldoutside a copper box is suddenly changed, what happens to the magnet
icfieldinside the box ? Such low-resistivity metals are used to form enclosures
which shield objects inside them against varying magnetic fields. Q.13 Metallic
(nonferromagnetic) and nonmetallic particles in a solid waste may be separated a
s follows. The waste is allowed to slide down an incline over permanent magnets.
The metallic particles slow down as compared to the nonmetallic ones and hence
are separated. Discuss the role of eddy currents in the process. Q.14 Ajet plane
isflyingdue north. A potential difference is produced between he wing tips ofth
e plane. Will a passenger sitting inside the plane also expect some emfbetween t
he wing tips? Will a tiny bulb connected to the wing tips glow? Q.15 Is the indu
ctance per unit length for a solenoid near its centre; (a) the same as(b) less t
han or (c) greater than the inductance per unit length near its ends ? Q.16 Two
solenoids A & B have the same diameter & length & contain only one layer of wind
ings, with adj acent turns touching, insulation thickness being negligible. Sole
noid A contains many turns offinewire & solenoid B contains fewer turns ofheavie
r wire, (i) which solenoid has the larger inductance? (i) which solenoid has the
larger inductive time constant ? (material is same)
B
Q.17 If thefluxN4> through each turn of a coil is the same, the inductance of th
e coil may be computed passing from L = j . How might one compute L for a coil f
or which this assumption is not valid .
(fe Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.18 If a current in a source of emfis in the direction of the emf, the energy o
fthe source decreases, if a current is in a direction opposite to the emf (as in
charging a battery), the energy of the source increases Do these statements app
ly to the inductor. Q.19 Does the time required for the current in particular LR
circuit to build up to any given fraction of its equilibrium value depend on th
e value of the applied emf. Q.20 A steady current is set up in a coil with a ver
y large inductive time constant. When the current is interupted with a switch a
heavy arc tends to appear at the switch blades. Explain? [Note: interrupting cur
rents in highly inductive circuits can be dangerous] Q.21 What is the advantage
of placing the two electric wires carrying ac close together? Q. 22 In an LR ser
ies circuit the selfinduced emfis a maximum at the instant the switch is closed.
How can this be since there is no current in the inductance at this instant. Q.
23 Explain what is meant by the statement "A motor acts as a motor and generato
r at the same time." Can the same be said for a generator? Q. 24 In a toroid, is
the energy density larger near the inner radius or near the outer radius ? Q.25
Two circular loop s are placed with their centres separated by afixeddistance.
How would you orient the loops to have (a) the largest mutual inductance (b) the
smallest mutual inductance ? Q.26 If the resistance R in the left hand circuit
offigureis increased, what is the direction ofthe induced current in the right h
and circuit ?
(fe Bansal Classes
[14]
An electron is moving in a circular orbit of radius R with an angular accelerati
on a. At the centre ofthe orbit is kept a conducting loop of radius r, (r « R ) .
The e.m.f induced in the smaller loop due to the motion of the electron is (A) z
ero, since charge on electron in constant (B) Po a 4R (D) none of these (C) M-o
a
er er
y^Q-rl
a conducting loop of radius R is present in a uniform magnetic field B perpendic
ular the plane ofthe ring. Ifradius R varies as a function oftime't', as R = R +
1. The e.m.f induced in the loop is (A) 2TC(R + t)B clockwise ( B ) 7 T ( R + T
) B clockwise (C) 27T(R + t)B anticlockwise (D) zero A wire loop is placed in a
region oftime varying magneticfieldwhich is oriented orthogonally to the plane o
f the loop as shown in thefigure.The graph shows the magneticfieldvariation as t
he function oftime. Assume the positive emf is the one which drives a current in
the clockwise direction and seen by the observer in the direction of B. Which o
f the following graphs best represents the induced emf as a function oftime.
0
d
4TTR
Q
0
J J T 4
Q.5
(C) (D) ST A square wire loop of 10.0 cm side lies at right angles to a uniform
magneticfieldof 20T. A10 V light bulb is in a series with the loop as shown in t
hefig.The magneticfieldis decreasing steadily to zero over a time interval At. T
he bulb will shine with full brightness if At is equal to (A) 20 ms (B) 0.02 ms
(C) 2 ms (D) 0.2 ms A long straight wire is parallel to one edge as infig.If the
current in the long wire is varies intime as I = T -fx, what will be the induce
d emf in the loop?" p bl d + a ^ d+a (A) —— In ( B ) ^ f e . 711 / 2ttc V
e T 0
w
(A)
(B)
t, t.
(D) TIT In d+a 7ix v a A rectangular loop with a sliding connector oflength 10 c
m is situated in uniform magneticfieldperpendicular to plane of loop. The magnet
ic induction is 0.1 tesla and resistance of connector (R) is 1 ohm. The sides AB
and CD have resistances 2 ohm and 3 ohm respectively. Find the current in the c
onnector during its motion with constant velocity one metre/sec.
p
0
bl
(B) 220
1
(D) 440 A
(fe Bansal Classes
[5]
Q/f
The magnetic flux through a stationary loop with resistance R varies during inte
rval of time T as <j> = at (T -1). The heat generated during this time neglectin
g the inductance of loop will be a^T aT a ¥ a ¥ (C) 3R (A) 3R (B) 3R CD) R Q/8" The
dimensions of permeability offreespace can be given by (D) [MLA^ ] (A) [MLT A" ]
(B) [MLA" ] (C) [ML" T A ] Q.9 A wire as a parabola y = a x is located in a uni
form magnetic field of inductance B, the vector B being perpendicular to the pla
ne xy. At the moment t = 0 a connector starts translation wisefromthe parabola a
pex with a constant acceleration co tofindthe emf of electromagnetic induction i
n the loop this formed as a function of y
2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 1 2
(AW =2 By
c S =
(BK
in
By (D) s ( ) in a ' 2 A thin circular ring of area 10~ m is held perpendicular t
o a uniform magneticfieldofinduction 0.1 T. A small cut is made in the ring and
the galvanometer is connected across the ends such that the total resistance of
the circuit is 0.1 Q. The ring is squeezed to area 0.5 x 10 m in time 0.1 sec. T
he average induced current in the circuit is (A) insufficient data (B) 0.05 A (C
)0.5A (D)5A A closed planar wire loop ofarea A and arbitrary shape is placed in
a uniform magneticfieldofmagnitude B, with its plane perpendicular to magneticfi
eld.The resistance of the wire loop is R. The loop is now turned upside down by
180° so that its plane again becomes perpendicular to the magneticfield.The total
charge that must have flowed through the wire ring in the process is (A) < AB/R
(B)=AB/R (C) = 2AB/R (D)None D fy r A square coil ABCD is placed in x-y plane wi
th its centre at origin. A long straight wire, passing through origin, carries a
current in negative z-direction. ® Current in this wire increases with time. The
induced current in the coil is : (A) clockwise (B) anticlockwise (C) zero (D) al
ternating By
2 2 -2 2
J ^
3
s j *
r1I 5
(fe Bansal Classes
A vertical bar magnet is droppedfromposition on the axis ofafixedmetallic rh s c
ii coil as shown infig-1. Infig- II the magnet isfixedand horizontal coil is dr
opped. The acceleration ofthe magnet and coil are al and cl, respectively —i1. N L
then C ]1 J) fixed fixed N (B) aj > g, a < g (A) a, > g , a > (C) a, < g a < g
fig-H (D) a. < fig-I Two identical coaxial circular loops carry a current i each
circulating inthe same direction. If the loops approach each other (A) the curr
ent in each will decrease (B) the current in each will increase (C) the current
in each will remain the same (D) the current in one will increase and in other w
ill decrease A long straight conductor is placed along axis of a circular coil o
f radius R. Ifthe current, B as shown infigure,starts decreasing with time, the
current induced in loop would be \ (A) clockwise (ACB) (B) anticlockwise (ABC) S
e ^ (C) can not be decided (D) there will be no induced current.
2
2
2
A
[6]
Q . 16 In a long hollow vertical metal pipe a magnet is dropped. During its fall
, the acceleration of magnet: (A) will decrease linearly (B) will decrease upto
a value which is less than g. (C) will decrease to zero and will attain a termin
al speed (D) may increase or decrease s^tyrff In the arrangement shown in givenf
igurecurrentfromAto B is increasing inmagnitude. Induced current in the loop wil
l (A) have clockwise direction (B) have anticlockwise direction (C) be zero (D)
oscillate between clockwise and anticlockwise An electric current ij canfloweith
erdirectionthroughloop(l) and induced current i, in loop (2). Positive i, is whe
n current isfrom'a' to 'b' in loop (1) ' loop (l) and positive i is when the cur
rent is from 'c' to'd' in loop (2) In an experiment, the graph of i against time
*t* is as shown below •
v 2 2 l o o p (2)
Which one(s) of the following graphs could have caused i to behave as give above
.
2
(A) (C)
(B)o (D)
^Qr1"9 A bar magnet is releasedfromrest along the axis of a very long, vertical
copper tube after some time, the magnet (A) will stop the tube (B) will move wit
h almost constant speed (C) will move with acceleration g (D) will oscillate J^>
0 Figure shows a bar magnet and a long straight wire W, carrying current into th
e plane of paper. Point P is the point of intersection of axis of magnet and the
line N of shortest distance between magnet and the wire. If P is the midpoint o
f the magnet, then which of the following statements is correct ? W (A) magnet e
xperiences a torque in clockwise direction (B) magnet experiences a torque in an
ticlockwise direction (C) magnet experiences a force, normal to the line of shor
test distance (D) magnet experiences a force along the line of shortest distance
X
QrlT A square coil ABCD is lying in xy plane with its centre at origin. A lng st
raight wire passing through origin carries a current i = 2t in negative z-direct
ion. The induced current in the coil is (A) clockwise (B) anticlockwise (C) alte
rnating (D) zero
»x
^. Bansal Classes
[130]
(YXI A negative charge is given to a nonconducting loop and the loop is rotated
in the IIIIII fj plane of paper about its centre as shown infigure.The magneticf
ieldproduced by the ring affects a small magnet placed above the ring in the sam
e plane: s (A) the magnet does not rotate (B) the magnet rotates clockwise as se
enfrombelow. (C) the magnet rotates anticlockwise as seen from below (D) no effe
ct on magnet is there. Two infinitely long conducting parallel rails are connect
ed through a capacitor C ® ® B as shown in thefigure.A conductor of length I is move
d with constant speed J7® v .'Which of the following graph truly depicts the varia
tion of current L® through the conductor with time ?
p
%
1
0
N
(A)
Current T I(t)
(B)
Current T I(t)
t (time)
t (time)
(C)
Current t I(t)
(D)
t (time)
Current t I(t)
1= 0
t (time)
Two identical conductors P and Q are placed on twofiictionlessrails R and S in a
uniform magneticfielddirected into the plane. If P is moved in the X direction
shown infigurewith a constant speed then Rrod Q V (A) will be attracted towards
P X (B) will be repelled away from P (C) will remain stationary (D) maybe repell
ed or attracted towards P
s
X X X
X X X
X
•B
x
X
Qs25 Thefigureshows an isosceles triangle wireframewith apex angle equal to n/2.
The frame starts entering into the region ofuniform magneticfieldB with constan
t velocity v at t= 0. The longest side of the frame is perpendicular to the dire
ction ofvelocity. If i is the instantaneous current through theframethen choose
the alternati ve showing the correct variation ofi with time.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
i"
A thin wire of length 2m is perpendicular to the xy plane. It is moved with velo
city v = (2i + 3 j + k) m / s through a region ofmagnetic induction B = (I + 2 j
) Wb / m • Then potential difference induced between the ends ofthe wire : (A) 2 v
olts (D) none ofthese (B) 4 volts (C)0 volts
2
^. Bansal Classes
Question Bank on EMI [131]
y Q J Z ^ A long metal bar of 30 cm length is aligned along a north south line a
nd moves eastward at a speed of 10 ms" . A uniform magnetic field of 4.0 T point
s vertically downwards. If the south end of the bar has a potential of 0 V, the
induced potential at the north end ofthe bar is (A) + 12 V (B)-12V (C) 0 V (D) c
annot be determined since there is not closed circuit 8 A square metal loop of s
ide 10 cm and resistance 1 Q is moved with a constant velocity partly inside a m
agnetic field of 2 Wbrrr , directed into the paper, as shown in thefigure.This l
oop is connected to a network offiveresistors each of X X X value 3 f l If a ste
ady current of 1 mAflows inthe loop, then the speed of the loop is (A) 0.5 cms"
(B) 1 cms (C)2cms" (D) 4 cms" Q.29 Two conducting rings P and Q ofradii r and 2r
rotate uniformly in opposite directions with centre of mass velocities 2v and v
respectively on a conducting surface S. There is auniform magneticfieldofmagnit
ude B perpendicular to the plane ofthe rings. The potential difference between B
,2r/ o the highest points ofthe two rings is iinriimniiinnninuiii P S Q (A) zer
o (B) 4 Bvr (C) 8 Bvr (D) 16Bvr ^ J ^ f ) Two coils, X and Y, are linked such th
at emfE is induced in Y when the current in X is changing at the rate
1 2 1 -1 1 1
dIN
dt . If a current I is now made toflowthrough Y, thefluxlinked with X will be
0
t
c
,
(C)(EI)I (D)ioi IJ E A conductor AB of length I oriented along x-axis moves in X
Y plane with velocity v = v (i - j). A magneticfieldB = B (i + j) exists in the
region. The induced emf is (A)V2B /v (B)2B /V (C)B /V (D)zero A conducting rod m
oves with constant velocity u perpendicular to the long, straight wire carrying
a current I as shown compute that the emf generated between the ends of the rod.
p ol/ p ol/ 2p ol/ p ol/ VY (A) (B) 2izr (C) (D) 4Tv 7ir %r A conducting rod of
length I moves with velocity u a direction parallel to a long wire carrying a s
teady current I. The axis of the rod is maintained perpendicular to the wire wit
h near end a distance r away as shown in thefig.Find the emf induced in the rod.
0
(A) EI 1
(B)
E
\
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
v
/
(A)
(C
K
In
T+l
\ r J i ^
T+l
J
(B
r + /
7t Vol" ,
K
( D ) —
In
T+l
(fe Bansal Classes
[9]
A square loop of side a and resistance R is moved in the region of uniform magne
tic field B(loop remaining completely insidefield) ,with a velocity v through a
distance x. The work done is : 4B ^ vx 2B ^ 2 VX B£2vx (D) none (C) R (B) R (A) R
A metallic rod oflength L and mass M is moving under the action oftwo unequal fo
rces F and F (directed opposite to each other) acting at its ends along its leng
th. Ignore gravity and any external magneticfield.If specific charge ofelectrons
is (e/m), then the potential difference between the ends ofthe rod is steady st
ate must be (A)|F -F |mL/eM (B) (F -F )mL/eM (C) [mL/eM]/n [F,/F ] (D)None Two p
arallel rigid wires arefixedat a distance' d' apart, with each wire in a vertica
l position. The top ends of the two wires are connected through an ideal inducto
r of inductance L. Astraight connector of mass M can slidefreelyup and down, mai
ntaining electrical contact with the two wires, in a horizontal position. Aunifo
rm magneticfieldexists perpendicular to the plane of the wires. If the connector
is releasedfromrest, the graph ofits downward velocity with time is:
2
2
2
}
2
1
2
1
2
2
(D) (C) (B) 31 A rod closing the circuit shown infiguremoves along a U shaped wi
re at a constant speed v under the action of the force F. The circuit is in a un
iform magnetic field perpendicular to the plane. Calculate F ifthe rate ofheat g
eneration in the circuti is Q.
(A)
(A) F = Qv ( B ) F =v ? (- Q F = ^ Q (D) F = a/Qv Two parallel long straight con
ductors lie on a smooth surface. Two other parallel conductors rest on J^ them a
t right angles so as to form a square of side a initially. Auniform magneticfiel
dB exists at right angles to the plane containing the conductors. They start mov
ing out with a constant velocity v. If r is the resistance per unit length ofthe
wire the current in the circuit will be Bv Br (B)— (C)Bvr (D) Bv (A) — r v <39 Ther
e is a uniform magneticfieldB normal to the xy plane. A conductor ABC has length
AB = l , parallel to the x-axis, and length BC = / , parallel to the y-axis. AB
C moves in the xy plane with velocity ,c v i + v j . The potential difference be
tween Aand C is proportional to (A)v / v / (B )v / + v / (Qv/rV. (°) V i \l2 A con
ducting rod PQ of length 5 m oriented as shown infigureis moving with velocity (
2 m/s) i without any rotation in a uniform magneticfield(3j + 4k) Tesla. Emf ind
uced in the rod is (A) 3 2 Volts (B) 40 Volt (C) 50 Volt (D)none An equilateral
triangular loop ADC of somefinitemagneticfieldB as shown in thefigure.At time t
= 0, side DC ofloop is at edge ofthe magneticfield.Magnetic field is perpendicul
ar to the paper inwards (or perpendicular to the plane of the x coil). The induc
ed current versus time graph will be as x
—
X X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X
y~yF;
8
x
2
x
y
x
1 +
y
2
x
2
y 1
x
x
(A)
(B)
(Q
(D)
(fe Bansal Classes
[10]
QA2 In the circuit shown infigure,a conducting wire HE is moved with a constant
speed V towards left. The complete circuit is placed in a uniform magnetic field
B perpendicular to the plane of the circuit directed in inward direction. The c
urrent in HKDE is (A) clockwise (B) anticlockwise (C) alternating (D) zero
C
= c
A
H
K
"C D
The magnetic field in a region is given by B B 1 + X jk • A square loop of edge -
length d is —
a]
J*44
placed with its edge along x & y axis. The loop is moved with constant velocity
V = v i • The emf induced in the loop is VBa V B d^ %B d" (D) None (A) a (C) d (B)
2a When a ' J' shaped conducting rod is rotating in its own plane with constant
angular velocity w, about one of its end P, in a uniform magneticfieldB directe
d normally into the plane of paper) then magnitude of emfinduced across it will
be
o 0 0
0
0
0
(A)BQ^L +l
2 2
2
(B) ^ B o L
2
2
^
(fe Bansal Classes
(C) ^-Bco(L / ) (D) ^-Bco/ Q.45 Ametal disc rotatesfreely,between the poles ofa
magnet in the direction N indicated. Brushes P and Q make contact with the edge
ofthe disc and the metal axle. What current, if any,flowsthrough R? ^ 1 (A) a cu
rrentfromP to Q (B) a currentfromQ to P (C) no current, because the emf in the d
isc is opposed by the back emf (D) no current, because the emfinduced in one sid
e ofthe disc is opposed by the emf induced in the other side. (E) no current, be
cause no radial emf is induced inthe disc For L-R circuit, the time constant is
equal to (A) twice the ratio of the energy stored in the magneticfieldto the rat
e of dissipation of energy in the resistance (B) ratio of the energy stored in t
he magneticfieldto the rate of dissipation of energy in the resistance (C) half
the ratio of the energy stored in the magneticfieldto the rate of dissipation of
energy in the resistance (D) square ofthe ratio ofthe energy stored in the magn
eticfieldto the rate of dissipation of energy in the resistance A rectangular co
il of single turn, having area A, rotates in a uniform magneticfieldB an angular
velocity 0) about an axis perpendicular to thefield.If initially the plane of c
oil is perpendicular to thefield,then the average induced e.m.f. when it has rot
ated through 90° is CDBA coBA coBA 2CDBA (A) % (B)' 2tz (Q 4k (D)r * * ' % 8 A rin
g of resistance 10H, radius 10cm and 100 turns is rotated at a rate 100 revoluti
ons per second about afixedaxis which is perpendicular to a uniform magneticfiel
dof induction 1 OmT. The amplitude of the current in the loop will be nearly (Ta
ke : k2 = 10) (A) 200A (B)2A (C)0.002A (D) none of these
2
[11]
v^
9
A copper rod AB of length L, pivoted at one end A, rotates at constant angular v
elocity Q, at right angles to a uniform magneticfieldofinduction B. The e.m.f de
veloped between the mid point C of the rod and end B is 3B©/ Bar B a r (C) (B) (A)
Figure shows auniform magneticfieldB confined to a cylindrical volume and is in
creasing at a constant rate. The instantaneous acceleration experienced by an el
ectron placed at P is (A) zero (B) towards right (C) towards left (D) upwards A
triangular wire frame (each side = 2m) is placed in a region oftime variant Xcv
magneticfieldhaving dB/dt=V3 T/s. The magneticfieldis perpendicular to the plane
of the triangle. The base of the triangle AB has a resistance 1 Q while the oth
er two sides have resistance 2D each. The magnitude ofpotential difference betwe
en the points A and B will be (A) 0.4 V (B) 0.6 V (C) 1.2 V (D)None 10V In the a
djoining circuit, initially the switch Sis open. The switch's' is closed 0.1 H i
on at t = 0. The difference between the maximum and minimum current that •A/VH —TftM
Tcan flow in the circuit is (A) 2 Amp (B) 3 Amp (C) 1 Amp (D) nothing can be con
cluded R The ratio oftime constant in charging and discharging inthe —AAAL 2R circ
uit shown infigureis —AAA(A)1 : 1 (B)3 : 2 (C)2:3 (D) 1:3 In anL-R circuit connect
ed to a battery of constant e.m.f. E switch S is closed at time t = 0. If e deno
tes the magnitude of induced e.m.f. across inductor and i the current in the cir
cuite at any time t. Then which of the following graphs shows the variation of e
with i ?
10Q
y
0 51
(B)
(C)
(D)
A curren of2A is increasing at a rate of 4 A/s through a coil of inductance 2H.
The energy stored in the inductor per unit time is (A) 2 J/s (B) 1 J/s (C) 16 J/
s (D) 4 J/s
x
Q<56 Two identical inductance carry currents that vary with time according to li
near laws (as shown infigure).In which of two inductance is the self induction e
mf greater?
(A) 1
1
(B)2 (C) same (D) data are insufficient to decide
(fe Bansal Classes
[12]
y
5
8
The current in the given circuit is increasing with a rate a=4 amp/s. The charge
on the capacitor at an instant when the current in the circuit is 2 amp will be
: (A) 4pC (B) 5pC L=1H 0 3 P F (C) 6pC (D) none of these L, C and R represent p
hysical quantities inductance, capacitance and resistance. The combination which
has the dimensions of frequency is
1 (A) ^ and I (B) V R C and (C) Vlc <59 A coil of inductance 5H is joined to a c
ell of emf 6 V through a resistance 10Q at time t = 0. The emf across the coil a
t time t = In J2 s is: (A) 3V (B) 1.5 V (C) 0.75 V (D)4.5V 60 Along solenoid of
N turns has a self inductance L and area of cross section A. When a current i fl
ows through the solenoid, the magneticfieldinside it has magnitude B. The curren
t i is equal to: (A) BAN/L (B)BANL (C) BN/AL (D) B/ANL Q.61 A long straight wire
of circular cross-section is made of a non-magnetic material. The wire is of ra
dius a. The wire carries a current I which is uniformly ditributed over its cros
s-section. The energy stored per unit lenght in the magneticfieldcontained withi
n the wire is ( A ) U = ^ (B)U = M (C)U = M-QI (D)U = 2K 8tt 1671 4tc is part uQ
- 6 2 The network shown in theIfigure and it isof a complete circuit.ofIf at a 1
Q + 5 mH certain instant, the current is 5 A decreasing at a rate A«-WA—11—rsmRP » 15 V
10 As" then V - V equals (A) 20 V ' (B) 15 V (C)10V (D) 5 V In Problem 62, if I
is reversed in direction, then V - V equals (A) 5 V (B)10V (C) 15 V (D) 20 V 10H
Two resistors of 10 D and 20 fl and an ideal inductor of 10 H are connected to
a 2 V battery as shown. The key K is inserted at time t = 0. The initial (t = 0)
and l—A/vW— final (t ->00) currents through battery are ion ^2on J_ J_ 15 ' 10 K V.
WVo >T5
B
3
1
B
A
B
A
1
( A )
A
A
A
A
2V
A small coil of radius r is placed at the centre of a large coil of radius R, wh
ere R » r. The coils are coplanar. The coefficient inductance between the coils is
(A) 2R (B) 2R (C) 2R (D) 2 R ^ Q.66 Two long parallel wires whose centres are a
distance d apart carry equal currents in opposite directions. If the flux withi
n wires is neglected, the inductance of such arrangement of wire of length / and
radius a will be a_ u / d Li / a Po/ (A)L = — log da- - B L= — l o g (C)L= — l o gd-
(D)none — 71 71 a 71
2
2
n
n
e
e
Bansal Classes
Question Bank on EMI j
[13]
V^
9
The inductor in a L-C oscillation has a maximum potential difference of 16 V and
maximum energy of 160 pJ. The value of capacitor in L-C circuit is (A) 0.8 pF (
B) 0.625 pF (C) 1.6 pF (D)1.25pF In the circuit shown, the cell is ideal. The co
il has an inductance of 4H and L " I W i h zero resistance. F is a fuse ofzero r
esistance and will blow when the current j fuse through it reaches 5 A. The swit
ch is closed at t = 0. The fuse will blow : s A (A) just after t=0 (B) after 2s
1 j^ (C) after 5 s (D) after 10s 2V A coil of inductance L and zero resistance i
s connected to a source of variable emf at t = 0. The emf of the source is varie
d with time according to the graph shown on the right above. What will be the av
erage current that flows through the coil during time T? (A) V T/2L (B) V T/3L (
C) 3V T/2L (D) V T/L In the LR circuit shown, what is the variation ofthe curren
t I as a function 2V of time? The switch is closed at time t = 0 sec. I L R ,V —(m
an- a w H V f1-e r A V (B) — e (A)R R V R
0 0 0 0 h
1
L
V -— (D) None (C)--E^ In the circuit shown, X is joined to Y for a long time, and
then X is joined to Z. The total heat produced in R^ is : -WW LE/ LEr LE RO TSWP
LE Y L (A) 2R?j (C) 2RJR (D) 2Rf (B) z.iv 2Ri ' -AAAA R An induction coil stores
32 joules of magnetic energy and dissipates energy as heat at the rate of 320 w
atts. When a current of 4 amperes is passed through it. Find the time constant o
f the circuit when the coil is joined across a battery. (D) 0.4 s (A) 0.2 s (B)0
.1s (C) 0.3 s The figure shows a part of a complete circuit. The potential 5 mH
difference V - V when the current I is 5 A and is decreasing at —11—PC(VC\— A 15 V B a
rate of 10 As is given by (D) 20 V (A) 15 V (B) 10 V (C) -15 V In a L-R decay c
ircuit, the initial current at t = 0 is I. The total charge that has flown throu
gh the resistor till the energy in the inductor has reduced to one-fourth its in
itial value, is (A) LI/R (B) LI/2R (C) L1V2/R (D) None A capacitor of capacitanc
e 2 pF is charged to a potential difference of 12 V. It is then connected across
an inductor of inductance 0.6 mH. The current in the circuit when the potential
difference across the capacitor is 6 V is : (A) 3.6 A (B) 2.4A (C) 1.2 A (D) 0.
6 A KMlSHtMP 1 — | di ^ C y / 6 In an LC circuit, the capacitor has maximum charge
q . The value of ^ is max
2 2 2 v B A
0
L
V M H t 3V
3
-1
0
^. Bansal Classes
(A) _qn_ LC
(B) VLC
(D) none of these
[14]
xJ^
An inductor coil stores U energy when i current is passed through it and dissipa
tes energy at the rate of P. The time constant ofthe circuit, when this coil is
connected across a battery of zero internal resistance is 2P 4U U 2U (D)~ (A) — (B
) 17 (C) p p V-/ p VV The mutual inductance between the rectangular loop and the
long straight wire as shown in figure is M. .o pa (B) M 271 In 1 + 1(A) M = Zer
o H
: 0
p a. pb (D)M=—In (C) M 2ti In V c, A long straight wire is placed along the axis o
f a circular ring of radius R. The mutual inductance of this system is P 7lR (D)
0 (A) p R (B) (C) H o
0 0 0
0
^80
vX 8 4
2 n— — si© (100 t) The power factor of the circuit is 1 / V2 . The capacitance ofthe c
ircuit is equal to ion o.i H (A) 400 pF (B) 300 pF L-AA,—WMiHH (C) 500 pF (D) 200
pF c An ac-circuit having supply voltage E consists of a resistor of resistance
3D and an inductor of reactance 4Q. as shown in the figure. The voltage across t
he — V \ — W i i P — inductor at t = T/2 is (A) 2 volts (B) 10 volts E=10 sin cat (C)
zero (D) 4.8 volts In the circuit, as shown in the figure, if the value of R.M.S
current is ioon r^SMJIP- AV 2.2 ampere, the power factor of the box is I/71 Hen
ry Box (A) T J (B) 1 -©V = 220 volt. u = 100 it s-< > <Q# (0,1 When 100 V DC is ap
plied across a solenoid a current of 1A flows in it. When 100 VAC is applied acr
oss the same coil, the current drops to 0.5 A. If the frequency of the AC source
is 50 Hz, the impedance and inductance ofthe solenoid are: (A) 1000, 0.93 H (B)
200H, 1.0 H (C) 10£2, 0.86H (D)200H, 0.55 H An inductive circuit contains resistan
ce of 10 Q and an inductance of 2 .0 H. If an AC voltage of 120 V and frequency
60 Hz is applied to this circuit, the current would be nearly: (A) 0.8 A (B) 0.4
8 A (C) 0.16 A (D) 0.32A The power in ac circuit is given by P - E I cos<j).The
vale of cos ()) in series LCR circuit at resonance is:
- e rms rms rms
(A) zero (B)l (C) < >vi In ac circuit when ac ammeter is connected it reads i cu
rrent if a student uses dc ammeter in place of ac ammeter the reading in the dc
ammeter will be:
1
D
(B) V2 i
(C) 0.637 i
(D) zero
(fe Bansal Classes
[15]
QrSf In the circuti shown in the figure, R= J ~ . Switch S is closed at time t =
0. The current throughC and r^MWT- -A/VW L R L would be equal after a time t eq
ual to: (A) CR (B) CR In (2) •AAAAr (D)LR L' In the circuit shown ifthe emfof sour
ce at an instant is 5 V, the potential difference across capacitor at the same i
nstant is 4 V. The potential difference across R at that instant can be (A) 3 V
(B)9V
0 c
R S
•AWî
R
V
(D)none
O-
An AC current is given by I = I +1 j sin wt then its rms value will be (C)0 (D)
I /V2 (A) v V + O ^ (B) I + 0 . 5 I Let f = 50 Hz, and C = 100 pF in an AC circu
it containing a capicator only. If the peak value of the current in the circuit
isl.57Aatt = 0. The expression for the instantaneous voltage across the capacito
r will be (A) E = 50 sin (100 TCt - 7t/2) (B)E= 100 sin (50 Tit) (C) E = 50 sin
100 nt (D) E = 50 sin (100 7tt + TC/2) In a series CR circuit shown in figure, t
he applied voltage is 10 V and the voltage across capacitor is found to be 8 V.
Then the voltage across R, and the phase difference between current and the appl
ied voltage will respectively be V 8V (B) 3 V, tan" (A) 6V, tan (!)
2 0 2 0 2 0 c 1 1
(C) 6V, tan,-1 (D)none 10V3, J > 9 2 The phase difference between current and vo
ltage in an AC circuit is tc/4 radian. If thefrequencyofAC is 50 Hz, then the ph
ase difference is equivalent to the time difference : (A)0.78 s (B) 15.7ms (C) 0
.25 s (D)2.5ms The given figure represents the phasor diagram of a series LCR ci
rcuit connected to an ac source. At the instant t' when the source voltage is gi
ven by V = V cosa>t', the current in the circuit will be (A) I = I cos(©t' + TC/6)
(B) I = I cos(©t' - 7i/6) (C) I = I cos(ot' + tc/3) (D) I = I cos(©t' - tc/3)
0 0 0 0 0
V =3V V =VIV
OL 0R
J^
4
A coil, a capacitor and an AC source of rms voltage 24 V are connected in series
. By varying the frequency of the source, a maximum rms current of 6 A is observ
ed. If coil is connected to a battery of emf 12 volt and internal resistance 4Q,
then current through it in steady state is (A) 2.4 A (B) 1.8 A (C)1.5A (D)1.2A
(fe Bansal Classes
[16]
0 ^ 5 Power factor of an L-R series circuit is 0.6 and that of a C-R series circ
uit is 0.5. If the element (L, C, and R) of the two circuits are joined in serie
s the power factor of this circuit is found to be 1. The ratio of the resistance
in the L-R circuit to the resistance in the C-R circuit is 3V3 (B) 5/6 (D) (A)
6/5 6 The direct current which would give the same heating effect in an equal co
nstant resistance as the current shown infigure,i.e. therms, current, is (B) 42
A (A) zero (D) 2 V2 A (C) 2A
Current/A
1 0 0.0] -1
-2
2
0.02
0.03 0.04 Time/s
. ^ J ^ l The effective value of current i = 2 sin 100 n t + 2 sin(100 % t + 30°)
is : (A) V2 A (B) 2^2 + 73 (C)4 (D) None Q.98 In the circuit diagram shown, X =
100 Q, X = 200 Q and R = 100 Q. The effective current through the source is (A)
2 A (B) V2 A (C) 0.5 A (D) 2V2 A
c L
aT
<5«
L-Y
^ Q.9 9 If Ij, Ij, I and I are the respective r.m.s. values of the time varying
currents as shown in the four cases I, II, III and IV Then identify the correct
relations. i Io In rv\ „ O O 0 -lo -In (A) I, = I = I3 = I ( B ) I > I = I > I (C)
I > I > I - Ij (D) I > I > Ij > I
3 4
In
•Jt
-In
2
4
3
1
2
4
3
4
2
3
2
4
^ 1 0 0 In series LR circuit X = 3R. Now a capacitor with X = R is added in seri
es. Ratio of new to old power factor is 1 (B)2 (A) 1 (D)V2
L c
vX
0
1
The current I, potential difference V across the inductor and potential differen
ce V across the capacitor in circuit as shown in thefigureare best represented v
ectorially as
L c
L -WW
. ,c
V,
V.
r
F-
(A) iv,
02
(B)
(C) '
1
(D) v j
A coil, a capacitor and an A.C. source of rms voltage 24 V are connected in seri
es. By varying the frequency of the source, a maximum rms current of 6 A is obse
rved. Ifthis coil is connected to a battery of emf 12 V and internal resistance
4Q, the current through it will be (A) 2.4 A (B) 1.8 A (C)1.5A (D)1.2A
(fe Bansal Classes
[17]
MV3
In the shown AC circuit phase different between currents I, and I is
2
,,xc
- e -
—TfOTWr W W
R
X
1
n
a 04
,x
T
(B) tan" L R C
1 X
n
,x
T
(D) tan L ~ C 2 R
X X
The circuit shown is in a uniform magnetic field that is into the page and is x
x x decreasing in magnitude at the rate of 150 tesla/second. The ideal ammeter (
A) reads X X X (A) 0.15 A (B) 0.35 A (C) 0.50 A (D) 0.65 A A Hh 5.0 V A capacito
r C = 2pF and an inductor with L = 10 H and coil resistance 5 H are in series in
a circuit. When an alternating current of r.m.s. value 2Aflows in the circuit,
the average power in watts in the circuit is (A) 100 (B) 50 (C) 20 (D) 10
—WA ion
10cm
ONE OR MORE THAN ONE OPTION MAY BE CORRECT Take approx. 3 minutes for ansyvering
each question.
The dimension of the ratio of magneticfluxand the resistance is equal to that of
: (A) induced emf (B) charge (C) inductance (D) current
1
1b** X
J*2
II The value of magneticfluxin each case is given by (A) Case I: O = TI(L + Case
II: <D = %(L - £ ) B (B) Case I: O = u(L + Case II: $ = k(L + £ )B (C) Case I: <0 =
(L + ^ )B; Case II: <D = (L - ^ )B (D) Case I: <D = (L + ^) B; Case II: <D = T
( - £) B C L The direction of induced current in the case I is (A) from a to b and
from c to d (B) from a to b and from/to e (C) from b to a and from d to c (D) f
rom b to a and from e t o / The direction ofinduced current in the case II is (A
) from a to b and from c to d (B) from b to a and from/ t o e (C) from b to a an
d from c to d (D) from a to b and from d to c If Ij and I are the magnitudes of
induced current in the cases I and II, respectively, then (A) = I (B)I, > I (C)
Ij < I (D) nothing can be said
2
T* X
x| X X X
The adjoiningfigureshows two different arrangements in which two square wirefram
esare placed in a uniform constantly decreasing magneticfieldB. hi
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
(fe Bansal Classes
[18]
Qk^f Figure shown plane figure made of a conductor located in a magnetic field a
long the inward normal to the plane of thefigure.The magnetic field starts dimin
ishing. Then the induced current (A) at point P is clockwise (B) at point Q is a
nticlockwise (C) at point Q is clockwise (D) at point R is zero
vX
1
x
A conducting wire frame is placed in a magneticfieldwhich is directed into the p
aper. The magneticfieldis increasing at a constant rate. The directions of induc
ed currents in wires AB and CD are (A) B to Aand D to C (B)Ato B and Cto D (C) A
to B and D to C (D) B to A and C to D
sj**
Two circular coils A and B are facing each other as shown in figure. The current
i through A can be altered (A) there will be repulsion between A and B if i is
increased (B) there will be attraction between A and B if i is increased (C) the
re will be neither attraction nor repulsion when i is changed (D) attraction or
repulsion between Aand B depends on the direction of current. It does not depend
whether the current is increased or decreased. When a magnet with its magnetic
moment along the axis of a circular coil and directed towards the coil is withdr
awn away from the coil, parallel to itself, the current in the coil, as seen by
the withdrawing magnet is (A) zero (B) clockwise (C) anticlockwise (D) independe
nt ofthe resistance of the coil 10 A bar magnet is moved along the axis of coppe
r ring placed far awayfromthe magnet. Lookingfromthe side of the magnet, an anti
clockwise current is found to be induced in the ring. Which of the following may
be true? (A) The south pole faces the ring and the magnet moves towards it. (B)
The north pole faces the ring and the magnet moves towards it. (C) The south po
le faces theringand the magnet moves away from it. (D) The north pole faces ther
ingand the magnet moves awayfromit. Q.ll In previous question, if P is on the le
ft ofmidpoint: (A) magnet experiences no torque (B) magnet experiences no net fo
rce but experiences a torque (C) magnet experiences arightwardforce as well as a
torque (D) magnet will not experiences a rightward force as well as a torque X
2 Two circular coils P & Q are fixed coaxially & carry currents I, and I respect
ively (A) if \ = 0 & P moves towards Q, a current in the samedirection as I ^ is
induced in Q (B) if Ij - 0 & Q moves towards P, a current in the opposite direc
tion to that of 1 isinduced in P. P' Q" (C) when ^ ^ 0 and 1, A 0 are in the sam
e direction then the two coils tend to move apart (D) when Ij ^ 0 and i ^ 0 are
in opposite directions then the coils tends to move apart.
2 ( 2 2
(ISBansal Classes
[19]
Q. 13 AB and CD are smooth parallel rails, separated by a distance /, and inclin
ed to the horizontal at an angle 9. Auniform magnetic field of magnitude B, dire
cted vertically upwards, exists in the region. EF is a conductor of mass m, carr
ying a current /'. For EF to be in equilibrium, (A) i mustflowfrom E to F (B) Bi
l = mg tan 0 (C) Bil = mg sin 9 (D)Bil = mg In the previous question, if B is no
rmal to the plane of the rails (A) Bil - mg tan 9 (B)Bil = mgsin9 (C) Bil = mg c
os 9 (D) equilibrium cannot be reached xp Qd5 A conducting rod PQ of length L =
1.0 m is moving with a uniform speed v = 20 m/s in a uniform magneticfieldB = 4.
0 T directed into the paper. A capacitor of capacity C = 10 pF is connected as s
hown in figure. Then C (A) q = + 800pC and q = - 800pC (B) q = - 800pC and q = +
800pC (C) q = 0 = q (D) charged stored in the capacitor increases exponentially
with time The e.m.f. induced in a coil of wire, which is rotating in a magnetic
field,does not depend on (A) the angular speed of rotation (B) the area of the c
oil (C) the number of turns on the coil (D) the resistance of the coil
A B A B A B
17 A semicircle conducting ring of radius R is placed in the xy plane, as shown
in the figure. A uniform magneticfieldis set up along the x-axis. No emf, will b
e induced in thering,if
Y B
/
R
X
(A) it moves along the x-axis (C) it moves along the z-axis
(B) it moves along the y-axis (D) it remains stationary
A conducting ring of radius a is rotated about a point O on its periphery as sho
wn in thefigurein a plane perpendicular to uniform magneticfieldB which exists e
verywhere. The rotational velocity is co. Q.18 Choose the correct statement(s) r
elated to the potential of the points P, Q and R (A) V - V > 0 and V - V < 0 (B)
V = V > V (C) V > V = Vq (D) V - V = V - V Q.19 Choose the correct statement(s)
related to the magnitude of potential differences 1 1 (A)V V = ~ Boa. (B) V - V
Q = — Bcoa ( C ) V - V 2Bcoa (D) V - V = 2Bffla
P 0 R 0 p R 0 0 p Q p p 0 p Q 2 p 2 Q 0 2 p R 2
(fe Bansal Classes
[20]
Q.20 Choose the correct statement(s) related to the induced current inthe ring (
A) Current flows from Q » P » O >R > Q (B) Current flows from Q » R > O >? > Q (C) Cur
rent flows from Q > P > 0 and from Q -—>R > O (D) No current flows Current growth
in two L-R circuits (b) and (c) as shown in figure (a). Let L L , R and Rj be th
e \ corresponding values in two circuits. Then (D)L <L (A)R >R (B)R =R (C)L >L —WT—v
v— L R2 L, Ri Tc)
p 2 t 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2
(a) (b) (c) A circuit consisting of a constant e.m.f.'E', a self induction'L and
a resistance'R'is closed at t = 0. The relation between the current I in the ci
rcuit and time t is as shown by curve 'a' in the fig. When one or more of parame
ters E, R & L are changed, the curve 'b' is obtained .The steady state current i
s same in both the cases. Thenit is possible that : (A) E & R are kept constant
& L is increased (B) E & R are kept constant & L is decreased (C) E & R are both
halved and L is kept constant (D) E & L are kept constant and R is decreased A
circuit element is placed in a closed box. At time t=0, constant current v(voits
) generator supplying a current of 1 amp, is connected across the box. Potential
difference across the box varies according to graph shown in figure. The elemen
t in the box is : (A) resistance of 2H (B) battery of emf 6Y (C) inductance of 2
H (D) capacitance of 0. 5F A constant current i is maintained in a solenoid. Whi
ch ofthe following quantities will increase if an iron rod is inserted in the so
lenoid along its axis? (A) magneticfieldat the centre. (B) magnetic flux linked
with the solenoid (C) self-inductance of the solenoid (D) rate of Joule heating.
The symbols L, C, R represent inductance, capacitance and resistance respective
ly. Dimension of frequency are given by the combination 1 (A) 1 / RC (B) R / L (
C) (D) C / L An LR circuit with a battery is connected at t = 0. Which ofthe fol
lowing quantities is not zero just after the circuit (A) current in the circuit
(B) magneticfieldenergy in the inductor (C) power delivered by the battery (D) e
mf induced in the inductor ^P^Z/ The switches in figures (a) and (b) are L R r^H
W- - W n closed at t = 0 (A) The charge on C just after t = 0 is EC. (B) The cha
rge on C long after t = 0 is EC. -A. (C) The current in L just after t = 0 is E/
R. (D) The current in L long after t = 0 is E/R. (b)
s
(fe Bansal Classes
[21]
Q.28 At a moment (t = 0) when charge on capacitor C, is zero, the switch is clos
ed. If I be the current through inductor at that instant, for t > 0, (A) maximum
current through inductor equals I /2. C, (B) maximum current through inductor e
quals Cjlp
0 0
c I+ c 2
(C) maximum charge on C, = c,+c 2 (D) maximum charge on Cj = I C, ^ q QA9 For L
- R circuit, the time constant is equal to (A) twice the ratio of the energy sto
red in the magnetic field to the rate ofthe dissipation of energy in the resista
nce. (B) the ratio ofthe energy stored in the magnetic field to the rate of diss
ipation of energy in the resistance. (C) half ofthe ratio of the energy stored i
n the magneticfieldto the rate of dissipation of energy in the resistance. (D) s
quare of the ratio of the energy stored in the magneticfieldto the rate of dissi
pation energy in the resistance.
0
An inductor L, a resistance R and two identical bulbs and B are connected to a b
attery through a switch S as shown in the figure. The R —vwv [®[B, I L-; resistance
of coil having inductance L is also R. Which of the following statement gives th
e correct description of the happenings when the switch S is closed? (A) The bul
b B„ lights up earlier than B, and finally both the bulbs shine equally bright. (B
) B, light up earlier and finally both the bulbs acquire equal brightness. (C) B„
lights up earlier and finally B, shines brighter than B,. (D) Bj and B^ light up
together with equal brightness all the time.
2 h
n
Which of the following quantities can be written in SI units in Kgm A~ S"~ ? (A)
Resistance (B) Inductance (C) Capacitance (D) Magnetic flux
2 2 3
In figure, the switch S is closed so that a current flows in the iron-core induc
tor r^flftHnRT-i R which has inductance L and the resistance R. When the switch
is opened, a H iB spark is obtained in it at the contacts. The spark is due to (
A) a slow flux change in L (B) a sudden increase in the emf ofthe battery B (C)
a rapid flux change in L (D) a rapidfluxchange in R
J*
In figure, a lamp P is in series with an iron-core inductor L. When the switch S
r O - » is closed, the brightness of the lamp rises relatively slowly to its full
brightness than it would do without the inductor. This is due to B (A) the low
resistance of P (B) the induced-emf in L (C) the low resistance of L (D) the hig
h voltage of the battery B
I (feBansal Classes Question Bank on EMI
[22]
Q M Two coil Aand B have coefficient of mutual inductance M = 2H. The magnetic f
lux passing through coil V A changes by 4 Weber in 10 seconds due to the change
in current in B. Then (A) change in current in B in this time interval is 0.5 A
(B) the change in current inB in this time interval is 2A (C) the change in curr
ent in B in this time interval is 8A (D) a change in current of 1A in coil A wil
l produce a change in flux passing through B by 4 Weber. X
5
Which ofthe following is true for an ideal transformer (A) Total magnetic flux l
inked with primary coil equals flux linked with secondary coil (B) flux per turn
in primary is equal to flux per turn in secondary (C) induced emf in secondary
coil equals induced emf in primary (D) power associated with primary coil at any
moment equals power associated with secondary coil
Q.36 A circuit has three elements, a resistance of 11W, a coil of inductive resi
stance 120W and a capacitive reactance of 120W in series and connected to an A.C
. source of 110 V, 60 Hz. Which of the three elements have minimum potential dif
ference? (A) Resistance (B) Capacitance (C) Inductor (D) All will have equal pot
ential difference (X3-7 The reactance of a circuit is zero. It is possible that
the circuit contains : (A) an inductor and a capacitor (B) an inductor but no ca
pacitor (C) a capacitor but no inductor (D) neigher an inductor nor a capacitor.
3 8 In a series R-L-C circuit, thefrequencyof the source is half of the resonan
cefrequency.The nature of the circuit will be (A) capacitive (B) inductive (C) p
urely resistive (D) data insufficient 9 An a. c. source of voltage V and of freq
uency 5 0 Hz is connected to an inductor of 2H and negligible resistance. A curr
ent of r.m. s. value 7 flows in the coil. When the frequency of the voltage is c
hanged to 400 Hz keeping the magnitude ofV the same, the current is now (A) 87 i
n phase with V (B) 47 and leading by 90° from V (C) 7/4 and lagging by 90° from V (D
) 7/8 and lagging by 90° from V
(fe Bansal Classes
[23]
ANSWER KEY
Q.l Q.8 Q.15 Q.22 Q.29 Q.36 Q.43 Q.50 Q.57 Q.64 Q.71 Q.78 Q.85 Q.92 Q.99
B A D B C A A B C A A D B D B Q.l Q.5 Q.9 Q.13 Q.17 Q.21 Q.25 Q.29 Q.33 Q.37
Q.2 Q.9 Q.16 Q.23 Q.30 Q.37 Q 44 Q.51 Q.58 Q.65 Q.72 Q.79 Q.86 Q.93 Q.100
C A C C B B C A A B A D D B D
Q.3 Q.10 Q.17 Q.24 Q.31 Q.38 Q.45 Q.52 Q.59 Q.66 Q.73 Q.80 Q.87 Q.94 Q.101 Q.2 Q
.6 Q.10 Q.14 Q.18 Q.22 Q.26 Q.30 Q.34 Q.38
C B A A D A A C A A C C B C D C A,C,D B,C B B,D A,C D A B A
Q.4 Q.ll Q.18 Q.25 Q.32 Q.39 Q.46 Q.53 Q.60 Q.67 Q.74 Q.81 Q.88 Q.95 Q.102
A C D D B C A B A D B D B D C Q.3 Q.7 Q.ll Q.15 Q.19 Q.23 Q.27 Q.31 Q.35 Q.39
Q5 Q.12 Q.19 Q.26 Q.33 Q.40 Q.47 Q.54 Q.61 Q.68 Q.75 Q.82 Q.89 Q.96 Q.l 03 C A C
A C D B,D A B,D D
B C B A D A D A B D D A A C C
Q.6 Q.13 Q.20 Q.27 Q.34 Q.41 Q.48 Q.55 Q.62 Q.69 Q.76 Q.83 Q.90 Q.97 Q.l 04 Q.4
Q.8 Q.12 Q.16 Q.20 Q.24 Q.28 Q.32 Q.36
B C D A D B B C B B A D C D B B A B,D D D A,B,C D C A
Q.7 Q.14 Q.21 Q.28 Q.35 Q.42 Q.49 Q.56 Q.63 Q.70 Q.77 Q.84 Q.91 Q.98 Q.105
A A D C A D D A C C A A C
c c
B B B A,B A,B,C,D B,D A,B,C A B A,D
(fe Bansal Classes
[24]
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XII (ALL)
ELECTROSTATICS
CONTENTS
KEYCONCEPTS EXERCISE-I EXERCISE-II EXER CISE-III ANSWER KEY
1.
ELECTRIC
Charge of a material body is that possesion (acquired or natural) due to which i
t strongly interacts with other material body. It can be postive or negative. S.
I. unit is coulomb. Charge is quantized, conserved, and additive.
COULOMB'S
0
CHARGE
KEY CONCEPTS
2.
LAW:
F = — - — ^ r . In vector form F = — — — r ? where
1
s = permittivity of free space = 8.85 x 10 N m~ c or F/m and e = Relative permit
tivity of the medium = Spec. Inductive Capacity = Dielectric Const. s = 1 for ai
r (vacuum) = oo for metals e e = Absolute permittivity of the medium N O T E : T
he Law is applicable only for static and point charges. Only applicable to stati
c charges as moving charges may result magnetic <ii interaction also and only fo
r point charges as if charges are extended, induction may change the charge dist
ribution.
-12 -1 2 2 r r 0 r
47ts0er
r
47ls
osr
r
12
3.
PRINCIPLE
OF SUPER
POSITION
1 2 3
Force on a point charge due to many charges is given by F=F +F +F + NOTE : The f
orce due to one charge is not affected by the presence of other charges.
4. ELECTRIC (VECTOR
"The physical field where a charged particle, irrespective of the fact whether i
t is in motion or at rest, experiences force is called an electric field". The d
irection of the field is the direction of the force experienced by a positively
charged particle & the magnitude of the field (electric intensity) is • F the forc
e experienced by the particle carrying unit charge E = T^™ — unit is NC ; S.I. unit
is
_1
FIELD, ELECTRIC QUANTITY)
INTENSITY
OR ELECTRIC
FIELD
STRENGTH
V/m here Lun represents that this charge does not alter the magnitude of electri
c field. Due to charge induction on the source ofelectric field.
5. ELECTRIC FIELD DUE TO
(i) (ii)
(iii) (iv)
Point charge: E = — — = —-—-^-r (vector form) . Z 47ts r 471 G r q E Where r = vector dr
awn from the source charge to the point. Continuous charge distribution E=—-— [ f dE
; dE = electric field due to an elementry charge 47TS r . Note E* J dE because E
is a vector quantity . dq = X dl (for line charge) = a ds (for surface charge)
= p dv (for volume charge) In general X, a & p are linear, surface and volume ch
arge densities respectively. 2kX Infinite line of charge E = —j— where r=perpendicul
ar distance of the point from the line charge.
0 q 0 J J
^Bansal Classes
Semi oo line of charge E = r an angle 4 5°
as, E = — & E„ = — at a point above the end of wire at r r
y
ELECTROSTATICS
[2]
(v) (vi)
Uniformly charged ring, E
centre
= 0, E =
axis
dE . , Electricfieldis maximum when —- = 0 for a point on the axis of the ring. He
re we get x = R/V2.
0
(X +R )
2 2
kQx
3 / 2
(vii) Infinite non conducting sheet of charge E=-^-n where 2e ii = unit normal v
ector to the plane of sheet, where c is surface charge density (viii) oo charged
conductor sheet having surface charge density a on both surfaces E = a/e . (ix)
Just outside a conducting surface charged with a surface charge density a, elec
tricfieldis always given as E = a/e . (x) Uniformly charged solid sphere (Insula
ting material) E = Q j ; r > R,
0 0 t
4ne i
0
Behaves as a point charge situated at the centre for these points E- = (xi)
r < R where p = volume charge density Uniformly charged spherical shell (conduct
ing or non-donducting) or uniformly charged solid conducting sphere. E = ^ ^ ; r
> R
out 2 in
pr — ; 47I£qR 3£Q
Qr
Behaves as a point charge situated at the centre for these points E J= 0 ; r < R
(xii) uniformly charged cylinder with a charge density p is -(radius of cylinde
r = R) for r < R pr pR E = 2 e ; for r > R o E= 2 e r ~ (xiii) Uniformly charged
cylinderical shell with surface charge density a is forr<R E = 0 ; forr>R E= pr
2 m 0 0 m
e
o
r
6.
ELECTRIC
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)
7.
The line of force in an electricfieldis a hypothetical line, tangent to which at
any point on it represents' the direction of electricfieldat the given point. P
roperties of ( E L F ) : Electric lines offerees never intersects. ELF originate
sfrompositive charge or oo and terminate on a negative charge of infinity. Prefe
rence oftermination is towards a negative charge. If an ELF is originated, it mu
st require termination either at a negetive charge or at oo. Quantity of ELF ori
ginated or terminated from a charge or on a charge is proportional to the magnit
ude of charge.
ELECTROSTATIC
LINES
OF FORCE
(ELF)
(i) (ii)
Position where net force (or net torque) on a charge(or electric dipole) = 0 STA
BLE EQUILIBRIUM : If charge is displaced by a small distance the charge comes (o
r tries to come back) to the equilibrium. UNSTABLE EQUILIBRIUM : If charge is di
splaced by a small distance the charge does not return to the equilibrium positi
on.
EQUILIBRIUM
tl^Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
[5]
8.
ELECTRIC
"Work done by external agent to bring a unit positive charge(without accelaratio
n) from infinity to a point in an electricfieldis called electric potential at t
hat point" . if w is the work done to bring a charge q (very small) from infinit
y to a point then potential at that point is V = (W°° ) ; S.I. unit is volt (= 1 J/C
)
w r
POTENTIAL
(Scalar Quantity)
9.
POTENTIAL
A B
q
r ext
DIFFERENCE
e
(W ) V^ =V - V = ^ V ^ = p.d. between point A& B . W = w.d. by external source t
o transfer a point charge q from B to A (Without••acceleration). • *
BA
10.
ELECTRIC
FIELD
& ELECTRIC
E = - grad V = - V V {read as gradient of V} grad = iox + k — ; — oy oz Used whenEF
varies in three dimensional coordinate system. Forfindingpotential difference be
tween two points in electricfield,we use V - V = ~ j E • dt if£ j varying with dista
nce A if E is constant & here d is the distance between points A and B.
A B s
POINTENIAL ? d *d
*d
11.
POTENTIAL
DUE
TO
0
(i) (iii) (iv) (v)
a point charge V = ^ 47is r
(ii)
.
many charges V = ———+——+——— + 47tE r 47te r 47rs r
0 1 0 2 0 3
continuous charge distribution V = —i— f ^ spherical shell (conducting or non conduc
ting) or solid conducting sphere non conducting uniformly charged solid sphere :
V o u t
4TTS r
j 0
S r '
(
] >
V i n
2
4TTER
0
'
( r
"
R )
12.
EQUIPOTENTIAL
In an electricfield the locus of points of equal potential is called an equipote
ntial surface. An equipotential surface and the electricfieldmeet at right angle
s. The region where E = 0, Potential of the whole region must remain constant as
no work is done in displacement of charge in it. It is called as equipotential
region like conducting bodies.
SURFACE
AND EQUIPOTENTIAL
REGION
^Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
[4]
#
13.
MUTUAL
"The work to be done to integrate the charge system." q,q For 2 particle system
U = 47is— — r
2 mutual 0
POTENTIAL
ENERGY
OR INTERACTION
ENERGY
For 3 particle system U 14.
(a)
m u t u a l
=
q,q q2qs , q3qi 47is r 47i8 r 47te r
2 0 12 0 23
0 31
15.
(b)
(c)
For n particles there will be \ ^ terms . Total energy of a system = U + U P.E.
of charge q in potential field U = qV. Interaction energy of a system of two cha
rges U=q V = q V . ELECTRIC DIPOLE. O is mid point of line AB (centre ofthe dipo
le) - equitorial line on the axis (except points on line AB) -q +q « E= E P 27is [
r — (a /4)] 27ts r ( i f r < < a ) p = qa = Dipole moment, r = distance of the poi
nt from the centre of dipole p p on the equitorial ; E= ~ 47is [r +(a /4)] 47cs
r At a general point P(r, 0) in polar co-ordinate system is 2kp sin 0 Radial ele
ctricfieldE„=
n ( se]f mutual 1 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 0 3 0 2 2 3/2 0 3
Tangentral electric field E =
T net 2
kpcos0
2 2
Net electric field at P is E = ^ E + E = ^ Vl + 3sin 0 kpsinO Potential at point
P is V = N O T E : If 0 is measured from axis of dipole. Then sin0 and cos0 wil
l be interchanged
p
(d) (e) (f) (g) (i)
16.
Dipole V =
^ p=qa electric dipole moment . If 0 is angle between p and 4718 r 47is r reache
s vector of the point. Electric Dipole in uniform electric field : torque x=pxE
; F = 0 . Work done in rotation of dipole is w = PE (cos 0 - cos 0 ) P.E. of an
electric dipole in electric field U = - p.E. / ^ dEc Force on a dipole when plac
ed in a non uniform electricfieldis F= d (-PE)i = P.-—i. dx ' dx
PG
Q
_
p.r
2
0
1
2
v
ELECTRIC
FLUX
(ii)
For uniform electric field; (j) = E.A = EA cos 0 where 0 = angle between § & area
vector ( A ). Flux is contributed only due to the component of electricfieldwhic
h is perpendicular to the plane. If E is not uniform throughout the area A, then
<> = j" E.d A J
tl^Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
[5]
17.
GA USS'S LAW
—." cj) = J>EdA = — o o (j) does not depend on the
E s
q
p - ->
(Applicable only to closed surface)" Net flux emerging out of a closed surface i
s
q
q = net charge enclosed by the closed surface . (i) (ii) shape and size of the c
losed surface The charges located Outside the closed surface.
18. 19.
20.
Flux of charge q having through the circle of radius R is q/e q ( j ) = — — x O = r.
(l-cos9) o Energy stored p.u. volume in an electricfield= ^ —
0 z e 2 2
CONCEPT OF SOLID ANGLE :
Solid angle of coneof half angle 9 is Q=2rt(l-cos0) Electric pressure due to its
own charge on a surface having charged density a is P = c . 2s Electric pressur
e on a charged surface with charged density a due to external electric field is
P E L E =aE
2 ele 0
t
IMPORTANT
POINTS
TO BE
REMEMBERED
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x) (xi) (xii) (xiii) (xiv)
Electric field is always perpendicular to a conducting surface (or any equipoten
tial surface). No tangential component on such surfaces. Charge density at sharp
points on a conductor is greater. When a conductor is charged, the charge resid
es only on the surface. For a conductor of any shape E (just outside) = — o p.d. b
etween two points in an electric field does not depend on the path joining them.
Potential at a point due to positive charge is positive & due to negative charg
e is negative. Positive charge flows from higher to lower (i. e. in the directio
n of electricfield)and negative charge from lower to higher (i.e. opposite to th
e electric field) potential. When p||E the dipole is in stable equilibrium p||(-
E) the dipole is in unstable equilibrium When a charged isolated conducting sphe
re is connected to an unchaged small conducting sphere then potential (and charg
e) remains almost same on the larger sphere while smaller is charged . Self pote
ntial energy of a charged shell = KO . 2R 3k0 Self potential energy of an insula
ting uniformly charged sphere = — — . 5R A spherically symmetric charge {i.e p depen
ds only on r} behaves as if its charge is concentrated at its centre (for outsid
e points). Dielectric strength of material: The minimum electricfieldrequired to
ionise the medium or the maximum electricfieldwhich the medium can bear without
breaking down.
8 2 2
tl^Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
[5]
EXERCISE # I
Q. 1 A negative point charge 2q and a positive charge q are fixed at a distance
I apart. Where should a positive test charge Q be placed on the line connecting
the charge for it to be in equilibrium? What is the nature ofthe equilibrium wit
h respect to longitudinal motions? Q.2 Two particles A and B each carrying a cha
rge Q are held fixed with a separation d between then A particle C having mass m
ans charge q is kept at the midpoint ofline AB. Ifit is displaced through a sma
ll distance x (x « d) perpendicular to AB, (a) thenfindthe time period ofthe oscil
lations of C. (b) If in the above question C is displaced along AB,findthe time
period ofthe oscillations of C. Q.3 Draw E - r graph for 0 < r < b, if two point
charges a & b are located r distance apart, when (i) both are + ve (ii) both ar
e - ve _ (iii) a is + ve and b is - ve (iv) a is - ve and b is + ve Q.4 A charge
+ 10 C is located at the origin in free space & another charge Q at (2, 0, 0).
If the X-component ofthe electricfieldat (3,1,1) is zero, calculate the value of
Q. Is the Y-component zero at (3,1, 1)?
9
Q.5 Six charges are placed at the vertices of a regular hexagon as shown in the
figure.
-
+Q
-Q
Find the electricfieldon the line passing through O and perpendicular to the pla
ne -Q< +Q of thefigureas a function of distance xfrompoint O. (assume x » a) + + T
hefigureshows three infinite non-conducting + plates of charge perpendicular to
the plane of A + B _ • • + the paper with charge per unit area + a, + 2o + + and - a
. Find the ratio ofthe net electricfieldat + 2.5m that point Ato that at point B
. +C7 +2ct 5m 5m Q.7 A thin circular wire of radius r has a charge Q. If a point
charge q is placed at the centre ofthe ring, then find the increase in tension
in the wire. Q.8 In thefigureshown S is a large nonconducting sheet ofuniform ch
arge density a. A rod R oflength / and mass 'm' is parallel to the sheet and hin
ged at its mid point. The linear charge densities on the upper and lower half of
the rod are shown in the figure. Find the angular acceleration of the rod just a
fter it is released. Q.9 A simple pendulum of length / and bob mass m is hanging
in front of a large nonconducting sheet having surface charge density a. If sud
denly a charge +q is given to the bob & it is releasedfromthe position shown inf
igure.Find the maximum angle through which the string is deflectedfromvertical.
A particle of mass m and charge - q moves along a diameter of a uniformly charge
d sphere of radius R and carrying a total charge + Q. Find the frequency of S .H
.M. ofthe particle if the amplitude does not exceed R. Q.ll A charge + Q is unif
ormly distributed over a thin ring with radius R. A negative point charge - Q an
d mass m starts from rest at a point far awayfromthe centre ofthe ring and moves
towards the centre. Find the velocity ofthis particle at the moment it passes t
hrough the centre of the ring.
-
-
J
^Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
[9]
Q.12 A spherical balloon ofradius R charged uniformly on its surface with surfac
e density o. Find work done against electric forces in expanding it upto radius
2R. Q.13 A point charge + q & mass 100 gm experiences a force of 100 N at a poin
t at a distance 20 cm from a long infinite uniformly charged wire. Ifit is relea
sedfindits speed when it is at a distance 40 cm from wire Q.14 Consider the conf
iguration of a system offour charges each of value +q. Find the work done by ext
ernal agent in changing the +q configuration ofthe systemfromfigure(i) tofig(ii)
. +qr fig(ii) fig (i) Q.15 There are 27 drops of a conducting fluid. Each has ra
dius r and they are charged to a potential V . They are then combined to form a
bigger drop. Find its potential. Q.16 Two identical particles of mass m carry ch
arge Q each. Initially one is at rest on a smooth horizontal plane and the other
is projected along the plane directly towards the first from a large distance w
ith an initial speed V. Find the closest distance of approach. Q.17 A particle o
f mass m and negative charge q is thrown in a gravity free space with speed u fr
om the point A on the large non conducting charged sheet with surface charge den
sity a, as shown infigure.Find the maximum distancefromAon sheet where the parti
cle can strike. Q.18 Consider two concentric conducting spheres of radii a & b (
b > a). Inside sphere has a positive charge q What charge should be given to the
outer sphere so that potential of the inner sphere becomes zero? How does the p
otential varies between the two spheres & outside ? Q.19 Three charges 0.1 coulo
mb each are placed on the corners of an equilateral triangle of side 1 m. If the
energy is supplied to this system at the rate of 1 kW, how much time would be r
equired to move one of the charges onto the midpoint ofthe line joining the othe
r two? Q.20 Two thin conducting shells ofradii R and 3R are shown infigure.The o
uter shell carries a charge +Q and the inner shell is neutral. The inner shell i
s earthed with the help of switch S. Find the charge attained by the inner shell
.
0 r
Q.21 Consider three identical metal spheres A B and C. Spheres A carries charge
+ 6q and sphere B carries charge - 3q. Sphere C carries no charge. Spheres A and
B are touched together and then separated. Sphere C is then touched to sphere A
and separated from it. Finally the sphere C is touched to sphere B and separated
fromit. Find thefinalcharge on the sphere C. y p '(0,y) Q.22 A dipole is placed
at origin of coordinate system as shown infigure,find the electricfieldat point
P (0, y). \p Q.23 Two point dipoles p k and -P k are located at (0,0,0) and (lm,
0,2m) respectively. Find the resultant electricfielddue to the two dipoles at t
he point (lm, 0,0). Q. 24 The length of each side ofa cubical clo sed surface is
/. If charge q is situated on one of the vertices of the cube, thenfindthe flux
passing through shaded face of the cube. Q.25 A point charge Q is located on th
e axis of a disc of radius R at a distance a from the plane of the disc. If one
fourth (l/4th) of the flux from the charge passes through the disc, then find th
e relation between a & R. *Q
C]
<!§Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS [11]
A rigid insulated wire frame in the form of a right angled triangle ABC, is set
in a vertical plane as shown. Two bead of equal masses m each and carrying charg
es qj & q are connected by a cord of length 1 & slide withoutfrictionon the wire
s. Considering the case when the beads are stationary, determine. (b) The tensio
n in the cord & HORIZON (a) The angle a. The normal reaction on the beads. Ifthe
cord is now cut, what are the values ofthe charges for which the '(c) beads con
tinue to remain stationary. Q.2 A proton and an a-particle are projected with ve
locity v = , ke each, when V ml Vo they are far away from each other, as shown.
The distance between their initial velocities is L. Find their closest approach
distance, mass ofproton=m; charge=+e, mass of a-particle = 4m, charge = + 2e. *
^ Q.3 A clock face has negative charges-q,-2q,^ 3 q, , 12qfixedat the position o
f the corresponding numerals on the dial. The clock hands do not disturb the net
field due to point charges. At what time does the hour hand point in the same d
irection is electricfieldat the centre ofthe dial. Q.4 A circular ring ofradius
R with uniform positive charge density X per unit length isfixedin the Y-Z plane
with its centre at the origin 0. Aparticle of mass m and positive charge q is p
rojectedfromthe point P (V3R,0,0) on the positive X-axis directly towards 0, wit
h initial velocity v. Find the smallest value of the speed v such that the parti
cle does not return to P. Q.5 2 small balls having the same mass & charge & loca
ted on the same vertical at heights h & h^ are thrown in the same direction alon
g the horizontal at the same velocity v. The 1 ball touches the ground at a dist
ance / from the initial vertical. At what height will the 2 ball be at this inst
ant ? The air drag & the charges induced should be neglected. Q. 6 Two concentri
c rings ofradii r and 2r are placed with centre at origin. Two '+q charges +q ea
ch arefixedat the diametrically opposite points of the rings as shown infigure.S
maller ring is now rotated by an angle 90° about Z-axis then it is again rotated b
y 90° about Y-axis. Find the work done by electrostatic forces in each step. Iffin
allylarger ring is rotated by 90° about X-axis,findthe total work required to perf
orm all three steps. +q Q. 7 Apositive charge Q is uniformly distributed through
out the volume of a dielectric sphere ofradius R. A point mass having charge + q
and mass m isfiredtowards the centre of the sphere with velocity v from a point
at distance r (r > R) from the centre of the sphere. Find the minimum velocity
v so that it can penetrate R/2 distance of the sphere. Neglect any resistance ot
her than electric interaction. Charge on the small mass remains constant through
out the motion. Q.8 An electrometer consists of vertical metal bar at the top of
which is attached a thin rod which gets deflectedfromthe bar under the action o
f an electric charge (fig.). The reading are taken on a quadrant graduated in de
grees. The length ofthe rod is I and its mass is m. What will be the charge when
the rod of such an electrometer is deflected through an angle a . Make the foll
owing assumptions: Uu\uumuuuuuuvuft\\< (a) the charge on the electrometer is equ
ally distributed between the bar & the rod (b) the charges are concentrated at p
oint A on the rod & at point B on the bar. Q.l
2 0 1 81 nd £
EXERCISE
# II
^Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
[9]
Q.9
A cavity ofradius r is present inside a solid dielectric sphere of radius R havi
ng a volume charge density of p. The distance between the centres of the sphere
and the cavity is a. An electron e is kept inside the cavity at an angle 6 = 45° a
s shown. How long will it take to touch the sphere again?
t 2
Q.10 Two identical balls of charges q & q initially have equal velocity of the s
ame magnitude and direction. After a uniform electricfieldis applied for some ti
me, the direction ofthe velocity ofthefirstball changes by 60° and the magnitude i
s reduced by half*. The direction of the velocity of the second ball changes the
re by 90°. In what proportion will the velocity of the second ball changes ? Q. 11
Electrically charged drops of mercury fallfromaltitude h into a spherical metal
vessel of radius R in the upper part ofwhich there is a small opening. The mass
of each drop is m & charge is Q. What is the number 'n' of last drop that can s
till enter the sphere. Given that the (n + 1)* drop just fails to enter the sphe
re. Q.12 Small identical balls with equal charges are fixed at vertices of regul
ar 2004 - gon with side a. At a certain instant, one ofthe balls is released & a
sufficiently long time interval later, the ball adjacent to the first released
ball is freed The kinetic energies of the released balls are found to differ by
K at a sufficiently long distancefromthe polygon. Determine the charge q of each
part. Ex Q.13 The electricfieldin a region is given by E = —j— -i. Find the charge
contained inside a cubical volume bounded by the surfaces x = 0, x = a, y = 0, y
= a, z = 0 and z = a. Take E = 5 * 10 N/C, /=2cm and a = 1 cm.
0 0 3
Q.14 2 small metallic balls ofradii R, & R are kept in vacuum at a large distanc
e compared to the radii. Find the ratio between the charges on the 2 balls at wh
ich electrostatic energy ofthe system is minimum. What is the potential differen
ce between the 2 balls? Total charge ofballs is constant.
2
Q.15 Figure shows a section through two long thin concentric cylinders of radii
a & b with a b Q.16 A solid non conducting sphere of radius R has a non-uniform cha
rge distribution of volume charge density, p = p —, where p is a constant and r is
the distancefromthe centre ofthe sphere. Show that: R (a) the total charge on t
he sphere is Q = I p R and T
0 0 0 3
(b)
the electricfieldinside the sphere has a magnitude given by, E =
R
4
.
Q.17 A nonconducting ring ofmass m and radius R is charged as shown. The charged
density i.e. charge per unit length is X. It is then placed on a rough noncondu
cting horizontal surface plane. At time t=0, auniform electricfieldE = E0i is sw
itched on and the ring start rolling without sliding. Determine thefrictionforce
(magnitude mvmmmuum and direction) acting on the ring, when it starts moving.
<!§Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
[11]
Q. 18 Two spherical bobs of same mass & radius having equal charges are suspende
dfromthe same point by strings of same length. The bobs are immersed in a liquid
of relative permittivity e & density p . Find the density c of the bob for whic
h the angle of divergence ofthe strings to be the same in the air & in the liqui
d?
r 0
Q.19 An electron beam after being acceleratedfromrest through a potential differ
ence of500 V in vacuum is allowed to impinge normally on a fixed surface. Ifthe
incident current is 100 p A, determine the force exerted on the surface assuming
that it brings the electrons to rest, (e = 1 6x 10~ C;m = 9.Ox 10~ kg)
19 31
Y
Q.20 Find the electricfieldat centre of semicircular ring shown in figure. Q.21
A cone made of insulating material has a total charge Q spread uniformly over it
s sloping surface. Calculate the energy required to take a test charge qfrominfi
nity to apex A of cone. The slant length is L. Q.22 An infinite dielectric sheet
having charge density a has a hole ofradius R in it. An electron is released on
the axis of the hole at a distance from the centre. What will be the velocity w
hich it crosses the plane of sheet, (e = charge on electron and m = mass of elec
tron) Q.23 Two concentric rings, one ofradius 'a' and the other ofradius 'b' hav
e the charges +q and - (2/5)~ q respectively as shown in thefigure.Find the rati
o b/a if a charge particle placed on the axis at z = a is in equilibrium.
3/2
B
Q.24 Two charges + qj & - q are placed at A and B respectively. Aline of force e
mergesfromqj at angle a with line AB. At what angle will it A/â terminate at -
q ? +q
2 2 t
<!§Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
[11]
Q. 1
Q.2 Q.3
The magnitude of electricfieldE in the annular region of charged cylindrical cap
acitor (A) Is same throughout (B) Is higher near the outer cylinder than near th
e inner cylinder (C) Varies as (1 /r) where r is the distancefromthe axis (D) Va
ries as (1 /r ) where r is the distancefromthe axis ^ [IIT '96,2] A metallic sol
id sphere is placed in a uniform electricfield.The " lines offorce follow the pa
th (s) shown infigureas: (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 [IIT'96,2] Anon-conducting ring
ofradius 0.5 m carries a total charge of 1.11 x 10" C distributed non-uniformly
on its circumference producing an electricfieldE every where in space. The valu
e of the line integral
2 1 10
EXERCISE # III
t=o
Q. 4 (i)
(ii)
| -EM (/= 0 being centre ofthe ring) in volts is: (X) + 2 (B) - 1 (C) - 2 (D) ze
ro[JEE '97, 1 ] Select the correct alternative: [JEE '982 + 2 + 2 = 6] A+ly char
ged thin metal ring of radius R isfixedin the xy-plane with its centre at the or
igin 0 . A - ly charged particle P is released from rest at the point (0, 0, z )
where z > 0. Then the motion of P is: (A) periodic, for all values of z satisfy
ing 0 < z < oo (B) simple harmonic, for all values of Z satisfying 0 < Z < R q q
(C) approximately simple harmonic, provided Z G « R (D) such that P crosses 0 & c
ontinues to move along the -ve z-axis towards x = -oo A charge +q isfixedat each
of the points x = x , x = 3x , x = 5x , oo on the x-axis & a charge -q isfixeda
t each ofthe points x = 2XQ, X=4XQ, X = 6XQ, .... oo. Here XQ is a +ve constant.
Take the electric potential at a point due to a charge Q at a distance rfromit
to be ———. Then the potential at the origin 47te r due to the above system of charges
is : q q^n2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(A
^Bansal Classes
A non-conducting solid sphere ofradius R is uniformly charged. The magnitude oft
he electricfielddue to the sphere at a distance r from its centre: (A) increases
as r increases, for r < R (B) decreases as r increases, for 0 < r < oo (C) decr
eases as r increases, for R < r < oo (D) is discontinuous at r = R. Q.5 A conduc
ting sphere S of radius r is attached to an insulating handle. Another conductin
g sphere S of radius R is mounted on an insulating stand. S is initially uncharg
ed. S is given a charge Q, brought into contact with S & removed, S j is recharg
ed such that the charge on it is again Q & it is again brought into contact with
S & removed. This procedure is repeated n times. (a) Find the electrostatic ene
rgy of S after n such contacts with S j. (b) What is the limiting value of this
energy as n -» oo? [ JEE '98, 7 +1 ] Q. 6(i) An ellipsoidal cavity is carved withi
n a perfect conductor. Apositive charge q is placed at the center of the cavity.
The points A & B are on the cavity surface as shown in thefigure.Then: (A) elec
tricfieldnear A in the cavity = electricfieldnear B in the cavity (B) charge den
sity at A = charge density at B (C) potential at A= potential at B (D) total ele
ctricfieldflux through the surface ofthe cavity is q/e . [ JEE '99, 3 ]
l 2 2 l 2 2 2
(iii)
>°
Wta^S
(C)
°°
ELECTROSTATICS
0
~[U]
(ii)
A non-conducting disc ofradius a and uniform positive surface charge density a i
s placed on the ground, with its axis vertical. A particle of mass m & positive
charge q is dropped, along the axis ofthe disc, from q 4e g a height H with zero
initial velocity. The particle has m = cr . — (a) Find the value of H ifthe parti
cle just reaches the disc. (b) Sketch the potential energy of the particle as a
function ofits height and find its equilibrium position. [ JEE '99, 5 + 5 ] Q.7(
a) The dimension of (y)e E (e : permittivity offreespace ; E : electricfield)is
: (A) M L T (B)ML T(C)MLT' (D)ML T(E)ML- T(b) Three charges Q,+q and+q are place
d at the vertices of a right-angled isosceles triangle as shown . The net electr
ostatic energy of the configuration is zero if Q is equal to: [ JEE 2000(Scr) 1
+ 1 ] -2q ( ) 1+V2 C ) 2+V2 (C) - 2 q (D) +q
0 0 2 0 _1 2 2 2 2 1 ! 2 A 0
(c)
Four point charges + 8 pC, - 1 pC, - 1 pC and + 8 pC, are fixed at the points, 4
0 0
m , m ,
Q.8
m and m respectively on the y-axis . A particle of mass 6 x 10" kg and of charge
+ 0.1 pC moves along the - x direction. Its speed at x= + 0 is v . Find the lea
st value ofv for which 0 the particle will cross the origin. Find also the kinet
ic energy of the particle at the origin. Assume that space is gratity free. (Giv
en: 1/(4 it e ) = 9 x 10 Nm /C ) [ JEE 2000,10 ] Three positive charges of equal
value q are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle. The resulting li
nes offorce should be sketched as in [JEE 2001 (Scr)]
0 9 2 2
(C) Q.9
3
(D)
A small ball of mass 2 x 10" Kg having a charge of 1 pC is suspended by a string
of length 0. 8m. Another identical ball having the same charge is kept at the p
oint of suspension. Determine the minimum horizontal velocity which should be im
parted to the lower ball so tht it can make complete revolution. [JEE 2001] Q.10
Two equal point charges arefixedat x = - a and x = +a on the x-axis. Another po
int charge Q is placed at the origin. The change in the electrical potential ene
rgy of Q, when it is displaced by a small distance x along the x-axis, is approx
imately proportional to (A)x (B)x (C)x (D) 1/x [JEE 2002 (Scr), 3] Q.ll A point
charge 'q' is placed at a point inside a hollow conducting sphere. Which ofthe f
ollowing electric force pattern is correct ? [JEE'2003 (scr)]
2 3
<!§Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
[11]
Q.12 Charges +q and -q are located at the corners of a cube of side a as shown i
n the +q figure. Find the work done to separate the charges to infinite distance
. [JEE 2003] ^1 / 2 Q.13 A charge +Q isfixedat the origin ofthe co-ordinate syst
em while a small electric dipole ofdipole-moment p pointing awayfromthe charge a
long the x-axis is set freefroma point far awayfromthe origin. (a) calculate the
K.E. ofthe dipole when it reaches to a point (d, 0) (b) calculate the force on
the charge +Q at this moment. [JEE 2003] Q.14 Consider the charge configuration
and a spherical Gaussian surface as shown in thefigure.When calculating thefluxo
fthe electricfieldover the spherical surface, | 1 the electricfieldwill be due t
o [JEE 2004 (SCR)] \ (A) q (B) only the positive charges (C) all the charges (D)
+q( and -qj Q.15 Six charges, three positive and three negative of equal magnit
ude are to be placed at the vertices of a regular hexagon such that the electric
fieldat O is double the electricfieldwhen only one positive charge of same magni
tude is placed at R. Which ofthe following arrangements of charges is possible f
or P, Q, R, S, T and U respectively? [JEE 2004 (SCR)] (A) +, -, +, + (B) +, -, +
, +, (C) +, +, -, +, (D) +, +, +, Q.16 Two uniformly charged infinitely large pl
anar sheet S and S are held in air parallel to each other with separation d betw
een them. The sheets have charge distribution per unit area Cj and o (Cm ), resp
ectively, withCTJ>CT .Find the work done by the electricfieldon a point charge Q
that moves from from S j towards S along a line of length a (a < d) making an a
nglerc/4with the normal to the sheets. Assume that the charge Q does not affect
the charge distributions ofthe sheets. [JEE 2004] Q.17 Three large parallel plat
es have uniform surface charge densities as shown in the figure. What is the ele
ctricfieldat P. [JEE' 2005 (Scr)] k. z=a 4ct 4cr « 2a 2a z=-a (A) - — k (B)~ (C)-^k
(D)-k z=-2a o o 0 Q.18 Which of the following groups do not have same dimensions
[JEE' 2005 (Scr)] (A) Young's modulus, pressure, stress (B) work, heat, energy
(C) electromotive force, potential difference, voltage (D) electric dipole, elec
tricflux,electric field Q.19 A conducting liquid bubble of radius a and thicknes
s t (t « a ) is charged to potential V. Ifthe bubble collapses to a droplet,findth
e potential on the droplet. [JEE 2005] Q.20 The electrostatic potential (<j>) of
a spherical symmetric system, kept at origin, is shown in the adjacent figure, a
nd given as R ) 4ti
T q 2 l 2 2 -2 2 2 k
-2a-
±q
e
0
G
e
r
V r
o
K
oJ
<t> (r<RJ o o Which ofthe following option(s) is/are correct? (A) For spherical
region r <R , total electrostatic energy stored is zero. (B) Within r = 2R , tot
al charge is q. (C) There will be no charge anywhere except at r = R . (D) Elect
ricfieldis discontinuous at r = R .
r = o 0 0 o
<!§Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
0
[JEE 2006]
[11]
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE # I
Q.2
Efl
Q.l
a=/(l + a/2), the equilibrium will be stable
E
(a)
m7i s d
3 0
3
fl
a
E|
t
Qq
(b)
E|l
m7t 3 s 0 d 3
2Qq
Q.3 Q.4
Q.8
(i)
Sh~c*
(ii)
-9
T
0
1 0
(iii) Q.6 Q10
b
"f*
(iv)
a
- 11
3_
i3/2
3 x 10 C Q.5 Q.9
Q.7
qQ 87U s r
2 0
2
3 al 2m Gn TTCTR
2 3
2 tan" 2s mg
qQ
2
Q-
11
2kQ mR
0
Q.12 -
Q.13 20-7&2
Q.14 - kq
b-s)
Q.15 9V
Q.16
mn e0 V
Q.17
2e u m Q.18 qc
0
4718 r r a b _ qi f 1 1 VK = OK- ~qi;00 4m b ; qi q2 V,= 47ce r r
v
a<rb
0
Q.19 1.8 x 10 sec Q.20 -Q/3
5
Q.21 1.125 q Q.25 a R
= 7 f
Q.22 q-26
kP Q
j(-i-2j)
A
A
Q.23 ~~kpk
Q.24 24 En
xvu i vi o
2
^
Q.l (a) 60° (b) mg + kqiq (c) •& mg, mg. qj & q should have unlike charges for the b
eads to remain — stationaly & q q = -mg/Vk ' 5 + V89' Q.2 Q.3 9.30 Q.4 Xq Q.5 H =
h h - g 8 ' 26 m 8 4 "|Kq 2KQq r-R H— ,1/2 3' Q.6 Wfirst step ,' W second.step= 0
,' W total = 0 , Q.7 U VsJ r mR r 8
2 t 2 2 1+ 2 n 2 t t
EXERCISE # II
Q.8
q = 4/^|47iE mgsin
0 0
Q.ll n=
47ts mg(h-R)R ~ Q.12 ^/47TS Ka
0
. a sin— 2
Q.9
6V2mr e epa
Q.io V 3
12
Q.13 2.2 x 10" C
Q .14
<!§Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
q2 R2
[11]
Q . 1 5 0, —
2KX , 0 4kq -
Q.17
XRE0l
Q.18 a = SrPo E ~1
r
Q.19 7.5 x 10~ N
9
Q
2
0
Qq Q.21 271 e L
n 1 a
1
laeR Q.22 v = me
n
Q.23 2
f • I—A Q.24 b = 2 sin" sin — Qi v 2 Vq
2
Q.l C Q.5 (a) U
Q.2 D Q.3 A 2.2 ^ 87te R 1-a where a =
0
EXERCISE # III
(b) U (n
2 2 2
Q.4 (i) A C, (ii) D, (iii) A C oo) = 87T€ r
0
aAfj Q.7 (a) E, (b) B, (c) v = 3 m/s ;K.E. at the origin = (27-10V6) x 10 J appr
ox.2.5 xio~ J Q.8 C 'Q.9 5.86 m/s Q.10 B Q.ll A 1 q 4 [3V3-3V6-V2I Q.12 47ts a V
6 along positive x-axis Q.14 C 47I8 d^ (b) 27t s d Q.13 (a)KE = - 2 _ Q / >1/3 Q
.15 - , + , + , - , + , - Q.16 Q.17 C Q.18 D Q.19 V' = v3t, .V Q.20 AB,C,D
0 4 4 2 0 0 0 Q P
Q.6 (i) C, (ii) (a) H = ~ , (b) U = mg
2^h +a -h equilibrium at h = - = , V3
o
Un 2mga V3mga
<!§Bansal Classes
ELECTROSTATICS
[11]
BANSALCLASSES TARGET IIT JEE 2007
IflJiSlHti
PHISIGS
XI l l l l l i r i v ilyffli^---ilff ^:- - ::T| EM jij::::; if'' iH!!::î:;i-iO• f
-•Viij^y ;f = :i;
1 :
yXVVili]!;;??TXX lvV;
QUESTION BANK ON
iSSlif-:-,
.S
Two identical conducting spheres, having charges of opposite sign, attract each
other with a force of 0.108 N when separated by 0.5 m. The spheres are connected
by a conducting wire, which is then removed, and thereafter, they repel each ot
her with a force of 0.036 N. The initial charges on the ^ v / spheres are (A) ± 5
xlO" C and + 1 5 x l O ' C (B) ± 1.0 x 10" C and + 3.0 x 10" C (C) ± 2.0 x 10" C and
+ 6.0 x 10" C (D) ± 0.5 x 10" C and + 1.5 x 10" C Q . 2 / A point charge 50pC is
located in the XY plane at the point of position vector f = 2i + 3 j • What is the
electric field at the point ofposition vector r = 8i - 5 j ' t/ (A) 1200V/m (B)
0.04V/m (C)900V/m (D) 4500 V/m Q.3 A point charge q is placed at origin. Let E
, E and E be the electric field at three points A (1,2,3), B (1,1, - 1) and C (2
,2,2) due to charge q. Then r [i] E -L E [ii]|E |=4|E | Xs select the correct al
ternative (A) only [i] is correct (B) only [ii] is correct (C) both [i] and [ii]
are correct (D) both [i] and [ii] are wrong Two identicalpoint charges are plac
ed at a separation of 1. P is a point on the line joimng the charges, at / a dis
tance x from any one charge. The field at P is E. E is plotted against x for val
ues of x from close to zero to slightly less than 1. Which ofthe following best
represents the resulting curve? El E' E' (D)° (A) — 1 » V (B> O — O— Q.5 A particle of mas
s m and charge Q is placed in an electric field E which varies with time t ass E
=E sincot. It will undergo simple harmonic motion of amplitude QE QE QE , QE £ (A)
mcoo (D) mco (B) mco (C) mm +q -q Q.6 Four charges are arranged at the corners
of a square ABCD, as shown. The force on a +ve charge kept at the centre of the
square is zero • (B) along diagonal AC e (A) along diagonal BD +2q i D (C) (D) per
pendicular to the side A Q.7 Twofreepositive charges 4q and q are a distance 1 a
part. What charge Q is needed to achieve equilibrium for the entire system and w
here should it be placed form charge q? 4 I 4 / (A) Q • q (negative) at (B)Q= - q
(positive) at
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 0 f a B c a b B c
Q
Q.l
t
Wl
\/
f
0
n
-
2
q
£
:
I (C) Q = q (positive) at — (D) Q = q (negative) at q / Six charges are placed at
the corner of a regular hexagon as shown. Ifan electron is placed at its centre
O, force on it will be: (A) Zero (B) Along OF (C) Along OC (D) None of these
"-q 3q,•B TS \.~2q - . SU
[15]
(f| Bansal Classes
Question Bank on Electrostatics
Two identical positive charges are fixed on the y-axis, at equal distancesfromth
e origin 0. Aparticle with a negative charge starts on the x-axis at a large dis
tancefromO, moves along the+x-axis, passes through O and moves far away from O.
Its acceleration a is taken as positive along its direction of motion. The parti
cle's acceleration a is plotted against its x-coordinate. Which of the following
best represents the plot? ta ta ta J ta x -> ^ x -» (C) (A) (B) O x -» (D) O 0 0 Q.
l 0 / Four equal positive charges are fixed at the vertices of a square of side
L. Z-axis is perpendicular to the plane of the square. The point z = 0 is the po
int where the diagonals of the square intersect each other. £ The plot of electric
field due to the four charges, as one moves on the z-axis.
E
r
t
Ef
(B) L (C) (D) o V2L V2 Q. 1Y A nonconducting ring of radius R has uniformly dist
ributed positive charge Q. A small part ofthe ring, of length d, is removed (d « R
). The electric field at the centre of the ring will now be (A) directed towards
the gap, inversely proportional to R . (B) directed towards the gap, inversely
proportional to R . (C) directed awayfromthe gap, inversely proportional to R .
(D) directed awayfromthe gap, inversely proportional to R . y -2a - if Q.12 The
charge per unit length of the four quadrant of the ring is 2X, - 2X, X and \+ 21
X respectively. The electric field at the centre is +1 R j- a (A)
0 3 2 3 2
— /
i
(A)- 27is R
0
\
(B) 27te R J
0
y
(C) 47is R 1
0
V2 X r
(D) None
1
*y
Q.13 The direction (0) of E at point P due to uniformly charged finite rod will
be ... 4 (A) at angle 30°fromx-axis // ' (B) 45° from x-axis (C) 60°fromx-axis 20/ (D)
none of these Q.14 Two equal negative charges are fixed at the points [0, a ] a
nd [0, -a] on the y-axis. A positive charge Q is releasedfromrest at the points
[2a, 0] on the x-axis. The charge Q will (A) execute simple harmonic motion abou
t the origin (B) move to the origin and remain at rest (C) move to infinity (D)
execute oscillatory but not simple harmonic motion. Q / 5 An uncharged sphere of
metal placed inside a charged parallel plate capacitor. The lines of force look
like (A)
(f| Bansal Classes
DCC
(C)
(D)
IX
[15]
A small particle of mass m and charge -q is placed at point P and released. If R
» x, the particle will undergo oscillations along the axis of symmetry with an an
gular frequency that is equal to qQ qQ* 47te mR
0 3 ( D ) 0 4
qQ qQx 4ns mR 4™ mR 4 Q .VI Which ofthe following is a volt: (A) Erg per cm \jO) J
oule per coulomb £ (C) Erg per ampere (D) Newton / (coulomb x m ) Q.18 n small dro
ps of same size are charged to V volts each. Ifthey coalesce to form a signal la
rge drop, then its potential will be £ (A) V/n (B) Vn (C)Vn jPfVn Q.19 1000 identi
cal drops of mercury are charged to a potential of 1 V each. They join to form a
single drop. The potential ofthis drop will be 5 (A) 0.01 V (B)0.1V (C)10V (D>1
00V Q.20 Potential difference between centre & the surface of sphere of radius R
and uniform volume charge densitv p within it will be:
( C ) 0 2 1/3 273
Q.21 If the electric potential ofthe inner metal sphere is 10 volt & that of the
outer shell is 5 volt, then the potential at the centre will be: £ (A) 10 volt (B
) 5 volt (C) 15 volt (D) 0
^
pR
2
pR
2
() C 0
( )pR D
k
2
Q.22 Three concentric metallic spherical shell A, B and C or radii a, b and c (a
< b < c) have surface charge densities - cr, + cr, and - a respectively. The po
tential of shell A is: (A)(o/e )[a + b - c ] (B)(a/e )[a-b + c] J # ( a / e ) [
b - a - c ] (D)none Q.23 A charged particle having some mass is resting in equil
ibrium at a height H above the centre ofa uniformly charged non-conducting horiz
ontal ring ofradius R. The force ofgravity acts downwards. The equilibrium of th
e particle will be stable i R R R (A) for all values of H (B) only if H> ^ (C) o
nly if H < ^ (D) only if H =
0 0 0
Q.24 An infinite number of concentric rings cany a charge Q each alternately pos
itive and negative. Their radii are 1,2,4,8 meters in geometric progression as s
hown in the figure. The potential at the centre ofthe rings will be Q Q (A) zero
(B) ^ (C, ^
--..4 /I )\
Q.2J When a negative charge is released and moves in electric field, it moves to
ward a position of (A) lower electric potential and lower potential energy (B) l
ower electric potential and higher potential energy (C) higher electric potentia
l and lower potential energy (D) higher electric potential and higher potential
energy
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
£
Q.26 A hollow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is charged such that the potential on
its surface is 10 V. The potential at the centre of the sphere is (A)0V fe (B)10
V (C) same as at point 5 cm away from the surface out side sphere. (D) same as a
point 25 cm away from the surface. Q.27 A solid sphere of radius R is charged u
niformly. At what distance from its surface is the electrostatic potential half
of the potential at the centre? i - (A)R (B)R/2 (C)R/3 (D)2R Q.28 An infinite no
nconducting sheet of charge has a surface charge density of 10~ C/m . The separa
tion ^ between two equipotential surfaces near the sheet whose potential differ
by 5 V is (A) 0.88 cm (B) 0.88 mm (C) 0.88 m (D)5xl0" m Q.29 Four equal charges
+q are placed at four corners of a square with its centre at origin and lying in
yz plane. The electrostatic potential energy of a fifth charge +q' varies on x-
axis as: u u /\ (A) (D)
7 2 7 2
Q.30 Two identical thin rings, each of radius R meter are coaxially placed at di
stance R meter apart. If Qj and Q coulomb are respectively the charges uniformly
spread on the two rings, the work done in moving a charge qfromthe centre of on
e ring to that of the other is (A) zero (B) < f a ^ J j 2 - \ ) / ( j 2 A n e R
) (C) qV2(Q +Q )/47i£ R (D) qr(Qj-Q )(V2+l)/(V2.47rs R) Q.31 Two positively charge
d particles X and Y are initially far awayfromeach other and at rest. X begins t
o move towards Y with some initial velocity. The total momentum and energy of th
e system are p and E. (A) If Y is fixed, both p and E are conserved. (B) If Y is
fixed, E is conserved, but not p. (C) If both are free to move, p is conserved
but not E. (D) If both are free, E is conserved, but not p. Q.33 Two particles X
and Y, ofequal mass and with unequal positive charges, arefreeto move and are i
nitially far awayfromeach other. With Y at rest, X begins to move towards it wit
h initial velocity u. After a long time, finally (A) X will stop, Y will move wi
th velocity u. (B) X and Y will both move with velocities u/2 each. (C) X will s
top, Y will move with velocity < u. (D) both will move with velocities < u/2. Q.
34 A circular ring of radius R with uniform positive charge density X per unit l
ength is located in the y-z plane with its centre at the origin O. Aparticle of
mass m and positive charge q is projected from the Xq_ point P(R V3 , 0 , 0 ) on
the positive x-axis directly towards O, with an initial kinetic energy *tb . (A
) The particle crosses O and goes to infinity. (B) The particle returns to P. • (C
) The particle will just reach O. (D) The particle crosses O and goes to -RV3.
0 1 2 0 2 0 d 0
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
Q.35 A bullet of mass m and charge q is fired towards a solid uniformly charged
sphere of radius R and total charge + q. If it strikes the surface of sphere wit
h speed u,findthe minimum speed u so that it can penetrate through the sphere. (
Neglect all resistance forces orfiictionacting on bullet except electrostatic fo
rces)
+ + , ++ + \
m +
I t+ +
+
V3q (C) yj 87i£ mR (D) yj 47ts mR (B) ^47is mR Q.36 In space of horizontal EF (E =
(mg)/q) exist as shown in figure and a ////////// mass m attached at the end of
a light rod. If mass m is releasedfromthe position shown in figure find the ang
ular velocity of the rod when it X passes through the bottom most position
(A) ^27rs mR
0
0
0
0
( A )
v
(B)
- f
(D)
Q.37 Two identical particles of mass m carry a charge Q each. Initially one is a
t rest on a smooth horizontal plane and the other is projected along the plane d
irectly towardsfirstparticle from a large distance with speed v. The closed dist
ance of approach be VOr 1 3Q 1 2Q 1 4Q (D) 4tc8O m v (A) 4TCS m v (B) 47is mv (C
) 4TIS MV Q.38 The diagram shows a small bead of mass m carrying charge q. The b
ead can freely move on the smooth fixed ring placed on a smooth horizontal plane
. In the same plane a charge +Q has also beenfixedas shown. The potential atthe
point /* P due to +Q is V. The velocity with which the bead should projected fro
m the point P so that it can complete a circle should be greater than I qV 3qV 6
qV (D)none (A) V m (B) m (C) m Q.39 Electricfieldgiven by the vector E = xi + yj
is present in the XY plane. (0,L) A small ring carrying charge +Q, which canfre
elyslide on a smooth non conducting rod, is projetced along the rod from the poi
nt (0, L) such \ that it can reach the other end ofthe rod. What minimum velocit
y should be given to the ring?(Assume zero gravity) (A) (QL /m) (B) 2(QL /m) (C)
4(QL /m) (D)(QL /2m)
2
0
0
2
0
2
2
2
1/2
2
1/2
2
1/2
2
1/2
Q.40 A unit positive point charge of mass m is projected with a velocity V insid
e the tunnel as shown. The tunnel has been made inside a uniformly charged non c
onducting sphere. The minimum velocity with which the point charge should be pro
jected such it can it reach the opposite end of the tunnel, is equal to (A) [pR
/4ms ] (B) [pR /24ms ] (C) [pR /6me ] (D) zero because the initial and thefinalp
oints are at same potential.
>
2
0
1/2
2
0
1/2
2
0
1/2
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
Q.41 A conducting sphere of radius a has charge Q on it. It is enclosed by a neu
tral conducting concentric spherical shell having inner radius 2a and outer radi
us 3a. Find electrostatic energy of system. 5kQi JikQl 12 a 12 a 2a 1 Q.42 A par
ticle of mass 1 kg & charge. — pC is projected towards a non conducting fixed sphe
rical shell having the same charge ] uniformly distributed on its surface. Find
the minimum initial velocity of projection required if the particle just grazes
the shell.
( A )
O
( D ) n o n e
z^LZX. I l^T'j —'
A "f
from
»
(A) J 7 m/s
[2
(B) 2 J— m/s
[2
(C) — m/s
2
(D) none of these
Y
Q. 4 3 The diagram shows three infinitely long uniform line charges placed on 3X
the X, Y and Z axis. The work done in moving a unit positive charge from(l, 1,
l)to (0,1,1) is equal to (A)(Un2)/27is (B) (X In 2) /ne 2X (C)(3Xln2)/2ne (D)Non
e £ Q. 44 A charged particle of charge Q is heldfixedand another charged particle
ofmass m and charge q (ofthe same sign) is released from a distance r. The impul
se of the force exerted by the external agent on the fixed charge by the time di
stance between Q and q becomes 2r is Qq I Qqm Qqm Qqm
0 0
0
( D )
P ^
0
r
Q.45 In a uniform electricfield,the potential is 10V at the origin of coordinate
s, and 8 V at each of the points /T (1,0,0),(0,1,0) and (0,0,1). The potential a
t the point (1,1,1) will be (A) 0 (B) 4 V (C) 8 V (D)10V Q.46 In a regular polyg
on of n sides, each corner is at a distance r from the centre. Identical charges
are placed at (n - 1) corners. At the centre, the intensity is E and the potent
ial is V. The ratio V/E has magnitude. (A)rn (B)r(n-l) (C)(n-l)/r (D)r(n-l)/n Q.
47 The equation of an equipotential line in an electricfieldis y=2x, then the el
ectricfieldstrength vector at (1,2) maybe i (A) 4i + 3j (B) 4i + 8j (C) 8 i + 4
j (D) - 8 i + 4 j Q.48 The electric field in a region is given by : E = (4axy Vz
)i + (2ax Vz )j + (ax / Vz )k, where a is a positive constant. The equation of
an equipotential surface will be of the form (A) z = constant / [x y ] (B) z = c
onstant / [xy ] (C) z - constant / [x y ] (D) None Q.49 A charge 3 coulomb exper
iences a force 3000 N when placed in a uniform electricfield.The potential diffe
rence between two points separated by a distance of 1 cm along thefieldlines is
^ (A) 10 V (B) 90 V (C) 1000V (D) 9000V Q. 5 0 Two point charges of+Q each have
been placed at the positions (-a /2,0,0) and (a / 2,0,0). The locus of the point
s where - Q charge can be placed such the that total electrostatic potential ene
rgy of the system can become equal to zero, is represented by which of the follo
wing equations? (A) Z + (Y-a) = 2a (B) Z + (Y-a) = 27a /4 (C) Z + Y = 15a /4 (D)
None
1 2 2 3 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
Q.51 Figure shows equi-potential surfaces for a two charges system. At which of
the labeled points point will an I electron have the highest potential energy? (
B) Point B (A) Point A (C) Point C (D) Point D Q.52 Auniform electricfieldhaving
strength £ is existing in x-y plane as shown infigure.Find the p.d. between origi
n O & A(d, d, 0) (A) Ed (cos0 + sin0) (B) -Ed (sin6 - cos0) (C) 4 l Ed (D) none
of these
£
$
Q.53 In a certain region of space, the potential is given by: V = k[2x - y + z ]
. The electric field at the point (1,1,1) has magnitude = (A) k-/6 (B)2kV6 (C)2k
V3 (D) 4kV3 Q.54 Find the force experienced by the semicircular rod charged with
a charge q, placed as shown in figure. Radius of the wire is R and the line of
charge with linear charge density A, is passing through its centre and perpendic
ular to the plane ofwire. 1 Aq Aq A,q Aq (B) 7L S R 2tt S R
2 2 2 2 0
2 0
Q.55 Uniform electric field of magnitude 100 V/m in space is directed along the
line y = 3 + x. Find the potential difference between point A (3,1) & B (1,3) (A
) 100 V (B)200V2V (C)200V (D)0 Q.56 A wheel having mass m has charges +q and -q
on diametrically opposite points. It remains in equilibrium on a rough inclined
plane in the presence of uniform vertical electricfieldE = mg mg tan 0 mg (D)non
e (A) (B) 2q (C) 2q Q.57 An equilateral triangle wire frame of side L having 3 p
oint charges at its vertices is kept in x-y plane as shown. Component of electri
cfielddue to the configuration in z direction at (0,0, L) is [origin is centroid
of triangle] 9 kg 9V3kq (B)zero (D) None (C) 8L 8L Q.58 A, B, C, D, P and Q are
points in a uniform electricfield.The potentials B C a these points are V (A) =
2 volt. V (P) = V (B) = V (D) = 5 volt. f y* P V (C) = 8 volt. The electric fie
ld at P is Q D A (A) 10 Vm" along PQ (B) 15^2 V n r along PA i — • (C) 5 V n r along
PC (D) 5 V m along PA 0.2 m
£
2
2
1
1
1
_1
(f|BansalClasses
[15]
Q. 5 9 A and B are two points on the axis and the perpendicular bisector respect
ively of an electric dipole. A and B are far awayfromthe dipole and at equal dis
tancefromit. The field at A and B are E and E . (A)E,A _: FB (B)E 2E (D) | E | =
— | E |, and E is perpendicular to E^ y (C) E = - 2 E
A B
y
A =
B
a
R
B
a
0
Q.60 Figure shows the electric field lines around an electric dipole. Which ofth
e arrows best represents the electricfieldat point P ? (B)\ £ (A) | Q.61 A dipole
consists of two particles one with charge +lpC and mass 1kg and the other with c
harge -1 pC and mass 2kg separated by a distance of 3m. For small oscillations a
bout its equilibrium position, the angularfrequency,when placed in a uniform ele
ctricfieldof 20kV/m is (A) 0.1 rad/s (B) 1.1 rad/s - (C) 10 rad/s (D)2.5rad/s Q.
62 The dipole moment of a system of charge +q distributed uniformly on an arc of
radius R subtending an angle 7t/2 at its centre where another charge -q is plac
ed is: •f qR 2qR 2V2qR V2qR (A) 71 (B) 71 (D) 71 71 Q.63 An electric dipole is kep
t on the axis of a uniformly charged ring at distance R/ V2 from the centre ofth
e ring. The direction ofthe dipole moment is along the axis. The dipole moment i
s P, charge of the ring is Q and radius of the ring is R. The force on the dipol
e is nearly 4kPQ 2kPQ i ( A ) 4kPQ2 ^ (B)^rT ( )W3V
3 R c ( D ) z e r o
( C ) /
( P ) /
Q.64 Alarge sheet carries uniform surface charge density a. Arod oflength 21 has
a linear charge density X on one half and -X on the second half. The rod is hin
ged at mid point O and makes an angle 6 with the normal to the sheet. The torque
experienced by the rod is
y
(A)0 (C) — s i n e
GXI
2
(B) ^7~sine 2s
0
aXl
2
(D) 2 T Q.65 Two short electric dipoles are placed as shown. The energy of elect
ric interaction between these dipoles will be 2kPjP cose - 2kPjP sin 6 •2kP]P cosB
- 4kPjP cos 6 (A) (B) (C) (D)
2 2 2 2
aXl
Q.66 Point P lies on the axis of a dipole. Ifthe dipole is rotated by 90° anticloc
k wise, the electricfieldvector E P u (A)at90°will rotate by (B) 180° clock wise (C)
90° anti clock wise (D) none clock wise
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
Q.67 4 charges are placed each at a distance 'a' from origin. The dipole moment
of configuration is (A) 2qaj (B) 3qaj (C)2aq[i + j] (D)none "
y
2q
-2q
Q.68 Both question (a) and (b) refer to the system of charges as shown in the fi
gure. A spherical shell with an inner radius 'a' and an outer radius 'b' is made
of conducting material. A point charge +Q is placed at the centre of the spheri
cal shell and a total charge - q is placed on the shell. (a) Charge - q is distr
ibuted on the surfaces as (A) - Q on the inner surface, - q on outer surface (B)
- Q on the inner surface, - q + Q on the outer surface (C) +Q on the inner surf
ace, -q - Q on the outer surface (D) The charge - q is spread uniformly between
the inner and outer surface. Assume that the electrostatic potential is zero at
an infinite distancefromthe spherical shell. The electrostatic potential at a di
stance R (a < R < b)fromthe centre of the shell is (A) o (where K = 1
47IS 0
(b)
(B)^ )
0
Q.69 In a region of space, the electric field is in the x direction and is given
as E = E x i. Consider an imaginary cubical volume of edge a, with its edges pa
rallel to the axes of coordinates. The charge inside this volume is: 1„ 1 (A) zero
(B)s E a (C) — o (D) s E a
3 0 0 3 E a 3 7 0 0 2
Q. 7 0 Electricfluxthrough a surface of area 100 m lying in the xy plane is (in
V-m) if E = i + V2 j + V3k (A) 100 (B) 141.4 (C) 173.2 (D)200
2
Q. 71 An infinite, uniformly charged sheet with surface charge density a cuts th
rough a spherical Gaussian surface of radius R at a distance xfromits center, as
shown in the figure. The electric flux O through the Gaussian surface is HIV a
7tR u (A) " 7 — o
2 E
ztiiin. R- x x ) a 27t( - (B) ~ o
2 2 £
/ V _
x
/\
N
' o o Q. 72 Two spherical, nonconducting, and very thin shells ofuniformly distr
ibuted positive charge Q and radius d are located a distance 1 Odfromeach other.
A positive point charge q is placed inside one ofthe shells at a distance d/2 f
rom the center, on the line connecting the centers of the two shells, as shown i
n the figure. What is the net force on the charge q?
b s
(C) —
TT(R-X) 2 CT
(D) *
TT(R -X 2 ) A
2
(A) 36l7T8 d
0
qQ
2 t o t h e l e f t
(B) 36l7ts d totheright
0 2
qQ
'
362qQ < > 36l7TE d
C 0
2 t o t h e l e f t
360qQ CD) 2 totheright
3 6 l 7 r g ( ) d
«
iod
w
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
Q.73 A positive charge q is placed in a spherical cavity made in apositively cha
rged sphere. The centres of sphere and cavity are displaced by a small distance
/ . Force on charge q is: (A) in the direction parallel to vector J (B) in radia
l direction (C) in a direction which depends on the magnitude of charge density
in sphere (D) direction can not be determined. Q.74 There are four concentric sh
ells A, B, C and D ofradii a, 2a, 3a and 4a respectively. Shells B and D are giv
en charges +q and -q respectively. Shell C is now earthed. The potential differe
nce V - V is: Kq Kq Kq Kq (B)' 3a — (D) 6a ^ y
A c
Q.75 A metal ball of radius R is placed concentrically inside a hollow metal sph
ere of inner radius 2R and outer radius 3R. The ball is given a charge +2Q and t
he hollow sphere a total charge - Q. The electrostatic potential energy ofthis s
ystem is: 7Q 5Q 5Q (D) None (A) 247is R (B) 167t8 R (C) 87is R Question No. 76 t
o 80 % fcfcjtft wuLuffx' b e soVv€<4 oat Apoint charge +Q having mass m is fixed o
n horizontal smooth surface. Another point charge having magnitude +2Q & mass 2m
is projected horizontally towards the charge +Q from far distance with velocity
V . Q.76 Force applied by floor on the fixed charge in horizontal direction, wh
en distance between charges becomes'd'. 2KQ KQ (C) Zero (D) None (A) (B)
0 0 0 o 2 2
Q. 77 The impulse acting on the system ofparticles (Q + 2Q) in the time interval
when distance between them becomes'd'. (A) 2m o
2 K
md md
Q
-V
(B)2mV (D) None
n
(C) 2m k 2
Q. 7 8 Minimum distance of approach. 2KQ KQ 4KQ (D) None (A) mV (B) (D) mV Q.79
Acceleration ofparticle 2Q when it is closest to fixed particle Q mV mV (A) Zero
(D) None (B) 2KQ (C) 4KQ Q.80 If particle +Q isfreeto move, then what will be t
he closest distance between the particles. 6KQ' 3KQ' (A) Zero (D) None (B) mV (C
) mV
2 2 2 2 Z 2 2
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
each question. Q.l Mid way between the two equal and similar charges, we placed
the third equal and similar charge. Which ofthe following statements is correct,
concerned to the equilibrium along the line joining the charges ? (A) The third
charge experienced a net force inclined to the line joining the charges (B) The
third charge is in stable equilibrium (C) The third charge is in unstable equil
ibrium (D) The third charge experiences a net force perpendicular to the line jo
ining the charges A negative point charge placed at the point A is (A) in stable
equilibrium along x-axis (B) in unstable equilibrium along y-axis (p^--• (C) in s
table equilibrium along y-axis (D) in unstable equilibrium along x-axis Five bal
ls numbered 1 to 5 are suspended using separate threads. Pairs (1,2), (2,4) and
(4,1) show electrostatic attraction while pairs (2,3) and (4,5) show repulsion.
Therefore ball 1 must be (A) positively charged (B) negatively charged (C) neutr
al (D) made of metal
a a
Q.2
Q.3 Q.4
Four charges of 1 pC,2pC,3 pC, and-6pC are placed one at each corner ofthe squar
e of side lm. The square lies in the x-y plane with its centre at the origin. (A
) The electric potential is zero at the origin. (B) The electric potential is ze
ro everywhere along the x-axis only^f the sides ofthe square are parallel to x a
nd y axis. (C) The electric potential is zero everywhere along the z-axis for an
y orientation ofthe square in the xy plane. (D) The electric potential is not ze
ro along the z-axis except at the origin. Twofixedcharges 4Q (positive) and Q (n
egative) are located at A and B, the distance AB being 3 m.
+ 4Q » A -« Q B
Q. 5
(A) The point P where the resultantfielddue to both is zero is on AB outside AB.
(B) The point P where the resultant field due to both is zero is on AB inside A
B. (C) If a positive charge is placed at P and displaced slightly along AB it wi
ll execute oscillations. (D) If a negative charge is placed at P and displaced s
lightly along AB it will execute oscillations. Q. 6 Two identical charges +Q are
keptfixedsome distance apart. A small particle P with charge q is placed midway
between them. IfP is given a small displacement A, it will undergo simple harmo
nic motion if (A) q is positive and A is along the line joining the charges. (B)
q is positive and A is perpendicular to the line joining the charges. (C) q is
negative and A is perpendicular to the line joining the charges. (D) q is negati
ve and A is along the line joining the charges. Select the correct statement: (O
nly force on a particle is due to electric field) (A) A charged particle always
moves along the electric line of force. (B) A charged particle may move along th
e line of force (C) A charge particle never moves along the line of force (D) A
charged particle moves along the line of force only ifreleased from rest.
3M
Q. 7
(f|Bansal Classes
[15]
Q. 8
Two point charges Q and - Q/4 are separated by a distance x. Then Q x ~Q (A) pot
ential is zero at a point on the axis which is x/3 on the right side of the char
ge - Q/4 (B) potential is zero at a point on the axis which is x/5 on the left s
ide ofthe charge - Q/4 (C) electricfieldis zero at apoint on the axis which is a
t a distance x on the right side ofthe charge - Q/4 (D) there exist two points o
n the axis where electricfieldis zero.
8
/4
Q.9
An electric charge 10~ C is placed at the point (4m, 7m, 2m). At the point (lm,
3m, 2m), the electric (A) potential will be 18 V (B)fieldhas no Y-component (C)f
ieldwill be along Z-axis (D) potential will be 1.8 V
Q.10 Let V be electric potential and E the magnitude of the electricfield.At a g
iven position, which of the statement is true? (A) E is always zero where V is z
ero (B) V is always zero where E is zero (C) E can be zero where V is non zero (
D) E is always nonzero where V is nonzero Q.ll Three point charges Q, 4Q and 16Q
are placed on a straight line 9 cm long. Charges are placed in such a way that
the system has minimum potential energy. Then (A) 4Q and 16Q must be at the ends
and Q at a distance of 3 cm from the 16Q. (B) 4Q and 16Q must be at the ends an
d Q at a distance of 6 cm from the 16Q. (C) Electricfieldat the position of Q is
zero. Q (D) Electricfieldat the position of Q is . Q.12 Two infinite sheets ofu
niform charge density +ct and -cr are parallel to each other as shown in the fig
ure. Electricfieldat the + (A) points to the left or to the right ofthe sheets i
s zero. + (B) midpoint between the sheets is zero. + + (C) midpoint of the sheet
s is C / s and is directed towards right. J + (D) midpoint of the sheet is 2c /
s and is directed towards right.
0 0
Q. 13 The electric potential decreases uniformly from V to -V along X-axis in a
coordinate system as we movesfroma point (-x , 0) to (x , 0), then the electricf
ieldat the origin.
Q Q
(A) must be equal to x ;
0
(B) may be equal to x (D) may be less than
x
Q
(C) must be greater than
x
o
o
Q. 14 The electric potential decreases uniformly from 120 V to 80 V as one moves
on the X-axis from x=-1 cm to x = + 1 cm. The electric field at the origin (A)
must be equal to 20 V/cm (B) may be equal to 20 V/cm (C) may be greater than 20
V/cm (D) may be less than 20 V/cm Q.15 Potential at apoint Ais 3 volt and at a p
oint B is 7 volt, an electron is moving towards Afrom B. (A) It must have some K
.E. at B to reach A (B) It need not have any K.E. at B to reach A (C) to reach A
it must have more than or equal to 4 eV K. E. at B. (D) when it will reach A, it
will have K.E. more then or at least equal to 4 eV ifit was releasedfromrest at
B.
a
MBansal Classes
— — N — — — •
lmmmmmmmjags-,
—
—
•
—
—
— — • — • I WIN II I—GBBAWBG—G — I
MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM^^M^^^MMMMMMMM^MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
[13]
Q.16 A ring of radius R carries charge Q distributed uniformly over the ring. P
is a point on its axis, at a distance rfromits centre. The electric field at P d
ue to ring is E. Which of the following is correct? 1 Qr ( ) 47tB '(r + R ) (B)
E is maximum for r = R/ V2 (C) E * 0 at the centre of the ring. (D) As r increas
es, E will first increase, then decrease. Q.17 A conducting sphere of radius r h
as a charge. Then (A) The charge is uniformly distributed over its surface, ifth
ere is an external electric field. (B) Distribution of charge over its surface w
ill be non uniform ifno external electricfieldexist in space. (C) Electricfields
trength inside the sphere will be equal to zero only when no external electricfi
eldexists (D) Potential at every point of the sphere must be same Q.18 For a sph
erical shell (A) Ifpotential inside it is zero then it necessarily electrically
neutral (B) electricfieldin a charged conducting spherical shell can be zero onl
y when the charge is uniformly distributed. (C) electric potential due to induce
d charges at a point inside it will always be zero (D) none of these
A E = 0 2
2
3 / 2
Q.19 A circular ring carries a uniformly distributed positive charge. The electr
icfield(E) and potential (V) varies with distance (r)fromthe centre of the ring
along its axis as
(A)
(B)
(C)
Q.20 The figure shows a nonconducting ring which has positive and negative charg
e non uniformly distributed on it such that the total charge is zero. - I0 Which
ofthe following statements is true? ; axis I (A) The potential at all the point
s on the axis will be zero. (B) The electricfieldat all the points on the axis w
ill be zero. (C) The direction of electricfieldat all points on the axis will be
along the axis. (D) Ifthe ring is placed inside a uniform external electricfiel
dthen net torque and force acting on the ring would be zero. Q.21 At distance of
5cm and 1 Ocm outwards from the surface of a uniformly charged solid sphere, th
e potentials are 100V and 75V respectively. Then (A) potential at its surface is
150V. (B) the charge on the sphere is (5/3) * 10" C. (C) the electricfieldon th
e surface is 1500 V/m. (D) the electric potential at its centre is 225V.
10
Q.22 Four identical charges are placed at the points (1,0,0), (0,1,0), (-1,0,0)
and (0, -1,0). (A) The potential at the origin is zero. (B) Thefieldat the origi
n is zero. (C) The potential at all points on the z-axis, other than the origin,
is zero. (D) Thefieldat all points on the z-axis, other than the origin acts al
ong the z-axis.
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
Q.23 Variation of electrostatic potential along x-direction is shown in the grap
h. The correct statement about electricfieldis (A) x component at point B is max
imum (B) x component at point A is towards positive x-axis. (C) x component at p
oint C is along negative x-axis (D) x component at point C is along positive x-a
xis Q.24 A particle of charge 1 pC & mass 1 gm moving with a velocity of 4 m/s i
s subj ected to a uniform electric field of magnitude 300 V/m for 10 sec. Then i
t's final speed cannot be: (A) 0.5 m/s (B)4m/s (C)3m/s (D)6m/s Q.25 Two point ch
arges q and 2q are placed at (a, 0) and (0, a). Apoint charge q[ is placed at a
point P on the quarter circle of radius a as shown in the diagram so that the el
ectricfieldat the origin becomes zero: a V2a '_a_ 2a ^ (A) the point P is 7 3 '
V T (B) the point Pis V5'V5 (C)q,=-5q (D) none of these Q.26 A charged cork of m
ass m suspended by a light string is placed in uniform electricfiledof strength
E = (i + ]) x 10 NC~' as shown in thefig.Ifin equilibrium 2mg position tension i
n the string is then angle'a'with the vertical is (A) 60° (B) 30° (C) 45° (D)18° Q.27 Tw
o particles of same mass and charge are thrown in the same direction along the h
orizontal with same velocity vfromtwo different heights hj and h (h, < h ). Init
ially they were located on the same vertical line. Choose the correct alternativ
e. (A) Both the particles will always lie on a vertical line. (B) Acceleration o
fthe centre of mass of two particles will be g downwards. (C) Horizontal displac
ement of the particle lying at hj is less and the particle lying at h is more th
an the value, which would had been inthe absence of charges on them. (D) all of
these.
5 2 2 2
Q.28 A proton and a deuteron are initially at rest and are accelerated through t
he same potential difference. Which ofthe following is false concerning thefinal
properties ofthe two particles ? (A) They have different speeds (B) They have sa
me momentum (C) They have same kinetic energy (D) They have been subj ected to s
ame force Q.29 A particle of charge - q and mass m moves in a circle around a lo
ng wire of linear charge density + X. If r=radius of the circular path and T = t
ime period of the motion circular path. Then: (A) T = 2 ti r (m/2KXq) (B) T = 4
tt m r /2qK>, (C) T = 1/2 7r r (2KA,q/m) (D) T = l/27tr (m/KTtAq) where K = l/4n
e
i/2 2 2 3 1/2 172
0
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
Q.30 Charge Q is distributed non-uniformly over a ring of radius R, P is a point
on the axis of ring at a distance •Sr from its centre. Which ofthe following is a
wrong statement. KQ (A) Potential at P is -—2R V3KQ (B) Magnitude of electric fie
ld at P may be greater than y~ 8R V3KQ (C) Magnitude of electric field at P must
be equal to j 8R V3KQ (D) Magnitude of electric field at P cannot be less than —
8R
-
Q.31 An electric dipole moment p = (2.0i + 3.0j) pC. m is placed in a uniform el
ectric field E = (3.0i + 2.Ok) x 10 NC" . (A) The torque that E exerts on p is (
0.6i - 0.4 j - 0.9k) Nm. (B) The potential energy of the dipole is -0.6 J. (C) T
he potential energy ofthe dipole is 0.6 J. (D) Ifthe dipole is rotated in the el
ectric field, the maximum potential energy of the dipole is 1.3 J.
5 1
Q.32 Which ofthe following is true for thefigureshowing electric lines of force?
(E is electricalfield,V is potential) (A)E >E (B)E >E (C)V >V (D)V >V
a b b a A B b a
Q.33 If we use permittivity s, resistance R, gravitational constant G and voltag
e V as fundamental physical quantities, then (A) [angular displacement] = s R G°V
(B) [Velocity] = e - ' R ' W (C) [dipole moment] = s ^ V V (D) [force] = e ' R ^
V Q.34 Units ofelectric flux are
0 0 0 1 2
<
c ) v o l ,
-
m
( D ) V o l t
-
m 3
Q.35 Which ofthe following statements are correct? (A) Electricfieldcalculated b
y Gauss law is thefielddue to only those charges which are enclosed inside the G
aussian surface. (B) Gauss law is applicable only when there is a symmetrical di
stribution of charge. (C) Electric flux through a closed surface will depends on
ly on charges enclosed within that surface only. (D) None of these Q.36 Mark the
correct options: (A) Gauss's law is valid only for uniform charge distributions
. (B) Gauss's law is valid only for charges placed in vacuum. (C) The electricfi
eldcalculated by Gauss's law is thefielddue to all the charges. (D) The flux of
the electricfieldthrough a closed surface due to all the charges is equal to the
flux due to the charges enclosed by the surface.
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
Q.37 A thin-walled, spherical conducting shell S ofradius R is given charge Q. T
he same amount of charge is also placed at its centre C. Which of the following
statements are correct? Q (A) On the outer surface of S, the charge density is 2
7tR • (B) The electric field is zero at all points inside S. (C) At a point just o
utside S, the electric field is double the field at a point just inside S. (D) A
t any point inside S, the electricfieldis inversely proportional to the square o
fits distancefromC.
2
Q.38 A hollow closed conductor of irregular shape is given some charge. Which of
the following statements are correct? (A) The entire charge will appear on its o
uter surface. (B) All points on the conductor will have the same potential. (C)
All points on its surface will have the same charge density. (D) All points near
its surface and outside it will have the same electric intensity. Q.39 Charges
Q, and Q lies inside and outside respectively of a closed surface S. Let E be th
efieldat any point on S and < be the flux of E over S. ( > (A) If Q j changes, b
oth E and <}) will change. (B) If Q changes, E will change but <|> will not chan
ge. (C) If Qj = 0 and q * 0 then E * 0 but <j) = 0. (D) If Q, * 0 and Q = 0 then
E = 0 but (j) * 0.
2 2 2 2
Q.40 Three points charges are placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle o
f - 2q side Las shown in the figure. /\ (A) The potential at the centroid ofthe
triangle is zero. L/ \L (B) The electricfieldat the centroid ofthe triangle is z
ero. •/ \ (C) The dipole moment of the system is J l qL \ +q L +q (D) The dipole m
oment of the system is V3 qL • Q. 41 An electric dipole is placed at the centre of
a sphere. Mark the correct answer (A) thefluxofthe electricfieldthrough the sphe
re is zero (B) the electricfieldis zero at every point of the sphere. (C) the el
ectric potential is zero everywhere on the sphere. (D) the electric potential is
zero on a circle on the surface. Q.42 An electric field converges at the origin
whose magnitude is given by the expression E = 1 OOrNt/Coul, where r is the dis
tance measuredfromthe origin. (A) total charge contained in any spherical volume
with its centre at origin is negative. (B) total charge contained at any spheri
cal volume, irrespective ofthe location of its centre, is negative. (C) total ch
arge contained in a spherical volume of radius 3 cm with its centre at origin ha
s magnitude 3 xlO~ C. (D) total charge contained in a spherical volume of radius
3 cm with its centre at origin has magnitude 3 * 10 Coul.
13
•
-9
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
Q. 4 3 A conducting sphere A ofradius a, with charge Q, is placed concentrically
inside a conducting shell B of radius b. B is earthed. C is the common centre o
f the A andB. (A) The field is a distance r from C, where a < r < b i s 47T£q rQ ,
1 2 1 Q (B) The potential at a distance r from C, where a < r < b, is ^ s r
0
(C) The potential difference between A and B is
Q a b
Q r b Q.44 Three concentric conducting spherical shells have radius r, 2r and 3r
and Q,, Q, and Q are final charges respectively. Innermost and outermost shells
are already earthed as shown in figure. Choose the wrong statement. . 0,
3
(D) The potential at a distance r from C, where a<r<b, ,
(A) Q. + Q
(C)
3
Qi
Q .45 Two thin conducting shells of radii R and 3R are shown in the figure. The
outer shell carries a charge + Q and the inner shell is neutral. The inner shell
is earthed with the help of a switch S. (A) With the switch S open, the potenti
al ofthe inner sphere is equal to that ofthe outer. (B) When the switch S is clo
sed, the potential of the inner sphere becomes zero. (C) With the switch S close
d, the charge attained by the inner sphere is - q/3. (D) By closing the switch t
he capacitance of the system increases. Q.46 X and Y are large, parallel conduct
ing plates closed to each other. Each face has an area A. X is given a charge Q.
Y is without any charge. Points A, B and C are as shown in figure. (A) The fiel
d at B is ^ T ^ o
,E
Q.
(B) Q , =-Q r H Q -1 o7 T
2 3 ( D ) =
Q
X
Y
(B) The field at Bis 7 T (C) Thefieldsat A, B and C are of the same magnitude. (
D) Thefieldat Aand C are of the same magnitude, but in opposite directions. Q.47
Plates A andB constitute an isolated, charge parallel-plate capacitor. [~1+Q [~
| _Q The inner surfaces (I and IV) of A and B have charges +Q and - Q respective
ly. A third plate C with charge +Q is now introduced midway " between Aand B. Wh
ich ofthe following statements is not correct? II III IV (A) The surfaces I and
II will have equal and opposite charges. (B) The surfaces III and IV will have e
qual and opposite charges. (C) the charge on surface III will be greater than Q.
(D) The potential difference between Aand C will be equal to the potential diff
erence between C and B.
B
Q
B
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
Q .4 8 A particle ofmass m and charge q is thrown in a region where uniform grav
itational field and electric field are present. The path of particle (A) may be
a straight line (B) may be a circle (C) may be a parabola (D) may be a hyperbola
Question No. 49 to 54 (6 questions) An empty thick conducting shell of inner ra
dius a and outer radius b is shown in figure. If it is observed that the inner f
ace ofthe shell carries a uniform charge density -cr and the surface carries a u
niform charge density 'a' Q.49 If a point charge q is placed at the center of th
e shell, then choose the correct statement(s) (A) The charge must be positive (B
) The charge must be negative (C) The magnitude of charge must be 4naa2 (D) The
magnitude of charge must be 4na(b - a ) Q.50 If another point charge q is also p
laced at a distance c (>b) the center of shell, then choose the correct statemen
ts q (A) force experienced by charge A is s c
A 2 2 B a A b 2
2 0
(B) force experienced by charge A is zero
(C) The force experienced by charge B is s c 2
Q
pq
B
b 2
(D) The force experienced by charge B is
A
kq q 2—
A B
(f| Bansal Classes
Q. 51 Ifthe charge q is slowly moved inside the shell, then choose the statement
(s) (A) Charge distribution on the inner and outer face ofthe shell changes (B)
The force acting on the charge B charges (C) The charge B also starts moving slo
wly (D) None of these Q.52 Choose the correct statement related to the potential
of the shell in absence of q (A) Potential ofthe outer surface is more than tha
t ofthe inner surface because it is positively charged (B) Potential ofthe outer
surface is more than that of the inner surface because it carries more charge (
C) Both the surfaces have equal potential ob (D) The potential of the outer surf
ace is o Q. 5 3 If the outer surface of the shell is earthed, then identify the
correct statement(s) (A) Only the potential of outer surface becomes zero (B) Ch
arge on the outer surface also becomes zero (C) The outer surface attains negati
ve charge (D) Negative charge on the inner surface decreases Q.54 If the inner s
urface of the shell is earthed, then identify the correct statement(s) (A) The p
otential of both the inner and outer surface ofthe shell becomes zero (B) Charge
on the outer surface becomes zero (C) Charge on the inner surface decreases (D)
Positive charge flows from the shell to the earth
B fc
C
[15]
ANSWER
KEY
Q.l Q.7 Q.13 Q.19 Q.25 Q.31 Q.38 Q.44 Q.50 Q.56 Q.62 Q.68 Q.74 Q.80 Q.l Q.5 Q.9
Q.13 Q.17 Q.21 Q.25 Q.29 Q.33 Q.37 Q.41 Q.45 Q.49 Q.53
B A A D C B A B C B A (a)B,(b)D D B B A, D A B D A, C, D B A A,B,D A,C,D A,D A,B
,C,D A,C B
Q.2 Q.8 Q.14 Q.20 Q.26 Q.33 Q.39 Q.45 Q.51 Q.57 Q.63 Q.69 Q.75
• •
D D D A B A D B B B D B A
ONLY ONE OPTION IS
Q.3 Q.9 Q.15 Q.21 Q.27 Q.34 Q.40 Q.46 Q.52 Q.58 Q.64 Q.70 Q.76
C B B A C C A B A B B C A
Q.4 Q.10 Q.16 Q.22 Q.28 Q.35 Q.41 Q.47 Q.53 Q.59 Q.65 Q.71 Q.77
D D A C B B A D B C B D A
CORRECT.
Q.5 Q.ll Q.17 Q.23 Q.29 Q.36 Q.42 Q.48 Q.54 Q.60 Q.66 Q.72 Q.78
B A B B B B B C B B A A A
Q.6 Q.12 Q.18 Q.24 Q.30 Q.37 Q.43 Q.49 Q.55 Q.61 Q.67 Q.73 Q.79
D A D D B B B A D A A A C
Q.2 Q.6 Q.10 Q.14 Q.18 Q.22 Q.26 Q.30 Q.34 Q.38 Q.42 Q.46 Q.50 Q.54
C, D A, C C B,C D B,D A,B C C A,B A,B,C A,C,D B A,B,D
Q.3 Q.7 Q.ll Q.15 Q.19 Q.23 Q.27 Q.31 Q.35 Q.39 Q.43 Q.47 Q.51
C, D B B, C A, C B D D A, B, D C A,B,C A,C,D D D
•
Q.4 Q.8 Q.12 Q.16 Q.20 Q.24 Q.28 Q.32 Q.36 Q.40 Q.44 Q.48 Q.52
A, C A, B, C A, C A, B,D A A B A, D C, D A,D D A,C C,D
9
(f| Bansal Classes
[15]
BANSALCLASSES
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
1 1 YS ICS *1
!||| £11
(ALL)
/
ERRORIN MEASUREMENTS INSTRUMENTS'
&
Whenever an experiment is performed, two kinds of errors can appear in the measu
red quantity. (1) indeterminate and (2) determinate (or systematic) errors. 1. I
ndeterminate errors appear randomly because ofoperator, fluctuations in external
conditions and variability of measuring instruments. The effect ofindeterminate
error can be some what reduced by taking the average of measured values. Indete
rminate errors have no fixed sign or size. 2. Determinate errors occur due to er
ror in the procedure, or miscalibration ofthe intrument etc. Such errors have sa
me size and sign for all the measurements. Such errors can be determined. Ameasu
rement with relatively small indeterminate error is said to have high precision.
Ameasurement with small indeterminate error and small determinate error is said
to have high accuracy. The experimental error [uncertainty] can be expressed in
several standard ways. Error limits Q ± AQ is the measured quantity and AQ is the
magnitude of its limit of error. This expresses the experimenter's judgment tha
t the 'true' value of Q lies between Q - AQ and Q + AQ. This entire interval wit
hin which the measurement lies is called the range of error. Indeterminate error
s are expressed in this form.
Absolute Error
ERRORS
Error may be expressed as absolute measures, giving the size ofthe error in a qu
antity in the same units as the quantity itself
Relative (or Fractional) Error
Error may be expressed as relative measures, giving the ratio ofthe quantity's e
rror to the quantity itself. In general absolute pnor in a measurement relative
error = f the measurement We should know the error in the measurement because th
ese errors propagate through the calculations to produce errors in results. A. D
eterminate errors : They have a known sign. 1. Suppose that a result R is calcul
atedfromthe sum of two measured quantities A and B. We' 11 use a and b to repres
ent the error in A and B respectively, r is the error in the result R. Then (R +
r) = (A + B) + (a + b) The error in R is therefore : r = a + b. Similarly, when
two quantities are subtracted, the determinate errors also get subtracted. 2. S
uppose that a result R is calculated by multiplying two measured quantities A an
d B. Then R=AB. (R + r) = (A+ a) (B + b) = AB + aB + Ab + ab => — = — — = — + —. Thus when
two quantities are multiplied, their relative determinate error add. R AB A B 3
. Quotient rule: When two quantities are divided, the relative determinate error
ofthe quotient is the relative A determinate error ofthe numerator minus the re
lative determinate error ofthe denominator. Thus ifR = — then D — - JL_Jl R~A~B 4. P
ower rule: When a quantity Q is raised to a power, P, the relative determinate e
rror in the result is P times the relative determinate error in Q. . p ± = ±
0 I f R Q P x
This also holds for negative powers.
(1% Bansal Classes ERROR IN MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTS
[2]
5.
The quotient rule is not applicable if the numerator and denominator are depende
nt on each other. XY e.g ifR = ———. We cannot apply quotient rule to find the error in
R. Instead we write the equation as follows .X. + Y 1 1 1 — = A + Y Differentiati
ng both the sides, we get R — —. dR _ dX dY _ * y r R x R y 7~ n 7. Thus 7 7 7 or — — x —
h — X — R X Y R X Y R X X Y Y Indeterminate error: They have unknown sign. Thus they
are represented in the form A± a. Here we are only concerned with limits oferror.
We must assume a "worst-case" combination. In the case of substraction, A - B,
the worst-case deviation of the answer occurs when the errors are either + a and
- b or - a and + b. In either case, the maximum error will be (a + b) Addition
and subtraction rule: The absolute indeterminate errors add. Thus if R = A + B,
r = a + b and if R = A-B, r = a + b Product and quotient rule: The relative inde
terminate errors add. r a b Thus if R=AB, — = —+ — R A B A r a b and if R = — , then als
o —R= A B B Power rule: When a quantity Q is raised to a power P, the relative err
or in the result is P times the relative error in Q. This also holds for negativ
e powers.
r
— =
2
2
2
2
2
B.
1.
2.
+
3.
•fR-Q^-Pxi
Examples
A student finds the constant acceleration of a slowly moving object with a stopw
atch. The equation used is S = (1/2)AT . The time is measured with a stopwatch,
the distance, S with a meter stick. What is the acceleration and its estimated e
rror? S = 2 ± 0.005 meter. T = 4.2 ±0.2 second. Sol: We use capital letters for quan
tities, lower case for errors. Solve the equation for the result, a.
2
1.
A=2S/T . Its indeterminate-error equation is — = 2— + — Thus A = 0.23 ±0.02 m/s . SIGNIF
ICANT DIGITS Significantfiguresare digits that are statistically significant. Th
ere are two kinds ofvalues in science: 1. Measured Values 2. Computed Values The
way that we identify the proper number of significantfiguresin science are diff
erent for these two types.
2 2
ci
t
S
Identifying a measured value with the correct number of significant digits requi
res that the instrument's calibration be taken into consideration. The last sign
ificant digit in a measured value will be thefirstestimated position.For example
, a metric ruler is calibrated with numbered calibrations equal to 1 cm. In addi
tion, there will be ten unnumbered calibration marks between each numbered posit
ion, (each equal to 0.1 cm). Then one could with a little practice estimate betw
een each ofthose marking, (each equal to 0.05 cm). Thatfirstestimated position w
ould be the last significant digit reported in the measured value. Let's say tha
t we were measuring the length ofa tube, and it extended past the fourteenth num
bered calibration halfway between the third and fourth unnumbered mark. The metr
ic ruler was a meter stick with 100 numbered calibrations. The reported measured
length would be 14.35 cm. Here the total number of significant digits will be 4
.
MEASURED
VALUES
[3]
The other type ofvalue is a computed value. The proper number of significant fig
ures that a computed value should have is decided by a set of conventional rules
. However before we get to those rules for computed values we have to consider h
ow to determine how many significant digits are indicated in the numbers being u
sed in the math computation. A. Rules for determining the number of significant
digits in number with indicated decimals. 1. All non-zero digits (1 -9) are to b
e counted as significant. 2. Zeros that have any non-zero digits anywhere to the
LEFT of them are considered significant zeros. 3. All other zeros not covered i
n rule (ii) above are NOT be considered significant digits. For example: 0.00400
00 The 4 is obviously to be counted significant (Rule-1), but what about the zer
os? Thefirstthree zeros would not be considered significant since they have no n
on-zero digits anywhere to their left (Rule-3). The last four zeros would all be
considered significant since each ofthem has the non-zero digit 4 to their left
(Rule-2). Therefore the number has a total offivesignificant digits. Here is an
other example: 120.00420 The digit 1,2,4 and 2 are all considered significant (R
ule-1). All zeros are considered significant since they have non-zero digits som
ewhere to their left (Rule-2). So there are a total of eight significant digits.
B. Determining the number of significant digits if number is not having an indi
cated decimal. The decimal indicated in a number tells us to what position of es
timation the number has been indicated. But what about 1,000,000? Notice that th
ere is no decimal indicated in the number. In other words, there is an ambiguity
concerning the estimated position. This ambiguity can only be clarified by plac
ing the number in exponential notation. For example: If I write the number above
in this manner. 1.00 x 10 I have indicated that the number has been recorded wi
th three significant digits. On the other hand, ifI write the same number as : 1
.0000 x 10 I have identified the number to have 5 significant digits. Once the n
umber has been expressed in exponential notation form then the digits that appea
r before the power of ten will all be considered significant. So for example : 2
.0040 x 10 will havefivesignificant digits. This means that unit conversion will
not change the number of significant digits. Thus 0.000010 km =1.0 cm = 0.010 m
= 1.0 x 10~ m = 1.0 x 10" km Rule for expressing proper number of significant d
igits in an answer from multiplication or division For multiplication AND divisi
on there is the following rule for expressing a computed product or quotient wit
h the proper number of significant digits. The product or quotient will be repor
ted as having as many significant digits as the number involved in the operation
with the least number of significant digits. For example : 0.000170 x 100.40 =
0.017068 The product could be expressed with no more that three significant digi
ts since 0.000170 has only three significant digits, and 100.40 hasfive.So accor
ding to the rule the product answer could only be expressed with three significa
nt digits. Thus the answer should be 0.0171 (after rounding off) Another example
: 2.000 x 10 / 6.0 x 10~ = 0.33 x 10 The answer could be expressed with no more
that two significant digits since the least digited number involved in the oper
ation has two significant digits. Sometimes this would required expressing the a
nswer in exponential notation. For example : 3.0 x 800.0 = 2.4 x 10 The number 3
.0 has two significant digits and then number 800.0 has four. The rule states th
at the answer can have no more than two digits expressed. However the answer as
we can all see would be 2400. How do we express the answer 2400 while obeying th
e rules? The only way is to express the answer in exponential notation so 2400 c
ould be expressed as : 2.4 x 10
6 6 4 2 5 4 3 7 3 3
COMPUTED
VALUE
[4]
Rule for expressing the correct number of significant digits in an addition or s
ubstraction : The ruie for expressing a sum or difference is considerably differ
ent than the one for multiplication of division. The sum or difference can be no
more precise than the least precise number involved in the mathematical operati
on.Precision has to do with the number ofpositions to the RIGHT ofthe decimal. T
he more position to the right ofthe decimal, the more precise the number. So a s
um or difference can have no more indicated positions to therightof the decimal
as the number involved in the operation with the LEAST indicated positions to th
erightofits decimal. For example: 160.45 + 6.732 = 167.18 (after rounding off) T
he answer could be expressed only to two positions to the right of the decimal,
since 160.45 is the least precise. Another example: 45.621+4.3-6.41 =43.5 (after
rounding off) The answer could be expressed only to one position to the right o
fthe decimal, since the number 4.3 is the least precise number (i.e. having only
one position to therightofits decimal). Notice we aren't really determining the
total number ofsignificant digits in the answer with this rule. Rules for round
ing off digits : There are a set of conventional rules for rounding off. 1. Dete
rmine according to the rule what the last reported digit should be. 2. Consider
the digit to the right ofthe last reported digit. 3. If the digit to the right o
f the last reported digit is less than 5 round it and all digits to itsrightoff
4 If the digit to the right of the last reported digit is greater than 5 round i
t and all digits to its right off and increased the last reported digit by one.
5 Ifthe digit to therightofthe last reported digit is a 5 followed by either no
other digits or all zeros, round it and all digits to its right off and ifthe la
st reported digit is odd round up to the next even digit. Ifthe last reported di
git is even then leave it as is. For example if we wish to round offthe followin
g number to 3 significant digits: 18.3 682 The last reported digits would be the
3. The digit to its right is a 6 which is greater than 5. According to the Rule
-4 above, the digit 3 is increased by one and the answer is : 18.4 Another examp
le: Round off 4.565 to three significant digits. The last reported digit would b
e the 6. The digit to therightis a 5 followed by nothing. Therefore according to
Rule-5 above since the 6 is even it remains so and the answer would be 4.56. (i
) Measurement of length The simplest method measuring the length of a straight l
ine is by means of a meter scale. But there exists some limitation in the accura
cy ofthe result: (i) the dividing lines have a finite thickness. (ii) naked eye
cannot correctly estimate less than 0.5 mm For greater accuracy devices like (a)
Vernier callipers (b) micrometer scales (screw gauge) are used. It consists of
a main scale graduated in cm/mm over which an auxiliary scale (or Vernier scale)
can slide along the length. The division ofthe Vernier scale being either sligh
tly longer and shorter than the divisions ofthe main scale. Least count of Verni
er Callipers The least count or Vernier constant (v. c) is the minimum value of
correct estimation of length without eye estimation. IfN division ofvernier coin
cides with (N-1) division ofmain scale, then N-O Vernier constant = 1 ms - 1 vs
ms = , which is equal to the value ofthe smallest division on v N , the main sca
le divided bv total number of divisions on the vernier scale.
f :
EXPERIMENTS
VERNIER
CALLIPERS:
<!§ Bansal Classes ERROR IN MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTS
[15]
Zero error: Ifthe zero marking ofmain scale and vernier callipers do not coincid
e, necessary correction has to be made for this error which is known as zero err
or ofthe instrument. Ifthe zero ofthe vernier scale is to the right ofthe zero o
fthe main scale the zero error is said to be positive and the correction will be
negative and vice versa. In general vernier callipers can measure accurately up
to 0.01 em and for greater accuracy micrometer screw devices e.g. screw gauge, s
pherometer are used. These consist of accurately cut screw which can be moved in
a closely fitting fixed nut by turning it axially. The instrument is provided w
ith two scales: (i) The main scale or pitch scale M graduated along the axis of
the screw. (ii) The cap-scale or head scale H round the edge ofthe screw head. C
onstants ofthe Screw Gauge Pitch: The translational motion ofthe screw is direct
ly proportional to the total rotation ofthe head. The pitch ofthe instrument is
the distance between two consecutive threads ofthe screw which is equal to the d
istance moved by the screw due to one complete rotation of the cap. Thus for 10
rotation of cap =5 mm. then pitch = 0.5 mm Least count: In this case also, the m
inimum (or least) measurement (or count) of length is equal to one division on t
he head scale which is equal to pitch divided by the total cap divisions. Thus i
n the aforesaid Illustration:, ifthe total cap division is 100, thenleast count
= 0.5mm/100 = 0.005 mm Zero Error: In a perfect instrument the zero of the heat
scale coincides with the line of graduation along the screw axis with no zero-er
ror, otherwise the instrument is said to have zero-error which is equal to the c
ap reading with the gap closed. This error is positive when zero line or referen
ce line ofthe cap lies above the line of graduation and versa. The corresponding
corrections will be just opposite. Measurement of g using a simple pendulum A s
mall spherical bob is attached to a cotton thread and the combination is suspend
edfroma point A. The length ofthe thread (L) is read off on a meter scale. A cor
rection is added to L to include thefinitesize of the bob and the hook. The corr
ected value of L is used for further calculation. The bob is displaced slightly
to one side and is allowed to oscillate, and the total time taken for 50 complet
e oscillations is noted on a stop-watch. The time period (T) of a O B single osc
illation is now calculated by division. Observations are now taken by using diff
erent lengths for the cotton thread (L) and pairs ofvalues of L and T are taken.
Aplot ofL v/s T , on a graph, is linear, g is given /
2
SCREW GAUGE (OR MICROMETER
SCREW)
(a)
(b)
00
byg=47c ^2
A
.A T
(a)
(b)
The major errors in this experiment are Systematic: Error due tofiniteamplitude
ofthe pendulum (as the motion is not exactly SHM). This may be corrected for by
using the correct numerical estimate for the time period. However the practice i
s to ensure that the amplitude is small. Statistical: Errors arisingfrommeasurem
ent oflength and time. 5L 5T L v. i J The contributions to 8L, 8T are both stati
stical and systematic. These are reduced by the process of averaging. The system
atic error in L can be reduced by plotting several values of L vs T andfittingto
a straight line. The slope ofthisfitgives the correct value ofL/T
2 2
2
<!§ Bansal Classes
ERROR IN MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTS
[15]
(iii)
Determination of Young's Modulus by Searle's Method The experimental set up cons
ists oftwo identical wires P and Q ofuniform cross section suspended from afixed
rigid support. Thefreeends of these parallel wires are connected to aframeF as s
hown in thefigure.The length ofthe wire Q remainsfixedwhile the load L attached
to the wire P through theframeF is varied in equal steps so as to produce extens
ion along .the length. The extension thus produced is measured with the help of
spirit level SL and micrometer screw M attached to the Fframeon the side ofthe e
xperimental wire.On placing the slotted weights on the hanger H upto a permissib
le value (half ofthe breaking force) the wire gets extended by small amount and
the spirit level gets disturbed fromhorizontal setting. This increase inlength i
s measured by turning the micrometer screw M upwards so as to restore the balanc
e of the spirit level. If n be the number ofturns ofthe micrometer screw and f b
e the difference in the cap reading, the increase in length Mis obtained by A/ =
n * pitch + f x least count
•'•'•V^^Xx-.î^y r.1i
:l
I
(iv)
The load on the hanger is reduced in the same steps and spirit level is restored
to horizontal position. The mean ofthese two observations gives the true increa
se in length of the wire corresponding to the given value of load. From the data
obtained, a graph showing extension (AI) against the load (W) is plotted which
is obtained as a straight line passing through the origin. The slope of the line
gives n / tan0 = — = / W Mg , Mg I m Now, stress = nr 7 and strain = — L _ MgL L Y
= Stress/ strain = — - —5 nr' I 7tr tanG With known values ofinitial length L, radiu
s r of the experimental wire and tanO, Young's modulus Y can be calculated. Spec
ific Heat of a liquid using a calorimeter: The principle is to take a known quan
tity of liquid in an insulated calorimeter and heat it by passing a known curren
t (i) through a heating coil immersed within the liquid for a known length of ti
me (t). The mass ofthe calorimeter (mj) and, the combined mass ofthe calorimeter
and the liquid (m ) are measured. The potential drop across the heating coil is
V and the maximum temperature ofthe liquid is measured to 0 . The specific heat
of the liquid (S ) is found by using the relation ( 2 - m ^ A - e ) + m, S (0 -
0 ) = i. V. t or, (m -m )S + m S = i. V t / ( 0 - 0 ) (1) Here, 0 is the room t
emperature, while S is the specific heat of the material of the calorimeter and
the stirrer. If S is known, then S can be determined. On the other hand, if S is
unknown: one can either repeat the experiment with water or a different mass of
the liquid and use the two equations to eliminate mj S . The sources of error in
this experiment are errors due to improper connection of the heating coil, radi
ation, apartfromstatistical errors in measurement. The direction ofthe current i
s reversed midway during the experiment to remove the effect of any differential
contacts, radiation correction is introduced to take care of the second major s
ource of systematic error. Radiation correction: The temperature ofthe system is
recorded for half the length oftime t, i.e. t/2, where t is the time during whi
ch the current was switched on} after the current is switched off. The fall in t
emperature 5, during this interval is now added to thefinaltemperature 0 to give
the correctedfinaltemperature: 0' =0 +6 This temperature is used in the calcula
tion of the specific heat, S
2 2 7 m 0 c c 2 O 2 1 / 1 2 o O c c 7 c c 2 2 2 t
[15]
(V)
(vi)
Error analysis: After correcting for systematic errors, equation (i) is used to
estimate the remaining errors. Focal length of a concave mirror and a convex len
s using the u-v method. In this method one uses an optical bench and the convex
lens (or the concave mirror) is placed on the holder. The position of the lens i
s noted by reading the scale at the bottom ofthe holder. Abright object (a filam
ent lamp or some similar object) is placed at afixeddistance (u) infrontofthe le
ns (mirror). The position ofthe image (v) is determined by moving a white screen
behind the lens until a sharp image is obtained (for real images). For the conc
ave mirror, the position ofthe image is determined by placing a sharp object (a
pin) on the optical bench such that the parallax between the object pin and the
image is nil. l/jv] A plot of ju| versus |v| gives a rectangular hyperbola. A pl
ot of - i - vs — X j v j |u| >s\ gives a straight line. X 1 1/|U| The intercepts a
re equal to jyj,where/is the focal length. Error: The systematic error in this e
xperiment is mostly due to improper position ofthe object on the holder. This er
ror maybe eliminated by reversing the holder (rotating the holder by 180° about th
e vertical) and then taking the readings again. Averages are then taken. The equ
ation for errors gives: 5f 5u 5v 15u I +1 Sv! t u + V ju|+|v| The errors 5u, 8v
correspond to the error in the measurement ofu and v. Index Error or Bench Error
and its correction: In an experiment using an optical bench we are required to
measure the object and image distancesfromthe pole or vertex on the mirror. The
distance between the tip of the needles and the pole of the mirror is the actual
distance. But we practically measure distances between the indices with the hel
p ofthe scale engraved on the bench. These distances are called the observed dis
tances. The actual distances may not be equal to the observed distances and due
to this reason an error creeps in the measurement ofthe distances. This error is
called the index or the bench error. Index Error Observed distance - actual dis
tance and Index Correction = Actual - observed distance Note; Index correction w
hether positive or negative, is always added algebraically to the observed dista
nce to get the corrected distance. Speed of sound using resonance column A tunin
g fork of known frequency (f) is held at the mouth of a long tube, which is dipp
ed into water as shown in thefigure.The length (/j) ofthe air column in the tube
is adjusted until it resonates with the tuning fork. The air temperature and hu
midity are noted.The length of the tube is adjusted again until a second resonan
ce length (/ ) is found (provided the tube is long) Then, / -1 -X i 2, provided
l , l are resonance lengths for adjacent resonances. X = 2(/ - /,), is the wavel
ength of sound. Since thefrequencyi, is known; the velocity of sound in air at t
he temperature (9) and humidity (h) is given by C = f A, = 2(/ ~/ )f It is also
possible to use a single measurement ofthe resonant length directly, but, then i
t has to be correctedfor the "end effect": /..(fundamental) = 4(/j + 0.3 d), whe
re d = diameter Errors: The major systematic errors introduced are due to end ef
fects in (end correction) and also due to excessive humidity.
2 2 { x 2 2 2 1
^ Bansal Classes
[SJ
Random errors are given by SC _ S ( / - / ) _ 51 +5/,
2 t 2
1,-1,
k-K
(vii) Verification of Ohm's law using voltmeter and ammeter A voltmeter (V) and
an ammeter (A) are connected in a circuit along with a resistance R as shown in
thefigure,along with a battery B and a rheostat, Rh Simultaneous readings ofthe
current i and the potential drop V are taken by changing the resistance in the r
heostat (Rh), Agraph ofV vs i is plotted and it is found to be linear (within er
rors). The magnitude ofR is determined by either V (a) taking the ratio — and then
(b) fitting to a straight line: V=iR, and determining the slope R. Errors: Syst
ematic errors in this experiment arisefromthe currentflowingthrough V (finite re
sistance ofthe voltmeter), the Joule heating effect in the circuit and the resis
tance ofthe connecting wires/ connections of the resistance. The effect ofJoule
heating may be minimsed by switching on the circuit for a short while only, whil
e the effect offiniteresistance of the voltmeter can be overcome by using a high
resistance instrument or a potentiometer. The lengths of connecting wires shoul
d be minimised as much as possible. Error analysis: 5R SV Si The error in comput
ing the ratio R = — is given by R V + i where 5V and 5i are ofthe order ofthe leas
t counts ofthe instruments used. (viii) Specific resistance of the material of a
wire using a meter bridge: A known length (/) of a wire is connected in one oft
he gaps (P) of a metre bridge, while a Resistance Box is inserted into the other
gap (Q). The circuit is completed by using a battery (B), a Rheostat (Rh), a Ke
y (K) and a galvanometer (G). The balance length (/) is found by closing key k a
nd momentarily connecting the galvanometer until it gives zero deflection (null
point). Then, P Q~100-/ CI) using the expression for the meter bridge at balance
. Here, represents the resistance of the wire while Q represents the resistance
in the resistance box. The key K is open when the circuit is not in use. L nr Th
e resistance of the wire, P = p Ttrj => p = P (2)
2
T
where r is the radius of wire and L is the length of the wire, r is measured usi
ng a screw gauge while L is measured with a scale. Errors: The major systematic
errors in this experiment are due to the heating effect, end corrections introdu
ced due to shift ofthe zero ofthe scale at A and B, and stray resistances in P a
nd Q, and errors due to non-uniformity of the meter bridge wire. Error analysis:
End corrections can be estimated by including known resistances P, and Qj inthe
two ends andfindingthe null point: Q, 100-/,+p
+a
(2), where a and p are the end corrections.
<!§ Bansal Classes
[15]
When the resistance Q is placed in the left gap and P, in the right gap, Qj _ /
+ a ~F\~~IOO-/ +[3 which give two linear equation forfindinga and (3.
} 2 2
In order that a and (3 be measured accurately, P and Qj should be as different f
rom each other as possible. For the actual balance point, _P I, l+ a Q 100-/ + P
L
}
Errors due to non-uniformity of the meter bridge wire can be minimised by interc
hanging the resistances in the gaps P and Q. 8P 51, + 51. P where, 8/' and S/' a
re of the order ofthe least count ofthe scale.
} 2
(ix)
The error is, therefore, minimum if /' = /' i.e. when the balance point is in th
e middle ofthe bridge. The error in pis SP _ 28r 8L , SP P ~ r L^ P s Measuremen
t of unknown resistance using a P.O. Box ~wm A P.O. Box can also be used to meas
ure an unknown resistance. It is a Wheatstone Bridge with three arms P, Q and R;
while the fourth arm(s) is the unknown resistance. P and Q are known as the rat
io arms while R is known at the rheostat arm. At balance, the unknown resistance
S = vvy R (1)
t 2 +
The ratio arms are first adjusted so that they carry 100 O each. The resistance
in the rheostat arm is now adjusted so that the galvanometer deflection is in on
e direction, ifR = Rq (Ohm) and in the opposite direction when R=Rq+1 (ohm). Thi
s implies that the unknown resistance, S lies between Rând R^ + 1 (ohm). Now, t
he resistance in P and Q are made 100 Q and 1000 Q respectively, and the process
is repeated. Equation (1) is used to compute S. The ratio P/Q is progressively
made 1: 10, and then 1 :100. The resistance S can be accurately measured. Errors
: The major sources of error are the connecting wires, unclear resistance plugs,
change in resistance due to Joule heating, and the insensitivity ofthe Wheatsto
ne bridge. These may be removed by using thick connecting wires, clean plugs, ke
eping the circuit on for very brief periods (to avoid Joule heating) and calcula
ting the sensitivity. In order that the sensitivity is maximum, the resistance i
n the arm P is close to the value ofthe resistance S.
[15]
Q.l Q.2 Q.3
IN In a Vernier Calipers (VC), N divisions of the main scale coincide with N + m
divisions ofthe vernier scale What is the value of m for which the instrument h
as minimum least count? (A) 1 (B)N (C) Infinity (D)N/2
EXERCISE
Consider the vernier calipers as shown, the instrument has no zero error. What i
s the length ofthe rod shown, if 1 msd = 1mm? Use 7 msd = 8 vsd. (A) 4.6 mm (B)4
.5mm (C) 4.3 mm (D)none
Main Scale
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
1
i 'i I i' i' i1 'i
Vernier Scale
In a vernier calipers the main scale and the vernier scale are made up different
materials. When the room temperature increases by AT°C, it is found the reading o
f the instrument remains the same. Earlier it was observed that the front edge o
fthe wooden rod placed for measurement crossed the N main scale division and N +
2 msd coincided with the 2 vsd. Initially, 10 vsd coincided with 9 msd. If coef
ficient of linear expansion ofthe main scale is a, and that ofthe vernier scale
is c^ then what is the value of a,/a,? (Ignore the expansion of the rod on heati
ng) (A) 1.8 / (N) (B) 1.8/(N+2) (C)1.8/(N-2) (D)None
4 nd
Q.4
Consider a screw gauge without any zero error. What will be thefinalreading corr
esponding to thefinalstate as shown? It is given that the circular head translat
es P msd in N rotations. One msd is equal to 1mm. (A) (P/N) (2 + 45/100) mm (B)
(N/P) (2+45/N)mm f 45 P (C) P (2/N + 45/100)mm (D) 2 + 100 x — mm N
N
Circular scale I 45 Line of Reference
The circular scale has 100 divisions
Q.5
A screw gauge has some zero error but its value is unknown. We have two identica
l rods. When thefirstrod is inserted in the screw, the state ofthe instrument is
shown by diagram (I). When both the rods are inserted together in series then t
he state is shown by the diagram (II). What is the zero error ofthe instrument?
1 msd = 100 csd = 1mm (A) -0.16 mm (B)+0.16 mm (C)+0.14 mm (D) -0.14 mm
(1) -12
(ii)
.......
©
(ii)
Q.6
The VC shown in the diagram has zero error in it (as you can see). It is given t
hat 9 msd = 10 vsd What is the magnitude of the zero error? The observed reading
of the length ofa rod measured by this VC comes out 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 11121
314 to be 5.4 mm. If the vernier had been error free then msd would have \ \ I I
.' l'.' coincided with vsd.
1
Q. 7
Consider a home made vernier scale as shown in the figure.
In this diagram, we are interested in measuring the length ofthe line PQ. Ifthe
angle ofboth the inclines is equal to 6 then what is the least count ofthe instr
ument.
<!§ Bansal Classes ERROR IN MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTS [15]
The zero of the main scale lies under the circular head.
Q. 8
The diagram shows the initial and thefinalstate of SQ which has zero error in it
. What can be the length ofthe object? 1 msd = 100 csd
-12
S€L
-1 i 1—+-
— 1 — {
+--+•-
10
Q.9
In a meter bridge set up, which of the following should be the properties of the
one meter long wire? (A) High resistivity and low temperature coefficient (B) L
ow resistivity and low temperature coefficient (C) Low resistivity and high temp
erature coefficient (D) High resistivity and high temperature coefficient
Q.10 Make the appropriate connections in the meter bridge set up shown. Resistan
ce box is connected between _. Unknown resistance is connected between . Battery
is connected between. Options: (A)AB (B) CD (C)EF (D)None
E
r
A
Q.ll Let the end error on the LHS and RHS be equal to one cm. For the balance po
int at O,findout the % tage error in the value ofX? (Ifthe end error is 1 cm fro
m both sides then it means the corrected reading will become 10cm + 1 cm from LH
S and 90cm + 1 cm from the RHS) (A) 4.2% (B) 8.1% (C) 9.2% (D)None
A
x
Q.12 Consider the MB shown in the diagram, let the resistance X have temperature
coefficient a, and the resistancefromthe RB have the temperature coefficient 0L
2. Let the reading ofthe meter scale be 10cmfromthe LHS. Ifthe temperature ofthe
two resistance increase by small temperature AT then what is the shift in the p
osition ofthe null point? Neglect all the other changes in the bridge due to tem
perature rise. 1 1 (A) 9(a, - a )AT (B) 9(a + a )AT „ _ (C) - (a, + a )AT (D) - (a
, - a )AT Q.13 The diagram shows an incomplete sketch of a PO box. Battery is co
nnected •B C A •••SDDDdQD between . The unknown resistance is connected between The galv
anometer is connected between_ _. The key K^ is connected ]•••••£]• between . ^sdaanndnn Op
ns: (A) CD (B) DA (C) CE (D)DF V|]V £ F (E)DE (F)BF (G) CF
2 t 2 9 V 1 2 9 2
Q.14 For a post office Box, the graph of galvanometer deflection versus R (resis
tance pulled out ofRB) for the ratio 100 : 1 is given as shown. A careless stude
nt pulls out two non consecutive values R as shown in thefigure.Find the value o
funknown resistance. (A) 3.2 ohm (B) 3.24 ohm (C) 3.206 ohm (D)None
Deflection (in division)
•RO
<!§ Bansal Classes
[15]
Q.15 When we operate a wheat stone bridge then in starting the key of the batter
y is closedfirstand the key ofthe G is closed later. When the circuit is to be c
losed then switches are released in the opposite order. Why? (A) Look at the dia
gram of the PO box, the switch is battery is always on the right hand hence it i
s easier to press it first. (B) This is done to avoid the damage ofthe galvanome
ter due to induced emf. (C) If the G switch is pressed before the battery switch
then large sparking takes place at the battery switch. (D) While disconnecting
if we open the battery switch before the G switch then we can observe induced cu
rrent in the circuit till the G switch is not opened. Q.16 Identify which of the
following diagrams represent the internal construction ofthe coils wound in a r
esistance box or PQ box?
\...k ....JL^. /
P
-s \
(A)
s
/
(B)
S
i—1f>, tL
Hy
/ !
(C)~
A
-JL
(D)
mMk
Q.17 Which ofthe following reading is most accurate (A) 4.00 cm (B) 0.004 mm (C)
40.00 cm
(D) 4.00 m
Q. 18 The least count of a stop watch is 1/5 sec. The time of 20 oscillations of
a pendulum is measured to be 25 sec. The minimum percentage error in the measur
ement oftime will be (A) 0.1% (B) 0.8% (C) 1.8% (D)8% Q.19 A vernier callipers h
aving 1 main scale division = 0.1 cm is designed to have a least count of 0.02 c
m. If n be the number of divisions on vernier scale and m be the length ofvernie
r scale, then (A) n= 10, m=0.5 cm (B) n=9, m=0.4 cm (C)n=10,m=0.8 cm (D) n=10, m
=0.2 cm Q.20 Solve with due regard to significant digits >.91x0,3842 (i) V6.5-6.
32 (ii) 0.080 Q.21 Abody travels uniformly a distance of (13.8 ± 0.2)m in time (4.
0 ± 0.3) sec. Calculate its velocity. Q.22 The main scale of a vernier calipers re
ads in millimeter and its vernier is divided into 10 divisions which coincide wi
th 9 divisions ofthe main scale. When the two jaws ofthe instrument touch each o
ther the seventh division of the vernier scale coincide with a scale division an
d the zero of the vernier lies to the right of the zero of main scale. Furthermo
re, when a cylinder is tightly placed along its length between the two jaws, the
zero of the vernier scale lies slightly to the left of 3.2 cm and the fourth ve
rnier division coincides with a scale division. Calculate the measured length of
the cylinder. Q.23 A short circuit occurs in a telephone cable having a resista
nce of 0.45 Onr . The circuit is tested with a Wheatstone bridge. The two resist
ors in the ratio arms ofthe Wheatstone bridge network have values of 100Q and 11
10Q respectively. Abalance condition is found when the variable resistor has a v
alue of4000. Calculate the distance down the cable, where the short has occurred
.
1
Q.24 5.74 gm of a substance occupies a volume of 1.2 cm . Calculate its density
with due regard for significant figures.
3
<!§ Bansal Classes ERROR IN MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTS [15]
Q.25 Thetimeperiod of oscillation ofa simple pendulum is given by The length of
the pendulum is measured as / = 10 ± 0.1 cm and the time period as T = 0.5 ± 0.02 s.
Determine percentage error in the value of g. Q.26 A physical quantity P is rel
ated to four observables A, B, C and D as follows. P = , 4n A B VC D The percent
age error of the measurement in A, B, C and D are 1%, 3% and 2%, 4% respectively
. Determine the percentage error & absolute error in the quantity P. Value of P
is calculated 3.763. Round offthe result in scientific way.
2 3 2
Q.27 Aglass prism ofangleA^ 60° gives minimum angleofdeviation9 = 30° withthemax. er
ror of 1° when a beam of parallel light passed through the prism during an experim
ent. (i) Find the permissible error in the measurement of refractive index p oft
he material ofthe prism. (ii) Find the range of experimental value ofrefractive
index 'p'. Q.28 In the given vernier calliper scale, the length of 1 main scale
division is 1 mm whereas the length of the vernier scale is 7.65 mm. Find the re
ading s.ocm ^ ^ 5.5«n ^ ^ |°| on the scale correct to significant digits as shown in
the diagram. I I I I I I I I II
m (mainsea e) ( v e m K r scale)
|
[15]
ANSWER
Q.l Q.7 Q.8 Q.9
A L.C = I
Q.2
COS0
B
Q.3
B
Q.4
D
Q.5
D
Q.6
(i)x = 0.6msd, (ii)6, 1St
1-cosO
4 msd + 0.1 msd + 0.12 msd = 4.22 msd; 4 msd + 0.1 msd +1.12 msd = 5.22 msd & so
on A Q.10 CD, AB, C Q.15 B,C,D Q.20 (i) 0.4 ; (ii) 14 Q.23 40 m Q.27 5tc/18% ,
V2 Q.ll B Q.16 D Q.12 A Q.17 C Q.13 CE, CD, DF, BF Q.18 B Q.25 5% 360
7T
Q.14 B Q.19 C
Q.21 v = (3.5 ± 0.31) m/s Q.24 4.8g/cm
1+
3
Q.22 3.07 cm Q.26 14%, 0.53,3.76 Q.28 5.045 cm
360
71
> n > V2 1 -
<!§ Bansal Classes
[15]
BANSAL CLASSES
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XI (PQRS & J)
FLUID
MECHANICS
CONTENTS
KEYCONCEPTS EXERCISE-I EXERCISE-II EXERCISE-III ANSWER KEY
KEY
1. DENSITY AND RELATIVE
CONCEPTS
:
PART (A) - HYDROSTATICS
Density is mass per unit volume. Densities of solids and liquids are frequently
compared with density of water and the relative density of a substance is define
d as follows: densityof thesubs tan ce RELATIVE DENSITY with respect to water =
densityof water —: mass of any volumeof subs tan ce mass of anequalvolumeof water
(Also known as specific gravity of the substance ). Note that relative density b
eing a ratio of same type ofphysical quantities, it is a number only, without an
y physical dimension. The principle of Archimedes states that any body, totally
or partially immersed in a fluid, experiences an upward force or thrust which is
equal to the weight of fluid it displaces and acts vertically up through the C.
G of the displaced fluid. The termfluidcovers liquids and gases. If a body floa
ts in equilibrium in a fluid, its entire weight is supported by the upward thrus
t of the fluid . Hence, the weight of a floating body is equal to the weight of
the fluid displaced by the body at the equilibrium state. Pressure at any point
in a fluid is defined as the normal force (or thrust) exerted by the liquid on t
he surface per unit area. Pressure is measured in dyne cm" in C G S units and in
N m" in SI units, (also known as pascal). [Note that pressure is a scalar quant
ity] . When a plane surface is placed inside a liquid, the liquid exerts hydrost
atic pressure on the surface, because of the weight of the liquid column above t
he surface. The total force exerted normally on the plane surface is called the
thrust. The thrust over the surface is the vector sum of the thrusts over small
area of the surface, over which the pressure can be considered to be uniform. Th
en: If the plane surface is horizontal, the pressure over the surface is uniform
and the thrust = (area) x (the uniform pressure) If the plane surface is rectan
gular with its plane vertical and a pair of sides horizontal, the thrust = (area
) x (pressure at the centre of the area).
2 2
DENSITY
2.
PRINCIPLE OF ARCHIMEDES :
3.
LAW OF
FLOTATION:
4.
FLUID PRESSURE
:
(i) (ii)
5.
(i) (ii)
The hydrostatics pressure 'p' at any point in a liquid varies directly. As the v
ertical height (h) of the point below the surface & As the density (d) of the li
quid. It can be shown that p = hdg. When a liquid is at rest, the pressure is sa
me at all points at the same horizontal level. The pressure at a point in a liqu
id does not depend on either the shape of the vessel or the area of cross - sect
ion of the vessel.
PRESSURE
IN LIQUIDS :
fo Bansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[10]
6.
7. (i) (ii) i 8.
PASCAL'S LAW : Pressure applied to a liquid (at rest) at one point is transmitte
d equally in all directions throughout the liquid. This is known as Pascal's Law
. The compressibility of all liquids is exceedingly small & for all practical p
urposes, liquids may be considered incompressible. Hence, the density is constan
t throughout the liquid . Pressure at a point in a liquid is the same in all dir
ections and is perpendicular to the surface upon which its acts . GUAGE PRESSURE
AND TOTAL PRESSURE (ABSOLUTE PRESSURE): The total pressure at any point in a li
quid is the addition of: The pressure due to the liquid above the point. It is c
alled guage pressure & The atmospheric pressure acting on the surface of the liq
uid. Thus total pressure = pressure due to liquid + atmospheric pressure The tot
al pressure is called absolute pressure. THRUST DUE TO PRESSURE : Total thrust o
n a horizontal surface immersed in a liquid=(PRESSURE O N SURFACE) X (AREA O F S
URFACE) Total thrust on a vertical surface immersed in a liquid =(PRESSURE A T C
. G O F AREA) X (AREAOF SURFACE)
PART (B) HYDRODYNAMICS
1. 2. 3. 4. (i) (ii) (iii)
5.
The study of fluids in flow is called HYDRODYNAMICS. VELOCITY-FIELD : It is that
space, where at every point in that space, there is a definite velocity. Then t
he space, where a fluid is in flow is a VELOCITY - FIELD. FLOW-LINE : In a veloc
ity field is an imaginary line in that space, where the tangent to the line at a
ny point on the line gives the direction ofthe velocity at that point. A flow li
ne is also called a VELOCITY - LINE or a
STREAM-LINE .
TYPES OF FLOW OF A FLUID : Then the flow of a fluid can be classified as : A STR
EAM-LINE FLOW , the stream lines in the flow space remains steady as time progre
sses. A TRUBULENT-FLOW , the stream lines in the flow space shift their position
s as time progresses. In a STREAM-LINE FLOW , a group of stream lines form a tub
ular volume of the flow space, the surface of which is tangential to the stream
lines, forming the lateral boundary of that tubular volume. Such a tubular volum
e in the flow space is a TUBE O F FLOW. A steady state flow is the flow in which
the fluid properties at any point in the velocity field do not change with time
.
EQUATION O F CONTINUITY :
Equation of continuity states that for a steady state flow of a fluid in a pipe,
the rate of mass flow across any cross section is constant . dM —— = p AV = constan
t . dt If the fluid is incompressible density is constant at all points, hence,
equation of continuity is AV = constant .
foBansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[10]
6.
BERNOULLI'S EQUATION : Consider a tube of flow in the space of the stream line f
low of a fluid, in a uniform gravitational
Then :
P
p
1 1
V
P
2
2 2
V
p
2
2
P V Generalising and removing suffixes —i——+gz - constant . P 2 This equation is calle
d BERNOULLI 'S EQUATION for steady, non-viscous and incompressiblefluidflow.
Su rface Tens ion : Surface tension of a liquid is the normal force acting per u
nit length on either side of an imaginary line drawn thefreesurface ofa liquid.
The direction ofthis force is perpendicular to the line and tangential to thefre
esurface ofliquid. F i Note: The surface tension of a liquid varies with tempera
ture as well as dissolved impurities, etc. When soap mixed with water, the surfa
ce tension ofwater decrease.
T =
I.
SURFACE
TENSION
2. 3.
Surface Energy : If the area of the liquid surface has to be increased work has
to be done against the force of surface tension. The work done to form afilmis s
tored as potential energy in the surface. W = T AA Excess Pressure: Excess press
ure inside a liquid drop 2T Ap= — r For a soap bubble in air, there are two surfac
es, and so, 2T _ 4T Ap = 2 r r Capillarity : Water in the capillary rises to a h
eight 2T :: h= rgp 2T cosG R where r is the radius of meniscus, and r = where 9
is the angle of contact and thus h = ^
:
fo Bansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[10]
VISCOSITY
If a glass plate in contact with a water column of height h is moved with consta
nt velocity v. Forces of viscosity appear between the solid surface and the laye
r in contact. where h is a consant called coefficient ofviscosity, its cgs unit
is poise. Dimension is ML'T . The SI units ofviscosity equal to 10 poise.
-1
When a sphere of radius r moves with a velocity v through a fluid of viscosity h
, the viscous force opposing the motion ofthe sphere is F = 6;tr|rv If for a sph
ere viscous force become equal to the net weight acing downward, the velocity of
the body become constant and is known as terminal velocity. 4 , 67tr|rv = - Tcr
~(p- a)g
T
Stake's Law and Terminal Velocity
^Bansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
15]
A spherical tank of 1.2m radius is half filled with oil of relative density 0.8.
Ifthe tank is given a horizontal acceleration of 10 m/s . Calculate the inclina
tion ofthe oil surface to horizontal and maximum pressure on the tank. h Q.2 A p
iston ofmassM = 3kg and radius R=4cm has a hole into which a thin pipe mm Mm ofr
adius r = 1 cm is inserted. The piston can enter a cylinder tightly and without
friction, and initially it is at the bottom of the cylinder. 750gm of water is n
ow H poured into the pipe so that the piston & pipe are lifted up as shown. Find
the height H ofwater in the cylinder and height h ofwater in the pipe. Q.3 A re
ctangular vessel isfilledwith water & oil in equal proportion (by volume), the o
il being twice lighter than water. Show that the force on each wall of the vesse
l will be reduced by onefifthif the vessel is filled only with oil. (take into c
onsideration the fact that the oil is found at the top ofthe vessel). Q.4 A soli
d ball of density half that of water fallsfreelyunder gravityfroma height of 19.
6 m and then enter water. Upto what depth will the ball go? How much time will i
t take to come again to the water surface? Neglect air resistance & velocity eff
ects in water. Q. 5 Place a glass beaker, partiallyfilledwith water, in a sink.
The beaker has a mass 390 gm and an interior volume of 500cm . You now start tof
illthe sink with water and you find, by experiment, that if the beaker is less t
han half full, it willfloat;but if it is more than half full, it remains on the
bottom ofthe sink as the water rises to its rim. What is the density ofthe mater
ial ofwhich the beaker is made? Q. 6 Two spherical balls A and B made up of same
material having masses 2m and m are releasedfromrest. Ball B lies at a distance
h below the water surface while A is at a height of 2h above water surface in t
he same vertical line, at the instant they are released. (a) Obtain the position
where they collide. (b) If the bodies stick together due to collision, to what
maximum height above water surface does the combined mass rise? Specific gravity
of the material ofthe balls is 2/3. Neglect viscosity and loss due to splash. Q
. 7 Two very large open tanks A and F both contain the same liquid. A horizontal
pipe BCD, having a constriction at C leads out ofthe .-. bottom oftank A and a
vertical pipe E opens into the constriction at rs-.-i-.—. — —— ~ ~ — C and dips into the l
iquid in tank F. Assume streamline flow and no r fn>. ° } viscosity. Ifthe cross s
ection at C is one halfthat at D and if D is at a distance h, below the level of
liquid in A to what height h (in r terms of h, )will liquidrisein pipe E ? 8m Q
.8 For the system shown in thefigure,the cylinder on the left at L has a mass of
600kg and a cross sectional area of800 cm . The piston on the right, at S, has c
ross sectional area 25cm and negligible weight. 600kg If the apparatus isfilledw
ith oil.(p = 0.75 gm/cm ) Find the force F required to hold the system in equili
brium.
2 3
Q.l
EXERCISE # I
I
2
\
«r~"i
2
2
3
Q.9 (a) (b) (c)
A siphon has a uniform circular base of diameter ~j= cm with its crest V7t 1.8m
A1.8 m above water level as infigure.Find velocity of flow discharge rate ofthe
flow in m /sec. absolute pressure at the crest level A. [Use P = 10 N/m & g = 10
m/s ]
3 0 5 2 2
8
3.6m
^Bansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[12]
Q.10 A large tank isfilledwith two liquids of specific gravities 2a and c. Two h
oles are h,4 made on the wall ofthe tank as shown. Find the ratio ofthe distance
sfromO ofthe points on the ground where the jets fromholes A& B strike. h/2 Ml Q
.ll The horizontal pipe shown in the diagram has a cross sectional area of 40cm
at the wider position and 10cm at the narrow poriton. A liquid of 7 JT» V _ • 10cm 4
0cm specific gravity 1.6 isflowingin the pipe with volumeflowrate equal to 5 x 1
0 m /s. Find the difference in the heights h between the mercury hJ mercury colu
mn in the manometer tube. (p = 13.6 * 10 kg/m ) Q.12(a)A spherical tank of 1.2m
radius is half filled with oil of relative density 0.8 . Ifthe tank is given a h
orizontal acceleration of 10 m/s . Calculate the inclination ofthe oil surface t
o horizontal and maximum pressure on the tank. (b) The volume of an air bubble i
s doubled as it rises from the bottom of a lake to its surface. If the atmospher
ic pressure is H m ofmercury & the density of mercury is n times that of lake wa
ter. Find the depth of the lake. Q.13 A test tube of thin walls has some lead sh
ots in it at its bottom and the system floats vertically in water, sinking by a
length 1= 10cm. A liquid of density less than that of water, is poured into the
tube till the levels inside and outside the tube are even. If the tube now sinks
to a length / =40cm, the specific gravity ofthe liquid is . Kerosene
W 2 2
2 2
-3
3
mg
3
3
A
2
o
s=0.8
Q.14 For the arrangement shown in thefigurethe value ofh ifthe pressure differen
ce between the vessel Aand B is 3 kN/m is
2
Q.15 An open cubical tank completelyfilledwith water is kept on a horizontal sur
face. Its acceleration is then slowly increased to 2m/s as shown in the Fig. The
side of the tank is lm. Find the mass ofwater that would spill out ofthe tank.
2
1m
•2m/s
2
lm Q.16 In air an object weighs 15N, when immersed completely in water the same
object weighs 12N. When immersed in another liquid completely, it weighs 13N. Fi
nd (a) the specific gravity of the obj ect and (b) the specific gravity ofthe ot
her liquid. Q.17 Compute the work which must be performed to slowly pump the wat
er put of a hemispherical reservoir of radius R - 0.6 m. Q.18 Block Ainfigurehan
gs by a cord from spring balance D and is submerged in a liquid C contained in a
beaker B. The mass of the beaker is 1 kg & the mass of theliquidis 1.5kg. The b
alance Dreads 2.5 kg & balance E reads 7.5kg.. The volume ofblock Ais 0.003 m .
(i) What is the density ofblock & the liquid, (ii) What will each balance read i
fblock is pulled out of the liquid.
3
Q.19 A solid cube, with faces either vertical or horizontal, isfloatingin a liqu
id of density 6 g/cc. It has two third ofits volume submerged. If enough water i
s addedfromthe top so as to completely cover the cube, whatfractionof its volume
will remain immersed inthe liquid?
foBansalClasses
Fluid Mechanics
[10]
Q.20 A ball is given velocity v (greater than the terminal velocity v ) in downw
ard direction inside a highly viscous liquid placed inside a large container. Th
e height ofliquid in the container is H. The ball attains the terminal velocity
just before striking at the bottom of the container. Draw graph between velocity
ofthe ball and distance moved by the ball before getting terminal velocity.
0 T 2 2
XT
Q.21 Two arms of a U-tube have unequal diameters d, = 1.0 mm and d = 1.0 cm. Ifw
ater (surface tension 7 x 10~ N/m) is poured into the tube held in the vertical
position,findthe difference of level ofwater in the U-tube. Assume the angle ofc
ontact to be zero. Q.22 A spherical ball of radius 1 x 10" m and density 10 kg/m
falls freely under gravity through a distance h before entering a tank of water
. If after entering the water the velocity of the ball does not change, find h.
The viscosity of water is 9.8 x 10 N-s/m .
4 4 3 -6 2
Q. 23 Calculate the rate of flow of glycerine of density 1.25 x 10 kg/m through
the conical section of a pipe if the radii of its ends are 0. lm & 0.04m and the
pressure drop across its length is 10N/m .
3 3 2
Q. 24 The tank infigdischarges water at constant rate for all water levels above
the air inlet R. The height above datum to which water would rise in the manome
ter tubes M and N respectively are & Q.25 A uniform cylindrical block of length
/ density d, and area of cross section A floats in a liquid of density d contain
ed in a vessel (d >d ). The bottom of the cylinder just rests on a spring of con
stant k. The other end ofthe spring is fixed to the bottom ofthe vessel. The wei
ght that may be placed on top ofthe cylinder such that the cylinder is just subm
erged in the liquid is
2 2 1
Open io atmosphere
40cm 20cm
11
Q.26 Find the speed ofrotation of 1 m diameter tank, initially full ofwater such
that water surface makes an angle of 45° with the horizontal at a radius of 30 cm
. What is the slope ofthe surface at the wall ofthe tank. Q. 27 A vertical unifo
rm U tube open at both ends contains mercury. Water is poured in one limb until
the level of mercury is depressed 2cm in that limb. What is the length ofwater c
olumn when this happens. Q. 28 Apiece of copper having an internal cavity weigh
264gm in air and 22 lgm in water. Find the volume of cavity. Density of copper i
s 8.8 gm/cc. Q.29 A vessel contains oil density = 0. 8gm/cm . A homogeneous sphe
re floats with halfits volume immersed in mercury and the other half in oil. The
density ofthe material ofthe sphere in gm/cm is Q.30 An expansible balloon fill
ed with air floats on the surface of a lake with 2/3 of its volume submerged. Ho
w deep must it be sunk in the water so that it is just in equilibrium neither si
nking further nor rising ? It is assumed that the temperature of the water is co
nstant & that the height of the water barometer is 9 meters.
3 3
fo Bansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[10]
EXERCISE # II
Q.l
Q.2 (a) (b) (c) Q.3
A solid block ofvolume V=10~ m and density d=800kg/m is tied to one end of a str
ing, the other end ofwhich istiedto the bottom ofthe vessel. The vessel contains
2 immiscible liquids of densities p.^l 000kg/ m and p =15 00kg/m . The solid bl
ock is immersed with 2/5 th of its volume in the liquid of higher density & 3/5t
h in the liquid of lower density. The vessel is placed in an elevator which is m
oving up with an acceleration of a=g/2. Find the tension in the string. [g= 1 Om
/s ] An open rectangular tank 5m x 4m * 3 m high containing water upto a 3m heig
ht of 2m is accelerated horizontally along the longer side. "Wirier 2m Determine
the maximum acceleration that can be given without spilling the water. 5m Calcu
late the percentage ofwater split over, ifthis acceleration is increased by 20%.
If initially, the tank is closed at the top and is accelerated horizontally by
9m/s ,findthe gauge pressure at the bottom of thefrontand rear walls ofthe tank.
A level controller is shown inthefigure.It consists ofa thin circular plug of d
iameter 10cm and a cylindricalfloatof diameter 20cm tied together with a lightri
gidrod Float of length 10cm. The plugfitsin snugly in a drain hole at the bottom
of the tank which opens into atmosphere. As waterfillsup and the level reaches
height h, the 10cm plug opens. Findh. Determine the level ofwater in the tank wh
en the plug closes -plug again. Thefloathas a mass 3kg and the plug may be assum
ed as massless.
3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2
Q.4
A closed tube in the form of an equilateral triangle of side / contains equal vo
lumes of three liquids which do not mix and is placed vertically with its lowest
side horizontal. Find x in the figure if the densities of the liquids are in A.
P. A ship sailingfromsea into ariversinks X mm and on discharging the cargorises
Y mm. On proceeding again into sea the shiprisesby Z mm. Assuming ship sides to
be vertical at water line,findthe specific gravity of sea water. A conical vesse
l without a bottom stands on a table. Aliquid is poured with the vessel & as soo
n as the level reaches h, the pressure of the liquid raises the vessel. The radi
us of the base ofthe vessel is R and half angle of the cone is a and the weight
of the vessel is W. What is the density ofthe liquid ? As the arrangement shown
in thefigis released the rod of mass M moves down into the water. Friction is ne
gligible and the string is inextensible. Find the acceleration of the system w.r
.t. the distance moved by each mass. Find the time required to completely immers
e the rod into water if ™ _ P - P water M p density of rod water density of water
:
Q.5 Q.6
Q.7 (a) (b)
////J/// w M JL
Q. 8
The interface of two liquids of densities p and 2p respectively lies at the poin
t A ^ in a U tube at rest. The height of liquid column above A is 8 a/3 where AB
-a. The cross sectional area of the tube is S. With what angular velocity the tu
be must be whirled about a vertical axis at a distance 'a' such that the interfa
ce of the liquids shifts towards B by 2a/3.
^Bansal Classes
Fluid Mech an ics
[9]
Q.9
A closed cylindrical tank 2m high & 1 m in diameter contains 1.5 m of water. Whe
n the angular velocity is constant at 20.0 rad/s, how much of the bottom of the
tank is uncovered? (The cylinder is rotated about vertical axis of symmetry pass
ing through its length.)
o o
Q.10 A cylinder of height H isfilledwith water to a height h (h < H), & is place
d on a horizontal floor. Two small holes are punched at time t = 0 on the vertic
al line along the length of the cylinder, one at a height hj from the bottom & t
he other a depth hj below the level ofwater in the cylinder. Find bo the relatio
n between hj & hj such that the instantaneous waterjets emerging from the cylind
er from the two holes will hit the ground at the same point. Q.ll A cylindrical
tank with a height of h = lm isfilledwith water up to its rim. What time is requ
ired to empty the tank through an orifice in its bottom? The cross sectional are
a of the orifice is (l/400)th ofthe tank. Find the time required for the same am
ount ofwater to flow out of the tank ifthe water level in the tank is maintained
constant at a height of h = 1 m from the orifice. Q.12 A Conical funnel whose h
eight H=20cm isfilledwith water. The radius of the upper opening R - 12 cm. The
lower opening through which the water begins to flow out ofthe funnel has the ra
dius r=0.3cm. (a) In what time is the water level in the funnel lowered by 5 cm
? (b) When will the funnel be emptied ? 20cm . Q.13 A water clock used in ancien
t Greek is designed as a closed vessel with a small orifice O. The time is deter
mined according to the level ofthe water in the vessel. What should be the shape
of the vessel be for the time scale to be uniform. Find mathematical equation g
overning curve AOB.
Q.14 For the arrangement shown in thefigure.Find the time interval
80cm
after which the water jet ceases to cross the wall. Area of the tank = 0.5 m . A
rea of the orifice = 1 cm .
2 2 3 2
0.81 m
Q.15 A cylindrical tank having cross-sectional area A = 0.5 m isfilledwith two l
iquids of density p, = 900 kgm~ , to a height h=60cm as shown in the figure. A s
mall hole having area a = 5 cm is made in right vertical wall at a height y=20cm
from the bottom. Calculate h F*± C velocity of efflux. O © horizontal force F to ke
ep the cylinder in static equilibrium, ifit is placed on a smooth horizontal pla
ne, value of (iii) minimum and maximumm = 0.01.F to keep the cylinder at rest. T
he coefficient of friction between cylinder and the plane is velocity of the top
most layer ofthe liquid column and also the velocity ofthe boundary separating
the (iv) two liquids. base S 4000 Q.16 A cylindrical wooden float whosewood area
0,8=gf/cm cm & the altitude H = 50 cm drifts on the water surface. Specific weig
ht of d= . (a) What work must be performed to take the float out of the water ?
(b) Compute the work to be performed to submerge completely the float into the w
ater. Q.17 A10cm side cube weighing 5N is immersed in a liquid ofrelative densit
y 0.8 contained in a rectangular tank of cross sectional area 15cmx 15cm. If the
tank contained liquid to a height of 8cm before the immersion, determine the le
vels of the bottom of the cube and the liquid surface.
2 2 3
fo Bansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[10]
Q.18 A jug contains 15 glasses of orange juice. When you open the tap at the bot
tom it takes 12sectofilla glass with juice. If you leave the tap open, how long
will it take tofillthe remaining 14 glasses and thus empty the jug? Q.19 An inte
rstellar explorer discovers a remarkable planet made entirely of a uniform incom
pressiblefluidon density p. The radius ofthe planet is R and the acceleration of
gravity at its surface is g. What is the pressure at the center of the planet.
Q.20 A cylindrical rod oflength I=2m & density —floatsvertically in a liquid B of
density p as shown in Fig (a). A (a) Show that it performs SHM when pulled sligh
tly up & released & (b) (a) find its time period. Neglect change in liquid level
. (b) Find the time taken by the rod to completely immerse when releasedfromposi
tion shown in (b). Assume that it remains vertical throughout its motion, (take
g = % m/s )
2 2
Q.21 A uniform cylinder of a light material of length /=0.8m and radius of cross
section r = 0.01 m floats on a liquid of specific density p = 0.9 upto half its
length. The container of the liquid is a long cylindrical beaker of radius R =
0.04m. Another perfectly immiscible liquid of specific density o = 0.6 is now sl
owly poured all along the inner periphery of the beaker at a uniform rate of v =
0.25x 10 m /s and it spreads itself uniformly over the first liquid. Find the v
elocity with which the cylinder will rise or sink in the liquid.
4 3
Q.22 Auniform rod of length b capable oftuning about its end which is out ofwate
r, rests inclined to the vertical. Ifits specific gravity is 5/9,findthe length
immersed in water. Q.23 An open cylindrical vessel of large cross-section A cont
ains liquid upto a height H = 120cm. After an orifice of area A/1000 at a height
ofh = 20cm is opened. (a) Calculate liquid heights above orifice for which it f
alls on both ends of H horizontal plate. (b) How long will the liquid be falling
on the plate. Given: plate AB is of length 60cm. (g = 10m/s )
2 2 T
20cm
A
B
Q.24 A cylindrical vessel ofheightH = 4m&area of cross section 1 m filled with w
ater rests on a stand of same height H. It has a small plugged hole near its bot
tom. When plug is removed the liquid starts to come out. (a) Find the range ofth
e liquid as a function ofinstantaneous height ofthe liquid in the upper vessel (
b) Find the volume of liquid collected in a large initially empty vessel lying o
n floor at a distance Hfromthe stand. Assume that water falling on to thefloordo
es notflowinto the vessel. Q.25 A cube with a mass'm' completely wettable by wat
er floats on the surface of water. Each side of the cube is 'a'. What is the dis
tance h between the lower face of cube and the surface of the water if surface t
ension is S. Take density ofwater as p Take angle of contact in zero.
ZZ3
fo Bansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[10]
EXERCISE # III
Q.l A horizontal pipe line carries water in a streamline flow. At a point along
the pipe where the cross-sectional area is 10 cm , the water velocity is 1 ms" &
the pressure is 2000 Pa. The pressure of water at another point where the cross
sectional area is 5 cm , is pa. [ Density ofwater = 10 kg. mr ] [ JEE '94,2 ]
2 1 2 3 3
Q.2
A container oflarge uniform cross-sectional area A resting on a horizontal surfa
ce, holds two immiscible, non-viscous & incompressible liquids of densities d &
2d, each of height — as shown in figure. The lower density liquid is open to the a
tmosphere having pressure P .
0
(a)
A homogeneous solid cylinder oflength L fI < ) cross-sectional area A,is immerse
d such that it floats with its axis vertical at the liquid-liquid 5
(i) 00 (b) CO (ii) (iii) Q.3 (0 (ii) (iii) Q.4
interface with the length — in the denser liquid. Determine: The density D ofthe s
olid & The total pressure at the bottom of the container. The cylinder is remove
d and the original arrangement is restored. A tiny hole of area s (s « A) is punch
ed on the vertical side of the container at a height h j^fc < -^J . Determine Th
e initial speed of efflux of the liquid at the hole ; The horizontal distance x
travelled by the liquid initially & The height h at which the hold should be pun
ched so that the liquid travels the maximum distance x initially. Also calculate
x . [Neglect the air resistance in these calculations]. [JEE '95,10]
m m m
Q.5 (0 (ii)
A cylindrical tank 1 m in radius rests on a platform 5 m high. Initially the tan
k isfilledwith water to a height of 5m. A plug whose area is 1CT m is removed fr
om an orifice on the side ofthe tank at the bottom. Calculate the following: ini
tial speed with which the water flows from the orifice ; initial speed with whic
h the water strikes the ground & time taken to empty the tank to halfits origina
l value. [ REE '95,5] A thin rod of length L & area of cross-section S is pivote
d at its lowest point P inside a stationary, homogeneous & non-viscous liquid (F
igure). The rod is free to rotate in a vertical plane about a horizontal axis pa
ssing through P. The density d, of the material of the rod is smaller than the e
ntity d ofthe liquid. The rod is displaced by a small angle 9 from its equilibri
um position and then released. Show that the motion of the rod is simple harmoni
c and determine its angular frequency in terms ofthe given parameters. [ JEE '96
, 5 ] A large open top container of negligible mass & uniform cross-sectional ar
ea A has a small hole of cross-sectional area A/100 in its side wall near the bo
ttom. The container is kept on a smooth horizontal floor and contains a liquid o
f density p and mass m.. Assuming that the liquid starts flowing out horizontall
y through the hole at t = 0, calculate the acceleration ofthe container and its
velocity when 75 % ofthe liquid has drained out. [ JEE 97 , 5 ]
4 2 2
^Bansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[12]
Q.6
A nonviscous liquid of constant density 1000 kg/m flows in a streamline motion a
long a tube of variable cross section. The tube is kept inclined in the vertical
plane as shown in the figure. The area of cross section of the tube at two poin
ts P and Q at heights of 2 meters and 5 meters are respectively 4 x 10 m and 8 x
10~ m . The velocity ofthe liquid at point P is 1 m/s. Find the work done per u
nit volume by the pressure and the gravity forces as the fluid flows from point
P to Q. [ JEE '97]
3 3 2 3 3
Q. 7
Water from a tap emerges vertically downwards with an initial speed of 1.0 ms" .
The cross-sectional area of the tap is 10~ m . Assume that the pressure is cons
tant throughout the stream ofwater, and that the flow is steady. The cross-secti
onal area of the stream 0.15m below the tap is [ JEE '98, 2 ] (B) 1.0 xlO" m (C)
5.0 x 10" m (D) 2.0 x l0" m (A) 5.0 x 10~ m
1 4 2 4 2 5 2 5 2 5 2
Q.8 Q.9
A wooden stick of length 1, and radius R and density p has a small metal piece o
f mass m (of negligible volume) attached to its one end. Find the minimum value
for the mass m (in terms of given parameters) that would make the stick float ve
rtically in equilibrium in a liquid of density a (>p). [ JEE '99,10] A large ope
n tank has two holes in the wall. One is a square hole of side L at a depth yfro
mthe top and the other is a circular hole of radius R at a depth 4yfromthe top.
When the tank is completely filled with water, the quantities ofwater flowing ou
t per secondfromboth holes are the same. Then, R is equal to: (A) (B)
2nL
(C)L
(D)
2it
[JEE 2000 (Scr.)] Q.10 A hemispherical portion of radius R is removed from the b
ottom of a cylinder of radius R. The volume ofthe remaining cylinder is V and it
s mass is M. It is suspended by a string in a liquid of density p where it stays
vertical. The upper surface of the cylinder is at a depth h below the liquid su
rface. The force on the bottom of the cylinder by the liquid is [JEE 2001 (Scr.)
] (A)Mg (B)Mg-vpg
(C) Mg + tz R h p g
2
(D) pg (V + 7iR h)
2
Q.ll A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in water as shown in
figure. The distances I and h are shown there. After some time the coin falls in
to the water. Then [JEE 2002 (Scr.)] (A) / decreases and h increases (B) I incre
ases and h decreases (C) both I and h increase (D) both / and h decrease
3
yCoin
Q.12 Auniform solid cylinder of density 0.8 gm/cm floats in equilibrium in a com
bination of two non mixing liquids A and b with its axis vertical. The densities
ofthe liquids A and B are 0.7 gm/cm and 1.2 g/cm , respectively. The height of
liquid Ais h = 1.2 cm. The length ofthe part of the cylinder immersed in liquid
B is h^ = 0.8 cm. (a) Find the toal force exerted by liquid Aon the cylinder. (b
) Find h, the length ofthe part of the cylinder in air. (c) The cylinder is depr
essed in such a way that its top surface is just below the upper surface ofliqui
d A and is then released. Find the acceleration of the cylinder immediately afte
r it is released. [JEE 2002]
3 3 A
fo Bansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[10]
Q.13 Consider a horizontally oriented syringe containing water located at a heig
ht of 1.25 m above the ground. The diameter ofthe plunger is 8 mm and the diamet
er of the nozzle is 2 mm. The plunger is pushed with a constant speed of 0.25 m/
s. Find the horizontal range of water stream on the ground. Take g = 10 m/s2. [J
EE 2004]
D=8MM
^
IP
d=2mm 1.25m
A\\m\\Tu\\\\\u\\»u\\\u'\
Q.14 A solid sphere of radius R is floating in a liquid of density p with half o
f its volume submerged. If the sphere is slightly pushed and released, it starts
performing simple harmonic motion. Find thefrequencyof these oscillations. [JEE
2004] Q.15 Water isfilledin a container upto height 3m. A small hole of area 'a
' is punched in the wall ofthe container a at a height 52.5 cmfromthe bottom. Th
e cross sectional area ofthe container is A. If — =0.1 then v is (where v is the v
elocity ofwater coming out ofthe hole) (D) 51.5 (A) 48 (B) 51 (C) 50 [JEE to2005
(Scr)]
z
Q.16 A U tube is rotated about one of it's limbs with an angular velocity a. Fin
d the difference in height H of the liquid (density p) level, where diameter oft
he tube d « L. [JEE 2005]
.
a
fo Bansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[10]
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE # I
Q
Q.l Q.4 Q.7 Q.9 Q.ll
45°,9600V2 (gauge)N/m 19.6 m, 4 sec hj = 3 hj 375 24 15.6cm
2
-
,
2
2m
11
Q.5 Q.8
3
2.79 gm/cc 37.5 N
3
Q.6
at the water surface, h/2 Q.10 V3:V2
(a) 6^2 m/s, (b)9.6V2 xlQ- M /sec, (c) 4.6 x 10 N/m
4
2
Q.12 (a)9600 ^ , (b) nH Q.13 0.75 Q.14 -0.5m„2.5 m Q.16 (a) 5, (b) 2/3 Q.17 101.8
Kgf-m
Q.15 100kg
3
5000 Q.18 (i) 2500 kg/m , —— kg/m , (ii) \ = 7.5 kg, f ^ = 2.5 kg
3
Q.19 3/5 Q.23 6.43 x 10^m /s
3
Q.20
|
Dist. moved H
Q.21 2.5 cm
Q.22 20.4 m + Ag
Q.24 20cm, 60cm Q.27 54.4 cm
Q.25
£(d -d )
2 x
V2
d
Q.26 co=
3
1 0
5 rad/s, t a n a = -
Q.28 13cc
Q.29 7.2gm/cm
Q.30 4.5m
EXERCISE # II
Q.l
Q 3
6N
2(3 + 7t) —li^— 0 2
2 6
3 + 71 -^"!^" 0
Q.2
4m/s , 10%, 0, 45kPa
2 1 9 5 Q 4 x = 1 / 3
Q.5
y-x+z
Q.6 Q.7 Q.9
W P 7th gtana(R-|htana) (M-m)gx (a) M + m j g - (M + m)L ^
v
7C L 2]l g M - m j
v
Q.8
18g 19a
80
%
rrr
Q.10 h ^ h j
Q.ll 80V5 sec, 40V5 sec
Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[15]
Q.12 (a)33.2s,(b) 64.6 s Q.13 y = 4xl0~ x Q.14 431 sec
3 4
Q.15 (i) 4m/s, (ii) F = 7.2N, (iii) F = 0, F = 52.2 N, (iv) both 4 x 10~ m/s
mm max 3
Q16
(a)
dHS
2 2
= 32 K g f - m , (b) - S H ( 1 - d) = 2
2 2
v,
Kgf-m
Q17
163
388
Q-"
" ^ T J T a
12Vl4
Q 1 9
pgR
2
Q.20 2 sec., 1 sec
Q.21
1/90TC
Q.22
b/3
3
Q.23 (a) 80cm, 5cm; (b) 300sec.
Q.24 2VhH, 3m
Q.25 h=
mg + 4sa Pw^ §
EXERCISE # III
Q.l 500 Pa 5 1 / 3 Q.2 (a)(i) P = - d, (ii) p=P + - (6H+L)dg ; (b)(i) v = J % H
- 4 h ) , (ii) = Vh(3H-4h) (iii) x = 7 H
0 x
Q.3 (i) 10 m/s, (ii) 14.1 m/s, (iii) 2.5 hr m
0
fd2~dl^ 2L I dl J
3 3
Q.5 (i) 0.2 m/s , (ii) Q.6 + 29625 J/m , - 30000 J/m Q.7 C Q.8 m = 7ir l (^pc -
p); if tilted then it's axis should become vertical. C.M. should be lower than c
entre of bouyancy. Q.9 A Q.10 D Q.ll D Q.12 (a) 0, (b) h = 0.25 cm, (c) a= g/6 (
upward)
2 min 2
Q.13 x = 2m
* 1 [37 Q.14 ^ = Q.15 C 271 V 2R
L© Q.16H= — — 2g
2 2
fo Bansal Classes
Fluid Mechanics
[10]
BANSAL
CLASSES
TARGET IIT JEE 2007 XI (PQRS & J)
WESTIMMM. QR FL UID MECHANICS
Time Limit: 2 Sitting Each of 90 minutes, duration approx.
Q. 1
There are 58 questions in this question bank.
QUESTION BANK ON FLUID MECHANICS
Q2
Two cubes of size 1.0m sides, one of relative density 0.60 and another of relati
ve density = 1.15 are connected by weightless wire and placed in a large tank of
water. Under equilibrium the lighter cube will project above the water surface t
o a height of (A) 50 cm (B) 25 cm (C)10cm (D) zero A rectangular tank is placed
on a horizontal ground and is filled with water to a height H above the base. A
small hole is made on one vertical side at a depth D below the level of the wate
r in the tank. The distance xfromthe bottom ofthe tank at which the water jetfro
mthe tank will hit the ground is (A) 2VD(H-D) (B) 2 VDH (C) 2VD(H7D)
2 -1
(D) | VDH
Q.3
Q4
Q.5
Abeaker isfilledin with water is accelerated a m/s in+x direction. The surface o
fwater shall make on angle (A) tan (a/g) backwards (B) tan (a/g) forwards (C) co
t (g/a) backwards (D) cot (g/a) forwards A jet ofwater with cross section of 6 c
m strikes a wall at an angle of 60° to the normal and rebounds elastically from th
e wall without losing energy. If the velocity of the water in the jet is 12 m/s,
the force acting on the wall is (A) 0.864 Nt (B) 86.4 Nt (C)72Nt (D)7.2Nt The v
ertical limbs of a U shaped tube arefilledwith a liquid of density p upto a heig
ht h on each side. The horizontal portion ofthe U tube having length 2h contains
a liquid of density 2p. The U tube is moved horizontally with an accelerator g/
2 parallel to the horizontal arm. The difference in heights in liquid levels in
the two vertical limbs, at steady state will be 2h 8h 4h (D) None of these (A) (
B) ( Q T
-1 -1 -1 2
Q.6
The cross sectional area of a horizontal tube increases along its length linearl
y, as we move in the direction of flow. The variation of pressure, as we move al
ong its length in the direction offlow (x-direction), is best depicted by which
ofthe following graphs (A)
(B)
2
(C)
2
(D)
2
Q.7
A cylindrical tank of height 1 m and cross section area A= 4000 cm is initially
empty when it is kept under a tap of cross sectional area 1 cm . Water starts fl
owing from the tap at t = 0, with a speed = 2 m/s. There is a small hole in the
base of the tank of cross-sectional area 0.5 cm . The variation of height of wat
er in tank (in meters) with time t is best depicted by (A)
(B)
(C)
Q.8
A bucket contains waterfilledupto a height = 15 cm. The bucket is tied to a rope
which is passed over africtionlesslight pulley and the other end ofthe rope is
tied to a weight of mass which is half ofthat of the (bucket+water). The water p
ressure above atmosphere pressure at the bottom is (A) 0.5 kPa (B)lkPa (C) 5 kPa
(D) None of these
% Bansal Classes
Question Bank on Fluid Mechanics
[2]
Q.9
A cubical box ofwine has a small spout located in one ofthe bottom corners. When
the box is full and placed on a level surface, opening the spout results in a f
low of wine with a initial speed of v (see figure). When the box is half empty,
someone tilts it at 45° so that the spout is at the lowest point (see figure). Whe
n the spout is opened the wine willflowout with a speed of •.(A) v (B)V /2 ' (Qvo/
V2 (D) v M Q.10 A cone ofradius R and height H, is hanging inside a liquid of de
nsity p by means of a string as shown in thefigure.The force, due to the liquid
acting on the slant surface ofthe cone is ,
0 0
mn
0
0
(A) prtgHR
2
(B) rcpHR
2
(C) ~ 7tpgHR
2
7TT77T7T77T7 TT (D) -TipgHR
2
Q.ll A cuboidal piece ofwood has dimensions a, b and c. Its relative density is
d. It isfloatingin a large body of water such that side a is vertical. It is pus
hed down a bit and released. The time period of SHM executed by it is : [be ( D
) 27T (C) 2tc (B) 2ti ^ da \'dg Q.12 Water is flowing steadily through a horizon
tal tube ofnonuniform cross-section. If the pressure ofwater is 4 x 10 N/m at a
point where cross-section is 0.02 m and velocity of flow is 2 m/s, what is press
ure at apoint where cross-section reduces to 0.01 m . (A) 1.4 x 10 N/m (B) 3,4 x
10 N/m (C) 2.4 x 10" N/m (D)noneofthese Q.13 A vertical cylindrical container o
f base area Aand upper cross-section A, area Aj making an angle 30° with the. hori
zontal is placed in an open rainy field as shown near another cylindrical contai
ner having same base area A. The ratio of rates of collection ofwater inthe two
containers A iimvnrfTii riffTTTrrTfnTr will be (D) None (A) 2/73 (B) 4/V3 (C)2 Q
.14 The area of cross-section of the wider tube shown in figure is 121cg 800 cm
. If a mass of 12 kg is placed on the massless piston, the difference in heights
h in the level ofwater in the two tubes is : (A) 10 cm (B) 6 cm (C) 15 cm (D)2c
m Q.15 A slender homogeneous rod of length 2L floats partly immersed in water, b
eing supported by a string fastened to one ofits ends, as shown. The specific gr
avity of the rod is 0.75. The length of rod that extends out ofwater is :
i 4 2 2 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 2
(A)L (B)-L (D) 3 (Q 4 L Q.16 Afluidcontainer is containing a liquid of density p
is accelerating upward with acceleration a along the inclined place ofinclinati
on a as shown. Then the angle of inclination 9 offree surface is: a + g sin a (A
) tan" (B) tan -l gcosa gcosa a-gsma (D) tan" a - g sin a (C) tan" g(l + cosa) g
(l-cosa)
1
L
% Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.17 A dumbbell is placed in water of density p. It is observed that by attachin
g a mass m to the rod, the dumbbell floats with the rod horizontal on the surfac
e of water and each sphere exactly half submerged as shown in the figure. The vo
lume of the mass m is negligible. The value of length I is d(V -3M) d(V -2M) (B)
2(V 3M) ( ) 2(V -2M) d(V -2M) d(V + 2M) (D) 2(V +3M) ( ) 2(V - 3M)
p
p
A
p
P
p
p
C
p
P
Q.18 Figure shows a three arm tube in which a liquid is filled upto levels of he
ight I. It is now rotated at an angular frequency co about an axis passing throu
gh arm B. The angular frequency co at which level of liquid in arm B becomes zer
o.
(B)
(C)
(D)
3
Q.19 Two bodies having volumes Y and 2V are suspended from the two arms of a com
mon balance and they are found to balance each other. If larger body is immersed
in oil (density dj = 0.9 gm/cm ) and the smaller body is immersed in an unknown
liquid, then the balance remain in equilibrium. The density of unknown liquid i
s given by: (A) 2.4 gm/cm (B) 1.8 gm/cm (C) 0.45 gm/cm (D) 2.7 gm/cm Q.20 A tube
is attached as shown in closed vessel containing water. The velocity of water c
oming out from a small hole is : 20cm (A) ^ m/s (B)2m/s (C) depends on pressure
of air inside vessel (D) None ofthese Q.21 Alarge tank is filled with water to a
height H. Asmall hole is made at the base ofthe tank. It takes Tj time to decre
ase the height of water to H/r|, (r| > 1) and it takes T time to take out the re
st of water. If Tj = T , then the value ofr\ is : (A) 2 (B) 3 (C)4 (D) V2 i Q.22
A container oflarge surface arpa isfilledwith liquid of density p. Acubical blo
ck of side edge a and m iss M is floating in it with four-fifth of its volume su
bmerged. If a coin ofmass m is placed gently on the top surface ofthe block is j
ust submerged. M is (A) 4m/5 (B)m/5 (C)4m (D)5m Q.23 The weight of an empty ball
oon on a spring balance is Wj. The weight becomes w when the balloon is filled w
ith air. Let the weight ofthe air itselfbe w .Neglect the thickness ofthe balloo
n when it isfilledwith air. Also neglect the difference in the densities of air
inside & outside the balloon. Then: (A) w w. (B) w Wj + w (C) w < Wj + w (D) w >
Wj Q.24 In the case ofa fluid, Bernoulli's theorem expresses the application of
the principle of conservation of : (A) linear momentum (B) energy (C)mass (D) an
gular momentum Q.25 Fountains usually seen in gardens are generated by a wide pi
pe with an enclosure at one end having many small holes. Consider one such fount
ain which is produced by a pipe of internal diameter 2 cm in which waterflowsat
a rate 3 ms~ . The enclosure has 100 holes each of diameter 0.05 cm. The velocit
y ofwater coming out ofthe holes ids (in ms ): (A) 0.48 (B) 96 (C) 24 (D)48
3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
:
2 :
2
2
!
-1
% Bansal Classes
[4]
Q.26 Water flows through afiictionlessduct with a cross-section varying as shown
in figure. Pressure p at points along the axis is represented by
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Q.27 A boy carries a fish in one hand and a bucket(not full) of water in the oth
er hand . If he places the fish in the bucket, the weight now carried by him (as
sume that water does not spill) : (A) is less than before (B) is more than befor
e (C) is the same as before (D) depends upon his speed Q.28 A cubical block ofwo
od ofedge 10cmandmass0.92kgfloatsonatankofwaterwithoilofrel. density0.6 to a dep
th of 4cm above water. When the block attains equilibrium with four ofits sides
edges vertical (A) 1 cm of it will be above the free surface of oil. (B) 5cm of
it will be under water. (C) 2cm ofit will be above the common surface of oil and
water. (D) 8cm of it will be under water. Q. 29 The spring balance Areads 2 kg
with a block m suspended from it. A balance B reads 5 kg when a beaker with liqu
id is put on the pan ofthe balance. The two balances are now so arranged that th
e hanging mass is inside the liquid in the beaker as shown in thefigurein this s
ituation: (A) the balance A will read more than 2 kg (B) the balance B will read
more than 5 .kg (C) the balance A will read less than 2 kg and B will read more
than 5 kg (D) the balances A and B will read 2 kg and 5 kg respectively. Q.30 A
n open cubical tank was initially fullyfilledwith water. When the tank was accel
erated on a horizontal plane along one ofits side it was found that one third of
volume ofwater spilled out. The acceleration was (A) g/3 (B) 2g/3 (C) 3g/2 (D)No
ne Q.31 Acork of density 0.5gcm floats on a calm swimming pool. The fraction oft
he cork's volume which is under water is (A) 0% (B) 25% (C)10% (D) 50% Q.32 A cy
lindrical vesselfilledwith water upto the height H becomes empty in time t due t
o a small hole at the bottom of the vessel. Ifwater isfilledto a height 4H it wi
llflowout in time (A) to (B)4t (C)8t (D)2t Q.33 Acylindrical vessel open at the
top is 20cm high and 1 Ocmin diameter. A circular hole whose cross-sectional are
a 1 cm is cut at the centre ofthe bottom ofthe vessel. Waterflowsfroma tube abov
e it into the vessel at the rate 100 cm s"'. The height ofwater in the vessel un
der steady state is (Take g=1000 cms ) (A) 20 cm (B) 15 cm (C)10cm (D) 5 cm
-3 0 0 0 0 2 3 -2
Q.34 A fire hydrant delivers water of density p at a volume rate L. The water tr
avels /-— vertically upward through the hydrant and then does 90° turn to emerge hor
izontally at speed V. The pipe and nozzle have uniform crosssection throughout.
The force exerted by the water on the corner ofthe hydrant is (A)pVL (B) zero (C
)2pVL (D)V2 VL
P
v
% Bansal Classes
[5]
Q.35 Avertical tank, open at the top, isfilledwith a liquid and rests on a smoot
h horizontal surface. A small hole is opened at the centre of one side ofthe tan
k. The area of cross-section ofthe tank is N times the area of the hole, where N
is a large number. Neglect mass ofthe tank itself. The initial acceleration oft
he tank is Q.36 A body of density p' is droppedfromrest at a height h into a lak
e of density p, where p > p'. Neglecting all dissipative forces, calculate the m
aximum depth to which the body sinks before returning to float on the surface. (
A) A (B, V (C) J ^ P-P p P-P P-P Q.37 A Newtonianfluidfillsthe clearance between
a shaft and a sleeve. When aforce of800N is applied to the shaft, parallel to t
he sleev,e, the shaft attains a speed of 1.5 cm/sec. If a force of 2.4 kN is app
lied instead, the shaft would move with a speed of (A) 1.5 cm/sec (B) 13.5 cm/se
c (C) 4.5 cm/sec (D) None Q.38 A solid metallic sphere ofradius r is allowed to
fallfreelythrough air. Ifthefrictionalresistance due to air is proportional to t
he cross-sectional area and to the square of the velocity, then the terminal vel
ocity of the sphere is proportional to which of the following? (A) r (B)r (C)r (
D)r Q.39 Two water pipes P and Q having diameters 2 x 10" m and 4x10" m, respect
ively, are j oined in series with the main supply line ofwater. The velocity ofw
aterflowingin pipe P is (A) 4 times that of Q (B) 2 times that of Q (C) 1/2 time
s of that of Q (D) 1/4 times that of Q Q. 40 Waterflowsinto a cylindrical vessel
oflarge cross-sectional area at a rate of 10~ m /s. Itflowsoutfroma hole of are
a 10^ m , which has been punched through the base. How high does the water rise
in the vessel? (A) 0.075 m (B) 0.051m (C) 0.031m (D) 0.025 m Q.41 Two cyllinders
of same cross-section and length L but made of two materi al of densities d j a
nd d are cemented together to form a cylinder oflength 2L, The combinationfloats
in a liquid of density d with a length L/2 above the surface of the liquid. If d
j > d then:
( D ) 2 3/2 1/2 2 2 4 3 2 2 2
(A) dj > d
(B)|>d
1
(C) - > d ,
4
(D) d < d j
Q.42 There is a horizontalfilmof soap solution. On it a thread is placed in the
form of a loop. Thefilmis pierced inside the loop and the thread becomes a circu
lar loop of radius R. If the surface tension of the loop be T, then what will be
the tension in the thread? (A) 7cR /T (b) TIR T (C) 2TTRT (D)2RT Q.43 S ome liq
uid isfilledin a cylindrical vessel ofradius R. Let F j be the force applied by
the liquid on the bottom ofthe cylinder. Now the same liquid is poured into a ve
ssel ofuniform square crss-section of side R. Let F be the force applied by the
liquid on the bottom of this new vessel. Then.
2
2
2
(A) Fj = 7tF. (6) ^ = 571" '' (C) F, = VttF (D)F,=F Q. 44 A tank isfilledup to a
height 2H with a liquid and is placedon a platform ofheight Hfromthe ground. Th
e distance xfromthe ground where a small hole is punched to get the maximum rang
e R is: (A)H (B) 1.25 H (C) 1.5 H (D)2H
2
2
2
% Bansal Classes
[6]
Q.45 Acontainer, whose bottom has round holes with diameter 0.1 mm isfilledwith
water. Themaximum height in cm upto which water can befilledwithout leakage will
be what? Surface tension = 75 x 10 N/m and g = 10 m/s : (A) 20 cm (B) 40 cm (C)
30cm (D)60cm Q.46 In a cylindrical vessel containing liquid of density p, there
are two holes in the side walls at heights ofhj and h respectively such that the
range of efflux at the bottom ofthe vessel is same. The height of a hole, for w
hich the range of efflux would be maximum, will be ( B ^ + hj (A) - hj h -h, (C)
(D) h +hj
3 2 2 0 2
Q.47 Apiece of steel has a weight Win air, Wj when completely immersed in water
and W when completely immersed in an unknown liquid. The relative density (speci
fic gravity)ofliquid is: W-W, w -w W, - w W-Wo (A) W - W , (C) W-W, (D) w - w (B
) W -T , wW Q.48 Alarge tank isfilledwith water (density = 10 kg/m ). Asmall hol
e is made at • 10m a depth 10 m below water surface. The range ofwater issuing out
ofthe hole is Ron ground. What extra pressure must be applied on the water surf
ace so that the range becomes 2R (take 1 atm = 10 Pa and g = 10 m/s ): (A) 9 atm
(B) 4 atm (C) 5 atm (D) 3 atm R Q.49 Two drops of same radius are falling throu
gh air with steady velocity of v cm/s. If the two drops coalesce, what would be
the terminal velocity? (A) 4 v (C)2v (D) 64 v (B) (4) 1/3, Q.50 A ball ofrelativ
e density 0.8 falls into waterfroma height of 2m. The depth to which the ball wi
ll sink is (neglect viscous forces): (A) 8 m (B)2m (C)6m (D)4m i Q.51 A liquid o
f mass 1 kg isfilledin a flask as shown infigure.The force exerted by the flask
on the liquid is (g = 10 m/s ): (A) ION (B) greater than ION (C) less than 1 ON
(D)zero
2
2
;
2
2
3
3
5
2
2
Q.52 Figure shows a siphon. Choose the wrong statement: (A) Siphon works when h
> 0 (B) Pressure at point 2 is P = P - pgh h=0 (C) Pressure at point 3 is P (D)
None of the above X 1(P = atmospheric pressure) Q.53 If two soap bubbles of diff
erent radii are connected by a tube, (A) air flowsfromthe bigger bubble to the s
maller bubble till the sizes become equal (B) air flowsfrombigger bubble to the
smaller bubble till the sizes are interchanged (C) airflowsfromthe smaller bubbl
e to the bigger (D) there is noflowof air. i
3 2 0 3 0 0
% Bansal Classes
m
Q.54 A cubical block of side 'a' and density 'p' slides over a fixed inclined pl
ane with constant velocity V . There is a thinfilmof viscousfluidofthickness't'
between the plane and the block. Then the coefficient ofviscosity ofthe thinfilm
will be \B=37° 3pagt pagt 4pagt (D) none ofthese (A) 5v (C) v (B) 5v Q.55 Which of
the following graphs best represents the motion of a raindrop?
(A) (B)
5 2
(C)
CD)
Q.56 Two soap bubbles with radii r and (r > r ) come in contact. Their common su
rface has a radius of curvature r. r, + r, (C)r (D)r = ^ 7 (B)r = l 2 r,+r <A)r-
V i ~h Q.57 A spherical ball of density p and radius 0.003m is dropped into a tu
be containing a viscousfluidfilledup to the 0 cm mark as shown in the figure. Vi
scosity of •0 cm thefluid= 1.260 N.m' and its density p = p/2 = 1260 kg.nr . Assum
e the ball -10 cm reaches a terminal speed by the 10 cm mark. The time taken by
the ball to traverse the distance between the 10 cm and 20 cm mark is -20 cm (A)
500 ps (B) 50 ms (C)0.5s (D) 5 s (g = acceleration due to gravity = 10 ms ) Q.5
8 A sphere is dropped under gravity through afluidofviscosity r). Ifthe average
acceleration is half ofthe initial acceleration, the time to attain the terminal
velocity is (p = density of sphere ; r = radius) 4pr 9pr 4pr 9pr (A) 9rj (B) 4r
\ (C) 9rj (D) 4r|
r r r 2 2 2 L 3 -2
Q.l Q.6 Q.ll Q.16 Q.21 Q.26 Q.31 Q.36 Q.41 Q.46 Q.51 Q.56
B A D B C A D C A D A B
Q2 Q.7 Q.12 Q.17 Q.22 Q27 Q.32 Q.37 Q.42 Q.47 Q.52 Q.57
A C B B C C D C D B D D
ANSWER KEY
Q.3 Q.8 Q.13 Q.18 Q.23 Q.28 Q.33 Q.38 Q.43 Q.48 Q.53 Q.58 AC B C C AC C,D D D D
D C A
Q.4 Q.9 Q.14 Q.19 Q.24 Q.29 Q.34 Q.39 Q.44 Q.49 Q.54
B D C B B B,C D A C B A
Q.5 Q.10 Q.15 Q.20 Q.25 Q.30 Q.35 Q.40 Q.45 Q.50 Q.55
B D A B D B C B C A C
4SBansal Classes
[8]
XII (ALL)
QIMIMMMMMM
i GEOMETRICAL OPTICS
SHORT
QUESTIONS
Q.l Q.2 Q.3
The po sition ofthe optical axis N, N , the path of ray AB incident upon a lens
A. and the refracted ray BC are known (figure). Find by construction the positio
n of the main foci of the lens. N,
2
N,
Point S' is the image of a point source of light S in a spherical mirror whose o
ptical axis is N N (figure). Find by construction the position of the centre of
N, curvature and its focus.
} 2
2
•S' N
2
The positions of optical axis N j N of a spherical mirror, the source and the .B
image are known (figure). Find by construction the positions ofthe centre ofthe
.A curvature, its focus and the pole for the cases: N, (b) B - source, A - imag
e (a) A-source, B-image; The layered lens shown infigureis made oftwo kinds ofgl
ass. What image will be produced by this lens with a point source arranged on th
e optical axis? Disregard the reflection oflight on the boundary between layers.
A ray of light falls on a convex mirror, as shown infigure.Trace the path ofthe
ray further.
N,
Q. 4 Q.5
Q.6
A double convex lens of focal length/lies between a source oflight and a screen.
The distance between the source oflight and the screen is less than 4f. It is k
nown that in these conditions it is not possible to obtain an image of the sourc
e on the screen, whatever the position ofthe lens. How can an image ofthe source
be obtained on the screen with quite simple means and without moving either len
s or screen? Infigureis depicted the path of a ray oflight BC after refraction i
n a double convex lens L of principal focus F and of principal axis OO. Find by
construction the path of this ray before reaching the lens.
Q.7
Q.8
Where should a point source oflight lie along the principal axis of a converging
lens so that it is impossible to see the source and its image simultaneouslyfro
many point? Q.9 A disk whose plane surface are parallel is cut as shown infigure
(i), then the lenses so obtained are moved apart. What will happen to a beam of
parallel rays falling on to the resulting system: figure (iii) figure (ii) 8 (a)
from the side ofthe converging lens (figure ii), (b) form the side ofthe diverg
ing lens (figure iii)? Consider the cases when the distance between the lenses i
s less than the focal length and when it is greater than the focal length. Q.10
What will happen if a plane mirror is placed in the path ofa converging beam ? Q
.ll Can a prism transmit rays at all angles of incidence?
fl ure
<!I Bansal Classes
Question Bank on Geometrical Optics
[13]
Q.12 Why is it difficult to shoot afishswimming in water ? Q.13 A light ray pass
es through the interface between two transparent media. Under what condition wil
l the angle of refraction be equal to the angle of incidence ? Q.14 In what case
will a bi-convex lens be diverging ? Q.15 Is the width ofa beam increased or de
creased in goingfromair to water? Q.16 Ordinary paper becomes transparent when i
t is oiled. Explain. Q.17 If there are scratches on the lens of a camera, they d
o not appear on a photograph taken with the camera. Explain. Do the scratches af
fect the photograph at all? Q.18 Concave mirrors are used as shaving mirrors. Wh
y? Should such mirrors have short or long focal lengths? Q.19 A sign painted on
a store window is reversed when viewedfrominside the store. If a person inside t
he store views the reversed sign in a plane mirror, does the sign appear as it w
ould when viewed from outside the store? (Try it by writing some letters on a tr
ansparent sheet of paper and then holding the back side ofthe paper up to a mirr
or.) Explain. Q.20 If you stand between two parallel plane mirrors, you see an i
nfinite number of images of yourself. This occurs because an image in one mirror
is reflected in the other mirror to produce another image, which is then re-ref
lected, and so forth. The multiple images are equally spaced. Suppose that you a
re facing a convex mirror, with a plane mirror behind you. Describe what you wou
ld see and comment about the spacing between any multiple images. Explain your r
easoning. Q.21 In the figure, suppose that a layer of oil were added on top of t
he water. The angle 9 at which the incident light travels through the air remain
s the same. Assuming that light still enters the water, does the angle of refrac
tion at which it does so change because of the presence of the oil? Explain.
{
Q. 22 A beam ofblue light is propagating in glass. When the light reaches the bo
undary between the glass and the surrounding air, the beam is totally reflected
back into the glass. However, red light with the same angle ofincidence is not t
otally reflected, and some ofthe light is refracted into the air. Why do these t
wo colors behave differently? Q.23 To a swimmer under water, objects look blurre
d and out of focus. However, when the swimmer wears goggles that keep the water
awayfromthe eyes, the objects appear sharp and in focus. Why do goggles improve
a swimmer's underwater vision?
<!I Bansal Classes
[13]
Q.l
ONLY ONE OPTION IS Take approx. 2 minutes for answering each question.
CORRECT.
Q.2
Q.3
£
Q.4
Q.5 Q.6 Q.7
Q.8
A person runs with a speed u towards a bicycle moving away from him with speed v
. The person approaches his image in the plane mirror fixed at the rear of bicyc
le with a speed of (A) u - v (B) u - 2v (C) 2u - v (D)2(u-v) original emerging A
beam oflight strikes one mirror of a right angle mirror assembly at an angle of
light beam incidence 45° as shown in thefigure.The right angle mirror assembly is
rotated such that the angle of incidence becomes 60°. Which ofthe following state
ment is correct about the emerging light beam. (A) It will move through an angle
of 15° w.r.t. the original emerging beam. (B) It will move through an angle of 30°
w.r.t. the original emerging beam. (C) It will move through an angle 45° w.r.t. th
e original beam. (D) It will emerge parallel to the original emerging beam. . Li
Two mirrors labelled Lj for left mirror and L for right mirror in the figure ar
e parallel to each other and 3.0 m apart. Aperson standing 1.0 mfromthe right mi
rror (L ) looks into this mirror and sees a series ofimages. The second nearest
image seen in the right mirror is situated at a distance: (A) 2.0 mfromthe perso
n (B) 4.0 m from the person 2m Tm (C) 6.0 mfromthe per son (D) 8.0 m from the pe
rson. The reflection surface of a plane mirror is vertical. Aparticle is project
ed in a vertical plane which is also perpendicular to the mirror. The initial ve
locity ofthe particle is 10 m/s and the angle ofprojection is 60°. The point ofpro
jection is at a distance 5 mfromthe mirror. The particle moves towards the mirro
r. Just before the particle touches the mirror the velocity of approach ofthe pa
rticle and its image is: (B) 5 m/s (A) 10 m/s (C) 10V3 m/s (D) 5V3 m/s A boy of
height 1.5 m with his eye level at 1.4 m stands before a plane mirror of length
0.75m fixed on the wall. The height ofthe lower edge ofthe mirror above thefloor
is 0.8 m. Then; (A) the boy will see his full image (B) the boy cannot see his h
air (C) the boy cannot see his feet (D) the boy cannot see neither his hair nor
his feet. Two plane mirrors are inclined at 70°. Aray incident on one mirror at an
gle 9 after reflection falls on the second mirror and is reflected from there pa
rallel to thefirstmirror, 9 is : (A) 50° (B) 45° (C) 30° (D)55° Two plane mirror AB and
AC are inclined at an angle 9 = 20°. Aray oflight startingfrompoint P is incident
at point Q on the mirroe AB, then at R on mirror AC and again on S on AB finally
the ray ST goes parallel to mirror Ac. The angle iwhich the ray makes with the
normal at point Q on mirror AB is llll11II C (A) 20° (B) 30° (D) 60° (C) 40° Two plane m
irrors oflength L are separated by distance L and a man Mj is standing M, at dis
tance L from the connecting line of mirrors as shown infigure.A man Mj is walkin
g is a straight line at distance 2 L parallel to mirrors at speed u, then man IV
^ M, at O will be able to see image of Mj for total time: O9L 6L 3L 4L (D) u (C)
u (A) u (B) u
2 2
2L
<!I Bansal Classes
[13]
Q.9 Q.10
Ci!
Q.12 Q.13
Q.14 Q.15 Q 16 Q.17
£
<!I Bansal Classes
Two plane mirrors are placed parallel to each other at a distance L apart. Apoin
t object O is placed between them, at a distance L / 3 from one mirror. Both mir
rors form multiple images. The distance between any two images cannot be (A) 3L/
2 (B)2L/3 , (C)2L (D)None Two blocks each ofmass m lie on a smooth table. They a
re attached to two other masses as shown in the figure. The pulleys and strings
are light. An object O is C kept at rest on the table. The sides AB & CD ofthe t
wo blocks are made reflecting. isr nAolm The acceleration oftwo images formed in
those two reflecting surfaces w.r.t. each other is: (A) 5g / 6 (B)5g/3 (C)g/3 (
D)17g/6^ As shown in the figure a particle is placed at 0 in front of a plane mi
rror M. A man at P can move along path PY and PY' then which of the following is
true (A) For all point on P Y man can see the image of O (B) For all point on P
Y' man can see the image, but for no point on P Y he can L see the image of O (
C) For all point on PY' he can see the image but on PY he can see the image only
upto distance d. (D) He can see the image only upto a distance d on either side
of P. A man of height 'h' is walkingawayfroma street lamp with a constant speed
V . The height ofthe street lamp is 3h. The rate at which of the length ofthe m
an's shadow is increasing when he is at a distance 1 Oh from the base of the str
eet lamp is: (A) v/2 (B) v/3 (C)2v (D)v/6 A two eyed man is looking at the junct
ion oftwo large mutually perpendicular mirrorsfroma far off distance. Assume no
reflection to occur from the edge. Then if both the eyes are open (A) The eye 1
of man can see image of both eye 1 and eye 2. (B) The eye 1 can see image of eye
1 only and eye 2 see image of eye 2 only. (C) The eye 1 can see image of eye 2
only and eye 2 can see image of eye one only. M i r r o r ( l ) (D) All the abov
e statements are false. In the diagram shown, all the velocities are given with
respect to earth. What is the relative velocity of the image in mirror (1) with
respect to the image in the mirror (2)? The mirror (1) forms an angle (3 with th
e vertical. (A)2Vsin2P (B)2Vsinp ' (C)2V/sin2p (D)none Mirror(2) Apoint object i
s kept infrontof a plane mirror. The plane mirror is doing SHM of amplitude 2 cm
. The plane mirror moves along the x-axis and x-axis is normal to the mirror. Th
e amplitude of the mirror is such that the object is always infront of the mirro
r. The amplitude of SHM of the image is (A) zero (B)2cm (C)4cm (D) 1 cm c. A poi
nt source oflight S is placed infrontoftwo large mirrors as shown. Which of the
following observers will see only one image of S? (A) only A (B)onlyC A. mm^muuu
uu (C) Both A and C (D) Both B and C LM RM Two mirrors, labeled LM for left mirr
or and RM for right mirror in the adjacent figure, are parallel to each other an
d 3.0 m apart. Aperson standing 1.0 m from the right mirror (RM) looks into this
mirror and sees a series ofimages. How far from the person is the second closes
t image seen in the right mirror (RM)? (A) 10.0 m (B)4.0m 2m lm (C) 6.0 m ' (D)
8.0 m
Question Bank on Geometrical Optics [13]
A
Q.18 Two mirrors AB and CD are arranged along two parallel lines. The maximum nu
mber of | images of obj ect O that can be seen by any observer is B .0 (A) One (
B)Two (C)Four (D) Infinite Q.19 A concave mirror is used to form image of the Su
n on a white screen. If the lower half of the mirror ~ were covered with an opaq
ue card, the effect on the image on the screen would be YJ, , ,• <> (A) negligible
AW a-fiii Cv^GQe eJ comJc(*Mo ego c oOken er^t r^ t ^ (B) to make the image les
s bright than before (C) to make the upper half of the image disappear (D) to ma
ke the lower half of the image disappear Q.20 Aconvex mirror of focal length 'f
is placed at the origin with its reflecting surface towards the negative x-axis.
Choose the correct graphs between V and 'u' for u < 0.
D
i
(D)
fo
o Q.21 In the figure shown, the image of a real object is formed at point I. AB
is the principal axis ofthe mirror. The mirror must be: T2 l I 1 (A) concave & p
laced towards right I (B) concave & placed towards left of I (C) convex and plac
ed towards right of I (D) convex & placed towards left of I. Q.22 An infinitely
long rod lies along the axis of a concave mirror of focal length f. The near end
ofthe rod is at a distance u > f from the mirror. Its image will have a length
(A) u - f (D) Uuf f (B) uuff (C) U + f ~/ + Q.23 Apoint source is situated at a
distance x < ffromthe pole ofthe concave mirror of focal length f. At time t = 0
, the point source starts moving awayfromthe mirror with constant velocity. Whic
h ofthe graphs below represents best, variation ofimage distance j v | with the
distance x between the pole ofmirror and the source. |V| M M
It
d
>d
V
& Bansal Classes
Xo f Xo f Xo f Xo f Q.24 Apoint object is between the Pole and Focus of a concav
e mirror, and moving away from the mirror with a constant speed. Then, the veloc
ity of the image is: (A) awayfrommirror and increasing in magnitude (B) towards
mirror and increasing magnitude (C) awayfrommirror and decreasing in magnitude (
D) towards mirror and decreasing in magnitude Q.25 An object is placed in front
of a convex mirror at a distance of 50 cm. A plane mirror is introduced covering
the lower half of the convex mirror. Ifthe distance between the object and the
plane mirror is 30 cm, it is found that there is no gap between the images forme
d by the two mirrors. The radius ofthe convex mirror is: (A) 12.5 cm (B) 25 cm (
C)50cm (D) 100 cm
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
£
[61
Q.26 A concave mirror is placed on a horizontal table, with its axis directed ve
rtically upwards. Let O be the pole of the mirror and C its centre of curvature.
Apoint object is placed at C. It has a real image, also located at C (a conditi
on called auto-collimation). Ifthe mirror is nowfilledwith water, the image will
be: (A) real, and will remain at C (B) real, and located at a point between C a
nd oo (C) virtual, and located at a point between C and 0. (D) real, and located
at a point between C and O. Q.27 Aray oflight is incident on a concave mirror.
It is parallel to the principal axis and its heightfromprincipal axis is equal t
o the focal length of the mirror. The ratio of the distance of point B to the di
stance of the focusfromthe centre of curvature is (AB is the reflected ray)
<
(B) s
cof
(D)
Q.28 A luminous point object is moving along the principal axis ofa concave mirr
or offocal length 12 cm towards it. its distancefrommirror 4 velocity e Whentowa
rds the mirror is 20 cm its velocity is(B)cm/s. Thefromthe ofthe image in cm/s a
t that instant is: (A) 6 6 away mirror (C) 9 awayfromthe mirror (D) 9 towards th
e mirror Q.29 When an object is placed at a distance of 25 cmfroma concave mirro
r, the magnification is m . The object is moved 15 cm farhter away with respect
to the earlier position, and the magnification becomes m . If m,/m = 4 the focal
length of the mirror is (Assume image is real m,, m are numerical values) (A) 1
0 cm (B) 30 cm (C) 15 cm (D) 20 cm 2L . | 71X Q.30 A reflecting surface is repre
sented by the equation Y = — j ~L~ 0 < x < L. A ray travelling y horizontally beco
mes vertical after reflection. The coordinates of the point (s) where this ray i
s incident is
t 2 2 2 s m
1s
(A) 1,4'
(L
-J2L) %
Q.31 The origin ofx and y coordinates is the pole of a concave mirror of focal l
ength 20 cm. The x-axis is the optical axis with x > 0 being the real side of mi
rror. A point object at the point (25 cm, 1 cm) is moving C with a velocity 10 c
m/s in positive x-direction. The velocity of the image in cm/s is approximately
(A) - 80 i + 8 j (B) 160 i + 8 j (C) - 160 i + 8 j (D) 1 6 0 i - 4 j Q.32 In the
figure shown ifthe object 'O' moves towards the plane mirror, then the image (f
I (which is formed after successive reflectionsfromMj & M respectively) -- '* w
ill move: -r* : Mi (A) towards right (B) towards left (C) with zero velocity (D)
cannot be determined
2 M
J (B) I '
3
(L
V3L^
71
J
2L V 3 L " ] (C) ^ 4 ' t t J (D) [ 3 ' t t J
r
3L V2L
N
r
Q.33 All ofthe following statements are correct except (for real object): (A) th
e magnification produced by a convex mirror is always less thenor equal to one (
B) a virtual, erect, same sized image can be obtained using a plane mirror (C) a
virtual, erect, magnified image can be formed using a concave mirror (D) a real
, inverted, same sized image can be formed using a convex mirror. Q.34 The dista
nce of an objectfromthe pole of a concave mirror is equal to its radius of curva
ture. The image must be : (A) real (B) inverted (C) same sized (D) erect
£
Bansal Classes
m
r
Q.35 A straight line joining the object point and image point is always perpendi
cular to the mirror (A)ifmirrorisplaneonly (B) ifmirror is concave only (C) if m
irror is convex only (D) irrespective ofthe type of mirror. Q.36 A concave mirro
r forms a real image three times larger than the object on a screen. Object and
( screen are moved until the image becomes twice the size of object. If the shif
t of object is 6 cm. The - shift of the screen & focal length of mirror are (A)
36 cm, 36cm (B) 36cm, 16cm (C) 72cm, 36cm (D) none of these Q.37 A point source
oflight is 60 cmfroma screen and is kept at the focus of a concave mirror which
reflects • \ light on the screen. The focal length ofthe mirror is 20 cm. The rati
o ofaverage intensities ofthe illumination on the screen when the mirror is pres
ent and when the mirror is removed is : (A) 36:1 (B) 37 : 1 (C)49:l (D)10:l Q.38
The distance of a real object from the focus of a convex mirror of radius of cu
rvature 'a' is 'b'. Then the distance ofthe image from the focus is i2 ^ ^2 (A)— (
B) - (C) — (D) none ofthese 4a b 4b Q.39 Choose the correct statement(s) related t
o the motion of object and its image inthe case ofmirrors (A) Object and its ima
ge always move along normal w.r.t. mirror in opposite directions (B) Only in the
case of convex mirror, it may happen that the object and its image move in the
same direction (C) Only in the case of concave mirror, it may happen that the ob
ject and its image move in the same direction (D) Only in case of plane mirrors,
object and its image move in opposite directions Q.40 A point source oflight is
placed at a distance h below the surface of a large deep lake. What is the perc
entage oflight energy that escapes directlyfromthe water surface is p ofthe wate
r=4/3 ? (neglect \\ partial reflection) (A) 50% (B) 25% (C) 20% (D) 17% Q.41 The
x-z plane separates two media Aand B with refractive indices p,j and P2 respect
ively. Aray oflight travels from A to B. Its directions in the two media are giv
en by the unit vectors, r = a i + b j & C r = a i + p j respectively where i & ]
are unit vectors in the x and y directions. Then (A)pja = p a (B) PjOC ~ p a (C
)pjb = p P (D)pjp = p b Q.42 A ray Rj is incident on the plane surface ofthe gla
ss slab (kept in air) ofrefractive index -J2 at angle ofincident equal to the cr
itical angle for this air glass system. The refracted ray R2 undergoes partial r
eflection & refraction at the other surface. t The angle between reflected ray R
and the refracted ray R at that surface is: (A)45° (B)135° (C) 105° (D) 75° Q.43 A ray
oflight from a denser medium strike a rarer medium. The angle of reflection is r
and that of refraction is r'. The reflected and refracted rays make an angle of
90° with each other. The critical angle will be: (A) sin (tan r) (B) tan (sin r)
(C) sin" (tan r') (D) tan" (sin r') Q. 44 A tiny air bubble in a glass slab (p,
= 1.5) appears from one side to be 6 cm from the glass surface and 9 from other
side, 4 cm. The thickness ofthe glass slab is (A) 10 cm (B) 6.67 cm (C)15cm (D)
one of these
£
2
A
B
2
2
2
2
3
4
-1
1
1
1
<!I Bansal Classes
[13]
n,=\3 Q.231 In thefigureshown the angle made by the light ray with the normal in
the n,=v2 medium of refractive index 1 is : n,=l (A)30° (B)60° t (C) 90° (D) None of
these Q.46 A plane glass slab is placed over various coloured letters. The lette
r which appears to be raised the least is (D) green (B) yellow (C) violet a (A)
red Q.47 Bottom face of the glass cube is silvered as shown. Aray of light incid
ent on top face ofthe cube as shown. Find the deviation of the ray when it comes
out of the glass cube : (A) 0 (B) 90° (C) 180° (D) 270°
Q.48 A ray oflight is incident upon an air/water interface (it passes from air i
nto water) at an angle of 45°. Which ofthe following quantities change as the ligh
t enters the water? (I) wavelength (II) frequency r(IV) direction of propagation
2 (IH) speed of propagation (A) I, III only (B) III, IV only (C) I, II, IV only
(D) I, III, IV only Q.49 The figure shows the path of a ray oflight as it passe
s through three different materials with refractive indices n,, n and n . The fi
gure is drawn to scale. The refractive indices of the material satisfy relation
(A) n < < nj (B) n < nj < nj (C) n < nj < n (D) n, < n < n Q.50 The critical ang
le for glass to air refraction is least for which colour ? (B)blue (C) violet (D
)red P c— (A) orange Q.51 Along rectangular slab oftransparent medium is placed on
a horizontal table with its length parallel to the x-axis and width parallel to
the y-axis as shown in thefigure.Aray oflight travelling in air makes a normal
incidence { on the slab. The refractive index p ofthe medium varies as , where p
and r (>d) are constants. l-(x/r) Y I (A) The incident ray travels in parabolic
ally inside the slab. (B) The incident ray travels in hyperbolic path inside the
slab. (C) The incident ray travels in circular path inside the slab. (D) The in
cident ray travels in elliptical path inside the slab. Q.52 A ray oflight travel
sfroman optical denser medium to rarer medium. The critical angle for the two me
dia is C. The maximum possible deviation ofthe refracted light ray can be : 71 £ (
A) 7t - C (B)2C (C) it. - 2C (D)--C Q.53 A microscope is focused on a point obje
ct and then its objective is raised through a height of 2cm. If a glass slab ofr
efractive index 1.5 is placed over this point object such that it is focused aga
in, the thickness of the glass slab is: (A) 6 cm (B) 3 cm (C)2cm (D) 1.5 cm Q.54
Aparaxial beam oflight is converging towards a point P on the screen. Aplane pa
rallel sheet of glass of thickness t and refractive index p is introduced in the
path ofbeam. The convergence point is shifted by: (A) t (1 - 1/p) away (B) t (1
+ 1/p) away (C) t (1 - 1/p) nearer (D) t (1 + 1/p) nearer Q.55 A bird is flying
3 m above the surface ofwater. If the bird is diving vertically down with speed
= 6 m/s, r his apparent velocity as seen by a stationaryfishunderwater is : X,
(A) 8 m/s (B)6m/s (C) 12 m/s (D)4m/s
£
2
3
3
3
2
3
3
2
>
0
£
(feBansal Classes
[12]
Q.56 A flat glass slab of thickness 6 cm and index 1.5 is placed in front of a p
lane mirror. An observer is standing behind the glass slab and looking at the mi
rror. The actual distance of the observer from the mirror is 50 cm. The distance
of his image from himself, as seen by the observer is : (A) 94 cm (B) 96 cm (C)
98cm (D) 100 cm sini Q.57 In the figure shown is equal to: C Vh 1*3 Hi Q.58 A ra
y oflight moving along the unit vector (- i - 2j) undergoes refraction at an int
erface oftwo media, which is the x-z plane. The refractive index for y > 0 is 2
while for y < 0, it is -J5 j2 • The unit vector along which the refracted ray move
s is:
( a )
MM)
(D) None of these
Q. 5 9 An object is placed 20 cm infrontof a 4 cm thick plane mirror. The image
ofthe obj ect finally is formed at 45 cmfromthe obj ect itself. The refractive i
ndex of the material ofthe unpolished side of the mirror C is (considering near
normal incidence) (A) 1.5 (B) 1.6 (C) 1.4 (D) none of these Q.60 A ray oflight i
s incident on a parallel slab of thickness t and refractive index n. If the angl
e of incidence 9 is small than the displacement in the incident and emergent ray
will be : tOCn-1) t9 t9n (A) (B) ™ (C) — (D) none Q.61 A ray oflight is incident at
an angle of 75° into a medium having refractive index p. The reflected and the re
fracted rays are found to suffer equal deviations in opposite direction p equals
c r?^^' V3+1 V3+1 2V2 (A) ^ 2 ( C ) ^ (D) None of these Q.62 A small source ofl
ight is 4m below the surface of a liquid ofrefractive index 5/3. In order to cut
off all the light coming out of liquid surface, minimum diameter ofthe disc pla
ced on the surface of liquid is: (A) 3m (B)4m (C)6m (D)oo m \ ^ IvT Q. 63 From t
he figure shojvn establish a relation between, Pj, p , p . (A)pj p ; p = Pj (D) None of these Q.64 The critical angle oflight
going from medium A to medium B is 9 . The speed oflight in medium A is v. The s
peed oflight in medium B is :
1 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 n
( A )sin0 — (B) vsin9 (C) vcot9 (D) vtan9 Q.65 A cubical block of glass ofrefracti
ve index n is in contact with the surface of water of refractive index i^. Abeam
oflight is incident on vertical face of the block (see internal reflection at t
he base and A refraction atfigure). After refraction, a totalray emerges out at
an angle 9. The \ the oppo site vertical face, the value of 9 is given by: (A) s
in 9 < ^ m - n (B) tan 9 < J ? - n 1 1 (C) sin 9 < , (D) tan 9 < , Vl ~2 V 1
} 3
:
,
n
2
2
2
,
n 2 n
N/
n.
2
2
2:
2
n
~
n
2
<!I Bansal Classes
[13]
Q.66 Theflatbottom of cylinder tank is silvered and water (p = 4/3) isfilledin t
he tank upto a height h. A small bird is hovering at a height 3hfromthe bottom o
fthe tank. When a small hole is opened near the bottom of the tank, the water le
vel falls at the rate of 1 cm/s. The bird will perceive that his image's velocit
y is : (A) 0.5 cm/s upward , (B) 1 cm/s downwards (C) 0.5 cm/s downwards (D) non
e ofthese Q.67 A vertical pencil of rays comesfrombottom of a tankfilledwith a l
iquid. When it is accelerated with an acceleration of 7.5 m/s , the ray is seen
to be totally reflected by liquid surface. What is minimum possible refractive i
ndex of liquid? s (A) slightly greater than 4/3 (B) slightly greater than 5/3 (C
) slightly greater than 1.5 (D) slightly greater than 1.75 Q.68 Look at the ray
diagram shown, what will be the focal ind length ofthe 1 and the 2 lens, ifthe i
ncident light ray passes without any deviation? êmergent (A) -5 cm and -10cm £ (B
)+5 cm and + 10cm gt 5cm 5 cm (C)-5 cm and+5 cm (D) +5 cm and +5 cm Q.69 A paral
lel sided block of glass, of refractive index 1.5 which is 3 6 mm thick rests on
the floor of a tank which isfilledwith water (refractive index = 4/3). The diff
erence between apparent depth offloorat A& B when seenfromvertically above is eq
ual to E (A) 2 mm (B)3mm (C)4mm (D) none of these Q.70 A ray oflight is incident
on one face of a transparent slab of thickness 15 cm. The angle of incidence is
60°. Ifthe lateral displacement of the ray on emergingfromthe parallel plane is 5
v3 cm, the refractive index ofthe material of the slab is (A) 1.414 (B) 1.532 (C
) 1.732 (D)none Q.71 A beam oflight has a small wavelength spread 5X about a cen
tral wavelength X. The beam travels in vaccum until it enters a glass plate at a
n angle 9 relative to the normal to the plate, as shown infigure.The index of re
fraction ofthe glass is given by n(> ). The angular spread 89' ofthe refracted b
eam is given by
2 st nd
£
v
-5X (A) 59' = n
(B) 89'=
dn(X) -8X dX
tan 9' dn(^,) sin 9 8X (C) 89'= n dX 5X (D) 59' = sin 9' X Q.72 When a pin is mo
ved along the principal axis of a small concave mirror, the image position coinc
ides with the object at a point 0.5 m from the mirror, refer figure. Ifthe mirro
r is placed depth ofO. min a transparent L phenomenon occurs when the at ais pla
ced 0.42mfromthe mirror. liquid, the same pin The refractive index ofthe liquid
is (A) 6/5 (B) 5/4 (C) 4/3 (D)3/2
Vacuum Glass
0.2 m 0.2 m
Q. 73 A light ray is incident on a transparent sphere ofindex = ^ , at an angle
of incidence = 45°. What is the deviation ofa tiny fraction ofthe ray, which enter
s the sphere, undergoes two internal reflections, and then refracts out into air
? (B)240° (C) 120° (D)180° A) (A) 270°
(feBansal Classes
[12]
Q.74 Two identical thin isosceles prisms ofrefracting angle 'A' and refractive i
ndex p are placed with their bases touching each other. Two parallel rays ofligh
t are incident on this system as shown. The distance ofthe point where the rays
convergefromthe prism is: h (A) pA 2h <*>X ph (D) ( p - l ) A (C) (p-l)A Q.75 A
ray of sunlight enters a spherical water droplet (n=4/3) at an angle of incidenc
e 53° measured with respect to the normal to the surface. It is reflected from the
back surface ofthe droplet and re-enters into air. The angle between the incomi
ng and outgoing ray is [Take sin 53° = 0.8] (A) 15° (B) 34° (C) 138° (D)30° Q.76 A concave
spherical surface ofradius of curvature 10cm separates two medium x & y of refr
active index 4/3 & 3/2 respectively. If the object is placed along principal axi
s in medium X then (A) image is always real (B) image is real ifthe object dista
nce is greater than 90cm (C) image is always virtual (D) image is virtual if the
object distance is less than 90cm Q.77 The correct conclusion that can be drawn
fromthesefiguresis £ ih. Al *
, \/
\
£
Q.78
£•
Q.79 e-. Q.80
&
Q.81
£
(b) (A) p,jp but p< p (C) Pj= p but p< p (D) p, = p, but p <
p Afishis near the centre of a spherical waterfilled( p = 4/3)fishbowl. Achild s
tands in air at a distance 2R (R is the radius of curvature of the sphere) from
the centre ofthe bowl. At what distance from the centre would the child nose app
ear to thefishsituated at the centre: (A) 4R (B)2R (C)3R (D)4R A spherical surfa
ce of radius of curvature R separates air (refractive index 1.0) from glass (ref
ractive index 1.5). The centre of curvature is in the glass. Apoint object P pla
ced in air is found to have a real image Q in the glass. The lime PQ cuts the su
rface at the point O, and PO = OQ. The distance PO is equal to: (A) 5R (B) 3 R (
C)2R (D)1.5R A spherical surface of radius of curvature 10 cm separates two medi
a X and Y ofrefractive indices 3/2 and 4/3 respectively. Centre of the spherical
surface lies in denser medium. An object is placed in medium X. For image to be
real, the object distance must be (A) greater than 90 cm (B) less than 90 cm. (
C) greater than 80 cm (D) less than 80 cm. A beam of diameter' d' is incident on
a glass hemisphere as shown. Ifthe radius of curvature ofthe hemisphere is very
large in comparison to d, then the diameter of the beam at the base of the hemi
sphere will be: d (B)d (D)|d <C>3 () 4
2 2 2 2 A d
(a)
V\
(feBansal Classes
[12]
Q. 82 A concave spherical refracting surface separates two media glass and air (
p = 1.5). Ifthe image is to be real at what minimum distance u should the object
be placed in glass if R is the radius of curvature? (A)u>3R (B) u > 2R (C)u<2R
(D)u<R Q.83 A glass sphere of index 1.5 and radius 40 cm has half its hemispheri
cal £ surface silvered. The point where a parallel beam oflight, coming along a di
ameter, will focus (or appear to) after coming out of sphere, will be: (A) 10 cm
to the left of centre (B) 3 0 cm to the left of centre (C) 50 cm to the left of
centre .(D) 60 cm to the left of centre Q.84 An opaque sphere of radius a is ju
st immersed in a transparent liquid as shown in figure. Apoint source is placed
on the vertical diameter ofthe sphere at a distance Point source a/2fromthe top
of the sphere. One ray originatingfromthe point source after f refractionfromthe
air liquid interface forms tangent to the sphere. The angle of liquid refractio
n for that particular ray is 3 0°. The refractive index ofthe liquid is
glass
£
<!I Bansal Classes
Q.85 A paraxial beam is incident on a glass (n = 1.5) hemisphere of radius R = 6
cm in air as shown. The distance of point of convergence F from the plane surfa
ce n ofhemisphere is (A) 12 cm (B) 5.4 cm v j (C)18 cm (D)8 cm Question No. 86 t
o 89(4 questions) Thefigure,shows a transparent sphere of radius R and refractiv
e index p. An object O is placed at a distance x from the pole ofthefirstsurface
so that a real image is formed at the pole of the exactly opposite surface. Q.8
6 If x = 2R, then the value of p. is £ (A) 1.5 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) none ofthese Q.87 I
fx = oo, then the value of p is £ (A) 1.5 (B)2 (C) 3 (D) none ofthese Q.88 If an o
bject is placed at a distance R from the pole offirstsurface, then the real imag
e is formed at a distance Rfromthe pole of the second surface. The refractive in
dex p ofthe sphere is given by V (A) 1.5 (B) 2 (C) V2 (D) none ofthese Q.89 In p
revious problem, if the refractive index ofthe sphere is varied, then the positi
on x of the object and 6 its image from the respective poles will also vary. Ide
ntify the correct statement. (A) If the value of p increases the value ofx decre
ases (B) Ifthe value of p becomes equal to unity, then x tends to infinity (C) T
he value of p must not be less than 1 (D) All the above 0.90 A point object O mo
ves from the principal axis of a converging lens in a direction OP. I is the ima
ge of O, will move initially in the direction (A) IQ (B) IR (D) IU Q.91 A thin s
ymmetric double - convex lens of power P is cut into three parts A, B and C as s
hown. The power of (A) A is P (B) Ais 2P (C) B is P (D) B is P/4
©^^
£
(C)
i
v
[13]
£
i
Q. 92 A lens behaves as a converging lens in air but a diverging lens in water,
then the refractive index(p) of its material is (A) ( , > 4/3 J (B) |a. > 3/2 (C
) p < 4/3 (D)p<3/2 Q. 93 The curvature radii of a concavo-convex glass lens are
20 cm and 60 cm. The convex surface ofthe lens is silvered. With the lens horizo
ntal, the concave surface isfilledwith water. The focal length of the effective
mirror is (p of glass = 1.5, p ofwater=4/3) (A) 90/13 cm (B) 80/13 cm (C) 20/3 c
m (D) 45/8 cm Q. 94 A parallel beam ofwhite light falls on a convex lens. Images
ofblue, red and green light are formed on other side of the lens at distances x
, y and z respectivelyfromthe pole of the lens. Then: (A) x > y > z (B) x > z >
y (C)y>z>x (D)None Q. 95 Abi-concave glass lens having refractive index 1.5 has
both surfaces of same radius of curvature R. On immersion in a medium of refract
ive index 1.75, it will behave as a (A) convergent lens of focal length 3.5 R (B
) convergent lens of focal length 3.0 R (C) divergent lens of focal length 3.5 R
(D) divergent lens of focal length 3.0 R Q. 96 The power (in diopters) of an eq
uiconvex lens with radii of curvature of 10 cm and refractive index ofl,6is: (A)
- 1 2 (B) +12 (C) +1.2 (D) -1.2 Q.97 The focal length ofa lens is greatest for
which colour? (A) violet (B)red (C) yellow (D) green Q.98 A converging lens form
s an image of an object on a screen. The image is real and twice the size ofthe
object. If the positions of the screen and the object are interchanged, leaving
the lens in the original position, the new image size on the screen is (A) twice
the obj ect size (B) same as the object size (C) halfthe object size (D) can't
say as it depends on the focal length of the lens. Q. 99 An object is placed inf
rontofa symmetrical convex lens with refractive index 1.5 and radius of curvatur
e 40 cm. The surface ofthe lens further awayfromthe object is silvered, Under au
to-collimation condition, the object distance is (A) 20 cm (B) 10 cm (C)40cm (D)
5cm Q. 100 When the object is at distances u and u the images formed by the same
lens are real and virtual respectively and ofthe same size. Then focal length o
f the lens is:
] 2
(B)|(U!+U )
2
( O ^ T
(D) 2 (u, + u )
2
Q. 101 A planoconvex lens, when silvered at its plane surface is equivalent to a
concave mirror of focal length 28cm. When its curved surface is silvered and th
e plane surface not silvered, it is equivalent to a concave mirror of focal leng
th 10cm, then the refractive index of the material of the lens is: (A) 9/14 (B)
14/9 (C) 17/9 (D)none Q. 102 The height of the image formed by a converging lens
on a screen is 8cm. For the same position ofthe object and screen again an imag
e of size 12.5cm is formed on the screen by shifting the lens. The height M ofth
e object: (A) 625/32cm (B)64/12.5cm (C) 10cm (D)none
<!I Bansal Classes
[13]
Q. 103 Parallel beam oflight is incident on a system of two convex lenses of foc
al A lengths fj = 20 cm and f = 10 cm. What should be the distance between the t
wo lenses so that rays after refraction from both the lenses pass undeviated : V
(A) 60 cm (B) 30 cm (C) 90 cm (D) 40 cm ' Q. 104 A bi-concave symmetric lens ma
de of glass has refractive index 1.5. It has both surfaces of same radius of cur
vature R. On immersion in a liquid of refractive index 1.25, it will behave as a
6 (A) Converging lens of focal length 2.5 R (B) Converging lens offocal length
2.0 R (C) Diverging lens of focal length 4.5 R (D) None of these Q. 105 A latera
l object of height 0.5 cm is placed on the optical axis of bi-convexlens of foca
l length 80 cm, at an object distance = 60 cm. The image formed is: C (A) virtua
l, erect and 4 cm high (B) virtual, inverted and 2 cm high (C) virtual, erect an
d 2 cm high (D) real, inverted and 2 cm high. Q.106 A converging lens of focal l
ength 20 cm and diameter 5 cm is cut along the line AB. The part of the lens sho
wn shaded in the diagram is now used to 2 cm form an image of a point P placed 3
0 cm away from it on the line XY. Which is perpendicular to the plane of the len
s. The image of P will be formed. 30 cm (A) 0.5 cm above XY (B) 1 cm below XY (C
) on XY (D) 1.5 cm below XY Q.107 A object is placed at a distance of 15 cm from
a convex lens of focal length 10 cm. On the other side of the lens, a convex mi
rror is placed at image formed by a its focus such that thefocal length of the t
he combination coincides with the obj ect itself. The convex mirror is (A) 20 cm
(B)lOcm (C)15cm (D)30cm Q. 108 A thin lens of focal length f and its aperture h
as a diameter d. It forms an image of intensity I Now the central part of the ap
erture upto diameter (d/2) is blocked by an opaque paper. The focal length and i
mage intensity would change to (A) 172,1/2 (B) f, 1/4 (C) 3f/4,1/2 (D)f,3I/4 Q.
109 Two planoconvex lenses each of focal length 10 cm & refractive index 3/2 are
placed as shown. In the space left, water (R.I = 4/3) is filled. The whole arra
ngement is in air. The optical power of the system is (in diopters) : P (A) 6.67
(B) - 6.67 (C) 33.3 (D) 20 Q. 110 A concave mirror is placed on a horizontal su
rface and two thin uniform layers of different transparent liquids (which do not
mix or interact) are formed on the reflecting surface. The refractive indices o
f the upper and lower liquids are and p respectively. The bright point source at
a height 'd' (d is very large in comparison to the thickness ofthe film) above
the mirror coincides with its own final image. The radius of curvature ofthe ref
lecting surface therefore is
£
11
2
£
2
(A)
(B)p,p d
2
(C)pjd
(D) p d
2
Q. 111 An object is moving towards a converging lens on its axis. The image is a
lso found to be moving towards the lens. Then, the object distance 'u' must sati
fy (A) 2f 4f (D)u<f
<!I Bansal Classes
[13]
0
Q. 112 An object is placed infrontof a thin convex lens of focal length 3 0 cm a
nd a plane mirror is placed 15 cm behind the lens. If the final image ofthe obje
ct coincides with the object, the distance of the object from £ the lens is otv^ (
A) 60 cm (B) 30 cm (C)15cm (D)25cm Q. 113 Two point sources P and Q are 24 cm ap
art. Where should a convex lens of focal length 9 cm be placed in between them s
o that the images of both sources are formed at the same place? (A) 3 cm from P
(B) 15 cm from Q (C) 9 cm from Q (D) 18 cm from P Q. 114 If a concave lens is pl
aced in path of converging rays real image will be produced if the distance ofth
e pole from the point of convergence of incident rays lies between (f= magnitude
of focal length of lens) c (A) 0 and f (B)fand2f (C) 2f and infinity (D) fand i
nfinity Q. 115 A point object is kept at thefirstfocus of a convex lens. If the
lens starts moving towards right with a constant velocity, the image will /W (A)
always move towards right object (B) always move towards left I (C)firstmove to
wards right & then towards left. V p Lr (D)firstmove towards left & then towards
right. Q. 116 The diagram shows a silvered equiconvex lens. An object of length
1 cm has been placed in thefrontofthe lens. What will be thefinalimage properti
es? The ; refractive index ofthe lens is p and the refractive index ofthe medium
in which the lens has been placed is 2p. Both the surface have the radius R. 30
cm , V ( A ) Half size, erect and virtual (B) same size, erect and real , ..:<••<•• - l:
A (C) same size, erect and virtual . (D) none J Q. 117 In the diagram shown, the
lens is moving towards the object with a velocity V m/s and the object is also
moving towards the lens with the same speed. A What speed of the image with resp
ect to earth when the object is at a distance Object 2ffromthe lens? (fis the fo
cal length.) \J (A) 2 V (B)4V (C)3V (D)V Q. 118 You are given two lenses, a conv
erging lens with focal length+10 cm and a diverging lens with focal length - 20
cm. Which ofthe following would produce a virtual image that is larger than the
object? (A) Placing the object 5cmfromthe converging lens. a- (B) Placing the ob
ject 15cmfromthe converging lens. (C) Placing the object 25cmfromthe converging
lens. (D) Placing the obj ect 15 cmfromthe diverging lens. Q. 119 A screen is pl
aced 90 cmfroma object. The image of an object on the screen is formed by a conv
ex lens ft at two different locations separated by 20 cm. The focal length ofthe
lens is 3 (A) 18 cm (B) 21.4 cm (C)60cm (D) 85.6 cm Q. 120 In the above problem
, if the size of the image formed at the positions are 6 cm and 3 cm, then the f
highest ofthe obj ect is (D)none of these & (A) 4.2 cm (B) 4.5 cm (C) 5 cm Q. 1
21 If an object is placed at A(OA>f); Where f is the focal length of the lens th
e image is found to be formed at B. Aperpendicular is erected at o and C is chos
en on it such that the angle ZBCA is B a right angle. Then the value offwill be
(A) AB/OC (B) (AC)(BC)/OC (C) OC /AB (D) (OC)(AB)/AC+BC
£
3
6
%
f>
t
2
2
<!I Bansal Classes
[13]
Q. 122 One ofthe refractive surfaces of a prism of angle 3 0° is silvered. A ray o
flight incident at an angle of 60° retraces it path. The refractive index of the m
aterial ofprism is : £ (A) V2 (B)^3 (C) 3/2 (D)2 Q. 123 On an equilateral prism, i
t is observed that a ray strikes grazingly at one face and ifrefractive index of
the prism is 2 then the angle of deviation is (A) 60 (B)120° (C) 30° (D) 90
c c
Q. 124 A parallel beam oflight is incident on the upper part of a prism of angle
1.8° and R.1.3/2. The light coming out ofthe prism falls on a concave mirror ofra
dius of curvature 20 cm. The distance of the point (where the rays are focused a
fter reflectionfromthe mirror)fromthe principal axis is: (A) 9 cm (B) 0.157 cm (
C) 0.314 cm (D) None of these Q: 125 The refractive index ofa prism is, cot— where
A= angle of prism. The angle ofminimum deviation is (in p degrees) (A) 2A (B) 9
b - A (C) 180-2A (D)0 Q. 126 A ray oflight strikes a plane mirror at an angle o
fincidence 45° as shown in thefigure.After reflection, the ray passes through a pr
ism ofrefractive index 1.5, whose apex angle is 4°. The angle through which the mi
rror £, should be rotated if the total deviation of the ray is to be 90° is: (A) 1 c
lockwise (B) 1 anticlockwise (C) 2° clockwise (D) 2° anticlockwise
0 0
Q. 127 The refracting angle of prism is 60° and the index ofrefraction is 1 /2 rel
ative to surrounding. The limiting C^ angle ofincidence of a ray that the will b
e transmitted through the prism is : (A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 15° (D) 50° Q. 128 One face of
a prism with a refracting angle of 30° is coated with silver. Aray incident on oth
er face at an angle of45° is refracted and reflected from the silvered coated face
and retraces its path. The refractive index ofthe prism is : (A) 2 (B)VI (C)V3/
2 (D)V2
1
Q. 129 An equilateral prism deviates a ray through 40° for two angles ofincidence
differing by 20°. The possible angles ofincidences are: (A) 40°, 60° (B) 50°, 30° (C) 45°,
5° (D)30°,60° Q. 13 0 A beam of monochromatic light is incident at i =5 0° on one face o
f an equilat eral prism, the angle of emergence is 40°, then the angle of minimum
deviation is: (A) 30° (B) <30° (D) > 30 (C) < 30°
c
Q.131 The dispersive powers oftwo lenses are 0.01 and0.02. Iffocai length of one
lens is + 10cm, then what should the focal length ofthe second lens, so that th
ey form an achromatic combination? (A) Diverging lens having focal length 20 cm.
(B) Converging lens having focal length 20 cm (C) Diverging lens having focal l
ength 10 cm. (D) Converging lens having focal length 10 cm
<!I Bansal Classes
[13]
Q. 132 A thin prism of angle 5° is placed at a distance of 10 cm from object. What
is the distance of the image from obj ect? (Given p. of prism =1.5) (A)-cm
%
(B)-cm
[3
71
(C)— cm
571
(D) - cm
7T
Q. 133 A prism has a refractive index J - and refracting angle 90°. Find the minim
um deviation produced by prism. V2 (A) 40° (B) 45° (C) 30° (D)49° Q. 13 4 Two lenses in
contact made ofmaterials with dispersive powers in the ratio 2:1, behaves as an
achromatic lens of focal length 10 cm. The individual focal lengths ofthe lenses
are: (A) 5 cm, -10 cm (B) - 5 cm, 10 cm (C) 10 cm, - 20 cm (D) - 20 cm, 10 cm Q
. 13 5 R. I. of a prism is and the angle of prism is 60°. The limiting angle of in
cidence of a ray that will be j tansmitted through the prism is: (A) 30° (B) 45° (C)
15° (D) 50° Q. 13 6 A ray oflight strikes a plane mirror at an angle of incidence 4
5° as shown in the figure. After reflection, the ray passes through a prism of ref
ractive index 1.50, whose apex angle is 4°. The angle through which the mirror sho
uld be rotated ifthe total deviation ofthe ray is to be 90° is (A) 1° clockwise (B)
1° anticlockwise (C) 2° clockwise (D) 2° anticlockwise
^
Q. 137 For a prism of apex angle 45°, it is found that the angle of emergence is 4
5° for grazing incidence. Calculate the refractive index of the prism. (A) (2) (B)
(3)" (C) 2 (D)(5)"
1/2 2 2
Q. 13 8 A ray incident at an angle 5 3 on a prism emerges at an angle at 3 7° as s
hown. If the angle ofincidence is made 50°, which ofthe following is a possible va
lue ofthe angle 53 of emergence. (A) 35° (B) 42° (C) 40° (D)38
0
Q. 13 9 The diagram showsfiveisosceles right angled prisms. Alight ray incident
at 90° at thefirstface emerges at same angle with the normalfromthe last face. Whi
ch ofthe following relations will hold regarding the refractive / \ n / \ ^ indi
ces? ' (A) pf + p + p j = p + p (B) p + p + p = 1 + p + p (C) p + p + p ? = 2 +
p + p (D)none
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
<!I Bansal Classes
Q. 140 A beam oflight consisting of red, green and blue and is incident on a rig
ht angled prism. The refractive index ofthe material ofthe prism for the above r
ed, green and blue wavelengths are 1.39,1.44 and 1.47 respectively. The prism wi
ll: (A) separate part of the red color from the green and blue colors. (B) separ
ate part of the blue colorfromthe red and green colours. _ (C) separate all the
three colorsfromthe other two colors. 450 (D) not separate even partially any co
lorfromthe other two colors.
[13]
Q. 141 A certain prism is found to produce a minimum deviation of 38°. It produces
a deviation of 44° when the angle of incidence is either 42° or 62°. What is the angl
e of incidencewhen it is undergoing minimum deviation? E (A) 45° (D) 55 (B) 49° (C)
40°
c
Q. 142 It is desired to make an achromatic combination of two lenses (Lj & L ) m
ade of materials having dispersive powers C0j and co (<©]). Ifthe combination of l
enses is converging then (A) Lj is converging ' , (B) L is converging (C) Power
of Lj is greater than the power ofL (D) None of these
2 2 2 2
Q. 143 A ray oflight is incident normally on thefirstrefracting face ofthe prism
ofrefracting angle A. The ray of light comes out at grazing emergence. If one h
alf ofthe prism (shaded position) is knocked off, the same ray will £ i (A) emerge
at an angle of emergence sin — sec A / 2 v^ (B) not emerge out of the prism f1 .
. .A (C) emerge at an angle of emergence sin — sec A / 4 (D) None of these
1 1
Q. 144 An achromatic convergent cjoublet of two lens in contact has a power of +
2 D. The convex lens is power + 5 D. What is the ratio of the dispersive powers
of the convergent and divergent lenses? (A) 2 : 5 (B) 3 : 5 (C) 5 : 2 (D) 5 : 3
Q. 145 Light ray is incident on a prism of angle A = 60° and refractive index p.
= V2 . The angle of incidence at which the emergent ray grazes the surface is gi
ven by (A)
s i n
• -1
K 2 J
• (B)Sin -l r i - V a ]
I ' J
2
(C) sin-
1
I J
2
JL^ (D) sin" 'vV3y
1
Q. 146 Two incident monochromatic waves whose wavelengths differ by a small amou
nt dA, are separated angularly at 9 and 9 + d9. The dispersive power is given by
(A) d9/dX, (B) d9/9 (C)dAA (D)A(dA/d9) Q. 147 A ray oflight is incident normall
y on a prism of refractive index 1.5, as shown. The prism is immersed in a liqui
d of refractive index 'p'. The 1 largest value ofthe angle ACB, so that the ray
is totally reflected at the face AC, is 30°. Then the value of p must be: V3 (A) (
B) (C) (D) 3 V3
ItBansal Classes
i
[19]
Q.l
each question.
A man ofheight 170 cm wants to see his complete image in a plane mirror (while s
tanding). His eyes are at a height of 160 cm from the ground. (A) Minimum length
of the mirror=80 cm (B) Minimum length of the mirror=85 cm. (C) Bottom ofthe mi
rror should be at a height 80 cm. (D) Bottom of the mirror should be at a height
85 cm. Two plane mirrors at an angle such that a ray incident on a mirror under
goes a total deviation of240° after two reflections. (A) the angle between the mir
ror is 60° (B) the number of images formed by this system will be 5, if an object
is placed symmetrically between the mirrors. (C) the no. ofimageswillbe 5 if an
object is kept unsymmetrically between the mirrors. (D) a ray will retrace its p
ath after 2 successive reflections, ifthe angle ofincidence on one mirror is 60°.
W Aflatmirror M is arranged parallel to a wall W at a distance I from it. The li
ght S 1 Wall produced by a point source S kept on the wall is reflected by the m
irror and produces / a light spot on the wall. The mirror moves with velocity v
towards the wall. r M minimi* (A) The spot oflight will move with the speed v on
the wall, (B) The spot oflight will not move on the wall. (C) As the mirror com
es closer the spot oflight will become larger and shift away from the wall with
speed larger then v. (D) The size ofthe light spot on the wall remains the same.
A concave mirror cannot form (A) virtual image ofvirtual object (C) real image
of a real object (B) virtual image of a real object (D) real image of a virtual
object.
Q.2
Q.3
Q.4 Q.5
In thefigureshown consider thefirstreflection at the plane mirror and second at
the convex mirror. AB is object. (A) the second image is real, inverted of 1/5 m
agnification (B) the second image is virtual and erect with magnificationl/5 (C)
the second image moves towards the convex mirror (D) the second image moves awa
yfromthe convex mirror.
th
^ jI _10cm
A B E
50cm
>
i c ' Xi 10cm i 120cm
c
Q.6
A ray oflight is incident normally on one face of 30° - 60° - 90° prism \P/ of refract
ive index 5/3 immersed in water of refractive index 4/3 as shown in figure. 1 \
(A) The exit angle 0 ofthe ray is sin (5/8) (B) The exit angle 9 of the ray is s
in (5/4J3) (C) Total internal reflection at point P ceases ifthe refractive inde
x of water is increased to 5/2V3 by dissolving some substance. (D) Total interna
l reflection at point P ceases if the refractive index ofwater is increased to 5
/6 by dissolving some substance.
2 -1 2 -1
<f§ Bansal Classes
[23]
Q.7
A ray oflight in a liquid ofrefractive index 1.4, approaches the boundary surfac
e between the liquid and air at an angle of incidence whose sine is 0.8. Which o
f the following statements is correct about the behaviour ofthe light (A) It is
impossible to predict the behavior of the light ray on the basis of the informat
ion supplied. (B) The sine of the angle of refraction of the emergent ray will l
ess than 0.8. (C) The ray will be internally reflected (D) The sine of the angle
of refraction of the emergent ray will be greater than 0.8. The figure shows a
ray incident at an angle i = TC/3 . Ifthe plot drawn shown the variation of | r
- i | versus Hi k, (r = angle of refraction) H2
:
Q. 8
Mi
v
(A) the value of kj is (C) the value of 6 = 7t/3
2
(B) the value of0, =7t/6 (D) the value ofk is 1
2
In the diagram shown, a ray oflight is incident on the interface between 1 and 2
at angle slightly greater than critical angle. The light suffers total internal
reflection at this interface. After that the light ray falls at the interface o
f 1 and 3, and again it suffers total internal reflection. Which ofthe following
relations should hold true? (B) (A) Pj p (C)P?-P >P^ Q.10
In the figure shown a point object O is placed in air on the principal axis. Th
e radius of curvature of the spherical surface is 60 cm. I is thefinalimage form
ed after all the refractions and reflections. (A) If dj = 120 cm, then the T ' i
s formed on 'O' for any value of d . (B) If dj = 240 cm, then the T ' is formed
on 'O' only if d = 360 cm. (C) If dj = 240 cm, then the T ' is formed on 'O' for
all values of d.2(D) If dj = 240 cm, then the T ' cannot be formed on 'O'.
2 3 3 2 2 2 f f 2 f 2 f f
Q.9
~n H3
n =3/2
g
2
Q.ll Two refracting media are separated by a spherical interface as shown in the
figure. PP' is the principal axis, Pj and P2 are the refractive indices of medi
um of incidence and medium of refraction respectively. Then: (A) if P2 > pj, the
n there cannot be a real image of real obj ect. (B) if pj > pj, then there canno
t be a real image ofvirtual object. (C) if Pj > P2, then there cannot be a virtu
al image ofvirtual object. (D) if pj > p , then there cannot be a real image of
real object.
2
<f§ Bansal Classes
[23]
A curved surface of radius R separates two medium of refractive indices p, and p
as shown in figures A andB
2
Question No. 12 to 14(3 questions)
x
Q.12 Choose the correct statement(s) related to the real image formed by the obj
ect O placed at a distance x, as shown infigureA (A) Real image is always formed
irrespective of the position of object if p > p, (B) Real image is formed only
when x > R (C) Real image is formed due to the convex nature of the interface ir
respective of Pj and p^ (D) None of these Q.13 Choose the correct statement(s) r
elated to the virtual image formed by obj ect O placed at a distance x, as shown
infigureA (A) Virtual image is formed for any position of O if p < (B) Virtual
image can be formed ifx > R and p < Pj (C) Virtual image is formed if x < R and
p > p, (D) None of these
2 2 2 2
R Fig. A
x
Fig. B
Q.14 Identify the correct statement(s) related to the formation of images of a r
eal obj ect O placed at x from the pole ofthe concave surface, as shown infigure
B (A) I f p > p j , then virtual image is formed for any value ofx
2
(B)If \u< p., then virtual image is formed if x< Hi H (C) If p < Pj, then real i
mage is formed for any value ofx (D) none ofthese
2 2
Q.15 Which of the following can form diminished, virtual and erect image ofyour
face. (A) Converging mirror (B) Diverging mirror (C) Converging lens (D) Divergi
ng lens Q.16 A convex lens forms an image of an object on a screen. The height o
f the image is 9 cm. The lens is now displaced until an image is again obtained
on the screen. The height ofthis image is 4 cm. The distance between the object
and the screen is 90cm. (A) The distance between the two positions of the lens i
s 3 0cm. (B) The distance of the obj ect from the lens in itsfirstposition is 3
6cm. (C) The height of the object is 6cm. (D) The focal length of the lens is 21
.6 cm. Q. 17 A diminished image of an object is to be obtained on a large screen
1 mfromit. This can be achieved by (A) using a convex mirror of focal length le
ss than 0.25 m (B) using a concave mirror offocal length less than 0.25 m (C) us
ing a convex lens offocal length less than 0.25 m (D) using a concave lens of fo
cal length less than 0.25 m
<f§ Bansal Classes
[23]
Q.18 Which of the following quantities related to a lens depend on the wavelengt
h of the incident light ? (A) Refractive index (B) Focal length (C) Power (D) Ra
dii of curvature Q.19 A thin lens with focal length f to be used as a magnifying
glass. Which of the following statements regarding the situation is true? (A) A
converging lens may be used, and the object be placed at a distance greater tha
n 2ffromthe lens. (B) A diverging lens may be used, and the object be placed bet
ween f and 2f from the lens. (C) A converging lens may be used, and the obj ect
be placed at a distance less than f from the lens. (D) Adiverging lens may be us
ed, and the object be placed at any point other than the focal point. Q.20 An ob
ject O is kept infront of a converging lens of focal length 30cm behind which th
ere is a plane mirror at 15 cm from the lens. (A) the final image is formed at 6
0cmfromthe lens towards right of it (B) the final image is at 60cmfromlens towar
ds left of it. (C) the final image is real. (D) thefinalimage is virtual.
30cm
Q.21 The radius ofcurvature ofthe left andrightsurface ofthe concave lens are 10
cm and 15cm respectively. The radius of curvature of the mirror is 15cm. (A) equ
ivalent focal length ofthe combination is -18cm. (B) equivalent foca! length of
the combination is +3 6cm. (n= t -5) (C) the system behaves like a concave mirro
r. (D) the system behaves like a convex mirror.
Water
(li=4/3)
Q. 22 A man wishing to get a picture of a Zebra photographed a white donkey afte
r fitting a glass with black streaks onto the objective of his camera. (A) the i
mage will look like a white donkey on the photograph. (B) the image will look li
ke a Zebra on the photograph. (C) the image will be more intense compared to the
case in which no such glass is used. (D) the image will be less intense compare
d to the case in which no such glass is used. Q.23 For refraction through a smal
l angled prism, the angel of deviation: (A) increases with the increasfe in R.I.
of prism. (B) will decrease with the increase in RL of prism. (C) is directly p
roportional to the angle of prism. (D) will be 2D for a ray of R.I.=2.4 if it is
D for a ray of R.I =1.2 Q. 24 For the refraction oflight through a prism (A) Fo
r every angle of deviation there are two angles of incidence. (B) The light trav
elling inside an equilateral prism is necessarily parallel to the base when pris
m is set for minimum deviation. (C) There are two angles of incidence for maximu
m deviation, (for A < 20°C) (D) Angle of minimum deviation will increase ifrefract
ive index of prism is increased keeping the outside medium unchanged if Pp > p .
s
j
1 I
<f§ Bansal Classes
[23]
Answer Key
Q.l D Q.8 C Q.15 C Q.22 A Q.29 D Q.36 A Q.43 A Q.50 C Q.57 B Q.64 A Q.71 C Q.78
C Q.85 D Q.92 C Q.99 A Q. 106 D Q.113 D Q.120 A Q.127 A Q.134 A Q. 141 B Q.l Q.5
Q.9 Q.13 Q.17 Q.21
Q2 Q.9 Q.16 Q.23 Q.30 Q.37 Q.44 Q.51 Q.58 Q.65 Q.72 Q.79 Q.86 Q.93 Q.l00 Q.l07 Q
.114 Q.121 Q.128 Q. 135 Q 142
D A B A D D C C B A D A C A B B A C D A B
Q3 Q.10 Q.17 Q.24 Q.31 Q.38 Q.45 Q.52 Q.59 Q.66 Q.73 Q.80 Q.87 Q.94 Q.101 Q.l08
Q.115 Q.122 Q.129 Q.136 Q.143 Q.2 Q.6 Q.10 Q.14 Q.18 Q.22
C D C A C C B D B C A A B C B D D B A B A
Q.4 Q.ll Q.18 Q.25 Q.32 Q.39 Q.46 Q.53 Q.60 Q.67 Q.74 Q.81 Q.88 Q.95 Q.l02 Q.l09
Q.116 Q.123 Q.130 Q.137 Q.144
A C A B A A A A A B C D B A C A C B B D D
Q5 Q.12 Q.19 Q.26 Q.33 Q.40 Q.47 Q.54 Q.61 Q.68 Q.75 Q.82 Q.89 Q.96 Q.103 Q. 110
Q.117 Q.124 Q.131 Q. 138 Q.145
C A B D D D C A B C C A D B B D D B A D A
Q.6 A Q.13 C Q.20 C Q.27 A Q.34 A Q.41 A Q.48 D Q.55 A Q.62 C Q.69 B Q.76 C Q.83
D Q.90 C Q.97 B Q.104 D Q.lll D Q.118 A Q.125 C Q.132 C Q.139 C Q.146B Q.4
Q.7 Q.14 Q.21 Q.28 Q.35 Q.42 Q.49 Q.56 Q.63 Q.70 Q.77 Q.84 Q.91 Q.98 Q.105 Q. 11
2 Q. 119 Q.126 Q.133 Q. 140 Q.147
B B B C D C A B B C C D A C C B B B C A D
B,C B,C B,C,D AB C AC
AB,C,D AC AB AB AB,C AD
Q3 B,D
Q.7 Q.ll Q.15 Q.19 Q.23
C AC B,D C A,C
Q8
Q.12 Q.16 Q.20 Q.24
A B,C,D D B,C,D B,C B,C,D
<f§ Bansal Classes
[23]
I BANSALCLASSES
^ TARGET IIT JEE 2007
CONTENTS
KEY CONCEPT EXERCISE-I EXERCISE-II EXERCISE-III ANSWER KEY
KEY CONCEPTS 1. (0 (ii) 2. LAWS OF REFLECTION : The incident ray (AB), the refle
cted ray (BC) and normal (NN') to the surface (SC) ofreflection at the point of
incidence (B) lie in the same plane. This plane is called the plane of incidence
(also plane of reflection). The angle of incidence (the angle between normal an
d the incident ray) and the angle of reflection (the angle between the reflected
ray and the normal) are equal Zi = Zr OBJECT: Real: Pointfromwhich rays actuall
y diverge. Virtual: Point towards which rays appear to converge IMAGE: Image is
decided by reflected or refracted rays only. The point image for a mirror is tha
t point Towards which the rays reflectedfromthe mirror, actually converge (real
image). OR From which the reflected rays appear to diverge (virtual image). CHAR
ACTERISTICS OF REFLECTION BY A PLANE MIRROR : The size ofthe image is the same a
s that of the object. For a real object the image is virtual and for a virtual o
bject the image is real. For a fixed incident light ray, ifthe mirror be rotated
through an angle 6 the reflected ray turns through an angle 20. SPHERICAL MIRRO
RS:
(a)
3. (i)
(b)
(ii) 4.
(a) (c)
5.
(b)
B B Convex Concave 6. PARAXIAL RAYS: Rays which forms very small angle with axis
are called paraxial rays. 7. SIGN CONVENTION : We follow cartesian co-ordinate
system convention according to which (a) The pole ofthe mirror is the origin. (b
) The direction ofthe incident rays is considered as positive x-axis. (c) Vertic
ally up is positive y-axis. Note According to above convention radius of curvatu
re and focus of concave mirror is negative and of convex mirror is positive. MIR
ROR FORMULA: 1 = 1 + 1 8. f v u f = x-coordinate of focus u = x-coordinate of ob
j ect ; v=x-coordinate of image Note : Valid only for paraxial rays.
&Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
12]
10.
11.
—= V TRANSVERSE MAGNIFICATION m= h u h, h = y co-ordinate of images h, = y co-ordi
nate of the obj ect (both perpendicular to the principle axis of mirror) NEWTON'
S FORMULA : Applicable to a pair of real object and real image position only. Th
ey are called conjugate positions or foci. X, Y are the distance along the princ
ipal axis ofthe real object and real image respectively from the principal focus
. XY = f OPTICAL POWER: Optical power of a mirror (in Diopters)=- f\ f = focal l
ength (in meters) with sign.
2 2 2
REFRACTION -PLANE SURFACE 1. (i) (ii) LAWS OF REFRACTION (AT ANY REFRACTING SURF
ACE) : The incident ray (AB), the normal (NN') to the refracting surface (II') a
t the point of incidence (B) and the refracted ray (BC) all lie in the same plan
e called the plane of incidence or plane of refraction. for any two given media
and for light ofa given wave length. This is known as
SNELL'S L a w .
Sin i = Constant Sin r
Note : Frequency oflight does not change during refraction. 2. DEVIATION OFARAYD
UE TO REFRACTION
\ | angle of | deviation i |1 5=i-r
3. (i) (ii)
REFRACTION THROUGH A PARALLEL SLAB : Emerged ray is parallel to the incident ray
, ifmedium is same on both sides. Lateral shift t = thickness of slab
t sin(i - r) cosr
N J B
FRV-.. N'
!
\
AIR GLASS(M)
Note : Emerged ray will not be parallel to the incident ray ifthe medium on both
the sides are different.
^Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[3]
4.
APPARENT DEPTH OF SUBMERGED OBJECT : II I
h h' L
x
/ / / .* // / /
•'/
\
O
(h'<h) at near normal incidence h ' - ^ h Note : h and h' are always measuredfro
msurface. 5. CRITICAL ANGLE & TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION (T. I. R.)
(i) (ii)
6.
CONDITIONS OF T. I. R. Ray goingfromdenser to rarer medium Angle of incidence sh
ould be greater than the critical angle (i > c). Critical angle C = sin" — n
1 ;
REFRACTION THROUGH PRISM:
1. 2. 3. 4.
5 = (i + i') - (r + r') r + r' = A Variation of 8 versus i (shown in diagram). T
here is one and only one angle of incidence for which the angle ofdeviation is m
inimum. When 8 = 8 then i = i' & r = r', the ray passes symetrically about the p
rism, & then
m
-
1 1 i i1 , min i=i' 90° (e=90°)
A
where n = absolute R.I. of glass. Note : When the prism is dipped in a medium th
en n = R.I. of glass w.r.t. medium.
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
For a thin prism (A <10°) ; 8 = ( n - l ) A DISPERSION OF LIGHT : The angular spil
itting of a ray ofwhite light into a number of components when it is refracted i
n a medium other than air is called Dispersion of Light. Angle of Dispersion: An
gle between the rays of the extreme colours in the refracted (dispersed) light 7
. is called Angle of Dispersion . 6 = 5 - 8 . Dispersive power (oo) ofthe medium
of the material ofprism. 8. angular dispersion mean ray © v deviation of mean ray
(yellow) For small angled prism (A < 10°) n +n 8 -8 n -n 00=—^—- = —-—— ;n = n-1 n , n & n
are R. I. of material for violet, red & yellow colours respectively. 9. COMBINAT
ION OF TWO PRISMS : (i) ACHROMATIC COMBINATION: It is used for deviation without
dispersion. Condition for this (n -n) A = (n' - n' ) A'. n +n n.', + n; 1 1 A'.
Net mean deviation = or oo8 + G)'8' = 0 where co, co' are dispersive powers for
the two prisms & 8,8' are the mean deviation. (ii) DIRECT VISION COMBINATION: I
t is used for producing disperion without deviation condition n„ + n n' + n» for thi
s A'. Net angle of dispersion = (n - n) A = (n ' - n') A'. REFRACTION AT SPERICA
L SURFACE l.(a) £2 u V R v, u & R are to be kept with sign + vex 0 p as v = PI c I
u = -PO R = PC (Note radius is with sign) m mV (b) 1^2 2. LENS FORMULA: • + ve (a
) v u J (b) (H-l) V i 2 y J (c) m = u
v r r R v R v R v v r v R D v v
5. 6.
\
:
u
R
R
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
EXERCISE # III
Q. 1 Two plane mirrors are inclined at angle 0 as shown in figure. If a ray para
llel to OB strikes the other mirror at P andfinallyemerges parallel to OA after
two reflection thenfind0. Q. 2 Q. 3 A ray of light falls on a transparent sphere
with centre at C as shown in figure. The ray emerges from the sphere parallel t
o line AB. Find the refractive index ofthe sphere. Face AC of a right angled pri
sm (j4, =1.5) coated with a thinfilmof liquid as ^(yuuuumiii^ shown infigure.Lig
ht is allowed to fall normally on the face AB ofthe prism. In order that the ray
oflight gets totally reflected, what can be the maximum refractive index ofliqu
id? B
y
0777777777777777777777 B
Q. 4 Q.5 Q. 6 j Q. 7
A tiny air bubble inside a glass slab appears to be 6 cm deep when viewed form o
ne side and 4 cm deep when viewedfromthe other side. Assuming |i = 3/2. Find the
thickness of slab.
glass
A prism ofrefractive index has a refracting angle of 30°. One of the refracting su
rfaces of the prism is polished. For the beam of monochromatic light to retrace
its path,findthe angle of incidence on the refracting surface. A plano-convex le
ns, when silvered on the plane side, behaves like a concave mirror of focal leng
th 30 cm. When it is silvered on the convex side, it behaves like a concave mirr
or of focal length 10 cm. Find the refractive index ofthe material ofthe lens. A
light ray I is incident on a plane mirror M. The mirror is rotated in the 9 dir
ection as shown in the figure by an arrow at frequency — rev/sec. 71 The light ref
lected by the mirror is received on the wall W at a distance 10 m from the axis
of rotation. When the angle of incidence becomes 77777777jj 37°findthe speed of th
e spot (a point) on the wall?
M
Q.8
Two thin convex lenses of focal lengths f, and f are separated by a horizontal d
istance d where (d<f d<f,)& their centres are displaced by a vertical separation
5 as shown in the figure.Taking the origin of coordinates O, at the centre ofth
efirstlens,findthe x & y coordinates ofthe focal point ofthis lens system, for a
parallel beam ofrays coming from the left.
2 p
-
^(
> y
2
>\
Q.9
A concave mirror of focal length 20 cm is cut into two parts from the _______ J*
r 10cm V , middle and the two parts are moved perpendicularly by a distance 1cm
ALLCM~ from the previous principal axis AB. Find the distance between the images
formed by the two parts? - 2
M
B
<!\Bansal Classes
Q. 10 A balloon is rising up along the axis of a concave mirror of radius of cur
vature 20 m. A ball is dropped from the balloon at a height 15mfromthe mirror wh
en the balloon has velocity 20 m/s. Find the speed ofthe image of the ball forme
d by concave mirror after 4 seconds? [Take: g= 10 m/s ]
Geometrical Optics
[6]
Q.ll An obj ect is kept on the principal axis of a convex mirror of focal length
10 cm at a distance of 10 cm \ from the pole. The object starts moving at a vel
ocity 20 mm/sec towards the mirror at angle 30° with the principal axis. What will
be the speed of its image and direction with the principal axis at that instant
? Q.12 A thin rod of length d/3 is placed along the principal axis ofa concave m
irror of focal length=d such that its image, which is real and elongated, just t
ouches the rod. Find the length of the image? Q.13 A point object is placed 33 c
m from a convex mirror of curvature radius = 40 cm. A glass plate of thickness 6
cm and index 2.0 is placed between the object and mirror, close to the mirror.
Find the distance of final imagefromthe object? Q.14 A long solid cylindrical gl
ass rod ofrefractive index 3/2 is immersed in a
3-Jl liquid of refractive index ——. The ends ofthe rod are perpendicular to the cent
ral axis of the rod. a light enters one end of the rod at the central axis as sh
own in thefigure.Find the maximum value of angle 0 for which internal reflection
occurs inside the rod?
Q.15 A ray of light moving along the unit vector (- i - 2 j) undergoes refractio
n at an interface oftwo media, which is the x-z plane. The refractive index for
y > 0 is 2 while fory<0, itis -Js/'l- Find the unit vector along which the refra
cted ray moves? Q.16 A slab of glass of thickness 6 cm and index 1.5 is place so
mewhere in between a concave mirror and a point object, perpendicular to the mir
ror's optical axis. The radius of curvature ofthe mirror is 40 cm. If the reflec
tedfinalimage coincides with the object, thenfindthe distance of the objectfromt
he mirror? Q.17 A ray of light from a liquid (p = ^3 ) is incident on a system o
f tworight-angledprisms ofrefractive indices V3 and v2 as shown in the figure. T
he ray oflight suffers zero net deviation when it emerges into airfromthe surfac
e CD. Find the angle of incidence?
liquid
Q.18 A ray of light enters a diamond (n=2) from air and is being internally / re
flected near the bottom as shown in thefigure.Find maximum value of angle 0 poss
ible?
135°
Q.19 A parallel beam oflight is incident on a transparent sphere ofrefractive in
dex 'n'. Ifthe beamfinallygets focussed at a point situated at a distance=2 x (r
adius of sphere)fromthe centre ofthe sphere, thenfindn? Q.20 A uniform, horizont
al beam oflight is incident upon a quarter cylinder of radius R=5 cm, and has a
refractive index 2/V3 • A patch on the table for a distance 'x'fromthe cylinder is
unilluminated.findthe value of'x'?
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
Q.21 A thin converging lens Lj forms a real image of an object located far away
from the lens as shown in the figure. The image is located at a distance 4/ and
has height h. A diverging lens offocal length I is placed 21fromlens Lj at A. An
other converging lens of focal length 21 is placed 3/fromlens Lj at B. Find the
height offinalimage thus formed? Q.22 An object is placed at a certain distancef
roma screen. A convex lens of focal length 40 cm is placed between the screen an
d the obj ect. A real image is formed on the screen for two positions ofthe lens
, which differ by a distance of 10 Vl7 cm. Find the distance ofthe obj ectfromth
e screen? Q.23 A point object is placed at a distance of 25 cmfroma convex lens
of focal length 20 cm. If a glass slab of thickness t and refractive index 1.5 i
s inserted between the lens and object. The image is formed at infinity. Find th
e thickness t ? Q .24 An object is kept at a distance of 16 cmfroma thin lens an
d the image formed is real. Ifthe object is kept at a distance of 6 cmfromthe sa
me lens the image formed is virtual. Ifthe size ofthe image formed are equal, th
enfindthe focal length ofthe lens? Q.25 A thin convex lens forms a real image of
a certain object 'p' times its size. The size of real image becomes 'q' times t
hat of object when the lens is moved nearer to the object by a distance 'a'findf
ocal length ofthe lens? Q.26 A diverging lens of focal length 10 cm is placed 10
cm infrontofa plane mirror as shown in thefigure.Lightfroma very far away sourc
e falls on the lens. Find the image of source due to plane mirror (before hittin
g lens again) at a distance from mirror? Q.27 In the figure shown, the focal len
gth ofthe two thin convex lenses is the same = f. They are separated by a horizo
ntal distance 3f and their optical axes are displaced by a vertical separation'd
' (d « f ) , as shown. Taking the origin of coordinates O at the centre ofthe firs
t lens,findthe x and y coordinates ofthe point where a parallel beam ofrays comi
ngfromthe leftfinallyget focussed? Q.28 A point source oflight is kept at a dist
ance of 15 cmfroma converging lens, on its optical axis. The focal length of the
lens is 10 cm and its diameter is 3 cm. A screen is placed on the other side of
the lens, perpendicular to the axis of lens, at a distance 20 cmfromit. Thenfin
dthe area ofthe illuminated part of the screen? Q.29 Consider a "beam expander'
which consists oftwo converging lenses of focal lengths 40 cm and 100 cm having
a common optical axis. A laser beam of diameter 4 mm is incident on the 40 cm fo
cal length lens. The diameter ofthefinalbeam will be (see figure) Q.30 An equila
teral prism deviates a ray through 23° for two angles ofincidence differing by 23°.
Find p ofthe prism? List of recommended questions from I.E. Irodov. 5.13 to 17,5
.21 to 24,5.26,5.27,5.31,5.34 to 37 f [?
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
EXERCISE # III
Q. 1 An observer whose least distance of distinct vision is'd', views his own fa
ce in a convex mirror of radius r of curvature 'r'. Prove that magnification pro
duced can not exceed ~— Q. 2 Two identical convex lenses Lj and L are placed at a
distance of20 cmfromeach other on the common principal axis. The focal length of
each lens is 15 cm and the lens L is to the right of lens A. A point object is
placed at a distance of 20 cm on the left of lens L on the common axis of two le
nses. Find, where a convex mirror ofradius of curvature 5 cm should be placed so
that the final image coincides with the object? Q. 3 A thin converging lens is
arranged between a small illuminated object & a screen so that an image ofthe ob
ject of linear magnification 3 is formed on a screen. The object and the screen
are then 64 cm apart. A thin biconcave lens is then placed between the convergin
g lens & the screen so that the lenses are coaxial & 6 cm apart. To restore a sh
arply focussed image on the image screen the object was moved awayfromthe conver
ging lens through a distance of 14 cm. The biconcave lens has a surface ofradii
of curvature 14 cm & 21 cm. Calculate the focal length of the biconcave lens. Al
so find the R. I. of the biconcave lens.
2 2 p
Q. 4
A surveyor on one bank of canal observed the image of the 4 inch and 17ftmarks o
n a vertical staff, which is partially immersed in the water and held against th
e bank directly opposite to him, coincides. If the 17ft mark and the surveyor's
eye are both 6ft above the water level, estimate the width ofthe canal, assuming
that the refractive index ofthe water is 4/3. Two thin similar watch glass piec
es are joined together,fronttofront,with rear portion silvered and the combinati
on of glass pieces is placed at a distance a = 60 cm from a screen. A small obje
ct is placed normal to the optical axis of the combination such that its two tim
es magnified image is formed on the screen. If air between the glass pieces is r
eplaced by water (jx = 4/3), calculate the distance through which the object mus
t be displaced so that a sharp image is again formed on the screen. A concave mi
rror has the form of a hemisphere with a radius of R=60 cm. A thin layer of an u
nknown transparent liquid is poured into the mirror. The mirror-liquid system fo
rms one real image and another real image is formed by mirror alone, with the so
urce in a certain position. One of them coincides with the source and the other
is at a distance of /=30 cm from source. Find the possible value(s) refractive i
ndex ji ofthe liquid. A ray of light refracted through a sphere, whose material
has refractive index (i in such a way that it passes through the extremities of
two radii which make an angle 0 with each other. Prove that if a is the deviatio
n of the ray caused by its passage through the sphere 1 cos—(0-a) = ( . cos— J 0 In
the figure shown, find the relative speed of approach/separation ofthe two final
images formed after the light rays pass through the lens, at the moment when u=
30 cm. The speed object = 4 cm/s. The two lens halves are placed symmetrically w
.r.t. the moving object.
f=40cm
Q. 5
Q. 6
Q. 7
Q. 8
u
<!\Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[6]
Q.9
Three right angled prisms of refractive indices \x2 and |x are j oined together
so that the faces ofthe middle prism in are in contact each with one of the outs
ide prisms. If the ray passes through the composite block undeviated, show that
fi, + fx - ja = 1.
3 2 3 2 2 2 2
Q. 10 Two rays are incident on a spherical mirror ofradius ofR=5 cm parallel to
its optical axis at the distance hj = 0.5 cm and h = 3 cm. Determine the distanc
e Ax between the points at which these rays intersect the optical axis after bei
ng reflected at the mirror. Q. 11 A beam oflight is incident vertically on a gla
ss hemisphere ofradius R lying with its plane side on a table. The axis ofthe be
am coincides with the vertical axis passing through the centre ofthe base ofthe
hemisphere and the radius r of the cross section ofthe beam is smaller than R. F
ind the radius ofthe luminous spot formed on the table.
0
Q. 12 In the figure shown Lisa converging lens of focal length 10cm and M is a c
oncave mirror of radius of curvature 20cm. A point object O is placed infrontoft
he lens at a distance 15cm. AB and CD are optical axes of the lens and mirror re
spectively. Find the distance ofthe final image formed by this systemfromthe opt
ical centre of the lens. The distance between CD & AB is 1 cm.
0
-15cmH
c
1 { 1cm £ D J M a
-45cm-
Q.13 A thiefis running away in a car with velocity of20 m/s. A police jeep is fo
llowing him, which is sighted by thief in his rear view mirror which is a convex
mirror of focal length 10 m. He observes that the image of jeep is moving towar
ds him with a velocity of 1 cm/s. Ifthe magnification ofthe mirror for the jeep
at that time is 1/10. Find (a) actual speed ofjeep (b) rate at which magnificati
on is changing. Assume that police jeep is on axis of the mirror. Q.14 The figur
e illustrates an aligned system consisting ofthree thin lenses. The system is lo
cated in air. Determine: 5cm 5cm o(a) the position (relative to right most lens)
of the point of convergence ofa parallel ray incomingfromthe left after passing
through the system; +IO.OD -IO.'DD +IO.OD (b) The distance between thefirstlens
and a point lying on the axis to the left ofthe system, at which that point and
its image are located symmetrically with respect to the lens system? Q.15 A cir
cular disc ofdiameter d lies horizontally inside a metallic hemispherical bowl r
adius a. The disc is just visible to an eye looking over the edge. The bowl is n
owfilledwith a liquid ofrefractive index j-i. Now, the whole ofthe / 2 IN disc i
s just visible to the eye in the same position. Show that d = 2a —•=
O +1)
Q, 16 A luminous point P is inside a circle. A ray entersfromP and after two ref
lections by the circle, return to P. If 0 be the angle of incidence, a the dista
nce of Pfromthe centre of the circle and b the distance of the centrefromthe poi
nt where the ray in its course crosses the diameter through P, prove that tan0=
a + b
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
Q.17 A glass wedge with a small angle of refraction 9 is placed at a certain dis
tance from a convergent lens with a focal length f, one surface of the wedge bei
ng perpendicular to the optical axis ofthe lens. A point sources S oflight is on
the other side ofthe lens at its focus. The rays reflected from the wedge (notf
rombase) produce, after refraction in the lens, two images of the source displac
ed with respect to each other by d. Find the refractive index ofthe wedge glass.
Q.18 An opaque sphere of radius R lies on a horizontal plane. On the perpendicu
lar through the point of contact there is a point source oflight a distance R ab
ove the sphere. (a) Show that the area of the shadow on the plane is 37iR . (b)
A transparent liquid of refractive index V3 is filled above the plane such that
the sphere is j ust covered with the liquid. Show that the area of shadow now be
comes 2TCR .
2
2
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
EXERCISE # III
Q.l Arayof light travelling in air is incident at grazing angle (incident AIR P(
xi,y,) angle=90°) on a long rectangular slab of a transparent medium of thickness
t = 1.0 (see figure). The point of incidence is the ,-*'B(x,y) origin A (0,0). T
he medium has a variable index ofrefraction n(y) given by: n (y) - [ky + 1 ] , w
here k = 1.0 mr . Medium . Air (0,0) The refractive index of air is 1.0. Obtain
a relation between the slope ofthe traj ectory oftherayat a point B (x, y) in th
e medium and the incident angle at that point. Obtain an equation for the trajec
tory y (x) ofthe ray in the medium. Determine the coordinates (Xj, y,) of the po
int P, where the ray the ray intersects the upper surface of the slab-air bounda
ry. Indicate the path of the ray subsequently. [JEE '95]
3/2 m vi
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Q.2 E (i) (ii) Q.3 £
Aright angle prism(45°-90°-45°) of refractive index n hasaplate ofrefractive index n (
n, < n) cemented to its diagonal face. The assembly is in air. a ray is incident
on AB (see the figure). Calculate the angle of incidence at AB for which the ra
y strikes the diagonal face at the critical angle. Assuming n = 1.352. Calculate
the angle of incidence at AB for which the refracted ray passes through the dia
gonal face undeviated. [JEE'96]
t
A thin plano-convex. Lens of focal length F is split into two halves, one ofthe
halves is shifted along the optical axis. The separation between object and imag
e planes is 1.8 m. The magnification ofthe image formed by one of the half lense
s is 2. Find the focal length of the lens and separation between the two halves.
Draw the ray diagram for image formation. [JEE '96]
1.8 m
Q. 4 Q.5
Which ofthe following form(s) a virtual & erect image for all positions ofthe re
al obj ect ? (A) Convex lens (B) Concave lens (C) Convex mirror (D) Concave mirr
or [JEE '96] A small fish, 0.4mbelowthe surface ofa lake, is viewed through a si
mple converging lens of focal length 3 m. The lens is kept at 0.2m above the wat
er surface such that thefishlies on the optical axis of the lens. Find the image
of thefishseen by the observer. The refractive index of the water is 4/3. [REE
'96]
Q.6(i)An eye specialist prescribes spectacles having a combination of convex len
s of focal length 40 cm in contact with a concave lens of focal length 25 cm. Th
e power ofthis lens combination in diopters is: (A) + 1.5 (B) - 1.5 (C) + 6.67 (
D) - 6.67 [JEE'97]
<!\Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[6]
(ii)
A thin equiconvex lens of glass of refractive index |i=3/2 & of focal length 0.3
m in air is sealed into an opening at one end of a tank filled with water (n =
4/3). On the opposite side of the lens, a mirror is placed inside the tank on th
e tank wall perpendicular to the lens axis, as shown in figure. The separation b
etween the lens and the mirror is 0.8 m. A small object is placed outside the ta
nk in front of the lens at a distance of 0.9 m from the lens along its axis. Fin
d the position (relative to the lens) ofthe image ofthe object formed by the sys
tem. [JEE' 97]
0.9m
0.8m
Q. 7 Select the correct alternative(s): [JEE '98] (i) A concave mirror is placed
on a horizontal table, with its axis directed vertically upwards. Let O be t th
e pole ofthe mirror & C its centre of curvature. A point obj ect is placed at C.
It has a real image, also located at C. Ifthe mirror is nowfilledwith water, th
e image will be: (A) real, & will remain at C (B) real, & located at a point bet
ween C & co (C) virtual, & located at a point between C & O (D) real, & located
at a point between C & O. (ii) £ (iii) A ray of light travelling in a transparent
medium falls on a surface separating the medium from air at an angle of incidenc
e of 45°. The ray undergoes total internal reflection. Ifn is the refractive index
of the medium with respect to air, select the possible value(s) of nfromthe fol
lowing : (A) 1.3 (B) 1.4 (C) 1.5 (D) 1.6 A spherical surface of radius of curvat
ure R separates air (refractive index 1.0)fromglass (refractive index 1.5). The
centre of curvature is in the glass. A point object P placed in air is found to
have a real image Q in the glass. The line PQ cuts the surface at a point O and
PO = OQ. The distance PO is equal to: (A) 5R (B) 3R (C) 2R (D) 1.5R A prism of r
efractive index n, & another prism of refractive index I , L are stuck together
without a gap as shown in thefigure.The angles of the prisms are as shown. n, &
n2 depend on X, the wavelength of light according to n, = 1.20 + 10.8xl0 & n = 1
.45 + 1.80xl0
4 4 2 2 2
Q. 8
where X is in nm. (l)^ Calculate the wavelength X0 for which rays incident at an
y angle on the interface BC pass through without bending at that interface. (ii)
For light ofwavelength X0,findthe angle of incidence i on the face AC such that
the deviation produced by the combination ofprisms is minimum. [JEE'98]
Q£
X
X
V
(!%Bansal Classes
A rod made of glass (fa = 1.5) and of square cross-section is bent into the shap
e shown infigure.Aparallel beam oflight falls perpendicularly on the planeflatsu
rface A. Referring to the diagram, d is the width of a side & R is the radius of
inner d semicircle. Find the maximum value ofratio — so that all light entering t
he glass R through surface A emergefromthe glass through surface B. [REE '98]
*
frx\
semi circle
Geometrical Optics
[10]
M
Q.10 A concave lens of glass, refractive index 1.5, has both surfaces of same ra
dius of curvature R. On immersion in a medium ofrefractive index 1.75, it will b
ehave as a [JEE '99] (A) convergent lens of focal length 3.5R (B) convergent len
s of focal length 3.0 R. (C) divergent lens of focal length 3.5 R (D) divergent
lens of focal length 3.0 R Q.ll The x-y plane is the boundary between two transp
arent media. Medium-1 with z > 0 has refractive index V2 and medium - 2 with z <
0 has a refractive index V3 .Aray oflight in medium -1 given by the vector A =
6^3 i + 8^3 j — 10k is incident on the plane of separation. Find the unit vector i
n the direction of refracted ray in medium -2. [JEE '99] Q.12 A quarter cylinder
of radius R and refractive index 1.5 is placed on a table. A point object P is
kept at a distance ofmRfromit. Find the value ofm for which a ray from P will em
erge parallel to the table as shown in the figure. [JEE '99]
2 T p
Q.13 Two symmetric double-convex lenses L, and L with their radii of curvature 0
.2m each are made from glasses with refractive index 1.2 and 1.6 respectively. T
he lenses with a separation of0.345 m are submerged in a transparent liquid medi
um with a refractive index of 1.4. Find the focal lengths of lens L, and L An ob
ject is placed at a distance of 1.3 mfromL find the location of its image while
the whole system remains inside the liquid. [REE' 99]
r p
Q. 14 Select the correct alternative. [JEE '2000 (Scr)] (a) A diverging beam ofl
ightfroma point source S having divergence angle a, falls symmetrically on a gla
ss slab as shown. The angles of incidence of the two extreme rays are equal. If
the thickness of the glass slab is t and the refractive index n, then the diverg
ence angle ofthe emergent beam is (A) zero (B) a (C) sin (l/n) (D) 2sin~ (l/n)
s _1 i
(b)
A rectangular glass slab ABCD, of refractive index nj, is immersed in water ofre
fractive index n^n > r^). Aray oflight is incident at the surface AB of the slab
as shown. The maximum value ofthe angle of incidence a , such that the ray come
s out onlyfromthe other surface CD is given by -1 n. (B) sin" n, cos sm (A) sm n
. -cos sin n ni ) 1y
max
"2 c
-1
n
2
(C) sin" (c)
n, V2 )
n
(D) sin -1
n. v iy
n
A point source oflight B is placed at a distance L in front ofthe centre ofa mir
ror ofwidth d hung vertically on a wall. A man walks infrontof the mirror along
a line parallel to the mirror at a distance 2Lfromit as shown. The greatest dist
ance over which he can see the image ofthe light source in the mirror is (A)d/2
(B)d (C) 2d (D) 3d
B.
i< >1
L
2L
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
(d)
A hollow double concave lens is made ofvery thin transparent material. It can be
filled with air or either oftwo liquids L, or L having refractive indices n, an
d n, respectively (n >n > 1). The lens will diverge a parallel beam oflight if i
t isfilledwith (A) air and placed in air. (B) air and immersed in L,. (C) L, and
immersed in L (D) L and immersed inL
2 2 ) r 2 r
Q.15 A convex lens of focal length 15 cm and a concave mirror of focal length 30
cm are kept with their optic axes PQ and RS parallel but separated in vertical
direction by 0.6 cm as shown. The distance between the lens and mirror is 30 cm.
An upright object AB ofheight 1.2 cm is placed on the optic axis PQ of the lens
at a distance of 20 cmfromthe lens. IfA' B' is the image after refraction from
the lens and reflectionfromthe mirror,findthe distance A' B' from the pole ofthe
mirror and obtain its magnification. Also locate positions of A' and B' with re
spect to the optic axis RS. [JEE 2000] Q.16 A thin equi biconvex lens ofrefracti
ve index 3/2 is placed on a horizontal plane mirror as shown in thefigure.The sp
ace between the lens and the mirror is then filled with water of refractive inde
x 4/3. It is found that when a point object is placed 15cm above the lens on its
principal axis, the object coincides with its own image. On repeating with anot
her liquid, the object and the image again coincide at a distance 25cm from the
lens. Calculate the refractive index ofthe liquid. [JEE 2001 ]
viiiiTiiriniirminiiin;
Q.17 The refractive indices ofthe crown glass for blue and red lights are 1.51 a
nd 1.49 respectively and those of the flint glass are 1.77 and 1.73 respectively
. An isosceles prism of angle 6° is made of crown glass. A beam of white light is
incident at a small angle on this prism. The other flint glass isosceles prism i
s combined with the crown glass prism such that there is no deviation ofthe inci
dent light. Determine the angle of the flint glass prism. Calculate the net disp
ersion ofthe combined system. [JEE 2001 ] Q.18 An observer can see through a pin
-hole the top end of a thin rod of height h, placed as shown in thefigure.The be
aker height is 3h and its radius h. When the beaker isfilledwith a liquid up to
a height 2h, he can see the lower end of the rod. Then the refractive index ofth
e liquid is (A) 5/2 (B)V572 (Q JJ/2 (D) 3/2 [JEE 2002 (Scr)] Q.19 Which one of t
he following spherical lenses does not exhibit dispersion? The radii of curvatur
e of the surfaces ofthe lenses are as given in the diagrams. [JEE 2002 (Scr)] (A
) R
R,*R
2
(B)R
(C)R
(D)
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
Q.20 Two plane mirrors A and Bare aligned parallel to each other, as shown in th
e figure. A light ray is incident at an angle of 30° at a pointjust inside •"""uiunu
iiiainiu one end ofA. The plane of incidence coincides with the plane of the 0.2
m ,0 3 figure. The maximum number oftimes the ray undergoes reflections ,, (inc
luding thefirstone) before it emerges out is [JEE 2002 (Scr)] (A) 28 (B)30 (C) 3
2 (D)34
|c
Q.21 Aconvex lens of focal length 30 cm forms an image of height 2 cm for an obj
ect situated at infinity. If a convcave lens of focal length 20 cm is placed coa
xially at a distance of 26 cm in front ofconvex lens then size image would be [J
EE 2003 (Scr)] (A) 2.5 cm (B)5.0 (C) 1.25 (D)None Q.22 A meniscus lens is made o
f a material of refractive index Both its surfaces have radii of curvature R. It
has two different media of refractive indices (ij and |x respectively, on its t
wo sides (see figure). Calculate its focal length for jx j < \x2 < |a , when lig
ht is incident on it as shown. [JEE 2003]
3 3
HI j
R
ft ft/
VR
/
ft<ft<ft
Q .23 White light is incident on the interface of glass and air as shown in thef
igure.If green light is just totally internally reflected then the emerging ray
in air contains (A) yellow, orange, red (B) violet, indigo, bliie (C) all colour
s (D) all coloure except green [JEE 2004 (Scr)]
Green
Glass
Q.24 A ray of light is incident on an equilateral glass prism placed on a horizo
ntal table. For minimum deviation which ofthe following is true ? [JEE 2004 (Scr
)] (A) PQ is horizontal (B)QR is horizontal (C)RS is horizontal (D) Either PQ or
RS is horizontal. Q.25 A point object is placed at the centre of a glass sphere
of radius 6 cm and refractive index 1.5. The distance ofthe virtual imagefromth
e surface of the sphere is [JEE 2004 (Scr)] (A) 2 cm (B) 4 cm (C)6cm (D)12cm Q.
2 6 Figure shows an irregular block of material of refractive index *J~2 . A ray
of light strikes the face AB as shown in the figure. After refraction it is inc
ident on a spherical surface CD of radius of curvature 0.4 m and p enters a medi
um of refractive index 1.514 to meet PQ at E. Find the distance OE upto two plac
es of decimal. [JEE 2004] Q.27 An object is approaching a thin convex lens of fo
cal length 0.3 m with a speed of 0.01 m/s. Find the magnitudes of the rates of c
hange ofposition and lateral magnification of image when the obj ect is at a dis
tance of 0.4 mfromthe lens. [JEE 2004] Q. 2 8 The ratio of powers of a thin conv
ex and thin concave lens is — and equivalent focal length of their combination is
30 cm. Then their focal lengths respectively are [JEE' 2005 (Scr)] (A) 75,-50 (B
) 75,50 (C)10,-15 (D)-75,50
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
Q.29 Figure shows obj ect O. Final image I is formed after two refractions and o
ne reflection is also shown in figure. Find the focal length ofmirror, (in cm):
(A) 10 (B) 15 (C) 20 (D) 25 [JEE 2005 (Scr)] Q.30 What will be the minimum angle
ofincidence such that the total internal reflection occurs on both the surfaces
? [JEE 2005]
n=4/3
1
Q.31 Two identical prisms of refractive index V3 are kept as shown in thefigure.
A light ray strikes the first prism at face AB. Find, (a) the angle of incidence
, so that the emergent rayfromthefirstprism has minimum deviation. (b) through w
hat angle the prism DCE should be rotated about C so that thefinalemergent ray a
lso has minimum deviation. [JEE 2005]
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE # /
Q.3 Q.7 Q.9 Q.l Q.5 60° 45° Q.2 S Q.6 1.5 f f +d(f ~d) 5(f -d) f f -d ' ~ f f - d
1 2 1 r 1 + 2 y 1 + 2 1
1.3 1000 m/s 2 cm
Q.4
15 cm
Q.10 80 m/s Q.13 42 cm Q.17 45° Q.21 2h apq Q.25 7 — r Q.28 (7i/4) cm
, 2 V7 Q.ll tan y- with the principal axis, —j- cm/sec Q.12 d/2 4 Q.14 sin" 1 Q.15
( - 4 i - 3 j) Q.16 42 cm
1
Q.18 sin-
1
V2
Q.19 4/3
Q.20 5 cm Q.24 11cm Q.27 (5f, 2d)
Q.22 1.70 m Q.23 15 cm Q.26 20 cm behind the mirror Q.29 1 cm Q.30 V43
2
EXERCISE # II
Q.2 5.9 cm,10.9 cm Q.3 f = - 2 1 cm, 1.4 Q.5 15 cm towards the combination Q.6 1
.5 or (V5-1) Q.10 5/8— 0.625 cm Q- = 4 - ( r / R ) } ^ - ( r / R ) } ( r / R ) |'
o Q.12 6^26 cm Q.13 (a) 21 m/s, (b) 1 x 10~ /sec Q.14 (a)3.3 cm, (b) / = (50/3)
cm Q.17 a/2f9
11 r 0 2 0 2 + 0 2 = i f r 3 < < R
Q.4 Q.8
16 feet 8/5 cm/s
EXERCISE # III
|V Q.l (a) tan9 = dx = coti (b) y = k ,4 (c) 4.0, 1
4 2
(d) It will become parallel to x-axis
Q.2 (i) sin" S^G/n -n, ) (ii) r, = sin" (n sin 45°) = 72.94° Q.3 f = 0.4m, separatio
n = 0.6 m Q.4 B,C Q.5 On the object itself Q.6 (i) B, (ii) 90 cm from the lens t
owards right Q.7 (i) D, (ii) C, D, (iii) A
2 2 _ n i
1
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
Q.8(i) \ = 600nm, n = 1.5 (ii) i = sin" (0.75) = 48.59°
1
Q
- (~J
9
max
Q-
10
A
Q.ll ? =
+ —^k(angleofincidence=60 ;r=45°) Q.12 m = 4/3 5V2 5 V2 Q. 13 f, = -70cm, f = 70cm,
V= 560 cm to the right of L Q. 14 (a) B (b) A > (c) D (d) D Q. 15 A' B' at 15 cm
to the right of mirror. B' is 0.3 cm above RS and A' is 1.5 cm below RS. Magnif
ication is 1.5 Q.16 1.6 Q.17 4° and -0.04° Q.18 B Q.19 C Q.20 B
0 2 2
Q.21 A
Q.25 C Q.27 Magnitude ofthe rate of change of lateral magnification is 0.3 sr .
Q.28 C Q.29 C Q.30 Max (Cj, c ) = 60° Q.31 (a) i = 60°, (b) 60° (anticlockwise)
1 2
Q.22 f = = - ^ _ Q.23 A Q.24 B 1 514x0 4 Q.26 ————— = 6.06 m correct upto two places of de
cimal.
v
(!%Bansal Classes
Geometrical Optics
[10]
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XII (ALL)
GRAVITATION
C O N T E N T S
EXERCISE-I EXERCISE-II EXERCISE-III ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE-III
Q. 1 Q. 2 Q. 3 A remote sensing satellite is revolving in an orbit of radius x t
he equator of earth. Find the area on earth surface in which satellite can not s
end message. Four masses (each of m)are placed at the vertices of a regular pyra
mid (triangular base) of side 'a'. Find the work done by the system while taking
them apart so that they form the pyramid of side '2a'.
1
A small mass and a thin uniform rod each of mass' m are positioned along the sam
e straight line as shown. Find the force of gravitational attraction exerted by
the rod on the. small mass. Q. 4 An object is projected vertically upwardfromthe
surface ofthe earth of mass M with a velocity such that the maximum height reac
hed is eight times the radius R ofthe earth. Calculate: (i) the initial speed of
projection (ii) the speed at halfthe maximum height. Q. 5 A satellite close to
the earth is in orbit above the equator with a period of rotation of 1.5 hours.
If it is above a point P on the equator at some time, it will be above P again a
fter time . Q. 6 A satellite is moving in a circular orbit around the earth. The
total energy ofthe satellite is E = - 2 x 10 J. The amount of energy to be impa
rted to the satellite to transfer it to a circular orbit where its potential ene
rgy is U= - 2 x 10 J is equal to . Q . 7 A rocket starts vertically upwards with
speed v . Show that its speed v at a height h is given by (2gh)
5 5 0 2 2
V ry where Ris the radius of the earth. Hence deduce the maximum height reached
by a rocket fired with speed equal to 90% of escape velocity. Q. 8 Q. 9 Find the
gravitationalfieldstrength and potential at the centre of arc of linear mass de
nsity X subtending an angle 2a at the centre. Apoint P lies on the axis of a fix
ed ring ofmass M and radius a, at a distance afromits centre C. A small particle
startsfromP and reaches C under gravitational attraction only. Its speed at C w
ill be _.
• °
v
fTM
Q. 10 Calculate the distancefromthe surface ofthe earth at which above and below
the surface acceleration due to gravity is the same. Q. 11 Consider two satelli
tes A and B of equal mass m, moving in the same circular orbit of radius r aroun
d the earth E but in opposite sense of rotation and therefore on a collision cou
rse (see figure). (a) In terms of Q M , m and rfindthe total mechanical energy E
+ E of the two satellite plus earth system before collision. (b) If the collisi
on is completely inelastic so that wreckage remains as one piece of tangled mate
rial (mass = 2m),findthe total mechanical energy immediately after collision. (c
) Describe the subsequent motion of the wreckage.
e A B
(!%Bansal Classes
Gravitation
[2]
Q.12 A particle is fired vertically from the surface of the earth with a velocit
y ku , where u is the escape velocity and k < 1. Neglecting air resistance and a
ssuming earth's radius as R . Calculate the height to which it will risefromthe
surface ofthe earth. Q.13 A satellite of mass m is orbiting the earth in a circu
lar orbit of radius r. It starts losing energy due to small air resistance at th
e rate of C J/ s. Then the time taken for the satellite to reach the earth is .
Q.14 Find the potential energy of a system of eight particles placed at the vert
ices of a cube of side L. Neglect the self energy ofthe particles. Q.15 A hypoth
etical planet of mass M has three moons each of equal mass 'm' each revolving in
the same circular orbit of radius R. The masses are equally spaced and I/ / / \
\ \\ thus form an equilateral triangle. Find: •fy \ ) (i) the total RE. ofthe sys
tem (ii) the orbital speed of each moon such that they maintain this configurati
on. Q.16 Two small dense stars rotate about their common centre of mass as a bin
ary system with the period
e e e
1 year for each. One star is of double the mass of the other and the mass of the
lighter one is - of the mass of the sun. Find the distance between the stars if
distance between the earth & the sun is R. Q.17 A sphere of radius R has its ce
ntre at the origin. It has a uniform mass density p except that there is a spher
ical hole of radius r=R/2 whose centre is at x=R/2 as infig.(a) Find gravitation
al field at points on the axis for x > R (ii) Show that the gravitationalfieldin
side the hole is uniform,findits magnitude and direction. Q.18 A body moving rad
ially awayfroma planet ofmass M, when at distance rfromplanet, explodes in such
a way that two ofits manyfragmentsmove in mutually perpendicular circular orbits
around the planet. What will be (a) then velocity in circular orbits. (b) maxim
um distance between the twofragmentsbefore collision and (c) magnitude oftheir r
elative velocity just before they collide. Q.19 The fastest possible rate ofrota
tion of a planet is that for which the gravitational force on material at the eq
uator barely provides the centripetal force needed for the rotation. (Why?) (a)
Show then that the corresponding shortest period ofrotation is given by
0
t' - VGp fWhere p is the density of the planet, assumed to be homogeneous. (b) E
valuate the rotation period assuming a density of 3.0 gm/cm , typical of many pl
anets, satellites, and asteroids. No such object is found to be spinning with a
period shorter than found by this analysis. Q.20 Athin spherical shell of total
mass M and radius R is heldfixed.There is a small hole in the shell. Amass m is
released from rest a distance R from the hole along a line that passes through t
he hole and also through the centre ofthe shell. This mass subsequently moves un
der the gravitational force ofthe shell. How long does the mass take to travelfr
omthe hole to the point diametrically opposite.
2
List of recommended questions from LE. Irodov. 1.213,1.216 to 1.220,1.224 to 1.2
27,1.229
^Bansal Classes
Gravitation
[3]
EXERCISE-III
Q. 1 A satellite P is revolving around the earth at a height h = radius of earth
(R) above equator. Another satellite Q is at a height 2h revolving in opposite
direction. At an instant the two are at same vertical line passing through centr
e of sphere. Find the least time of after which again they are in this situation
. Q.2 A certain triple-star system consists of two stars, each of mass m, revolv
ing about a central star, mass M, in the same circular orbit. The two stars stay
at opposite ends ofa diameter ofthe circular orbit, seefigure.Derive an express
ion for the period of revolution of the stars; the radius of the orbit is r. Fin
d the gravitational force of interaction between the mass m and an infinite rod
of varying mass density X such that A(x)= X/x, where x is the distance from mass
m. Given that mass m is placed at a distance d from the end of the rod on its a
xis as shown in figure. Inside an isolatedfixedsphere of radius R and uniform de
nsity r, there is a spherical cavity of radius R/2 such that the surface of the
cavity passes through the centre ofthe sphere as infigure.Aparticle ofmass m is
released from rest at centre B ofthe cavity. Calculate velocity with which parti
cle strikes the centre Aof the sphere. In a certain double star system the two s
tars rotate in circular orbits about their common centre ofmass. The stars are s
pherical, they have same density p and their radii arc R and 2 R. Their centres
are 5 R apart. Find the period T of stars in terms of p, R & G. Aring ofradius R
is madefroma thin wire ofradius r. If p is the density ofthe material ofwire th
en what will be the gravitational force exerted by the ring on the material part
icle ofmass m placed on the axis of ring at a distance x from its centre. Show t
hat the force will be maximum when x = R/V2 and the maximum value of force will
be given as 471 Gr pm F max = (3) R
3/2
_1Q
Q.3
0< m
X(x)= X x
TT
Q.4
Q.5 Q.6
Q7 (a) (b) Q. 8
In a particular double star system, two stars ofmass 3.22 x 10 kg each revolve a
bout their common center of mass, 1.12 x 10 m away. Calculate their common perio
d of revolution, in years. Suppose that a meteoroid (small solid particle in spa
ce) passes through this centre of mass moving at right angles to the orbital pla
ne ofthe stars. What must its speed be ifit is to escapefromthe gravitational fi
eld of the double star?
30 11
A man can jump over b=4m wide trench on earth. Ifmean density of an imaginary pl
anet is twice that of the earth, calculate its maximum possible radius so that h
e may escape from it by jumping. Given radius of earth = 6400 km.
(!%Bansal Classes
Gravitation
[2]
Q.9
A launching pad with a spaceship is moving along a circular orbit of the moon, w
hose radius R is triple that of moon Rm. The ship leaves the launching pad with
a relative velocity equal to the launching pad's initial orbital velocity v and
the launching pad then falls to the moon. Determine the angle 0 with the horizon
tal at which the launching pad crashes into the surface if its mass is twice tha
t of the spaceship m.
Q
Q.10 A small satellite revolves around a heavy planet in a circular orbit. At ce
rtain point in its orbit a sharp impulse acts on it and instantaneously increase
s its kinetic energy to' k' (< 2) times without change in its direction ofmotion
. Show that in its subsequent motion the ratio ofits maximum and minimum distanc
es from the planet is k , assuming the mass ofthe satellite is negligibly small
as compared to that ofthe 2 k planet. Q.ll A satellite of mass m is in an ellipt
ical orbit around the earth of mass M ( M » m ) The speed of the 6GM satellite at
its nearest point to the earth (perigee) is J ^ where R=its closest distance to
the earth. It is desired to transfer this satellite into a circular orbit around
the earth of radius equal its largest distance from the earth. Find the increas
e in its speed to be imparted at the apogee (farthest point on the elliptical or
bit). Q.12 Abody is launchedfromthe earth's surface a an angle a=3 0° to the horiz
ontal at a speed v - 1.5GM R Neglecting air resistance and earth's rotation,find
(a) the height to which the body will rise, (ii) The radius of curvature oftraje
ctory at its top point.
0
Q.13 Assume that a tunnel is dug across the earth (radius = R) passing through i
ts centre. Find the time a particle takes to reach centre of earth if it is proj
ected into the tunnel from surface of earth with speed needed for it to escape t
he gravitationalfieldof earth.
^Bansal Classes
Gravitation
[3]
EXERCISE-III
Q. 1 If the distance between the earth and the sun were half its present value,
the number of days in a year would have been [JEE 96] (A) 64.5 (B) 129 (C) 182.5
(D)730 Q. 2 Distance between the centres of two stars is 10 a. The masses of th
ese stars are M and 16 M and their radii a and 2a respectively. Abody of mass m
isfiredat nightfromthe surface of the larger star towards the smaller star. What
should be its minimum initial speed to reach the surface ofthe smaller star ? O
btain the expression in terms of Q M and a. [JEE' 96] An artificial satellite mo
ving in a circular orbit around the earth has a total (K.E. + P.E.) E . Its pote
ntial energy is [JEE 97] (A)-E (B) 1.5 E (C) 2 E (D)E
0 0 0 0 0
Q. 3
Q.4
A cord of length 64 m is used to connect a 100 kg astronaut to spaceship whose m
ass is much larger than that of the astronaut. Estimate the value of the tension
in the cord. Assume that the spaceship is orbiting near earth surface. Assume t
hat the spaceship and the astronaut fall on a straight linefromthe earth centre.
The radius of the earth is 6400 km. [REE 98] In a region of only gravitationalf
ieldof mass 'M' a particle is shifted from A to B via three different paths in t
hefigure.The work done in different paths are Wj, W , W respectively then
2 3
Q.5
(A)W!=W = W3 ( B ) W ! > W > W 3
2 2
(C)Wj=W >W
2
3
(D)W!<W <W [JEE (Scr.) 2003]
2 3
Q. 6
A body is projected vertically upwards from the bottom of a crater of moon of de
pth R/l 00 where R is the radius of moon with a velocity equal to the escape vel
ocity on the surface of moon. Calculate maximum height attained by the body from
the surface ofthe moon. [JEE' 2003 ]
A B A B
Q. 7 A system ofbinary stars ofmasses m and m are moving in circular orbits of r
adii r and r respectively. If TA and T are the time periods of masses m and m re
spectively, then [JEE 2006] ( A ) T > T (ifr >r ) (B)TA>T .(ifm >m )
b A B
A
b
A
B
B
A
B
ft N 2
f
(C)
T
!a
\
(D)T =T
A
B
(!%Bansal Classes
Gravitation
[2]
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE-I
Q .3
Q.l Q.5 Q.6
R
4ttR2 Q.2
-
£-1 3 L2
^
" 31 R
^ 3 V 5R
1.6 hours if it is rotatingfromwest to east, 24/17 hours ifit is rotating from w
est to east lxio'j Q.7 - R
81
Q.8
2C5l (sinot), (— GA. 2ot) —
Q. 10h = — -
V?-l 2
Q.9 \2GM(. l - 1 ^ a v v^y Q.12 R± 2 1-k'
R
\
R
Q.ll
(a)-GmM/r, (b)-2GmMe/r
Q.13
t=
GMm
2C V e
1
x
J
Q.14 m
3 +
Jl
V2
+
V3
'
3Gm f m +M Q.15 (i)R
n
,09
R
V3
+M
Q.16 R
R
2
Q.20
? _ i, g =
27iGp„R —i
Q.18 (a)
GM 1
_
2GM
Q.19
(b) 1.9 h
2xVR 3 /GM
EXERCISE-IT
Q1
Q5 2tcR3/2(6v/6) • VGM(2-\/2 +3-\/3) T=5. JlL 3Gp
47tr nQ 9 ————— / 2
3 2
V VG(4M + m) Q3 J
Gml
2d2
Q.4
J^nGpR2
Q
7
( a ) T = 4
l ^ >
( b ) v =
i ~
Q-
8
V ^ k m
Q.9 cos0:
Vio v
2
Q.ll
GM' R
2 _ _8_
3 V15 Q.13 T = sin"
Q.12 (a)h =
,
R, (b) 1.13R
'
N
ir
T = 3 x io~2 N
Q.l
B
Q2
Q.5
A
vmm .
3 Q.6
2 V a
5GM
EXERCISE-III
Q3 Q7 C
D Q.4
h = 99R
^Bansal Classes
Gravitation
[3]
BANSALCLASSES
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
I
XII (ALL)
C JZT TZ ? ^ Al 1 / JL 7 L3S 4 l 7 J t v v r v i
OMMMIQEIMK ON
J L
TX T O I •V
^ ^
QUESTIONS FOR SHORT
ANSWER
Q. 1 .Two satellites move along a circular orbit in the same direction at a smal
l distance from each other. A container has to be thrownfromthefirstsatellite on
to the second one. When will the container reach the second satellite faster: if
its is thrown in the direction of motion of the first satellite or in the oppos
ite direction ? The velocity ofthe container with respect to the satellite u is
much less than that ofthe satellite v. Q.2 Because the Earth bulges near the equ
ator, the source ofthe Mississippi River (at about 50°N latitude), although high a
bove sea level, is about 5 km closer to the centre of the Earth than is its mout
h (at about 30°N latitude). How can the river flow "uphill" as it flows south? Q.3
Use qualitative arguments to explain why the following four periods are equal (
all are 84 min, assuming a uniform Earth density): (a)' time of revolution of a
satellite just above the Earth's surface (b) period of oscillation of mail in a
tunnel through the Earth (c) period of a simple pendulum having a length equal t
o the Earth's radius in a uniformfield9.8 m/s (d) period of an infinite simple p
endulum in the Earth's real gravitational field. Q. 4 After Sputnik I was put in
to orbit, it was said that it would not return to Earth but would burn up in its
descent. Considering the fact that it did not burn up in its ascent, how is thi
s possible ? Q.5 An artificial satellite is in a circular orbit about the Earth.
How will its orbit change if one ofits rockets is momentarily fired, (a) toward
s earth, (b) away from the Earth, (c) in a forward direction, (d) in a backward
direction, and (e) at right angles to the plane of the orbit? Q.6 A stone is dro
pped along the centre of a deep vertical mine shaft. Assume no air resistance bu
t consider the Earth's rotation. Will the stone continue along the centre ofthe
shaft ? Ifnot, describe its motion. Q.7 An iron cube is placed near an iron sphe
re at a location remotefromthe Earth's gravity. What can you say about the locat
ion of the centre of gravity ofthe cube? Of the sphere ? In general, does the lo
cation ofthe centre of gravity of an object depend on the nature of the gravitat
ionalfieldin which the object is placed? / Q. 8 Figure shows a particle ofmass m
that is movedfroman infinite distance to the # centre of a ring of mass M, alon
g the central axis of the ring. For the trip, how | does the magnitude ofthe gra
vitational force on the particle due to the ring \ ' \ change. % i
2 m /
X W / M
Q.9 (a) (b) (c) (d)
Infigure,a particle ofmass m is initially at point A, at distance dfromthe centr
e of one uniform sphere and distance 4dfromthe centre of another uniform sphere,
both of mass M » m. State whether, if you moved the particle to point D, the foll
owing would be positive, negative, or zero: the change in the gravitational pote
ntial energy of the particle, the work done by the net gravitational force on th
e particle, the work done by your force. What are the answers if, instead, the m
ove were from point B to point C ?
B
C
^T;
D
Q.10 Reconsider the situation of above questioa Would the work done by you be po
sitive, negative, or zero ifyou moved the particle (a)fromAto B, (b)fromAto C, (
c) from B to D ? (d) Rank those moves accroding to the absolute value ofthe work
done by your force, greatest first.
1*1<JjBansalClasses
Question Bank on Gravitation
[2]
Q.l
A large spherical planet of radius R, made of a material of density d, has a sph
erical cavity of radius R/2, with center of cavity a distance R/2 from the centr
e of the planet. Find the gravitational force on a small mass'm' at the center o
f the cavity. (A) 27iRGmd/3 (B) 7iRGmd/3 (C) 27tRGmd (D) 47tRGmd/3 Q.2 At what a
ltitude will the acceleration due to gravity be 25% ofthat at the earth's surfac
e (given radius of earth is R)? (A)R/4 , (B) R (C) 3R/8 (D)R/2
V
Q.3
At what distance from the centre of the moon is the point at which the strength
of the resultantfieldof earth's and moon's gravitationalfieldis equal to zero. T
he earth's mass is 81 times that of moon and the distance between centres of the
se planets is 60R where R is the radius of the earth (A) 6R (B) 4R (C) 3R (D)5R
2
Q.4
Two masses m, & m are initially at rest and are separated by a very large distan
ce. If the masses approach each other subsequently, due to gravitational attract
ion between them, their relative velocity of approach at a separation distance o
f d is: 2Gd (m, + m ) G (A) t m,+ m )T (B) ^ 2d (C) (m, + m ) 2G (D) (m,+m ) 2Gd
>' Q.5 Let co be the angular velocity of the earth's rotation about its axis. A
ssume that the acceleration due to gravity on the earth's surface has the same v
alue at the equator and the poles. An object weighed at the equator gives the sa
me reading as a reading taken at a depth d below earth's surface at a pole ( d « R
) The value of d is co R OR 2O R jRg ,(A) g ( B ) ^2g ~ r (C) g (D) — ^ g
7 1/2 v 7 2 W 2 2 1/2 2 2 2 2 2 2 w W
Q.6
A spherical hole of radius R/2 is excavated from the asteroid of mass M as shown
in fig. The gravitational acceleration at a point on the surface ofthe asteroid
just above the excavation is (A) GM/R (B) GM/2R (C) GM/8R (D) 7GM/8R
2 2 2
2
Q.7 Q.8
If the radius of the earth be increased by a factor of 5, by what factor its den
sity be changed to keep the value of g the same? (A) 1/25 (C) 1/V5 (D) 5 A man o
f mass m starts falling towards a planet of mass M and radius R. As he reaches n
ear to the surface, he realizes that he will pass through a small hole in the pl
anet. As he enters the hole, he sees that 2M the planet is really made oftwo pie
ces a spherical shell of negligible thickness of mass —— and a point M mass — at the c
entre. Change in the force of gravity experienced by the man is 2 GMm (A) 3 - ^
1 GMm 4 GMm 3l^~
1*1 <JjBansalClasses
(B)0
( D )
[3]
Q. 9
An infinite number of masses, each of one kg are placed on the +ve X axis at 1 m
, 2m, 4m, from the Q. 15 / origin. The magnitude ofthe gravitationalfieldat orig
in due to this distribution ofmasses is: 4G 3G (A)2G (B)— (Q— (D)oo Q.16 I Q. 10 Wit
h what angular velocity the earth should spin in order that a body lying at 3 0° l
atitude may become weightless [R is radius of earth and g is acceleration due to
gravity on the surface of earth]
(A)
(B)
(C)
J — V 3R
(D)
Q.17
M
Q. 11 Two concentric shells ofuniform density of mass Mj and Mj are situated as
shown in the figure. The forces experienced by a particle of mass m when placed
at positions A, B and C respectively are (given OA= p, OB = q and OC = r) (A)zer
o, G — a n d G-—-—. (B)
G ( M i + M 2 >
Q.18 .
, ( M ! + M 2 > and G ^
g 1 + 2 2 f f l a n d
( C ) G
M^ (M M ) q p
; G
G
zero
^
Q. 19
(
d
)
( m
1
+
M
2
)
W
;
G
M ^
zero QO
2
Q. 12 A satellite ofthe earth is revolving in circular orbit with a uniform velo
city V. If the gravitational force suddenly disappears, the satellite will (A) c
ontinue to move with the same velocity in the same orbit. (B) move tangentially
to the original orbit with velocity V. (C) fall down with increasing velocity. (
D) come to a stop somewhere in its original orbit. Q. 13 A newly discovered plan
et has a density eight times the density of the earth and a radius twice the rad
ius ofthe earth. The time taken by 2 kg mass to fallfreelythrough a distance S n
ear the surface of the earth is 1 second. Then the time taken for a 4 kg mass to
fall freely through the same distance S near the surface of the new planet is (
A) 0.25 sec. (B) 0.5 sec (C) 1 sec. (D) 4 sec. Q. 14 Four particles of equal mas
ses M move along a circle of radius R under the action of their mutual gravitati
onal attraction maintaining a square shape. The speed of each particle is
(A)-
Q \
2
q 22
GM 2V2+1 R
(B)
1 GM V R
4
GM
(D)
4GM R(V2+l)
& Bansal Classes
[4]
4lBan
height from the Q.15 At whatsurface?above the earth's surface does the accelerat
ion due to gravity fall to 1 % of its value at the earth's (A) 9R (B)10R (C) 99R
(D) 100R Q.16 Find the distance between centre of gravity and centre of mass of
a two particle system attached to the ends ofa light rod. Each particle has sam
e mass. Length ofthe rod is R, where R is the radius of earth (A) R (B) R/2 (C)
zero (D) R/4 Q.17 The radius of a planet is R. A satellite revolves around it in
a circle of radius r with angular velocity co . The acceleration due to the gra
vity on planet's surface is 3„3 rco ra r_3 „ 2 M (D) (B) (C) (A) R R R R
0 3 0 2
Q.18 A solid sphere of uniform density and radius R applies a gravitational forc
e of attraction equal to F on a particle placed at a distance 3R from the centre
ofthe sphere. A spherical cavity ofradius R/2 is now made in the sphere as show
n in the figure. The sphere with cavity now applies a gravitational force F on t
he same particle. The ratio F / F j is: 22 41 (A) 50 (C) (B) 25 <">25 50
t
2 2
Q.19 The mass and diameter of a planet are twice those of earth. What will be th
e period of oscillation ofa pendulum on this planet if it is a seconds pendulum
on earth? 1 1 (A) V2 second (B) 2V2 seconds (C) ^ second (D) ^ ^ second Q.20 A p
article of mass M is at a distance afromsurface of a thin spherical shell of equ
al mass and having radius a. (A) Gravitationalfieldand potential both are zero a
t centre ofthe shell. (B) Gravitational field is zero not only inside the shell
but at a point outside the shell also. (C) Inside the shell, gravitationalfielda
lone is zero. (D) Neither gravitationalfieldnor gravitational potential is zero
inside the shell. Q.21 Three point masses, M each, are moving in a circle, each
with a speed v, under their mutual gravitational attractive force. The distance
between any two masses must be: (A) 2GM/v (B) 3 G M / V ( C ) GMV3/v (D) G M / V
2
2
2
2
Q. 22 A cavity of radius R/2 is made inside a solid sphere of radius R. The cent
re of the cavity is located at a distance R/2 from the centre of the sphere. Fin
d the gravitational force on a particle of mass'm' at a distance R/2 from the ce
ntre of the sphere on the line joining both the centres of sphere and cavity (op
posite to the centre of cavity). [Here g = GM/R , where M is the mass of the sph
ere] g ^ § mg (D) none of these (C) 16 (A) (B)
2 m 3 m
1*1
<JjBansal Classes
[5]
Q. 23 How much deep inside the earth should a man go so that his weight becomes
one fourth of that at a point which is at a height R above the surface of earth.
(A)R/4 (B) 15R/16 (C)3R/4 (D) R/2
Y
Q. 24 Two identical spherical balls each of mass m are placed as shown in figure
. Plot the variation of g(gravitation intensity) along the x-axis.
(A)
J
) (
g1
0
A. o
V
(C) \
g1
0
)
m
m e-x
B
(D)
J
r
Q.25 A satellite revolves in the geostationary orbit but in a direction east to
west. The time interval between its successive passing about a point on the equa
tor is: (A) 48 hrs (B)24hrs (C)12hrs (D) never Q.26 A particle startsfromrest at
a distance Rfromthe centre and along the axis of a fixed ring ofradius R & mass
M. Its velocity at the centre ofthe ring is: / i>j (V2GM 2GM (A) (B) R GM GM (C
) <P) R I v2 R
M)
e
Q. 27 Aspherical uniform planet is rotating about its axis. The velocity of a po
int on its equator is V. Due to the rotation of planet about its axis the accele
ration due to gravity g at equator is 1/2 of g at poles. The escape velocity of
a particle on the planet in terms ofV. (A)V = 2V (B)V = V (C)V =V/2 (D)V =,£V Q.28
Two point masses of mass 4m and m respectively separated by d distance are revo
lving under mutual force of attraction. Ratio oftheir kinetic energies will be:
(A) 1 : 4 (B) 1:5 (C) 1 : 1 (D) 1 : 2
e e e
Q.29 Two planets Aand B have the same material density. Ifthe radius ofAis twice
that of B, then the ratio of v the escape velocity — is v
4 D
(A) 2
(B) V2
(C) 1/V2
0
CD) 1/2
Q.30 The escape velocity on the surface ofthe earth is V . If M and R are the ma
ss and the radius of the earth respectively, then the escape velocity on another
planet of mass 2M and radius R/2 will be : (A)4V (B)2V (C)V . (D)V /2 Q.31 Abal
l A' of mass m falls to the surface of the earth from infinity. Another ball B'
of mass 2m falls to the earth from the height equal to six times radius of the e
arth then ratio of velocities of'A' and 'B' on reaching the earth is (A) V(6/5)
(B) V(5/6) (C) 1 (D) V(7/6)
0 0 0 0 r
& Bansal Classes
[278] 4lBan
Q. 3 2 If an artificial satellite revolves in circular orbit around the earth wi
th a speed equal to halfits escape velocity from the earth. Then its height abov
e the surface of earth will be: [Radius of earth=6400 km] (A) 3200 km (B) 6400 k
m (C) 12800 km (D) 24000 km Q. 3 3 The ratio of gravitational acceleration at he
ight 3R to that at height 4Rfromthe surface ofthe earth is : (where R is the rad
ius ofthe earth) (A) 9/16 (B) 25/16 (C) 16/25 (D) 16/9 Q.34 A small body of supe
rdense material, whose mass is twice the mass ofthe earth but whose size is very
small compared to the size ofthe earth, startsfromrest at a height H « R above th
e earth's surface, and reaches the earth's surface in time t. Then t is equal to
(A)V2H7^ (B)VHT^ (C) V2H/3g (D) V4H/3g. Q. 3 5 A rocket is launched straight up
fromthe surface ofthe earth. When its altitude is one fourth ofthe radius of the
earth, its fuel runs out and therefore it coasts. The minimum velocity which th
e rocket must have when it starts to coast if it is to escapefromthe gravitation
al pull of the earth is [escape velocity on surface of earth is 11,2km/s] (A) lk
m/s (B) 5km/s (C) lOkm/s (D)15km/s Q. 3 6 Gravitational potential difference bet
ween a point on surface of planet and another point 10m above is 4J/kg. Consider
ing gravitationalfieldto be uniform, how much work is done in moving a mass of 2
.0 kg from the surface to a point 5. 0m above the surface ? (A) 0.40 J (B) 2.5 J
(C) 4.0 J (D)8.0J Q. 3 7 Referring to previous problem, what is the gravitation
alfieldstrength in this region ? (A) 0.025 N kg(B) 0.40 N kg(C)2.5Nkg-' (D)4.0Nk
g" Q. 3 8 Select the correct choice(s): (A) The gravitationalfieldinside a spher
ical cavity, within a spherical planet must be nonzero and uniform. (B) When a b
ody is projected horizontally at an appreciable large height above the earth, wi
th a velocity less than for a circular orbit, it will fall to the earth along a
parabolic path. (C) Abody of zero total mechanical energy placed in a gravitatio
nalfieldwill escape the field (D) Earth's satellite must be in equatorial plane.
Q.39 The orbital velocity of an artificial satellite in a circular orbit just a
bove the earth's surface is V . The value of orbital velocity for another satell
ite orbiting at an altitude of half of earth's radius is
1 1 1 0
(A)
(B) J h
(C)JT O
V
(D) v / v
j
0
4gR Q.40 A particle is projected with a velocity vertically upward from the surf
ace ofthe earth, R being the radius of the earth & g being the acceleration due
to gravity on the surface of the earth. The velocity of the particle when it is
at half the maximum height reached by it is
(A)Jf
(B)Jf
(C) VgR
<P)ff
Bansal Classes
m
Q.41 A satellite is in a circular orbit very close to the surface of a planet. A
t some point it is given an impulse along its direction of motion, causing its v
elocity to increase r| times. It now goes into an elliptical orbit. The maximum
possible value of ri for this to occur is (A) 2 <B)V2 (C) V2+1 (D)î^ Q. 42 A sa
tellite ofmass m, initially at rest on the earth, is launched into a circular or
bit at a height equal to the radius ofthe earth. The minimum energy required is
(A) mgR (B)^mgR (C)^mgR (D)^mgR
Q. 43 Thefigureshows the variation ofenergy with the orbit radius of a body in c
ircular planetary motion. Find the correct statement about the curves A, B and C
(A) A shows the kinetic energy, B the total energy and C the potential energy o
f if the system. s (B) C shows the total energy, B the kinetic energy and Athe p
otential energy of the system. (C) C and A are kinetic and potential energies re
spectively and B is the total energy of the system. (D) A and B are kinetic and
potential energies and C is the total energy of the system. Q 44 The ratio of th
e. radius of the earth to that of the moon is 10 The ratio of the acceleration d
ue to gjravirj on the earth to that on the moon is 6. The ratio ofthe escape vel
ocityfromthe earth 's surface to that from the moon is (A) 6 (B) 1.5 (C) 12 (D)V
60 Q.45 An artificial satellite of the earth releases a package. If air resistan
ce is neglected, the point where the package will hit (with respect to the posit
ion at the time of release) will be (A) ahead (B) exactly below (C) behind (D) i
t will never reach the earth Q. 46 A space ship of mass m is in circular orbit o
f radius 2R about the earth ofmass M and radius R . Energy required to transfer
the space ship to circular orbit of radius 3R is GMm GMm GMm GMm ( ) 8R ( > 24R7
e e e A C
Q.47 A particle is projected from the mid-point of the line joining two fixed pa
rticles each of mass m. If the distance of separation between thefixedparticles
is /, the minimum velocity of projection of the particle so as to escape is equa
l to GM GM , 2GM , 2GM (A)J— (B ) J — (C)J — (D)2/ V2/ I I
v x W
Q.48 The escape velocity for a planet is v . Atunnel is dug along a diameter oft
he planet and a small body is dropped into it at the surface. When the body reac
hes the centre of the planet, its speed will be
e
(A) v
e
(B)^
(C) y
(D)zero
& Bansal Classes
[280] 4lBan
nanimpulse
Q.49 A per son brings a mass of 1 kg from infinity to a point A. Initially the m
ass was at rest but it moves at a speed of 2 m/s as it reaches A. The work done
by the person on the mass is -3 J. The potential at Ais: (A) -3 J/kg (B) -2 J/kg
(C) -5 J/kg (D)-7 J/kg Q.50 A small ball of mass'm' is released at a height'R'
above the earth surface, as shown in thefigureabove. Ifthe maximum depth ofthe b
all to which it goes is R/2 inside the earth through a narrow grove before comin
g to rest momentarily. The grove, contain an ideal spring of spring constant K a
nd natural length R, find the value of K if R is radius of earth and M mass of e
arth 3 GMm 6GMm (A) R (B) R 7 GMm 9GMm (C) " R ^ (D) R
3 3 3
equal to the
iystem. e to gravity o that from where the
Q.51 The magnitude of the potential energy per unit mass ofthe object at the sur
face of earth is E. Then the escape velocity ofthe object is: (A)V2E (B)4E (C)VE
(D)2E
2
Q.52 Suppose a smooth tunnel is dug along a straight line joining two points on
the surface ofthe earth and a particle is dropped from rest at its one end. Assu
me that mass of earth is uniformly distributed over its Volume. Then (A) the par
ticle will emerge from the other end with velocity GM where M and R^. are earth'
s mass 2R„ and radius respectively, (B) the particle will come to rest at centre o
fthe tunnel because at this position, particle is closest to earth centre. (C) p
otential energy of the particle will be equal to zero at centre oftunnel if it i
s along a diameter. (D) acceleration of the particle will be proportional to its
distancefrommidpoint ofthe tunnel.
r e 1 e
tl . Energy
e
Q.53 A hollow spherical shell is compressed to half its radius. The gravitationa
l potential at the centre (A)increases (B) decreases (C) remains same (D) during
the compression increases then returns at the previous value. Q.54 A body is pr
ojection horizontallyfromthe surface of the Earth (radius = R) with a velocity e
qual to 'n' times the escape velocity. Neglect rotational effects of the earth.
The maximum height attained by the body from the Earth's surface is R/2. Then, '
n' must be (A) V06 (B) (V3J/2 (C)V04 (D)None Q.55 Consider two configurations of
a system ofthree particles of masses m, 2m and 3m. The work done by external ag
ent in changing the configuration of the systemfromfigure(i) tofigure(ii) is 6Gm
.2 /1 + J J (A)zero (B) (C)6Gm' , V2, (D)6Gm
V2,
2 -
s m. If the he particle
3M
all body is
nr
a
1
figure(i)
—5" •2m m« a„ v>3 figure(ii)
A
2m
m
1*1
<JjBansal Classes
72,
[9]
Q. 56 Two satellites of mass rrij & m are in same circular orbit around earth bu
t are revolving in opposite sense. When they undergo completely inelastic collis
ion, the combination (A) continues in same orbit (B) goes to a circular orbit of
lesser radius (C) goes in an elliptical orbit within the original circle (D) go
es in an elliptical orbit outside the original circle
2
Q. 57 A uniform spherical planet (Radius R) has acceleration due to gravity at i
ts surface g. Points P and Q located inside and outside the planet have accelera
tion due to gravity — . Maximum possible separation between P and Q is 7R 3R 9R (A
)— (B)— (O— (D) none
/ A
g
Q. 5 8 A particle is dropped on Earthfromheight R (radius of Earth) and it bounc
es back to a height R/2 the coefficient of restitution for collision is (ignore
air resistance and rotation of Earth) (A)f (B)JI (C)JI (D)j! Q. 5 9 A body of ma
ss m is lifted upfromthe surface of the earth to a height three times the radius
of the earth. The change in potential energy of the body is (A) 3mgR (B) 3/4 mg
R (C) 1/3 mgR (D) 2/3 mgR where g is acceleration due to gravity at the surface
of earth. Q.60 Two satellites S and S describe circular orbits ofradiusr and 2r
respectively around a planet. Ifthe orbital angular velocity of S is co, that of
S is: (A) <b/(2V2) (B) (GW2)/3 (C) <a/2 (D) cW2
l 2 { 2
c
Q ^
Q. 61 When a satellite moves around the earth in a certain orbit, the quantity w
hich remains constant is : (A) angular velocity (B) kinetic energy (C) aerial ve
locity (D) potential energy Q. 6 2 A satellite is launched into a circular orbit
ofradius R around the earth. A second satellite is launched into an orbit ofrad
ius 1.02R. The period of second satellite is larger than thefirstone by approxim
ately ^ (A) 1.5% (B)3% (C)l% (D) 2% Q. 63 Asatellite ofmass 5M orbits the earth
in a circular orbit. At one point in its orbit, the satellite explodes into two
Q pieces, one ofmass M and the other of mass 4M. After the explosion the mass M
ends up travelling in the same circular orbit, but in opposite direction. After
explosion the mass 4M is in (A) bound orbit (B) unbound orbit q (C) partially bo
und orbit (D) data is insufficient to determine the nature of the orbit. Q. 64 A
satellite can be in a geostationary orbit around a planet at a distance rfromth
e centre of the planet. If the angular velocity of the planet about its axis dou
bles, a satellite can now be in a geostationary orbit around the planet if its d
istancefromthe centre ofthe planet is (A)^ (B)^ (C)-^TTT (D)-^TJ
& Bansal Classes
[10] 4lBan
in opposite
Q-65 Aplanetofmass mis in an elliptical orbit about the sun ( m « M ) with an orbi
tal period T. IfA bethe area of orbit, then its angular momentum would be: 2mA m
A (B)mAT (D) 2mAT (A) (C) TT
s u n
nts P and Q 3 separation
Q. 66 The planets with radii Rj, Rj have densities p,, p respectively. Their atm
ospheric pressures are pj, p respectively. Therefore, the ratio of masses ofthei
r atmospheres, neglecting variation of g within the limits of atmosphere, is (A)
p R p /p R p (B)p,R p /p R p (C)p R p /p R p (D) p R p /p R p
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 ] 1 1 2 2 2 1 ] 2 2 2 1
2
ght R/2 the
Q. 67 Suppose the gravitational force varies inversely as the n power of distanc
e. Then the time period of a planet in circular orbit of radius R around the sun
will be proportional to n-2 n+1 n-1 2 (C)R (D) R' 2 (B) RV 2 (A)R
th
N
>fthe earth.
Q. 68 A satellite is seen after every 6 hours over the equator. It is known that
it rotates opposite to that of earth's direction. Then the angular velocity oft
he satellite about the centre of earth will be: (A) 7c/2 rad/hr (B) n/3 rad/hr (
C) n/4 rad/hr (D) 7t/8 rad/hr Q. 69 A satellite is orbiting round the earth. In
a particular orbit its time period is T and orbital speed is V. In another orbit
the orbital speed is 2V, then time period will be (A) 8T (B)2T (C) T/2 (D)T/8 Q
. 70 In a double star system, the masses ofthe two stars are M and 3M. The orbit
radius of the lighter star is R. The time period of each star is (A) 8TC[R3/GM]
(B) 1 6 T I [ R / G M ] (C)4TT[2R3/GM] (D)None
1/2
anet. If the ant is:
3
1/2
1/2
y
:hed into an 'ly les into two elling in the
Figure shows the orbit of a planet P round the sun S. AB and CD are ^ the minor
and major axes ofthe ellipse. Q. 71 If t, is the time taken by the planet to tra
vel along ACB and ^ the time along BDA, then (A)tj=t2 (B)t >t (C)tj<t (D) nothin
g can be concluded
h
1 2 2
Question No. 71 to 72
V
Q. 72 If U is the potential energy and K kinetic energy then |U| > |K| at (A) On
ly D (B)OnlyC (C) both D & C (D) neither D nor C Q. 73 If a tunnel is cut at any
orientation through earth, then a ball released from one end will reach the oth
er end intime(neglect earth rotation) (A) 84.6 minutes (B) 42.3 minutes (C) 8 mi
nutes (D) depends on orientation
e planet. If jnary orbit
&
Ban sal Classes
[283] 4lBan
Questions 74 to 79 (6 questions) Two stars bound together by gravity orbit each
other because oftheir mutual attraction. Such a pair of stars is referred to as
a binary star system. One type ofbinary system is that ofa black hole and a comp
anion star. The black hole is a star that has collapsed on itselfand is so massi
ve that not even light rays can escape its gravitational pull. Therefore, when d
escribing the relative motion of a black hole and a companion star, the motion o
fthe black hole can be assumed negligible compared to that ofthe companion. The
orbit ofthe companion star is either elliptical with the black hole at one ofthe
foci or circular with the black hole at the centre. The gravitational potential
energy is given by U = - GmM/r, where G is the universal gravitational constant
, m is the mass of the companion star, M is the mass of the black hole, and r is
the distance between the centre of the companion star and the centre of the bla
ck hole. Since the gravitational force is conservative, the companion star's tot
al mechanical energy is a constant of the motion. Because ofthe periodic nature
ofthe orbit, there is a simple relation between the average kinetic energy <K >
ofthe companion star and its average potential energy . In particular, <K> =
-<U/2> Two special points along the orbit are singled out by astronomers. Perig
ee is the point at which the companion star is closest to the black hole, and ap
ogee is the point at which it is furthestfromthe black hole. Q. 74 At which poin
t in the elliptical orbit does the companion star attain its maximum kinetic ene
rgy? (A) Apogee (B) Perigee (C) The point midwayfromapogee to perigee (D) All po
ints in the orbit, since the kinetic energy is a constant of the motion. Q.75 Fo
r circular orbits, the potential energy ofthe companion star is constant through
out the orbit. If the radius ofthe orbit doubles, what is the new value of the v
elocity of the companion star? (A) It is 1/2 ofthe old value (B) It is 1/V2 ofth
e old value (C) It is the same as the old value. (D) It is double the old value
Q. 76 Which ofthe following prevents the companion starfromleaving its orbit and
falling into the black hole? (A) The centripetal force (B) The gravitational fo
rce (C) The companion star's potential energy (D) the companion star's kinetic e
nergy Q. 77 The work done on the companion star in one complete orbit by the gra
vitational force ofthe black hole equals (A) the difference in the kinetic energ
y ofthe companion star between apogee and perigee. (B) the total mechanical ener
gy ofthe companion star (C)zero (D) the gravitational force on the companion sta
r times the distance that it travels in one orbit. Q.78 For a circular orbit, wh
ich ofthe following gives the correct expression for the total energy? (A) - (1/
2) mv (B)mv (C)-(GmM)/r (D)(GmM)/2r
2 2
Q. 79 What is the ratio of the acceleration of the black hole to that ofthe comp
anion star? (A) M / m (B)m/M (C)mM/r (D) 1 /1
1*1 <JjBansalClasses
[12]
>air of stars ianion star, i escape its on star, the ar with the re G is the c h
ole, and Since the ant of the ige kinetic =-<U/2> .ompanion >le. y? ee -bit. Ift
he
each question.
Q. 1 Assuming the earth to be a sphere ofuniform density the acceleration due to
gravity (A) at a point outside the earth is inversely proportional to the squar
e of its distancefromthe centre (B) at a point outside the earth is inversely pr
oportional to its distancefromthe centre (C) at a point inside is zero (D) at a
point inside is proportional to its distancefromthe centre. Q2 Mark the correct
statement/s (A) Gravitational potential at curvature centre of a thin hemispheri
cal shell of radius R and mass M is equal to GM R (B) Gravitationalfieldstrength
at a point lying on the axis of a thin, uniform circular ring ofradius R and GM
x mass M is equal to (K 2+x 2x3/2 where x is distance of that pointfromcentre of
the ring. ,T> ) (C) Nekton's law of gravitation for gravitational force between
two bodies is applicable only when bodies have spherically symmetric distributi
on of mass. (D) None of these. Three particles are projected vertically upward f
rom a point on the surface of the earth with velocities V(2gR/3), V(gR), V(4gR/3
) respectively where R is the radius ofthe earth and g is the acceleration due t
o gravity on the surface ofthe earth. The maximum heights attained are respectiv
ely h,,!^,!^. (A) hj: h = 2 : 3 (B) h^: h = 3 :4 (C)h,: 1^=1:4 (D) h ^ R
2 3
Q.3
lack hole? ole equals
Q4
A geostationary satellite is at a height h above the surface of earth. If earth
radius is R (A) The minimum colatitude q on earth upto which the satellite can b
e used for communication is sin- (R/R + h). (B) The maximum colatitudes q on ear
th upto which the satellite can be used for communication is sin" (R/R + h). (C)
The area on earth escapedfromthis satellite is given as 2pR (1 + sinq) (D) The
area on earth escapedfromthis satellite is given as 2pR (1 + cosq)
1 1 2 2
Q5
&
Gravitational potential at the centre of curvature of a hemispherical bowl of ra
dius R and mass M is V. (A) gravitational potential at the centre of curvature o
f a thin uniform wire of mass M, bent into a semicircle of radius R, is also equ
al to V. (B) In part (A) if the same wire is bent into a quarter of a circle the
n also the gravitational potential at the centre of curvature will be V. (C) In
part (A) if the same wire mass is nonuniformly distributed along its length and
it is bent into a semicircle of radius R, gravitational potential at the centre
is V. (D) none ofthese Q.6 In a solid sphere two small symmetrical cavities are
created whose centres lie on a diameter AB of sphere on opposite sides of the ce
ntre. (A) The gravitationalfieldat the centre of the sphere is zero. (B) The gra
vitational potential at the centre remains unaffected if cavitiesare not present
(C) A circle at which all points have same potential is in the plane of diamete
r AB. (D) A circle at which all points have same potential is in the plane perpe
ndicular to the diameter AB.
Ban sal Classes
Question Bank on Gravitation[285]4lBan
~P~31
Q.7
The spherical planets have the same mass but densities in the ratio 1:8. For the
se planets, the (A) acceleration due to gravity will be in the ratio 4:1 (B) acc
eleration due to gravity will be in the ratio 1:4 (C) escape velocitiesfromtheir
surfaces will be in the ratio V2 : 1 (D) escape velocitiesfromtheir surfaces wi
ll be in the ratio 1 : V2 When a satellite in a circular orbit around the earth
enters the atmospheric region, it encounters small air resistance to its motion.
Then (A) its kinetic energy increases (B) its kinetic energy decreases (C) its
angular momentum about the earth decreases (D) its period ofrevolution around th
e earth increases A communications Earth satellite (A) goes round the earthfrome
ast to west (B) can be in the equatorial plane only (C) can be vertically above
any place on the earth (D) goes round the earth from west to east
Q. 8
Q.9
Q. 10 An earth satellite is movedfromone stable circular orbit to another larger
and stable circular orbit. The following quantities increase for the satellite
as a result ofthis change (A) gravitational potential energy (B) angular vleocit
y (C) linear orbital velocity (D) centripetal acceleration Q. 11 Two satellites
of same mass of a planet in circular orbits have periods of revolution 32 days a
nd 256 days. If the radius of the orbit of the first isx, then the (A) radius of
the orbit of the second is 8x (B) radius ofthe orbit of the second is 4x (C) to
tal mechanical energy ofthe second is greater than that of the first (D) kinetic
energy of the second is greater than that of the first. Q. 12 Two satellites Sj
& s of equal masses revolve in the same sense around a heavy planet in coplanar
circular orbit of radii R & 4R (A) the ratio of period of revolution Sj & s is
1 : 8. (B) their velocities are in the ratio 2 : 1 (C) their angular momentum ab
out the planet are in the ratio 2 : 1 (D) the ratio of angular velocities of s w
.r.t. s, when all three are in the same line is 9 : 5.
2 2 2
Q. 13 A satellite S is moving in an elliptical orbit around the earth. The mass
of the satellite is very small compared to the mass of the earth (A) the acceler
ation of S is always directed towards the centre ofthe earth (B) the angular mom
entum of S about the centre ofthe earth changes in direction, but its magnitude
remains constant (C) the total mechanical energy of S varies periodically with t
ime (D) the linear momentum of S remains constant in magnitude
1*1<JjBansalClasses
[114]
the
Q. 14 If a satellite orbits as close to the earth's surface as possible, (A) its
speed is maximum (B) time period of its rotation is minimum (C) the total energ
y ofthe 'earth plus satellite' system is minimum (D) the total energy of the 'ea
rth plus satellite'system is maximum Q. 15 For a satellite to orbit around the e
arth, which of the following must be true? (A) It must be above the equator at s
ome time (B) It cannot pass over the poles at any time (C) Its height above the
surface cannot exceed 36,000 km (D) Its period ofrotation must be > 2tzJr / g wh
ere R is radius of earth
ers small air
r orbit. The
ys and 256
n coplanar
very small
1*1 <JjBansal Classes
[15]
Answer Key
Q.l Q.8 Q.15 Q.22 Q.29 Q.36 Q.43 Q.50 Q.57 Q.64 Q.71 Q.78
A A A B A C D D C C B A
ONLY ONE OPTION IS
Q.2 Q.9 Q.16 Q.23 Q.30 Q.37 Q.44 Q.51 Q.58 Q.65 Q.72 Q.79
AD AC B,D A
B B B B B B D A B A C B
Q.3 Q.10 Q.17 Q.24 Q.31 Q.38 Q.45 Q.52 Q.59 Q.66 Q.73 Q.2 Q.6 Q.10 Q.14
CORRECT
A D D A D C D D B D B
Q.4 Q.ll Q.18 Q.25 Q.32 Q.39 Q.46 Q.53 Q.60 Q.67 Q.74
C D B C B C D B A A B
Q.5 Q.12 Q.19 Q.26 Q.33 Q.40 Q.47 Q.54 Q.61 Q.68 Q.75 C,D B,D B,C AD
A B B D B B D A C C B
Q.6 Q.13 Q.20 Q.27 Q.34 Q.41 Q.48 Q.55 Q.62 Q.69 Q.76
B A D A C B B C B D A
Q.7 Q.14 Q.21 Q.28 Q.35 Q.42 Q.49 Q.56 Q.63 Q.70 Q.77
B A D A C D C C B D C
Q.l Q.5 Q.9 Q.13
B,C AD A AB,C
Q.3 Q.7 Q.ll Q.15
Q.4 A C Q.8 A C Q.12 AB,D
& Bansal Classes
[16] 4lBan
BANSAL CLASSES
TARGETIIT JEE 2007
XI (P, Q, R, S)
ill
s
C O N T E N T S
KEY CONCEPTS EXERCISE-I EXERCISE -II EXERCISE-III ANSWER KEY
KEY
CONCEPTS
THINGS TO REMEMBER
ds dv dv v = — ; a = — = v — ; s = Jvdt; = Ja dt ; = Ja ds — dt dt ds where the symbols
have their usual meaning . The equations ofmotion for a body moving in straight
line with uniform acceleration, are , 1* u + (i) v = u + at (ii) s=|—r—11 = ut h——=•v t — —
- \(m) 2v - 2_L1 2as ' v + u^ (iv) s = u + ^ a ( 2 n - l ) (v)
v u + V t a t a t 2 n
2.
If a body is thrown vertically up with a velocity u in the uniform gravitational
field then (neglecting air resistance): (i) Maximum height attained H= (ii) Tim
e of ascent = time of descent = — g 2u (iii) Total time of flight (iv) Velocity of
fall at the point of projection=u downwards
:
KINEMATIC GRAPH: Slope ofthe displacement time graph at any particular time give
s the magnitude ofthe instantaneous velocity at that particular time. Slope ofth
e v -1 graph will give the magnitude of the instantaneous acceleration. The area
between the v - t graph, the time axis and the ordinates erected at the beginni
ng & end oftime interval considered will represent the total displacement of the
body. 5. RELATIVE VELOCITY: (a) Velocity of 'A' relative to 'B' is given by V =
V - V • V refers to the velocity which 'A' appears to have as seen by B. The abov
e idea of 1 dimensional relative motion can be extended to motion in 2 dimension
s. (b) Angular velocity of A relative to B i.e. co is given by velocityof Arelat
ivetoBinadirectionperpendiculartoAB ®AB AB 6. LEVEL GROUND PROJECTILE MOTION: When
abody is thrown obliquely (in a vertical plane) into the uniform gravitationalf
ieldthen the trajectory (actual path of motion) is a parabola. The horizontal co
mponent of velocity ucos a remains unchanged where as vertical component decreas
es up to the maximum height and then increases. (a) Time taken to reach the heig
ht point t ^ usina i y (minimum (b) Maximum height H - u sm a velocity) 2g
AB A B AB AB
=
2
•
2
(c) Total time of flight
=2t
u cos a
H
(d) Horizontal range = (ucos a). T= - (ucos a) (usina)
v
u sin 2 a
2
u c o s
a
[Figure 1]
>x
^Bansal Classes
(e) Rm if a = 45° ' Note that for a given velocity ofprojection & a given horizont
al range there are in general two directions of proj ection which are complement
ofeach other and are equally inclined to the direction ofthe maximum range.
Kinematics
[2]
(F) VELOCITY & DIRECTION O F MOTION A T A GIVEN TIME :
VcosB =ucosa Squaring & adding these 2 equations we will get the velocity of the
VsinB =usina-gt projectile. Dividing the velocities in y and x directions gives
the direction of motion. V cos 0 =u cos a on adding V = u - 2 gh V sin 0 =u sin
a-2gh_
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
( g ) VELOCITY & DIRECTION O F MOTION A T A GIVEN HEIGHT H :
( h ) EQUATIONS O F MOTION IN VECTOR NOTATION :
(i) V=u+ gt (ii) S=ut+—gt (iii) V = -=u+-gt (V = average velocity vector)
2
2 av
t
2.
av
(i)
EQUATION O F TRAJECTORY :
gx - x tan a 2u cos a v Ry dy Note that — represent the direction of motion dx 7.
PROJECTILE UP AN INCLINED PLANE : (a) Total time of flight onthe inclined plane —2
/ (aT _ 2u sincosp P ) // \ s g Oblique Proj ection (refer fig-1) y = x tan a 2
2
/ —
(b)
Range PQ on the inclined plane PQ
2u cosa . sin(a-P) g cos p
2 2
(c) (d) (e)
W
71 ForMaxmimumrange 2 a - P = — =>a= u— Z*— +p ^ T " Hence the direction for maximum r
ange bisects the angle between the vertical and the inclined plane. R = u
2
max
gcos (3
[sin (2 a - P) - sinP]
kf
N
Greatest distance ofthe projectile from the inclined plane;
u sin (a-p)
2 2
g(l+sinP)
S = 2g cosp when the projectile is at H, its velocity perpendicular to the plane
is zero. 8. PROJECTILE DOWN AN INCLINED PLANE: (a) Time offlight= ' ( P) (b) (c
) (d)
gcosp Range OP 2u sin(a + p). cosa g cos p u Maximum range= g(l-sinp)
2 2
2 u s
n
a +
7 _p C Angle ofproj ection a for maximum range= 4 2
faBansal Classes
Kinematics
[3]
Q.l
Q. 2 Q.3 Q.4 Q.5
A butterfly is flying with velocity 10 i +12 j m/s and wind is blowing along x a
xis with velocity u. If butterfly starts motionfromA and after some time reaches
point B,findthe value of u.
EXERCISE - /
y
B
37°
Find the change in velocity of the tip of the minute hand (radius =10 cm) of a c
lock in 45 minutes. A,B&Care threeobjects each movingwith constant velocity. A's
speed is lOm/sec in a direction pQ. The velocity of B relative to A is 6 m/sec
at an angle of, cos (15/24) to PQ. The velocity of C relative to B is 12 m/sec i
n a direction Qp, thenfindthe magnitude of the velocity of C. Rain is falling ve
rtically with a speed of 20 ms" relative to air. A person is running in the rain
with a velocity of 5 ms and a wind is also blowing with a speed of 15 ms (both
towards east). Find the angle with the vertical at which the person should hold
his umbrella so that he may not get drenched.
-1 1 -1 -1
The velocity-time graph ofthe particle moving along a straight line is shown. Th
e rate of acceleration and deceleration is constant and it is equal to 5 ms"" .
If the s average velocity during the motion is 20 ms , thenfindthe value of t.
2 -1
25 sec
Q.6
The fig. shows the v-t graph of a particle moving in straight line. Find the tim
e when particle returns to the starting point.
v
Q.7 Q.8 Q.9
A particle is proj ected in the X-Y plane. 2 sec after proj ection the velocity
of the particle makes an angle 45° with the X - axis. 4 sec after projection, it m
oves horizontally. Find the velocity of projection (use g = 10 ms ).
-2
A small ball rolls off the top landing of a staircase. It strikes the mid point
of the first step and then mid point of the second step. The steps are smooth &
identical in height & width. Find the coefficient of restitution between the bal
l & the first step. A stone is dropped from a height h. Simultaneously another s
tone is thrown up from the ground with such a velocity that it can reach a heigh
t of 4h. Find the time when two stones cross each other.
2
Q.10 A particle is proj ected upwards with a velocity of 100 m/sec at an angle o
f 60° with the vertical. Find the time when the particle will move perpendicular t
o its initial direction, taking g=10 m/sec . Q.ll A particle is moving on a stra
ight line. Its displacementfromthe initial position |s„j is plotted against time i
n the graph shown. What will be the velocity of the particle at 2/3 sec? Assume
the graph to be a sine curve. - /
\time
T = 2s~
faBansal Classes
Kinematics
[4]
Q.12 A large number of bullets are fired in all direction with the same speed v.
What is the maximum area on ground on which these bullets can spread? Q.13 A bo
at starts from rest from one end of a bank of a river of width d flowing with ve
locity u. The boat is steered with constant acceleration a in a direction perpen
dicular to the bank. Ifpoint of start is origin, direction ofbank is x axis and
perpendicular to bank is y axis. Find the equation oftrajectory ofthe boat. Q.14
A ball is thrown horizontallyfroma cliff such that it strikes ground after 5 se
c. The line of sightfromthe point of projection to the point ofhitting makes an
angle of 37° with the horizontal. What is the initial velocity ofprojection. Q.15
A ball is proj ected on smooth inclined plane in direction perpendicular to line
of greatest slope with velocity of 8m/s. Find it's speed after 1 sec. Q.16 A gl
ass wind screen whose inclination with the vertical can be changed, is mounted o
n a cart as shown infigure.The cart moves uniformly along the horizontal path wi
th a speed of 6 m/s. At what maximum angle a to the vertical can the wind screen
be placed so that the rain drops falling vertically downwards with velocity 2 m
/s, do not enter the cart? Q.17 A particle is proj ectedfrompoint P with velocit
y 5 A/2 m/s perpendicular to the surface of a hollowrightangle cone whose axis i
s vertical. It collides at Q normally. Find the time ofthe flight ofthe particle
. Q.18 Find range ofproj ectile on the inclined plane which is proj ected perpen
dicular to the incline plane with velocity 20m/s as shown in figure. Q.19 AB and
CD are two smooth parallel walls. A child rolls a ball along ground from A towa
rds point P find PD so that ball reaches point B after striking the wall CD. Giv
en coefficient of restitution e = 0.5
0
8 m/s
777777777777777777/7777777777 mmn
o
y
o
t--
u = 20ms-' 37°X C- P«—X- -D A; 1.5m -B
Q.20 Initial acceleration of a particle moving in a straight line is a and initi
al velocity is zero. The acceleration reduces continuously to half in every t se
conds as a =a . Find the terminal velocity of the particle. 2— ta 0 mvuuuuummuwmv
Q.21 Find the acceleration of movable pulley P and block B if rH rK acceleration
of block A = 1 m/s 4-.
Q 2
El Q.22 The velocities of Aand B are marked inthefigure.Find the velocity of blo
ck C (assume that the pulleys are ideal and string inextensible).
^777777777777777777777777 3m/s lm/s
)£
m
777777777777777777777777
J3
B
faBansal Classes
Kinematics
[5]
Q.23 A particle is moving in x-y plane such that x = t + sin(t) meter, y = cos (
t) meter, t is the time in sec. Find the length of the path taken by the particl
e from t = 0 to t = 2n sec. Q.24 The speed of a particle when it is at its great
est height ^2/5 is of its speed when it is at its half the maximum height. The a
ngle ofproj ection is and the velocity vector angle at half the maximum height i
s . Q.25 A weightless inextensible rope on a stationary wedge forming angle a wi
th the horizontal. One end of the rope is fixed to the wall at point A. A small
load is attached to the rope at point B. The wedge starts moving to therightwith
a constant acceleration. Determine the acceleration a, ofthe load when it is st
ill on the wedge.
777777777777/
Q.26 The horizontal range of a projectiles is R and the maximum height attained
by it is H. A strong wind now begins to blow in the direction of motion of the p
rojectile, giving it a constant horizontal acceleration = g/2. Under the same co
nditions ofproj ection, find the horizontal range of the proj ectile. Q .27 Cons
ider the acceleration of a particle for a given time't' at 'a' m/s followed imme
diately by retardation at the same rate of'a' m/s for time 't/2', as one cycle.
If the particle startedfromrest,findthe distance travelled by it after 'n' such
cycles in succession.
2 2
Q. 2 8 A particle is thrown horizontally with relative velocity 10 m/sfroman inc
lined plane, which is also moving with acceleration 10 m/s vertically upward. Fi
nd the time after which it lands on the plane (g = 10 m/s ) ^
2 2
10m/s
3 0
2
faBansal Classes
Kinematics
[6]
Q. 1 A steel ball bearing is releasedfromthe roof of a building. An observer sta
nding infrontof a window 120 cm high observes that the ball takes 0.125 sec to f
all from top to the bottom of the window. The ball continutes to fall & makes a
completely elastic collision with side walk & reappears at the bottom of the win
dow 2 s after passing it on the way down. How tall is the building ? Q. 2 A trai
n takes 2 minutes to acquire its full speed 60kmphfromrest and 1 minute to come
to restfromthe full speed. If somewhere in between two stations 1 km ofthe track
be under repair and the limited speed on this part be fixed to 20kmph, find the
late running ofthe train on account of this repair work, assuming otherwise nor
mal at running of the train between the stations. Q. 3 A speeder in an automobil
e passes a stationary policeman who is hiding behind a bill board with a motorcy
cle. After a 2.0 sec delay (reaction time) the policeman accelerates to his maxi
mum speed of 150 km/hr in 12 sec and catches the speeder 1.5 km beyond the billb
oard. Find the speed of speeder in km/hr. Q. 4 Q.5 Q. 6 Q.7 Q. 8 (a) (b) Q. 9 Q.
10 Q. 11 (i) (ii) (iii) Aballoon is ascending vertically with an acceleration o
f 0.2m/s , Two stones are droppedfromit at an interval of 2 sec. Find the distan
ce between them 1.5 sec after the second stone is released.(use g=9.8m/s )
2 2
EXERCISE # III
A ship steaming north at the rate of 12 km/h observes a ship due east to itself
and distant 10 km, which steaming due west at the rate of 16 km/h. After what ti
me they are at least distancefromone another and what is this least distance. An
aeroplane is observed by two persons travelling at 60 km/hr in two vehicles mov
ing in opposite directions on a straight road. To an observer in one vehicle the
plane appears to cross the road track at right angles while to the observer in
the other vehicle the angle appears to be 45°. At what angle does the plane actual
ly cross the road track and what is its speed relative to the ground. A girl can
paddle her canoe at 5m/sec. in still water. She wishes to cross a straight rive
r which is flowing at 3m/sec. At what angle to the river bank should she steer t
o cross, (a) as quickly as possible, (b) by the shortest route. How long will ap
lane take to fly around a square with side a with the wind blowing at a velocity
u, in the two cases the direction ofthe wind coincides with one ofthe sides the
direction ofthe wind coincides with one diagonal ofthe square. The velocity oft
he plane in still air is v > u. Two ships A and B originally at a distance d fro
m each other depart at the same time from a straight coastline. Ship A moves alo
ng a straight line perpendicular to the shore while ship B constantly heads for
ship A, having at each moment the same speed as the latter. After a sufficiently
great interval oftime the second ship will obviously follow thefirstone at a ce
rtain distance. Find the distance. The slopes of the wind-screen of two motorcar
s are p = 3 0° and p = 15° respectively. The first car is travelling with a velocity
of v horizontally. The second car is travelling with a velocity v in the same d
irection. The hail stones are falling vertically. Both the drivers observe that
the hail stones rebound vertically after elastic collision with the wind-screen.
Find the ratio of v,/v A rocket is launched at an angle 53° to the horizontal wit
h an initial speed of 100 ms . It moves along its initial line of motion with an
acceleration of 30 ms~ for 3 seconds. At this time its engine falls & the rocke
t proceeds like afreebody. Find : the maximum altitude reached by the rocket tot
al time of flight. the horizontal range . [ sin 53° = 4/5 ]
2 t 2 r _1 2
^Bansal Classes
Kinematics
[7]
Q.12 A small ball is thrown between two vertical walls such that in the absence
of the wall its range would have been 5d. The angle of projection is a. Given th
at all the collisions are perfectly elastic, find (a) Maximum height attained by
the ball. \u\uu\uuvwu\ (b) Total number of collisions before the ball comes bac
k to the ground, and d/2 (c) Point at which the ball fallsfinally.The walls are
supposed to be very tall. Q.13 A hunter is riding an elephant ofheight 4m moving
in straight line with uniform speed of 2m/sec. A deer running with a speed V in
frontat a distance of 4V5m moving perpendicular to the direction of motion of th
e elephant. If hunter can throw his spear with a speed of 1 Om/sec. relative to
the elephant, then at what angle 0 to it's direction of motion must he throw his
spear horizontally for a successful hit. Find also the speed 'V' ofthe deer. Q.
14 A perfectly elastic ball is thrownfromthe foot of a smooth plane inclined at
an angle a to the horizontal. If after striking the plane at a distance Ifromthe
point of projection, it rebounds and retraces its former gl (1 + 3 sin a) path,
show that the velocity of projection is 2 sin a Q.15 A particle is proj ectedfr
omthe foot of an inclined plane at an angle a in the vertical plane through the
line of greatest slope & hits the plane at right angles. If p be the angle the d
irection of projection makes with the plane & if the particle returns to the poi
nt of proj ection in two jumps,findthe value ofthe coefficient ofrestitution. Q.
16 A projectile is to be thrown horizontallyfromthe top of a wall of height 1.7
m. Calculate the initial velocity ofprojection if it hits perpendicularly an inc
line of angle 37° which startsfromthe ground at the bottom of the wall. The line o
f greatest slope of incline lies in the plane ofmotion of projectile. Q.17 Two i
nclined planes OA and OB having inclination (with horizontal) 30° and 60° respective
ly, intersect each other at O as shown infig.Aparticle is projected from point P
with velocity u = \ 0^3 m s along a direction perpendicular to plane OA. Ifthe
particle strikes plane OB perpendicularly at Q, calculate velocity with which pa
rticle strikes the plane OB, (a) (b) time offlight, (c) vertical height h of Pfr
omO, (d) maximum heightfromO attained by the particle and (e) distance PQ Q.18 A
particle is projected with a velocity 2 ^/ag so that it just clears two walls o
f equal height 'a' which are at a distance '2a' apart. Show that the time of pas
sing between the walls is 2-JaJg • Q.19 A stone is projected from the point of a g
round in such a direction so as to hit a bird on the top of a telegraph post of
height h and then attain the maximum height 2h above the ground. If at the insta
nt of projection, the bird were to fly away horizontally with a uniform speed, f
ind the ratio between the horizontal velocities ofthe bird and the stone, if the
stone still hits the bird while descending. Q.20 Two persons Ram and Shyam are
throwing ball at each other as shown in thefigure.The maximum horizontal distanc
efromthe building where Ram can stand and still throw a ball at Shyam is dj. The
maximum ^ horizontal distance of Ramfromthe building where Shyam can throw a ba
ll is d . If both of them can throw ball with a velocity of ^2gk, find -nn mm' m
u u u m m fc m ufl the ratio of dj/d . Neglect the height of each person.
2 _1
Shyam
2
2
faBansal Classes
Kinematics
[8]
EXERCISE # III
Q. 1 The motion of a body is given by the equation = 6 . 0 - 3 v(t) ; where v (t
) is the speed in m/s & t in sec., if the body has v = 0 at t = 0 then (A) the t
erminal speed is 2.0 m/s (B) the magnitude of the initial acceleration is 6.0 m/
s (C) the speed varies with time as v(t) = 2(l -e~ )m/s (D) the speed is 1.0 m/s
when the acceleration is halfthe initial value. [JEE' 1995]
2 3t
Q.2
Two guns, situated at the top of a hill of height 10 m, fire one shot each with
the same speed 5 yfs m/s at; some interval oftime. One gun fires horizontally an
d other fires upwards at an angle of 60° with the horizontal. The shots collide in
air at a point P. Find (a) the time interval between thefirings,and (b) the coo
rdinates ofthe point P. Take origin of the coordinates system at the foot ofthe
hill right below the muzzle and traj ectories in X-Y plane. [JEE' 1996] The traj
ectory ofa proj ectile in a vertical plane is y = ax - bx , where a, b are cons
tants & x and y are respectively the horizontal & vertical distances ofthe proje
ctilefromthe point ofprojection. The maximum height attained is & the angle of p
rojectionfromthe horizontal is . [JEE' 1997]
2
Q. 3 Q.4
(a)
(b) Q.5 (i) (ii) Q.6 Q.7
A large heavy box is sliding without friction down a smooth plane of inclination
9. From a point P on the bottom ofa box, a particle is proj ected inside the bo
x. The'initial speed ofthe particle with respect to box is u and the direction o
f projection makes an angle a with the bottom as shown in figure. ithe particle
lands. (Assume that the particle does not litany other surface of the box. Negle
ct air resistance). , ' Ifthe horizontal displacement ofthe particle as seen by
an observer on the ground is zero,findthe speed of the box with respect to the g
round at the instant when the particle was projected. [JEE' 1998] A particle of
mass 10~ kg is moving slong the positive x-axis under the influence of a force —K
F(x)= whereK= 10 Nm .Attimet = 0itisatx-1.0m&itsvelocityisv = 0. Find: 2x its ti
me at when it reaches x = 0.25 m. thevelocitywhich it reaches x = 0.5 0 m [JEE'
1998] In 1.0 sec. a particle goesfrompoint Ato point B moving in a semicircle of
radius 1.0 m. The magnitude of average velocity is: [JEE '99] (A) 3.14 m/sec (B)
2.0 m/sec im (C) 1.0 m/sec (D) zero BThe co-ordinates of a particle moving in a
plane are given by x (t) = a cos (7it) and y (t) = b sin (rat) where a, b (<a)
& n are positive constants of appropriate dimensions. (A) the path of the partic
le is an ellipse (B) the velocity & acceleration of the particle are normal to e
ach other at t = n/(2n) (C) the acceleration ofthe particle is always directed t
owards a focus (D) the distance travelled by the particle in time interval t = 0
o t = n/(2n) is a. [JEE' 1999]
2 _2 2 2
^Bansal Classes
Kinematics
[9]
Q. 8
A ball is dropped verticallyfroma height d above the ground it hits the ground a
nd bounces up vertically to a height dl2. Neglecting subsequent motion and air r
esistances, its velocity v varies with the height h above the ground as [JEE'200
0 (Scr)] (A) (B) (C) (D)
An object A is kept fixed at the point x = 3 m and y = 1.25 m on a plank P raise
d above the ground. At time t = 0 the plank starts moving along the+x direction
with an acceleration 1.5 m/s . At the A same instant a stone is projectedfromthe
origin with a velocity u as 1.25m shown. A stationary person on the ground obse
rves the stone hitting the object during its downward motion at an angle of 45° to
the horizontal. All the motions are in x-y plane. Find u and the time after Z 3
.0 m o i which the stone hits the object. Take g = 10 m/s . [JEE 2000] Q. 10 On
africtionlesshorizontal surface, assumed to be the x-y plane, a small trolley A
is moving along a straight line parallel to the y-axis (seefigure)with a constan
t velocity of (V3 -1) m/s. At a particular instant, when the line OA makes an an
gle of 45° with the x-axis, a ball is thrown along the surfacefromthe origin 0. It
s velocity makes an angle <j) with the x-axis and it hits the trolley. o /V ° (a)
The motion ofthe ball is observedfromtheframeof trolley Calculate the angle 0 ma
de by the velocity vector of the ball with the x-axis in this frame. - 49 [JEE 2
002] (b) Find the speed of the ball with respect to the surface, if 4> = — .
2 2 5
Q.9
Q. 11 A particle startsfromrest. Its acceleration (a) versus time (t) is as show
n a* in the figure. The maximum speed ofthe particle will be 10m/s [JEE 2004 (Sc
r)] (A) 110 m/s (B) 55 m/s (C) 550 m/s (D) 660 m/s
2
11
•t(s)
Q. 12 A small block slides withoutfrictiondown an inclined plane startingfromres
t. Let Sn be the distance 2n 2n-l 2n - 1 2n + 1 (C) 2n + l (D) 2n + l (A) 2n (B)
2 n - l Q. 13 The velocity displacement graph of a particle moving along a stra
ight line is shown. The most suitable acceleration-displacement graph will be
v 7
travelledfromtime t = n -1 to t=n. Then 7 is ^n-l-l
S
n
[JEE' 2004 (Scr)]
TfT-X
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D) [JEE 2005 (Scr)]
faBansal Classes
Kinematics
[10]
ANSWER KEY EXERCISE # I
Q.l Q.4 Q.8 Q.12 6m/s tan (1/2)
-1
Q.2 Q.5 Q.9 Q.13
1
W2I 5s v8gy
r
axi/min Q.6 36.2 sec.
Q.3 Q-7 Q.ll
5 m/sec 20V5 S7T
0
3/4
7IV
Q.10 20 sec Q.14 100/3 m/s Q.18 75m
B 2 1
ax
Q.15 10 m/s Q.19 lm Q.22 5 m/s Q.25 2asin(a/2)
Q.16 2tan- (l/3) ptp Q.20 /n(2) Q.23 8m
a
Q.17 1 sec
p
Q.21 a = l m / s H , a = 2 m / s t Q.24 60°, tan" ( f i f i ) Q.27 n(3n + 4) at ,
Q.28 ^ sec
1
Q.26 R + 2H Q.l Q.4 Q.7 Q.8 Q.10 Q.12 Q.13 Q.16 Q.19 Q.l
EXERCISE # 77
Q.2 160 sec 20.5 m Q.5 24 min, 6 km 50m (a) 90°, (b) 127° to the river flow
2 2 v y y
8
Q.3 Q.6
122.7 km/hr e = tan- 2,v-134.16km/h
1
2afv + V v - u l 2j2i ly2- u2 (a) v 2 2 , ( b ) \ . Q.9 2 ' v -u v -u Q.ll (i) 1
503.2m (ii) 35.54sec (iii) 3970.56 m 3 (a) 5d/4 tana, (b) 9, (c) point 0 V5-1 Q.
15 e = — 0 = 37°, v = 6m/s 2 Q.17 (a) 10 ms , (b) 2 sec, (c) 5 m, (d) 16.25 m, (e) 2
0 m u=3m/s 2 lk-h V2+1 i
-1 Q 2 0
EXERCISE # III
+
h
A, B, C, D u sin2a Q.4 (a) gcosQ ,(b)v = Q.7 Q.6 Q.9 Q.8 A Q.12 Q.ll B
2
^Bansal Classes
Q.3 — , tan-'a Q.2 (a) 1 sec, (b) (5 V3 m, 5 m) ucos(a + Q) Q.5 (i) V = - 1 1 m/s
( i i ) t = | + ^ cosO A, B Q.10 (a) 45°, (b) 2 m/sec u = 7.29 m/s, t = 1 sec C Q.
13 B
Kinematics
[11]
BANSAL CLASSES
TARGET IIT JEE 2007 XI (P,Q,R,S)
IIT-JEE SCREENING 2007 QUESTION BA NK ON
KINEMATICS
Q. 1
QUESTION ON There are 54 questions in this question bank.
KINEMATICS
A particle is moving along a curve. Then (A) if its speed is constant it has no
acceleration (B) if its speed is increasing the acceleration of the particle is
along its direction of motion (C) if its speed is constant the magnitude of its
acceleration is proportional to its curvature. (D) the direction of its accelera
tion cannot be along the tangent.
Q.2
A boat having a speed of 5 km/hr. in still water, crosses a river of width 1 km
along the shortest possible path in 15 minutes. The speed of the river in Km/hr.
(A) 1 (B) 3 '(C) 4 (D) V41 A block is thrown with a velocity of 2 ms~' (relativ
e to ground) on a belt, which is moving with velocity 4 ms in opposite direction
of the initial velocity of block. If the block stops slipping on the belt after
4 sec of the throwing then choose the correct statements (s) (A) Displacement w
ith respect to ground is zero after 2.66 and displacement with respect to ground
is 12 m after 4 sec. (B) Displacement with respect to ground in 4 sec is 4 m. (
C) Displacement with respect to belt in 4 sec is - 12 m. (D) Displacement with r
espect to ground is zero in 8/3 sec.
_1
Q.3
Q.4
A particle has initial velocity 10 m/s . It moves due to constant retarding forc
e along the line of velocity which produces a retardation of 5 m/s . Then (A) th
e maximum displacement in the direction of initial velocity is 10 m (B) the dist
ance travelled in first 3 seconds is 7.5 m (C) the distance travelled in first 3
seconds is 12.5 m (D) the distance travelled in first 3 seconds is 17.5 m.
2
Q.5
Q.6
The displacement x of a particle depend on time t as x = at - pt a (A) particle
will return to its starting point after time P" 2a (B) the particle will come to
rest after time ~ (C) the initial velocity of the particle was zero but its ini
tial acceleration was not zero. a (D) no net force act on the particle at time 3
P A ball is thrown from a point on ground at some angle of projection. At the sa
me time a bird starts from a point directly above this point of projection at a
height h horizontally with speed u. Given that in its flight ball just touches t
he bird at one point. Find the distance on ground where ball strikes
2 3
(A) 2u Q.7
1
(B)u
(C) 2u
(D)u
If position time graph of a particle is sine curve as shown, what will be its ve
locity-time graph. (B) (C)
<6BansalClasses
Question Bank on Kinematics
m
Q.8
A truck starting from rest moves with an acceleration of 5 m/s for 1 sec and the
n moves with constant velocity. The velocity w.r.t ground v/s time graph for blo
ck in truck is (Assume that block does not fall off the truck)
2
(A) Q.9
5 m/s
(B)
3ms
(C)
5 m/s
H L d i = 0.2 TST i® Psewtio (D)None of these <u,
If angular velocity of a disc depends an angle rotated 0 as co = 0 + 20, then it
s angular acceleration a at 0 = 1 rad is : (A) 8 rad/sec (B) 10 rad/sec (C) 12 r
ad/sec '' (D) None
2 2 2 2
Q.10 Two particles start simultaneously from the same point and move along two s
traight lines, one with uniform velocity v and other with a uniform acceleration
a. If a is the angle between the lines of motion of two particles then the leas
t value of relative velocity will be at time given by (A) (v/a) sin a (B)(v/a)co
sa (C)(v/a)tana (D)(v/a)cota Q.ll If a particle takes t second less and acquires
a velocity of v ms"" more in falling through the same distance (starting from r
est) on two planets where the accelerations due to gravity are 2 g and 8 g respe
ctively then: (A) v = 2gt (B) v = 4gt (C) v = 5 gt (D) v = 16 gt
1
Q.12 At a given instant, A is moving with velocity of 5m/s upwards. What is velo
city of B at that time : (A) 15 m/s ^ (B) 15 m/s t (C) 5 m/s I (D) 5 m/s t Q.13
It takes one minute for a passenger standing on an escalator to reach .ac top. I
f the escalator does not move it takes him 3 minute to walk up . How long will i
t take fo. uie passenger to arrive at the top if he walks up the moving escalato
r ? (A) 30 sec (B) 45 sec (C) 40 sec t D) 35 sec Q.14 The co-ordinates of a movi
ng particle at a time t, are give by, x = 5 sin 101, y = 5 cos 1 Ot. The speed o
f the particle is : (A) 25 " (B) 50 (G) 10 (D) None
Q. 15 Tangential acceleration of a particle moving in a circle of radius 1 m var
ies with time t as (initial velocity of particle is zero). Time after which tota
l acceleration oi particle makes and urgl of 30° with radial acceleration is (A) 4
sec (B) 4/3 sec (C) 2 sec (D) ^2
m
s e c
time (sec)
Q.16 A particle is proj ected from a horizontal plane (x-z plane) such that its
velocity vector at time t is given by V = ai + (b - ct) j • Its range on the horiz
ontal plane is given by 3ba 2ba ba (D) None (C) (B) (A)
Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.17 v-t graph of an obj ect of mass 1 kg is shown (A) net work done on the obje
ct in 30 sec is zero. (B) the average acceleration of the object is zero. (C) th
e average velocity of the object is zero. (D) the average force on the object is
zero.
v (m/s)
20-10--
10
20
30 t(sec)
Q. 18 A projectile of mass 1 kg is projected with a velocity of V20 m/s such tha
t it strikes on the same level as the point of projection at a distance of V3 m.
Which of the following options are incorrect: (A) the maximum height reached by
the projectile can be 0.25 m. (B) the minimum velocity during its motion can be
Vl5 m/s (C) the minimum time taken for the flight can be sec. (D) maximum poten
tial energy during its motion can be 6J. Q. 19 Velocity-time graph for a car is
semicircle as shown here. Which of the following is correct: (A) Car must move i
n circular path. (B) Acceleration of car is never zero, (C) Mean speed ofthe par
ticle is n/2 m/s. (D) The car makes a turn once during its motion. lm/s
2 sec
V1
Q.20 A ball is projected from top of a tower with a velocity of 5 m/s at an angl
e of 53° to horizontal. Its speed when it is at a height of 0.45 m from the point
of projection is : (A) 2 m/s (B) 3 m/s (C)4m/s (D) data insufficient. Q.21 A par
ticle moves along a straight line in such a way that it's acceleration is increa
sing at the rate of 2 m/s . It's initial acceleration and velocity were 0, the d
istance,covered by it in t = 3 second is. (A) 27 m (B) 9 m (C) 3 m (D) 1 m
3
Q.22 A flag is mounted on a car moving due North with velocity of 20 km/hr. Stro
ng winds are blowing due East with velocity of 20 km/hr. The flag will point in
direction (A) East (B) North - East (C) South - East (D) South - West Q.23 A bal
l is thrown vertically down with velocity of 5m/s. With what velocity should ano
ther ball be thrown down after 2 seconds so that it can hit the 1 ball in 2 seco
nds (A) 40 m/s (B) 55 m/s (C) 15 m/s (D) 25 m/s
st
B Q.24 A man is crossing a river flowing with velocity of 5 m/s. He reaches a po
int' directly across at a distance of 60 m in 5 sec. His velocity in still water
should be \T=5 / 60 m (A) 12 m/s (B) 13 m/s — (C) 5 m/s (D) 10 m/s
m s
Q. 2 5 Average velocity of a particle is proj ectile motion between its starting
point and the highest point of its trajectory is: (projection speed = u, angle
of projection from horizontal 0) (A) u cosG (B) ^Vl + 3cos 9
2
(C) ^•V'2 + COS 0
2
(D) U
+ COS
<6 Bansal Classes
m
Q.26 Find time of flight of projectile thrown horizontally with speed 50 ms from
a long inclined plane which makes an angle of 6 = 45° from horizontal. (A) 10V2 s
ec (B) 20V2 sec (C) 10 sec (D) 5-Jl sec
-1
Q.27 Particle is dropped from the height of 20m from horizontal ground. There is
wind blowing due to which horizontal acceleration of the particle becomes 6 ms
. Find the horizontal displacement of the particle till it reaches ground. (A) 6
m (B)10m (C) 12 m (D) 24 m
-2
Q.28 A bail is dropped from height 5m. The time after which ball stops reboundin
g if coefficient of restitution between ball and ground e = 1/2, is (A) 1 sec (B
) 2 sec (C) 3 sec (D) infinite Q.29 A ball is hit by a batsman at an angle of 37°
as shown in figure. The man standing at P should run at what minimum velocity so
that he catches the ball before it strikes the ground. Assume that height of ma
n is negligible in comparison to maximum height of projectile. (A) 3 ms" (B) 5 m
s" (C) 9 ms(D) 12 ms"
1 1
Q.30 Find the velocity of the hanging block if the velocities of the free ends o
f the rope are as indicated in the figure. (A) 3/2 m/s t (B) 3/2 m/s I (C) 1/2 m
/s T (D) 1/2 m/s 4
2m/s
IU.LJJ1I
mi.""
lm/s
•
Q.31 A man swimming down stream overcome a float at a point M. After travelling
distance D he turned back and passed the float at-a distance of D/2 from the poi
nt M, then the ratio of speed of swimmer with respect to still water to the spee
d of the river will be (A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 2.5 Q.32 Choose the correct alterna
tive (s) (A) If the greatest height to which a man can throw a stone is h, then
the greatest horizontal distance upto which he can throw the stone is 2h-. (B) T
he angle of projection for a projectile motion whose range R is n times the maxi
mum height is tan (4/n) (C) The time of flight T and the horizontal range R of a
projectile are connected by the equation gT = 2Rtan9 v. here 0 is the angle of
projection. (D) A ball is thrown vertically up. Another ball is thrown at an ang
le 0 with the vertical. Both of them remain in air for the same period of time.
Then the ratio of heights attained by the two balls 1:1.
-1 2
Q.33 Acceleration versus velocity graph ofa particle moving in a straight line s
tarting from rest is as shown in figure. The corresponding velocity-time graph w
ould be (A) (B) (D)
1*1<JjBansalClasses
Question Bank on G r a v i t a t i o n
[5]
Q.34 Aparticle is projected vertically upwards from a point Aon the ground. It t
akes t time to reach a point B but it still continues to move up. If it takes fu
rther tj time to reach the ground from point B then height of point Bfromthe gro
und is
1
(A) | g ( t ! + t ) (C)|g(t,+t y (B) g t, t (D) ™ g t , t . Q.35 Mark the correct
statements for a particle going on a straight line (A) if the velocity is zero a
t any instant, the acceleration should also be zero at that instant (B) if the v
elocity is zero for a time interval, the acceleration is zero at any instant wit
hin the time interval (C) if the velocity and acceleration have opposite sign, t
he object is slowing down (D) if the position and velocity have opposite sign, t
he particle is moving towards the origin
2 2 2 2
Q.36 A projectile is fired with a speed u at an angle 0 with the horizontal. Its
speed when its direction of motion makes an angle 'a' with the horizontal is (A
) u sec0 cosa (B) u sec0 sina (C) u cos0 seca (D) u sin 0 seca Q.37 Balls are th
rown vertically upward in such a way that the next ball is thrown when the previ
ous one is at the maximum height. If the maximum height is 5m, the number of bal
ls thrown per minute will be (A) 40 (B) 50 (C) 60 (D) 120 Q.38 A projectile is f
ired with a velocity at right angle to the slope which is inclined at an angle 0
with the horizontal. The expression for the range R along the incline is 2v 2v
2v sec© (B) - t a n 0 (C) tan0 sec 0 (D) -—tan 0 (A)
2 : i : 2
Q.39 A bead is free to slide down a smooth wire tightly stretched between points
A and B on a vertical circle. If the bead starts from rest at A, the highest po
int on the Gircle (A) its velocity v on arriving at B is proportional to cos0 (B
) its velocity v on arriving at B is proportional to tan0 (C) time to arrive at
B is proportional to cos0 (D) time to arrive at B is independent of 0 Q.40 The v
elocity- time graph of a body falling from rest under gravity and rebounding fro
m a solid surface is represented by which ofthe following graphs? v v (D) (C) (B
). (A) -»t -> t Q.41 A disc arranged in a vertical plane has two groves of same le
ngth directed along the vertical chord AB and CD as shown inthefig.The same part
icles slide down along AB and CD. The ratio of the time t /t is (A) 1 : 2 (B) 1
: V2 (C) 2 : 1 (D) 4 l • 1
AB CD
Q.42 The magnitude of displacement of a particle moving in a circle of radius a
with constant angular speed co varies with time t as cot (D) 2a cos cot (C) 2a c
os cot (B) 2a sin(A) 2 a sincot
1*1<JjBansalClasses
[6]
Q.43 A glass wind screen whose inclination with the vertical can be changed is m
ounted on a car. The car moves horizontally with a speed of 2m/s. At what angle
a with the vertical should the wind screen be placed so that the rain drops fall
ing vertically downwards with velocity 6 m/s strike the wind screen perpendicula
rly. (A) tan-'(3) (B) tan- (l/3) (C) cos-'P) (D) s u r ^ l ^ ) Q.44 A particle i
s projected vertically upwards from O with velocity v and a second particle is p
rojected at the same instant from P (at a height h above O) with velocity v at a
n angle of projection 0. The time when the distance between them is minimum is h
(C) h/v (D) h/2v (A) 2vsin0 (B) 2vcos0 Q.45 A body moves with velocity v = / n
x m/s where x is its position. The net force acting on body is zero at: (A) 0 m
(B) x = e m (C) x = e m (D) x = 1 m Q.46 Wind is blowing in the north direction
at speed of 2 m/s which causes the rain to fall at some angle with the vertical.
With what velocity should a cyclist drive so that the rain appears vertical to
him : (A) 2 m/s south (B) 2 m/s north (C) 4 m/s west (D) 4 m/s south Q.47 A body
A is thrown vertically upwards with such a velocity that it reaches a maximum h
eight of h. Simultaneously another body B is dropped from height h. It strikes t
he ground and does not rebound. The velocity of A relative to B v/s time graph i
s best represented by : (upward direction is positive)
! 2
(A)
V a b
(B)
V a b
(C)
' AB
(D)
VAB
t!
Q.48 A body of mass 1 kg is acted upon by a force F = 2 sin 37rt i + 3 cos 3 ret
j find its position at t = 1 sec if at t = 0 it is at rest at origin. f 3 2^ r2
2 ^ f 2 2 ) (D) none of these (A) L37t ' 9TT J (B) L 37r ' 3n ) (C) L3TT ' 3tc
J
2 2 2 2 2
Q.49 A force F = Be acts on a particle whose mass is m and whose velocity is 0 a
t t = 0. It's terminal velocity is: C. B BC B (A) mB (B) mC ( D ) - mC (Q m — y Q.
50 A man moves in x-y plane along the path shown. At what point is c his average
velocity vector in the same direction as his instantaneous velocity vector. The
man starts from point P. A (A) A (B)B (C)C (D) D
Ct
<6 Bansal Classes
Q.51 From the velocity time garph of a particle moving in straight line decide w
hich of the following is incorrect statement. (A) the particle crosses its initi
al position (B) the speed ofthe particle increases continuously (C) the force on
the particle is constant (D) the acceleration of the particle is constant.
t v
m
Q. 5 2 If T is the total time of flight, h is the maximum height & R is the rang
e for horizontal motion, the x & y co-ordinates of projectile motion and time t
are related as: (A) y - 4 h ( i ) ( . - i ) ( O y = 4h ( ! ) ( , - ! ) (B)y = 4
h ( ! ) -4h(|)(.-|
y
Q.53 A particle initially at rest is subjected to two forces . One is constant,
the other is a retarding force proportional to the particle velocity . In the su
bsequent motion of the particle : (A) the acceleration will increase from zero t
o a constant value (B) the acceleration will decrease from its initial value to
zero (C) the velocity will increase from zero to maximum & then decrease (D) the
velocity will increase from zero to a constant value. Q.54 A ball is projected
from ground with a velocity V at an angle 9 to the vertical. On its path it make
s an elastic collison with a vertical wall and returns to ground. The total time
of flight ofthe ball is 2vsin9 2vcos9 vsin29 vcos9 (A) - y (B) - 7 (C) — ( ° ) Q.l
Q.5 Q.9 C, D A, B, C, D C Q.2 Q.6 B C
ANSWERKEY
Q.3 Q-7 C Q.ll B Q.15 C Q.19 C Q.23 A Q.27 C Q.31 B
B, C, D
Q.4 Q.8
A, C C
Q.10 B Q.14 B Q.l 8 D Q.22 C Q.26 C Q.30 A Q.34 D Q.38 C Q.42 B Q.46 B Q.50 C Q.
54 B
Q.12 A Q.16 B Q.20 C Q.24 B Q.28 C Q.32 A, B, C, D Q.36 C Q.40 A Q.44 D Q.48 C Q
.52 A,B
Q.13 B Q.17 A, B, D Q.21 B Q.25 B Q.29 B Q.33 D Q.37 C Q.41 B Q.45 D Q.49 B Q.53
B,D
Q.35 B,C,D Q.39 A, D Q.43 A Q.47 C Q.51 B
1*1 <JjBansal Classes
[8]
XII (ALL)
t
•• .
MA GNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT
CONTENTS
KEY CONCEPT EXERCISE-I EXERCISE -II EXERCISE-III ANSWER KEY
A static charge produces only electric field and only electricfieldcan exert a f
orce on it A moving charge produces both electricfieldans magneticfieldand both
electricfieldand magnetic field can exert force on it. A current carrying conduc
tor produces only magneticfieldand only magneticfieldcan exert a force on it. Ma
gnetic charge (i.e. current), produces a magnetic field . It can not produce ele
ctric field as net charge on a current carrying conductor is zero. A magnetic fi
eld is detected by its action on current carrying conductors (or moving charges)
and magnetic needles (compass) needles. The vector quantity B known as MAGNETIC
INDUCTION is introduced to characterise a magnetic field . It is a vector quant
ity which may be defined in terms of the force it produces on electric currents
. Lines of magnetic induction may be drawn in the same way as lines of electric
field. The number of lines per unit area crossing a small area perpendicular to
the direction of the induction bring numerically equal to B . The number of line
s of b crossing a given area is referred to as the MAGNETIC FLUX linked wi th th
at area. For this reason B is also called MAGNETIC FLUX DENSITY . The magnetic i
nduction dB produced by an element d/ carrying a current I at a distance r is gi
ven by —> l(dlxr) Ho M Id^sinB or dB= dB 4ti r " here the quantity Id/ is called a
s current element strength. \i = permeability of the medium = u p, , \x(. = perm
eability of free space = relative permeability of the medium (Dimensionless quan
tity). Unit of M-o & n is NA" or Hrrr ; |i = 4 % x 10" Hm~
r z 0 r 2 1 0 7
KE Y CONCEPTS
MAGNETIC INDUCTION PRODUCED B Y A CURRENT (BIOT-SAVART L A W ) :
MAGNETIC INDUCTION DUE TO A MOVING CHARGE
dB =-M-qv sin 9 47tr"
0 p
In vector form it can be written as HI B 27ir
0
47U r
W
MAGNETIC INDUCTION DUE TO AN INIFINITE ST. CONDUCTOR
MAGNETIC INDUCTION DUE TO SEMI INIFINITE ST. CONDUCTOR
ô B = 47rr
1
M A G N E T I C INDUCTION D U E T O A CURRENT CARRYING STRAIGHT
CONDUCTOR
HI B = —— (cos 9, + cos 9,) 4tcR
n 5 v 1 27
If the wire is very long 9, = 9 = 0° then, B = 27tR
7
^Bansal Classes
Magnetics Effect of Current
[2]
8.
MAGNETIC FIELD D U E T O A
0
FLAT CIRCULAR C O I L CARRYING A
CURRENT :
(i)
p NI At its centre B = 2R , direction Where N = total number of turns in the coi
l I = current in the coil R = Radius of the coil On the axis
( ) N i R 2 2 + R 2
o
10.
MAGNETIC INDUCTION DUE TO SOLENOID
0
B= ^ (x f Where x = distance of the point from the centre . It is maximum at the
centre I MAGNETIC INDUCTION DUE TO FLAT CIRCULAR A R C p ie B 4TTR vi (ii)
0
B = p nl, direction along axis, where n -> no. of turns per m. I -> current
0
11.
MAGNETIC INDUCTION DUE TO TOROID
B = p nl N where n = —— (no. of turns per m) 2tcR
N = total turns
R»r
12.
MAGNETIC INDUCTION DUE TO CURRENT CARRYING SHEET
where I = Linear current density (A/m)
13. MAGNETIC INDUCTION DUE TO THICK SHEET
At point P At point P j
2
1 B = ~ u ld B = p Jx
out f) in 0
V
;2
p
' * •
JA/ni
2
x
14.
MAGNETIZATION INTENSITY ( H )
:
B The magnetic intensity (H) at any point in a magnetic field is defined as H = —
, where M B = magnetic induction at the point ; p = permeability of the medium (
a) The line of earth's magnetic induction lies in a vetical plane coinciding wit
h the magnetic North South direction at that place. This plane is called the MAG
NETIC MERIDIAN. Earth's magnetic axis is slightly inclined to the geometric axis
of earth and this angle varies from 10.5° to 20°. The Earth's Magnetic poles are op
posite to the geometric poles i. e. at earth's north pole, its magnetic south po
le is situated and vice versa. Magnetics Effect of Current ^Bansal Classes [3]
15. GILBERT'S MAGNETISM ( E A R T H ' S MAGNETIC F I E L D ) :
(b) On the magnetic meridian plane , the magnetic induction vector of the earth
at any point, generally inclined to the horizontal at an angle called the MAGNET
IC DIP at that place , such that B = total magnetic induction of the earth at th
at point. B = the vertical component of B in the magnetic meridian plane = B sin
9 . B = the horizontal component of B in the magnetic meridian plane = B cos 9
. = tan 9 . B (c) At a given place on the surface of the earth, the magnetic mer
idian and the geographic meridian may not coincide. The angle between them is ca
lled "DECLINATION AT THAT PLACE" . (d) Lines drawn on earth at different places
having same declination angle are called as "isogonic lines" and line ofzero dec
lination is called as "agonic lines". (e) Lines drawn on earth at different plac
es having same dip angle are called as "isoclinic lines" and line of zero dip is
called as "aclinic lines".
v H
H
16.
When more than one magnetic fields are suspended at a point and the vector sum o
f the magnetic inductions due to different fields , equal to zero, the point is
a magnetic neutral point.
AMPERES LAW J B . DF = >
NEUTRAL POINT IN SUPERPOSED MAGNETIC FIELDS :
17
21 = algebric sum of all the currents .
18. LORENTZ FORCE :
An electric charge 'q' moving with a velocity V through a magnetic field of magn
etic induction B experiences a force F, given by F = qVxB There fore, if the cha
rge moves in a space where both electric and magnetic fields are superposed . F
= nett electromagnetic force on the charge = q E + q V x B This force is called
the LORENTZ FORCE .
19. MOTION OF A CHARGE IN UNIFORM MAGNETIC FIELD :
(a) When v is || to B : Motion will be in a st. line and F = 0 (b) When v is to
B : Motion will be in circular path with radius R = velocity co = — and F = qvB. m
mv
and angular
(c)When v is atZG to B : Motion will be helical with radius R, = - -------- and
pitch qB P = 27tmv cos 6 qB
H a n d F = q v B s i n 0
20.
MAGNETIC FORCE O N A STRAIGHT CURRENT CARRYING W I R E
:
F = I (L x B) I = current in the straight conductor L - length of the conductor
in the direction of the current in it B = magnetic induction. (Uniform throughou
t the length of conduction) Note : In general force is F = JI (d£ x B)
^Bansal Classes
[4]
21.
(i) (ii)
When two long straight linear conductors are parallel and carry a current in eac
h , they magnetically interact with each other, one experiences a force. This fo
rce is of : Repulsion if the currents are anti-parallel (i.e. in opposite direct
ion) or Attraction if the currents are parallel (i.e. in the same direction) Thi
s force per unit length on either conductor is given by F = . Where r - perpendi
cular r distance between the parallel conductors When a plane closed current cir
cuit of'N' turns and of area 'A' per turn carrying a current I is placed in unif
orm magnetic field , it experience a zero nett force , but experience a torque g
iven b y i = N I A x B = MxB = BINA sin 9 When A = area vector outward from the
face of the circuit where the current is anticlockwise, B = magnetic induction o
fthe uniform magnetic feild. M = magnetic moment of the current circuit = IN A N
ote : This expression can be used only if B is uniform otherwise calculus will b
e used. It consists of a plane coil of many turns suspended in a radial magnetic
feild. when a current is passed in the coil it experiences a torque which produ
ces a twist in the suspension. This deflection is directly proportional to the t
orque .'. NIAB = KG I= (
( K \ MOVING COIL GALVANOMETER : MAGNETIC TORQUE O N A CLOSED CURRENT CIRCUIT :
MAGNETIC INTERACTION FORCE BETWEEN T w o PARALLEL LONG STRAIGHT CURRENTS :
22.
23.
9
K = elastic torsional constant of the suspension I=C 0 C = —-7— = GALVANOMETER CONST
ANT. NAB
24.
FORCE EXPERIENCED B Y A MAGNETIC DIPOLE IN A N O N - U N I F O R M MAGNETIC FIEL
D :
SB F = M dr where M = Magnetic dipole moment.
25. FORCE ON A RANDOM SHAPED CONDUCTOR IN MAGNETIC FIELD ,
1. 2.
26.
Magnetic force on a loop in a uniform B is zero b* Force experienced by a wire o
f any shape is equivalent to force on a wire joining points A & B in a uniform m
agnetic field . If a charge q is rotating at an angular velocity co, . qco its e
quivalent current is given as I 271 & its magnetic moment is M = l7tR - ~qcoR .
2 2
__ J
MAGNETIC MOMENT OF A ROTATING CHARGE:
A
NOTE:
The rate of magnetic moment to Angular momentum of a uniform rotating object whi
ch is charged M 2m uniformly is always a constant. Irrespective of the shape of
conductor — - —— L q
f§,Bansa!Classes
[11]
1 Q.2
Figure shows a straight wire of length / carrying a current i. Find the magnitud
e of magneticfieldproduced by the current at point P. - — . 5 5 Two circular coils
A and B of radius cm and 5 cm respectively carry current 5 Amp and ^ Amp respec
tively. The plane ofB is perpendicular to plane ofAand their centres coincide. F
ind the magnetic field at the centre. Find the magneti cfieldat the centre P of
square of side a shown in figure
/
EXERCISE # I
Q.4
What is the magnitude ofmagneticfieldat the centre 'O' ofloop ofradius V2 m made
of uniform wire when a current of 1 amp enters in the loop and taken out of it
by two long wires as shown in the figure. Find the magnetic induction at the ori
gin in thefigureshown. Find the magnetic induction at point 0, ifthe current car
rying wire is in the shape shown in the figure. Find the magnitude ofthe magneti
c induction B of a magneticfieldgenerated by a system of thin conductors along w
hich a current /' is flowing at a point A (0, R, O), that is the centre of a cir
cular conductor of radius R. The ring is in yz plane. ^
f
00 1 amp\
0 H--'
yT ° I
90 00
Ti airip
v/
-X
5
/.I
Q. 6 Q. 7
/<5.8 (i) (ii) Q; 9
w
Two circular coils of wire each having a radius of 4 cm and 10 turns have a comm
on axis and are 6 cm apart. If a current of 1 Apasses through each coil in the o
pposite directionfindthe magnetic induction. At the centre of either coil ; At a
point on the axis, midway between them. Six wires of current Ij = 1 A, I = 2A,
I = 3 A, I = 1 A, I = 5A and I = 4A cut the page perpendicularly at the points 1
,2,3,4,5 and 6 respectively as shown in thefigure.Find the value ofthe integral
j> B.d l around the closed path.
2 3 4 5 6
^
5
f§, Bansa! Classes
Q. 10 Electric charge q is uniformly distributed over a rod oflength /. The rod
is placed parallel to along wire carrying a current i. The separation between th
e rod and the wire is a. Find the force needed to move the rod along its length
with a uniform velocity v. Q/i 1 An electron moving with a velocity 5 x 10 ms" i
in the uniform electricfieldof 5 x 10 Vm j . Find the magnitude and direction o
f a minimum uniform magneticfieldin tesla that will cause the electron to move u
ndeviated along its original path.
6 1 7 1
[11]
(X I2 A charged particle (charge q, mass m) has velocity v at origin in +x direc
tion. In space there is a uniform magnetic field B in - z direction. Find the y
coordinate of particle when is crosses y axis.
0
Q. 13/ A conducting circular loop of radius r carries a constant current i. It i
s placed in a uniform magnetic field B o such that B is perpendicular to the pla
ne ofthe loop. Find the magnetic force acting on the loop is
0
Q . \ y A rectangular loop ofwire is oriented with the left corner at the origin
, one edge along X-axis and the other edge along Y-axis as shown in thefigure.A
magnetic field is into the page and has a magnitude that is given by (3 = ay whe
re a is contant. Find the total magnetic force on the loop if it carries current
i.
<8>B
-»x
Q.15 Two coils each of 100 turns are held such that one lies in the vertical pla
ne with their centres coinciding. The radius ofthe vertical coil is 20 cm and th
at ofthe horizontal coil is 3 0 cm. How would you neutralize the magneticfieldof
the earth at their common centre ? What is the current to be passed through eac
h coil ? Horizontal component of earth's magnetic induction-3.49 x 10" T and ang
le of dip = 30°.
5
Q.16 Find the ratio of magneticfieldmagnitudes at a distance 10 m along the axis
and at 60° from the axis, from the centre of a coil of radius 1 cm, carrying a cu
rrent 1 amp. Q.17 A particle of charge +q and mass m moving under the influence
of a uniform electricfieldE i and a magneticfieldB k enters in I quadrant of a c
oordinate system at a point (0, a) with initial velocity v i and leaves the quad
rant at a point (2a, 0) with velocity - 2v j. Find (a) Magnitude of electric fie
ld (b) Rate ofwork done by the electricfieldat point (0, a) (c) Rate of work don
e by both the fields at (2a, 0). Q.18 A system of long four parallel conductors
whose sections with the plane of the drawing lie at the vertices of a square the
re flow four equal currents. The directions of these currents are as follows : t
hose marked ® point away from the reader, while those marked with a dot point towa
rds the reader. How is the vector of magnetic induction directed at the centre o
f the square? Ij l
2
©©
Q.19 A cylindrical conductor ofradius R carries a current along its length. The
current density J, however, it is not uniform over the cross section of the cond
uctor but is a function ofthe radius according to J = br, where b is a constant.
Find an expression for the magneticfieldB. r^ (a) at T j < R & (b) at distance
r > R, mesured from the axis l[ ( I
2 R
Q . 20 A square current carrying loop made of thin wire and having a mass m =1 O
g can rotate withoutfrictionwith respect to the vertical axis 0 0 , passing thro
ugh the centre of the loop at right angles to two opposite sides of the loop. Th
e loop is placed in a homogeneous magneticfieldwith an induction B = 10" T direc
ted at right angles to the plane of the drawing. Acurrent I = 2Ais flowing in th
e loop. Find the period of small oscillations that the loop performs about its p
osition of stable equilibrium.
} 1
O^B
O,
[11]
f§,Bansa!Classes
Q.21 A charged particle having mass m and charge q is accelerated by a potential
difference V, it flies through a uniform transverse magneticfieldB. Thefieldocc
upies a region of space d. Find the time interval for which it remains inside th
e magnetic field. Q. 22 A proton beam passes without deviation through a region
of space where there are uniform transverse mutually perpendicular electric and
magneticfieldwith E and B. Then the beam strikes a grounded target. Find the for
ce imparted by the beam on the target ifthe beam current is equal to I. Q.23 An
infinitely long straight wire carries a conventional current I as shown in the f
igure. The rectangular loop carries a conventional current I in the clockwise di
rection. Find the net force on the rectangular loop.
1
Q.24 An arc of a circular loop of radius R is kept in the horizontal plane and a
constant magneticfieldB is applied in the vertical direction as shown in the fi
gure. If the arc carries current I thenfindthe force on the arc. Q.25 Two long s
traight parallel conductors are separated by a distance of r = 5cm and carry cur
rents i = 10A&i = 20A. What work per unit length of a conductor must be done to
increase the separation between the conductors to r„ = 10 cm if, currents flow in
the same direction?
1 1 2
List of recommended questions from I.E. Irodov.
3.220, 3.223, 3.224, 3.225, 3.226, 3.227, 3.228, 3.229, 3.230, 3.234, 3.236, 3.2
37, 3.242 3.243, 3.244, 3.245, 3.251, 3.252, 3.253,3.254,3.257, 3.258, 3.269, 3.
372, 3.373, 3.383, 3.384, 3.386, 3.389, 3.390, 3.391, 3.396
f§,Bansa!Classes
[11]
Q. 1 Three infinitely long conductors R, S and T are lying in a horizontal plane
as shown in thefigure.The currents in the respective conductors are R S T T • • 2-K
I = I Sin(Qt+y) I = I sin (©t) I = I sin (®t —) Find the amplitude of the vertical co
mponent of the magneticfieldat a point P, distance 'a' away from the central con
ductor S.
x R 0 s 0 T 0
EXERCISE # II
Q. 2
Four long wires each carrying current I as shown in the figure are placed at the
points A, B, C and D. Find the magnitude and direction of (i) magnetic field at
the centre of the square. (ii) force per metre acting on wire at point D.
2
D(-a,a)© C(-a,-a)0
ffi A(a, a) © B(a.-a)
Q. 3 Q.4
An infinite wire, placed along z-axis, has current I, inpositive z-direction. Ac
onducting rod placed in xy plane parallel to y-axis has current I in positive y-
direction. The ends of the rod subtend + 30° and - 60° at the origin with positive x
-direction. The rod is at a distance afromthe origin. Find net force on the rod.
A square cardboard of side / and mass m is suspendedfroma horizontal axis XY as
shown infigure.A single wire is wound along the periphery of board and carrying
a clockwise current I. At t = 0, a vertical downward magneticfieldof inductionB
is switched on. Find the minimum value ofB so that the board will be able to ro
tate up to horizontal level. A straight segment OC (of length L meter) of a circ
uit carrying a current I amp is placed along the x-axis. Two infinitely ling str
aight wires A and B ,each extending form z = - oo to + oo, are fixed at y = - a
metre and y = +a metre respectively, as shown in the figure. If the wires A and
B each carry a current I amp into plane of the paper. Obtain the expression for
the force acting on the segment OC. What will be the force OC if current in the
wire B is reversed? A very long straight conductor has a circular cross-section
of radius R and carries a current density J. Inside the conductor there is a cyl
indrical hole of radius a whose axis is parallel to the axis of the conductor an
d a distance bfromit. Let the z-axis be the axis of the conductor, and let the a
xis of the hole be at x=b. Find the magnetic field on the x = axis at x = 2R on
the y = axis at y = 2R. Q charge is uniformly distributed over the same surface
of a right circular cone of semi-vertical angle 9 and height h. The cone is unif
ormly rotated about its axis at angular velocity co. Calculated associated magne
tic dipole moment. *y &B O
C
Q.5
Q. 6
y
f 'in
(a) (b) Q.7
I
°
WfH
b /
,
\Lf>«
f§,Bansa!Classes
[11]
Q.8
A wire loop carrying current I is placed in the X-Y plane as shown in the figure
(a) If a particle with charge +Q and mass m is placed at the centre P and given
a velocity along NP (fig). Find its instantaneous acceleration (b) If an extern
al uniform magnetic induction field B = B f is applied, find the torque acting o
n the loop due to the field. A long straight wire carries a current of 10 A dire
cted along the negative y-axis as shown infigure.Auniform magneticfieldB ofmagni
tude 10~ T is directed parallel to the x-axis. What is the resultant magneticfie
ldat the following points? (a) x = 0 , z-2m; (b)x=2m, z = 0; (c)x = 0 , z = - 0
. 5 m
0 6
Q.9
Q.10 A stationary, circular wall clock has a face with a radius of 15 cm. Six tu
rns of wire are wound around its perimeter, the wire carries a current 2.0 A in
the clockwise direction. The clock is located, where there is a constant, unifor
m external magneticfieldof 70 mT (but the clock still keeps perfect time) at exa
ctly 1:00 pm, the hour hand of the clock points in the direction of the external
magnetic field (a) After how many minutes will the minute hand point in the dir
ection of the torque on the winding due to the magneticfield? (b) What is the ma
gnitude of this torque. Q.ll A U-shaped wire ofmass m turn length / is immersed
with its two ends in mercury (seefigure).The wire is in a homogeneousfieldofmagn
etic
B'
X X X
the wire, the wire will jump up. Calculate, from the height h that the wire reac
hes, the size of the charge or current pulse, assuming that the time of the curr
ent pulse is very small in comparision with the time of flight. Make use of the
fact that impulse of force equals j F dt,which equals mv. Evaluate q for B = 0.1
Wb/m , m = 1 Ogm, t = 20cm & h = 3 meters, [g = 10 m/s ]
— 1 1 —
2 2
¥
/
X
X
Q.l 2 A current i, indicated by the crosses infig.is established in a strip of c
opper X of height h and width w. Auniformfieldof magnetic induction B is applied
m at right angles to the strip. B X (a) Calculate the drift speed v for the ele
ctrons. : X.(b) What are the magnitude and dirction of the magnetic force F acti
ng on the electrons? (c) What would the magnitude & direction of homogeneous ele
ctricfieldE have to be in order to counter balance the effect of the magnetic fi
eld ? (d) What is the voltage V necessary between two sides of the conductor in
order to create thisfieldE? Between which sides of the conductor would this volt
age have to be applied ? (e) If no electricfieldis applied form the outside the
electrons will be pushed somewhat to one side & thereforce will give rise to a u
niform electricfieldE across the conductor untill the force ofthis electrostatic
field E balanace the magnetic forces encountered in part (b). What will be the
magnitude and direction of thefieldEH? Assume that n, the number of conduction e
lectrons per unit volume, is 1. Ixl0 /m & that h = 0.02 meter, w = 0.1cm , i = 5
0 amp, & B = 2 webers/meter .
d H h 29 3 2
f§,Bansa!Classes
[11]
Q. 13(a) A rigid circular loop of radius r & mass m lies in the xy plane on a fl
at table and has a current I flowing in it. At this particular place, the earth'
s magneticfieldis B = B 1 + B j . How large must I be before one edge of the loo
p will lift from table ? (b) Repeat if, B = B 1 + B k.
x y x z
Q. 14 Zeeman effect. In Bohr's theory of the hydrogen atom the electron can be t
hought of as moving in a circular orbit of radius r about the proton . Suppose t
hat such an atom is placed in a magnetic field, with the plane of the orbit at r
ight angle to B. (a) If the electron is circulating clockwise, as viewed by an o
bserver sighting along B, will the angular frequency increase or decrease? (b) W
hat if the electron is circulating counterclockwise? Assume that the orbit radiu
s does not change. Q.15 In above problem show that the change in frequency of ro
tation caused by the magnetefieldis given Be approximately by Av = ± . Such freque
ncy shifts were actually observed by Zeeman in 1896. 4um
A
Q.16 A square loop ofwire of edge a carries a current i. (a) Show that B for a p
oint on the axis of the loop and a distance xfromits centre is given by, ia B= 7
1 (4x + a ) (4x + 2a\ )1/2 (b) Can the result of the above problem be reduced to
givefieldat x = 0 ? (c) Does the square loop behave like a dipole for points su
ch that x » a ? If so, what is its dipole moment?
2 2 2 2 2 1
Q.17 A conductor carrying a current i is placed parallel to a current per unit w
idth j and width d, as shown in the figure. Find the force per unit lenght on th
e coductor.
0
z.
/
/
\Z
0
/'
r y; A il
"B
Q. 18 Find the work and power required to move the conductor of length / shown i
n thefig.one full turn in the anticlockwise direction at a rotational frequency
of n revolutions per second ifthe magneticfieldis of magnitude B everywhere and
points radially outwards from Z-axis. The figure shows the surface traced by the
wire AB. Q.19 The figure shows a conductor of weight 1.0 N and length L = 0.5 m
placed on a roughinclined plane making an angle 30° with the horizontal so that c
onductor is perpendicular to a uniform horizontal magneticfieldof induction B =
0.10 T. The coefficient of staticfrictionbetween the conductor and the plane is
0.1. A current of I = 10 A flows through the conductor inside the plane of this
paper as shown. What is the force needed to be the applied parallel'to the incli
ned plane to sustaining the conductor at rest? Q.20 An electron gun G emits elec
tron of energy 2kev traveling in the (+)ve x-direction. The electron are require
d to hit the spot S where GS = 0. lm & the line GS makes an angle of 60° with the
x-axis, as shown in the fig. Auniform magnetic field B parallel to GS exists in
the region outsiees to electron gun. Find the minimum value of B needed to make
the electron hit S .
f
^
/)60° Gun
X
§, Bansa! Classes
[11]
Q. 1 Abattery is connected between two points Aand B the circumference of a unif
orm conducting ring of radius r and resistance R. One of the arcs AB of the ring
subtends an angle 0 at the centre. The value of the magnetic induction at the c
entre due to the current in the ring is : [ JEE '95, 2] (A) zero, only if 9 = 18
0° (B) zero for all values of 0 (C) proportional to 2(180°-0) (D) inversely proporti
onal to r Q. 2 Two insulated rings, one slightly smaller diameter than the other
, are suspended along their diameter as shown, initially the planes of the rings
are mutually' perpendicular when a steady current is set up in each of them: [I
IT '95, 1] (A) The two rings rotate to come into a common plane (B) The inner ri
ng oscillates about its initially position (C) The outer ring stays stationary w
hile the inner one moves into the plane of the outer ring (D) The inner ring sta
ys stationary while the outer one moves into the plane of the inner ring An elec
tron in the ground state of hydrogen atom is revolving in anticlock-wise directi
on in a circular orbit of radius R . Obtain an expression for the orbital magnet
ic dipole moment of the electron The atom is placed in a uniform magnetic. Induc
tion B such that the plane normal of the electron orbit makes an angle of 30° with
the magnetic induction. Find the torque experienced by the orbiting electron. [
JEE'96, 5] A proton, a deuteron and an a-particle having the same kinetic energy
are moving in circular trajectories in a constant magnetic field . If r r & r d
enote respectively the radii of the trajectories of these particles then: " ° [JEE
'97, 1] rP < r, (B) r a > rd > rp (C) ra = rd > rp (D)P r = rd = a r (A) ' ' d 3
infinitely long thin wires each carrying current /' in the same direction , are
in the x-y plane of a gravity free space . The central wire is along the y-axis
while the other two are along x = ±d. Find the locus of the points for which the
magnetic field B is zero . If the central wire is displaced along the z-directio
n by a small amount & released, show that it will execute simple harmonic motion
. If the linear density ofthe wires is X,findthefrequencyof oscillation. [JEE '9
7, 5]
d a r a v v V /
EXERCISE # III
Q. 3 (i) (ii) Q.4
Q.5
(i)
Cii) Q.6
C O
(ii)
Select the correct alternative(s). [ JEE '98, 2 + 2 + 2 ] Two very long, straigh
t, parallel wires carry steady currents I & - I respectively. The distance betwe
en the wires is d. At a certain instant of time, a point charge q is at a point
equidistant from the two wires, in the plane of the wires. Its instantaneous vel
ocity v is perpendicular to this plane. The magnitude of the force due to the ma
gnetic field acting on the charge at this instant is : (D) 0 (A) ô iqv (B) Ho I
qv (C) 2^0 2nd 7td rcd Let [ e ] denote the dimensional formula ofthe permittivi
ty ofthe vaccum and [|i ] that ofthe permeability of the vacuum . If M = mass, L
= length, T = time and I = electric current, (A) [e ] = M L T 1 (B) [ e j = M"
L" T I (C) [^ ] = M E T ! (D) [ n j = ML T-'I
0 0 _1 -3 2 1 3 4 2 0 2 2 2
f§,Bansa!Classes
[11]
(iii)
Q.7
Two particles, each of mass m & charge q, are attached to the two ends of a ligh
t rigid rod of length 2 R. The rod is rotated at constant angular speed about a
perpendicular axis passing through its centre. The ratio of the magnitudes of th
e magnetic moment of the system & its angular momentum about the centre of the r
od is : ( A )2m f (B) — ( C )m ^ (D) ran — m
w w 0
A particle of mass m & charge q is moving in a region where uniform, constant el
ectric and magnetic fields E & B are present, E & B are parallel to each other.
At time t = 0 the velocity v of the particle is perpendicular to E . (assume tha
t its speed is always « c, the speed oflight in vacuum). Find the velocity v of th
e particle at time t. You must express your answer in terms of t, q, m, the vect
ors v , E & B and their magnitudes v , E & B. [JEE '98, 8]
0 0
Q.8
(a) (b)
A uniform, constant magneticfieldB is directed at an angle of 45° to the x-axis 'V
lo in the xy-plane, PQRS is a rigid square wire frame carrying a steady current
y I (clockwise), with its centre at the origin O. At time t = 0, the frame is a
t rest in the position shown in thefigure,with its sides parallel to the x & y a
xes. Each side of the frame is of mass M & length L. What is the torque t about
0 acting on the frame due to the magnetic field ? Find the angle by which the fr
ame rotates under the action of this torque in a short interval of time At, & th
e axis about which this rotation occurs (At is so short that any variation in th
e torque during this interval may be neglected) Given the moment of inertia of t
he frame about an axis through its centre perpendicular to its plane is 4/3 ML .
[JEE '98, 2 + 6]
0
/ / /
2
Q9
A charged particle is released from rest in a region of steady and uniform elect
ric and magnetic fields which are parallel to each other. The particle will move
in a (A) straight line (B) circle (C) helix (D) cycloid [JEE'99,2]
0 rj
Q.10 The region between x = 0 and x=L isfilledwith uniform, steady magneticfield
B k. Aparticle of mass m, positive charge q and velocity v T travels along x-axi
s and enters the region ofthe magnetic field. Neglect the gravity throughout the
question. (a) Find the value of L ifthe particle emergesfromthe region of magne
ticfieldwith itsfinalvelocity at an angle 30° to its initial velocity. (b) Find th
efinalvelocity of the particle and the time spent by it in the magneticfield,if
the magnetic field now extendsupto2.IL. [JEE '99, 6 + 4] Q. 11 (i)Aparticle of c
harge q and mass m moves in a circular orbit of radius r with angular speed co.
The ratio of the magnitude ofits magnetic moment to that of its angular momentum
depends on (A) co and q (B) co, q and m (C) q and m (D) co and m (ii) Two long
parallel wires are at a distance 2d apart. They carry steady equal currentsflowi
ngout of the plane of the paper, as shown. The variation of the magneticfieldB a
long the XX' is given by
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
f§,Bansa!Classes
[11]
(iii)
An infinitely long conductor PQR is bent to form a right angle as shown. A M cur
rent I flows through PQR. The magneticfielddue to this current at the point M is
H Now, another infinitely long straight conductor QS is P Qn o § connected at Q s
o that the current in PQ remainingunchanged. The magnetic field at M is now H Th
e ratio H /H is given by R (A) 1/2 (B)l ~ (C) 2/3 (D) 2 (iv) An ionized gas cont
ains both positive and negative ions. If it is subjected simultaneously to an el
ectric field along the +x direction and a magneticfieldalong the +z direction, t
hen (A) positive ions deflect towards +y direction and negative ions towards -y
direction (B) all ions deflect towards +y direction. (C) all ions deflect toward
s -y direction (D) positive ions deflect towards -y direction and negative ions
towards +y direction. [JEE 2000 (Scr)] Q.12 A circular loop of radius R is bent
along a diameter and given a shape as shown in the figure. One of the semicircle
s (KNM) lies in the x - z plane and the other one (KLM) in the y-z plane with th
eir centers at the origin. Current I is flowing through each ofthe semicircles a
s shown in figure. (i) A particle of charge q is released at the origin with a v
elocity v ^ o Find the instantaneous force f on the particle. Assume that space
is gravity free. (ii) If an external uniform magneticfieldB j is applied, determ
ine the forces F and F on the semicircles KLM and KNM due to thisfieldand the ne
t force F on the loop . [JEE 2000 Mains, 4 + 6]
r
9 0
r
]
2
:
1
:
2
Q.13 A current of 1 OA flows around a closed path in a circuit which is in the h
orizontal plane as shown in thefigure.The circuit consists of eight alternating
arcs ofradii ^ = 0.08 m and r = 0.12 m. Each arc subtends the same angle at the
centre. (a) Find the magneticfieldproduced by this circuit at the centre. (b) An
infinitely long straight wire carrying a current of 1 OA is passing through the
centre of the above circuit vertically with the direction of the current being
into the plane of the circuit. What is the force acting on the wire at the centr
e due to the current in the circuit? What is the force acting on the arc AC and
the straight segment CD due to the current at the centre? [JEE 2001, 5 + 5] Q.14
Two particles A and B of masses m and m respectively and having the same charge
are moving in a plane. Auniform magneticfieldexists perpendicular to this plane
. The speeds of the particles are v and v respectively and the trajectories are
as shown in the figure. Then (A) m v < m v (B) m v > m v (C) m < m and v < v (D)
m = n^ and v = v [JEE, 2001 (Scr)]
A B A B A A B B A A B B A B A B A A B
Q.15 A non-planar loop of conducting wire carrying a current I is placed as show
n inthefigure.Each ofthe straight sections ofthe loop is oflength2a. The magneti
c field due to this loop at the point P (a, 0, a) points in the direction 1 - ,H
1+ k) Ts 1 H+k+i)
<
A
> 7 T
(i + j + k)
(i+k)
[JEE, 2001 (Scr)]
f§,Bansa!Classes
[11]
Q . 16 A coil having N turns is wound tightly in the form of a spiral with inner
and outer radii a and b respectively. When a current 1 passes through the coil,
the magneticfieldat the centre is [JEE, 2001 Screening] N H NI 2î NI IV , b (C
) — In(A) (B) (D) /n2(b - a) a > 2(b - a) a
0 n
T
[
)
0
K
Q.17 A particle of mass m and charge q moves with a constant velocity v along th
e positive x direction. It enters a region containing a uniform magneticfieldB d
irected along the negative z direction, extending from x = a to x = b. The minim
um value ofv required so that the particle can just enter the region x > b is (A
) q b B./m (B)q(b-a)B/m (C)qaB/m (D) q(b + a) B/2m [JEE 2002 (screening), 3] Q.
18 A long straight wire along the z-axis carries a current I in the negative z d
irection. The magnetic vector field B at a point having coordinates (x, y) in th
e z = 0 plane is [JEE 2002 (screening), 3] n i (xj-yi) ji I (yi - xj) (xi+yj) (
y (A) 2n (x +y ) (B) M (x + y ) ( Q 2n (x +y ) (D) M (x -+yj )) 2n 2n
0 0 X1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Q. 19 The magneticfieldlines due to a bar magnet are correctly shown in
N V. ^—. N
[JEE 2002 (screening), 3 ]
^ N ,
Q.20 A rectangular loop PQRS madefroma uniform wire has length a, width b and ma
ss m. It isfreeto rotate about the arm PQ, which remains.hinged along a horizont
al line taken as the y-axis (seefigure).Take the vertically upward direction as
the z-axis. Auniform magneticfieldB = (3 i + 4 k) B exists in the region. The lo
op is held in the x-y plane and a current I is passed through it. The loop is no
w released and is found to stay in the horizontal position in equilibrium. R Wha
t is the direction of the current I in PQ? (a) (b) Find the magnetic force on th
e arm RS. [JEE 2002, 1+1+3] (c) Find the expression for I in terms of B a, b and
m.
0
Q. 21 A circular coil carrying current I is placed in a region of uniform magnet
icfieldacting perpendicular to a coil as shown in the figure. Mark correct optio
n [JEE 2003 (Scr)] * (A) coil expands (B) coil contracts x (C) coil moves left (
D) coil moves right x
x
Q.22 Figure represents four positions ofa current carrying coil is a magneticfie
lddirected towards right, h represent the direction of area ofvector of the coil
. The correct order ofpotential energy is: [JEE 2003 (Scr)] (A) I > III > II > I
V (B) I < III < II < IV (C) IV II > IV > I
f§,Bansa!Classes
[11]
Q.23 A wheel of radius R having charge Q, uniformly distributed on the rim of th
e wheel is free to rotate about a light horizontal rod. The rod is suspended by
light inextensible stringe and a magneticfieldB is applied as shown inthe figure
. The 3Tn initial tensions in the strings are T . Ifthe breaking tension ofthe s
trings are find the maximum angular velocity co with which the wheel can be rota
te. [JEE 2003]
0 0
Q.24 A proton and an alpha particle, after being accelerated through same potent
ial difference, enter a uniform magneticfieldthe direction ofwhich is perpendicu
lar to their velocities. Find the ratio of radii ofthe circular paths ofthe two
particles. [JEE 2004] Q.25 In a moving coil galvanometer, torque on the coil can
be expressed as T = ki, where i is current through the wire and k is constant.
The rectangular coil of the galvanometer having numbers of turns N, area A and m
oment of inertia I is placed in magneticfieldB. Find (a) k in terms of given par
ameters N, I, Aand B. (b) the torsional constant of the spring, if a current i p
roduces a deflection of %!2 in the coil in reaching equilibrium position. (c) th
e maximum angle through which coil is deflected, id charge Q is passed through t
he coil almost instantaneously. (Ignore the damping in mechanical oscillations)
[JEE 2005]
0
Q.26 An infinite current carrying wire passes through point O and in perpendicul
ar to the plane containing a current carrying loop ABCD as shown in thefigure.Ch
oose the correct option (s). (A) Net force on the loop is zero. (B) Net torque o
n the loop is zero. (C) As seen from O, the loop rotates clockwise. (D) As seen
from O, the loop rotates anticlockwise
f§,Bansa!Classes
[11]
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE # I
x 10-5 T
Q.l
Q.4
8 Til
Q.2
JL
M —
2V2
3
Q.3
(2V2-l)jl /'
7ta
3 1 ô — 7t +1 47tr 2
1
zero
05
^
4RU
f rk + —"1 1
k J
Q.6
Q.7
Q.8
(i) 1.3 x 10 4T, (ii)zero Q.9
^ weber.nr1
Q. 10 Q.14
1W
2na
Q 11
Q.15
10k
Q. 12
2mvc
Q. 13 Q.16
zero 4/^
F = aa2ij
/' = 0.1110A, i2 = 0.096A
Q 1 ?
(a)
3mv2 3mv3 4qa ' ( b ) - ^ ~ , ( c ) z e r o
Q 18
In the plane of the drawing from right to left
Q.19 B I
=
Hobrf
3
fl
=
2
H bR
0
3
Q 20
3r2
'
0.57 s
Q.21
a t - m—~ , wherea = shr qB m EI Be
v
V2mV y HoII'C 0
2%
Q.22
\
Q.23
a b to the left
I
I
Q.24
V2IRB
n Q 2 5
_
W
- Ml 2
J
/ n
r
2
Q.l
Mo
2* (a +b 2 )
2
V3b
EXERCISE # IT
Q 2
® 471^ a y along Y-axis,
 4n v 2 a y
Jfo
fr 2 ^
V10
tan
+ 7t with positive axis
f§,Bansa!Classes
[11]
Q.3 Q.5 Q.6 Q.7 Q.9 Q.ll
Li I I " T ^ /n(3) along-vez direction F 'Ml 2n
0
Q.4
m
§
in
rj2 + a* L , „2
V
a-2
j
, zero \l-k), '
2
'l a ^ R p J ( a ) B = ~ y 2R - b 2 , (b) B = M R 4 4R + b
2 2
p J'
0 v
ab ^ 4R + b
2 2 2 y
-^h tan e
2 2
Qs
8
rz QVp i /_3^3 - 1 \ 71 , (b) x=BI v y v
0 3 -6
a 2J•
(a) 0 (b) 1.41 x 10~ T, 45° in xz-plane, (c) 5 x 10 T, +x-direction]
2
Q. 10 (a) 20 min. (b) 5.94 x 10" Nm Vl5 C
4 23 4 6
Q. 12 (a) 1.4 x 10~ m/s (b) 4.5 x 10~ N (down) (c) 2.8 x 10" V/m (down) (d) 5.7
x 10~ V (top +, bottom-) (e) same as (c) Q.13 (a) I = Q.17 7tr ( x 4- Ry)\ +
B B 2
7
m g
(h\
(b)T I
mg 7crB
v
Q. 14 (a) increase, (b) decrease Q.18 - 2 re r B / / , - 2 7t r B z / «
0 0
^-tan 2hy H O 7t
1 V
r a \
Q.19 0.62 N < F < 0.88 N
Q-20 B eh ehB Q.3(i)m=^;N
min
= 4.7X10- T
3
EXERCISE # III
Q.l B Q.5 Q
7
Q.2 A z = 0,x = ± ^ ,
d
t a
Q.4 A
^
^ (iO^fe
1
Q.6 (i) D (ii) B, C (iii) A £ - (v x g ) / | v x g
0 0
v=^ E
l +
v
o coscot + [v sin rat] k, where co =
0
f§,Bansa!Classes
4i
3 BIo At 4 M
2
Q.9 A
[11]
mv 7im Q 10 ( ) 2qB^ (b)velocity=-v, time= —
0 a
Q.ll (i) C
(ii) B (iii) C (iv) C
(V Q.12 (i) q v j; (ii) F = 2 I R B F , = 2 I R B , Net force = F , + F = 4 I R
B 1
0 5 2
5 6
Q. 13 (a) 6.6 x 10~ T, (b) 0, 0, 8 x io~ Nt Q.14B Q. 15 D Q.16 C
Q.17 B
Q.18 A
Q.19 D • 6bB a
1
Q.20 (a) current in loop PQRS is clockwise from P to QRS., (b) p = BI b (3k-4i),
(c) I = Q.21 A Q.22 A Q.23 ©=
dT
P p q
0
QR B
2
Q.24 — J — — a y a q V2
r
m
=
a
p
2i„NAB NAB 71 Q.25 (a) k = NAB, (b) C = — 7C , (c) Q x V— — 0
Z11
Q.26 A,C
f§,Bansa!Classes
[11]
I BANSALCLASSES TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XII (ALL)
MA GNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT
QUESTION BANK ON
QUESTION FOR SHORT ANSWER
Q. 1 Consider a magneticfieldline. Is the magnitude of B constant or variable al
ong such a line? Can you give an example of each case? Q. 2 Q. 3 A current is se
nt through a vertical springfromwhose lower end a weight is hanging. What will h
appen? B= fx i/ 2nd suggets that a strong magneticfieldis set up at points near
a long wire carrying a current. Since there is a current i and magneticfieldB, w
hy is there not a force on the wire in accord with the equation F = iL x B ?
0 0
Q.4
Twofixedwires cross each other perpendicularly so that they do not actually touc
h but are close to each other, as shown infigure.Equal currents i exist in each
wire in the directions indicated. In what region(s) will there be some points of
zero net magnetic field?
£
II III
I- I
IV
3
Q.5
A messy loop of limp wire is placed on a frictionless table and anchored at poin
ts a and b as shown infigure.If a current i is now ' passed through the wire, wi
ll it try to form a circular lo op i or will it try to bunch up further? Q..£L A v
ery long conductor has a square cross section and contains a coaxial cavity also
with a square cross section. Current is distributed uniformly over the material
cross section ofthe conductor. Is the magnetic field in the cavity equal to zer
o? Justify you answer.
Two long solenoids are nested on the same axis, as infigure.They carry identical
currents but in opposite directions, Ifthere is no magnetic field inside the in
ner solenoid, what can you say about n, the number ofturns per unit length, for
the two solenoids? Which one, if either, has the larger value? Q. 8 The magnetic
fieldat the center of a circular current loop has the value B = M-i / 2R . Howev
er, the electricfieldat the center of a ring of charge is zero. Why this differe
nce?
0
Q. 7
Q. 9
A steady current is set up in a cubical network of resistive wires, as in figure
. Use symmetry arguments to show that the magneticfieldat the v'J center of the
cube is zero
-
J
-
A
P
Q. 10 A copper pipefilledwith an electrolyte. When a voltage is applied, the cur
rent in the electrolyte is constituted by the movement of positive and negative
ions in opposite directions. Will such a pipe experience a force when placed in
a magnetic field perpendicular to the current. Q. 11 Magnetic moments arise due
to charges. Can a system have magnetic moments even though it has no charge. Q.
12 Imagine that the room in which you are seated is fillie with a uniform magnet
icfieldwith B pointing vertically upward. A circular loop of wire has its plane
horizontal. For what direction of current in the loop, as viewed from above, wil
l the loop be in stable eqiulibrium with respect to forces & torques of magnetic
origin ?
(SS Bansal Classes Question Bank on Magnetic Effect of Current
[12]
Q .13 Two current-carrying wires may attract each other. In absence of other for
ces, the wires will move towards each other increasing the kinetic energy. From
where does this energy come? Q.14 In order to have a current in a long wire, it
should be connected to a battery or some such device. Can we obtain the magnetic
fielddue to a straight, long wire by using Ampere's law without mentioning this
other part ofthe circuit. Q.15 A uniform magnetic field fills a certian cubical
region of space. Can an electron be fired into this cube from the outside in suc
h a way that it will travel in a closed circular path inside the cube? Q. 16 In
Ampere's law | B.dl - \i0 i the current outside the curve is not included on the
right hand side. Does it mean that the magnetic field B calculated by using Amp
ere's law, gives the contribution of only the currents crossing the area bounded
by the curve ? Q.17 A magnetic field that varies in magnitude form point to poi
nt, but has constant direction (East to West) is set up in a chamber . A charged
particle enters the chamber and travels undeflected along a straight path with
constant speed . What can you say about the initial velocity of the particle? Q.
18 A charged particle enters an environment ofa strong & non-uniform magneticfie
ldvarying from point to point both in magnitude and direction and comes out of i
t following a complicated trajectory. Would its final speed equal the initial sp
eed , if it suffered no collisions with the environment. Q.19 A straight wire ca
rrying on electric current is placed along the axis of a uniformly charged ring.
Will there be a magnetic force on the wire ifthe ring starts rotating about the
wire ? If yes, in which direction ? Q.20 An electron travelling West to East en
ters a chamber having a uniform electrostatic field in North to South direction
. Specify the direction in which a uniform magnetic field should be set up to pr
event the electron from deflecting from its straight line path . Q.21 The magnet
ic field inside a tightly wound, long solenoid is B = ju0 ni. It suggests that t
hefielddoes not depend on the total length of the solenoid, and hence if we add
more loops at the ends ofa solenoid the field should not increase. Explain quali
tatively why the extra-added loops do not have a considerable effect on the fiel
d inside the solenoid. Q . 22 A lightening conductor is connected to the earth b
y a circular copper pipe. After lightning strikes, it is discovered that the pip
e has turned into a circular rod. Explain the cause of this phenomenon. Q.23 We
know that the work required to turn a current loop end for end in an external ma
gnetic field is 2pB. Does this hold no matter what the original orientaion of th
e loop was ?
(SS Bansal Classes
Question Bank on Magnetic Effect of Current
[12]
Q.l
A current of i ampere is flowing through each ofthe bent wires as shown the magn
itude and direction of magneticfieldat 0 is 1 3^ Poi_fj_ _2_ (B) fV R R' (A) 4 ^
R R' \ lô 1 M-oM (C) v.R 2R' j (D) 8 l R R' y
+ + 1 1 +
Q. 2
Net magneticfieldat the centre ofthe circle O due to a current carrying loop as
shown infigureis (9 < 180°) /k \ (A) zero il>i 8^>0 ; (B) perpendicular to paper i
nwards V' J (C) perpendicular to paper outwards (D) is perpendicular to paper in
wards if 9 < 90° and perpendicular to paper outwards if 90°<9<180 The magneticfieldd
ue to a current carrying square loop of side a at a point located symmetrically
at a distance of a/2 from its centre (as shown is) V2p i M-o i 2p i
0 0
c
Q. 3
Q.4
A charge particle A of charge q = 2 C has velocity v = 100 m/s. When it passes t
hrough point Aand has velocity inthe direction shown. The strength of magneticfi
eldat point B due to this moving charge is (r = 2 m). (A) 2.5 uT (B) 5.0 pT ' (C
)2.0pT (D)None Three rings, each having equal radius R, are placed mutually perp
endicular to each other and each having its centre at the origin of co-ordinate
system. If current I is flowing thriugh each ring then the magnitude of the magn
eticfieldat the common centre is (B)zero ( Q ( M g f ( D ) ^ - ^ . (A) ^3 —2R Two
concentric coils X and Y of radii 16 cm and 10 cm lie in the same vertical plane
containing N-S direction. X has 20 turns and carries 16 A. Yhas 25 turns & carr
ies 18A. X has current in anticlockwise direction and Yhas current in clockwise
direction for an observer, looking at. the coils facing the west. The magnitude
of net magneticfieldat their common centre is (A) 5?t x 10 T towards west (B) 13
% * 10- T towards east (C) 137t x 10" T towards west (D) 5,x * 10 T towards east
A uniform beam of positively charged particles is moving with a constant veloci
ty parallel to another beam ofnegatively charged particles moving with the same
velocity in opposite direction separated by a distance d. The variation of magne
ticfieldB along a perpendicular line draw between the two beams is best represen
ted by
4 4 4 4
Q.6
Q.7
(A)
d/2
(D)
d/2
(SS Bansal Classes
[12]
Q. 8 Q. 9
The dimension of — where |i is permeability & s is permittivity is same as : (B) I
nductance (C) Capacitance (A) Resistance (D) None of these A current I flows aro
und a closed path in the horizontal plane of the circle as shown in thefigure.Th
e path consists of eight arcs with alternating radii r and 2r. Each segment ofar
c subtends equal angle at the common centre P. The magnetic field produced by cu
rrent path at point P is 3 |j, I (A) 8 r ; perpendicular to the plane of the pap
er and directed inward.
0
(B) -8 — ; perpendicular to the plane of the paper and directed outward. r
0
3 JLT I
(C)
1 Upl ; perpendicular to the plane of the paper and directed inward. 8 r 1 (D) 8
Upl ; perpendicular to the plane of the paper and directed outward.. r
Q. 10 Infinite number ofstraight wires each carrying current I are equally place
d as shown in the figure. Adjacent wires have current in opposite direction. Net
magneticfieldat point P is /n4 k P" Ho (A) — — f 4n V3a H0I In 4 (D) Zero (C) 471 V
ia (-k)
1 / n 2 k
Q. 11 A direct current is passing through a wire. It is bent to form a coil of o
ne turn. Now it is further bent to form a coil oftwo turns but at smaller radius
. The ratio ofthe magnetic induction at the centre ofthis coil L and at the cent
re of the coil of one turn is (A) 1 : 4 (B) 4: 1 (C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 1 Q. 12 Two m
utually perpendicular conductors carrying currents Ij and I lie in one plane. Lo
cus ofthe point at which the magnetic induction is zero, is a (A) circle with ce
ntre as the point of intersection ofthe conductor. (B) parabola with vertex as t
he point of intersection ofthe conductors (C) straight line passing through the
point ofintersection ofthe conductors. (D) rectangular hyperbola
2
Q. 13 Find the magneticfieldat P due to the arrangement shown 2|i i Ho Ho
1 0 1
Ho
1
1+ -
,/45°i
Q. 14 Equal current i is flowing in three infinitely long wires along positive x
, y and z directions. The magnitude "field at a point (0,0, -a) would be: M (C)i
^(i-i) ( D )27ta0 + J + k) ^[12]
(SS Bansal Classes
Q.15 A thin, straight conductor lies along the axis ofa hollow conductor of radi
us R. The two carry equal currents in the same direction. The magneticfieldB is
plotted against the distance rfromthe axis. Which ofthe following best represent
s the resulting curve?
Q.16 A long thin walled pipe of radius R carries a current I along its length. T
he current density is uniform over the circumference ofthe pipe. The magneticfie
ldat the center of the pipe due to quarter portion of the pipe shown, is 2p rV2
M-QIA/2 pI (D) None (C) 7t R (A) 4ti R 71 K Q.17 Two very long straight parallel
wires, parallel to y-axis, cany currents 41 and I, along +y direction and -y di
rection, respectively. The wires are passes through the x-axis at the points (d,
0,0) and (- d, 0,0) respectively. The graph ofmagneticfieldz-comp onent as one
moves along the x-axisfromx = - d to x=+d, is best given by
0 0 2 2
(A) (B) j (C) LJ (D) Q.18 A long straight wire, carrying current I, is bent at i
ts midpoint tofroman angle of p 45 . Induction of magneticfieldat point P, dista
nt R from point of bending is " R , , X45° equal to: (V2-l)p I (V2+l)p I (V2-1 VqI
(V2 lKl (A) (D) 4V271R 4V2UR 4TTR ' 4tcR 4V2TTR ' Q.19 A hollow cylinder having
infinite length and carrying uniform current per unit length X along the circum
ference as shown. Magneticfieldinside the cylinder is pX (C)2pA (D) none (A) (B)
Po^
0 0 ( D ) +
Il f
u
0
v( _C / )
v
0
Q.20 A long straight metal rod has a very long hole ofradius' a' drilled paralle
l to the rod axis as shown in the figure. Ifthe rod carries a current 'i' find t
he value of magnetic induction on the axis of the hole, where OC = c p rc (B) 2T
C(V - a ) 7r(b -a ) p ic (D) 27iaV ( O ^ 2TCC' Q.21 Two long conductors are arra
nged as shown above to form overlapping cylinders, each of raidus r, whose cente
rs are separated by a distance d. Current of density J flows into the plane ofth
e page along the shaded | part of one conductor and an equal currentflowsout of
the plane ofthe page along the shaded portion ofthe other, as shown. What are th
e magnitude and direction ofthe magneticfieldat point A? Vacuum (A) (p /27r)7tdJ
, in the +y-direction (B) (p /27t)d /r, in the +y-direction (C) (p /27t)4d .T/r,
in the -y-direction (D) (p /27t)Jr /d, in the -y-direction (E) There is no magn
eticfieldat A.
0 ( A ) 2 2 0 l ( b 2 a 2 )
V
f
r
0
0
2
0
2
0
2
(SS Bansal Classes
[12]
Q. 22 An electron is moving along positive x-axis. Auniform electric field exist
s towards negative y-axis. What should be the direction of magneticfieldof suita
ble magnitude so that net force of electron is zero (A) positive z-axis (B) nega
tive z-axis (C) positive y-axis (D) negative y-axis Q.23 A particle of charge q
and mass m starts moving from the origin under the action of an electric field — » /
V ^ E = E i and B = B i with velocity v = v j. The speed of the particle will be
come 2v after a time 2Bq V3Bq 2mv V3 mv (C)t = mv (A)t = qE (D)t E (B)t = mv " "
Q. 24 An electron is projected with velocity v in auniform electricfieldE perpe
ndicular to thefield.Again it is projetced with velocity v perpendicular to a un
iform magneticfieldB/ If r is initial radius of curvature just after entering in
the electricfieldand r is initial radius of curvature just after entering in ma
gnetic field then the ratio ^ /r is equal to EVN B Bv (C) B (A) E (D) Bv E ' E Q
.25 Auniform magnetic field B = B j exists in a space. Aparticle of mass m and c
harge q is projected towards negative x-axis with speed v from the a point (d, 0
, 0). The maximum value v for which the particle does not hit y-z plane is 2Bq B
qd Bq Bqd (A) (B) — (C) - T (D) dm m 2dm 2m Q.26 Two protons move parallel to each
other, keeping distance r between them, both moving with same velocity y . Then
the ratio of the electric and magnetic force of interaction between them is (D)
None (A) / V (C) / 2 V (B) 2 c / V Q.27 A charged particle of specific charge a
is released from origin at timet = 0 with velocity V = V i + V j in magneticfie
ldB = B i. The coordinates ofthe particle at time t % are (specific charge a= q/
m)
0 0 0 0 n n v 7 0 0 v y q 0 0 t 2 2 0 v _ / v 0 w w w v y C 2 2 2 2 c 2 2 o
—»
/V
0
V n V2V n - Vn * * (A) 2B a aB„ B„a
v w T
n
-V. (B) 2B a , 0 , 0
o
Ba
Q.28 Three ions H , He and 0 having same kinetic energy pass through a region in
which there is a uniform magneticfieldperpendicular to their velocity, then: (A
) H will be least deflected. (B) He and 0 will be deflected equally. (C) 0 will
be deflected most. (D) all will be deflected equally.
+ + + 2 + + + 2 + 2
2V V„7C (C) 0, B a 2B a J
0
y^ (D) B a ' 0,- B a
Q.29 An electron having kinetic energy T is moving in a circular orbit of radius
R perpendicular to a uniform magnetic induction B . If kinetic energy is double
d and magnetic induction tripled, the radius will become 3R (3 (2 [4 (A) — (B) R (
C) R (D) y - R Q.30 An electron (mass = 9.1 x 10" ; charge = - 1.6 x 10" C) expe
riences no deflection if subjected to an electricfieldof 3.2 x 10 V/m and a magn
eticfieldof 2. Ox 10" Wb/m . Both thefieldsare normal to the path of electron an
d to each Other. Ifthe electricfieldis removed, then the electron will revolve i
n an orbit of radius : (A) 45 m (B) 4.5 m (C) 0.45 m (D) 0.045 m
31 19 5 3 2
(SS Bansal Classes
[12]
Q 31 A charged particle moves in a magneticfieldB = 10 i with initial velocity u
= 5i + 4 j. The path ofthe particle will be (A) straight line (B) circle (C) he
lical (D)none Q.32 A electron experiences a force (4.0 i + 3.0 j) 10" N in a uni
form magnetic field when its velocity is 2.5 k x 10 ms . When the velocity is re
directed and becomes (l. 51 - 2.0 j)x 10 ms , the magnetic force of the electron
is zero. The magnetic field vector 3 is: (A)-o.075i + 0.1 j (B) 0.11 + 0.075j (
C) 0.075i-0.1 j +k (D) 0.0751 — 0.1 j Q.33 A mass spectrometer is a device which s
elect particle of equal mass. An iron with electric charge q > 0 and mass m star
ts at rest from a source S and is accelerated through a potential difference V I
t passes through a hole into a region of constant magnetic field B perpendicular
to the plane of the paper as shown in thefigure.The particle is deflected by th
e magneticfieldand emerges through the bottom hole at a distance d from the top
hole. The mass ofthe particle is 0 0 0 ®© qBd qBd qB d qB d © © 'U M © '0 © © © (A) mY (B)
C) 8V (D) 2mV © ©i ©
x 13 7 1 7 1 2 2 2 2 B
® 0 © ©©
Q. 3 4 Electrons moving with different speeds enter a uniform magneticfieldin a
direction perpendicular to the field. They will move along circular paths. (A) o
f same radius (B) with larger radii for the faster electrons (C) with smaller ra
dii for the faster electrons (D) either (B) or (C) depending on the magnitude of
the magnetic field Q.35 In the previous question, time periods ofrotation will
be : (A) same for all electrons (B) greater for the faster electrons (C) smaller
for the faster electrons (D) either (B) or (C) depending on the magnitude ofthe
magnetic field Q.36 OABC is a current carrying square loop an electron is proje
cted from the centre ofloop along its diagonal AC as shown. Unit vector in the d
irection of initial acceleration will be (A) k
© © © © ©
(B) i+J V2
1+ (D
J (C)-k > VT Q.37 A particle having charge of 1 C, mass 1 kg and speed 1 m/s ent
ers a uniform magneticfield,having magnetic induction of 1T, at an angle 9 = 30° b
etween velocity vector and magnetic induction. The pitch of its helical path is
(in meters)
~ (C) * (D) 71 (A) 2 (B)V3tt "" 2 Q.38 A charged particle is released from rest
in a region ofuniform electric and magneticfields,which are parallel to each oth
er. The locus of the particle will be (A) helix of constant pitch (B) straight l
ine (C) helix ofvarying pitch (D) cycloid
v v v _ /
(SS Bansal Classes
[12]
Q.39 A particle of specific charge (charge/mass) a starts movingfromthe origin u
nder the action ofan electric field E = E i and magnetic field B = B k. Its velo
city at (x , y ,0) is (4i + 3 j). The value of x is: 25 5a 16aB 13 aE (C) 2aE (B
) (A) 2 B Q.40 A particle of specific charge (q/m) is projected from the origin
of coordinates with initial velocity [ui - vj ]. Uniform electric magneticfields
exist in the region along the +y direction, ofmagnitude E and B. The particle wi
ll definitely return to the origin once if (A) [VB/2TCE] is an integer (B) (u +
v ) [B/7tE] is an integer (C) [VB/' TIE] in an integer (D) [uB/TTE] is an intege
r Q.41 An electron moving with a velocity V, = 2i m/s at a point in a magneticfi
eldexperiences a force F, = - 2 j N.
0 0 0 0 0 c f r r 2 2 1/2
_
2
A
2
A
Ifthe electron is moving with a velocity V = 2 j m/s at the same point, it exper
iences a force F = +2i N. The force the electron would experience ifitweremoving
withavelocity V = 2k m/s at the same point is (A) zero (B) 2kN (C) - 2 k N (D) i
nformation is insufficient Q. 42 Two particles of charges +Q and -Q are proj ect
edfromthe same point with a velocity v in a region of uniform magneticfieldB suc
h that the velocity vector makes an angle q with the magneticfield.Their masses
are M and 2M, respectively. Then, they will meet again for the first time at a p
oint whose distance from the point of projection is (A) 2:tMvcos9/QB (B) 8TIMVCO
S0/QB (C) 7tMvcos0/QB (D) 4TIMVCOS9/QB Q.43 A particle of charge Q and mass M mo
ves in a circular path of radius R in a uniform magneticfieldof magnitude B. The
same particle now moves with the same speed in a circular path of same radius R
in the space between the cylindrical electrodes ofthe cylindrical capacitor. Th
e radius ofthe inner electrode is R/2 while that of the outer electrode is 3R/2.
Then the potential difference between the capacitor electrodes must be (A) QBR(
/n3)/M (B) QB R (/n3)/2M (C) QB R (/n3)/M (D)None Y Q. 44 A particle with charge
+Q and mass m enters a magneticfieldof magnitude B, B existing only to theright
ofthe boundary YZ. The direction ofthe motion ofthe m particle is perpendicular
to the direction of B. Let T = 2 T . The time spent T by the particle in thefiel
dwill be 71-29 'tc + 29^ (A)T0 (B) 2T9 (C)T ( D ) T 271 2n
3 2 2 2 2
X
Q.45 In the previous question, ifthe particle has -Q charge, the time spend by t
he particle in thefieldwill be tc-29 tt + 29 (C)T ( D ) T 2TZ (B)2T9 (A) TO 27C
Q.46 The direction of magnetic force on the electron as shown in the diagram is
along (A) y-axis (B) -y-axis (C) z-axis (D) -z-axis ' IL Y
(SS Bansal Classes
[12]
Q.47 A particle having charge q enters a region ofuniform magnetic field B (dire
cted inwards) and is deflected a distance x after travelling a distance y. The m
agnitude of the momentum ofthe particle is: qB qBy qBy (B) x ( C ) y X •+x (A) (D)
qBy' 2x Q.48 A block of mass m & charge q is released on a long smooth inclined
plane magnetic field B is constant, uniform, horizontal and parallel to surface
as shown. Find the time from start when block loses contact with the surface. m
cosecG mcosB (B) qB (A) qB
mcotQ (D)none (C) qB Q. 49 A particle moving with velocity v having specific cha
rge (q/m) enters a region of B 3mv © P' 53>" magneticfieldB having width d = "^rj^
at angle 53° to the boundary ofmagnetic X field. Find the angle 9 in the60° diagram
. (A) 37° (B) (C) 90° (D) none Q. 5 0 A charged particle enters a uriferm magneticfi
eldperpendicular to its initial direction travelling in air. The path of the par
ticle is seen to follow the path infigure.Which of statements 1-3 is/are correct
? [1] The magneticfieldstrength may have been increased while the particle was t
ravelling in air [2] The particle lost energy by ionising the air entry* [3] The
particle lost charge by ionising the air (A) 1, 2, 3 are correct (B) 1,2 only a
re correct (C) 2, 3 only are correct (D) 1 only Q. 51 A straight rod of mass m a
nd length L is suspended from the identical spring as shown in thefigure.The spr
ing stretched by a distance of x due to the weight of the wire. The circuit has
total resistance RQ. When the magneticfieldperpendicular to the plane ofthe pape
r is switched on, springs are observed to extend further by the same distance. T
he magneticfieldstrength is mgR (A) 8 7~; directed outward from the plane of the
paper L mgR (B) 2ex ; directed outwardfromthe plane of the paper mgR (C) sL ; d
irected into the plane of the paper (D) ; directed into the plane of the paper
0 0
£X„
Q. 52 A conducting wire bent in the form of a parabola y = 2x carries a current
i = 2 A as shown in figure. This wire is placed in a uniform magnetic field B =
-4 k Tesla. The magnetic force on the wire is (in newton) (A) — 16i (B) 321 (C)-32
i (D) 16i
2
y (m)
(SS Bansal Classes
[12]
Q.53 A semi circular current carrying wire having radius R is placed in Y x-y pl
ane with its centre at origin' O'. There is non-uniform magnetic Bxfield B = — ^ k
(here B is +ve constant) is existing inthe region. The (-R,0,0) / I+RXOT X 2R m
agnetic force acting on semi circular wire will be along (A) - x-axis (B) + y-ax
is (C) - y-axis (D) + x-axis Q.54 A circular current loop of radius a is placed
in a radialfieldB as shown. The net force acting on the loop is (A) zero (B) 27i
BaIcos9 (C) 27taBsinG (D)None Q.55 A conductor of length I and mass m is placed
along the east-west line on a table. Suddenly a certain amount of charge is pass
ed throughit and it is found to jump to a height h. The earth's magnetic inducti
on is B. The charge passed through the conductor is: 1 V2gh gh (A) Bmgh (B) g/m
(C) B/m (D) mV2gh B/ Q.56 In thefigureshown a current Ij is established in the l
ong straight wire AB. Another B wire CD carrying current I is placed in the plan
e of the paper. The line joining the ends ofthis wire is perpendicular to the wi
re AB. The force on the wire CD is: I, (A) zero (B) towards left (C) directed up
wards (D) none of these D
o v y 2
Q.57 A square loop ABCD, carrying a current i, is placed near and coplanar with
a long straight conductor XY carrying a current I, the net force on the loop wil
l be 2ppli/ 2poIi (A) 3tt (B) Poli (C) 371 (D) M A 2tc 271 M L/2 Q.58 A metal ri
ng of radius r = 0.5 m with its plane normal to a uniform magneticfieldB of indu
ction 0.2 T carries a current I = 100 A. The tension in newtons developed in the
ring is: (A) 100 (B) 50 (C) 25 (D)10 X Q.59 In givenfigure,X and Y are two long
straight parallel conductors each carrying 2A a current of 2 A. The force on ea
ch conductor is F newtons. When the current 2A in each is changed to 1A and reve
rsed in direction, the force on each is now (A) F/4 and unchanged in direction (
B) F/2 and reversed in direction (C) F/2 and unchanged in direction (D) F/4 and
reversed in direction Q.60 A conducting ring ofmass 2 kg and radius 0.5 m is pla
ced on a smooth horizontal plane. The ring carries a current i = 4A. A horizonta
l magneticfieldB = 10T is switched on at time t = 0 as shown infigure.The initia
l angular acceleration of the ring will be IJIIIIlMWllllll (A) 40 7i rad/s (B) 2
0 % rad/s (C)5 7trad/s (D) 15 tc rad/s Q.61 In thefigureshown a coil of single t
urn is wound on a sphere of radius R and mass | m. The plane of the coil is para
llel to the plane and lies in the equatorial plane of e>\ the sphere. Current in
the coil is i. The value of B ifthe sphere is in equilibrium is wwwwwwwwwwulww
mg cos 8 mg sin 9 mg tan 9 mg (D) 7tiR (C) TtiR (A) 7UR (B) 7UR
Y B 7 2 2 2 2 B
A
(SS Bansal Classes
[12]
Q. 62 The magnetic moment of a circular orbit ofradius 'r' carrying a charge' q'
and rotating with velocity v is given by qvr qvr (C) qv7rr (D) qv7ir (B) (A) 27
1 E |j. S Q. 63 The dimensional formula for the physical quantity 5— is B (E = ele
ctricfieldand B = magnetic field) (D) L M°T- 1/2 (A)L°M°T° (B)L M°T~ (C) L~ M°T Q. 64 A thi
non conducting disc of radius R is rotating clockwise (seefigure)with an angula
r velocity w about its central axis, which is perpendicular to its plane. Both i
ts surfaces carry +ve charges ofuniform surface density. Halfthe disc is in a re
gion of a uniform, unidirectional magneticfieldB parallel to the plane ofthe dis
c, as shown. Then, (A) The net torque on the disc is zero. (B) The net torque ve
ctor on the disc is directed leftwards. (C) The net torque vector on the disc is
directed rightwards. (D) The net torque vector on the disc is parallel to B. Q.
65 A rectangular coil PQ has 2n turns, an area 2a and carries a current 2/, (re
fer figure). The plane of the coil is at 60° to a horizontal uniform magneticfield
of flux density B. The torque on the coil due to magnetic force is (A) Bna/ sin6
0° (B) 8Bna/cos60° (C)4na/Bsin60° (D)none Q. 6 6 A straight current carrying conductor
is placed in such a way that the current in the conductorflowsin the direction
out of the plane ofthe paper. The P R© S N conductor is placed between two poles o
f two magnets, as shown. Q The conductor will experience a force in the directio
n towards (A) P (B)Q (C)R (D)S Q.67 Figure shows a square current carrying loop
ABCD of side lOcmand current i = 1 OA. The magnetic moment M ofthe loop is C (A)
(0.05) (I - V3k)A - m (B) (0.05) (j + k)A - m ,i= 10 (C) (0.05) (V3i + k)A - m
(D) (i + k)A - m
2 2 0 0 1 1 1 I 1/2 2 2 2 2
^Q. 1 In the following hexagons, made up oftwo different material P and Q, curre
nt enters and leaves from points X and Y respectively. In which case the magneti
cfieldat its centre is not zero.
0
each question.
-vp/
?
0
p/
Q
x^
. v ^V (D)
P
Qjy Consider the magneticfieldproduced by afinitelylong current carrying wire. j
A ) the lines offieldwill be concentric circles with centres on the wire. : The
re can be two points in the same plane where magneticfieldsare same. (JJ&) There
can be large number of points where the magneticfieldis same. > (D) The magneti
cfieldat a point is inversally proportional to the distance ofthe pointfromthe w
ire.
x
(SS Bansal Classes
[12]
Q.3/ Consider three quantities x = E/B, y = J l / p e andz= -. Here, I is the le
ngth of a wire, Ciis a CR capacitance and R is a resistance. All other symbols h
ave standard meanings. (A) x, y have the same dimensions (Wfy, z have the same d
imensions (P*z, x have the same dimensions (D) none ofthe three pairs have the s
ame dimensions.
0 0
Two long thin, parallel conductors carrying equal currents in the same direction
arefixedparallel to the x-axis, one passing through y = a and the other through
y = -a. The resultant magnetic field due to the two conductors at any point is
B. Which of the following are correct? JA) B = 0 for all points on the x-axis 4B
) At all points on the y-axis, excluding the origin, B has only a z-component. "
fC) At all points on the z-axis, excluding the origin, B has only a y-component.
^(D) B cannot have anx-component. T Q..5 / Currentflowsthrough uniform, square
frames as shown. In which case is the magneticfieldat the centre of the frame no
t zero? (A)
(B)
V
(C)
(D)
Qj}/' A wire carrying I is shaped as shown. Section AB is a quarter circle ofrad
ius r. The magneticfieldat C is directed i (A) along the bisector of the angle A
CB, away from AB ' (B) along the bisector ofthe angle ACB, towards AB perpendicu
lar to the plane of the paper, directed into the paper (D) at an angle T 4 to th
e plane of the paper C / Along straight wire carries a current along the x-axis.
Consider the points A(0, 1, 0), B(0, 1,1), C(1, 0,1) and D(1, 1, 1). Which of t
he following pairs of points will have magnetic fields of the same magnitude (A)
A andB .(B) A and C (C)BandC B and D In the previous question, if the current i
s i and the magneticfieldat D has magnitude B, Ho !V
B 1 9 1
(C) B is parallel to the x-axis
>SB) B makes an angle of 45° with the xy plane
Which ofthe following statement is correct: JjA) A charged particle enters a reg
ion ofuniform magneticfieldat an angle 8 5° to magnetic lines of force. The path o
f the particle is a circle. (B) An electron and proton are movingwith the same k
inetic energy along the same direction. When they pass through uniform magneticf
ieldperpendicular to their direction ofmotion, they describe circular path. -^(C
) There is no change in the energy ofa charged particle moving in a magneticfiel
dalthough magnetic force acts on it. Two electrons enter with the same speed but
in opposite direction in a uniform transverse magnetic field. Then the two desc
ribe circle of the same radius and these move in the same direction.
(SS Bansal Classes Question Bank on Magnetic Effect of Current
[12]
Qyl 0 Two identical charged particles enter a uniform magneticfieldwith same spe
ed but at angles 3 0° and 60° withfield.Let a, b and c be the ratio oftheir time per
iods, radii and pitches ofthe helical paths than j/k) abc = 1 (B) abc > 1 (C) ab
c < 1 0 ) a = be i Consider thefollowingstatements regarding a charged particle
in amagneticfield.Which ofthe statements are true: (A) Starting with zero veloci
ty, it accelerates in a direction perpendicular to the magnetic field. (B) While
deflecting in magneticfieldits energy gradually increases. (Q) Only the compone
nt of magnetic field perpendicular to the direction of motion of the charged ^pa
rticle is effective in deflecting it. \(0) Direction of deflecting force on the
moving charged particle is perpendicular to its velocity.
v
QA 2 A particle of charge q and velocity v passes undeflected through a space wi
th non-zero electricfieldE and magneticfieldB. The undeflecting conditions will
hold if. (A) signs of both q and E are reversed. (B) signs of both q and B are r
eversed. (C) both B and E are changed in magnitude, but keeping the product of |
B| and |E| fixed, both B and E are doubled in magnitude. . Two charged particle
A and B each of charge +e and masses G X \x 12amuand 13 amu respectively follow
a circular trajectory in chamber X after the velocity selector as shown in the f
igure. Both particles enter the velocity selector with speed 1.5 x 10 ms . A uni
form magneticfieldof strength 1.0 T is maintained within the chamber X and in th
e velocity selector. (A) Electricfieldacross the conducting plate of the velocit
y selector is - 10 NC i . (B) Electricfieldacross the conducting plate of the ve
locity selector is 10 NC" i . si£) The ratio r /r ofthe radii of the circular path
s for the two particles is 12/13. (D) The ratio r / r ofthe radii ofthe circular
paths for the two particles is 13/12. Q.j/4 An electron is moving along the pos
itive X-axis. You want to apply a magneticfieldfor a short time so that the elec
tron may reverse its direction and move parallel to the negative X-axis. This ca
n be done by applying the magneticfieldalong .AX) Y-axis ^(B) Z-axis (C) Y-axis
only (D) Z-axis only
y X
rrcioeity
*
>'
X X
X
X
6
-1
X y y
X X
X
y
y
x
X X X
—
X X
y
X
B
y y
X
X
y
6
-1
6
1
A
B
A
B
In a region of space, a uniform magneticfieldB exists in the y-direction. A prot
on isfiredfromthe origin, with its initial velocity v making a small angle a wit
h the y-direction in the yz plane. In the subsequent motion ofthe proton, JA) it
s x-coordinate can never be positive (B) its x- and z-coordinates cannot both be
zero at the same time (C) its z-coordinate can never be negative (D) its y-coor
dinate will be proportional to the square of its time of flight Q.16 Arod AB mov
es with a unifonn velocity v in a uniform magneticfieldas shown in figure. (A) T
he rod becomes electrically charged. (B) The end Abecomes positively charged. (C
) The end B becomes positively charged. (D) The rod becomes hot because of Joule
heating.
(SS Bansal Classes
,A
B
[12]
The following experiment was performed by J.J.Thomson in order to measure the ra
tio of the charge e to the mass m of an electron. Figure shows a modern version
ofThomson's apparatus. Electrons emittedfroma hotfilamentare accelerated by a po
tential difference V. As the electrons pass through the deflector plates, they e
ncounter both electric and magneticfields.When the electrons leave the plates th
ey enter a field-free region that extends to the fluorescent screen. The beam of
electrons can be observed as a spot of light on the screen. The entire region i
n which the electrons travel is evacuated with a vacuum pump. Thomson's procedur
e was to first set both the electric and magneticfieldsto zero, note the positio
n ofthe undefiected electron beam on the screen, then turn on only the electricf
ieldand measure the resulting deflection. The deflection of an electron in an el
ectric field of magnitude E is given by dj=eEL /2mv , where L is the length of t
he deflecting plates, and v is the speed of the electron. The deflection d can a
lso be calculated from the total deflection of the spot on the screen, d. + d an
d the geometry ofthe apparatus. In the second part ofthe experiment, Thomson adj
usted the magneticfieldso as to exactly cancel the force applied by the electric
field,leaving the electron beam undefiected. This gives eE = evB. By combining t
his relation with the expression for d , one can calculate the charge to mass ra
tio ofthe electron as a function ofthe known quantities. The result is: e _ 2d,E
m BL Qyl 7 Why was it important for Thomson to evacuate the air from the appara
tus? (A) Electrons travel faster in a vacuum, making the deflection d, smaller.
(B) Electromagnetic waves propagate in a vacuum. (C) The electron collisions wit
h the air molecules cause V them to be scattered, and a focused beam will not be
produced. (D) It was not important and could have been avoided. Q.slS"' One mig
ht have considered a different experiment in which no magneticfieldis needed. Th
e ratio e/m can then be calculated directlyfromthe expression for d,. Why might
Thomson have introduced the magneticfieldB in his experiment? (A) To verify the
correctness of the equation for the magnetic force. ^ (B) To avoid having to mea
sure the electron speed v. (C) To cancel unwanted effects ofthe electricfieldE.
(D) To make sure that the electricfielddoes not exert a force on the electron. Q
I f the electron speed were doubled by increasing the potential difference V, w
hich ofthe following would have to be true in order to correctly measure e/m? Kk
) The magneticfieldwould have to be cut in halfin order to cancel the force appl
ied by the electric field. (B) The magneticfieldwould have to be doubled in orde
r to cancel the force applied by the electric field. (C) The length of the plate
s, L, would have to be doubled to keep the deflection, dj,fromchanging. (D) Noth
ing needs to be changed. Q . 2ty The potential difference V which accelerates th
e electrons, also creates an electricfield.Why did Thomson NOT consider the defl
ection caused this electricfieldin his experiment? (A) This electricfieldis much
weaker than the one between the deflecting plates and can be neglected. (B) Onl
y the deflection, d, + d caused by the deflecting plates is measured in the expe
riment. ..(C) There is no deflectionfromthis electric field (D) The magneticfiel
dcancels the force caused by this electric field.
2 2 t 2 } 2 2 2
(SS Bansal Classes
[12]
k
Q.21 Ifthe electron is deflected downward when only the electri c field is turne
d on (as shown in figure) then in what directions do the electric and magneticfi
eldspoint in the second part ofthe experiment? (A) The electricfieldpoints to th
e bottom, while the magneticfieldpoints into the page. / (B) The electricfieldpo
ints to the bottom, while the magneticfieldpoints out ofthe page. (C) The electr
icfieldpoints to the top, while the magneticfieldpoints into the page. i(D)The e
lectricfieldpoints to the top, while the magneticfieldpoints out of the page. Q/
L2 A conductor ABCDE, shaped as shown, carries a current i. It is placed in the
xy plane with the ends A and E on the x-axis. Auniform magnetic field ofmagnitud
e B exists in the region. The force acting on it will be Y 4JA) zero, if B is in
the x-direction -(B) XQi in the z-direction, if B is in the y-direction JJ2) AB
/' in the negative y-direction, if B is in the z-direction (D)2aB/',.ifB is in t
he x-direction . / Q.23 A square loop of side i is placed in the neighbourhood o
fan infinitely long straight wire carrying a current I j. The loop carries a cur
rent I as shown in figure (A) The magnetic moment of the loop is p (B) The magne
tic moment ofthe loop is p = / Lk (C) The potential energy of the loop is minimu
m- / % k : (D) The torque experienced by the loop is maximum Q.24 The magnetic d
ipole p is placed parallel to an infinitely long straight wire as shown in figur
e (A) the potential energy of the dipole is minimum (B) the torque acting on the
dipole is zero (C) the force acting on the dipole is zero (D) none of these
z 2
u
m
m
ONLY ONE OPTION IS CORRECT.
ANSWER
Q4 Q.ll Q.18 Q.25 Q.32 Q.39 Q.46 Q.53 Q.60 Q.67
KEY
Qi Q8 Q.15 Q.22 Q.29 Q.36 Q.43 Q.50 Q.57 Q.64
D A B B C B C B A B Q.l Q.5 Q.9 Q 13 Q.17 Q.21
Q.2 Q.9 Q.16 Q.23 Q.30 Q.37 Q.44 Q.51 Q.58 Q.65 A C B,C C C D
C A A D C B C A D B
Q.3 Q.10 Q.17 Q.24 Q.31 Q.38 Q.45 Q.52 Q.59 Q.66 Q.2 Q.6 Q.10 Q.14 Q.18 Q.22
C B C D C B D B A B A,B,C C AD A,B B AB,C
A B A B A C A A A A Q.3 Q.7 Q.ll Q.15 Q.19 Q.23
Q.5 Q.12 Q.19 Q.26 Q.33 Q.40 Q.47 Q.54 Q.61
A C B A C C C C B
Q.6 Q.13 Q.20 Q.27 Q.34 Q.41 Q.48 Q.55 Q.62
A A B D B A C D B
Q.7 Q.14 Q.21 Q.28 Q.35 Q.42 Q.49 Q.56 Q.63
D A A B A D C D A
AB,C B,D C,D A. A A
Q.4 Q8 Q.12 Q.16 Q.20 Q.24
AB,C,D AD D B C C
(SS Bansal Classes
[12]
BANSAL CLASSES
MECHANICAL WA VES
Q UESTION BANK ON
There are 76 questions in this question
Objective Question Bank On Mechanical Waves
bank.
Q.l Q.2
An open organ pipe oflength L vibrates in second harmonic mode. The pressure vib
ration is maximum (A) at the two ends (B) at a distance L/4 from either end insi
de the tube (C) at the mid-point of the tube (D) none ofthese Figure shown the s
hape of part of a long string in which transverse waves are produced by attachin
g one end of the string to tuning fork offrequency250 Hz. What is the velocity o
f the waves? (A) 1.0 ms (B) 1.5 ms(C) 2.0 ms" (D) 2.5 ms-1 1 1 1
5cm - 5cm
'
\ 0.3cm O.lcrnV / 0.5cm
Q.3
A sinusoidal progressive wave is generated in a string. It's equation is given b
y y = (2 mm) sin (2%x — 100 7tt + 7t/3). The time when particle at x = 4 m first p
asses through mean position, will be 1 1 1 sec 1 (A) 150 sec (D) .100 sec (C) (B
) 12 sec ' 300
v
Q.4
A block of mass 1 kg is hanging vertically from a string of length 1 m and mass/
length = 0.001 Kg/m. A small pulse is generated at its lower end. The pulse reac
hes the top end in approximately (A) 0.2 sec (B) 0.1 sec (C) 0.02 sec (D) 0.01 s
ec Find the resultant of 2 wave progressing along x-axis. Yj = 3 sin (3t - 6x) y
= - 4 cos(3t - 6x) (A) 5 sin (3t- 6 x - 37°) (B) 5 sin (3t - 6x + 53°) (C) 5 sin (3
t - 6x - 53°) (D) None
2
///////// ^^ il •
Q. 5
Q. 6
A pulse shown here is reflected from the rigid wall A and then fromfreeend B. Th
e shape of the string after these 2 reflection will be
(A) OB (C)
Q)B
(B)<>B
(D)<>
B
B
Q.7
An open organ pipe of length I is sounded together with another organ pipe of le
ngth I + x in their fundamental tones (x « / ) . The beat frequency heard will be
(speed of sound is v) : vx vx vx (C)JJ2 (D) ~2l (B) 2x (A) 4/
1 4
Q. 8
Ataut string at both ends vibrates in its n overtone. The distance between adjac
ent Node and Antinode is found to be'd'. If the length of the string is L, then
(A) L = 2d (n +1) (B)L = d ( n + l ) (C)L = 2dn (D)L = 2 d ( n - l ) [10] s&Bans
al Classes Objective Question Bank On Mechanical Waves
Q. 9
Two waves are propagating along a taut string that coincides with the x-axis. Th
efirstwave has the wave function y = Acos [k(x - vt)] and the second has the wav
e function y = A cos [k(x + vt) + (j)]. (A) For constructive interference at x =
0, cj) = %. (B) For constructive interference atx = 0, () = 3 T J T. (C) For de
structive interference at x = 0, <j) = %. (D) For destructive interference at x
- 0, cj) = 2n.
}
Q. 10 The second overtone of an open organ pipe A and a closed pipe B have the s
ame frequency at a given temperature. It follows that the ratio of the (A) lengt
h of A and B is 4 : 3 (B) fundamentalfrequenciesof A & B is 5 : 6 (C) lengths of
B to that of A is 5 : 6 (D) frequencies offirstovertone ofA & B is 10 : 9 Q.ll
The length, tension, diameter and density of a wire B are double than the corres
ponding quantities for another stretched wire A. Then. 1 (A) Fundamentalfrequenc
yof B is times that of A. 1 (B) The velocity ofwave in B is times that ofvelocit
y in A. (C) The fundamentalfrequencyofA is equal to the third overtone of B. CD)
The velocity of wave in B is half that ofvelocity in A. Q.12 A tuning fork offr
equency280 Hz produces 10 beats per sec when sounded with a vibrating sonometer
string. When the tension in the string increases slightly, it produces 11 beats
per sec. The original frequency ofthe vibrating sonometer string is : (A) 269 Hz
(B) 291 Hz (C) 270 Hz (D) 290 Hz Q.13 Two whistles Aand B each have afrequencyo
f500Hz. Ais stationary and B is moving towards the right (awayfromA) at a speed
of 5 0 m/s. An observer is between the two whistles moving towards the right wit
h a speed of 25 m/s. The velocity of sound in air is 350 m/s. Assume there is no
wind. Then which of the following statements are true: (A) The apparent frequen
cy ofwhistle B as heard by Ais 444Hz approximately (B) The apparent frequency of
whistle B as heard by the observer is 469Hz approximately (C) The difference in
the apparent frequencies ofA and B as heard by the observer is 4.5 Hz. (D) The
apparent frequencies of the whistles of each other as heard by A and Bare the sa
me. Q. 14 A string lm long is drawn by a 300Hz vibrator attached to its end. The
string vibrates in 3 segments. The speed of transverse waves in the string is e
qual to (A) 100 m/s (B) 200 m/s (C) 3 00 m/s (D) 400 m/s Q.15 A string vibrates
in 5 segments to a frequency of480 Hz. The frequency that v/ill cause it to vibr
ate in 2 segments will be (A) 96 Hz (B) 192 Hz (C) 1200 Hz (D) 2400 Hz Q.16 Two
tuning forks A & B produce notes offrequencies256Hz&262Hz respectively. An unkno
wn note sounded at the same time as A produces beats. When the same note is soun
ded with B, beat frequency is twice as large. The unknown frequency could be: (A
) 268 Hz (B) 260 Hz " (C) 250 Hz (D) 242 Hz
*
s&Bansal Classes
[10]
Q.17
Atransverse wave is described by the equation y=A sin [2% (ft - x/X) ]. The maxi
mum particle velocity is equal to four times the wave velocity if:
( A ) X = 7iA/4 ( B ) X = 7tA/2
2
Q.18 A wave is propagating along x-axis. The displacement of particles of the me
dium in z-direction at t = 0 is given by: z=exp[ -(x+2) ], where 'x' is in meter
s. At t = 1 s, the same wave disturbance is given by: z = exp[ - (2 - x) ]. Then
, the wave propagation velocity is (A) 4 m/s in+x direction (B) 4 m/s in -x dire
ction (C) 2 m/s in + x direction (D) 2 m/s in-x direction Q.19 Which of the foll
owing graphs is/are correct.
2
( C ) X = %A
(D)X = 2%A
(A)
>
^ 3c
©
Tr=constant) fParabola Temperature
(C)
Tension
t ^ 3
«
XP)U
g 55 eo
Length of organ pipe
Q.20 In a situation, wind is blowingfromsource to observer. The wavelength of so
und heard by stationary observer in the medium due to sound produced by the fixe
d source. (A) increases (B) decreases (C) remains same (D) can't be determine Q.
21 In a test of subsonic Jet flies over head at an altitude of 100 m. The sound
intensity on the ground as the Jet passes overhead is 160 dB. At what altitude s
hould the plane fly so that the ground noise is not greater than 120 dB. (A) abo
ve 10 kmfromground (B) above 1 kmfromground (C) above 5 km from ground (D) above
8 kmfromground Q.22 The frequency changes by 10% as a sound source approaches a
stationary observer with constant speed v . What would be the percentage change
infrequencyas the source recedes the observer with the same speed. Given that v
< v. (v = speed of sound in air) (A) 14.3% (B) 20% (C)10.0% (D)8.5% Q.23 Four o
pen organ pipes of different lengths and different gases H at same temperature a
s shown in figure. Let f , f , f and f be N„ O, their fundamentalfrequenciesthen:
[Take Y co = 7/5] CO, 2113 1/3 (A) f /f = 42 (B)f /f =V72/28 I i (A) (B) (C) (D)
(C) fc/f = VTT/28 (D) y f = V W n Q.24 A sufficiently long close organ pipe has
a small hole at its bottom. Initially the pipe is empty. Water is poured into t
he pipe at a constant rate. The fundamental frequency of the air column in the p
ipe (A) continuously increasing (B) first increases and them becomes constant (C
) continuously decreases (D)firstdecreases and them become constant Q.25 Atuning
fork offrequency 340 Hz is vibrated just above a cylindrical tube of length 120
cm. Water is slowly poured in the tube. Ifthe speed of sound is 340 ms then the
minimum height ofwater required for resonance is: (A) 95 cm (B) 75 cm (C)45cm (
D)25cm Q.26 A metallic wire oflength L isfixedbetween two rigid supports. Ifthe
wire is cooled through a temperature difference AT (Y=young's modulus, p = densi
ty, a = coefficient oflinear expansion) then the frequency oftransverse vibratio
n is proportional to: a [Ya (C) (B) V 7 F
s 2 A B c D 2
f
A
B
B
c
D
A
-1
<
A
)
s&Bansal Classes Objective Question Bank On Mechanical Waves
[10]
Q.27 A source of sound moves towards an observer (A) thefrequencyof the source i
s increased. (B) the velocity of sound in the medium is increased. (C) the wavel
ength of sound in the medium towards the observer is decreased. (D) the amplitud
e of vibration ofthe particles is increased. Q.28 A string isfixedat both ends v
ibrates in a resonant mode with a separation 2.0 cm between the consecutive node
s. For the next higher resonantfrequency,this separation is reduced to 1.6 cm. T
he length ofthe string is (A) 4.0 cm (B) 8.0 cm (C) 12.0 ctn (D) 16.0 cm Q.29 A
car moves towards a Kill with speed v . It blows a horn offrequencyfwhich is hea
red by an observer following the car with speed v . The speed of sound in air is
v. (A) the wavelength of sound reaching the hill is j v-v (B) the wavelength of
sound reaching the hill is r v + v. \ , (C) the beat frequency observed by the
observer is v - V v. c y
c 0 c f
(D) the beat frequency observed by the observer .is vc 2 - v,2o c Q.30 A gas is
filled in an organ pipe and it is sounded with an organ pipe in fundamental mode
. Choose the correct statement(s): (T = constant) . (A) If gas is changed from t
o 0 , the resonantfrequencywill increase (B) If gas is changed from 0 to N , the
resonant frequency will increase (C) If gas is changedfromN to He, the resonant
frequency will decrease (D) If gas is changed from He to CH , the resonant freq
uency will decrease
2 V ( V + V ) f
2
2
2
2
4
Q.31 A composition string is made up byjoining two strings of different masses p
er unit length p and 4p. The composite string is under the same tension. A trans
verse wave pulse: Y = (6 mm) sin(5t + 40x), where't' is in seconds and 'x' in me
ters, is sent along the lighter string towards the joint. The joint is at • x = 0.
The equation of the wave pulse reflected from the joint is (A) (2 mm) sin(5t -
40x) (B)(4mm)sin(40x-5t) (C) - (2 mm) sin(5t - 40x) (D)(2mm)sin(5t- lOx) Q.32 In
theprevious question, the percentage ofpower transmitted to the heavier string t
hrough the joint is approximately (A) 33% (B) 89% (C) 67% (D)75% Q.33 A wave tra
vels uniformly in all directionsfroma point source in an isotropic medium. The d
isplacement of the medium at any point at a distance r from the source may be re
presented by (A is a constant representing strength of source) (A) [A/ 4~ ] sin
(kr - cot) (B) [A/r] sin (kr - cot) (C) [Ar] sin (kr - at) (D) [A/r ] sin (kr-co
t)
x 2
Q.34 Three coherent waves of equalfrequencieshaving amplitude 10 pm, 4 pm and 7
pm respectively, arrive at a given point with successive phase difference of 7t/
2. The amplitude of the resulting wave in mm is given by (A) 5 (B)6 (C)3 (D)4
s&Bansal Classes
[10]
Q.35 An organ pipe P, closed at one end vibrating in itsfirstovertone. Another p
ipe P open at both ends is vibrating in its third overtone. They are in a resona
nce with a given tuning fork. The ratio ofthe length of Pj to that ofP is : (A)
8/3 (B) 3/8 (C) 1/2 (D) 1/3
2 2
Q.36 In a closed end pipe oflength 105 cm, standing waves are set up correspondi
ng to the third overtone. What distance from the closed end, amongst the followi
ng, is a pressure Node? (A) 20 cm (B) 60 cm (C)85cm (D)45em Q.37 A pipe's lower
end is immersed in water such that the length of air columnfromthe top open end
has a certain length 25 cm. The speed of sound in air is 350 m/s. The air column
is found to resonate with a tuning fork offrequency1750 Hz. By what minimum dis
tance should the pipe be rai sed in order to make the air column resonate again
with the same tuning fork? (A) 7 cm (B) 5 cm (C)35 cm (D)10cm Q.38 The vibration
of a stringfixedat both ends are described by Y= 2 sin(rcx) sin( 1 007rt) where
Y is in mm,x is in cm,t in sec then (A)Maximum displacement of the particle atx
= 1/6 cm would be 1 mm. (B) velocity ofthe particle at x = 1/6 cm at time t = 1
/600 sec will be 157 V3 mm/s (C) If the length of the string be 10 cm, number of
loop in it would be 5 (D) None of these Q.39 A perfectly elastic uniform string
is suspended vertically with its upper endfixedto the ceiling and the lower end
loaded with the weight. If a transverse wave is imparted to the lower end of th
e string, the pulse will (A) not travel along the length ofthe string (B) travel
upwards with increasing speed (C) travel upwards with decreasing speed (D) trav
elled upwards with constant acceleration Q.40 A wave is represented by the equat
ion y = 10 sin27i(100t-0.02x)+ 10 sin27t(100t+0.02x). The maximum amplitude and
loop length are respectively (A) 20 units and 3 0 units (B) 20 units and 25 unit
s (C) 3 0 units and 20 units (D) 25 units and 20 units Q.41 The length, tension,
diameter and density of a wire B are double than the corresponding quantities f
or another stretched wire A. Then (A) fundamental frequency of B is 1/2^2 times
that of A. (B) the velocity of wave in B is 1/V2 times that ofvelocity in A. (C)
the fundamentalfrequencyof A is equal to the third overtone ofB. (D) the veloci
ty ofwave in B is half that ofvelocity in A. Q.42 A standing wave y = A sin 71xj
cos (1000;ct) is maintained in a taut string where y and x are expressed in met
ers. The distance between the successive points oscillating with the amplitude A
/2 across a node is equal to (A) 2.5cm (B) 25 cm (C)5cm (D) 10cm
1 2
f 20
)
A . Q.43 A plane wave y=A sin co( ~ ~J undergo a normal incidence on a plane bou
ndary separating medium Mj and M, and splits into a reflected and transmitted wa
ve having speeds v and v then (A) for all values ofv j and v the phase of transm
itted wave is same as that of incident wave (B) for all values ofv and v the pha
se of reflected wave is same as that of incident wave (C) the phase of transmitt
ed wave depends upon v. and v (D) the phase of reflected wave depends upon v and
v
2 l 2 2
s&Bansal Classes
}
2
[10]
Q. 44 A Wire under tension between twofixedpoints A and B, executes transverse v
ibrations in lowest mode so that the mid point O of AB is a node. Then (A) all p
oints of the wire between A and B are in the same phase (B) all points between A
and O are in the same phase (C) any point between A and O and any point between
O and B have a phase difference of %12 (D) any point between A and O and any po
int between O and B have a phase difference of'rc. Q. 45 In case of closed organ
pipe which harmonic the p" overtone will be (A) 2p +1 (B) 2 p - l (C) p + i (D)
p - 1 Q.46 A wave equation is given as v = cos(500t - 7Gx), where y is in mm, x
inm adn t is in sec. (A) the wave must be a transverse porpagating wave. (B) Th
e speed of the wave is 50/7 m/s (C) The frequency of oscillations 1000n Hz (D) T
wo closest points which are in same phase have separation 207t/7 cm. Q. 47 Which
ofthe following statements are wrong about the velocity of sound in air: (A) de
creases with increases in temperature (B) increases with decrease in temperature
(C) decreases as humidity increases (D) independent of density of air. Q. 4 8 A
clamped string is oscillating in nth harmonic, then (A) total energy of oscilla
tions will be n times that offundamental frequency (B) total energy of oscillati
ons will be (n-1) times that offundamental frequency (C) average kinetic energy
ofthe string over a complete oscillations is half of that of the total energy of
the string. (D) none ofthese Q.49 A string of length 1m and linear mass density
O.Glkgnr is stretched to a tension of 100N. When both ends of the string arefix
ed,the three lowestfrequenciesfor standing wave are f,, f, and f . When only one
end ofthe string isfixed,the three lowestfrequenciesfor standing wave are n., a
, and n3. Then (A) n = 5n, = f = 125 Hz (B) f = 5f, = r^ = 125 Hz
5 2 2 1 3 3 3 3
(C)f = n = 3f =150Hz
3 2 1 2
(D) =
= 75 Hz
Q. 5 0 Consider two sound sources S, and S having same frequency 100Hz and the o
bserver 0 located between them, as shown in thefig.All the three are moving with
same velocity in same direction. The beat frequency « » *, „ ofthe observer is s, 30m
s- 030ms- s30ms~ (A) 50Hz (B) 5 Hz (C)zero (D) 2.5 Hz Q.51 A 2.0m long string wi
th a linear mass density of 5.2 x lO^kgnv and tension 52N has both of its ends f
ixed. It vibrates in a standing wave pattern with four antinoaes. Frequency of t
he vibration is (A) 75 Hz (B) 150 Hz ' (C) 100 Hz (D)50Hz
1 1 2 ! 1
Q. 52 An isotropic point source emits sound of a single frequency. The amplitude
of the sound wave at a distance rfromthe source is proportional to r . The valu
e ofn is (A) 2 . (B) V2 (C) 1 (D) 1/2 Q.53 An engine whistling at a constantfreq
uencyn and moving with a constant velocity goes past a stationary observer. As t
he engine crosses him, thefrequencyof the sound heard by him changes by a factor
f. The actual difference in thefrequenciesofthe sound heard by him before and a
fter the engine crosses him is 1 1 1 1-f (A)-n (l-P) (B) 2 oj^ f (C) n0 1 (D) n.
1 + f
n 0 2 0 n
s&Bansal Classes
[10]
Q.54 A closed organ pipe oflength 1.2 m vibrates initsfirstovertone mode. The pr
essure variation is maximum at: (A) 0.8 m from the open end (B) 0.4 mfromthe ope
n end (C) at the open end (D) 1.0 mfromthe open end Q.55 Thefigureshows four pro
gressive waves A, B, C & D. It can be concludedfromthe figure that with respect
to wave A: (A) the wave C is ahead by a phase angle of 7t/2 & the wave B lags be
hind by a phase angle 7t/2 (B; the wave C lags behind by a phase angle of 7t/2 &
the wave B is ahead by a phase angle of nil (C) the wave C is ahead by a phase
angle of 7t & the wave B lags behind by the phase angle of % the wave D lags beh
ind by a phase angle (D) of re & the wave B is ahead by a phase angle of n, Q.56
The resultant amplitude due to superposition of two waves y = 5sin (wt - kx) an
d y, = -5 c o s ( w t - k x - 150°) (A) 5 (B)5V3 (C)5^V3 (0)5^2 + ^3 Q.57 A closed
organ pipe and an open pipe of same length produce 4 beats when they are set in
to vibrations simultaneously. Ifthe length of each ofthem were twice their initi
al lengths, the number ofbeats produced will be (A) 2 (B)4 (C)l (D)8 Q.58 Source
and observer both start moving simultaneouslyfromorigin, one along x-axis and t
he other along y-axis with speed of source=twice the speed of observer. The grap
h between the apparent frequency observed by observer f and time t would approxi
mately be:
l
f
(A)/»
(B)
(C)*
2
(D) *
Q. 5 9 A closed organ pipe of radius r, and an organ pipe of radius r and having
same length 'L' resonate when excited with a given tunning fork. Closed organ p
ipe resonates in its fundamental mode where as open organ pipe resonates in itsf
irstovertone, then (A) i - r , = L (B) r,- r = L/2 (C) r -2r, = 2.5 L (D) 2r -r,
= 2.5 L
x 2 2
Q.60 A stationary sound source's' of frequency 334 Hz and a stationary observer
'O' are placed near a reflecting surface moving away from the source with veloci
ty 2 m/sec as shown in the figure. Ifthe velocity of the sound waves is air is V
= 330 m/sec, the apparent frequency ofthe echo is (A) 332 Hz (B) 326 Hz 2 m/s (
C) 334 Hz (D) 330 Hz • • -H
0 g
;
s&Bansal Classes
Objective Question Bank On Mechanical Waves [10]
Q.61 A person standing at a distance of 6 mfroma source of sound receives sound
wave in two ways, one directly from the source and other after reflectionfroma r
igid boundary as shown in thefigure.The maximum wavelength for which, the person
will receive maximum sound intensity, is 6m 16 (B) m (C)2m (A) 4 m ff»3«
s T
Q. 62 Alistender is at rest w.r.t. the source of sound. A wind starts blowing al
ong the line joining the source and the observer. Then (A)frequencyand wavelengt
h will not change. (B)frequencyand velocity of sound will not change. (C) freque
ncy and time period will not change. (D)frequency,time period and wavelength wil
l not change. Q. 63 A source S offrequencyf and an observer O, moving with speed
s Vj and v, respectively, are movinng awayfromeach other. When they are separate
d by distance a (t =0), a pulse is emitted by the source. This pulse is received
by O at time t. then t., is equal to
Q
(A) s + 2
v v 0 3
(B) Vl+V
s
(C) s - 2
V V
(D) V, + V? + V-
Q. 64 A detector is released from rest over a source of sound of frequency 1 (Hz
) f = 10 Hz. The frequency observed by the detector at time t is plotted 2000 in
the graph. The speed of sound in air is (g = 10 m/s ) (A) 330 m/s (B) 350 m/s (
C) 300 m/s (D) 310 m/s
2
1000
t(s) Q.65 The frequency of a sonometer wire is f, but when the weights producing
the tensions are completely immersed in water the frequency becomes f/2 and on
immersing the weights in a certain liquid the frequency becomes f/3. The specifi
c gravity ofthe liquid is: 15 32 16 (A) (C) 12 (B) (D) 27
30
Q.66 First overtonefrequencyof a closed organ pipe is equal to thefirstovertonef
requencyof an open organ pipe. Further nth harmonic of closed organ pipe is also
equal to the mth harmonic of open pipe, where n and m are: (A) 5, 4 (B) 7. 5 (C
) 9, 6 (D) 7, 3 Q. 67 A uniform rope having some mass hanges vertically from a r
igid support. Atransverse wave pulse is produced at the lower end. The speed (v)
ofthe wave pulse varies with height (h)fromthe lower end as: v (A) (C)
(D)
s&Bansal Classes Objective Question Bank On Mechanical Waves
[10]
Q.68 If lj and f, are the lengths of air column for the first and second resonan
ce when a tuning fork of frequency n is sounded on a resonance tube, then the di
stance ofthe displacement antinodefromthe top end of the resonance tube is: 1 1
-1 l "31i (A) 2(1,-1,) (B)-(21,-1,) (C)
2
2
V - 1
-2/
V - /
2
Q. 69 How many times more intense is 90 dB sound than 40 dB sound? (A) 5 (B) 50
(C) 500
(D)
2
(D) 10
5
Q. 70 Sound wave is travelling along positive x-direction. Displacement (y) of p
articles at any time t is as shown infigure.Select the wrong statement: (A) Part
icle located at E has its velocity in negative x-direction (B) Particle located
at D has zero velocity (C) Particles located between B and C are under compressi
on ~ (D) None of the above
Af
Q. 71 The ratio of intensities between two coherent soud sources is 4 :1. The di
fferenmce ofloudness in D B between maximum and minimum intensities when they in
terfere in space is: (A) 10 log 2 (B) 20 log 3 (C) 10 log 3 (D) 20 log 2
—+ Q.72 The equation of a wave disturbance is given as: y = 0.02 cos v2 507rt cos
(IOTTX), where x and y are in meters and t in seconds. Choose the wrong statemen
t: (A) Antinode occurs at x = 0.3 m (B) The wavelength is 0.2 m (C) The speed of
teh constituent waves is 4 m/s (D) Node occurs at x = 0.15 m
Q. 73 The speed of sound in a gas, in which two waves ofwavelength 1.0m and 1.02
m produce 6 beats per second, is approximately: (A) 350 m/s (B) 300 m/s (C) 380
m/s (D) 410 m/s Q.74 For a certain organ pipe three successive resonance freque
ncies are observed at 425 Hz, 595 Hz and 765 Hz respectively. If the speed of so
und in air is 3 40 m/s, then the length of the pipe is: (A) 2.0 m (B) 0.4 m (C)1
.0m (D)0.2m Q. 75 An observer starts moving with uniform acceleration 'a' toward
s a stationary sound source of frequency f. As the observer approaches the sourc
e, the apparent frequency f heard by the observer varies with timet as: (A) (B)
(Q
(D)
Q. 76 A wave represented by the equation y = Acos (kx - cot) is superimposed wit
h another wave to form a statioary wave such that the point x =0 is a node. The
equation ofthe other wave is: (A) -A sin (kx + cot) (B)-Acos (kx + cot) (C) A si
n (kx + cot) (D) A cos (kx + cot)
s&Bansal Classes
[10]
ANSWER Qi Q.5 Q.9 B C C Q.2 Q.6 A A Q3 Q7
KEY C C Q.4 Q.8 D A
Q.10 C,D Q.14 B Q.18 A Q.22 D Q.26 B Q.30 B,D Q.34 A Q.38 A,B Q.42 C Q.46 A,B,D
Q.50 C Q.54 B Q.58 B Q.62 C Q.66 C Q.70 D Q.74 C
Q.ll C,D Q.15 B Q.19 B, C Q.23 C Q.27 C Q.31 C Q.35 B Q.39 B, D Q.43 A, D Q.47 A
,B, C,D Q.51 C Q.55 B Q.59 C Q.63 C Q.67 C Q.71 B Q.75 A
Q.12 D Q.16 C Q.20 A Q.24 B Q.28 B Q.32 B Q.36 D Q.40 B Q.44 B,D Q.48 A, C Q.52
C Q.56 A Q.60 D Q.64 C Q.68 C Q.72 C Q.76 B
Q.13 B,C Q.17 B Q.21 A Q.25 C Q.29 B,D Q.33 B Q.37 D Q.41 C, D Q.45 A Q.49 D Q.5
3 B Q.57 A Q.61 A Q.65 D Q.69 D Q.73 B
s&Bansal Classes
[10]
BANSAL CLASSES
MECHANICAL WAVES
CONTENTS
KEY
CONCEPTS
1. (i)
Wave Equation : The equation for a progressive wave travelling in the positive x
-direction is f t x^ y= sin2 7t ~ ~ ~ , V1 KJ where y is the displacemnet at poi
nt x, at time t, Ais the amplitude, T is the period and X is the wavelength. The
frequency is ~ and the velocity of the wave is \:v. The equation for a stationa
ry wave is 27tx^ 27rt y v 2Acos ^ J sin — Pitch, loudness and quality are the char
acteristics of a musical note. Pitch depends on the frequency. Loudness depends
on intensity and quality depends on the waveform ofthe constituent overtones. Re
sonance occurs when the forcingfrequencyis equal to the naturalfrequencyof a vib
rating body. [yP Velocity ofpropagation of sound in a gas = J , where D is the d
ensity ofthe gas and y is the ratio of specific heats. Vibrating air columns: ca
A r\rica or\r\ tVm fi-mam^ntal Vi fmmipnrv v In a pipe of length L closed at one
end, the funamental note hasaea afrequency f f= =— , where v is the
f
1
X
(ii) (iii) (iv) (v) 2. (i) (ii) 3. (i)
=
:
t
velocity of sound in air.
2
4L'
v Thefirstovertone f = — = 2fj JL/ Propagation of sound in solids : The velocity o
fpropagation of a longitudinal wave in a rod ofYoung's modulus Y and density p i
s given by v =- P The velocity of propagation of a transverse wave in a streched
string Vm where T is the tension in the string and m is the mass per unit lengt
h of the string. In a sonometer wire oflength L and mass per unit length m under
tension T vibrating in n loops n 2 L Vm
f f l =
IY
(ii)
[.1
(iii)
tilBansal Classes
Mechanical Waves
[6]
(iv)
Propagation of sound in gases fyP Laplace formula - J ~ where y is the ratio of
specific heats, P is the pressure and p is the density. v T _ 1273 + t v V T i 2
73
V = 1 = = 0 0
4, (i)
Doppler Effects: When a source of sound moves with a velocity v in a certain dir
ection, the wavelength decreases in front ofthe source and increases behind the
source. v-v v v A,' (in front) = —
s s g f >
r behind)^;f'=^~f Here v is the velocity of sound in air.
(
s
(ii) (a)
(b) (c) (d)
The apparent frequency = —-— f When the source is moving towards the observer and th
e observer is moving awayfromthe source, the apparent frequency V-Vp t s o v. v-
v When the source and the observer are moving towards each other.
s a s
5.
6
tilBansal Classes
l±^f . _ a V-V » When the source and observer are moving awayfromeach other, ~ o fs
v+v When the source is moving awayfromthe observer and the observer is moving to
wards the source v+ v a V + V,. o v s v Here all velocities are relation to the
medium. Loudness of sound : The loudness level B of sound is expressed in decibe
ls, I B = 10 log T where I is the intensity, I is a reference intensity. Beats :
When two tuning forks of close but differentfrequenciesf and f are vibrating si
multaneously at nearby places, a listener observes afluctuationin the intensity
of sound, called beats. The number of beats heard per second is fj - f .
f = s S 0 v Vs s f = v y a s 0
•*• c
0
s
0
s
2
2
Mechanical Waves
[6]
Q. 1 Two stationary sources Aand B are sounding notes offrequency680 Hz. An obse
rver movesfromAto B with a constant velocity u. If the speed of sound is 340 ms
, what must be the value ofu so that he hears 10 beats per second? Q. 2 Find the
intensity of sound wave whosefrequencyis 250 Hz. The displacement amplitude ofp
articles of the medium at this position is 1 10 ^ m. The density of the medium i
s 1 kg/m , bulk modulus of elasticity of the medium is 400 N/m . Q. 3 Two string
s A and B with |i = 2 kg/m and u = 8 kg/m respectively are joined in series and
kept on a horizontal table with both the endsfixed.The tension in the string is
200 N. If a pulse of amplitude 1 cm travels in Atowards the junction, thenfindth
e amplitude of reflected and transmitted pulse. Q.4 A parabolic pulse given by e
quation y (in cm) = 0.3 - 0. l(x- 5t) (y > 0) x in meter and t in second travell
ing in a uniform string. The pulse passes through a boundary beyond which its ve
locity becomes 2.5 m/s. What will be the amplitude ofpulse in this medium after
transmission? Q.5 A car moving towards a vertical wall sounds a horn. The driver
hears that the sound ofthe horn reflected from the cliff has a pitch half-octav
e higher than the actual sound. Find the ratio ofthe velocity ofthe car and the
velocity of sound. Q. 6 Thefirstovertone of a pipe closed at one end resonates w
ith the third harmonic of a stringfixedat its ends. The ratio ofthe speed of sou
nd to the speed of transverse wave travelling on the string is 2:1. Find the rat
io ofthe length ofpipe to the length of string. Q.7 A stretched uniform wire of
a sonometer between two fixed knife edges, when vibrates in its second harmonic
gives 1 beat per second with a vibrating tuning fork of frequency 200 Hz. Find t
he percentage change in the tension of the wire to be in unison with the tuning
fork. Q. 8 A train blowing its whistle moves with a constant velocity v awayfrom
an observer on the ground. The ratio of the naturalfrequencyofthe whistle to tha
t measured by the observer is found to be 1.2. Ifthe train is at rest and the ob
server moves awayfromit at the same velocity, thenfindthe ratio.
-1 x 3 2 2
EXERCISE-I
Q. 9 Q. 10 Q. 11 Q. 12 Q. 13
Tuning fork A when sounded with a tuning fork B of frequency 480 Hz gives 5 beat
s per second. When the prongs of A are loaded with wax, it gives 3 beats per sec
ond. Find the original frequency ofA. A sound wave offrequencyf propagating thro
ugh air with a velocity C, is reflectedfroma surface whi h is moving awayfromthe
fixedsource with a constant speed n. Find thefrequencyofthe reflected wave, meas
ured by the observer at the position of the source. The loudness level at a dist
ance Rfrom a long linear source of sound is found to be 40dB. At this point, the
amplitude of oscillations of air molecules is 0.01 cm. Thenfindthe loudness lev
el & amplitude at a point located at a distance' 1 OR' from the source. A sonome
ter wires resonates with a given tuning fork forming standing waves withfiveanti
nodes between the two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is suspendedfromthe wire. When
this mass is replaced by M, the wire resonates with the same tuning fork formin
g three antinodes for the same position ofbridges. Find the value of M. A car is
moving towards a huge wall with a speed = d 10, where c = speed of sound in sti
ll air. A wind is also blowing parallel to the velocity of the car in the same d
irection and with the same speed. If the car sounds a horn of frequency f, then
what is the frequency of the reflected sound of the horn heared by driver ofthe
car?
tilBansal Classes
Mechanical Waves
[6]
Q.14 A 40 cm long wire having a mass 3.2 gm and area of c.s. 1 mm is stretched b
etween the support 40.05 cm apart. In its fundamental mode. It vibrate with a fr
equency 1000/64 Hz. Find the young's modulus ofthe wire.
2
Q.l5 A steel rod having a length of 1 m is fastened at its middle. Assuming youn
g's modulus to be 2 x 10 Pa. and density to be 8 gm/cm findthe fundamentalfreque
ncyofthe longitudinal vibration and frequency offirst overtone.
11 3
Q. 16 A sound source of small size produces a spherical sound wave with a freque
ncy of 3 kHz in air. At a distance r, = 100 m from the source, the sound loudnes
s level is L, = 60 dB. Find the sound loudness level at a distance of r,, = 200
m dB and the distance at which the sound stops being heard km. Q.17 Two identica
l sounds Aand B reach a point in the same phase. The resultant sound is C. The l
oudness of C is n dB higher than the loudness ofA. Find the value of n, Q. 18 So
und ofwavelength A, passes through a Quincke's tube, which is adjusted to give a
maximum intensity I . Find the distance through the sliding tube should be move
d to give an intensity I /2.
0 0
Q. 19 In a resonance-column experiment, a long tube, open at the top, is clamped
vertically. By a separate device, water level inside the tube can be moved up o
r down. The section of the tubefromthe open end to the water level act as a clos
ed organ pipe. A vibrating tuning fork is held above the open end, and the secon
d resonances occur when the water level is 24.1 cm and 74.1 cm repsectively belo
w the open end. Find the diameter of the tube. [Hint: end correction is 0.3 d] Q
. 20 In a mixture of gases, the average number of degrees offreedomper molecule
is 6. The mis speed of the molecules of the gas is c. Find the velocity of sound
in the gas. Q. 21 A sonometer wire of length 114 cm is stretched between twofix
edpoints. Two bridges, that should be mounted to divide the wire into three segm
ents, such that their fundamental frequencies are in the ratio 1 : 3 : 4 must be
mounted at distance and from onefixedend of the wire. Q. 22 Afixedsource of sou
nd emitting a certainfrequencyappears as f when the observer is approaching the
source with speed v and frequency f when the observer recedes from the source wi
th the same speed. Find the frequency of the source. Q.23 A, B and C are three t
uning forks. Frequency of A is 350Hz. Beats produced by A and B are 5 per second
and by B and C are 4 per second. When a wax is put on A beat frequency between
A and B is 2Hz and between A and C is 6Hz. Then,findthe frequency of B and C res
pectively.
tilBansal Classes
Mechanical Waves
[6]
Q, 1 Thefigureshows a snap photograph ofa vibrating string at t = 0. The particl
e P is observed moving \ up with velocity 2071 cm/s. The angle made by string wi
th x-axis at P is 6°. (a) Find the direction in which the wave is moving V^(inio~
m) (b) the equation ofthe wave (c) the total energy carried by the wave per cycl
e ofthe string, assuming that p, the mass per unit length of the string = 50 gm/
m, Q.2 A uniform rope oflength L and mass m is held at one end and whirled in a
horizontal circle with angular velocity ©. Ignore gravity. Find the time required
for a transverse wave to travelfromone end ofthe rope to the other. Q.3 A symmet
rical triangular pulse of maximum height 0.4 m and total length 1 m is moving in
the positive x-direction on a string on which the wave speed is 24 m/s. At t =
0 the pulse is entirely located between x = 0 and x = 1 m. Draw a graph of the t
ransverse velocity of particle of string versus time at x =+1 m.
3 (in 10 m 2
EXERCISE-II
Q.4
A uniform string240 cm long maintains a standing wave, with the points on the st
ring at which displacements of the amplitude equalling 3 V2 mm occur at 20 cm in
terval along the length of the string. Find: (a) the order ofthe overtone which
these oscillations represent (b) the maximum amplitude on the wire. Q.5 A steel
wire 8 x 10" m in diameter isfixedto a support at one end and is wrapped round a
cylindrical tuning peg 5 mm in diameter at the other end. The length ofthe wire
between the peg and the support is 0.06 m. The wire is initially kept taut but
without any tension. What will be the fundamentalfrequencyof vibration ofthe wir
e if it is tightened by giving the peg a quarter of a turn? Density of steel = 7
800 kg/m ,Y of steel = 20 x 10 N/m . Q. 6 The displacement ofthe medium in a sou
nd wave is given by the equation ;y = Acos(ax + bt) where A a&b are positive con
stants. The wave is reflected by an obstacle situated at x = 0. The intensity of
the reflected wave is 0.64 times that of the incident wave. (a) what are the wa
velength &frequencyofthe incident wave, (b) write the equation for the reflected
wave. (c) in the resultant wave formed after reflection,findthe maximum & minim
um values of the particle speeds in the medium.
4 3 10 2 1
Q.7
The harmonic wave y = (2.0 x 1Q- ) cos7C (2.Ox - 50t) travels along a string tow
ard a boundary it x=0 with a second string. The wave speed on the second string
is 50 m/s. Write expresions for reflected and transmitted waves. Assume SI units
. Q 8 In a stationary wave pattern that forms as a result of reflection ofwavesf
roman obstacle the ratio ofthe amplitude at an antinode and a node is (3= 1.5. W
hat percentage ofthe energy passes across the obstacle? Q.9(a) Astanding wave in
second overtone is maintained in a open organ pipe of length /. The distance be
tween consecutive displacement node and pressure node is . (b) Two consecutive o
vertones produced by a narrow air column closed at one end and open at the other
are 750Hz and 1050Hz. Then the fundamental frequency from the column is . (c) A
standing wave of frequency 1100Hz in a column of methane at 20°C produces nodes t
hat are 20 cm apart. What is the ratio ofthe heat capacity at constant pressure
to that at constant volume. Q.10 An open organ pipefilledwith air has a fundamen
tal frequency 500Hz. Thefirstharmonic of another organ pipe closed at one end an
d filled with carbon dioxide has the same frequency as that of the first harmoni
c of the open organ pipe. Calculate the length of each pipe. Assume that the vel
ocity of sound in air and in carbondioxide to be 330 and 264 m/s respectively.
i 3
tilBansal Classes
Mechanical Waves
[6]
Q. 11 A string, 25cm long, having amass of 0.25 gm/cm, is under tension. Apipe c
losed at one end is 40cm long. When the string is set vibrating in its first ove
rtone, and the air in the pipe in its fundamental frequency, 8 beats/sec are hea
rd. It is observed that decreasing the tension in the string, decreases the beat
frequency. Ifthe speed of sound in air is 320 m/s,findthe tension in the string
. Q.12 A metal rod of length I - 100 cmis clamped at two points. Distance of eac
h clampfromnearer end is a=30cm. If density and Young's modulus ofelasticity ofr
od material are p = 9000 kg m" and Y= 144 GPa respectively, calculate minimum an
d next higherfrequencyofnatural longitudinal oscillations ofthe rod. Q.13 Two sp
eakers are driven by the same oscillator with frequency of 200 Hz. They are loca
ted 4 m apart on a vertical pole. A man walks straight towards the lower speaker
in a direction perpendicular to the pole, as shown in figure. (a) Ho w many tim
es will he hear a minimum in sound intensity, and (b) how far is hefromthe pole
at these moments? Take the speed of sound to be 330 m/s, and ignore any sound re
flections coming off the ground. Q.14 A cylinder ABC consists of two chambers 1
and 2 which contains A B C two different gases. The wall C is rigid but the wall
s Aand B are thin diaphragms. A vibrating tuning fork approaches the wall A with
velocity u=30 m/s and air columns in chamber 1 and 2 vibrates with v,=1100m/s • • .
. • , • • • . ,v,=300Vse • minimum frequency such that there is node (displacement) at B
and ,• . • * • *, * o antinode (displacement) at A. Find (i) the fundamentalfrequencyo
f air column, 0.5 m 1.0 m (ii) Find thefrequencyoftuning fork. Assume velocity o
f sound in the first and second chamber be 1100 m/s and 300 m/s respectively. Ve
locity of sound in air 330 m/s. Q.15 A source emits sound waves of frequency 100
0 Hz. The source moves to the right with a speed of 32 m/s relative to ground. O
n the right a reflecting surface moves towards left with a speed of 64 m/s relat
ive to the ground. The speed of sound in air is 332 m/s. Find (a) the wavelength
of sound in air by source (b) the number ofwaves arriving per second which meet
the reflecting surface, (c) the speed of reflected waves. (d) the wavelength of
reflected waves. Q.16 A supersonic jet plane moves parallel to the ground at sp
eed v=0.75 mach (1 mach = speed of sound). The frequency of its engine sound is
v = 2 kHz and the height of the jat plane is h = 1.5 km. At some instant an obse
rver on the ground hears a sound offrequencyv=2 v , Find the instant prior to th
e instant of hearing when the sound wave received by the observer was emitted by
the jet plane. Velocity of sound wave in the condition of observer=340 m/s. Q. 1
7 A train oflength/is moving with'a constant speed v along a circular track ofra
dius R, The engine ofthe train emits a whistle offrequencyf. Find the frequency
heard by a guard at the rear end of the train, Q.18 A bullet travels horizontall
y at 660 m/s at a height of 5 mfroma man. How far is the bulletfromthe man when
he hears its whistle? Velocity of sound in air = 340 m/s.
3
•
• • • • . : .
0
0
tilBansal Classes
Mechanical Waves
[6]
EXERCISE-III
Q.l A metallic rod of length 1 m is rigidly clamped at its mid-point. Longitudin
al stationary waves are set up in the rod in such a way that there are two nodes
on either side of the mid-point. The amplitude of an antinode is 2* 10 m. Write
the equation of motion at a point 2 cmfromthe mid-point and those of the consti
tuent waves in the rod. [Young's modulus = 2 x 10 Nm" , density = 8000 Kg m~ ].
' [JEE'94, 6] Q. 2 A whistle emitting a sound offrequency440 Hz is tied to a str
ing of 1.5 m length and rotated with an angular velocity of20 rad s in the horiz
ontal plane . Calculate the range of frequencies heard by an observer stationed
at a large distancefromthe whistle. [JEE '96,3 ] Q. 3 Select the correct alterna
tive: [JEE ' 9 6 , 2 x 2 - 4 ] (i) The extension in a string, obeying Hooke's la
w is x. The speed ofwave in the stretched string is v. If the extension in the s
tring is increased to 1.5 x, the speed ofwave will be
_6 11 2 3 _1
(ii)
An open pipe is suddenly closed at one end with the result that the frequency of
third harmonic ofthe closed pipe is found to be higher by 100 Hz than the funda
mentalfrequencyofthe open pipe. The fundamentalfrequencyof the open pipe is: (A)
200 Hz (B) 300 Hz (C) 240 Hz (D) 480 Hz Q.4 A whistle giving out 450 Hz approac
hes a stationary observer at a speed of 33 m/s. Thefrequencyheard by the observe
r in Hz is : [JEE '97,1 ] (A) 409 (B) 429 (C) 517 (D) 500 Q. 5 The first overton
e of an open organ pipe beats with the first overtone of a closed organ pipe wit
h a beat frequency of 2.2 Hz. The fundamentalfrequencyofthe closed organ pipe is
110 Hz. Find the lengths of the pipes. [JEE'97, 5] Q.6 A place progressive wave
offrequency 25 Hz, amplitude 2.5 * 10~ m&initial phase zero propagates along th
e (-ve) x-direction with a velocity of300 m/s. At any instant, the phase differe
nce between the oscillations at two points 6 m apart along the line ofpropagatio
n is & the corresponding amplitude difference is m. [JEE '97, 2] Q.7 A band play
ing music at afrequency/ is moving towards a wall at a speed v . A motorist is f
ollowing the band with a speed v . Ifv is the speed of sound, obtain an expressi
on for the beat frequency hear. by the motorist. [JEE '97,5] Q. 8 A travelling i
n a stretched string is described by the equation y = A sin (kx - cot). The maxi
mum particle velocity is: [JEE '97,1] (A) A© (B) <n/k (C) dffl/dk (D) x/t Q. 9 Sel
ect the correct alternative(s). [JEE 98, 2 + 2 + 2] (i) The (x, y) co-ordinates
of the corners of a square plate are (0, 0) (L, 0) (L, L) & (0, L). The edges of
the plate are clamped & transverse standing waves are set up in it Ifu (x, y) de
notes t he displacement ofthe plate at the point (x, y) at some instant of time,
the possible expressions) for u is/are: (a=positive constant)
5 b m !
(A) 1.22v
(B) 0.61v
(C) 1.50v
(D)0.75v
(A) a c o s l ^ J cosl £ I
. fnx] . f2Tty^| (C) asinj^— j sin(j—J
/ 7ty \
(B) a s i n [ - J s i n ^ J
K X^
( 7Z Y^
fTtyî (D) a c o s(^ — .J sin[ — '
tilBansal Classes
Mechanical Waves
[6]
(ii) (iii)
Q.10 (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Q, 11 Q. 12 (a) (b) Q.13
Q.14 Q.15 Q.16
Q.17
tilBansal Classes
A string oflength 0.4 m & mass 10~ kg is tightly clamped at its ends. The tensio
n in the string is 1.6 N. Identical wave pulses are produced at one end at equal
intervals of time, At. The minimum value of At which allows constructive interf
erence between successive pulses is : (A) 0.05 s (B) 0.10 s (C) 0.20 s (D) 0.40
s A transverse sinusoidal wave of amplitude a, wavelength A &frequencyf is trave
lling on a stretched v string. The maximum speed of any point on the string is —,
where v is speed ofpropagation of the wave. If a = 10~ m and v = 10 ms , then A
& f are given by: 10 (A) A = 2 7 t x l 0 m (B) A=10~ m (C) fr= — Hz (D)f=10 Hz The
air column in a pipe closed at one end is made to vibrate in its second overton
e by a tuning fork of frequency 440 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 330 ms . En
d corrections may be neglected. Let P denote the mean pressure at any point in t
he pipe & A P the maximum amplitude ofpressure variation. Find the length L ofth
e air column. [JEE '98,2 + 2 + 2 + 2] What is the amplitude of pressure variatio
n at the middle ofthe column ? What are the maximum & minimum pressures at the o
pen end ofthe pipe. What are the maximum & minimum pressures at the closed end o
f the pipe ? In hydrogen spectrum the wvaeiength ofH line is 656 nm, whereas in
the spectrum of a distant galaxy, H line wavelength is 706 nm. Estimated speed o
f the galaxy with respect to earth is, [JEE '99,2] (A) 2 x 10 m/s (B) 2 x 10 m/s
(C) 2 x 10 m/s (D) 2 x 10 m/s Alongwire PQR is made byjoining two wires PQ and
QR of equal radii. PQ has length 4,8 m and mass 0.06 kg. QRhas length 2.56 m and
mass 0.2kg. The wire PQR is under a tension of SON. A sinusoidal wave-pulse of
amplitude 3.5 cm is sent along the wire PQ from the end P. No power is dissipate
d during the propagation of the wave-pulse. Calculate the time taken by the wave
-pulse to reach the other end R ofthe wire, and the amplitude of the reflected a
nd transmitted wave-pulses after the incident wave-pulse crosses the joint Q. [J
EE "99, 4 + 6] As a wave progagates: (A) the wave intensity remains constant for
a plane wave (B) the wave intensity decreases as the inverse ofthe distancefrom
the sounce for a spherical wave (C) the wave intensity decreases as the inverse
square ofthe distancefromthe source for a spherical Wave (D) total power ofthe s
herical wave over the spherical survace centered at the source remains constant
at all times. [JEE'99,3] y (x, t) = 0.8/[(4x + 5t) + 5] represents a moving puls
e, where x & y are in meter and t in second. Then: (A) pulse is moving in +x dir
ection (B) in2sitwill travel a distance of 2,5 m (C) its maximum displacement is
0.16 m (D) it is a symmetric pulse. [JEE '99,3] In a wave motion y = a sin (kx
- ©t), y can represent: (A) electric field (B) magnetic field (C) displacement (D)
pressure [JEE'99,3] Standing waves can be produced : • [JEE '99,3] (A) on a strin
g clamped at both the ends (B) on a string clamped at one end and free at the ot
her (C) when incident wave gets refl ectedfroma wall (D) when two identical wave
s with a phase difference of p are moving in same direction A train moves toward
s a stationary observer with speed 34m/s. The train sounds a whistle and its fre
quency registered by the observer is fj. Ifthe train's speed is reduced to 17m/s
, thefrequencyregistered is f . Ifthe speed ofsound is 340m/s then the ratio fj/
f is [JEE 2000 (Scr), 1] (A) 18/19 (B) 1/2 (C) 2 (D) 19/18
2 3 -1 3 _2 2 4 -1 0 0 a a 8 7 6 5 2 2 2
Mechanical Waves
[6]
Q. 18 Two monatomic ideal gases 1 and 2 ofmolecular masses m and m respectively
are enclosed in separate container kept at the same temperature. The ratio ofthe
speed of sound in gas 1 to that in gas 2 is given by Im mj m (C)— ( D ) — [JEE 2000
(Scr)]
t 2 2 2
Q. 19 Two vibrating strings ofthe same material but lengths L and 2L have radii
2r and r respectively. They are stretched under the same tension. Both the strin
gs vibrate in their fundamental modes, the one of length L withfrequencyf, and t
he other withfrequencyf,. The ratio fj/f is given by (A) 2 (B)4 (C) 8 (D) 1 [JEE
2000 (Scr), 1] Q. 20 A 3.6 m long vertical pipe resonates with a source of freq
uency 212.5 Hz when water level is at certain heights in the pipe. Find the heig
hts ofwater level (from the bottom of the pipe) at which resonances occur. Negle
ct end correction. Now, the pipe isfilledto a height H (~ 3.6 m). A small hole i
s drilled very close to its bottom and water is allowed to leak. Obtain an expre
ssion for the rate of fall of water level in the pipe as a function of H. If the
radii of the pipe and the hole are 2 x 10 m and 1 x 10~ m respectively, calcula
te the time interval between the occurence offirsttwo resonances. Speed of sound
in air is 340 m/s and g = 10 m/s . [JEE 2000, 10] Q. 21 The ends of a stretched
wire of length L arefixedat x=0 and x = L. In one experiment, the displacement
of the wire is y1 = A sin(7tx/L) sin cot and energy is Ej and in another experim
ent its displacement is y =Asin(2rac/L) sin 2cot and energy is E . Then [JEE 200
1 (Scr)] (A)E = E (B) E = 2Ej " (C) E,-4E (D)E = 16Ej Q. 22 Two pulses in a stre
tched string whose centres are initially 8 cm apart are moving towards each othe
r as shown infigure.The speed of each pulse is 2 cm/s. After 2 seconds, the tota
l energy of the pulses will be (A) zero (B) purely kinetic rem (C) purely potent
ial (D) partly kinetic and partly potential [JEE 2001 (Scr)] Q. 23 A boat is tra
velling in a river with a speed of 10 m/s along the stream flowing with a speed
2 m/s. From this boat, a sound transmitter is lowered into the river through a r
igid support. The wavelength of the sound emittedfromthe transmitter inside the
water is 14.45 mm. Assume that attenuation of sound in water and air is negligib
le. (a) What will be the frequency detected by a receiver kept inside the river
downstream ? (b) The transmitter and the receiver are now pulled up into air. Th
e air is blowing with a speed 5 m/sec in th; direction opposite the river stream
. Determine thefrequencyofthe sound detected by the receiver. (Temperature of th
e air and water = 20°C; Density of river water = 10 Kg/m ; Bulk modulus of the wat
er = 2.088 x 10 Pa; Gas constant R = 8.31 J/mol-K; Mean molecular mass of air =
28.8 10" kg/mol; Cp/C for air - 1.4) [JEE 2001, 5 4 5] Q. 24 A siren placed at a
railway platform is emitting sound offrequency5 kHz. A passenger sitting in a m
oving train A records afrequencyof 5.5 kHz while the train approaches the siren.
During his return j ourney in a different train B he records a frequency of 6.0
kHz while approaching the same siren. The ratio of the velocity of trainB to th
at oftrain Ais [JEE 2002 (Scr), 3] (A) 242/252 (B)2 (C) 5/6 (D) 11/6 Q. 2 5 A so
nometer wire resonates with a given tuning fork forming standing waves withfivea
ntinodes between the two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is suspended from the wire.
When this mass is replaced by a mass M, the wire resonates with the same tuning
fork forming three antinodes for the same positions ofthe bridges. The value of
M is [JEE 2002 (Scr), 3] (A) 25 kg (B) 5 kg (C) 12.5 kg (D) 1/25 kg
2 -2 3 2 2 2 2 ! 2 1 2 M M 3 3 9 x 3 v
tilBansal Classes
Mechanical Waves
[6]
Q.26 Two narrow cylindrical pipes A and B have the same length. Pipe Ais open at
both ends and isfilledwith a monoatomic gas ofmalar mass M . Pipe B is open at
one end and closed at the other end, and is filled with a diatomic gas of molar
mass M . Both gases are at the same temperature. (a) Ifthefrequencyof the second
harmonic ofthe fundamental mode in pipe A is equal to thefrequencyof the third
harmonic ofthe fundamental mode in pipe B, determine the value of M /M . (b) Now
the open end of pipe B is also closed (so that the pipe is closed at both ends)
. Find the ratio of the fundamentalfrequencyin pipe Ato that in pipe B. [JEE 200
2,3 + 2] Q.27 A police van moving with velocity 22 m/s and emitting sound offreq
uency176Hz, follows a motor cycle in turn is moving towards a stationary car and
awayfromthe police van. The stationary car is emitting frequency 165 Hz. If mot
orcyclist does not hear any beats then his velocity is [JEE 2003 (Scr)] (A) 22 m
/s (B) 24 m/s (C) 20 m/s (D) 18 m/s Q.28 A cylindrical tube when sounded with a
tuning fork gives,firstresonance when length of air column is 0.1 and gives seco
nd resonance when the length of air column is 0.3 5 m. Then end correction is (A
) 0.025 m (B) 0.020 m (C) 0.018 m (D) 0.012 m [JEE 2003 (Scr)] Q.29 A stringe be
tween x = 0 and x = /vibrates in fundamental mode. The amplitude A, tension T an
d mass per unit length p is given. Find the total energy ofthe string. [JEE 2003
]
A B A B
Q.30 A tuning fork offrequency480 Hz resonates with a tube closed at one end ofl
ength, 16 cm and diameter 5 cm in fundamental mode. Calculate velocity of sound
in air. [JEE 2003] Q.31 A closed organ pipe of length L and an open organ pipe c
ontain gases of densities p and p respectively. The compressibility ofgases are
equal in both the pipes. Both the pipes are vibrating in theirfirstovertone with
same frequency. The length of the open organ pipe is [JEE' 2004 (Scr)] L 4L 4L
fp7 4L fp7
t 2
x=0
x^l
( A )
Q.32 A source of sound of frequency 600 Hz is placed inside water. The speed of
sound in water is 1500m/s and in air it is 300m/'s. Thefrequencyof sound recorde
d by an observer who is standing in air is (A) 200 Hz (B) 3000 Hz (C) 120 Hz (D)
600Hz [JEE2004 (Scr)] Q.33 A stringfixedat both ends is in resonance in its 2nd
harmonic with a tuning fork offrequency f,. Now its one end becomes free. If th
e frequency of the tuning fork is increased slowly from f, then again a resonanc
e is obtained when thefrequencyis f . Ifin this case the string vibrates in nth
harmonic then
2
i
WT
(
C
)
t ^
WTVft
(D) n = 5, fi, f, [JEE 2005 (Scr)] Q.34 In a resonance column method, resonance
occurs at two successive level of /,=30.7 cm and l = 63.2 cmusing a tuning fork
of f = 512 Hz. What is the maximum error in measuring speed of sound using relat
ions v = f X & X = 2(/2 -1 (A) 256 cm/sec (B) 92 cm/sec (C) 128 cm/sec (D) 102.4
cm/sec [JEE 2005 (Scr)] Q.35 A whistling train approaches a junction. An observ
er standing at junction observers thefrequencyto be 2.2 KHz and 1.8 KHz of the a
pproaching and the receding train. Find the speed of the train (speed sound = 30
0 m/s). [JEE 2005] Q.36 A transverse harmonic disturbance is produced in a strin
g. Themaximum transverse velocity is 3 m/sand maximum transverse acceleration is
90 m/s . Ifthe wave velocity is 20 m/s thenfindthe waveform. [JEE 2005]
2 1 2 2 2 2
(A)n = 3 , f = | f
(B) n = 3, f = fj
(C) n = 5, f = | f,
tilBansal Classes
Mechanical Waves
[6]
ANSWER KEY
Q.l Q.5 Q.10 2.5 ms1:5
1
Q.2 Q.6
9 2
71 X10
2
EXERCISER
2
-9
1:1
W/m Q.7
Q.3 1%
A = - - c m , \ = - cm Q.4 0.2 cm Q.8 1.25 Q.9 485 Hz
r
1
2
Q.ll 30 dB, 10VlO nm C+v Q.14 1 x 10 Nm Q. 15 2.5 kHz, 7.5 kHz Q. 16 54,100 Q.17
6 Q.18 X/8 Q.20 2c/3 Q.l
Q 2
Q.12 25kg
Q.13 l l f / 9
Q.21 72, 96 or 18, 42
3
EXERCISE-II
f
Q.19 3 cm f +f Q.22 - — Q.23 345, 341 or 349 Hz
L
(a) negative x; (b)y = 4x10' sin IOOTC 3 t + 0 . 5 x + — I (x, y in meter); (c) 12
% x 10~ J I 4 )
2 5
, \
Q.4 (a)5, 11(b) 6mm; 3V2 mm Q.5 10800Hz Q.6 (a) 2 7t/a, b/2n, (b) y = ± 0.8 A cos
(ax-bt), (c) max =1.8 b A, min. = 0, Q.7 (a) 6.67 x lO" cos % (2.0x + 501) ; (b)
2.67 10" cos n (1. Ox- 50t) SI units Q.8 96% Q.9 (a) //6; (b) 150 Hz; (c)1.28 Q
.10 33 cm and 13.2 cm Q.ll 67.6 N Q.12 10kHz, 30kHz Q.13 (a) 2; (b) 9.28 mand 1.
99 m Q.14 1650 Hz, 1500 Hz Q. 15 (a) 0.3 m,(b) 1320, (c) 332 m/s, (d) 0.2 m Q.16
5.9 sec Q.17 f Q.18 9.7 m
2 4 x 3
it
19.2m/s
Q 3
V'r 1/48 sec 1/24 sec
_
-19.2m/s
Q.l y=2* 10" sin(0. l7i)cos (25000 7rt +0), for 0=0: y -10" sin (5flx-250007it),
y =10 sin (5toc+250007rt) Q /max = 484 Hz, f = 403.3 Hz Q.3 (i) A, (ii) A Q.4 D
Q.5 L,-0.75 m; L = 0.99 m or 1.006 m Q.6 urad, 0m (v v Q.7 2v~2 +~~2 ) f Q.8 A
Q.9 (i)B,C(ii)B,(iii)AC
6 t 6 2 -6 2 m i n o b m
EXER CIS E-I11
V
- v
b
Q.10 ( i ) L ^ r n , ( u ) ^ , ( i i i ) P = P = P , ( i v ) P = V A P , P ^ P -
A P
m a x m i 0 m x 0 0 r r 2 1 2 1
0
Q.ll B Q.17 D
(4-2^3)
Q. 12 (a)Time = 140ms, (b) A = V + V, A- = 1.5 cm; A = ^ + v A- = 2cm Q.13 A,C,D
Q.14 B, C,D Q.15 A, B, C Q.16 A, B, C
Q.18
Q.21 C Q.31 C
B
Q.19
Q.22 B
3
D
Q.20
Q.23 (a) 100696 Hz (b) 103038 Hz Q.28 A Q.33 C
h = 3.2, 2.4, 1.6, 0.8, 0 ; v = 5 x 1 0 ~
3
Q.24 B
2
J m ; A t = 80
Q.25 A
Q.26 (a) 2.116, (b) —
Q.27 A
Q.29 E = Q.34 D
A TC T
2
4 /
Q.30 336 m/s
s
Q.32 D 3 Q.36 y = (10 cm) sin ( 301 ± — x + <J>)
Q.35V = 30m/s
tilBansal Classes
Mechanical Waves
[6]
§ BANSALCLASSES TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XII (ALL)
MODERN PHYSICS
QUESMOa MMEJM
QUESTION FOR SHORT ATOMIC
ANSWER
PHYSICS
Q.l Q. 2 Q. 3 Q. 4 Q. 5 Q. 6 Q.7 Q. 8 Q. 9
In the photoelectric effect, why does the existence of a cutofffrequency speak i
n favour of the photon theory and against the wave theory? Explain the statement
that one's eyes could not detect faint starlight if light were not particle-lik
e. How can a photon energy be given by E = h/when the very presence of the frequ
ency/in the formula implies that light is a wave? The momentum p of a photon is
given by p = hIX. Why is it that c, the speed oflight, does not appear in this e
xpression? Given that E = h/'for a photon, the Doppler shift in frequency of rad
iation from a receding light source would seem to indicate a reduced energy for
the emitted photons. Is this in fact true? If so, what happened to the conservat
ion of energy principle? Any series of atomic hydrogen yet to be observed will p
robably be found in what region of the spectrum? Can a hydrogen atom absorb a ph
oton whose energy exceeds its binding energy( 13.6 eV)? Only a relatively small
number ofBalmer lines can be observed from laboratory discharge tubes, whereas a
large number are observed in stellar spectra. Explain this in terms ofthe small
density, high temperature, and large volume of gases in stellar atmospheres. Wn
at is the origin ofthe cutoffwavelength X offigure shown? Why is it an important
clue to the photon nature ofx rays?
mm
e u a 
30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Wavelength (pm)
Q. 10 Can atomic hydrogen be caused to emit x rays? If so, describe how. Ifnot,
why not? Q.ll Why is it that B ohr theory, which does not work very well even fo
r helium (Z = 2), gives such a good account ofthe characteristic x-ray spectra o
fthe elements, or at least of that portion that originates deep within the atom?
Q.12 The ionization potential of hydrogen is 13.6 V. Yet to obtain discharge in
a cathode ray tubefilledwith hydrogen, a very high voltage ( ~10 V) has to be a
pplied across the tube. Explain this clearly. Also explain why the gas must be a
t low pressure to obtain discharge.
4
(fe Bansal Classes
Question Bank on Modern Physics
12]
Q.13 X-rays are produced when a fast electron hits a proper target. What happens
to the electron? Q.14 Why does the tail of a comet always point away from the s
un? Q.15 A neutron pion at rest decays into two gamma photons. 7t° —-> y + y Why can
not a single photon be born? What conservation law is in contradiction with it?
Q.16 What is so special about e/m rather than e end m separately? Q.17 Why is it
advisable to view a TV screen from a distance of about ten feet? Q. 18 The elec
trical conductivity of a gas increases when X-rays or y-rays pass through it. Ex
plain this phenomenon. Q.19 In photoelectric emission exchange of energy takes p
lace among... (photon and electron/' photon, electron and lattice). Q.20 The thr
eshold frequencies for photoemission for three metals numbered 1,2,3 are respect
ively v v v and Vj > v > v . An incident radiation of frequency v > v ... cause
photoemissionfrom3 but... cause photoemissionfrom1 (fill in the gaps with may, m
ay not / will certainly).
p 3 2 3 0 2
NUCLEAR
PHYSICS
Q. 1 Why does the relative importance ofthe Coulomb force compared to the strong
nuclear force increase at large mass numbers? Q.2 Q. 3 In your body, are there
more neutrons than protons? More protons than electrons? Discuss Why is the bind
ing energy per nucleon (seefigure)low at low mass numbers? At high mass numbers?
Jnisiqp —ii.. ~5 Br 120* f iV i
j
r-^stability
Region of greatest Fission
!H . i— 0 20 40
2
' 1 60 80 100 120 MO 161) 180 200 220 240
Q.4 Q.5
Aradioactive nucleus can emit a positron, e . This corresponds to a proton in th
e nucleus being converted to a neutron The mass ofa neutron, however, is greater
than that ofa proton. How thai can positron emission occur? In beta decay the e
mitted electrons form a continuous spectrum, but in alpha decay the alpha partic
les form a discrete spectrum. What difficulties did this cause in the explanatio
n ofbeta decay, and how were these difficultiesfinallyovercome?
+
Mass number, A
(fe Bansal Classes
3]
Q.6
How do neutrinos differ from photons? Each has zero charge and (presumably) zero
rest mass and travels at the speed oflight. Q.7 In radioactive dating with U, h
ow do you get around the fact that you do not know how much U was present in the
rocks to begin with? (Hint: What is the ultimate decay product of U?) Q.8 If it
is so much harder to get a nucleon out of a nucleus than to get an electron out
of an atom, why try? Q.9 In the generalized equation for thefissionof U by ther
mal neutrons, U + n -> X+Y + bn, do you expect the Q of the reaction to depend o
n the identity of X and Y? Q.10 The half-life of U is 7.0 x 10 y. Discuss the as
sertion that ifit had turned out to be shorter by a factor of 10 or so, there wo
uld not be any atomic bombs today. Q.ll The binding energy curve offiguretells u
s that any nucleus more massive than A « 5 6 can release energy by the fission pro
cess. Only very massive nuclides seem to do so, however. Why cannot lead, for ex
ample, release energy by the fission process?
238 238 238 235 235 235 8
Region of greatest ^"stability
J-'usiqp "'"Jr 5
Fission
7 He
4
Bp
B r I20g 1 I 5 7
f l c
'Âu
2 3 9
Pu
• H 0
. .i 20 40 60 80 1 00 120 140 160 180 200 220 240
i
— i——i——i——i—
Mass number, A
Q.12 Elements up to mass number w 5 6 are created by thermonuclear fusion in the
cores of stars. Why are heavier elements not also created by this process? Q.13
Which would generate more radioactive waste products: - afissionreactor or a fu
sion reactor? Q. 14 How can Becquerel rays, i.e., the combination of a-, P- and
y-rays, be separated? Q.15 When a nucleus undergoes a-decay, is the product atom
electrically neutral? In (3-decay? Q.16 Experimental results in radioactivity s
how small variations from the results predicted by theory. Explain this. Q.17 If
a nucleus emits only a y-rays photon, does its mass number change? Does its mas
s change?
(fe Bansal Classes
4]
Q. 1 Let n and n be respectively the number of photons emitted by a red bulb and
a blue bulb of equal power in a given time. £ (A)n = n (B)n <n (C)n >n (D) data i
nsufficient Q.2 10~ W of 5000 A light is directed on a photoelectric cell. If th
e current in the cell is 0.16 pA, the £ percentage of incident photons which produ
ce photoelectrons, is (A) 0.4% (B) .04% (C) 20% (D) 10% Q.3 A proton and an elec
tron are accelerated by same potential difference have de-Broglie wavelength Xp
and A,. (A) Xe = Xp (B) < (C) Xe > X (D) none of these. Q ,4 Two electrons are m
oving with the same speed v. One electron enters a region ofuniform electric fie
ld while the other enters a region ofuniform magneticfield,then after sometime i
fthe de-Broglie wavelengths of the two are X{ and X2, then: (A) = X (B)Aj > X (C
) X < X (D) X > X or X < X Q.5 In a photo-emissive cell, with exciting wavelengt
h X, the maximum kinetic energy of electron is K. If the 3X exciting wavelength
is changed to — the kinetic energy ofthe fastest emitted electron will be: (A) 3K/
4 (B) 4K/3 (C) less than 4K/3 (D) greater than 4K/3 Q.6 If the frequency of ligh
t in a photoelectric experiment is doubled, the stopping potential will (A) be d
oubled (B) halved (C) become more than doubled (D) become less than double Q.7 A
n electron with initial kinetic energy of 100 eV is acceleration through a poten
tial difference of 5 0 V Now the de-Broglie wavelength of electron becomes
r b r b r b r b 3 e p
2
2
l
2
1
2
l
2
^ Q.8
(A)lA
(B)VL5A
2
(C) V3 A
2
(D) 12.27 A
12
Q. 9
£
If h Planck's is SI (A) is10" h constant (B)h system, the momentum of ahphoton o
fwavelength 0.01 A is: (C)10 ^(D) 10 h The stopping potential for the photo elec
trons emitted from a metal surface of work function 1.7 eV is 10.4 V. Identify t
he energy levels corresponding to the transitions in hydrogen atom which will re
sult in emission ofwavelength equal to that ofincident radiation for the above p
hotoelectric effect (A)n = 3 to 1 (B)n = 3 to 2 (C)n=2tol (D)n = 4 t o l
Q.10 When a photon oflight collides with a metal surface, number of electrons, (
if any) coming out is (A) only one (B) only two (C) infinite (D) depends upon fa
ctors Q. 11 Two radioactive material Aj and ^ have decay constants of 10 X0 and
X0. If initially they have same number ofnuclei, the ratio of number of their un
decayed nuclei will be (1/e) after a time
£
()r
A
L
^ ^
1
(> i s :
1
c
1
dl Bansal Classes
Question Bank on Modern Physics i
[5]
£
Q.12 The frequency and the intensity of a beam oflight falling on the surface of
photoelectric material are increased by a factor of two. This will: (A) increas
e the maximum energy of the photoelectrons, as well as photoelectric current by
a factor of two. (B) increase the maximum kinetic energy of the photo electrons
and would increase the photoelectric current by a factor of two. (C) increase th
e maximum kinetic energy ofthe photoelectrons by a factor of greater than two an
d will have no effect on the magnitude ofphotoelectric current produced. (D) not
produce any effect on the kinetic energy ofthe emitted electrons but will incre
ase the photoelectric current by a factor of two. Q Jo Light comingfroma dischar
ge tubefilledwith hydrogen falls on the cathode ofthe photoelectric cell. The wo
rk function ofthe surface of cathode is 4eV Which one ofthe following values of
the anode voltage (in Volts) with respect to the cathode will likely to make the
photo current zero. (A) - 4 (B)-6 (C) - 8 (D)-10 Q. 14 A point source of ligth
is used in a photoelectric effect. Ifthe source is removed fartherfromthe emitti
ng metal, the stopping potential: (A) will increase (B) will decrease (C) will r
emain constant (D) will either increase or decrease. QJ/5 A point source causes
photoelectric effect from a small metal plate. Which ofthe following curves may
represent the saturation photocurrent as a function of the distance between the
source and the metal ?
(A) (B) (C) (D) Q.16 Let Kj be the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emit
ted by a light of wavelength A, and K corresponding to X . If = 2"k , then:
2 2 2 2 2
2
(A) 2Kj = K (B) K, - 2K (C)K,<| (D) K, > 2K Q. 17 In a photoelectric experiment,
the potential difference V that must be maintained between the illuminated surf
ace and the collector so as just to prevent any electron from reaching the colle
ctor is determined for differentfrequenciesfofthe incident illumination. The gra
ph obtained is shown. The maximum kinetic energy ofthe electrons emitted atfrequ
encyf, is Vi (D)eV (f -f ) (C)h(f -f ) (A) iff. (^ )( f7fT3io ) M i-f Q.18 Radia
tion oftwo photon energies twice andfivetimes the work function of metal are inc
ident sucessively on the metal surface. The ratio ofthe maximum velocity of phot
oelectrons emitted is the two cases will be (A) 1 :2 (B)2 . 1 (C) 1 4 (D)4: 1 Q.
19 Cut off potentials for a metal in photoelectric effect for light ofwavelength
X ,X and X is found to be Vj, V and V volts if Vj, V and V are inArithmetic Pro
gression and A,,, X and A will be: (A) Arithmetic Progression (B) Geometric Prog
ression (C) Harmonic Progression (D) None
v B 1 0 1 1 0 x 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
(fe Bansal Classes
6]
Q. 20 Photons with energy 5 eV are incident on a cathode C, on a photoelectric c
ell. The maximum energy of the emitted photoelectrons is 2 eV. When photons of e
nergy 6 eV are incident on C, no photoelectrons C will reach the anode A if the
stopping potential ofA relative to C is (A)3 V (B)-3V (C)-1V (D)4 V Q.21 In a ph
otoelectric experiment, the collector plate is at 2.0V with respect to the emitt
er plate made of copper cp - 4.5eV). The emitter is illuminated by a source of m
onochromatic light ofwavelength 200nm. (A) the minimum kinetic energy ofthe phot
oelectrons reaching the collector is 0. (B) the maximum kinetic energy ofthe pho
toelectrons reaching the collector is 3,7eV. p (C) if the polarity of the batter
y is reversed then answer to part A will be 0. (D) if the polarity of the batter
y is reversed then answer to part B will be 1,7eV. Q.22 By increasing the intens
ity of incident light keepingfrequency(v > v )fixedon the surface of metal (A) k
inetic energy of the photoelectrons increases (B) number of emitted electrons in
creases (C) kinetic energy and number of electrons increases (D) no effect
0
Q.23 In a photoelectric experiment, electrons are ejected from metals X and Y by
light of intensity I and frequency f. The potential difference V required to st
op the electrons is measured for various frequencies. IfY has a greater work fun
ction than X; which one ofthe following graphs best illustrates the expected res
ults? Vi X V V V Y/ 4 (D) (C) < f (B) o 0 •f o
X / /
Q. 2,4 Monochromatic light with a frequency well above the cutoff frequency is i
ncident on the emitter in a photoelectric effect apparatus. The frequency of the
light is then doubled while the intensity is kept constant. How does this affec
t the photoelectric current? (A) The photoelectric current will increase. (B) Th
e photoelectric current will decrease. (C),The photoelectric current will remain
the same. (D) None of these Q. 2 5 In a hypothetical system a particle of mass
m and charge -3 q is moving around a very heavy particle having cahrge q. Assumi
ng Bohr's model to be true to this system, the orbital velocity of mass m when i
t is nearest to heavy particle is 3q 3q 3q 3q
2 2
Q. 26 de-Broglie wavelength of an electron in the nth B ohr orbit is \ and the a
ngular momentum is J , then:
n
"
(A) J x
n
(B) ln oc rt7~ **
cvr\i
f
(C) Xn cc j
2
(D) none ofthese
q s *
$$ Bansal Classes
m
\
Q.27 The angular momentum of an electron in the hydrogen atom is — . Here h is Pla
nck's constant. The 2tc kinetic energy ofthis electron is: (A)4.53 eV (B)1.51eV
(C)3.4eV (D)6.8eV - n = oo Q.28 Consider the following electronic energy level d
iagram of H-atom: A -n= 4 Photons associated with shortest and longest wavelengt
hs would be D C emitted from the atom by the transitions labelled: -n = 3 B (A)
D and C respectively -n = 2 (B) C and A respectively (C) C and D respectively =j
(D) Aand C respectively Q.29 In a hydrogen atom, the binding energy ofthe elect
ron in the n state is E , then thefrquencyofrevolutionof the electron in the nth
orbits is: (A)2E /nh . (B) 2E n/h (C)E /nh (D)E n/h Q.30 Ifthe electron in a hy
drogen atom were in the energy level with n=3, how much energy in joule would be
required to ionise the atom? (Ionisation energy of H-atomis 2.18 10"" J): (A) 6
.54 x 10" (B) 1.43 x 10" (C) 2.42 x 10~ (D) 3.14 10" Q.31 In hydrogen and hydrog
en like atoms, the ratio of difference of energies E -E and E -E varies with its
atomic number z and n as: (A)z /n (B) zVn (C)z/n (D)z°n°
n th n n n n n x 18 19 19 19 x 20 4n 2n 2n n 2 2 4
Q.32 In a hydrogen atom, the electron is in nth excited state. It may come down
to second excited state by . emitting ten different wavelengths. What is the val
ue of n: (A) 6 (B) 7 (C) 8 (D) 5 Q.33 Difference between nth and (n+1 )th Bohr's
radius of'H' atom is equal to it's (n-1 )th Bohr's radius, the value ofnis: (A)
1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 Q.34 An electron in hydrogen atom after absorbing energy ph
otons can jump between energy states n and n (n, > nj). Then it may return to gr
ound state after emitting six different wavelengths in emission spectrum. | the
energy of emitted photons is either equal to, less than or greater than the abso
rbed photons. Then nj and n are: (A) n = 4, n = 3 (B)n = 5,nj=3 (C)n = 4, n, = 2
(D) n = 4 , ^ = 1 Q.35 The electron in a hydrogen atom makes transitionfromM sh
ell to L. The ratio of magnitudes ofinitial to final centripetal acceleration of
the electron is (A) 9:4 (B)81:16 (C)4:9 (D)16:81 Q.36 The electron in a hydroge
n atom makes a transition n, —> n whose nj and n are the principal quantum numbers
of the two states. Assume the Bohr model to be valid. The frequency of orbital
motion of the electron in the initial state is 1/27 of that in thefinalstate. Th
e possible values of n and n are (A) n =4, n = 2 (6)^=3,^=1 (0)^ = 8,^=1 (0)^ =
6,^ = 3 Q.37 The radiu s of B ohr' sfirstorbit is a . The electron in n orbit ha
s a radiu s: (A) na (B)a /n (C)n a (D)a /n
t 2 2 2 } 2 2 2 2 2 t 2 t 2 0 th 0 0 2 0 0 2
(fe Bansal Classes
8]
Q.38 The ionisation potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6 volt. The energy required
to remove an electron from ^ the second orbit of hydrogen is: (A) 3.4 eV (B)6.8
eV (C)13.6eV (D)27.2eV Q.39 Electron in a hydrogen atom is replaced by an identi
cally charged particle muon with mass 207 times that of electron. Now the radius
of K shell will be (A) 2.56 x 10~ A (B) 109.7 A (C) 1.21 x 10~ A (D)22174.4A
3 3
Q.40 Monochromatic radiation of wavelength X is incident on ahydrogen sample con
taining in ground state. Hydrogen atoms absorb the light and subsequently emit r
adiations of ten different wavelengths. The value of X is (A) 95 nm (B)103nm (C)
73nm (D)88nm Q.41 When a hydrogen atom, initially at rest emits, a photon result
ing in transition n = 5 -> n = 1, its recoil speed is about (A) 10^ m/s (B) 2 x
10" m/s (C) 4.2 m/s (D) 3.8 x l(T m/s
2 2
Q. 42 An electron collides with afixedhydrogen atom in its ground state. Hydroge
n atom gets excited and the colliding electron loses all its kinetic energy. Con
sequently the hydrogen atom may emit a photon corresponding to the largest wavel
ength ofthe Balmer series. The min. K.E. of colliding electron will be (A) 10.2
eV (B) 1.9 eV (C)12.1eV (D)13.6eV Q.43 Thefrequencyof revolution of electron in
n Bohr orbit is v . The graph between log n and log (v / v,) may be
th n n
Q. 44 Consider the spectral line resulting from the transition n = 2 —» n = 1 in the
atoms and ions given below. The shortest wavelength is produced by: (A) hydroge
n atom (B) deuterium atom (C) singly ionized helium (D) doubly ionized lithium Q
.45 In an atom, two electrons move around the nucleus in circular orbits of radi
i R and 4R. The ratio of the time taken by them to complete one revolution is: (
neglect electric interaction) (A) 1:4 (B) 4 : 1 (C) 1 : 8 (D) 8 : 1 Q.46 The ele
ctron in hydrogen atom in a sample is in n excited state, then the number of dif
ferent spectrum lines obtained in its emission spectrum will be: (A) 1 + 2 + 3 +
+(n - 1) (B) 1 + 2 + 3 + + (n) (C) 1 + 2 + 3 + +(n +1) (D) 1 2 x 3 x x ( _ l) Q
.47 The total energy of a hydrogen atom in its ground state is -13,6eV. If the p
otential energy in the first excited state is taken as zero then the total energ
y in the ground state will be : <L (A) -3.4eV (B) 3.4 eV (C)-6.8eV (D)6.8eV
lh x
n
(fe Bansal Classes
9]
Q. 48 A neutron collides head on with a stationary hydrogen atom in ground state
(A) If kinetic energy of the neutronis less than 13.6eV, collisionmust be elast
ic (B) if kinetic energy of the neutron is less than 13,6eV, collision may be in
elastic. (C) inelastic collision takes place when initial kinetic energy of neut
ron is greater than 13. 6eV. (D) perfectly inelastic collision cannot take place
. Q. 49 The electron in a hydrogen atom make a transitionfroman excited state to
the ground state. Which ofthe following statement is true ? (A) Its kinetic ene
rgy increases and its potential and total energies decrease (B) Its kinetic ener
gy decreases, potential energy increases and its total energy remains the same.
(C) Its kinetic and toal energies decrease and its potential energy increases. (
D) its kinetic potential and total energies decreases. Q. 5 0 The magnitude of a
ngular momentum, orbit radius and frequency of revolution of electron in hydroge
n atom corresponding to quantum number n are L, r and frespectively Then accordi
ng to Bohr's theory of hydrogen atom, (A) fr L is constant for all orbits (B)frL
is constant for all orbits (C) frL is constant for all orbits (D) frL is constan
t for all orbits
2 2
Q.51 In a characteristic X- ray spectra of some atom superimposed on continuous
X-ray spectra: (A) P represents K line C (B) Q represents Kp line (C) Q and P re
presents K and K lines respectively (D) Relative positions of K and K depend on
the particular atom
a a p a B a
f J J J
Q.52 The "K " X-ray s emission line of tungsten occurs at X = 0.021 nm. The ener
gy difference between K and L levels in this atom is about (A) 0.51 MeV (B) 1.2
MeV
X > A B
(C)59keV
(D)13.6eV
Q.53 Consider the nuclear reaction 200 110 + 90 Ifthe binding energy per nucleon
for X, AandB is7.4MeV, 8.2. MeV and 8.2 MeV respectively, what is the energy re
leased ? (A) 200 MeV (B) 160 MeV (C) 110 MeV (D) 90 MeV Q. 54 The binding energy
per nucleon for C is 7.68 MeV and that for C is 7.5 MeV The energy required to
remove a neutron from C is (A) 5.34 MeV (B) 5.5 MeV (C) 9.5 MeV (D)9.34MeV Q. 5
5 The binding energies ofnuclei X and Y are E and E respectively. Two atoms of X
fuse to give one atom of Y and an energy Q is released. Then: (A) Q = 2Ej-E (B)
Q = E -2EJ (C)Q = 2EJ+E (D)Q = 2E + EJ
12 13 13 L 2 2 2 2 2
Q. 5 6 Radius ofthe second Bohr obit of singly ionised helium atom is (A) 0.53 A
(B) 1.06 A (C) 0.265 A (D) 0.132 A Q. 5 7 An electron in Bohr's hydrogen atom h
as an energy of-3.4 eV. The angular momentum ofthe electron is (A) h / 7i ' " (B
) h / 2TC (C) nh / (n is an integer) (D)2h/7t
(fe Bansal Classes
10]
Q.58 If each fission in a U nucleus releases 200 MeV, how many fissions must occ
urs per second to produce a power of 1 KW (A) 1.325 x 10 (B)3.125 x 10 (C) 1.235
x 10 (D) 2.135 x 10
235 13 13 13 13
Q.59 The rest mass of the deuteron, ] H, is equivalent to an energy of 1876 MeV,
the rest mass of a proton is equivalent to 93 9 MeV and that of a neutron to 94
0 MeV. A deuteron may disintegrate to a proton and a neutron if it : (A) emits a
y - ray photon of energy 2 MeV (B) captures ay- ray photon of energy 2 MeV (C)
emits a y-ray photon of energy 3 MeV (D) captures a y - ray photon of energy 3 M
eV Q.60 In an a-decay the Kinetic energy of a particle is 48 MeV and Q-value oft
he reaction is 5 0 MeV. The mass number of the mother nucleus is: (Assume that d
aughter nucleus is in ground state) (A) 96 (B) 100 (C) 104 (D) none ofthese Q.61
In the uranium radioactive series the initial nucleus is U , and thefinalnucleu
s is Pb . When the uranium nucleus decays to lead, the number ofa - particles em
itted is.. and the number of (3-particles - emitted... (A) 6, 8 (B) 8, 6 (C) 16,
6 (D) 32, 12
92 238 82 206
Q.62 The radioactive sources Aand B ofhalf lives of2 hr and 4 hr respectively, i
nitially contain the same number ofradioactive atoms. At the end of 2 hours, the
ir rates of disintegration are in the ratio : (A)4:l (B) 2 : 1 (C)V^:1 (D) 1 : 1
Q.63 In a RA element the fraction of initiated amount remaining after its mean
life time is 1 1 (A)l-(D) 1- e~ (B)^ (C) Q. 64 90% of a radioactive sample is le
ft undecayed after time t has elapsed. What percentage ofthe initialsample will
decay in a total time 2t: (A) 20% (B) 19% (C) 40% (D) 38% Q.65 A radioactive mat
erial of half-life T was produced in a nuclear reactor at different instants, th
e quantity produced second time was twice ofthat producedfirsttime. If now their
present activities are Aj and A respectively then their age difference equals:
t
2
, In—A,
A
A (B)T In A,
T In
2A,
2 2
A z
(D)T l n2A,
A 2 }
R, Q.66 Activity of a radioactive substance is Rj at time tj and R^ at time t (t
> t ). Then the ratio ^ is:
£
h (A)-
(B) -Mt +t )
e v 2
\ -t ^ (C)e l 2
f l l
(D) Mti-t )
e 2
Q.67 There are two radionuclei Aand B. Ais an alpha emitter and B is a beta emit
ter. Their distintegration constants are in the ratio of 1 : 2. What should be t
he ratio of number of atoms of two at time t = 0 so that probabilities of gettin
g a and (3 particles are same at time t = 0. (A) 2 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) e (D) e"
1
(fe Bansal Classes
11]
Q.68 The activity of a sample reduces from Aq to A / y 3 inonehour. The activity
after 3 hours more will be A A o A
() r
2
< >i7?
A
x
0
w-f
n
A
0
Q.69 Halflife of radium is 1620years. How many radium nuclei decay in 5 hours in
5 gm radium? (Atomic weight of radium = 223) (A) 9.1 10 (B) 3.23 x 10 (C) 1.72
x 10 (D)3.3xl0
12 15 20 17
Q. 70 Halflife for certain radioactive element is 5 min. Four nuclei of that ele
ment are observed at a certain instant oftime. Afterfiveminutes Assertion (A): I
t can be definitely said that two nuclei will be left undecayed. Reasoning (R):
After halflife i. e. 5 minutes, half of total nuclei will disintegrate. So only
two nuclei will be left undecayed. Then (A) A is correct & R is correct explanat
ion ofA. (B) Both are correct. But R is not correct explanation of A. (C) A is i
ncorrect & Ris correct. (D) Both are incorrect. Q. 71 A certain radioactive nucl
ide of mass number m^ disintegrates, with the emission of an electron and y radi
ation only, to give second nuclied ofmass number m^ Which one ofthe following eq
uation correctly relates rr^ and m ?
y
(A)m = m + 1
y x
(B)m = m - 2
y x
(C)m = m - 1
y x
(D)m = m
y
x
Q.72 The number ofa and (3 "emitted during the radioactive decay chain starting
from gg Ra andendingat ^ I? Pb is (A)3a&6p(B) 4a & 5(3~ (C)5a&4p" (D)6a&6p" Q.73
The activity ofa sample of radioactive material is A, at time t, and .A, at tim
e t (t >t,). Its mean life is T. A -A
6 2 2
(A) Ajt, = A t /
, (B)/,</;
2
2 2
(B)
= constant(C) A = A, j w r
(D)
2
=
\ (MTt )
e 2
Q. 74 (A)/, >/, /, of a radioactive sample decays in one mean life, and a fracti
onf decays in one half-life. Afraction (C)/ =f (D) May be (A), (B) or (C) depend
ing on the values of the mean life and halflife
1
Q.75 A radioactive substance is being produced at a constant rate of 10 nuclei/s
. The decay constant ofthe substance is 1/2 sec" . After what time the number of
radioactive nuclei will become 10? Initially there are no nuclei present. Assum
e decay law holds for the sample. 1 (A) 2.45 sec (B) log(2) sec (C) 1.386 sec (D
) sec Q.76 The radioactivity ofa sample is R, at time Tj and R at time T . If th
e halflife of the specimen is T. Number of atoms that have disintegrated in time
(T - Tj) is proportional to (A) ( R J , - R T ) (B) (Rj - R , ) T (C) (RJ -R,)/
T (D) (Rj - R,) (T - T )
2 2 2 2 2 t 2
(fe Bansal Classes
12]
Q. 77 The decay constant of the end product of a radioactive series is (A) zero
(B) infinite (C)finite(non zero) Q. 78 At time t = 0, N, nuclei of decay constan
t rate of the mixture is : (A) N N e~^ " ^
1 2 1+> 2
(D) depends on the end product.
2
& N, nuclei of decay constant X are mixed . The decay
(B) +
2 2 X2t
(x x )t
r 2
VN2 7
1 ] 2 2
(C) +(N X e" +N A e" )
1 1 Xlt
(D) +N X N X e
% Bansal Classes
each question. Q.l Q. 2 Q.3 In photoelectric effect, stopping potential depends
on (A) frequency ofthe incident light (B) intensity ofthe incident light by vari
es source distance (C) emitter's properties (D)frequencyand intensity ofthe inci
dent light An electron in hydrogen atomfirstjumpsfromsecond excited state tofirs
texcited state and then, from first excited state to ground state. Let the ratio
of wavelength, momentum and energy of photons in the two cases be x, y and z, t
hen select the wrong answer/(s): (A)z= 1/x (B) x=9/4 (C) y=5/27 (D)z=5/27 .An el
ectron is in an excited state in hydrogen-like atom. It has a total energy of-3.
4 eV. If the kinetic energy ofthe electron is E and its de-Broglie wavelength is
X, then (A) E = 6.8 eV, A, = 6.6 x 10" m (B) E = 3.4 eV, X = 6.6 x lO- m (C) E
= 3.4 eV, X = 6.6 10" m (D) E = 6.8 eV, X = 6.6 x 10" m
10 10 x 11 11
Q.4
A particular hydrogen like atom has its ground state binding "energy 122.4eV. It
s is in ground state. Then: (A) Its atomic number is 3 (B) An electron of 90eV c
an excite it. (C) An electron of kinetic energy nearly 91 8eV can be brought to
almost rest by this atom. (D) An electron of kinetic energy 2.6eV may emerge fro
m the atom when electron of kinetic energy 125eV collides with this atom. A beam
ofultraviolet light of all wavelengths passes through hydrogen gas at room temp
erature, in the x-direction. Assume that all photons emitted due to electron tra
nsition inside the gas emerge in the y-direction. Let Aand B denote the lights e
mergingfromthe gas in the x and y directions respectively. (A) Some of the incid
ent wavelengths will be absent in A. (B) Only those wavelengths will be present
in B which are absent in A. (C) B will contain some visible light. (D) B will co
ntain some infrared light. If radiation of allow wavelengthsfromultraviolet to i
nfrared is passed through hydrogen agas at room temperature, absorption lines wi
ll be observed in the : (A) Lyman series (B) Baimer series (C) both (A) and (B)
(D) neither (A) nor (B)
Q.5
Q.6 Q.7
In the hydrogen atom, if the reference level of potential energy is assumed to b
e zero at the ground state level. Choose the incorrect statement. (A) The total
energy of the shell increases with increase in the value of n (B) The total ener
gy of the shell decrease with increase in the value of n. (C) The difference in
total energy of any two shells remains the same. (D) The total energy at the gro
und state becomes 13.6 eV. Q. 8 Choose the correct statement(s) for hydrogen and
deuterium atoms (considering motion of nucleus) (A) The radius offirstBohr orbi
t of deuterium is less than that of hydrogen (B) The speed of electron in thefir
stBohr orbit of deuterium is more than that of hydrogen. (C) The wavelength offi
rstBalmer line of deuterium is more than that ofhydrogen (D) The angular momentu
m of electron in thefirstBohr orbit ofdeuterium is more than that of hydrogen.
(fe Bansal Classes
14]
Q.9
Let A be the area enclosed by the n orbit in a hydrogen atom. The graph of In (A
/A,) agains In (n). (A) will pass through origin (B) will be a stright line wil
l slope 4 (C) will be a monotonically increasing nonlinear curve (D) will be a c
ircle.
n th n
Q, 10 A neutron collides head-on with a stationary hydrogen atom in ground state
. Which ofthe following statements are correct (Assume that the hydrogen atom an
d neutron has same mass): (A) If kinetic energy of the neutron is less than 20.4
eV collision must be elastic. (B) If kinetic energy of the neutron is less than
20.4 eV collision may be inelastic. (C) Inelastic collision may be take place o
nly when initial kinetic energy ofneutron is greater than 20.4 eV. (D) Perfectly
inelastic collision can not take place. Q.ll When a nucleus with atomic number
Z and mass number A undergoes a radioactive decay process: (A) both Z and A will
decrease, if the process is a decay (B) Z will decrease but A will not change,
ifthe process is p decay (C) Z will decrease but A will not change, if the proce
ss is (3~ decay (D) Z and A will remain unchanged, if the process is y decay.
+
Q.12 In a Coolidge tube experiment, the minimum wavelength of the continuous X-r
ay spectrum is equal to 66.3 pm, then (A) electrons accelerate through a potenti
al difference of 12.75 kV in the Coolidge tube (B) electrons accelerate through
a potential difference of 18.75 kV inthe Coolidge tube (C) de-Broglie wavelength
of the electrons reaching the anti cathode is of the order of 10pm. (D) de-Brog
lie wavelength of the electrons reaching the anticathode is 0.01 A. Q.13 The pot
ential difference applied to an X-ray tube is increased. As a result, in the emi
tted radiation: (A) the intensity increases (B) the minimum wave length increase
s (C) the intensity decreases (D) the minimum wave length decreases Q.14 When th
e atomic number A of the nucleus increases (A) initially the neutron-proton rati
o is constant = 1 (B) initially neutron-proton ratio increases and later decreas
es (C) initially binding energy per nucleon increases and later decreases (D) th
e binding energy per nucleon increases when the neutron-proton ratio increases.
Q.15 Let m be the mass of a proton, m the mass of a neutron, M, the mas ofa ^ N
e nucleus and M the mass of a [] Ca nucleus. Then (A)M = 2M, (B) M > 2Mj (C) M <
2Mj (D) M, < 10(m + m )
p n 2 2 2 2 2 n p
Q.16 The decay constant of a radio active substance is 0.173 (years)" . Therefor
e : (A) Nearly 63% of the radioactive substance will decay in (1/0.173) year. (B
) halflife of the radio active substance is (1/0.173) year. (C) one -forth of th
e radioactive substance will be left after nearly 8 years. (D) all the above sta
tements are true.
1
Bansal Classes
[15]
ANSWER KEY
ONLY ONE OPTION IS CORRECT.
Qi
C D
Q.2 Q.9
B A
Q.3
C
Q4
D
Q.5 Q.12
D
Q.6
C
Q.7
A
Q.8
Q.10 A Q.17 C Q.24 B Q.31 D Q.38 A Q.45 C Q.52 C Q.59 D Q.66 D Q.73 C
Q.ll B Q.18 A Q.25 A Q.32 A Q.39 A Q.46 B Q.53 B Q.60 B Q.67 A Q.74
A
Q.13 D Q.20 B Q.27 B Q.34 C Q.41 C Q.48 A Q.55 B Q.62 C Q.69 B Q.76 B
Q.14 C Q.21 B Q.28 C Q.35 D Q.42 C Q.49 A Q.56 B Q.63 C Q.70 D Q.77 A
Q.15 D Q.22 B Q.29 A Q.36 B Q.43 C Q.50 B Q.57 A Q.64 B Q.71 D Q.78 C Q.l Q.5 Q.
9
Q.16 C Q.23 A Q.30 C Q.37 C Q.44 D Q.51 C Q.58 B Q.65 C Q.72 C
Q.19 C Q.26 A Q.33 D Q.40 A Q.47 C Q.54 A Q.61 B Q.68 B Q.75 C
A,C A,C,D AB
ONE OR MORE THAN ONE OPTION MAYBE CORRECT Q2 B Q.3 B Q 4 AC,D Q.6 A Q.7 B Q.8 A
Q.10 A,C Q.14 A,C Q.ll AB,D Q.15 C,D Q.12 B Q.16 A,C
Q.13 A,D
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XII (ALL)
MODERN PHYSICS
CONTENTS
KEYCONCEPTS EXERCISE-I EXERCISE-II EXERCISE-III ANSWER KEY
KEY
(a) (c)
(d)
CONCEPTS
l.
(b)
2.
3.
CATHODE RAYS : Generated in a discharge tube in which a high vaccum is maintaine
d . They are electrons accelerated by high p.d. (lOto 15 K.V.) 1 = eV. K.E. of C
.R. particle accelerated by a p.d. V is — mv' 2m Can be deflected by Electric & ma
gnetic fields . red(7.6xl0~ m) * — vioIet(3.6*l(r m) ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM Orde
red arrangement ofthe big family 3xlO" m 3*10 m 3m 3 x l 0 ^ m of electro magnet
ic waves (EMW) either in ascending order of frequencies infrared Ultraviolet Gam
ma rays or ofwave lengths Radio waves Speed ofE.M.W. in vacuum C = 3 x 10 m/s =
v X X-rays II \ Micro waves PLANK S QUANTUM THEORY : Visible light (e.g. radar)
A beam ofEMW is a stream of discrete packets of energy called PHOTONS , 10 10 10
10 10 10 10 I0 10 ° each photon having afrequencyv and Frequency (Hz) energy = E
= hv .
7 7 4 l2
8
4
6
s
10
12
14
16
i8
2
4. (0 (ii)
(v)
(iii) (iv)
h = plank's constant = 6.63 x 10" Js . PHOTO ELECTRIC EFFECT : The phenomenon of
the emission of electrons , when metals are exposed to light (of a certain mini
mum frequency) is called photo electric effect. Results : Can be explained only
on the basis of the quantum theory (concept of photon). Electrons are emitted if
the incident light hasfrequencyv > v (thresholdfrequency)emission ofelectrons is
independent ofintensity. The wave length corresponding to v is called threshold
wave length X0 . v is different for different metals . Number of electrons emit
ted per second depends on the intensity of the incident light .
34 Q 0 0
EINSTEINS PHOTO ELECTRIC EQUATION :
Photon energy = K. E. of electron + work function . h v = — mv2 + , = h v
0
2
5.
The minimum value of the retarding potential to prevent electron emission is : c
utofr = (KE) The number of photons incident on a surface per unit time is called
photon flux. WAVE NATURE OF MATTER : Beams of electrons and other forms ofmatte
r exhibit wave properties including interference and diffraction
eV max
STOPPING POTENTIAL O R C U T O F F PO TENTIAL :
with a de Broglie wave length given by X = — P (wave length of a praticle) .
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
6. (a)
(b)
(c)
ATOMIC MODELS : THOMSON MODEL : (PLUM PUDDING MODEL) (i) Most of the mass and al
l the positive charge of an atom is uniformly distributed over the full size of
atom (10" m). (ii) Electrons are studded in this uniform distribution . (iii) Fa
iled to explain the large angle scattering a - particle scattered by thin foils
of matter . RUTHERFORD MODEL : (Nuclear Model) (i) The most of the mass and all
the positive charge is concentrated within a size of 10" m inside the atom . Thi
s concentration is called the atomic nucleus . (ii) The electron revolves around
the nucleus under electric interaction between themin circular orbits. An accel
erating charge radiates the nucleus spiralling inward and finally fall into the
nucleus, which does not happen in an atom. This could not be explained by this m
odel . BOHR ATOMIC MODEL : Bohr adopted Rutherford model of the atom & added som
e arbitrary conditions. These conditions are known as his postulates :
10 14
(i) (ii) (iii)
The electron in a stable orbit does not radiate energy .i.e. r = - r A stable or
bit is that in which the angular momentum of the electron about nucleus ll ll is
an integral (n) multiple of — . i.e. mvr = n — ; n = 1, 2, 3 , (n * 0).
m V
The electron can absorb or radiate energy only if the electron jumpsfroma lower
to a higher orbit or fallsfroma higher to a lower orbit . (iv) The energy emitte
d or absorbed is a light photon of frequency v and of energy. E = hv . FOR HYDRO
GEN ATOM : (Z - atomic number = 1) (i) L = angular momentum in the n orbit = n— .
2% (ii) r - radius of n circular orbit = (0.529 A ) n ; (1 A = 10" m); r a n . (
iii) E Energy of the electron in the n orbit = — i.e. E a . Note: Total energy oft
he electron in an atom is negative , indicating that it is bound . Binding Energ
y (BE) = - E = . n (iv) E - E = Energy emitted when an electron jumps from n orb
it to n, orbit (n > n ). AE = (13.6 ev) 1 1
th n th 0 2 0 10 n 2 n th e V n 1 3 , 6 e v n2 nl 2 th th 2 t
Z7C
271
AE = hv
;
n, 2
v = frequency of spectral line emitted .
n n 7 1
n
2
2
— = v = wave no. [no. ofwaves in unit length (lm)] = R 2 2 A, i 2 Where R = Rydber
g's constant for hydrogen = 1.097 x 10 m" . (v) For hydrogen like atom/spicies o
f atomic number Z : ^ n = (0.529A ) ^ ; E = (- 13.6) ^ ev z Z n R = RZ - Rydberg
's constant for element of atomic no. Z . Note : If motion of the nucleus is als
o considered, then m is replaced by p. .
r n2 2 0 z 7 2
= ^
^Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[3]
7.
(0
Where p = reduced mass of electron - nucleus system = mM/(m+M). In this case E„ =
(-13.6 ev) — . — n. no e SPECTRAL SERIES : Lyman Series : (Landing orbit n = 1) . n>
1 Ultraviolet region v"=R i 12 1 2
v 7
2
m
00
Balmer Series : (Landing orbit n = 2) Visible region v = R 1 1 Paschan Series :
(Landing orbit n = 3) In the near infrared region v = R 1 r, 3 n Bracket Series
: (Landing orbit n = 4)
2
2
2
1
n
2
2
(iii) (iv) (v)
22 n
0
2
2
>2
n >3
2
In the mid infrared region v = R 4 Pfund Series : (Landing orbit n = 5)
2
>4 ^>5 etc . where n, = Landing orbit
}
In far infrared region v = R In all these series n
2
= n, + 1 is the a line = n, + 2 is the P line = n, + 3 is the y line
EXCITATION POTENTIAL OF ATOM : Excitation potential for quantum jump from n 9. 1
0. 11. (0 (ii) (iii) (iv)
-»n
2
IONIZATION ENERGY : The energy required to remove an electronfroman atom . The e
nergy required to ionize hydrogen atom is = 0 - ( -13.6) = 13.6 ev . IONIZATION
POTENTIAL : -E. Potential difference through which an electron is moved to gain
ionization energy = electronicch arg e X-RAYS : Short wavelength (0.1 A to 1 A )
electromagnetic radiation . k ~ kp-Characteristic Spectrum Are produced when a
metal anode is bombarded by very high energy 3ntiaous electrons . Spectrum Are n
ot affected by electric and magnetic field . 35000 volt They cause photoelectric
emission . Characteristics equation eV = hv e = electron charge ; V = accelerat
ing potential v = maximum frequency of X - radiation
0 0
u
electronch arg e
m
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
(v) (vi)
Intensity of X - rays depends on number of electrons hitting the target . Cut of
f wavelength or minimum wavelength, where v (in volts) is the p.d. applied to th
e tube Xmin J * !- y" A" . (vii) Continuous spectrum due to retardation of elect
rons. (viii) Characteristic Spectrum due to transition of electronfromhigher to
lower
v a (z - b)
2
b = 1 for K series ; b = 7.4 for L series Where b is Shielding factor (different
for different series). Note : (i) Binding energy=- [ Total Mechanical Energy ]
(ii) Vel. of electron in n orbit for hydrogen atom = — ; 137n
th
;
u = a (z - b)
2
[ MOSELEY'S LAW ]
c = speed oflight.
(iii) (iv)
12.
0
For x - rays - -R(z-b ) 12 1 2 X V i 2 J Series limit of series means minimum wa
ve length of that series.
2
n n
R= R A
NUCLEAR
1/3
DIMENSIONS
0
Where R = empirical constant = 1.1 x 10~ m; A = Mass number ofthe atom
15
:
13.
The phenomenon of self emission of radiation is called radioactivity and the sub
stances which emit these radiations are called radioactive substances . It can b
e natural or artificial (induced) .
a., p , y
RADIOACTIVITY
:
(i)
14.
(ii) (iii) (A)
15.
a - particle : (a) Helium nucleus ( He ) ; (b) energy varies from 4 Mev to 9 Mev
; (c) Velocity 10 - 10 m/s ; (d) low penetration p - particle : (a) Have much le
ss energy; (b) more penetration; (c) higher velocities than a particles y - radi
ation : Electromagnetic waves ofvery high energy .
2 4 6 7
RADIATION
:
(B)
DISPLACEMENT LAW : In all radioactive transformation either an a or p particle (
never both or more than one of each simultaneously) is emitted by the nucleus of
the atom. (i) a-emission : X -> _ Y + a + Energy (ii) P - emission : X > P+ Y +
v (antinuetrino) (iii) y - emission : emission does not affect either the charg
e number or the mass number . STASTISTICAL LAW : The disintegration is a random
phenomenon. Whcih atom disintegrates first is purely a matter of chance . Number
of nuclei disintegrating per second is given ; (disintegration /s/gm is called
specific activity) . dN dN , (i) — a N —>—=-A,N = activity . dt dt Where N = No. of nu
clei present at time t ; X - decay constant (ii) N = N e~ N = number of nuclei p
resent in the beginning .
Z A Z 2 A _ 4 2 4 Z A Z + 1 A 0 XT X T o 0
LAWS OF RADIOACTIVE
DISINTEGRATION
:
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
(iii) ...
Half life of the population T =
1/2
at the end of n half-life periods the number of nuclei left N = N . — Slifetimeof
allatoms ; „ = 1— T totalnumberof atoms A (v) CURIE : The unit of activity of any ra
dioactive substance in which the number of disintegration per second is 3.7 xlO
. ATOMIC MASS UNIT (a.m.u. OR U) : 1 amu = — x (mass of carbon-12 atom) = 1.6603 x
10~ kg
(iv) MEAN LIFE OF AN ATOM =
10 27
A
•
.,
16. 17. 18.
19. (i) (ii) (iii) 20. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Note
B E. per nucleon = -( A M~) — . — C Greater the BE. , greater is the stability of th
e nucleus . NUCLEAR FISSION : Heavy nuclei of A, above 200, break up onto two or
more fragments of comparable masses. The total B.E. increases and excess energy
is released . The man point of the fission energy is leberated in the form ofth
e K.E. ofthe fission fragments . eg. 9 2 + o ^ 9 2 ^ 5 6 + 3 6 + o + ^ S Y NUCLE
AR FUSION (Thermo nuclear reaction): Light nuclei ofAbelow 20, fuse together, th
e BE. per nucleon increases and hence the excess energy is released . These reac
tions take place at ultra high temperature (= 10 to 10 ) Energy released exceeds
the energy liberated in thefissionof heavy nuclei . eg. 4{P-»j He+° e . (Positron)
The energy released in fusion is specified by specifying Q value . i.e. Q value
of reaction = energy released in a reaction . : (i) In emission of p", z increas
es by 1 . (ii) In emission of , z decreases by 1 .
2
MASS AND ENERGY : The mass m of a particle is equivalent to an energy given by E
= mc ; c = speed of light. 1 amu = 931 Mev MASS DEFECT AND BINDING ENERGY OF A
NUCLEUS : The nucleus is less massive than its constituents. The difference of m
asses is called mass defect . A M = mass defect = [ Z + (A-Z)mJ - M ^ . Total en
ergy required to be given to the nucleus to tear apart the individual nucleons c
omposing the nucleus, away from each other and beyond the range of interaction f
orces is called the Binding Energy of a nucleus . BE. =(AM)C .
2
MP
2
2
U
nl
2
U
I
4
Ba
Kr
3
nl
7
9
1
1
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
Q.l Q. 2 (a) Q.3 (a) Q.4 Q. 5 Q. 6 Q.7 Q.8 Q. 9 Q.10 Q.ll
A parallel beam of uniform, monochromatic light of wavelength 2640 A has an inte
nsity of 200W/m . The number of photons in 1mm of this radiation are When photon
s of energy 4.25 eV strike the surface of a metal A, the ej ected photoelectrons
have maximum kinetic energy T eV and de Broglie wavelength Xa . The maximum kin
etic energy of photoelectrons liberated from another metal B by photons of energ
y 4.7eV is T = (T -1.5) eV. If the De Broglie wavelength ofthese photoelectrons
is = 2 X& , then find The work function of a (b) The work function ofb is (c) T
and T When a monochromatic point source oflight is at a distance of 0.2 mfroma p
hotoelectric cell, the cut off voltage and the saturation current are respective
ly 0.6 volt and 18.0 mA. Ifthe same source is placed 0.6 m away from the photoel
ectric cell, then find the stopping potential (b) the saturation current An isol
ated metal body is illuminated with monochromatic light and is observed to becom
e charged to a steady positive potential 1.0V with respect to the surrounding. T
he work function of the metal is 3 0 eV. The frequency of the incident light is
. 663 mW oflight from a 540 nm source is incident on the surface of a metal. If
only 1 of each 5 x 10 incident photons is absorbed and causes an electron to be
ejectedfromthe surface, the total photocurrent in the circuit is . Light of wave
length 330 nm falling on a piece of metal ej ects electrons with sufficient ener
gy which requires voltage V to prevent a collector. In the same setup, light ofw
avelength 220 nm, ej ects electrons which require twice the voltage V to stop th
em in reaching a collector. Find the numerical value of voltage V .(Take plank's
constant, h = 6.6 x icr Js and 1 eV= 1.6 x 10~ J) A hydrogen atom in a state ha
ving a binding energy 0.85eV makes a transition to a state of excitation energy
10.2eV. The wave length of emitted photon is nm. A hydrogen atom is in 5 excited
state. When the electron jumps to ground state the velocity of recoiling hydrog
en atom is m/s and the energy of the photon is eV. The ratio of series limit wav
length ofBalmer series to wavelength offirstline of paschen series is An electro
njoins a helium nucleus to form a He+ ion. The wavelength ofthe photon emitted i
n this process if the electron is assumed to have had no kinetic energy when it
combines with nucleus is nm. Xi Three energy levels of an atom are shown in thef
igure.The wavelength corresponding to three possible transition are A,, X2 and X
y The value x o f X in terms of A, and X is given by .
2 3 a b a b 9 0 0 0 34 19 th E?
-n = 2
EXERCISE # I
2
3
2
Q.12 Imagine an atom made up of a proton and a hypothetical particle of double t
he mass of an electron but having the same charge as the electron. Apply the Boh
r atom model and consider a possible transitions of this hypothetical particle t
o the first excited level. Find the longest wavelngth photon that will be emitte
d X (in terms of the Rydberg constant R.) Q.13 In a hydrogen atom, the electron
moves in an orbit of radius 0.5 A making 10 revolution per second. The magnetic
moment associated with the orbital motion of the electron is . Q.14 The positron
is a fundamental particle with the same mass as that ofthe electron and with a
charge equal to that of an electron but of opposite sign. When a positron and an
electron collide, they may annihilate each other. The energy corresponding to t
heir mass appears in two photons of equal energy. Find the wavelength ofthe radi
ation emitted. [Take : mass ofelectron = (0.5/C )MeVandhC= 1.2xlO~ MeV.m where h
is the Plank's constant and C is the velocity oflight in air]
16 2 I2
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
Q.15 Asmall 10W source of ultraviolet light ofwavelength 99 nm is held at a dist
ance 0.1 mfromametal surface. The radius of an atom ofthe metal is approximately
0.05 nm. Find (i) the average number of photons strildng an atom per second. (i
i) the number ofphotoelectrons emitted per unit area per second ifthe efficiency
ofliberation ofphotoelectrons is 1 %. Q.16 The surface of cesium is illuminated
with monochromatic light of various f 1wavelengths and the stopping potentials
for the wavelengths are measured. The 1 2- 0.41 results of this experiment is pl
otted as shown in thefigure.Estimate the value of I-.-71.5 1.0 1.5 V I O ' H Z 1
-2V work function of the cesium and Planck's constant.
5
Q.17 A hydrogen like atom has its single electron orbiting around its stationary
nucleus. The energy to excite the electron from the second Bohr orbit to the th
ird Bohr orbit is 47.2 eV. The atomic number of this nucleus is . Q.18 A single
electron orbits a stationary nucleus of charge Ze where Z is a constant and e is
the electronic charge. It requires 47.2eV to excite the electron from the 2nd B
ohr orbit to 3rd Bohr orbit. Find (i) the value of Z, (ii) energy required to ex
cite the electronfromthe third to the fourth orbit (iii) the wavelength of radia
tion required to remove the electronfromthefirstorbit to infinity (iv) the kinet
ic energy, potential energy and angular momentum in the first Bohr orbit (v) the
radius of thefirstBohr orbit. Q .19 A hydrogen like atom (atomic number Z) is i
n higher excited state of quantum number n. This excited atom can make a transit
ion to the first excited state by successively emitting two photons of energy 22
.95 eV and 5.15eV respectively. Alternatively, the atomfromthe same excited stat
e can make transition to the second excited state by successively emitting two p
hotons of energies 2.4eV and 8.7eV respectively. Find the values of n and Z. Q.2
0 Find the binding energy of an electron in the ground state of a hydrogen like
atom in whose spectrum the third of the corresponding B aimer series is equal to
108. 5nm. Q.21 Which level ofthe doubly ionized lithium has the same energy as
the ground state energy ofthe hydrogen atom. Find the ratio ofthe two radii of c
orresponding orbits. Q.22 The binding energies per nucleon for deuteron (jH ) an
d helium ( He ) are 1.1 MeV and 7.0 MeV respectively. The energy released when t
wo deuterons fuse to form a. helium nucleus ( He ) is .
2 2 4 2 4 x s
Q.23 Aradioactive decay counter is switched on at t = 0. A P - active sample is
present near the counter. The counter registers the number of P - particles emit
ted by the sample. The counter registers 1 10' P - particles at t = 36 s and 1.1
1 * 10 P - particles at t = 108 s. FindT, of this sample Q.24 An isotopes of Pot
assium has a half life of 1.4 x 10 year and decays to Argon ^ A r which is stabl
e. (i) Write down the nuclear reaction representing this decay. (ii) A sample of
rock takenfromthe moon contains both potassium and argon in the ratio 1 /7. Fin
d age of rock Q.25 At t = 0, a sample is placed in a reactor. An unstable nuclid
e is produced at a constant rate R in the sample by neutron absorption. This nuc
lide P~~ decays with halflife x. Find the time required to produce 80% ofthe equ
ilibrium quantity ofthis unstable nuclide. Q.26 Suppose that the Sun consists en
tirely of hydrogen atom and releases the energy by the nuclear reaction, 4 |H >
,He with 26 MeV of energy released. Ifthe total output power ofthe Sun is assume
d to remain constant at 3.9 x 10 W,findthe time it will take to burn all the hyd
rogen. Take the mass of the Sun as 1.7 x 10 kg.
9 26 30
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
Q. 27 Assuming that the source of the energy of solar radiation is the energy of
the formation of helium from hydrogen according to the following cyclic reactio
n : ,H' X o + le° 6C' + 1 / N + ,C + ,H' 1 / N 0
2 7 13 13 13 14 7
N + ,H
14 7
1
8
0 -> N + e°
15 7 15 +1 1 6 12 2 4
N + H -> C + He Find how many tons of hydrogen must be converted every second in
to helium . The solar constant is 8 J / cm min. Assume that hydrogen forms 35% o
fthe sun's mass. Calculate in how many years this hydrogen will be used up if th
e radiation of the sun is constant. m = 5.49 x 10 amu, atomic masses m^l.00814 a
mu, m =4.00388 amu, mass ofthe sun=2 10 kg, distance between the sun and the ear
th= 1.5* 10 m. 1 amu = 931 MeV. Q. 28 An electron of mass "m" and charge "e" ini
tially at rest gets accelerated by a constant electricfieldE. The rate of change
of DeBroglie wavelength ofthis electron at time t is
15 ] 2 e 4 He x 30 n
List of recommended questions from I.E. Irodov. 5.247, 5.249, 5.260, 5.262, 5.26
3, 5.264, 5.265, 5.266, 5.270, 5.273, 5.277 6.21, 6.22, 6.27, 6.28, 6.30, 6.31,
6.32, 6.33, 6.35, 6.37, 6.38, 6.39, 6.40, 6.41, 6.42, 6.43, 6.49, 6.50, 6.51, 6.
52, 6.53, 6.133, 6.134, 6.135, 6.136, 6.137, 6.138, 6.141, 6.214, 6.233, 6.249,
6.264, 6.289 Q.l (a) (b) Q. 2 Find the force exerted by a light beam of intensit
y I, incident on a cylinder (height h and base radius R) placed on a smooth surf
ace as shown infigureif: surface of cylinder i s perfectly reflecting surface of
cylinder is having reflection coefficient 0.8. (assume no transmission)
7
EXERCISE # II
I • > » t
—
A small plate of a metal (work function =1.17 eV) is placed at a distance of 2mf
roma monochromatic light source of wave length 4.8 * 10" m and power 1.0 watt. T
he light falls normally on the plate. Find the number of photons striking the me
tal plate per square meter per sec. If a constant uniform magnetic field of stre
ngth tesla is applied parallel to the metal surface. Find the radius of the larg
est circular path followed by the emitted photoelectrons.
A
Q. 3
Electrons in hydrogen like atoms (Z = 3) make transitions from thefifthto the fo
urth orbit & from the fourth to the third orbit. The resulting radiations are in
cident normally on a metal plate & eject photo electrons. The stopping potential
for the photoelectrons ejected by the shorter wavelength is 3.95 volts. Calcula
te the work function of the metal, & the stopping potential for the photoelectro
ns ejected by the longer wavelength. (Rydberg constant = 1.094 x 10 m )
7 1
Q.4
A beam of light has three wavelengths 4144A, 4972A & 6216 A with a total intensi
ty of 3.6x 10" W. m equally distributed amongst the three wavelengths. The beam
falls normally on an area 1.0 cm of a clean metallic surface of work function 2.
3 eV. Assume that there is no loss of light by reflection and that each energeti
cally capable photon ejects one electron. Calculate the number of photoelectrons
liberated in two seconds.
3 2 2
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
Q. 5
(i) Q.6
Monochromatic radiation of wavelength = 3 000A falls on a photocell operating in
saturating mode. The corresponding spectral sensitivity of photocell is J = 4.8
x 10~ A/w. When another monochromatic radiation of wavelength X = 1650A and pow
er P = 5 x 10~ W is incident, it is found that maximum velocity of photoelectron
s increases n = 2 times. Assuming efficiency of photoelectron generation per inc
ident photon to be same for both the cases, calculate threshold wavelength for t
he cell. , (ii) saturation current in second case.
3 2 3
(i) (ii) (iii) Q.7 (i) (ii) Q.8 Q. 9
A monochromatic point source S radiating wavelength 6000 A with SC power 2 watt,
an aperture A of diameter 0.1 m & a large screen SC are placed as shown in figu
re. Aphotoemissive detector D of surface area S D 0.5 cm is placed at the centre
ofthe screen. The efficiency ofthe detector for the photoelectron generation pe
r incident photon is 0.9. Calculate the photonfluxdensity at the centre of the s
creen and the p.6 m photocurrent in the detector. If a concave lens L of focal l
ength 0.6 m is inserted in the aperture as shown,findthe new values of photonflu
xdensity & photocurrent .Assume a uniform average transmission of 80% for the le
ns. If the work-function of the photoemissive surface is 1 eV, calculate the val
ues ofthe stopping potential in the two cases (without & with the lens in the ap
erture).
A 2 6 m
A small 10 W source of ultraviolet light of wavelength 99 nm is held at a distan
ce 0.1m from a metal surface. The radius of an atom ofthe metal is approximaterl
y 0.05 nm. Find : the number of photons striking an atom per second. the number
of photoelectrons emitted per second ifthe efficiency ofliberation of photoelect
rons is 1 % A neutron with kinetic energy 25 eV strikes a stationary deuteron. F
ind the de Broglie wavelengths of both particles in the frame of their centre of
mass. Two identical nonrelativistic particles move atrightangles to each other,
possessing De Broglie wavelengths, A, & Xj . Find the De Broglie wavelength of
each particle in theframeoftheir centre of mass.
+
Q.10 A stationary He ion emitted a photon corresponding to thefirstline its Lyma
n series. That photon liberated a photoelectronfroma stationary hydrogen atom in
the ground state. Find the velocity ofthe photoelectron. Q.ll A gas ofidentical
hydrogen like atoms has some atoms in the lowest (ground) energy level A & some
atoms in a particular upper (excited) energy level B& there are no atoms in any
other energy level. The atoms of the gas make transition to a higher energy lev
el by the absorbing monochromatic light of photon energy 2.7eV Subsequently, the
atoms emit radiation of only six different photon energies. Some of the emitted
photons have energy 2.7 eV. Some have energy more and some have less than 2.7 e
V. (i) Find the principal quantum number of the initially excited level B. (ii)
Find the ionisation energy for the gas atoms. (iii) Find the maximum and the min
imum energies of the emitted photons. Q.12 A hydrogen atom in ground state absor
bs a photon ofultraviolet radiation ofwavelength 50 nm. Assuming that the entire
photon energy is taken up by the electron, with what kinetic energy will the el
ectron be ejected ? Q.13 A monochromatic light source of frequency v illuminates
a metallic surface and ej ects photoelectrons. The photoelectrons having maximu
m energy are just able to ionize the hydrogen atoms in ground state. When the wh
ole experiment is repeated with an incident radiation offrequency(5/6)v, the pho
toelectrons so emitted are able to excite the hydrogen atom beam which then emit
s a radiation of wavelength of 1215 A. Find the work function ofthe metal and th
efrequencyv.
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
Q . 14 An energy of 68.0 eV is required to excite a hydrogen like atomfromits se
cond Bohr orbit to the third. The nuclear charge Ze. Find the value of Z, the ki
netic energy of the electron in the first Bohr orbit and the wavelength ofthe el
ectro magnetic radiation required to eiect the electronfromthefirstBohr orbit to
infinity. Q.15 A classical model for the hydrogen atom consists of a single ele
ctron of mass rn, in circular motion of radius r around the nucleus (proton). Si
nce the electron is accelerated, the atom continuously radiates electromagnetic
waves. The total power P radiated by the atom is given by P = Po/r where e P = o
Q , J 3 r 3 m 2 (C = velocity oflight) yon £q L, m (i) Find the total energy of t
he atom. (ii) Calculate an expression for the radius r (t) as a function oftime.
Assume that at t=0, the radius is r = 10" m. (iii) Hence or otherwisefindthe ti
me t•o when the a om collapses in a classical model ofthe hydrogen atom. Take V3 4
n s m C 2 = re «3xl0~ m
4 6
u
c
e
Q
10
0
1
15
0
e
Q.16 Simplified picture of electron energy levels in a certain atom is shown in
the figure. The atom is bombarded with high energy electrons. The impact of one
of these electron has caused the complete removal ofK-level is filled -M by an e
lectronfromthe L-level with a certain amount ofenergy being released during the
transition. This energy may appear as X-ray or may all be used to eject an M-lev
el electronfromthe atom. Find : ~* (i) the minimum potential difference through
which electron may be accelerated from rest to cause the ejectrion of K-level el
ectronfromthe atom. (ii) energy released when L-level electron moves tofillthe v
acancy in the K-level. (iii) wavelength ofthe X-ray emitted. (iv) K.E. ofthe ele
ctron emitted from the M-level.
3 10-15 J
Q. 17 U and U occur in nature in an atomic ratio 140 :1. Assuming that at the ti
me of earth's formation the two isotopes were present in equal amounts. Calculat
e the age ofthe earth. (Halflife o f u = 4.5 x lo yrs & that o f U = 7.13 x lo y
rs)
238 233 238 9 235 8
Q.18 The kinetic energy of an a - particle which flies out of the nucleus of a R
a atom in radioactive disintegration is 4.78 MeV. Find the total energy evolved
during the escape of the a - particle.
226
Q.19 A small bottle contains powdered beryllium Be & gaseous radon which is used
as a source of a-particles. Neutrons areproduced whena-particlesoftheradonreact
with beryllium. The yield ofthis reaction is (1/4000) i.e. only one a-particle
out of4000 induces the reaction. Find the amount ofradon (Rn ) originally introd
uced into the source, ifit produces 1.2x 10 neutrons per second after 7.6 days.
[T ofR =3.8 days]
222 6 17 n
Q.20 An experiment is done to determine the half-life of radioactive substance t
hat emits one p-particle for each decay process. Measurement show that an averag
e of 8.4 P are emitted each second by 2.5 mg ofthe substance. The atomic weight
ofthe substance is 230. Find the halflife ofthe substance. Q.21 When thermal neu
trons (negligible kinetic energy) are used to induce the reaction; 5°B + | n ——» 3 Li +
j He • ot - particles are emitted with an energy of 1.83 MeV. Given the masses of
boron neutron & He as 10.01167,1.00894 & 4.003 86 u respectively. What is the ma
ss of 3 Li ? Assume that particles are free to move after the collision.
3 4
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
Q.22 In a fusion reactor the reaction occurs in two stages : (i) Twodeuterium (
D) nuclei fuse to form a tritium (^T) nucleus with a proton as product. The reac
tion may be represented as D (D, p) T. (ii) A tritium nucleus fuses with another
deuterium nucleus to form a helium ( He) nucleus with neutron as another produc
t. The reaction is represented as T(D, n) a. Find : (a) The energy release in ea
ch stage . (b) The energy release in the combined reaction per deuterium & (c) W
hat % of the mass of the initial deuterium is released in the form of energy. Gi
ven: (fE>) = 2.014102u ; ( t ) = 3.016049u ; He) = 4.002603 u ; (}p)= 1.00785 u
; (j,n)= 1.008665 u
2 4 3
Q.23 A wooden piece of great antiquity weighs 50 gm and shows C activity of320 d
isintegrations per minute. Estimate the length ofthe time which has elapsed sinc
e this wood was part ofliving tree, assuming that living plants show a C activit
y of 12 disintegrations per minute per gm. The halflife of C is 5730 yrs.
14 14 14
Q.24 Show that in a nuclear reaction where the outgoing particle is scattered at
an angle of 90° with the direction of the bombarding particle, the Q-value is exp
ressed as f l > \ Q=K v o) - I v o; Where, I = incoming particle, P = product nu
cleus, T = target nucleus, O = outgoing particle.
+ m P l v i K M
Q.25 When Lithium is bombarded by 10 MeV deutrons, neutrons are observed to emer
ge at right angle to the direction of incident beam. Calculate the energy of the
se neutrons and energy and angle of recoil ofthe associated Beryllium atom. Give
n that : m ( n ) = 1.00893 amu ; m ( Li ) = 7.01784 amu ; m (jH ) = 2.01472 amu
; and m ^Be ) =.8.00776 amu.
0 ] 3 7 2 8
Q.26 A body of mass m is placed on a smooth horizontal surface. The mass of the
body is decreasing exponentially with disintegration constant X. Assuming that t
he mass is ejected backward with a relative velocity v. Initially the body was a
t rest. Find the velocity of body after time t.
0
Q.27 A radionuclide with disintegration constant X is produced in a reactor at a
constant rate a nuclei per sec. During each decay energy E is released. 20% oft
his energy is utilised in increasing the temperature of water. Find the increase
in temperature ofm mass ofwater in time t. Specific heat of water is S. Assume
that there is no loss of energy through water surface.
0
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
EXERCISE # III
Q.l (i) (ii) Q.2 A neutron of kinetic energy 65 eV collides inelastically with a
singly ionized helium atom at rest. It is scattered at an angle of 90° with respe
ct ofits original direction. Find the allowed values of the energy ofthe neutron
& that ofthe atom after collision. Ifthe atom gets de-excited subsequently by e
mitting radiation,findthefrequenciesofthe emitted radiation. (Given: Mass ofhe a
tom = 4x(mass ofneutron), ionization energy ofH atom=13.6 eV) [JEE '93] A hydrog
en like atom (atomic number Z) is in a higher excited state of quantum number n.
This excited atom can make a transition to thefirstexcited state by successivel
y emitting two photon s of energies 10.20 eV & 17.00 eV respectively. Alternativ
ely, the atom from the same excited state can make a transition to the second ex
cited state by successively emitting two photons of energies 4.25 eV& 5.95 eV re
spectively. Determine the values of n&Z. (Ionisation energy of hydrogen atom = 1
3.6eY)[JEE'94] Select the correct alternative(s): When photons of energy 4.25 eV
strike the surface of a metal A, the ejected photo electrons have maximum kinet
ic energy T eV and de-Broglie wave length y . The maximum kinetic energy of phot
o electrons liberated from another metal B by photons of energy 4.70 eV is T = (
T -1.50) eV. If the de-Broglie wave length of these photo electrons is y = 2y ,
then : (A) the work function of A is 2.225 eV (B) the work function ofB is 4 20
eV (C) T = 2.00 eV (D) T = 2.75 eV [JEE'94] In a photo electric effect set-up, a
point source of light of power 3.2 x 10" W emits mono energetic photons of ener
gy 5.0 eV. The source is located at a distance of 0.8 m from the centre of a sta
tionary metallic sphere of work function 3.0 eV&of radius 8.0 x 10" m.The effici
ency of photoelectrons emission is one for every 10 incident photons. Assume tha
t the sphere is isolated and initially neutral, and that photo electrons are ins
tantly swept away after emission. Calculate the number of photo electrons emitte
d per second. Find the ratio of the wavelength of incident light to the De-Brogl
ie wavelength ofthe fastest photo electrons emitted. It is observed that the pho
to electron emission stops at a certain time t after the light source is switche
d on. Why ? Evaluate the time t. [JEE' 95] An energy of 24.6 eV is required to r
emove one of the electrons from a neutral helium atom. The energy (In eV) requir
ed to remove both the electrons form a neutral helium atom is : (A) 38.2 (B) 49.
2 (C) 51.8 (D) 79.0 [JEE'95] An electron, in a hydrogen like atom, is inanexcite
dstate.lt has a total energy of-3.4 eV. Calculate: (i) The kinetic energy & (ii)
The De - Broglie wave length of the electron. [JEE 96] /1 g An electron in the
ground state of hydrogen atoms is revolving in \ anti-clockwise direction in a c
ircular orbit of radius R. Obtain an expression for the orbital magnetic dipole
moment ofthe electron. / ^ The atom is placed in a uniform magnetic induction, s
uch that the plane normal to the electron orbit make an angle of 3 0° with the mag
netic induction. Find \ the torque experienced by the orbiting electron. [JEE'96
]
A A B A B A a B 3 3 6 fi
Q. 3
Q.4
(a) (b) (c) (d) Q.5 Q.6 Q.7 (i) (ii) Q.8
A potential difference of 20 KV is applied across an x-raytube. The minimum wave
length ofX-rays generated is . [JEE'96]
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
Q. 9(i) As per Bohr model, the minimum energy (in eV) required to remove an elec
tron from the ground state of doubly ionized Li atom (Z = 3) is (A) 1.51 (B) 13.
6 (C) 40.8 (D) 122.4 (ii) Assume that the de-Broglie wave associated with an ele
ctron can form a standing wave between the atoms arranged in a one dimensional a
rray with nodes at each of the atomic sites, It is found that one such standing
wave is formed if the distance'd' between the atoms of the array is 2 A. A simil
ar standing wave is again formed if'd'is increased to 2.5 Abut not for any inter
mediate value of d. Find the energy ofthe electrons in electron volts and the le
ast value of d for which the standing wave ofthe type described above can form.
[JEE 97] Q. 10(i) The work function of a substance is 4.0 eV. The longest wavele
ngth oflight that can cause photoelectron emissionfromthis substance is approxim
ately: (A) 540 nm (B) 400nm (C) 310nm (D) 220nm (ii) The electron in a hydrogen
atom makes a transition n, > r^, where n, & n are the principal quantum numbers
of the two states. Assume the Bohr model to be valid . The time period ofthe ele
ctron in the initial state is eight times that in thefinalstate. The possible va
lues of n & n are: (A) ^ = 4,112 = 2 (B)n = 8,^ = 2 (C) n, = 8, r^ = 1 (D) n, =
6, r^ = 3 [JEE '98] Q.ll A particle ofmass M at rest decays into two particles o
f masses m and m , having non-zero velocities. The ratio of the de-Broglie wavel
engths of the particles, A.,/ X2, is
2 } 2 t l 2
( A ) ml / m2
{ B ) m2 / mx
( C ) 1.0
~
(D) ^ l m2 N ml [JEE '99]
Q.12 Photoelectrons are emitted when 400 nm radiation is incident on a surface o
f work function 1. 9eV. These photoelectrons pass through a region containing a-
particles. Amaximum energy electron combines with an a-particle to form a He ion
, emitting a single photon in this process. He ions thus formed are in their fou
rth excited state. Find the energies in eV ofthe photons, lying in the 2 to 4eV
range, that are likely to be emitted during and after the combination. [Take, h
= 4.14 x 10" eV-s] [JEE'99] Q. 13(a) Imagine an atom made up of a proton and a h
ypothetical particle of double the mass ofthe electron but having the same charg
e as the electron. Apply the Bohr atom model and consider all possible transitio
ns of this hypothetical particle to thefirstexcited level. The longest wavelengt
h photon that will be emitted has wavelength X (given in terms ofthe Rydberg con
stant R for the hydrogen atom) equal to (A) 9/(5R) (B) 36/(5R) (C) 18/(5R) (D)4/
R [JEE'2000 (Scr)] (b) The electron in a hydrogen atom makes a transitionfroman
excited state to the ground state. Which of the following statements is true? (A
) Its kinetic energy increases and its potential and total energies decrease. (B
) Its kinetic energy decreases, potential energy increases and its total energy
remains the same. (C) Its kinetic and total energies decrease and its potential
energy increases. (D) Its kinetic, potential and total energies decrease. [JEE'
2000 (Scr)]
+ + 15
Q.l 4(a) A hydrogen-like atom of atomic number Z is in an excited state of quant
um number 2 n. It can emit a maximum energy photon of204 eV. If it makes a trans
ition to quantum state n, a photon of energy 40.8 eV is emitted. Find n, Z and t
he ground state energy (in eV) for this atom. Also, calculate the minimum energy
(in eV) that can be emitted by this atom during de-excitation. Ground state ene
rgy of hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. [JEE 2000] (b) When a beam of 10.6 eV photon o
f intensity 2 W/m falls on aplatinum surface of area 1 x 10 m and work function
5.6 ev, 0.53% of the incident photons eject photoelectrons. Find the number of p
hotoelectrons emitted per sec and their minimum and maximum energies in eV. [JEE
' 2000]
1 2 4 2
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
Q.15 The potential difference applied to an X - ray tube is 5 kV and the current
through it is 3.2 mA. Then the number of electrons striking the target per seco
nd is [JEE' 2002 (Scr.)] (A) 2 x 10 (B) 5 x 10 (C)lxlO (D) 4 x 10 Q.16 A Hydroge
n atom and Li ion are both in the second excited state. If l and l are their res
pective electronic angular momenta, and E and E their respective energies, then
(A) / > l and |E | > |E | (B) / = l and |E | < |EJ (C) / = l and-|E | > |EJ (D)
/ < l and IEJ < |EJ [JEE 2002 (Scr)] Q.17 A hydrogen like atom (described by the
Bohr model) is observed to emit six wavelengths, originating from all possible
transition between a group oflevels. These levels have energies between - 0.85 e
V and - 0.544 eV (including both these values) (a) Find the atomic number ofthe
atom. (b) Calculate the smallest wavelength emitted in these transitions. [JEE'
2002] Q.18 Two metallic plates A and B each of area 5 x 10 m , are placed at a s
eparation of 1 cm. Plate B carries a positive charge of33.7 x 10~ C. A monochrom
atic beam oflight, with photons of energy 5 eV each, starts falling on plate A a
t t = 0 so that 10 photons fall on it per square meter per second. Assume that o
ne photoelectron is emitted for every 10 incident photons. Also assume that all
the emitted photoelectrons are collected by plate B and the work function of pla
te Aremains constant at the value 2 eV. Determine (a) the number of photoelectro
ns emitted up to t = 10 sec. (b) the magnitude ofthe electricfieldbetween the pl
ates A and B at t = 10 s and (c) the kinetic energy of the most energetic photoe
lectron emitted at t = 10 s when it reaches plate B. (Neglect the time taken by
photoelectron to reach plate B) [JEE' 2002] Q.19 The attractive potential for an
atom is given by v = v In (r / r ), v and r are constant and r is the radius of
the orbit. The radius r of the n Bohr's orbit depends upon principal quantum nu
mber n as : (A)rocn (B) r°c 1/n (C)rxn (D)roc 1/n [JEE' 2003 (Scr)] Q. 20 Frequenc
y of a photon emitted due to transition of electron of a certain elemrnt from L
to K shell is found to be 4.2 x 10 Hz. Using Moseley's law,findthe atomic number
of the element, given that the Rydberg's constant R = 1.1 x 10 mr1. [JEE 2003]
Q.21 In a photoelctric experiment set up, photons of energy 5 eV falls on the ca
thode having work function 3 eV (a) If the saturation current is i = 4pA for int
ensity 10~ W/m , then plot a graph between anode potential and current. (b) Also
draw a graph for intensity of incident radiation of 2 x 10" W/m ? [JEE'2003] Q.
22 A star initially has 10 deutrons. It produces energy via, the processes H + j
H —>• jH + p & jH +,H -» He +n. If the average power radiated by the star is 10 W, the
deuteron supply of the star is exhausted in a time of the order of: [JEE' 93 ]
(A) 10 sec (B) 10 sec (C) 10 sec (D)10 sec Q. 23 A small quantity of solution co
ntaining Na radionuclide (halflife 15 hours) of activity 1.0 microcurie is injec
ted into the blood of a person. A sample ofthe blood of volume 1 cm taken after
5 hours shows an activity of296 disintegrations per minute. Determine the total
volume ofblood in the body of the person. Assume that the radioactive solution m
ixes uniformly in the blood of the person. (1 Curie = 3.7 x 10 disintegrations p
er second) [JEE'94] Q.24(i)Fast neutrons can easily be slowed down by : (A) the
use of lead shielding (B) passing them through water (C) elastic collisions with
heavy nuclei (D) applying a strong electric field
16 16 17 15 ++ E u R Li H u H U H u H H u H h u -4 2 !2 16 6 0 0 0 Q th 2 2 18 7
A 5 2 5 2 40 } 2 2 3 2 3 2 4 16 6 8 12 16 24 3 10
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
(ii) Q. 2 5
Q.26 Q.27 (i) (ii) Q.28
Consider a-particles, P - particles&y rays, each having an energy of 0.5 MeV. In
creasing order of penetrating powers, the radiations are : [JEE'94] (A) a , P ,
y (B) a , y, (3 (C)(3,y,a (D)y,p,a Which ofthe following statement(s) is (are) c
orrect ? [JEE'94] (A) The rest mass of a stable nucleus is less than the sum of
the rest masses of its separated nucleons. (B) The rest mass of a stable nucleus
is greater than the sum ofthe rest masses ofits separated nucleons. (C) In nucl
ear fusion, energy is released by fusion two nuclei ofmedium mass (approximately
100 amu). (D) In nuclearfission,energy is released byfragmentationof a very hea
vy nucleus. The binding energy per nucleon of 160 is 7.97 MeV & that of ,70 is 7
.75 MeV. The energy in MeV required to remove a neutron from 170 is : [JEE'95] (
A) 3.52 (B) 3.64 (C) 4.23 (D) 7.86 At a given instant there are 25 % undecayed r
adio-active nuclei in a sample. After 10 sec the number of undecayed nuclei rema
ins to 12.5 % . Calculate : [JEE 96] mean - life ofthe nuclei and The time in wh
ich the number ofundecayed nuclear will further reduce to 6.25 % ofthe reduced n
umber. Consider the following reaction ; ^ ^ H , = He + Q . [JEE 96] Mass ofthe
deuterium atom = 2.0141 u ; Mass ofthe helium atom = 4.0024 u This is a nuclear
reaction in which the energy Q is released is MeV.
4 2
Q.29(a)The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emittedfroma surface when ph
otons of energy 6 eV fall on it is 4 eV The stopping potential in Volts is : (A)
2 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 10 (b) In the following, column I lists some physical quantit
ies & the column II gives approx. energy values associated with some of them. Ch
oose the appropriate value of energyfromcolumn II for each ofthe physical quanti
ties in column I and write the corresponding letter A, B, C etc. against the num
ber (i), (ii), (iii), etc. of the physical quantity in the answer book. In your
answer, the sequence of column I should be maintained. Column I Column II (i) En
ergy ofthermal neutrons (A) 0.025 eV (ii) Energy of X-rays (B) 0.5 eV (iii) Bind
ing energy per nucleon (C) 3 eV (iv) Photoelectric threshold of metal (D) 20 eV
(E)10keV (F) 8 MeV (c) The element Curium Cm has a mean life of 10 seconds. Its
primary decay modes are spontaneous fission and a decay, the former with a proba
bility of 8% and the latter with a probability of 92%. Each fission releases 200
MeV of energy. The masses involved in a decay are as follows : ggCm=248.072220u
, ^Pu=244.0641 OOu&jHe =4.002603u. Calculate the power output from a sample of 1
0 Cm atoms. (1 u = 931 MeV/c ) [JEE'97] Q.30 Select the correct alternative(s) .
[JEE'98] (i) Let m be the mass of a proton, m the mass of a neutron, M, the mas
s of a ^Ne nucleus & M the mass of a ^Ca nucleus. Then : (A) M = 2 Mj (B) M > 2
Mj (C) M < 2 Mj (D) M < 10 (m + m ) (ii) The half-life of I is 8 days. Given a s
ample of 1 at time t = 0, we can assert that: (A) no nucleus will decay before t
= 4 days (B) no nucleus will decay before t = 8 days (C) all nuclei will decay
before t = 16 days (D) a given nucleus may decay at any time after t = 0.
13 2 2 20 2 p n 2 2 2 2 l n p 131 131
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
Q.31 Nuclei ofa radioactive element A are being produced at a constant rate a .
The element has a decay constant X. At time t = 0, there are N nuclei of the ele
ment. (a) Calculate the number N of nuclei of A at time t. (b) If a=2N ?t, calcu
late the number ofnuclei ofA after one halflife ofA & also the limiting value of
N as t-*». [JEE '98] E Y O n Q.32(a) Binding energy per nucleon vs. mass number cu
rve for nuclei is shown in the figure. W, X, Y and Z are four nuclei indicated o
n the curve. The process that would release energy is (A) Y —> 2Z (B) W —> X + Z 30
60 90 120 (C)W-» 2Y (D) X — Y + Z Mass Number of Nuclei (b) Order of magnitude of de
nsity of Uranium nucleus is, [m = 1.67 x 10~ kg] (A) 10 kg/m (B) 10 kg/m (C) 10
kg/m (D) 10 kg/m (c) Ne nucleus, after absorbing energy, decays into two a-parti
cles and an unknown nucleus. The unknown nucleus is (A) nitrogen (B) carbon (C)
boron (D) oxygen (d) Which of the following is a correct statement? (A) Beta ray
s are same as cathode rays (B) Gamma rays are high energy neutrons. (C) Alpha pa
rticles are singly ionized helium atoms (D) Protons and neutrons have exactly th
e same mass (E) None (e) The half-life period of a radioactive element X is same
as the mean-life time of another radioactive element Y. Initially both of them
have the same number of atoms. Then (A) X & Y have the same decay rate initially
(B) X & Y decay at the same rate always (C) Y will decay at a faster rate than
X (D) X will decay at a faster rate than Y [JEE'99] Q.33 Two radioactive materia
ls Xj and X have decay constants 10X. and X respectively. Ifinitially they have
the same number of nuclei, then the ratio ofthe number of nuclei ofXj to that of
Xj will be 1/e after a time (A) 1/(10X) (B) 1/(1 IX) (C) 11/(1 OA,) (D)1/(9A) [
JEE'2000 (Scr)] Q.34 The electron emitted in beta radiation originates from [JEE
'2001(Scr)] (A) inner orbits of atoms (B)freeelectrons existing in nuclei (C) de
cay of a neutron in a nucleus (D) photon escapingfromthe nucleus Q.35 The half-l
ife of At is 100 ps. The time taken for the radioactivity of a sample o f At to
decay to 1/16 of its initial value is [JEE 2002 (Scr)] (A) 400 ps ( B ) 6.3 ps (
C) 40 ps (D) 300 ps Q.36 Which of the following processes represents a gamma - d
ecay? [JEE 2002 (Scr)] (A) X + y > X _ ! + a + b (B) X +in - * - XZ - 2 „ + C (C)
x — > x + / ( D ) X + e_! v -> X i + 8 Q.37 The volume and mass of a nucleus are r
elated as [JEE 2003 (Scr)] (A) v qc m (B) v cc 1/m (C) v cc m (D) v oc 1/m Q.38
The nucleus of element X (A= 220) undergoes a-decay. If Q-value ofthe reaction i
s 5.5 MeV, then the kinetic energy of a-particle is : [JEE 2003 (Scr)] (A) 5.4Me
V (B)10.8MeV (C)2.7MeV (D)None Q.39 A radioactive sample emits n P-particles in
2 sec. In next 2 sec it emits 0.75 n P-particles, what is the mean life ofthe sa
mple? [JEE 2003 ]
0 0
1
p
27
20
3
17
3
14
3
n
3
22
2
215
215
th
A
Z
A
Z
A
z
0
A
A
3
7
A
z
A
z
A
z
2
2
2
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
Q.40 The wavelength of K X-ray of an element having atomic number z = 11 is X. T
he wavelength of K X-ray of another element of atomic number z' is 4A. Then z' i
s (A) 11 (B) 44 (C) 6 (D) 4 [JEE 2005 (Scr)] Q. 41 A photon of 10.2 eV energy co
llides with a hydrogen atom in ground state inelastically. After few microsecond
s one more photon of energy 15 eV collides with the same hydrogen atomThen what
can be detected by a suitable detector. (A) one photon of 10.2 eV and an electro
n of energy 1.4 eV (B) 2 photons of energy 10.2 eV (C) 2 photons of energy 3.4 e
V (D) 1 photon of 3.4 eVand one electron of 1.4 eV [JEE 2005 (Scr)] Q. 42 Helium
nuclie combines to form an oxygen nucleus. The binding energy per nucleon ofoxy
gen nucleus is if m = 15.834 amu and m = 4,0026 amu (D) 4 MeV (A) 10.24 MeV (B)0
MeV (C) 5.24 MeV [JEE 2005 (Scr)] Q. 43 The potential energy of a particle of ma
ss m is given by V(x)= E„ 0 < x < 1 x >1 Xl and X2 are the de-Broglie wavelengths
of the particle, when 0 < x < 1 and x > 1 respectively. If the total energy of p
article is 2E , find X / X . [JEE 2005] Q. 44 Highly energetic electrons are bom
barded on a target of an element containing 3 0 neutrons. The ratio of radii of
nucleus to that of helium nucleus is (14) . Find (a) atomic number of the nucleu
s (b) the frequency of K line ofthe X-ray produced. (R= l.lx 10 m andc = 3 x 10
m/s) [JEE 2005] Q.45 Given a sample of Radium-226 having half-life of 4 days. Fi
nd the probability, a nucleus disintegrates within 2 half lives. (A) 1 (B) 1/2 (
C) 3/4 (D) 1/4 [JEE 2006]
x a 0 He 1 0
l
2
1/3
a
7
_1
8
Q .46 The graph between 1IX and stopping potential (V) ofthree metals having wor
k functions (j^, (J> and <j) in an experiment of photometal 2 metal 3 electric e
ffect is plotted as shown in the figure. Which of the following statement(s) is/
are correct? [Here X is the wavelength of the incident ray]. (A) Ratio of work f
unctions : <j) : <t> = 1:2 : 4 0.001 0.002 0.004 l/X (B) Ratio of work functions
()>, : <j) : (j) = 4 : 2 : 1 (C) tan 9 is directly proportional to hc/e, where
h is Planck's constant and c is the speed of light (D) The violet colour light c
an eject photoelectrons from metals 2 and 3. [JEE 2006]
2 3 2 3 2 3
Q. 47 In hydrogen-like atom (z = 11), n line of Lyman series has wavelength X eq
ual to the de-Broglie's wavelength of electron in the levelfromwhich it originat
ed. What is the value of n? [JEE 2006]
th
Q. 4 8 Match the following Columns Column 1 (A) Nuclear fusion (B) Nuclear fissi
on (C) (3-decay (D) Exothermic nuclear reaction
Column 2 (P) Converts some matter into energy (Q) Generally occurs for nuclei wi
th low atomic number (R) Generally occurs for nuclei with higher atomic number (
S) Essentially proceeds by weak nuclear forces
[JEE 2006]
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
ANSWER KEY Q.l Q.4 Q.5 Q.9 885 Q.2 (a) 2.25eV, (b) 4.2eV, (c)2.0 eV, 0.5 eV Q.3
(a) 0.6 volt, (b)2.0mA when the potential is steady, photo electric emission jus
t stop when hu = (3 + l)eV = 4.0 eV 5.76 x 1 0 A Q.6 15/8 V Q.7 487.06nm Q.8 4.2
6m/s, 13.2eV
_n
EXERCISE # I
Q.ll
12
7:36
23 2
Q.10 22.8 nm
X { X2 Aî + X 2
Q.12 18/(5R) Q.16 2eV, 6.53 x lO- J-s
34 n
Q.13 1.257 x 1CT Am Q.17 5 Q , i 9 " z = 3,n = 7 Q.23 (T = 10.8 sec)
1/2
5 1020 Q.14 2.48 xlO" m Q.15 16' 8071
Q.18 (i) 5, 16.5 eV, 36.4A, 340 eV, - 6 8 0 eV, — 1 . 0 6 x l 0 ~ m 2tc Q.20 54.4
eV Q.21 n = 3 , 3 : 1 Q.22 23.6 MeV Q.24 (i) ? °K —•> Ar + e° + v (ii) 4.2 x 10 years
9 +1 9
Q.25 t = / n 2
v
y
Q.26 8/3xlO sec Q.27 1.14 x 10 sec
18 18
38IRh Q.l 8IhR/3C Q.2 4.8 x 10 , 4.0 cm Q.3 1.99 eV, 0.760 V Q.4 1.1 x io Q.5 (i
) 4125A, (ii) 13.2 pA Q.6 (i) 1,33 x 10 photons/m -s ; 0.096 pA(ii) 2.956 x io p
hotons/m s ; 0.0213 pA(iii) 1.06 volt Q.7 (i) 5/16 photon/sec, (ii) 5/1600'elect
rons/sec Q.8 Xdeutron ""neutron ^ ' ^ P ^
1 5 C 16 12 16 2 15 2 A
EXERCISE # II
Q.28 -h/eEt
2
Q.9 X = yjx +x 2 Q.10 3.1 x 10 m/s Q.ll (i) 2; (ii) 23.04 xlO- J; (iii) 4 1 , 4
- > 3 Q.12 11.24 eV Q.13 6.8 eV, 5 x l 0 H z Q.14 489.6 eV, 25.28A { „ r 1 e ,1 3C
r t \ Q15 (i)- 87i8 r (ii) o , (iii) 10" x 100 sec 81 'o J v Q. 16 (i) 1.875 x i
o V, (ii) 2.7 x 10" J, (iii) 0.737 A, (iv) 2.67 x 10" J Q.17 6.04 x io yrs Q.18
4.87MeV Q.19 3 . 3 x l 0 - g Q.20 1.7 x io years Q.21 7.01366 amu Q.22 (a) 4 MeV
, 17.6 (b) 7.2 MeV (c) 0.384 % Q.23 5196 yrs Q.25 Energy ofneutron = 19.768 MeV;
Energy ofBeryllium= 5.0007 MeV; Angle of recoil = tan" (1.034) or 46°
2 { 6 !9 15 z2
2 1 / 3
r
e
~
10
0
4
15
15 6
9
10
1
Q.26 v = uXt
Q.27 AT
0.2Er mS
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
EXERCISE # III
Q.l (i) Allowed values of energy of neutron = 6.36 eV and 0.312 eV; Allowed valu
es of energy of He atom = 17.84 eV and 16.328 eV, (ii) 18.23 x 10 Hz, 9.846 x 10
Hz, 11.6 x 10 Hz Q.2 n = 6, Z = 3 Q.3 B, C Q.4 (a) 10 s" ; (b) 286.18 ; (d) 111
s he ehB Q.5 D Q.6 (i) KE = 3.4 eV, (ii) A = 6.66 A Q.7 (i) 47tm (ii) 871m Q.8
0.61 C (ii) A, D A Q.9 (i)D, Q.ll C (ii) KE= 151 eV, d =0.5 A Q 10 (i) Q 12 duri
ng combination = 3.365 eV; after combination = 3 .88 eV (5 -> 3) & 2.63 eV (4 ->
3) Q 13 (a)C, (b)A Q 14 (a) n = 2, z = 4; GS.E. - 217.6 eV; Min. energy =10.58
eV; (b) 6.25x 10 per sec, 0, 5 eV Q.16 B Q.17 3,4052.3 nm Q.18 5xl0 ,2000N./C, 2
3 eV Q 15 A 1
15 15 15 5 1 least 19 7
8|IA
1=2x10- W/m
5
2
Q.19 A Q.22 C Q.26 C Q.28 Fusion, 24
Q.20 z = 42 Q.23 6 litre
v
Q.21
-2V
1=10 W/m
-5
2
V
P
Q.24 (i)B,(ii)A
v y
Q.25 A, D
Q.27 (i) t1/2 = 10 sec.,' tmeans = 14.43 s (ii) 40 seconds ^ Q.29 (a) B, (b) (i)
- A, (ii) - E, (iii) -F, (iv) - C, (c) = 33.298 pW
1 Q.31 (a) N = — [a (1 X
e~ )+ X N 0 e~ X t ]
lt
Q.30 (i) C, D (ii) D
(b) 3N 2 N — 2
0
Q.32 (a) C ;(b) B ;(c) B;(d) E; (e) C Q.34 C Q.38 A Q.41 A Q.45 C Q.35 A
0
Q.33 D Q.37 A
2 4
Q.36 C
In
Q.44
Q.39 1.75n-N (l e" ^, 6.95 sec, Q.42 A Q.46 A,C Q.43 V2 Q.47 n = 24
Q.40 C
v
= 1.546 x 10 Hz
18
Q 48 (A) P, Q; (B) P, R; (C) S, P; (D) P, Q, R
<i§Bansal Classes
Modern Physics
[11]
BANSAL CLASSES
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XI (P, Q, R, S)
PARTICLE DYNAMICS
CONTENTS
CIRCULAR MOTION & WORK POWER ENERGY
KEY CONCEPT EXERCISE-I EXERCISE-II EXERCISE-III
KEY CONCEPT.. EXERCISE-I EXERCISE-II EXERCISE-III
NEWTONS LAW FORCE & FRICTION
Page-2 Page -4 Page -6 Page -7
KEY CONCEPT EXERCISE-I EXERCISE-II EXERCISE-III
CENTRE OF MASS MOMENTUM & COLLISION
. Page Page Page Page -18 -20 -22 -24
Page Page Page Page
-9 -11 -13 -15
ANSWER KEY
Page -26
1. (i)
FORCE There are, basically, five forces, which are commonly encountered in mecha
nics. Weight: Weight of an obj ect is the force with which earth attracts it. It
is also called the force of gravity or the gravitational force. GMm Contact For
ce: When two bodies come in contact they exert forces on each other that is call
ed contact forces. (a) Normal force (N): It is the component of contact force no
rmal to the surface. It measures how strongly the surfaces in contact are presse
d together. , t^Vi (b) Frictional force: It is the component of contact force pa
rallel to the surface. | It opposes the relative motion (or attempted motion) of
the two surfaces in contact. N
N F
KEY CONCEPT
(ii)
(iii) (iv) 2. 3. 4.
Tension: The force exerted by the end of a taut string, rope or chain is called
the tension. The direction oftension is to pull the body while that of normal re
action is to push the body. Spring force: The force exerted by a spring is given
by F = - kx, where x is the change in length and k is the stiffness constant or
spring constant (units Nm ).
-1
NEWTON'S LAWS Newton's First Law: Every particle continues in its state of rest
or of uniform motion in a straight line unless it is compelled to change that st
ate by the action of an applied force. Newton's Second Law : F = ma
net
Newton's Third Law: Whenever two bodies interact they exert forces on each other
which are equal in magnitude and opposite in direction. So whenever body A exer
ts a force F on body B, B exerts a force-F on A. Inertial Reference Frame: A ref
erence frame in which Newton's first law is valid is called an inertial referenc
e frame. An inertial frame is either at rest or moving with uniform velocity. No
n-Inertial Frame: An acceleratedframeofreference is called a non-inertialframe.O
bjects in noninertialframesdo not obey Newton's first law. Pseudo Force: It is a
n imaginary force which is recognized only by a non-inertial observer to explain
the physical situation according to Newton's law The magnitude ofthis force F i
s equal to the product of the mass m of the object and acceleration a ofthe fram
e of reference. The direction of the force is opposite to the direction of accel
eration. F = - ma The force of friction comes into action only when there is a r
elative motion between the two contact surfaces or when an attempt is made to ha
ve it. The force offrictionon each body is in a direction opposite to its motion
(existing or impending) relative to other body.
p p
(!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[6]
Static friction: The frictional force acting between any two surfaces at rest wi
th respect to each other is called the force of staticfriction(f ).
s
where p is the static coefficient of friction.
s
Kinetic friction: The frictional force acting between surfaces in relative motio
n with respect to each other is called the force of kinetic friction or slidingf
riction(f ).
k
(f )max . Rest.
s
Relative Motion
where p is the coefficient ofkinetic friction.
k
Angle of friction (<j>): Mathematically, the angle offriction((j>) may be define
d as the angle between the normal reaction N and the resultant ofthe maximumfric
tionforce f and the normal reaction. Thus tancj) = N Since f = pN, therefore, ta
n (j) = p
(!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[6]
(NEWTONS LAW FORCE & FRICTION) EXERCISE-I
Q.l Q.2 A block ofmass 1 kg is stationary with respect to a conveyor belt that i
s accelerating with 1 m/s upwards at an angle of30° as shown infigure.Determine fo
rce of friction on block and contact force between the block & bell.
2
A man ofmass 63 kg is pulling a mass M by an inextensible light rope passing thr
ough a smooth and massless pulley as shown in figure. The coefficient of frictio
n between the man and the ground is p = 3/5. Find the maximum value of M that ca
n be pulled by the man without slipping on the ground. Two blocks A and B ofmass
m 10 kg and 20 kg respectively are placed as shown infigure.Coefficient offrict
ionbetween all the surfaces is 0.2. Then find tension in string and acceleration
of block B. (g = 10 m/s )
2
Q.3 Q.4
Q.5
An inclined plane makes an angle 30° with the horizontal. A groove OA = 5m cut in
the plane makes an angle 30° with OX. A short smooth cylinder isfreeto slide down
the influence ofgravity. Find the time taken by the cylinder to reach from A to
O. (g = 10 m/s ) Same spring is attached with 2 kg, 3 kg and 1 kg blocks in thre
e different cases as shown in figure. If x,, x and x be the constan extensions i
n the spring in these three cases thenfindthe ratio oftheir extensions. ////////
//////// llllllll
2 0 3
Q.6
(a) (b) (c) A rope of length L has its mass per unit length X varies according t
o the function • X (x) = e . The rope is pulled by a constant force of IN on a smo
oth horizontal /777777777777777777777777I N smooth surface. Find the tension in
the rope at x = L/2. LLLILLL
x/L
2 k g • C]2 kg
I
3 kgQJ Q 2 k g
1 k g C2] C ] 2 k g
Q.7 Q.8 Q.9
In figure shown, both blocks are released from rest. Find the time to cross each
other? A man of mass 50 kg is pulling on a plank of mass 100 kg kept on a smoot
h floor as shown with force of 100 N. If both man & plank move together,findforc
e offrictionacting on man. In thefigure,what should be mass m so that block A sl
ide up with a constant velocity?
M = 1/6
t
2*0
4 kg
1 kg 50 kg
4m
100 kg H - 0 77777777Z7777777777777
L
5H
Q.10 What should be minimum value of F so that 2 kg slides on ground but 1 kg do
es not slide on it? [g = 10 m/sec ]
2
H=0.5
Wrr
n=o.5 1kg —»F 2kg— t t t t
|.i=0.1
(!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[6]
Q.ll In figure shown, pulleys are ideal nij > 2 m . Initially the system is in e
quilibrium and string connecting m to rigid support below is cut. Find the initi
al acceleration of m ?
2 2 2
umm
Q.12 Find the reading of spring balance as shown in figure. Assume that mass M i
s in equilibrium Q.13 At what acceleration of the trolley will the string makes
an angle of 37° with vertical if a small mass is attached to bottom of string. Q.1
4 At what value of m will 8 kg mass be at rest.
t
spring ^ balance
/^gp
Q.15 What force must man exert on rope to keep platform in equilibrium? Q.16 Inc
lined plane is moved towards right with an acceleration of 5 ms as shown in figu
re. Find force in newton which block of mass 5 kg exerts on the incline plane.
-2
man 50 kg platform, 40 kg
777^7777777777777777777"
___
37° (
A
5 m/s :
Q.17 Find force in newton whi ch mass A exerts on mass B if B is moving towards
right with 3 ms .
-2
Q.18 Force F is applied on upper pulley. If F = 30t where t is time in second. F
ind the time when m, loses contact with floor.
A
i m,
r i
=30tN
„ . <37° B
/1kg 3 m/s
2
Q.19 Ablockofmass 1 kg is horizontally thrown with a velocity of lOm/s on a stat
ionary long plank of mass 2 kg whose surface has a p = 0.5. Plank rests on frict
ionless surface. Find the time when mj comes to rest w.r.t. plank. JmL Q.20 Bloc
k M slides down on frictionless incline as shown. Find the minimum fiiction coef
ficient so that m does not slide with respect to M. Q.21 The coefficient of stat
ic and kinetic friction between the two blocks and also between the lower block
and the ground are p = 0.6 and p = 0.4. Find the value of tension T applied on t
he lower block at which the upper block begins to slip relative to lower block.
s k
m,=4kg, m,=lkg
M=2kg ( ^ 1 = 0 . 6 , ^ = 0 . 4 ) M=2kg T
(!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[6]
Q.22 Three identical rigid circular cylinders A, B and C are arranged on smooth
inclined surfaces as shown in figure. Find the least value of G that prevent the
arrangement from collapse.
^Trmtimrmm Q.23 Two men A and B of equal mass held on to the free ends of a mass
less rope which passes over a frictionless light pulley. Man Aclimbs up the rope
with acceleration a relative to the rope while man B hangs on without climbing.
Find the acceleration ofthe man B with respect to ground. Q.24 A thin rod of le
ngth 1 m is fixed in a vertical position inside a train, which is moving horizon
tally with constant acceleration 4 m/s . A bead can slide on the rod, andfrictio
ncoefficient between them is 1/2. If the bead is releasedfromrest at the top of
the rod, find the time when it will reach at the bottom. Q.25 Abody of mass M =
5kg rests on a horizontal plane having coefficient of fiction p = 0.5. At t = 0
a horizontal force F is applied that varies with time as F = 5t. Find the time i
nstant t at which motion starts and also find the distance of particle from star
ting point at t = 6 second.
2 0
Q.l (a) (b) Q.2
A block ofmass m lies on wedge ofmass M as shown in figure. Answer following par
ts separately. With what minimum acceleration must the wedge be moved towards ri
ght horizontally so that block m falls freely. Find the minimumfrictioncoefficie
nt required between wedge M and ground so that it does not move while block m sl
ips down on it. A 20 kg block B is suspendedfroma cord attached Sc to a 40 kg ca
rt A. Find the ratio of the acceleration <3of the block in cases (i) & (ii) show
n in figure A ~ A 1 immediately after the system is releasedfromrest, (neglect f
riction) Case (ii) Case (i) The masses of blocks A and B are same and equal to m
. Friction is absent everywhere. Find the normal force with which block B presse
s on the wall and accelerations of the blocks A and B. The system shown adj acen
t is in equilibrium. Find the acceleration of the blocks A, B & C all of equal m
asses m at the instant when (Assume springs to be ideal) (a) The spring between
ceiling & A is cut. (b) The string (inextensible) between A & B is cut. (c) The
spring between B & C is cut. Alsofindthe tension in the string when the system i
s at rest and in the above 3 cases. In the system shown. Find the initial accele
ration ofthe wedge of mass 5 M. The pulleys are ideal and the cords are inextens
ible. (there is nofrictionanywhere). The system is releasedfromrest in the posit
ion shown. Calculate the tension T in the cord and the acceleration a of the 30
kg block in the position shown. The small pulley attached to the block has negli
gible mass and friction. 37°
B A
EXERCISE-II
Q.3 Q. 4
uumu'uu
Q.5 Q. 6
[M!
(!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[6]
Aplank ofmass m is kept on a smooth inclined plane. Aman ofmass r\ times the mas
s of plank moves on the plank, starts from A, such that the plank is at rest, w.
r.t. the inclined plane. Ifhe reaches the other end B of the plank in t=5sec. Th
en find the 9=sin~'(3/20) acceleration & the value of r|, ifthe length ofthe pla
nk is 50m. Q. 8 Two horizontal blocks each ofmass 1 12 kg are connected by a mas
sless, inextensible string of length 2m and placed on a long horizontal table. T
he coefficient of static & kineticfrictionare shown in tlie figure. Initially if
lL B the blocks are at rest. If the leading block is pulled with a time dependen
t (.1=0.6 H=0.4 horizontal force F= kt i where k=lN/sec., determine H =0.2 H =0.
4 (a) The plots of acceleration of each block with time from t = 0 to t = 1 Osec
(b) Velocity of blocks at t = lOsec. (c) Distance transversed by the blocks in
the time interval t = 0 to t = 1 Osec. (d) If F stops acting at t = 1 Osec. find
after how much further time would B collide with A. Q.9 m, = 20kg, m = 30kg. m,
is on smooth surface. m, in, Surface between m, and m has p = 0.5 and 0.3. Find
the acceleration of m, and m for m, m the following cases IIII1IHIIIIIIIIIIIIII
I lllllllllllllllllllllll (a) (i) F = 160 N, (ii) F = 175 N ; (b) F = 160N (a) (
b) Q.10 A system of masses is shown in the figure with masses & co-efficients of
frictionindicated. Calculate: the maximum value of F for which there is no slipp
ing anywhere. (i) j'c ^kgV^ ' the minimum value of F for which B slides on C. (i
ii) the minimum value of F for which A slips on B. Q.ll A car begins to move at
time t = 0 and then accelerates along a straight track with a speed given by V(t
) = 2t ms- for 0 < t < 2 After the end of acceleration, the car continues to mov
e at a constant speed. A small block initially at rest on the floor of the car b
egins to slip at t = 1 sec. and stops slipping at t = 3 sec. Find the coefficien
t of static and kinetic friction between the block and the floor. Q.12 A smooth
right circular cone of semi vertical angle a = tan (5/12) is at rest on a horizo
ntal plane. A rubber ring of mass 2.5kg which requires a force of 15N for an ext
ension of 10cm is placed on the cone. Find the increase inthe radius of the ring
in equilibrium. Q.13 The collar of mass m slides up the vertical shaft under th
e action of a force F of constant magnitude but variable direction of 6 = kt whe
re k is a constant and ifthe collar starts from rest with 9 = 0, determine the m
agnitude F of the force that will result in the collar coming to rest as 9 reach
es n/2. The coefficient of kinetic friction between the collar and the shaft is
p .
k
Q. 7
k
2
2
s
2
2
If f
0 1
2
1
_1
k
Q.l
A block of mass 0.1 kg is held against a wall by applying a horizontal force of
5N on the block. If the coefficient offrictionbetween the block and the wall is
0.5, the magnitude ofthefrictionalforce acting on the block is (A) 2.5N (B) 0.98
N (C) 4.9N (D)0.49N [JEE 1997]
EXERCISE-III
(!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[6]
Q.2
Block A of mass m and block B of mass 2m are placed on a fixed triangular wedge
by means of a massless inextensible string and africtionlesspulley as shown in t
he figure. The wedge is inclined at 45° to the horizontal on both sides. The coeff
icient of friction between block A and the wedge is 2/3 and that between block B
and the wedge is 1/3. If the system ofA and B is releasedfromrest, fmd (i) the
acceleration ofA, (ii) tension in the string, (iii) the magnitude and the direct
ion offrictionacting on A. [JEE 1997]
Q.3
A spring of force constant k is cut into two pieces such that one piece such tha
t one piece is double the length of the other. Then the long piece will have a f
orce constant of (A) (2/3) k (B) (3/2) k (C) 3k (D) 6k [JEE 1999] Q.4 In the fig
ure masses m m and M are 20 kg, 5 kg and 50 kg respectively. The co-efficient of
friction between M and ground is zero. The co-efficient of friction between n^
and M and that between m and ground is 0.3. The pulleys and the string are massl
ess . The string is perfectly horizontal between Pj and mj and also between P M
and m . The string is perfectly vertical between P and P .An external Vmrnrrtuum
uuu horizontal force F is applied to the mass M. Take g = 10 m/s . Draw a free-b
ody diagram for mass M, clearly showing all the forces. (a) (b) Let the magnitud
e ofthe force of friction between m and M be f, and that between m and ground be
f . For a particular F it is found that fj = 2 f . Find fj and f . Write down e
quations of motion of all the masses . Find F, tension in the string and acceler
ations of the masses. [JEE 2000] Q.5 The pulleys and strings shown in the figure
are smooth and of negligible mass. For the system to remain in equilibrium, the
angle 9 should be [JEE (Scr) 2001 ] (A) 0° (B) 30° 0 H 2" m (C) 45° (D) 60° Q.6 A strin
g ofnegligible mass going over a clamped pulley ofmass m supports a block of mas
s M as shown in the figure. The force on the pulley by the clamp is given [JEE (
Scr) 2001] (A)V2Mg (B)V2mg M (C) - J ( M + m ) + m g (D) ^'(M + m) + M g
1? 2 2 2 2 ( 2 2 } 2 2 2 2 2
2
2
2
2
Q.7
Q.8
A block ofmass *J3 kg is placed on a rough horizontal surface whose coefficient
offrictionis lj 2 V3 minimum value of force F (shown in figure) for which the bl
ock starts to slide on the surface. (g=10m/s ) mmum'uuuuuiu (A) 20 N (B)20a/3N (
C) 10 V3 N (D) None of these [JEE (Scr) 2003] Two blocks A and B of equal masses
are released from an inclined plane of inclination 45° at t=0. Both the blocks ar
e initially at rest. The coefficient ofkineticfrictionbetween the block A and th
e inclined plane is 0.2 while it is 0.3 for block B. Initially, the block Ais V2
m behind the block B. When and where their front faces will come in a line. [Ta
ke g= 10 m/s ]. , [JEE 2004]
60°,
2 2
'MB ansaI Classes
Particle Dynamics
[8J
1.
CIRCULAR MOTION & WORK POWER ENERGY A body moving with constant speed in a circu
lar path is continuously accelerated towards the centre of rotation. The magnitu
de ofthis normal acceleration is given by V a = — = or r
2 2
where
v is the constant speed (v = cor) and r is the radius of the circular path dv Ta
ngential area: a = — , a = ât + a
t 2 2 2 n
n
r
2. 3.
v Radius of curvature : r = a
4.
According to Newton's second law, a body moving in a circular path with constant
speed must be acted upon by an unbalanced force which is always directed toward
s the centre. This necessary unbalanced force is called the centripetal force. I
- = 2 F = morr r Centrifugal force is a pseudo force which is observed an observ
er in rotating frame. 5c f = frame 2
m v 2
t m C 0 r
Work (W): The work W done by a constant force F. when its point of application u
ndergoes a displacement s is defined as W = F.s =Fs'cos9 where 9 is the angle be
tween F and s. Work is a scalar quantity and its wwww wwwwww SI units is N-m or
joule (J).
p :
p
Note: Only the component (F cos 9) of the force F which is along the displacemen
t contributes to the work done. If F= F i + F j + F k and s = Axi + Ayj + Azk th
en W = F-s ' = F Ax + F Ay + F A z
x y z x z
5.
Work done by a Variable Force: When the magnitude and direction of a force varie
s with position, The work done by such a force for an infinitesimal displacement
ds is given by dW = F-ds In terms of rectangular components, W = jF dx+ jF dy +
jF dz a Y Z
A B x y z x a a
6.
Work Done by a Spring Force: The work done by the spring force for a displacemen
t from x to x is given by W =-ik(x -x )
; f s 2 2
(!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[6]
7.
Work Energy theorem: Work done on a body can produce a change in its kinetic ene
rgy. Work is required to produce motion and it is also required to destroy motio
n.
W = AK = K - KJ
F
8. 9. 10.
Conservative Force: The force which does work in complete independence of the pa
th followed the body is called a conservative force. The gravitational force, sp
ring force and electrostatic force are the examples of conservative forces. Non-
Conservative Force: The work done by a non-conservative force not only depends o
n the initial and final positions but also on the path followed. The common exam
ples of such forces are:frictionalforce and drag force of fluids. Potential Ener
gy: The potential energy is defined only for conservative forces. U - U = -jF -d
s
B A c
B
11.
dU Conservative force : F = - dx dU At equilibrium, —— = 0 dx
c
U(x)'
d y The point B is the position of stable equilibrium, because — U 0 dx
2 >
d U The point C is the position odf unstable equilibrium, because —— < 0 dx
(!§ Bansal Classes
Particle Dynamics
[6]
BANSAL C L A S S E S
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XI (P, Q, R, S)
IIT-JEE SCREENING 2007 QUESTION BANK ON
PARTICLE DYNAMICS
QUESTION ON PARTICLE DYNAMICS There are 81 questions in this question bank. Q.l
A small block of mass m is projected horizontally with speed u where friction co
efficient between block and plane is given by p = cx, where x is displacement of
the block on plane. Find maximum distance covered by the block 2u u u (D) 2 V S
(A) (B) V2cg < C ) V S Q.2 A body is placed on a rough inclined plane of inclin
ation 0. As the angle 0 is increased from 0° to 90° the contact force between the bl
ock and the plane (A) remains constant (B) first remains constant than decreases
(C)firstdecreases then increases (D) first increases then decreases A block is
projected upwards on an inclined plane of inclination 37° along the line of greate
st slope of p = 0.5 with velocity of 5 m/s. The block 1 stops at a distance of f
rom starting point (A) 1.25 m (B) 2.5 m (C)10m (D) 12.5 m g&S'S hoMihg^ j What s
hould be the minimum force P to be applied to the string so that * block of mass
m just begins to move up the frictionless plane. Mg cosO (D) None (A) Mg tan 0/
2 (B) Mg cot 0/2 (C) j f — ~
st p
Q.3 Q.4
Q. 5
Equal force F (> mg) is applied to string in all the 3 cases. Startingfromrest,
the point of application of force moves a distance of 2 m down in all cases. In
which case the block has maximum kinetic energy?
(A) 1 Q.6
(B)2
(i)
(2)
(3)
(C)3
(D) equal in all 3 cases
A n=o m'urnUuuuwwuuuu
Both the blocks shown here are ofmass m and are moving with constant velocity in
direction shown in a resistive medium which exerts equal constant force on both
blocks in direction opposite to the velocity. The tension in the string connect
ing both of them will be: (Neglect friction) (A)mg (B) mg/2 (C) mg/3 (D) mg/4
Q.7
In which ofthe following cases is the contact force between A and B maximum (m =
m = 1 kg) J2N A I a=2m/s A B H=0 ( D ) a=10m/s P D A L (A) 30 N 7777 77777 Tm (
B) r ^ BP n (C) rrmf
A B
2 2
<!I Bansal Classes
Question Bank on Particle dynamics
[12]
Q.8
A student calculates the acceleration of nij in figure shown as (m -m )g i m]+m
. Which assumption is not required to do this calculation. (B) string is massles
s (A) pulley is frictionless (D) string is inextensible (C) pulley is massless
1 2 2 Y1
ni
//////// 2T iLH
m,
A force F = i + 4j acts on block shown. The force of friction acting on the bloc
k is : (A)-i (B)-1.8 i IKg (C) - 2.4 i (D)-3 i p - o .3 Q.10 A body of mass m ac
celerates uniformly from rest to a speed v in time t . The work done on the body
till any timet is Q.9
0 0
1 (A) — mv t
Q 2
2
(B) ~mv VIQ. t 2
2
(C)mv
0
2
Vo J
l
(D)mv
0
'P
3
Q.ll A man who is running has half the kinetic energy of the boy of half his mas
s. The man speeds up by 1 m/s and then has the same kinetic energy as the boy. T
he original speed of the man was (A) V2 m/s (B)(V2-l)m/s (C)2m/s (D) (V2 + 1) m/
s Q.12 A particle originally at rest at the highest point of a smooth vertical c
ircle is slightly displaced. It will leave the circle at a vertical distance h b
elow the highest point, such that (A) h = R (B) h = R/3 (C)h = R/2 (D)h = 2R Q.1
3 F = 2 x - 3 x - 2 . Choose correct option (A) x = - 1 /2 is position of stable
equilibrium (B) x=2 is position of stable equilibrium (C) x = - 1 /2 is positio
n of unstable equilibrium (D) x=2 is position ofneutral equilibrium Q.14 A block
of mass m is hung verticallyfroman elastic thread of force constant mg/a. Initi
ally tire thread was at its natural length and the block is allowed to fallfreel
y.The kinetic energy of the block when it passes through the equilibrium positio
n will be: (A)mga (B) mga/2 (C)zero (D)2mga Q. 15 In a conical pendulum, the bob
is rotated with different angular velocities and tension in the string is calcu
lated for different values of co. Which of them is correct graph between T & to.
T* (A) (B) (C) (D)
2 1
Q. 16 The blockAis pushed towards the wall by a distance and released. The norma
l reaction by vertical wall on the block B v/s compression in spring is given by
: A Ym m '// mm>!iiiiuiniii/ii!i = o Wnn U / N (A) (B) (C) (D)
<!I Bansal Classes
Question Bank on Particle dynamics [12]
It Bansal Classes
Q. 19 Two identical balls A and B are released from the positions shown in figur
e. They collide elastically on horizontal portion MN. All surfaces are smooth. T
he ratio of heights attained by A and B after collision will \Q B be(Neglect ene
rgy loss at M & N) 4 45Y\M NA60° h iiniiniimniiiiwunitiinm (A) 1 : 4 (B) 2:1 (C) 4
:13 (D) 2 : 5 Q.20 A particle moving with kinetic energy = 3 joule makes an elas
tic head on collision with a stationary particle which has twice its mass during
the impact. (A) The minimum kinetic energy of the system is 1 joule. (B) The ma
ximum elastic potential energy of the system is 2 joule. (C) Momentum and total
kinetic energy of the system are conserved at every instant. (D) The ratio of ki
netic energy to potential energy ofthe system first decreases and then increases
. Q.21 A ball of mass m collides elastically with an identical ball at rest with
some impact parameter. (A) 100 % energy transfer can never take place (B) 100 %
energy transfer may take place (C) angle of divergence between the two balls mu
st be 90° (D) angle of divergence between the two balls depend on impact parameter
Q.22 A ball strikes a smooth horizontal ground at an angle of 45° with the vertic
al. What cannot be the possible angle of its velocity with tlie vertical after t
he collision. (Assume e < 1). (A) 45° (B) 30° (C) 53° (D)60° Q.23 As shown in the figure
a body of mass m moving vertically with speed Q| 3 m/s hits a smooth fixed incl
ined plane and rebounds with a velocity v in the j horizontal direction. If Z of
inclined is 3 0°, the velocity v will be (A) 3 m/s (B) V3 m/s n,Miimmi^mi!)iiiii
(C) l/V3 m/s (D) this is not possible Q.24 Two balls A and B having masses 1 kg
and 2 kg, moving with speeds 21 m/s and 4 m/s respectively in opposite direction
, collide head on. After collision Amoves with a speed of 1 m/s in the same dire
ction, then correct statements is: (A) The velocity of B after collision is 6 m/
s opposite to its direction of motion before collision. (B) The coefficient of r
estitution is 0.2. (C) The loss of kinetic energy due to collision is 200 J. (D)
The impulse of the force between the two balls is 40 Ns. Q.25 An obj ect compri
ses ofa uniform ri ng of radius R and its uniform chord AB (not necessarily made
of the same material) as shown. Which of the following can not be the centre of
mass ofthe object (A) (R/3, R/3) (B) (R/3,R/2) (C)(R/4.R/4) (D)(R/V2,R/V2)
x A f f m
Q.17 A car travelling on a smooth road passes through a curved portion of the ro
ad in form of an arc of circle of radius 10 m. If the mass of car is 500 kg, the
reaction on car at lowest point P where its speed is 20 m/s is \ Iy (A) 35 kN (
B) 30 kN (C) 25 kN (D) 20 kN p Q.18 A particle with constant total energy E move
s in one dimension in a region where the potential energy is U(x). The speed of
the particle is zero where dU(x) d U(x) (D) ) —, ^ . = 0 (A) U(x) = E (B) U(x) = 0
(C) dx = 0 ( D dx^
2 ;
[4]
dm Q.26 An ice block is melting at a constant rate "dT p. Its initial mass is m
and it is moving with velocity on africtionlesshorizontal surface. The distance
travelled by it till it melts completely is: mov mv 2m v (D) can't be said (B) (
A) (C) 2p Q.27 A ball A collides elastically with another identical ball B initi
ally at rest A is moving with velocity of 1 Om/ s at an angle of 60°fromthe line j
oining their centres. Select correct alternative : (A) velocity of ball A after
collision is 5 m/s (B) velocity of ball B after collision is 5V3 m/s (C) velocit
y ofball A after collision is 7.5 m/s (D) velocity of ball B after collision is
5 m/s. Q.28 Force acting on a body of mass 1 kg is related to its position x as
F = x - 3x N. It is at rest at x = 1. Its velocity at x = 3 can be : (A) 4 m/s (
B) 3 m/s (C)2m/s (D)5m/s
; 0 0 0 3
Q.29 ' Which graph shows best the velocity-time graph for an object launched ver
tically into the air when air resistance is given by | D j=bv? The dashed line s
hows the velocity graph if there were no air resistance. (A) (C)
Q.30 A 1.0 kg block of wood sits on top of an identical block of wood, which sit
s on top ofa flat level table made of plastic. The coefficient of staticfriction
between the wood surfaces is p,, and the coefficient of static friction between
the wood and plastic is p Ahorizontal force F is applied to the top block only,
and this force is increased until the top block starts to move. The bottom block
will move with the top block if and only if
r
(A) pi, < -1^2
(B)~p <p <p
2 1
2
(C)p <pi
2
(D) 2p < p.,
2
Q.31 To paint the side of a building, pai nter normally hoists himselfup by pul
ling on the rope A as in figure. The painter and platform together weigh 200N. T
he rope B can withstand 300N. Then (A) The maximum acceleration that painter can
have upwards is 5m/s . (B) To hoist himself up, rope B must withstand minimum 4
00N force. (C) Rope A will have a tension of 100 N when the painter is at rest.
(D) The painter must exert a force of 200N on the rope A to go downwards slowly.
2
Q.32 A block of mass 2 kg slides down an incline plane of inclination 30°. The coe
fficient offrictionbetween block and plane is 0.5. The contact force between blo
ck and plank is : (A) 20 Nt .(B) 10V3 Nt (C) 5V7 Nt (D) 5Vl5 Nt Q.33 If force F
is increasing with time and at t = 0 , F = 0 where will FHTT1 ,[1 = 0.5 slipping
first start? } I i" 1 fi = 0.3 (A) between 3 kg and 2 kg (B) between 2 kg and 1
kg _L_T 7 (C) between 1 kg and ground (D) both (A) and (B) )i = 0.
<!I Bansal Classes
[12]
Q.34 Aropeofmass 5 kg is moving vertically in vertical position with an upwards
force of 100 N acting at the upper end and a downwards force of 70 N acting at t
he lower end. The tension at midpoint of the rope is (A)100N (B) 85 N (C) 75 N (
D)105N Q. 3 5 Find the acceleration of 3 kg mass when acceleration of 2 kg mass
is 2 ms as shown in figure. 3 kg 2 kg • ION (A) 3 ms" (B) 2 ms" 2ms "-> (C) 0.5 ms
(D) zero Q. 3 6 Block of 1 kg is initially in equilibrium and is hanging by two
identical springs A and B as shown in figures. If spring A is cut from lower po
int at t=0 then, find acceleration of block in ms at t = 0. (A) 5 (B) 10 (C) 15
(D) 0 Q. 3 7 Assume the aerodynamic drag force on a car is proportional to its s
peed. If the power output from the engine is doubled, then the maximum speed of
the car. (A) is unchanged (B) increases by a factor of J 2 (C) is also doubled (
D) increases by a factor of four.
-2 2 2 -2
»
-2
Q. 3 8 A body is moved from rest along a straight line by a machine delivering c
onstant power. The ratio of displacement and velocity (s/v) varies with time t a
s:
tf tt tt tt
(A)
Q. 3 9 A pendulum bob is swinging in a vertical plane such that its angular ampl
itude is less than 90°. At its highest point, the string is cut. Which trajectory
is possible for the bob afterwards. (A) (B) (C) (D)
DIIDIII
s/v
(B)
s/v
(C)
s/v
(D)
s/v
Q. 4 0 A conical pendulum is moving in a circle with angular velocity co as show
n. If tension in the string is T, which of following equations are correct ? (A)
T = moo / (B) T sinG = mco / (C)T = mg cosB (D) T = mco 1 sinG
2 2 2
Q.41 A particle is released from rest at origin. It moves under influence of pot
ential field U = x - 3x, kinetic energy at x = 2 is (A) 2J (B) 1 J (C) 1.5 J (D)
0 J
2
Q. 42 A ball whose size is slightly smaller than width ofthe tube of radius 2.5
m is proj ected from bottommost point of a smooth tube fixed in a vertical plane
with velocity of 10 m/s. If Nj and N are the normal reactions exerted by inner
side and outer side of the tube on the ball (A) Nj> 0 for motion in ABC, N > 0 f
or motion in CDA (B) Nj> 0 for motion in CDA, N > 0 for motion in ABC (C) N > 0
for motion in ABC & part of CDA (D) N, is always zero. 10 m/s
9 2 2 2
<!I Bansal Classes
[12]
Q.43 A man is standing on a rough (p = 0.5) horizontal disc rotating with consta
nt angular velocity of 5 rad/sec. At what distance from centre should he stand s
o that he does not slip on the disc? (A) R < 0.2m (B) R> 0.2 m (C)R>0.5m (D)R>0.
3m Q.44 Aroad is banked at an angle of 30° to the horizontal for negotiating a cur
ve of radius 10^3 - At what velocity will a car experience nofrictionwhile negot
iating the curve? (A) 54 km/hr (B)72km/hr (C)36km/hr (D)18km/hr * ? Q.45 A bob a
ttached to a string is held horizontal and released. The tension and vertical di
stance from point of suspension can be represented by. / T (D) (B)
m
Q.46 The system of the wedge and the block connected by a massless spring as sho
wn in the figure is released with the spring in its natural length. Friction is
absent, maximum elongation in the spring will be 8Mg 3Mg 4Mg 6Mg (B) 5k (D) 5k (
A) 5k (C) 5k Q.47 Two massless string of length 5 m hangfromthe ceiling very nea
r to each other as shown in the figure. Two balls A and B of masses 0.25 kg and
0.5 ihiiiiuiiiju kg are attached to the string. The ball A is released from rest
at a height 0.45 m as shown in the figure. The collision between two balls is c
ompletely elastic. Immediately after the collision, the kinetic energy of ball B
is 1 J. The velocity of ball Ajust after the collision is (A) 5 ms" to the righ
t (B) 5 ms" to the left (C) 1 ms- to the right (D) 1 ms" to the left Q.48 Consid
er following statements [ 1 ] CM of a uniform semicircular disc of radius R = 2R
/ft from the centre [2] CM of a uniform semicircular ring of radius R = 4R/37Ifr
omthe centre [ 3 ] CM of a solid hemisphere of radius R = 4R/3TI from the centre
[4] CM of a hemisphere shell of radius R = R/2 from the centre Which statements
are correct'? (A) 1,2, 4 (C) 4 only .(D) 1,2 only (B) 1, 3, 4 v (ms"')i Q.49 Th
e diagram to therightshows the velocity-time graph for two masses R and S that c
ollided elastically. Which of the following statements is true? (I) R and S move
d in the same direct ion after the collision. (II) Kinetic energy of the system
(R & S) is minimum at t = 2 milli sec, t (milli sec) (III) The mass of R was gre
ater than mass of S. (A) I only (B) II only (C) I and II only (D) I, II and III
Q.50 A smooth sphere is moving on a horizontal surface with a velocity vector (2
i + 2j)m/s immediately before it hit a vertical wall. The wall is parallel to ve
ctor j and coefficient of restitution between the sphere and the wall is e = 1/2
. The velocity of the sphere after it hits the wall is (A)i-j (B) - i + 2 j (C)-
i-j (D) 2 i - j
1 1 4 1
1.2
<!I Bansal Classes
[12]
Q.51 A man of mass M stands at one end of a plank of length L which lies at rest
on a frictionless surface. The M man walks to other end ofthe plank. Ifthe mass
of the plank is — , then the distance that the man moves relative to ground is: 3
L L 4L (A) — (B) (C) (D) Q.52 Two balls A and B having masses 1 kg and 2 kg, movin
g with speeds 21 m/s and 4 m/s respectively in opposite direction, collide head
on. After collision Amoves with a speed of 1 m/s in the same direction, then the
coefficient ofrestitution is (A) 0.1 (B) 0.2 (C) 0.4 (D) None Q.53 Two particle
s of equal mass have velocities 2 i ms"" and 2j ms . First particle has an accel
eration (i + j) m s while the acceleration ofthe second particle is zero. The ce
ntre of mass ofthe two particles moves in (A) circle (B) parabola (C) ellipse (D
) straight line Q.54 A particle ofmass 3m is projected from the ground at some a
ngle with horizontal. The horizontal range is R. At the highest point of its pat
h it breaks into two pieces m and 2m. The smaller mass comes to rest and larger
mass finally falls at a distance x from the point of projection where x is equal
to 3R 3R 5R (A) — (B) — (C) 4 (D)3R 4 2 Q.55 A block of mass M on a horizontal smoo
th surface is pulled by a load of mass M/2 by means of a rope AB and string BC a
s shown in the figure. B M C The length & mass of the rope AB are L and M/2 resp
ectively. As the M/2 block is pulled from AB = L to AB = 0 its acceleration chan
ges from 3g ( D ) - ^ t o 2g (C) - to g (A) f to g (B) 4 2
1 -1 2 v y y A t 0
Q.56 A uniform rod of length L and mass M has been placed on a rough horizontal
surface. The horizontal force F applied on the rod is such that the rod is just
in the state of rest. If the coefficient offrictionvaries according to the relat
ion p = Kx where K is a +ve constant. Then the tension at mid point of rod is (A
) F/2 (B) F/4 (C) F/8 (D) None Q.57 In the arrangement shown in the figure, mass
of the block B and A is 2m and m respectively. Surface between B and floor is s
mooth. The block B is connected to the block C by means of a string pulley syste
m. If the whole system is released, then find the minimum value of mass ofblock
C so that block Aremains stationary w.r.t. B. Coefficient of friction between Aa
nd B is p: r~ B z t IIII1111III! II11 III 111 f 6m 2m+ 1 3m m (D) p + 1 (B) p +
1 (C) 1^4 (A) P
<!I Bansal Classes
[12]
2 t - T \2 Q. 5 8 A particle of mass m, initially at rest, is acted on by a forc
e F = F > ^ T J during the interval 0 < t < T. The velocity ofthe particle at th
e end of the interval is: 2F T 4F T 5F T 3F T (C) 3m (D) 2m (A) 6m (B) 3m
0 0 0 0 0
Q. 5 9 With what minimum velocity should block be proj ected from left end A tow
ards end B such that it reaches the other end B of conveyer belt moving with con
stant velocity v. Friction coefficient between block and belt is p. AJM v„ B (A) V
pgL (B) /2pgL (D) 2^/pgL (C) V3ugL Q. 6 0 Two masses m and M are attached to th
e strings as shown in the figure. Ifthe system is in equilibrium, then 2M 2m (A)
tan9 = 1 + m (B) tanB = 1 ~M 2M 2m (C) cotQ = 1 + m (D) cote = 1 + Q.61 Block B
of mass 100 kg rests on a rough surface offrictioncoefficient p= 1/3. Arope is
tied to block B as shown in figure. The maximum acceleration with which boy A of
25 kg can climbs on rope without making block move is: 4g 3g (A) (B) (C) (D) 4
Q.62 In the system shown in the figure there is no friction anywhere. The block
C goes down by a distance x = 10 cm with respect to wedge D when system is relea
sed from rest. The velocity ofA with respect to B will be (g^ 10 m/s ): (A) zero
(B) 1 m/s (C)2m/s (D) None of these
Q 2
100kg H=l/3
B
25kg
Q.6 3 A car moves along a circular track of radius R banked at an angle of 30° to
the horizontal. The coefficient of static friction between the wheels and the tr
ack is p. The maximum speed with which the car can move without skidding out is
y /t»\ f _ .. . /. rr. H/2 (A) [2gR(l + p)/V3j1/2 (B) [gR(l-p)/(p + V3)J (D) None
(C) [gR(l + pV3)/(p + V3)^'
2
Q.64 Potential energy of a particle is related to x coordinate by equation x - 2
x. Particle will be in stable equilibrium at (A)x = 0.5 (B) x - i (C) x = 2 (D)
x = 4
2
BansaI Classes
[9]
Q.65 A particle of mass m is tied to one end ofa string of length /. The particl
e is held horizontal with the string mg taut. It is then projected upward with a
velocity u. The tension in the string is — when it is inclined at an angle 30° to t
he horizontal. The value of u is (A) fig (B)V2/J (C)j| (0)2^/5 Q.66 A force F =
k[y i + x j] where k is a positive constant acts on aparticle moving in x-y plan
e starting from the point (3,5), the particle is taken along a straight line to
(5,7). The work done by the force is: (A) zero (B) 35 K (C) 20 K (D)15K Q.67 Wat
er is pumped from a depth of 10 m and delivered through a pipe of cross section
10 nr. If it is needed to deliver a volume of 10 m per second the power required
will be: (A)10kW (B) 9.8 kW (C) 15 kW (D)4.9kW Q.68 A light spring of length 20
cm and force constant 2 kg/cm is placed vertically on a table. A small block of
mass 1 kg. falls on it. The length hfromthe surface of the table at which the b
all will have the maximum velocity is (A) 20 cm (B) 15 cm (C)10cm (D)5cm Q.69 Th
e ratio of period of oscillation of the conical pendulum to that of the simple p
endulum is : (Assume the strings are of the same length in the two cases and 9 i
s the angle made by the string with the verticla in case of conical pendulum) (A
) cos 9 (B)VcosO (C)l (D) none of these Q. 70 A particle is moving in a circle:
(A) The resultant force on the particle must be towards the centre. (B) The cros
s product of the tangential acceleration and the angular velocity will be zero.
(C) The direction ofthe angular acceleration and the angular velocity must be th
e same. (D) The resultant force may be towards the centre. Q. 71 The work done i
n joules in increasing the extension of a spring of stiffness 10 N/cm from 4 cm
to 6 cm is: (A) 1 (B) 10 (C) 50 (D)100 Q.72 A man weighing 80 kg is standing at
the centre of a flat boat and he is 20 mfromthe shore. He walks 8 hi on the boat
towards the shore and then halts. The boat weight 200 kg. How far is he from th
e shore at the end of this time ? (A) 11.2m (B) 13.8m (C) 14.3 m (D) 15.4 m Q.73
From a circle of radius a, an isosceles right angled triangle with the hypotenu
se as the diameter of the circle is removed. The distance ofthe centre of gravit
y of the remaining position from the centre of the circle is
2 _1 3
(A) 3 0 . - 1 ) .
( B ) ^
(C)J~
( D ) ™
Q.74 A sphere strikes a wall and rebounds with coefficient of restitution 1/3. I
f it rebounds -with a velocity of 0.1 m/sec at an angle of 60° to the normal to th
e wall, the loss of kinetic energy is 1 2 (A) 50% (B) 3 3 - % (C) 40% (D)66--%
<!I Bansal Classes
[12]
Q.75 A truck moving on horizontal road towards east with velocity 20 ms collides
elastically with a light ball moving with velocity 25 ms along west. The veloci
ty of the ball just after collision (A) 65 ms towards east (B) 25 ms towards wes
t (C) 65 ms towards west (D) 20 ms towards east
-1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
Q.76 A spaceship of speed v travelling along + y axis suddenly shots out one fou
rth of its part with speed 2v along + x-axis. xy axes are fixed with respect to
ground. The velocity of the remaining part is Vl3 (D) — - v (A) - V (C)f
Q n 0 c
Q
Q.77 From a uniform disc of radius R, an equilateral triangle of side -J3 R is c
ut as shown. The new position of centre of mass is: (A) (0,0) (B)(0,R) (D) none
of these (0(0,4^) Q.78 In an inelastic collision, (A) the velocity of both the p
articles may be same after the collision (B) kinetic energy is not conserved (C)
linear momentum of the system is conserved. (D) velocity of separation will be
less than velocity of approach.
(0,0). »x
Q.79 A man of mass 40 kg is standing on a trolley A of mass 140 kg. He pushes an
other trolley B of same material of mass 60 kg, so that they are set in motion.
Then: (A) speed of trolleyAis3times that of trolley B immediately after the inte
raction. (B) speed of trolley B is 3 times that of trolley A immediately after t
he interaction. (C) distance travelled by trolley B is 3 times that of trolley A
before they stop. (D) distance travelled by trolley B is 9 times that of trolle
y A before they stop. Q.80 A long plank P of the mass 5 kg is placed on a smooth
floor. On P is placed a block Q of mass 2 kg. The coefficient of friction betwe
en P and Q is 0.5. If a horizontal force 15N is applied to Q, as shown, and you
may take g as lON/kg. (A) The reaction force on Q due to P is 10N (B) The accele
ration of Q relative to P is 2.5 m/s (C) The acceleration of P relative to the F
loor is 2.0 m/s (D) The acceleration of centre of mass of P + Q system relative
to the floor is (15/7)m/s
2 2
2
Q.81 Ifthe linear density of a rod of length 3 m varies as X=2+ x, then the posi
tion of centre of gravity of the rod is: (A) 7/3 m (B) 12/7m (C) 10/7m (D) 9/7 m
<!I Bansal Classes
[12]
ANSWER KEY
Q.l Q.6 A B Q.2 Q.7 B A Q.3 Q.8 A C Q.4 Q.9 A A Q.5 C Q.10 A Q.15 A Q.20 A, B, D
Q.25 B, D Q.30 D Q.35 B Q.40 A Q.45 A • Q.50 B Q.55 B Q.60 A Q.65 B Q.70 D Q.75 A
Q.ll D Q.16 B Q.21 A, C Q.26 B Q.31 A, C Q.36 A Q.41 A Q.46 B Q.51 B Q.56 B Q.61
B Q.66 C Q.71 A Q.76 B Q.80 C, D
Q.12 B Q.17 C Q.22 B Q.27 D Q.32 D Q.37 B Q.42 C Q.47 D Q.52 B Q.57 C Q.62 C Q.6
7 C Q.72 C Q.77 B Q.81 B
Q.13 A Q.18 A Q.23 B Q.28 A Q.33 C Q.3 8 A Q.43 A Q.48 C Q.53 D Q.58 C Q.63 D Q.
68 B Q.73 C Q.78 A,B,C,D
Q.14 B Q.19 C Q.24 A, B, C Q.29 B Q.34 B Q.39 C Q.44 C Q.49 D Q.54 C Q.59 B Q.64
B Q.69 B Q.74 D Q.79 B, D
<!I Bansal Classes
[12]
I BANSAL CLASSES
»
TARGETIIT JEE 2007
XII & XIII
REVISION PRACTICE PROBLEMS
(With Solutions)
FOR JEE-2007
•
2 bonus question of Mathematics
ALL THE B€ST FOR JEE -2007
Q.l
Q.2
2 Bon us question of Mathematics L + 153 If L = Lim then find the value of x->0
/n(l + x) il + x ) Two universities A and B write questions and their correspond
ing solutions for a high school mathematics tournament. University A writes 10 q
uestions every hour but makes a mistake in their solutions 10% of the time. The
university B writes 20 questions every hour and makes a mistake 20% of the time.
Each university works for 10 hours and then sends all problems to a Miss 'C' fo
r checking. However only 75% of the problems which she thinks are wrong are actu
ally incorrect. Further she thinks that 20% of the questions from the university
A have incorrect solutions, and that 10% of the questions from the university B
have incorrect solutions. If the probability that a problem definitely written
and solved correctly, randomly chosen by her,
/ n ( x + 2
was thought of as having incorrectly solved, is (p + q)Q.l
where p and q coprimes, then find the value of
PHYSICS QUESTION 1 UF 2Q 10 V In the circuit shown, the switch S is in position-
1 since a —I i—VvWlong time. At a certain moment t = 0, it is shifted to ,20 V posit
ion-2. The 1 pF capacitor is initially uncharged. 2 (iF (a) Find the current tha
t flows through the 2 Q resistor as a function of time't' for t > 0. •Wr 1D (b) Wh
at percentage of the work done by the 10 V cell is lost as heat from the 2Q resi
stor, from t = 0 till infinity? Q.2 A beam consisting of two wavelengths 8100 A
and 4500 A is used to obtain interference fringes in a Young's double slit exper
iment. The distance between the slits is 2 mm and that between the plane of the
slits and the screen is 100 cm. (a) Find the least distance in millimeters from
the central maxima on the screen where the bright fringes due to both the wavele
ngths coincide. (b) Find the least distance in millimeters from the central maxi
ma on the screen where the dark fringes due to bothrthe wavelengths coincide: Q.
3 A cylinder contains a tight fitting piston of mass 2 kg and cross-sectional ar
ea 10 cm . Under the piston, there is 1 mole of a diatomic gas at 300 K initiall
y. The walls of the cylinder are heat insulating and the piston is also thermall
y insulating. By means of an electrical heater, the gas is slowly given a heat =
1000 Joules. The upper end of cylinder is open to the atmosphere :{H= having at
mospheric pressure = 10 Pascals. Neglect any frictional loss. (a) By what distan
ce does the piston shift up? (b) What is the final temperature of the gas? Q.4 A
solid sphere with a hollow cavity (of radius R/2) having net mass m and radius
R is resting in. equilibrium on a rough horizontal floor, as shown. The sphere i
s tilted slightly and released. Find the time period of subsequent oscillations
assuming that the sphere's surface does not slip over the floor. wnunWrWfuuuuu Q
.5 Two monochromatic and coherent point sources oflight, S, and S of wavelength
4000 A, are placed at a distance 4 mm from each other. The line joining the two
sources is perpendicular to a screen. The distance of the mid-point of S,S from
the screen is D = A/2 m. Find the radius (non-zero) ofthe smallest bright ring o
n the screen, using valid assumptions.
2 5 0 7
Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[2]
Q.6
A glass sphere of radius R has a point isotropic source of monochromatic light o
f wavelength X. The thickness of the glass wall is't' ( « R). The inner surface of
the sphere is painted black so that it absorbs all the radiation incident on it
. Find the maximum power of the source such that the sphere does not rupture due
to the radiation pressure. Rupture stress of glass = a. In the figure shown, th
e sonic source of frequency 200 Hz is moving with a speed = 10 m/s. Find the bea
t frequency as heard by the listener L, who is himself moving with speed = 5 m/s
. The reflecting wall is moving with a speed = 15 m/s. A wind is also blowing to
the right with a speed = 5 m/s. Speed of sound in still air = 340 m/s.
s
Q.7
wall
Q.8
A sphere of mass'm' collides elastically with another stationary sphere of mass
'm/2' obliquely. Both the spheres are smooth and there are no external forces ac
ting on them. Solve the equations of collision and find the maximum angle throug
h which the sphere of mass'm' can be deflected w.r.t. its original direction. A
thermally insulated cylinder is divided into two parts by a heat insulating tigh
t piston, which can move freely in the cylinder without friction. The left part
of the cylinder contains one mole of an ideal diatomic gas and the right part is
evacuated. The piston is connected to the right wall of the cylinder through a
spring whose natural length is equal to the total length of the cylinder. The el
ectrical heater is i •: vacuum switched on for some time so that the gas temperatu
re increases and 1 mole • -mbWMmuof the piston shifts slowly to the right. What pe
rcentage of the heat diatomic supplied by the heater goes in compressing the spr
ing? Neglect the gas § heat capacity of the piston or the cylinder. A ball is thro
wn from a point O with some speed v at an angle of 37° with the horizontal, such t
hat the ball bounces from the vertical 31°( wall and returns to O. For the bounce,
the coefficient of restitution 0 4m 7777777777777777777777777 7 7 7 7 is 5/8. W
hat must be the value of v ? g = 10 m/s . A spherical body of mass M and radius
R has a spherical cavity of radius R/2 inside it, as shown. The center of the ca
vity O is displaced from the geometric center of the sphere C by a distance R/2.
A tiny body of mass m ( « M) is placed at a distance 2R from the geometric center
of the first body. Find the force of gravitational attraction on the tiny body.
If the tiny body is released from rest, with what velocity will it hit the surf
ace of the spherical body? —T'^r—nrew^— The circuit shown is fed by an a.c. source hav
ing emf = (15 V) sin coil-l coil-2 200t, where time t is in seconds. Coil-1 has
a resistance = 3 fl and inductance 20 mH, while coil-2 has a resistance = 6 0 an
d inductance 40 mH. Find the voltages across the two coils, V, and V , as functi
ons of time, t. A certain radionuclide is getting formed in some reactor at a co
nstant rate = q (number per second). It undergoes alpha decay with half life T.
At the moment t = 0, there are (4qT//n 2) number of radionuclide in the reactor.
Find the number of radionuclide 'N' in the reactor at any later time t > 0 and
plot a graph of N versus t. Find the number of alpha particles emitted till t =
2T.
-
Q.9
Q. 10 Q.ll
0
0
2
(a) (b) Q.12
2
Q.13 (a) (b)
^Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[426]
Q. 14 In a modified Young's double slit experiment, there are three identical pa
rallel slits S,, S and S . A coherent monochromatic beam of wavelength 700 nm, h
aving plane wavefronts, falls on the slits, as shown. The intensity of the centr
al point O on the screen is found to be 7 x i(H W/m . The distance SjS = S S = 0
.7 mm. (a) Find the intensity on the screen at O if S, and S are covered. {b) Fi
nd the intensity on the screen at 0 if only S is covered. (c) All three slits ar
e now uncovered and a transparent plate of thickness 1.4 pm and refractive index
1.25 is placed in front of S . Find the intensity at point O. Q. 15 A jeep is m
oving at a certain moment with velocity = 10 m/s. The acceleration of the jeep i
s 'a'. A man sitting in the jeep throws a ball with initial velocity = 20 m/s, a
t an angle of 53° with the horizontal, both w.r.t. himself. The motion of the jeep
is in the same direction and vertical plane as the motion of the ball. Given: s
in 53° = 4/5, cos 53° = 3/5. Neglect air resistance. (a) Find the actual initial spe
ed of the ball relative to an earth observer. (b) What should be the acceleratio
n 'a' of the jeep so that the man is able to catch the ball? (c) What is the far
thest distance ofthe ball from the man, as perceived by him, in part (B)? Q.16 T
wo blocks, 1 & 2, of masses m and 4m, interconnected by a massless spring of spr
ing constant k, and are resting on africtionlesshorizontalfloor.Forces F and 2F
start acting on the blocks, at t = 0, as shown. (a) Write the earth frame work-e
nergy theorem for the system, in terms F 2F. \uMuuuu\uuu\fm of speeds v, and v ,
and displacements x, and x of the two blocks. \utMu\\uu\u\u\v,ufl\mrv» (b) Find t
he maximum elongation ofthe spring during the motion of the two blocks, if F = 5
mg. (c) Find the maximum speed of block-1 in the center of mass frame, if F = 5m
g, Q.17 A uniform and thin rod AB of mass 5m and length L is kept stationary on
a frictionless horizontal surface. At a certain moment, a tiny ball of mass m, m
oving with a horizontal velocity = v collides inelastically with the rod, at a p
oint whose distance from end A of the rod is z. The direction of v is perpendicu
lar to the rod, as shown. The coefficient of restitution for collision is 3/4. J
ust after the collision, let v, = velocity of the center of rod (rightwards), v
= velocity of the ball, assumed leftwards and co = angular velocity of the rod.
(a) Write the condition for coefficient of restitution = 3/4 in terms of relevan
t parameters (b) It is found that the velocity of B just after the collision is
zero. Find z. (c) Assuming the condition of part (B), calculate the percentage o
f B energy lost during the collision.
2 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 Q 0 ( 5 2
Q.18 A gaseous mixture initially at 300 K and 2 x 10 N/m pressure contains 6 g o
f hydrogen and 8 gm of Helium. The m ixture is expanded to four times its ori gi
nal volume, through an isobaric heating process. Then, it is isochorically coole
d until its temperature again becomes 300 K. After that, the gas mixture is isot
hermally compressed to its original volume. (a) Find the ratio of molar specific
heats = y ofthe mixture. (b) Plot the process in P-V and P-T indicator diagrams
, showing all values of P & T. (c) Find the efficiency of the entire cycle (take
in 2 = 0.7) Q.19 Two radio stations broadcast their programmes at the same ampl
itude A, but at slightly different frequencies ro_ and co , where o) - co = 1000
Hz. A detector receives the signals from the two stations simultaneously. It ca
n only detect signals of intensity > 2A , (a) Find the time interval between the
successive maxima ofthe intensity ofthe signal received by the detector. (b) Fi
nd the time for which the detector remains idle in each cycle of the intensity o
f the signal, Q.20 A long wire PQR is made by joining two wires PQ and QR of equ
al radii. Their lengths and masses are respectively: 4.8 m and 0.06 kg; 2.56 m &
0.2 kg. The tension is 80 N. A sinusoidal wave pulse of amplitude 3.5 cm is sen
t along the wire PQ from the end P. No power is dissipated during the propagatio
n ofthe wave pulse. Calculate the time taken by the pulse to reach the end R and
the amplitude of reflected and transmitted wave pulses at Q.
2 3 2 2
^Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[4]
Q.21 In the circuit shown, the potentiometer wire AB has a length = 100 cm and t
otal resistance 10 Q. What should be the distance of the jockey from point A so
that the reading of the ammeter is 0,5 A? The coil resistance of the ammeter is
1 Q. The cell at the top has an emf = 15 Volts and internal resistance 1 O.
1—\AVv Q.22 A soap bubble of radius r is blown at the end of a capillary of length
/ and of internal radius R. Surface tension of soap solution is T and coefficie
nt of viscosity of air is r\. The volume of air flowing per second through the c
apillary is given by Q.23 soap bubble. Find the lifetime of the soap bubble. Two
small balls A and B are interconnected by an inextensible string of length L. M
ass of ball A= m, mass of ball B = 2m. The balls are resting on a frictionless h
orizontal surface, with the distance between them = 3L/5. In this position, ball
A is suddenly given a horizontal velocity v , perpendicular to the line joining
the two balls. Find the speed of ball B just after the string becomes taut. Fin
d the impulse of the tension in string when the string becomes taut Find the ste
ady tension in string much after the string has become taut. A wooden log of mas
s m with a cross-section shaped like an equilateral right-angled triangle can sl
ide on a horizontal surface without friction. Two point-like bodies of masses m
and 2m, tied to each other using a thread, are placed onto the log as shown in t
he figure. The length of the base of the log is L-54 cm. Friction and the masses
of the thread and the pulley are negligible The bodies are released at a certai
n moment. What distance does the wooden log cover until the body of mass 2m reac
hes its bottom? Determine the speed ofthe bodies and that ofthe wooden log when
V the body of mass 2m reaches the bottom of the log. In a tennis racket, the c.m
. is 12 inches from the end ofthe handle. The radius of gyration about an axis t
hrough the c.m. as shown in the figure is 8 inches. If the tennis ball is hit at
a distance of 20 inches from the end ofthe handle, where should the player hold
his racket so as not to feel any translational force when hitting the ball? We
have two liquids of different densities. A force of 1.36 N can hold the same pie
ce of metal in one of them, and of 0.82 N in the other. In what volume proportio
n should they be mixed so that the holding force is exactly 1 N? A cart on an in
clined plane of angle 9 - 30° is balanced as shown by a weight of mass 10 kg. The
cord Ais wound on a drum of diameter d, which is on the same shaft as a drum of
diameter .j, d. = 3d, on which is wound cord B. What is the mass a, , M of the c
art?
0
2 rn
0
5Q
8rj/
, where P is the excess pressure on
(a) (b) (c) Q.24
(a) '(b) Q.25
Q.26 Q.27
J U l
Q.28 Through the Looking Glass: A narrow beam oflight has entered a large thin l
ass plate. Each refraction is accompanied by reflection of k = 30% of the beam's
energy. What fraction ofthe light energy is transmitted through the plate
9
^ Bansal Classes
PHYSICS [428]
Q.29 Lake Placid: A radio receiver is set up on a mast in the middle of a calm l
ake to track the radio signal from a satellite orbiting the Earth. As the satell
ite rises above the horizon, the intensity of the signal varies periodically, th
e intensity is at a maximum when the satellite is 8j= 3° above the horizon and the
n again at 9 = 6° above the horizon. What is the wavelength X of the satellite sig
nal? The receiver is h = 4.0 m above the lake surface. Q.30 In the figure, water
of density 1000 kg/m flows through the pipe. The cross-section area at stations
1, 2 and 3 are 1 cm , 2 cm and A cm , respectively. The thin vertical tubes tha
t are connected to the pipe at these stations have water 20 cm levels as indicat
ed. Find the mass flow rate of water through the pipe and v . [Take g = 10 m/s ]
2 3 2 2 2 3 2
Q.31 A metal ring having three metallic spokes of lengths r=0.2 m is in a vertic
al plane and can spin around a fixed horizontal axis in a homogeneous magnetic f
ield of a magnetic induction of B=0.5 T. The lines of magnetic field are perpend
icular to the plane of the metal ring. Between the axis of the metal ring and it
s perimeter we connect a consumer of a resistance of 0.15 with the help of two s
liding contacts. We fix a thread of negligible mass to the rim of the ring and w
ind it several times around the ring and to its end we fix a body of a mass of 2
0 g. At a given moment we release the body of mass m. The friction is negligible
everywhere, the resistance of the ring, the spokes www and the connected wiring
is also negligible. (a) What is the torque exerted on the ring with the spokes
by the magnetic / B © forces when the body of m is moving with a constant velocity
? \ s® (b) What current isflowingthrough the consumer when the velocity of the bod
y of mass m is 3 m/s? J •> L ® ® ® (c) What is the highest velocity of the body of mass
m? ®/s
\\\\\\\
/
®
Q.32 Figure shows a hypothetical speed distribution for particles of a certain g
as: P (v) = Cv for 0 < v < v and P(v) = 0 for v > v„. (a) Show that C = 3/vJ, dN/N
=P(v) dv Find (b) the average speed of the particles, and (c) their rms speed.
Q.33 A neutron moving with a kinetic energy = 65 eV collides head-on and inelast
ically with a singly ionized helium atom at rest (in its ground state). Take the
ionization energy of hydrogen atom =13.6 eV, Also, mass of Helium atom is four
times that of a neutron. If the helium ion gets de-excited subsequently by emitt
ing radiation, calculate the possible energies of the emitted photon(s) in eV. Q
.34 A board of mass m is placed on a frictionless inclined plane that makes an a
ngle 0 = 37° with the horizontal. A block of same mass is placed on the board and
is given a quick push up the board with initial velocity v = 8 m/s. Find the dis
tane d covered by the block by the time its velocity drops to v/2. The board doe
s not move relative to the plane. Q.35 A 20 mH inductor is connected in series w
ith a charged capacitor of capacitance 2 pF, having initial charge = 10 mC. Afte
r how much minimum time will the energy in the capacitor become half of its init
ial value? Leave answer in terms of n. Q.36 A uniform and slender rod of mass 2m
and length L is lying on a frictionless V3horizontal surface. Two insects, of m
ass m each, moving horizontally with velocities v and 2v hit the rod simultaneou
sly and symmetrically and stick G3to it.
2 Q
^ Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[6]
Q.37 (a) (b) Q.38
Q.39 Q.40
(a) (b) (c) Q.41
Q.42
The initial velocities of the insects are perpendicular to the rod, as shown. Th
e distance of each insects's hit-point from the center of the rod is L/6. Just a
fter hitting the rod, each insect starts walking along the rod, away from its ce
nter, with constant speed = v relative to the rod. As the rod rotates and moves,
the insects finally reach the ends. Find the total angle rotated by the rod til
l this moment in radians. A thin uniform circular disc of radius R and mass m is
hinged about its center point O, so that it is free to rotate about a fixed hor
izontal axis through O. The plane of the disc is vertical. A small body A, of ma
ss m/2, is fixed at the rim of the disc, as shown. Initially, the line OA makes
an angle of 60° with the vertical. The disc is now released from rest, Find the ac
celeration of point A just after release. Find the magnitude of horizontal and v
ertical reaction forces: F and F on the hinge, just after the disc is released.
In the figure shown, the spring constant is I6n N/m and its right end is fixed t
o a vertical wall. The floor is smooth. A block of mass 1 kg is initially at a d
istance of 1 m from the other 1 kg block. The left 4 m/s kg block, touching a ve
rtical wall, is imparted a velocity = 4 m/s towards lm B the other block. All co
llisions are elastic. Find the time period of this Hvmummm"rnrr 1kg oscillatory
system. A ring of radius r = 1 m is placed on the top of an inclined plane and r
eleased from rest. The inclined plane makes an angle of 30° with the horizontal. T
he coefficient of friction between the ring and the incline is 0.2. Find the dis
tance travelled by the centre of the ring by the time it completes one revolutio
n, as it rolls down the incline. In the figure shown, a constant horizontal forc
e F = mg/2 starts acting on the block of mass m, from the position shown. The sp
ring is undeformed in the position shown and has a narual length L, while the bl
ocks are initially stationary. The spring constant is unknown. The surface is fr
ictionless. The mass of the hanging block is m/4, while [\wmmms\m the pulley is
massless and frictionless. Find the initial acceleration of the block of mass. W
rite the work-energy equation for the system consisting of the two blocks, and t
he spring, for any general value of 9 = angle which the spring makes with the ve
rtical. The maximum displacement of the bigger block is found to be LVJ . Based
on this information, find the spring constant. A lift is moving up with a consta
nt retardation = 2 m/s . When its upward velocity is 5 m/s, a boy in the lift to
sses a coin, imparting it an upward initial velocity = 3 m/s, with respect to hi
mself His fingers at the moment of toss are midway between the floor and ceiling
, whose total height is 2.0 m. After how much time will the coin hit the floor o
r roof of the lift? Also find the distance travelled by the coin and its displac
ement in the earth frame till then. [Take g = 10 m/s ] At a distance of 20 m fro
m a point isotropic source of sound, the loudness level is 30 dB. Neglecting dam
ping of sound, find the loudness level at a distance of 10 m from the source and
the distance where the sound is not audible by humans.
hor v 2 2 2
Q.43 In the figure shown, find the relative speed of approach/ separation of the
two final images formed after the light rays pass through the lens on the far r
ight, at the moment when u = 30 cm. The speed of object = 4 cm/s. The two lens h
alves are placed symmetrically w.r.t the moving object.
f=40cm
f=60cm
otfcct, infer -1
V
40 cm
^ Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[430]
Q.44
Figure shows the Regnault's appratus to determine the specific heat capacity of
a unknown liquid. A solid sphere of known specific heat capacity s, having mass
m, and initial temperature 0,, is mixed with the unknown liquid filled in a calo
rimeter. Let masses of liquid and calorimeter are m and m respectively, specific
heat capacities are s and s and initially they were at room temperature 0 . Whe
n the hot sphere is dropped in it, the sphere looses heat and the liquid calorim
eter system takes heat. This process continues till the temperature of all the e
lements becomes same (say 0). Heat lost by hot sphere = mjS, (Qj—0) Heat taken by
liquid & calorimeter = m s (0-0 ) + m s (0-0 ) If there were no external heat lo
ss Heat given by sphere = Heat taken by liquid - calorimeter system m,Sj (0,-0)
= m s (0-0 ) + m s (0-0,) mjSj(0j-0) m s Get s = m ( 0 - 0 ) m
2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 9 2 3 3 3 3 2
HEAT CAPACITY DETERMINATION OF A LIQUID USING CALORIMETER :
2
2
2
steam Chamber
"0"
steam
Disk D -Water
(a)
(b)
By measuring the final (steady state) temperature of the mixture, we can estimat
e s : specific heat capacity of the unknown liquid. To give initial temperature
(0,) to the sphere, we keep it in steam chamber ("O"), hanged by thread. Within
some time (say 15 min) it achieves a constant temperature 0,. Now the calorimete
r, filled with water (part C) is taken below the steam chamber, the wooden remov
able disc D is removed, and the thread is cut. The sphere drops in the water cal
orimeter system and the mixing starts. If specific heat capacity of liquid (s )
were known and that of the solid ball (s^ is unknow then (m s +m s )(0-0 ) we ca
n find s, = — — — — "1,(0,-9) In the exp. of finding specific heat capacity of an unknow
sphere (s ) mass of the sphere and calorimeter are 1000 gm and 200 gm respectiv
ely and specific heat capacity of calorimeter is equal to 1/2 cal/gm/°C. The mass
of liquid (water) used is 900 gm. Initially both the water and the calorimeter w
ere at room temperature 20.0°C while the sphere was at temperature 80.0°C initially.
If the steady state temperature was found to be 40.0°C. estimate specific heat ca
pacity of the unknow sphere (s ). (Use s = 1 cal/g/°C) Also find the maximum permi
ssible error in specific heat capacity of tinkown solid. What should be final te
mperature so that the error in s should ne minimum?
2 2 7 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 water
Calorimeter
^Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[431]
Q.45 END CORRECTIONS IN METER BRIDGE In meter bridge circuit, some extra length
of wire called end corrections should be included at ends for accurate result. S
uppose null point is obtained at /;, then Qi _ i Q 100-ZJ+p When known resistanc
es are interchanged then balancing length is at l . R L T i ioo-/ +p The end cor
rections calculated from above readings are used to modify observation If 100 fi
& 200 D values of known resistance is used to give null deflection at /,= 33.0
cm & on interchanging the known resistances the null deflection is found at 67.0
cm. Find the value of end correction. INDEX ERROR IN OPTICAL BENCH In u-v metho
d the distance between object or image from the pole of mirror or les is require
d. Practically the position of holder when read from scale do not exactly give o
bject or image distance. This mismatch is constant for every observation. To det
ermine index error a needle (usually usedfor knitting) of known length is placed
horizontally between the pole & object needle. The length of knitting needle gi
ves actual object distance while the separation between holder index is read fro
m the scale. Which becomes observed distance so index error (or excess reading)
is e = Observed distance - Actual Distance For index correction the e is subtrac
ted from observed reading to get correct reading. (a) When a knitting needle of
length 20.0 cm is adjusted between pole and object needle, the separation betwee
n the indices of object needle and mirror was observed to be 20.2 cm. Find the i
ndex correction for u. (b) When the same knitting needle is adjusting between th
e pole and the image needle, the separation between the indices of image needle
and mirror was found to be 19.9 cm. Find the index error for v. (c) In some obse
rvation, the observed object distance (Separation between indices of object need
le and mirror) is 30.2 cm, and the observed image distance is 19.9 cm. Using ind
ex correction from previous two equations, estimate the focal length of the conc
ave-mirror. Q.47 A conducting sphere of radius a is surrounded by another spheri
cal thin conducting shell of radius b The space between them isfilledwith dielec
tric material of conductivity a and dielectric constant k. The charge Q. and Q a
re given to the inner and outer shell at time t = 0. Find charge on outer shell
at time t. Q.48 The amplitude of the electric field in an electromagnetic wave o
f frequency © = 2.0 x 10 s~ changes with times as E(t) = k (1 + cos Ht), where k i
s a constant and fi= 1.8 x 10 s~'. Would such a wave cause ionization of hydroge
n atoms? If yes, what is the energy of the ejected electrons E ? Assume that ato
ms absorb light as photons. The ionization energy of hydrogen gas is E = 13.6 eV
. the Planck constant h - 1.05 J * s. Q.49 An air-filled parallel-plate capacito
r with the plate area A is connected to a battery with an emf E and small intern
al resistance. One of the plates vibrates so that the distance between the plate
s varies as d = d + a cos ©t (a « d ). The capacitor break down when the instantaneo
us current in the circuit reaches the value of I. Find the maximum possible ampl
itude of vibrations a. Q.50 Two simple pendulums of length L each are attached t
o the ceiling. The small balls attached to the strings have equal masses m. The
weights are connected by a very light relaxed rubber band (not a spring) with th
e force constant k. At a certain moment, each ball is given a light quick push a
s shown, resulting in equal initial speeds. Find the period T of the ensuing mot
ion.
L l + a 2 2 2 2 + A = 2 2 16 x 15 e 0 Q
^Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[432]
Q.51 A proton (m, e) and an alpha particle (4m, 2e) approach each other from a l
arge distance. Initially, their velocities are the same (v). Find the minimum se
paration r between the particles. Q.52 A wooden cube with a side of d = 0.10 m i
s placed on a horizontal support. A bullet of mass m = 0.010 kg is shot vertical
ly up through the support and through the cube. As the bullet passes through the
cube, its speed decreases uniformly from v = 120 m/s to u = 115 m/s. Estimate t
he minimum mass M of the cube that would allow it not to lose contact with the s
upport. Q.53 In a strictly scientific experiment, a student athlete throws rocks
out the window in all directions. All rocks have the same initial speed v. It t
urns out that all rocks' landing velocities make angles 0 or greater with the ho
rizontal. Find the height h of the window above the ground. Q.54 An insulated co
ntainer is filled with a mixture ofwater and ice at tc = 0°C. Another container is
filled with water that is continuously boiling at ^ = 100°C. In a series of exper
iments, the containers are connected by various thick rods that pass through the
walls of the containers (refer diagram). The rod is insulated in such a way tha
t there is no heat loss to surroundings. In experiment 1, a insulation copper ro
d is used and the ice melts in T, = 20 min. In experiment 2, a steel rod of the
same cross section is used and the ice melts in T = 60 min. How long would it ta
ke to melt the ice if the two rods are used "in series"? Q.55 How can you measur
e the resistance of an unknown resistor r with an ammeter and a voltmeter if you
don't know the internal resistances of these devices? A voltage source is avail
able. Q.56 A dubmbell consists ofa light rod of length r and two small masses m
attached to it. The dumbbell stands vertically in the corner formed by two frict
ionless planes. L After the bottom end is slightly moved to the right, the dumbb
ell begins to slide. Find the speed u of the bottom end at the moment the top en
d loses contact with the vertical plane. Bbi_ Q.57 Find the maximum power of a h
eating element that can be constructed from a piece of wire that has a resistanc
e of 536 Q. The element is to be powered by a constant voltage of V = 110 V. The
current through the wire cannot exceed 2 A. Q.58 A heavy block is attached to t
he ceiling by a spring that has a force constant k. A conducting rod is attached
to the block. The combined mass of the block and the rod is m. The rod can slid
e without friction along two vertical parallel rails, which are a distance L apa
rt. A capacitor of known capacitance C is attached to the rails by the wires. Th
e entire system is placed in a uniform magnetic field B directed as shown. Find
the period T of the vertical oscillations of the block. Neglect the electrical r
esistance of the rod and all wires.
2
Q.59 An electric circuit contains a battery with emf E and internal resistance r
, two coils with inductances L, and L, and a resistor R, connected as shown. On
the diagram, all shown parameters are given. Initially, both switches are open.
Switch S, is then closed. After a while, switch S is closed. What is the total c
harge Q that passes through the resistor after S- is closed? Q.60 Figure shows t
hree identical balls Mj, M and M each of radius 10 M, cm. The ball M is given a
certain velocity in the direction of AB such that after collision with M , it (M
) has a head-on collision with the ball Mj. Find the distance BC (in cm) where
B lies on the line joining the centres of M, and M . The balls are assumed to be
perfectly elastic. Given CjC = 1 m.
2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
^ Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[10]
HINTS & SOLUTIONS MATHEMATICS
1.
L = Lim x->0 /n(l + x) /
+
n ( x + A
1 /[ + x )
t =
L = Lim ^(x W l x ) - / n ( x l ) _ x-,0 . M ^ > . VT^)
2 x
^
In x + Vl + x 1+^
2 2
2
X
/ n ( x +
x-Zn^x + V T ^ - l ) + l)(x + Vl + x -1)
2
(x+vr+x -i)
2
note that Lim
x->0
/nf(x + Vl + x -1) + 1 X + Vl + x -1
2
->1
\
hence L= Lim
x->0
/n x + Vl + x -1 vv 1 + X
2
/Y
\
+1
X + Vl + X - l
2 2
x + Vl + x -1 (x + Vl + x - 1 ) 1+x
2
/—r \ A /n -1 + 1 1+x / y =i Note that Lim vv > x->0 x + Vl + x" - l ~T+x~
x + Vl + x
(V
= Lim
x + Vl + x - 1 - x = Lim VT+ x -1 x(l + x)(x + V1 + x -1) - x(V 1 + x + x -1)
2 z 2 x >0 2
(as Lim(l + x) = 1) x-M)
L - Lim ( V ^ + l - l X V x ^ l + l ) x->0 ( V x + l + l ) - x ( V x ^ + l + x -
l )
2 =
x-(Vx +l+x-l V^T--(x-l)] x-2 Lim x 1 = Lim x-*o 2 (x + l ) - ( x - l ) 2x 2
2
— Lim 1
2
[(x
+1)-1][VX2+T-(X-1)]
2 H
2
2
2 L + 153 (1/2)+ 153 hence — ;L = — 7 7 ^ — = 1 + 2 • 153 = 1 + 306 = 307 Ans. ] (1/4
L = J
•••
<§Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
IW
2.
Let
C: problem is solved correctly
P(C) =
9-10 + 10-16 _ 5 300
~ 6
....(1)
1 A : Problems from the university A; P(A) = — B : Problems from the university B;
P(B) 3 1 3 1 P(W,/B) 10 P(W/Wj) - ' P(Wj/A) ' P(C/Wj)= ; we have to find P(W/C)
= ? P( Wj n C) P(Wj)-P(C/WJ) now P(W,/C) = " ^ c P P(CT ....(2) A Vw, now P(Wj)
= P(A n Wj) + P(B n Wj) = P(A) • P(Wj/A) + P(B) • P(W,/B) I _L _ A ~ 3 ' 5 3 ' 10 ~
15 Hence from (1) and (2) (2/15)(1/4) _ J_ 6 _ _1_ _ p + q= l + 2 5 = 26 Ans. ]
P(W,/C) (5/6) ~ 30 5 ~ 25
4 5
W: problem is solved wrongly P(W) Cj: She thinks that the problem is correct Wj:
She thinks that the problems is wrong
6
7
=
9
+
ljiF 2Q , 10 V ndl-AWv— |Hq ^ where Q = 40 pC, the charge on 2pF just before closi
ng the switch 2. l.(a) 2 ]uF LHfi-H^ (Q-q) By kirchhoffs law (Q-q) 20+ 1 0 - 2 I
- q = 0 I 2 J dq 1 1 0 - ^ =21 = 2dq , 3q - 20 = - dt ' 2 dt 3q-20 4
+ = 1
PHYSICS
r__dt _ I f integrating both sides J _ o ~ 4 J
q 3 q 2
=1
T
3q-20
•20
on solving q = — (l- ~ }iC
e 3t/4
20
dq I = -7- = 5e- amp dt
3t/4
^ Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[12]
(b)
20 20 Work done by 10 V battery = — x 10~ x io = — x 10" J
6 5
Heat lost by 2 0 resistor = jl (2)dt = 50je~ dt= — xlO" J o o
2 3/2 5
u xl0%= 50%] percentage of work done by 10V battery lost in the form of heat ^20
xlO".5 \
:
rio
xlO"-5
\
2(a) y mAD d
=
for coincidence of maxima nXD d 8100 m = 4500 n _n _ 9 m 5 9x4500xl0~ xl = 2.025
mm 2x10 -3
10
/
(b)
f V
0 x8100 2)
=
f l
0 2)
' n + —0 x 4500: v 2 j ' m + —r
9 5
=> n = 4; m = 2
y =
4 +— V 2y
4500 xlO" 13— = 1.0125 mm Ans. ] 2x10
10 0
The whole process is isobaric with pressure = P + mg A AQ = nC AT 7 25 1000 = 1
x - x — x AT 2 3 6000 240
p
10 +- 2x10 N/m = 1,2x 10 N/m 10x10"'
3 2 5
2
(a)
„^ 240 2000 AW = nRAT= 1 x — x — J =285.7 J PAY = AW P x A x Ah = AW 50 Ah = —r m 21
2 5
(b) 4.
Final temperature = (300 + (240/7)) K 2340 K] If x is the position of centre of
mass below the centre of sphere xm R m 2 7 0 X — 8m 14 Q \ Total energy = mg R - — c
ose + - I © 14
P
~T
2
....(1)
^Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[13]
From parallel axis theorem r I * I - m R + m 13R 14 14 y
p 0 0
(0 is small);
"8m ^ m Also I = — v'AzJ ^7 j differentiating equation (1) R d0 1 0 = - mg — sin 6)— +
— d© _ mgR dt ~ 14I
n ]
2©
d© dt Jlr
±p
5.
D Ax= dcosO 4 (10 X-X)= \0 X cos 0 1 cos 0 = 1 10'
4
,4 >
— = tan9
d cos 0
2 sin (0/2) = 2
T
( cos 0 = 1 - 2 sin (0/2) ); sin (0/2) =
2
0
6.
•h 100
• i •• . i i
V
y D'
y = - j ^ - m = 2 cm Ans. ]
D\fl
r = R sin 0
z
° i 4tcRyJx(27cRsine)Rde = dE <r r i ^ \ P sin0d0 ^ he — = (dn)— 2 X V P sin 0 d 0 dn
= 2hc cw> : h 'PAsinGde^ C O S 0 dF cos 0 = , 2hc
o
1
dF cos 0
0
f
x
It/2 J eff = — { s i n e COS 0 d 0
dF
a(2itRt)
p
eff
=
2c P 1 - 0 2c 2 4c
0
o2 Tt Rt = 4c P = 8 71 a Rt c
0
^ Bansal Classes
PHYSICS [437]
350x200 340 + 5 + 15 200x360 200 340 + 5 + 5 A - 200 340 + 5-10 fx 340+ 5-To 335
335 360 3 4 0 - 5 - 5 360 330 f2 = 200 x 200 x 335 340-5-15 335 x 320 360 330 3
50 200 360x330 200 360x33 y - / i = 200 x — x — - 2 0 0 x 335 335 320 -350 335 32 -3
50 335 320 / - / , « 12.68 Hz ] m m u cos 0 = — v + mv.
2 2 2
2~ i O-ucos0 v - V = u cos 0
V V
2 t
u sin 8
u sin 0
Vj = u COS 0
=
V,
4ucos 0 3 u cos 0
f
ucosO § = tan~ 3usin0 V
n 2
it
$ = tan~
cot0
- tan"
cot0
0
tan"
cotG
n
-(P-0)
cot 0
cot (p+0)
cot 0 cot P cot 0 - 1 3 "" cot p +cot0 cot P cot 0 + cot e - 3 cot P cot e -3 i
cot p 2 tan 6 + 3 tan 0
2
=> cot p is mm. at tan 0 = j j hence p is max, at 0 = 30° ] 9, V. = AXp V, AX,i. k
X, kX, p _ _—L p A
2
i mole of diatomic
1 A
vacuum
IP
11Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[15]
AW = JkXdx = Y ( X ^ - X F )
x,
AQ - AU + AW = nC dT + AW= - R ( T -T,) + AW
v 2
AQ = | ( R T - R T , ) + A W = | ( P V - P V ) + AW = | ( k X - k X f ) + | (X*-
X?)
2
2 2 1 i
2
AW 10, u ti v c o s 3 7 ° '
0 T = t + t = 0
(k/2)(X - X ) 100 2 - 7Xf)x 1 0 0 = — % ^ (5 / 2)(kX - kXf) + (k / 2)(X
2 2 2 2 t2
]
u ev cos37°
0 0 0
u 5/8xv x4/5
Q
A+iL-Ii i 2 v v v 2v sin 37° 13 2 v x 3 / 5 _ 13 v'0 ' 10 vo i 13 v = 5 J j m/s
Q Q A 0
TTTTTTTTT7TTT7
4 7R 11.(a) M = p - n —
3
M,tota!
2
j
7
F = Fj - F (b)
(2R y
2
If V, and V gravitational potentials, v is final speed GM removed
3R
2
f—T I 2J
4 Mremoved = P — 71 R =. 3 8 "7 2GMm ( m\ 9R
3 M 2
R
7
where V
GMM
2R
al
G M tola!
R
n
G M removed
y v
J
R/2
putting the value of V, and V and solving we get,
2
v=
I6GM 1 \ 21R
Lj r,
12.
l O-
2
r.
R, = 3fi a-3 Lj = 20 x 10" H
L = 40 x 10" H
2 3
R 2 = 6Q
e = 15 sin 200 t
fa Bansal Classes
Z,= y'Rf-HtoLj) = V 3 7 4 = 5
2 T f
PHYSICS
Z,= ,/R +(cdL )
2 2 1 + 2 2
2
a/6 +8'
2 1 + 2 2
10
2 2
Z = ^ ( R R ) + c o ( L L ) = V 9 +12 = 15 I - ^-sin(200t-<j)) = j|sin(200t-<|>)
I = sin (200t - <()) where cos<() = Now, V, = IqZj sin(200 t - <j> + ()>,) = 5
sin (200t) V, = 5 sin(200t) V = I Z sin(200t) V = 10sin(200t) ]
2 0 2 2
R,+R
2
9 3 =—= here cos<j)j =
[ v <|> = (f>,]
dN 13.(a) dt
:
q - AN N JXT - f dN
In 2
1
A = ln2 'dt 4qT ' in 2 = t (-A)
4&*-N-q
0
ln(AN-q)-ln In AN-q 3q -At
(b)
AN 1 q — =- + N = f (1- 3 e-^) 3q 3 X qT N = -r~z (1 + 3e" ) In 2 At t = 2T
xt
N 2T
^ -2( l + 3e- ) In qT 1 + In 2 V2 No. o f a particle decaying = N + q(2T)-N ' "3
A/2-3 = qT V2in2 + 2 ]
= 2Sn2 0 2T
[N is N at t
0
fe Bansal Classes
Simple Harmonic Motion [5]
14.(a) A x
1 2
=
yd _
D
0.7xl0~3
x0.7x!0
2x0.3
A(|) 1 2
271
7x10~
7
x Ax
7 x 1 0"
271 _ x 7 x l 0
7
7
X —
0.6
= —
3
= 0
n
+ —
3
71 Similarly, A(j) = 2tc + —
23
(c)
Ax = (1.25 - 1) x 1 . 4 x 10-6 = - ^ x l O "
6
=
X
=>
A(j) ]2 = 7 T +
71
— 3
71
2
A(J)
= 71
A(J)2, = 7 1 +
A;
= A2 + 4A2 -
2A
2
x -
1
= 4 A 2 = 4I0
4 14 I res = 7 x 7 x 1 0 " 4 = — x e„ (y 3 15. (a)
W/m2
V = 1 2 + 10 v = 16 m/s
x
y
= 22
m/s
2 V2 +v y x
V=
V256 + 484
= V 7 4 0 m/s
v = V740 m/s 2 v —-
(b)
T i m e o f flight i s =
§
2x16
10
3.2 sec
x = 3.2 x 2 2 = 70.4 m 70.4 = 1 0 x 3.2 + — x a x (3.2)2 70.4 = 3 2 + 5 . 1 2 a a
=
1
7.5
m/s2
& Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[18]
5
jeep 7.5i,a
=
b a l l
=-10j
=
^ b a l l / jeep
=
a
ball ~ ajeep
- 1 0 j - 7 5 i ,
ball/jeep
12.5 m/s
2
'ball/jeep ~
12i + 16j
^ball/jeep = 2 0
m / s
0 = (20) -2 x 12.5 x s, s ^>s = 16ffi I
2
400 25
2 2
16.
(a) (b)
(2FX, - F X ) - i k(X, - X ) - i mvf + i 4mv
2
• 2F
cm
2F-F 5m
F 5m
F+ma,
F - 4ma„ 2F-4mx6F 5 > 6F 5 5m
F +5m m tx
6F 5
6F
tm
v
2
6F 5
~ X m , + y X m , = ^ ( X m , +Xm.) — (Xm, + Xm ) = - k(Xm. + Xm ) ,
2 2 2
2
fiF
1
6F k y =-(Xmj+Xm )
2
12 F 12 5mg 12mg Xm, + Xm, = — k = — x —-— = ——— 5~ 5 k k
1 1
(c)
maximum elongation^ mXnij = 4mXm , Xm, = 4Xm,
12mg
2
Xm, + Xm = ^
2 2 2
12mg
Xm, = 4Xm
2
4Xm + Xm = K 12mg 48mg ' 5k 5k 48mg amplitude of mass m ~~5k~
12mg
X m = 4 X
5Xm = k
0 2
12mg
Xm =
2
12mg
y
r
& Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[19]
a=
K m x 4 m
5m
_ " f5ke
g s
m a x
5k 48mg , „„ of m = coA = J - — x — - — = — x24 V 4m 5k V 5k
17.(a)By momentum conservation, 5m x v - mv, = mv ...(1) By angular momentum con
servation, mv — z = - mvj — z 5 m/ I J I J ~rT By coefficient of restitution equatio
n,
2 Q 0
2
2
+
x
®
-(2)
(I D 3 V, + VT + C Z U , 4 v -Q V -+V, = 5V 5v. - z 5/ co
1 2
0 0 2 2
x
•••(3)
12
^
6V -V +CD\2/ z^ —
7 0
6x 5OD/; 7v„ / 12 + © — z 2 -z
V
()
B
V
co/ B= v - Y - 0
2
=>
co/ 2=T
I I
/ co
2
12
co/ T
z=
(C)
C = O
3
4' 3 9
+
tjl t
+
- V X4 6
0
N
21VQ 38/ 29v =5v -v = -^f 2 0
v
co/ 2 2
y
21v, 76 '
x m x
v i
K = 12
29v
"l6
(
+ —x5mx 2iô + —x5mx — x 2 2 12 76
^ Bansal Classes
PHYSICS [437]
1 2^ 29 +5x21 + 5x7 = 2~ n 76
2 2 m v 0 2
2
„1 2
m v 2 x 0
3291 5776
AK K„ 18. (a)
2845 xlOO =43% 5776 p,C + p C C =m p,+p
2 v 2 v
J 2 'V,
= 3
C =
p
2
v
2
15R „ — - + 3R
5R _ 3R 2 ' 2 ~
c v 2
21R
C = R + C - 2 . 1 R + R = 3.1 R
y
(b)
S i M I L _ 31_ 31_ r 2.1R 21' ~ 21 given: P=const > T = 1200 K T, - 300 K
= =
V
Y
Pj = P 2 x 10 N/m V, =Vn
0 5
2
i =const T, = T = 300 K
4
. v=c«"t > T = 300 K p P = 2 x 10 N/'m = P P,= fjL = 4 V 2 =4V v 3 =4V 0 P ,T=300K
T=1200K Po
2 3 2 s 2 0 H v
2
P.j = P = P = 2 x 10 N/m
4 0 5
2
Zo 4
-sT=3G0K.
4V
mV
n
(c)
300K 1200K" ' Work done in entire cycle W,l->2 3P V 2-»3 0
r Kj 0 0 W =
i|Bansal Classes
V3 PV 8 w net l->2 2-*3 3~>l W -3PoV -l-4P V =1.6P V W =I-6P V Q,n = Q ^ = AU _
+ W ^ = pC (T -T )
3 c V 0 0 lo
W =
W _,J - nRT, log
+ W net 0
ZL
W
'•"Vo '
v e
v4Vo J
L4P V
0
0
+
0
0
0
0
nei
0
0
2
!
>2
!
2
p
2
PHYSICS
1
Qin = Ql-»2 = H - ! ( 2 - l ) 3- (H 2~ l^ l) -l ( 2 2 " l l ) Qin = Q i - > 2 = 3-
1 (4P V -P V ) = 3P V X 3 . 1
X3 R T T = 1 RT RT = 3 P V P V 0 0 0 0 0 0
V Q 1.6P V ri % - 3P„V„x3.1 1 0 0 ° °* •o'o •
n n 1 1 / 0
A W net
xlOO
=
——— xlOO = 9.3 x 1 OO —• 3,i 3
x
160
Tj %
9.3 = 17.2% ]
19.
(a)
(b)
A T
m 0
I ax = 4A2 I = 2A2 when A < J 2 A then detector becomes idle
res
1000
1
10~ sec
3
from 1 to 2, it remains idle for phase angle of 90° => t = — = 0.5 x 10' s ] 2
idle 3
AT
20.
0.06 Q i o = 0.0125 kg/m 4.8 A- = 3.5 cm = 3.5 x lQ- m
= 2
P
4.8m, 0.06 kg
02 R p, 2.56 0.0781 kg/m
T = 8 0 N
2.56m, 0.2 kg
f 80
V i
V
2
V 0.0781 « 32 m/s 32-80
,
—
80
A = A 2~ 1 V i 2;
V v r v + V + V
3.5 x 10~
2
v 112
I 1 A*
48
x 3.5 x 10-2 = - -
Ja
3
x 10~2 m
= 3.5 x 10l 2, 4.8 2.56
2
2 x IO" 7
m
21.
^Bansal Classes
Given: I, - 0.5 A I=I I Applying Kirchoffs Law:15 - 111, -(11 - r ) x 0.5 = 0 an
d IjT = I x 6 = 3 Putting I, - 3/r in eq. (1) 9.5-11 x (3/r) + 0.5r = 0 r + 19r
- 66 = 0 r=3 So, length AD = 3 cm]
1+ 2 2 2
15 V
•(1) .(2)
I, r -WWV L.I —'VWv en
2
n
in 1 •A/WV*] S w(10—r) W B vW
PHYSICS
[22]
22.
4 3 v = — Ttr
dv dr — = 4TO-. — dt dt TR -4 l [dt |r dr 8r)/7 j
2 [ 3
ttR x 4T — 8 T)/ r
4
TR 8rj/
t, =
1
2r)/r t,i = TR T- Ans.
3L/5
\
L VQCOSS
23.
•V 0 sin6
o
In CM frame velocity of B
Lab frame Fig. (A)
<
v n cos8
,v cos8
0
»v 0 sin8 CM frame Fig. (B)
Tangential velocity remains unchanged whereas velocity change along string for B
is mv sin 9 Impulse of tension 2 24.(a) Let wooden log moves distance x Displac
ement of centre of mass along horizontal = 0 L L 2m 2 x , m 2 x - mx = 0 V 3L x —
8 — 20.25 cm (b) By conservation of mechanical energy
:
vsin9
(m + m + 2m)v = (2m - m)g(Lsin60°);
2
43.Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[23]
point where a bat is held \ 25. From linear momentum linear impulse equation, we
get FAt = MV ...(1) From angular impulse angular momentum equation, we get F(y
- a)At = (MKL)co ...(2) (Mk co) (y-a) "MVT
cm 2
For point to be stationary cm ( - ) ®
V = a X
Vcm k = (a - x) = ~~—~ co (y-a) mg+ 1.36 = p,vg mg + 0.82 = p vg mg + 1 = p vg Pl
l+P 2 I 2
2 2 v 2 V V + V
or
k (y-a)
2
solving we get 1
V
27.
28.
If system is balance then 2 V t — =2T* x V2> i i = T d =i (i) — 2 Mg Mg 2Tj = Mg sin
30° = , T, = ....(ii) T = 10 x 10= 100 N ,T = 100 N (iii) from (i) d = 3d, , T, x
d, = T x 3d,, T, = 300 N Mxg from (ii) 300 = — , M = 120 kg M = 120 kg ] Ray 1 ca
rries (1 - k) of the beam's energy; Ray 2 carries k (l - k) ofthe beam's energy;
Ray 3 carries k (l - k) of the beam's energy; etc. The total fraction of transm
itted energy is (1 - k) + k (l - k ) + k (I - k ) + ... = (1 - k) (l + k + k + .
..) = (1 - k) /(l - k ) = (1 - k)/(l + k) = 7/13 = 53.8% ]
d T d 2 0 T d 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 4 2 2
2
7
Z
Ans. ]
^Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
29.
RB = —— sin 9 RA = RB cos 2 0 h = —-r (cos 26) sin 0 path difference Ap = RB - RA h Ap
= — — (1 - cos 20) = 2h sin 0 = X —0 sin X 7t 2A, 2 sin 0 = 7- => 3 x — = 2(4m) h 180
71 X = 4x—-m =0.42 ml 30
J
30.
Vj - v (35-20) 2g 100 (in meter) Also, v, (1) = v (2) (by equation of continunit
y) 3v.2 15 2g 100 .'. v = 1 m/s mass flow rate = a x v x ^ = 1000 x l x 2 x i o
= 0.2 kg /sec 2 2 37.5-35 2.5 2~ 3 Now, 1 - 3 100 x20 3 100 2g
2 2 2 2 -4
V V
V
V
=
]
31.
Unl ^-r suppose v is the constant velocity then co = —
v
mg
t = IAB e 1 1 n 2 x Brv 1 = R = — x — Br V— = 2R R 2 Brv IBVv t = IAB = 2R x %r B 2 R
current I: when v = 3 m/sec e 1 Brv 1 1 = R 2 R — x 0.5x0.2x3 1A Ans 2 0.15 for hi
ghest velocity net torque on the ring should be zero 2mgR 2x20xl0~ x 10x0.15 x =
mgr = 1 B to* V-; v = B V 0.25x7tx4xl0, - 2 and t = mgr = 20 x 10~ x 10 x 0.2 -
4 x 1Q- N-m Ans. ]
A 1
2
2
3
3
5x3.14r =0.2 m/sec Ans.
3
2
& Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[25]
3 2
"
( a )
1 dN N^
= C v 2
'
0 3
IdN v V = ICv2dv
0
N
1 = C v q0. 1
C =
- ^J v0
(b)
JvdN v = fCv dv = v„ = _o N n jv dN
2 2
0.75V
A
(c)
33.
= JCv^dv = J ^ x ^ " = v J N i mu = 4mv cosQ ...(1) mvj = 4mv sin9 ...(2) From e
q. (1) & (2) u + v? = 16 v ...(3) Ej = -(13.6 eV)z = -54.4 eV o0 2 2 2 2
=0.775 v J
0
0
mvj
E,i = - -(13.6z) = -6.4 eV n
1
mu Before collision
v
4invo
After collision
AEj = E AE = E AE = E AE = E
2 3 4
2 3 4 3
- Ej = 40.8 eV - Ej = 48 eV - E , = 51 eV - E = 7.2 eV
2 2 m v
65eV= ~mvf + | ( 4 m ) v + AE = ~ f + ~(4M)
1 1
u +v*
a
16
+ AE
...(4)
1 65eV = -2m v .2 + 81 2+ ——- + AE -mv, 65eV 4 On substituting AE = 51 eV mv, comes
out to be negative, which implies that, electron transition upto n = 3 is possib
le. In subsequent de-excitation the possible energies are AEj -40.8 eV [n = 2 to
n = 1] AE = 48 eV [n = 3 t o n = l ] AE = 7.2 eV [n = 3 to n = 2] ]
3 2 4
34.
^Bansal Classes
Net external force = M system acm „ ( ma + 0 2mg sin 6 = 2m I 2m , => a = 2g sin 6
PHYSICS
[26]
m+m . . a = m gsinG Also v - — = 2ad;
2
3v_ 8a
solving we get d = 2 m/s Ans. ]
35.
Let at any instant t charge is q . dq [charge decreasing] ~ dF di d^q dt dt di C
dt C dt 2 '
1 = 2 L
•c
'-nmp-
1 q = q sin .VLC t + (j) at t = 0, q = q => <|) = rc/2
0 0
r
dq dt
2 2
LC
q
•'• ^qocos^tj Now, when energy becomes half then, 2c 4 c Let it happens at t = t V^ °
= q 0
f
1
^
q
0
q
0
c o s
fi IVTc
0
°J
5
;
VLC
l
0 = 7t/4
t = ^VLC = 5TI x 10- sec]
Just before collision Just after collision some time after collision
36.
m. v C m, 2v
L/6| L/6i
"co
0
Applying conservation of angular momentum about CM ofthe system which is CM ofth
e rod just after collision ^ fLl - m v f L m2v ~ UJ 3v 4L
—
2mL
12
•m
2
—
UJ
FLL +M J
—
co
n
& Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[27]
Applying conservation of angular momentum about CM ofthe system just after colli
sion and a the time when insects are at distance x from centre
r
v
2mL + mx +mx, co 12
7
2mL2
j
co = dx
12
2co L L + 2x"
0
de=
° - + 2x
2 L a ) d t
6
2
L cd / ^ Jf d e =9V Jr L/6
2 q l 2
+x
\ '
co LVn 0 r 9v tan" V 3 - t a n V3
0 1 -1
co L7r 71 9V3v ~ 12V3
0
r a d i a n
A n s
"
]
37.
(a)
Mg (R sin 60°) = x = la v^J
/ N
.'. a
M ^ (R sin 60°) v^ j - m R + 'm R 2 _
r 2 2
a = gV3 4R a (b) and
N
A
VP
v
gV3 4R R=
y
Nj =
1
cos 60° = ~ ~ 4 mg sm 60° - N =m a . y 2
2
Na\
A
a
/'60(
2
\\ aA \
A
=
= mg + N, cos 60° + N cos 30°
2
8
T"
mg
21
N,
'60°
30°
hor
= Nj sin 60° - N sin 30° _ mgV3
2
kN,
16
]
mg
"hor
^Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[28]
38.
Time taken by A to reach to B t, = 1/4 now velocity of B will be 4 m/s time take
n by B to oscillate = n T I C t =n V I6n' 4tc 4 time taken by A to go back to le
ft wall is = 1/4 — t^
2 2
1 total time period of this oscillatory system = t, +1 +1, = — + 39. v m< | tan0
+
, rolling will not occus
mg(sin0~pcos0) m pmgR cos 9 pg cos 9 Also a mR R If t is the time to complete on
e revolution 1 ,
2
Distance travelled by centre 1 „ 27ta _ 27tR(sin9-pcos9) _ 2TI(5-V3) xat = a pcos0
V3
2
— at = 2p
2
mg _ mg 0 \ 40,(a) Initial acceleration = — - - = g/5 (b) At the instant when spri
ng makes an angle 9 with vertical
m/4
x = L tan9 mg xLtan0 g
j m + —i jv 4 2V 4 J W = work done by spring force -• - change in spring energy mgLt
an© _ mgLtan© -k[Lsec0-L] =5- m v " 1, , -> — 2 4 2 8 xLtan0 + W =
s rT T 2
Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
(c)
41.
For v = 0 x = V3L V3mgL_J_ 2 4 2 k = V3mg 2L v I
kL
=>
9 = 60°
Zm
JU
| a = 2m/s
0
2
w.r.t. h lift to acceleration of coin, a' = g - a = 8 m/s u = 3 m/s u, maximum h
eight, H' = —^ = 0.56 m < 1 m 2a' so, it cannot touch the roof of lift. Now, let t
is time taken to reach the floor
0 rd 2 s 0 0 2 0
2
42.
• -l=3t --~(8)t On solving, t = 1 sec w.r.t. ground Initial velocity, v = 8 m/s v
Maximum height, H = — = 3.2 m Time taken for upward motion, t, = v /g = 0.8 s Time
taken for downward motion, t = 1 - 0.8 sec = 0.2 Distance travelled during down
ward motion = (l/2)g * (0.2) = 0.2 m Total distance travelled = 3.2 + 0.2 = 3.4
m Displacement till that time = 8(1) - (l/2)g x (l) = 3 m ] 1 Point source - sph
erical wavefront => I o c ~ j I, = 41
0 2 ff 2 2 2
L = 10 log ~~ = 30
10 10
(1)
10 i0
41 Lj = 10 log ^" = 10[log 4] + L = 20 log 2 + 30 « 36 dB sound will= be inaudible
if I I from (1) I= 1000I I d ~ = 1~0 0 0~ d ( 2 0 ) I d = 2007l0 m ]
2 0 G 2 2 1 W U 2 2
& Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[30]
43.
40 / m = f + u 40+ (-30) m = v/u v = -120 cm
v
64 cm/s 2 cm 2 cm 4 cm/s
i =m v ,
2 0<
Vj = 1 6 x 4
= 64 cm/s Generaly equation for y-component of velocity of image
A_l-± v u / 1 1 1 v - 3 0 +40
120
40 / = 40 cm / = 60 cm
1 1 40 30
v = -120
y
yi
0
/
/
+ x 0
o'
x m
y«
f f + x Oj
s
dyu dt
(/ +x )
0
y0f U
2
_
x
x y of =" mv.. - —f + x )- x _ ( dt " " v o
dx0 u
v 0 x 0 2 v Y o
(1)
Applying equation (1) for first lens with V = 0 and then applying for second len
s with v = - 16/5 cm
y o
dx v = ( / y of ) 2dt =-(16/5) cm/s +X °y
o
_
0
2
Now substitute V and m = 60+ (-160) y 1 3 X / • 16zr\ 64x2x60 _ _ (60-160) 144/125
\ -> j 144 Therefore, relative velocity = 2 x 125
q
5
60
in eq. (1), to get
44.(a) To determine the specific heat capacity of unknown solid, m,s + m s t i w
e use ssolid and get s = 1/2 cal/g/°C m, ~ SS J
3 2 2 0 S0l]d
fds^ 1 = 2A0 e - e V s )max
s s
• +
-
2
1 1 1 2 (0.1 °C) 40.0-20.0 80.0-40.0 o , - oss y
- + -
1%
(b)
m s +m s m. y 9j-e substituting value, we get s, = 0.5 cal/g°C for finding error i
n s. s. =
2 2 3 3 v y
m s +m s \ (e -e)(de-de ) (0-e,)(d0,-d0) as, = mi y (G,-e)
2 2 3 3 a 2 2
r
^Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[31]
ds^ _ (de - de )(6 - 9) - (9 - e ) (dO, - d6)
2 1 2
(6! - 9) + (9 - 9 ) de - de (0, - 0) - d0j (0 - 6 ^)
2 2
S,
1 2
( 0 _ 0 ) ( 0 _ 0 )
1 2
(0,-0)(0-02)
2 1 2
As, _ (0 -0 )A0 + ( 0 - 0 ) A 0 + ( 0 - 0 ) A 0 As, _ A9[2(9,-9 )] s, ( 0 - 0 0
- 0 ) M ( H ) As, is minimum when (0,-9) (9 - 0 ) is maximum. 0,+0 This happens
when 0 20 + 80 => steady state temperature should be — - — = 50°C Ans. ]
1 2 ; ) ( 2 2
45.
1 cm, 1 cm
46. (a) 0.2 cm; (b) -0.1 cm ; (c) 12 cm [Sol.(c) u = 30.2 - 0.2 (excess reading)
= 30.2 cm v = 19.9 - (-0.1) (excess reading) = 20.0 cm. 1 1 1 7 = - + - =>f= 12
.0cm ] f v u 47, t = t Let charge on outer shell is Q => Leakage current I dQ dt
at distance r from centre J = ctE
I Am-' I dQ
charge on innershell = Q, + Q. - Q
=s
r
Qi + Qi-Q" 4n £n Kr 2
<?(Ql+Q2-Q) e0K
=
cr{Qx+Q2-Q) eo dQ
*
2
dt '
K
„^ + I
Q=Q2
1
a
~
t-t - f o7 o
SL-dt
f=0
48.
Gn k Qi The expression for the electric field can be obtained as E = k (1 + cos
Qt) cos cot 1 1 - k cos cot + — k cos (co - Q)t + — k cos (co + Q) t,
Qi
-in
Qx + Q2-Q
a
Qx +
Qi-Q
at e„k
Q=Q +Q,
2
at e„k
& Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[32]
When the product of the two cosines is expanded using a standard trigonometric i
dentity. These three terms corresponds to photons of energies hco, h (co-Q). The
latter exceeds the ionization energy by 0.7 eV. That difference equals the ejec
ted electron energy. ] 49. One can use the formula for the capacitance of a para
llel-plate capacitor: C = e A/d. According to the definition of capacitance, the
charge on one plate is Q = CE, where E is the emf (and the voltage across the c
apacitor). Also, the current is given by I (t) = dQ / dt I (t) = E (d C / dt) 1
(t) = E (dC/dd) (dd/dt) One can see that (dC/dd) = (-s A/d ) Since d « d , (dC/dd)
« (-s A/d ) Also, (dd/dt) = (aco sin cot) I (t) = (Ee A/ d^) (aco sin cot) The am
plitude of the current is then I = Es A aoo/dg, so
0 0 2 0 0 2 0 0
a =
EAWE
A '1
50.
The fact that the pendula hang vertically at equilibrium implies that the rubber
band tension is zero at that moment. If the bobs are each displaced a distance
x, then the rubber band is stretched by 2x, resulting in a tension of 2kx. Gravi
ty and the string tension act together to produce an additional restoring force
of mgx/L on each bob. The total restoring force on each bob is then -(2k + mg/L)
x when the bobs are moved outward from their equilibrium positions and -(mg/'L)x
when they are moved inward.
In general, the period of a simple harmonic motion is T = 2TT/CO. Then, for the
first (outward) halfcycle this becomes P, = 27t[m/(2k + mg/L)] = 27t(2k/m + g/'L
f and for the second (inward) half-cycle it is P = 27i[m/(mg/L)] = 2?c(g/L)~ . T
o find the period ofthe motion we add the two half-periods: T = (P, + P )/2 = 7i
[(2k/m + g/L)~ + (g/L)"" ]
1/2 1/2 2 !/2 1/2 2
m
2
51.
In the center of mass (c.m.) reference frame, all the kinetic energy is conserve
d to electrostatic potential energy at the final instant. The center of mass vel
ocity is 3v/5 (assuming the alpha particle is travelling in the positive directi
on), so the incoming alpha velocity is 2v/5 and the incoming proton velocity is
-8v/5. Therefore, the total kinetic energy in the c.m. reference frame is 8mv /5
. At the final instant, the electrostatic potential energy ofthe system is e /27
ts r. Solving for r gives r = 5e /167rs mv . ]
2 2 0 2 0 2
fe Bansal Classes
Simple Harmonic Motion
[5]
52.
53.
54.
in which A is the area, L is the length and k is the thermal conductivity, the o
nly factor different in the two experiments. Since A ^ - t,)/L is a constant, le
t C denotes it. When you put two rods in series you would have:
p
=v tan 0 = Vfy/V., so fx' V. = VtanO V = v tan 0 Also: V = 2gh and h - vtair0/(2
g,) ] The rate at which heat is transferred by a single rod is given by the expr
ession: P = QY , . A - T = C(t -t )
Vfi!
f
Since the bullet's loss of speed (Av = v - u) is small compared to u, we can ass
ume that its deceleration is fairly uniform while passing through the block, so
the upward force exerted by the bullet on the block is also fairly steady. The t
ime that it spends passing through the block can be found: At = d/v = 2d/(v + u)
The upward impulse exerted on the block is equal to the bullet's loss in moment
um: FAt = m(v - u) so, F = m(v - u)/At. Since the block does not quite lose cont
act with its support, we set that force equal to the weight of the block : Mg =
mAv/At. Solving for M and replacing the Av and At with the expressions above, we
find that the minimum block mass is M = m(v - u )/(2gd) = 6.0 kg ] Minimum 0 im
plies minimum V and maximum V . In order to have the aforementioned situation, t
he rock has to be launched horizontally. Then: V = V + 2gh (g>0,V =0)
av 2 2 & fy 2
fy
2
2
2
2
=
k
A
C
h
c
_ A(t -t )
h c
For our case, L, = L L. So we have:
2 h c 2 y
k, k„
7
55.
& Bansal Classes
k,k" A(t ~t ) l/k,+l/k L Vk, + k 2 I/ I _1 — + 1 1 P 1 2 We have T = Q/P,, T, = Q/
P and T = Q/P Q Q Q T= ^P = —+ — = T + T, 80 min.] P. P„ First, one can connect the vo
ltage source, the unknown resistor r and the ammeter in series. The voltmeter sh
ould be connected in parallel with the ammeter. The ratio of the readings, (V/I)
equals the resistance of the ammeter. Then the voltmeter should be reconnected
in parallel with both the ammeter and the unknown resistor. The ratio of the new
readings (V7T) now equals the total resistance of the ammeter and the unknown r
esistor. The unknown resistance r is, therefore, given by r = (V'/I') - (V/I).]
] 2 1
PHYSICS
[34]
56.
Since the normal force on the top mass is zero and the horizontal acceleration o
f the top mass is zero at the instant it loses contact with the wall, the tensio
n in the rod at that moment must be zero. Thus, free-body diagrams for the two m
asses are as sketched below.
Therefore, the top mass has downward velocity v = -dy/dt and acceleration g = -d
y/dt , while the bottom mass has rightward velocity u = dx/dt and zero accelera
tion. But y = V - x since the length of the rod is fixd, and thus
2 2 r 2 2
X TRMG
v = - dy/dt =
2 2
and g - - d y/dt u dx xu dy _ u y dt y dt Finally, from conservation of mechanic
al energy, 1 mg(r - y) = - m(u + v )
2 2 2
i
r
dx 2 _ 2 dt
x
xu
y
-
+
xuv _ y u
2
y
+-
x~u _ .2 i2 U
2
,.2 x A u 2r 2 2g(r - y) = u 1 + gy
,.2
(
so that 2 y=T 57.
r
u
:
|8gr 27
The heating element will consist of several segments of wire connected in parall
el. For maximum heating power, each segment must carry the greatest possible cur
rent, which is 2 A. Therefore, the resistance of each segment must be 110 V/2 A
= 55 Q. Since, 536/55 = 9.74, we can only use nine segments. Each segment will h
ave length = (55/536) L, where L = the original length of the wire. (The tenth p
iece will be too short and must be discarded) The heating power will then be 9 x
110 V x 2.0 A= 1980 W] Let the mass have descended a distance y and be at speed
v. The changing magnetic flux through the circuit loop leads to a Faraday emf B
Lv. This emf is related to the charge on the capacitor as q = CBLv Differentiati
ng with respect to time gives the current in the loop dv I = CBL dt The magnetic
force on the current carrying bar (upward ifthe bar is descending) is given by
dv Fmag = BIL = CB L — The net downward force on the bar and Newton's second law o
f motion gives dv dy mg - ky - CB L dt mdt
mao 2 2
d t
58.
2
2
2
2
& Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[35]
mg Transforming to the new variable u = y - —- allows the equation of motion to be
written in K. the form =0 dt m + CB L This is the familiar simple harmonic moti
on equation with angular frequency co = V m + CB L and so the period of oscillat
ion is m + CB L T = 2iZi
z 2 2 2
du +
2
2
]
59.
That charge is finite because the second inductor shorts out the battery so that
the final voltage between the top and bottom of the diagram will be zero. It wi
ll take some time to reach that condition because the current in L will approach
its asymptotic value gradually. Let "I" be the current through L, and let "i" b
e the current through L . (Both currents are functions of time.) The voltages ac
ross the three vertical parts of the network must be equal: RI + LjdI/dt ...(1)
V E - r(I + i) ...(2) V = L di/dt ...(3) Combining eqs. (1) and (3), ...(4) RI +
L, di/dt L di/dt It seems likely that V will decay exponentially. (V = V e ) so
the terms on the right sides of eqs. (1) and (3) must decay in similar fashion:
I = I e- , so di/dt = -kl e" and i = y(l - e~ ) so di/dt = ki,e~ By plugging th
ose expressions into eq. (4) and cancelling the exponentials we find that RI - k
I Lj = kyL . Solving for the unknown constant, k = RI /[I L, + yL ] = R/[L, + (i
yf )L ]. But I = E/(R + r) and if= E/r, so y/I = (R + r)/r]. Therefore, k = R/[L
, + L (R + r)/r] To check the solution it has to be seen if it is consistent wit
h eq. (2): V e~ = E - r(I + i) = E - r[I e~ + y(l - - )] = (E - r i ) + r(y- I )
- . (E - ry) = 0, so factor out the exponential: V = r (y-1 ) = r[E/r - E/(R +
r)] = E[1 - r/(R + r)] = E[R + r - r]/(R + r) = ER/(R + r). To find the total ch
arge that passes through resistor R, integrate I with respect to time, from t =
0 to 00 Q= Jldt e d t IJk = [E/(R + r)][L, + L (R + r)/r]/R = (E/R)[L./(R + r) +
L r] ]
2 2 2 2 0 kt 0 kt 0 kt kt kt 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 2 0 0 2 0 kt 0 kt e kt f 0 e kt 0 0 k
t 2 2
60.
sin 0 = 2R/a = x/(2R) 4x0.1x0.1 x = 4R /a = j = 0.04 m = 4 cm ]
2
& Bansal Classes
PHYSICS
[36]
BANSAL CLASSES
4S
TARGET IIT JEE 2007 XI (P, Q, R, S)
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
CONTENTS
EXERCISE-I
Q.l Qf2 A particle ofmass m is proj ected with a velocity u at an angle of9 with
horizontal. Find the intial angular momentum of the particle about the highest
point of its projectory. A hollow sphere is releasedfromthe top of a movable wed
ge as shown in the figure. There is nofrictionbetween the wedge and the ground.
There is sufficient friction between sphere and wedge to provide pure rolling of
sphere. Find the velocity of centre of sphere w.r.t. ground just before it leav
es the wedge horizontally. (Assume masses ofthe wedge and sphere are equal & h » R
the radius of sphere) A bit of mud stuck to a bicycle'sfrontwheel of radius r d
etaches and isflunghorizontally forward when it is at the top of the wheel. The
bicycle is moving forward at a speed v and it is rolling without slipping. Find
the horizontal distance travelled by the mud after detachingfromthe wheel. In th
efigureshown, the ball of mass m (having velocity v ) hits the surface of a stat
ionary square plate of mass m and side L, with center pivoted at C on a smooth h
orizontal table .Due to the collision, the ball stops. Find the angular velocity
of the plate after collision.
0 2
Q.3 Q.4
[l/3 C
Q. 5
Awheel, of radius 1 m, is rolling purely on aflat,horizontal surface. It's centr
e is moving with a constant horizontal acceleration = 3 m/s . At a moment when t
he centre of the wheel has a velocity 3 m/s, then find the acceleration of a poi
nt 1/3 m vertically above the centre of the wheel. A force of constant magnitude
F starts acting on a uniform rod AB in gravityfreespace at the end A of the rod
. The force always remains perpendicular to the rod, even as it moves. The mass
ofthe rod is M and its length L. Then, find the value ofthe dot product F. a at
any later time(where a is acceleration of point A.)
A A
<£8
A uniform horizontal rod oflength / falls verticallyfromheight h on two identica
l i i blocks placed symmertrically below the rod as shown infigure.The coefficie
nts of j restitution are e, and e . Find the maximum height through which the ce
ntre of .— * .,—, mass of the rod willriseafter bouncing offthe blocks. L—I L—I
A 1 2 j
j t f .9
Auniform rod oflength / is given an impulse atrightangles to its length as shown
. Find thedistance ofinstantaneouscentreofrotationfromthecentreoftherod.
cm
impulse
QJOy A small ring of mass m is threaded on a horizontal smooth rod which is rota
ting about its end with constant angular velocity ©. The ring is initially located
at the axis of rotation. When the distance ofthe ring from the axis becomes r,
then find the power required to rotate the system with same angular velocity. Q.
ll On a smooth table two particles of mass m each, travelling with a velocity v
in opposite directions, strike the ends of a rigid massless rod of length /, kep
t perpendicular to their velocity. The particles stick to the rod after the coll
ision.Find the tension in rod during subsequent motion. oA
0 it v
1
m
v
°o J
1
m
^Bansal Classes
Rotation al Dyn amies
[2]
Q.12 A rigid body in shape of a triangle has v - 5 m/s •l, v - 10 m/s -l. Find vel
ocity of point C.
A B
A particle of mass 1 kg is moving with constant velocity of 10 m/s along the str
aight line y = 7x + 4. Find the angular momentum of the particle with respect to
the point (3,4). Q.14 A circular platform is mounted on a verticalfiictionlessa
xle. Its radius is r=2 m and its moment ofinertia is I=200 kg-m . It is initiall
y at rest. A 70 kg man stands on the edge of the platform and begins to walk alo
ng the edge at speed v = 1.0 m/s relative to the ground. When the man has walked
once around the platform so that he is at his original position on it, what is
his angular displacement relative to ground.
2 0
Q.15 Two discs Aand B touch each other as infigure.Arope tightly wound on A is p
ulled down at 2 m/s . Find the friction force between A and B if slipping i s ab
sent
2
R
2R1
2kg
J
2 m/s
lkg
2
Q.16 Two masses each of m are attached at mid point B & end point C of massless
rod AC which is hinged at A. It is releasedfromhorizontal position as shown. Fin
d the force at hinge Awhen rod becomes vertical Q.17 An isosceles right triangul
ar plate ABC of mass m is free to rotate in vertical plane about afixedhorizonta
l axis through A. It is supported by a string such that the side AB is horizonta
l. Find the reaction at the support A.
.18.
A solid uniform sphere of radius R and mass M rolls without slipping with angula
r velocity o when it encounters a step of height 0.4 R. Find the angular velocit
y immediately after inelastic impact with the rough step.
0
11! I 11111 i 111!! 111111
Q . 19 A spool with a thread wound on it is placed on a smooth inclined plane se
t at an angle of 3 0° to the horizontal. Thefreeofthe thread is attached to the wa
ll as shown. The mass of the spool is m - 200 g, its moment of inertia relative
to its own axis is I — 0.45 gm , the radius of the wound thread layer is r = 3 cm.
Find the acceleration ofthe spool axis.
2
Auniform rod AB of length L and mass m is suspendedfreelyat Aand hangs verticall
y at rest when a particle of same mass m isfiredhorizontally with speed v to str
ike the rod at its mid point. Ifthe particle is brought to rest after the impact
. Thenfindthe impulsive reaction at A. Q.21 A ball of mass 0.1 kg rotates in a h
orizontal circle of radius lm at constant speed 1 ms on africtionlesstable as sh
own in thefigure.The ball is attached to a string which passes through a hole in
the table. By pulling the string at the lower end, the radius of the path is re
duced to 0.5 m.Find the new velocity of the ball and tension in the string.
-1
1111111111
m
m
B
"2!_W
^Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.26 A solid sphere of mass m and radius R is placed on a smooth horizontal surf
ace. A sudden blow is given horizontally to the sphere at a height h = 4R/5 abov
e the centre line. If I is the impulse ofthe blow then find (a) the minimum time
after which the highest point B will touch the ground (b) the displacement ofth
e centre of mass during this internal.
q
Q.34 A uniform ball ofradius R rolls without slipping between two rails such tha
t the horizontal distance is d between two contact points of the rail to the bal
l. If R=10cm, d=T6cm and the angular velocity is 5rad/s then find the velocity o
f centre of mass ofthe ball. f^\co P-fr A cylinder of mass M and radius R is res
ting on a horizontal platform (which is parallel to the x-y plane) with its axis
fixed along the y axis and free to rotate about its axis . The platform is give
n a motion in the x-direction given by x = A cos (cot). There is no slipping bet
ween the cylinder and platform. Find the maximum torque acting on the cylinder d
uring its motion. Infigure,the load W weighs 200N, 0-37° and the beam has negligib
le weight. Find the tension T in the cable and the horizontal and vertical compo
nents ofthe force that the pivot exerts on the beam. The door ofan automobile is
open and perpendicular to the body. The automobile starts with an acceleration
of 2 ft/sec , and the width of the door is 30 inches. Treat the door as a unifor
m rectangle, and neglect friction tofindthe speed of its outside edge as seen by
the driver when the door closes.
2
f
2
(22t> A 5m beam weighing 250 kg is lowered by means of two cables unwindingfromo
verhead cranes, as the beam approaches the ground the crane operater begins appl
ying brakes to slow the unwinding motion. Knowing that the decelearation of cabl
e Ais 6 m/s and the deceleration of cable B is 0.6 m/s , determine the tension i
n each cable. (g=9.8m/s )
2 2 2
TA
1
5m
c
A 20 kg cabinet is mounted on small casters that allow it to move freely (p = 0)
on the floor. If a 100 N force is applied as shown, determine the acceleration
of the cabinet, the range of values of h for which the cabinet will not tip. One
end of a uniform rod ofmass M and length L is hinged to the ceiling such that i
t can rotate freely about, the hinge in vertical plane. The arrangement is shown
in thefigure.Aball ofmass m moving horizontally with speed u hits the rod at po
int P separated by a distance x from hinge. For what value ofx reaction of the h
inge on the rod is minimum and what is it ?
nunnffrm
C
0.6m
i ii /1 II II i
^Bansal Classes
[5]
Q.l (a) (b) Q.2
A uniform plate ofmass m is suspended in each of the ways shown. For each case d
etermine immediately after the connection at B has been released; the angular ac
celeration ofthe plate, the acceleration of its mass center.
EXER CISE-II
Pin support
/\LLL1 l BlTT
i
-e • (0
('/T )c
V
i
3
—wires -
"ft
±
springs- c—
(ii)
(iii)
(a)
(b)
(0 ©
A horizontally oriented uniform disc of mass M and radius R rotatesfreelyabout a
stationary vertical axis passing through its centre. The disc has a radial guid
e along which can slide withoutfrictiona small body of mass m. Alight thread run
ning down through the hollow axle of the disc is tied to the body. Initially the
body was located at the edge of the disc and the whole system is rotated with a
n angular velocity co . Then by means of a force F applied to the lower end of t
he thread the body was slowly pulled to the rotation axis. Find the angular velo
city of the system in itsfinalstate the work performed by the force F. A uniform
thin rod of mass m=30kg and length L=0.80m is free to rotate about a horizontal
axis 0 passing through its centre. A particle P of mass M=11.2kg falls vertical
ly through a height h=36/245m and collides elastically with the rod at a distanc
e ofL/4 from 0. At the instant of collision, the rod was stationary and was at a
ngle a=37° with horizontal. Calculate co of the rod just after collision velocity
(magnitude and direction) of particle P after collision [g=l Om/s ]
o 2
(a)
(b) Q.5
(QJ5
(a) (b)
(§Bansal Classes
Rotational Dynamics
[6]
Q.9y A bar of mass m is held as shown between 4 disks, each of mass m' & radius
r = 75 mm Determine the acceleration of the bar immediately after it has been re
leased from rest, knowing that the normal forces exerted on the disks are suffic
ient to prevent any slipping and assuming that; (a) m = 5 kg and m' = 2 kg . (b)
the mass m' ofthe disks is negligible. (c) the mass m of the bar is negligible.
HH HH HG)y y y
| A B
(ii)
Q.10 Three small balls of the same mass, white (w), green(g) and blue(b), arefix
edby weightless rods at the vertices of the equilateral triangle with side I. Th
e system ofball is placed on a smooth horizontal surface and set in rotation abo
ut the center of mass with period T. At a certain instant, the blue ball tears a
way from theframe.Determine the distance L between the blue and the green ball a
fter the time T. Q.ll Show that, if a uniform heavy right circular cylinder of r
adius a be rotated about its axis, and laid gently on two rough horizontal rails
at the same level and distant 2a sina apart so that the axis of the cylinder is
parallel to the rails, the cylinder will remain in contact with both rails if t
he coefficient of friction p < tan a, but will initially rise on one rail if p >
tana.
()
(
2a sina
Q.12 A diwali cracker known as sudarashan chakra works on the principle of thrus
t. Consider such a toy the centre ofwhich is hinged.The initial mass ofthe toy i
s M and radius is R. The toy is in the shape of a spiral the turns ofwhich are v
ery close (it can be assumed as a disc ).The gases are ejected tangentially from
the end ofthe toy with a constant velocity u relative to the toy. Find the angu
lar velocity ofthe toy when mass remains half. ///////////////////// '?fi 6> Q.1
3 A uniform rod is suspended by two light strings. The left string makes an angl
e 29 and the rod makes angle9 with the horizontal Find the angular acceleration
ofrod and tension in the left string just after the right string is cut. Q.14 A
uniform thin rod with a mass M = 0.60 kg and a length of 0.3 0 m stands on the e
dge of africtionlesstable as shown in thefigure.The rod is struck , a horizontal
impulse blow at a point 0.20 m above the table top, driving the rod directly of
fthe table. Determine the orientation of the rod and the position of its C.M. Is
after the blow is struck. (g = 9.8 m/s )
2
l=6Ns 0.3m
0.2m
A
Q.15 A uniform slender bar AB of mass m is suspendedfromtwo springs as shown. If
spring 2 breaks, determine at that instant; (a) the angular acceleration of the
bar, (b) the acceleration ofpoint A. (c) the acceleration ofpoint B.
A
!«-L/3
—L/3 - * - L / 3 (ii)
^Bansal Classes
[7]
r
Q. 16 Disk B has a mass m = 4 kg, a radius r = 90 mm and an initial angular velo
city co =750 r/min clockwise. Disk Ahas a mass m = 6 kg a radius r = 13 5 mm and
is at rest when it is brought into contact with disk B. Neglecting friction in
the bearings, determine, thefinalangular velocity of each disk. Q.17 A uniform r
od AB, of mass 4kg and length L = 1.5 m is released from rest in the position sh
own. Knowing that p = 45°, determine the values ^rL inclined (immedi ately after r
elease) of fixed plane 1111! I (a) the angular acceleration of the rod. (b) the
acceleration of end A. (c) the reaction of the inclined plane at A. Neglect the
mass offriction on the roller at A. Q.18 Three particles A B, C of mass m each a
re joined to each other by massless rigid rods to form an equilateral triangle o
f side a. Another particle of mass m hits B with a velocity v directed along BC
as shown. The colliding particle stops immediately after impact. Calculate the t
ime required by the triangle ABC to complete 0) mv half-revolution in its subseq
uent motion. What is the net displacement ofpoint B during this interval ? LL^Jl
A slender bar AB is supported in a horizontal position as infigure.At what dist
ance xfromthe hinge A should the vertical string DE be attached to the bar in or
der "Xgz that, when it is cut, there will be no immediate change in the reaction
at A. »—— x D« B Q.20 A rod of length R and mass M is free to rotate about a horizontal
axis passing through hinge P as in figure . First it is taken aside such that i
t M P m becomes horizontal and then released. At the lowest point the rod hits t
he block B of mass m and stops. Find the ratio of masses such that the block B c
ompletes the circle. Neglect any friction. Q.21 A uniform rod of mass M is poise
d vertically on one ofits end resting on a horizontal rough surface. Ifthe rod i
s given a very slight impulse at its free end, it starts toppling down about its
lower end which does not slip find (a) the normal reaction by the floor on the
rod when the rod turned through an angle 9=53° (b) the static friction between the
floorand the rod. Q.22 A uniform rod oflength 2a is placed horizontally on afixe
dthin horizontal rail atrightangles to the rail and is releasedfromrest. Initial
ly the centre of the rod was at a distance a/3 from rail. If the rod slips after
it has turned through an angle 9findthe coefficient offrictionbetween the rod a
nd the rail.
B B 0 A A Q 0
//////
Q.23 Auniform rod AB is bent in the shape of an arc of circle. Determine the ang
ular acceleration ofthe rod immediately after it is releasedfromrest and show th
at it is independent of P. Q. 24 Assume that the centre of mass of a girl crouch
ing in a light swing has b een raised to 1. 2m. The girl has her centre ofmass i
s 3. 7mfromthe pivot of the swing while she is in the crouched position. The swi
ng is releasedfromrest and at the bottom of the arc the girl stands up instantan
eously, thus raising her centre of mass 0.6m. Find the height of her centre ofma
ss at the top ofthe arc.
^Bansal Classes
Rotational Dynamics
fSJ
(Q.25 A uniform ball ofradius R rolls without slipping between two rails such th
at the horizontal distance is d between the two contact points ofthe rail to the
ball, (a) Show that at any instant, velocity of centre of mass is given as : v
=Q>JR'Discuss the above expression in the limits d=0 and d=2R. (b) For a uniform
ball starting from rest and 10gh decending a vertical distance h while rolling
without slipping down a ramp, v —— , ifthe ramp is
cni
replaced with two rails, show that: v
10gh l-d /4R
2 2
Q.26 A plank of length 2L, leans vertically against a wall. It starts to slip do
wnward withoutfriction.Show that the top ofthe plank loses contact with the wall
when it is at two-thirds of its initial height
/1111 II ii /11111
Q.27 A solid metallic cylinder of mass m = 1 kg and radius R = 20 cm is free to
roll (without sliding) over the inclined surface of a wooden wedge ofmass M = 0.
28 kg. Surface of wedge is inclined at 37° with the horizontal and the wedge lies
on a smooth horizontalfloor.When the system is releasedfromrest, calculate TTTTT
TTTT1 (i) acceleration ofthe wedge, (ii) angular acceleration of the cylinder an
d (iii) force of interaction between cylinder and the wedge. (g = 10 ms ) Q.28 A
uniform slender bar AB of mass m is suspended as shown from a small cart ofthe
same mass m. Neglecting the effect offriction,determine the acceleration ofpoint
s A and B immediately after a horizontal force 777777*777 77^/7777 P has been ap
plied at B.
-2
Q.29 A solid spherical ball which rests in equilibrium at the interior bottom of
a fixed spherical globe is perfectly rough, the ball is struck a horizontal blo
w of such magnitude that the initial speed ofits centre is v. Prove that, if v l
ies between (10 dg/7) and (27 dg/7) , the ball will leave the globe, d being the
difference between the radii of the ball and globe.
1/2 1/2
Q.30 A240 mm radius cylinder of mass 8 kg rests on a 3 kg carriage. The system i
s at rest when a force P of magnitude 10 N is applied as shown for 1.2 s. Knowin
g that the cylinder rolls without sliding on the carriage and neglecting the mas
s ofthe wheels of the carriage determine the resulting velocity of (a) the carri
age, (b) the center ofthe cylinder.
FFL (V) ' f77777777777777777777 ,,
Ql
^Bansal Classes
[9]
EXERCISE-III
Q.l A uniform thin rod of mass M and length L is standing vertically along the y
-axis on a smooth horizontal surface with its lower end at the origin (0,0). a s
light disturbance at t=0 causes the lower end to slip on the smooth surface alon
g the positive x axis and the rod starts falling (a) What is the path followed b
y the centre of mass of the rod during its fall (b) Find the equation of traject
ory of a point on the rod located at a distance r from the lower end. What is th
e shape the of the path of this point. [JEE 93] A block X of mass 0. 5kg is held
by a long massless string on africtionlessinclined plane of inclination 3 0° to t
he horizontal. The string is wound on a uniform solid cylindrical drum Y ofmass
2kg and ofradius 0.2 m as shown in thefig.The drum is given an initial angular v
elocity such that the block X starts moving up the plane. Find the tension in th
e string during the motion At a certain instant of time the magnitude ofthe angu
lar velocity of Y is lOrad/sec. Calculate the distance travelled by X from that
instant of time until it comes to rest. [JEE' 94] Two uniform thin rods A andB o
flength 0.6m each and masses 00.01kg and 0.02kg respective arerigidlyjoined and
to end. The combination is pivoted at the lighter end P fp as shown infig.such t
hat it canfreelyrotate about the point P in a vertical plane. A small A object o
f mass 0.05kg moving horizontally hits the lower end ofthe combination and stick
s to it. What should be the velocity of the object so that the system could just
be raised to the horizontal position. [JEE 94] Two point masses of 0.3kg and 0.
7kg are fixed at the ends of a rod which is oflength 1.4m and of negligible mass
. The rod is set rotating about an axis perpendicular to its length with a unifo
rm angular speed. The point on the rod through which the axis should pass in ord
er that the work required for rotation of the rod is minimum is located at a dis
tance of [JEE' 95] (A) 0.42 from the mass of 0.3kg (B) 0.70 m from the mass of 0
.7kg (C) 0.98m from the mass of 0.3kg (D) 0.98m from % mass of 0.7kg Arectangula
rrigidfixedblock has a long horizontal edge. Asolid homogeneous cylinder of radi
us R is placed horizontally at rest with its length parallel to the edge such th
at the axis ofthe cylinder and the edge ofthe block are in the same vertical pla
ne as shwon infigure,there is sufficientfrictionpresent at the edge so that a ve
ry small displacement cause the cylinder to roll of the edge without slipping. D
etermine the angle 0 through which the cylinder rotates before it leaves contact
with the edge, the speed of the centre ofmass of the cylinder before leaving co
ntact with the edge, and the ratio of the translational to rotational kinetic en
ergies of the cylinder when its centre ofmass is in horizontal line with the edg
e. [JEE' 95] A mass m moving with a constant velocity along a line parallel to t
he x axis, away from the origin. Its angular momentum with respect to the origin
. [JEE' 97] (A) is zero (B) remains constant (C) goes on increasing (D) goes on
decreasing A uniform disk of mass m and radius R is rolling up a rough inclined
plane which makes an angle of 3 0° with the horizontal. If the coefficient of stat
ic and kinetic friction are each equal to p and the only forces acting are gravi
tational andfrictional,then the magnitude ofthefrictionalforce acting on the dis
k is and its direction is (write up or down) the inclined plane. [JEE 97]
Q.2 (i) (ii) Q.3
Q.4
Q.5
(a) (b) (c) Q.6 Q.7
^Bansal Classes
[10]
Q.8 (i) (ii) Q.9
(a) (b) Q.10 Q.ll
Q.12
Q.13
Q.14
Q 15
^Bansal Classes
A uniform disk of mass m and radius R is proj ected horizontally with velocity v
on a rough horizontal floor so that it starts offwith a purely sliding motion a
t t=0. After t seconds it acquires a purely rolling motion as shown in figure. C
alculate the velocity of the centre of mass ofthe disk at t . Assuming the coeff
icient offrictionto be p calculate t . Also calculate the work done by thefricti
onalforce as a function of time and the total work done by it over a time t much
longer than t . [JEE' 97] Two thin circular disks of mass 2kg and radius 1 Ocm
each are joined by a rigid massless rod of length 20cm. The axis of the rod is a
long the perpendicular to the planes ofthe disks through their centre. The objec
t is kept on a truck in such a way that the axis ofthe object is horizontal and
perpendicular to the direction ofmotion of the truck. Itsfrictionwith thefloorof
the truck is large enough so that the obj ect can roll on the truck without slip
ping. Take x-axis as the direction ofmotion ofthe truck and z -axis as the verti
cally upwards direction. Ifthe truck has an acceleration of 9m/ s calculate : th
e force offrictionon each disk ^ ^ The magnitude and the direction of the fricti
onal torque acting on each disk . ] • —L j about the centre of mass O ofthe object.
Express the torque in the vector form \ J V/ 20cm of unit vectors in the x-y and
z directions. [JEE' 97] A rod of weight w is supported by two parallel knife ed
ges A and B is in equilibrium in a horizontal position. The knives are at a dist
ance dfromeach other. The centre of mass ofthe rod is at a distance x from A. Th
e normal reaction on A is and on B is [JEE' 97] A symmetric lamina of mass M con
sists of a square shape with a semicircular section over each of the edge ofthe
square as infig.The side ofthe square is 2a. The moment ofinertia ofthe lamina a
bout an axis through its centre ofmass and perpendicular to the plane is 1. 6Ma
. The moment of inertia ofthe lamina about the tangent AB in the plane oflamina
is [JEE' 97] Let I be the moment ofinertia of a uniform square plate about an ax
is AB that passes through its centre and is parallel to two ofits sides. CD is a
line in the plane ofthe plate that passes through the centre ofthe plate and ma
kes an angle 6 with AB. The moment ofinertia of the plate about the axis CD is t
hen equal to (A) I (B) I sin 9 (C)Icos 9 (D) Icos (9/2) [JEE'98] The torque x on
a body about a given point is found to be equal to AxL where A is a constant ve
ctor and L is the angular momentum of the body about that point. From this it fo
llows that [JEE' 98] (A) dL/dt is perpendicular to L at all instants of time (B)
the components of L in the direction of A does not change with time (C) the mag
nitude of L does not change with time (D) L does not change with time A uniform
circular disc has radius R and mass m. Aparticle also of mass m is fixed at a po
int A on the wedge of the disc as in fig. The disc can rotate freely about a fix
ed horizontal chord PQ that is at a distance R/4 from the centre C of the disc.
The line AC is perpendicular to PQ. Initially the disc is held vertical with the
point A at its highest position. It is then allowed to fall so that it starts r
otating about PQ. Find the linear speed of the particle at it reaches its lowest
position. [JEE 98] A cubical block of side a is moving with velocity v on a hor
izontal smooth plane as shown. It hits a ridge at point O. The angular speed of
the M block after it hits 0 is: 0 7777777777/77777777777 (A) 3v/4a (B) 3v/2a [JE
E 99] (C) V3WV2a (D) zero
0 0 Q 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 1
Rotational Dynamics
[11]
Q.26 A smooth sphere Ais moving on a frictionless horizontal plane with angular
speed co and centre of mass velocity v. It collides elastically and head on with
an identical sphere B at rest. Neglectfrictioneverywhere. After the collision,
their angularspeeds are © and co , respectively. Then [JEE' 99] (D)m CO (A) co. <
co ( B K ox. (C) OX CO Q . 1 7 A disc of mass M and radius R is rolling with ang
ular speed w on a horizontal as shown. The magnitude of angular momentum of the
disc about the origin 0 is: [JEE' 99] (A) (l/2)MR co (B) MR ® (C) (3/2)MR co (D)2M
R © Q . 1 8 A man pushes a cylinder of mass rrij with the help of a plank of mass
m as shown. There is no slipping at any contact. The horizontal component of the
force applied by the man is F. Find 7777777777777777777777 the accelerations of
the plank and the center of mass of the cylinder, and (a) [JEE 99] (b) the magni
tudes and directions offrictionalforces at contact points. Q . 1 9 A cubical blo
ck of side L rests on a rough horizontal surface with coefficient of friction p.
A horizontal force F is applied on the block as shown. Ifthe coefficient L offr
ictionissufficiently high so that the block does not slide before toppling, the
minimum force required to topple the block is: [JEE'(Scr)'2000] (A) infinitesima
l (B)mg/4 (C)mg/2 (D)mg(l-p) Q . 2 0 A thin wire oflength L and uniform linear m
ass density p is bent into a circular loop with centre at O as shown. The moment
ofinertia of the loop about the axis XX' is: [JEE'(Scr)'2000] (A) pL /87t (B) L
716TX (C) 5 L /16TC (D)3 L /8TC Q . 2 1 An equilateral triangle ABC formedfromau
niform wire has two small identical beads initially located at AO. Then, the bea
ds are released from rest simultaneously and allowed to slide down, one along AB
and the other AC as shown. Neglectingfrictionaleffects, the quantities that are
conserved as the beads slide down, are: [JEE'(Scr)'2000] (A) angula velocity an
d total energty (kinetic and potential) (B) total angular momentum and total ene
rgy (C) angular velocity and moment ofinertia about the axis of rotaiton. (D) to
tal angular momentum and moment of inertia about the axis of rotation. Q . 2 2 A
rod AB of mass M and length L is lying on a horizontal frictionless surface. A
particle of mass m travelling along the surface hits the end 'A' of the rod with
a velocity v in the direction perpendicular to AB. The collision is completely
elastic. After the collision the particle comes to rest. (a) Find the ratio m/M.
(b) Apoint P on the rod is at rest immediately after the collision. Find the di
stance AP. [JEE' 2000] (c) Find the linear speed of the point P at a time 7tL/(3
v ) after the collision. Q . 2 3 Aparticle is placed at a corner P of a cube of
side 1 meter. Forces of magnitudes 2,3, and 5 kg. wt. act on the particle long t
he diagonals ofthe faces passing through the point P. Find the moment of these f
orces about the corner opposite to P. [REE 2000] Q.24 One end of a uniform rod o
fmass M and length L is supported by afiictionlesshinge which can withstand a te
nsion of 1.75 Mg. The rod isfreeto rotate in a vertical plane. To what maximum a
ngle should the rod be rotated from the vertical po sition so that when left, th
e hinge does not break. [REE 2000] Q . 2 5 Auniform rod AB oflength 10 meters an
d weight 6kg. wt. is resting with its end A on a smooth horizontal plane AD and
end B on a smooth plane DB inclined at angle 60° with the horizontal. The rod is k
ept in equilibrium by tying a string DP to a point P of the rod. If the length o
f the string is equal to AP and AD = BD,findthe tension in the string. [REE'2000
]
A B E
:
2
2
2
2
2
Wl/llk it
:
3
2
P
2
P
3
2
P
3
Q
0
^Bansal Classes
[12]
Q.26 Two heavy metallic plates are joined together at 90° to each other. A laminar
sheet ofmass 30 Kg is hinged at the line AB joining the two heavy metallic plat
es. The hinges are frictionless. The moment ofinertia ofthe laminar sheet about
an axis parallel to AB and passing through its centre of mass is 1.2 Kg-m . Two
rubber obstacles P and Q arefixed,one on each metallic plate at a distance 0.5 m
fromthe line AB. This distance is chosen so that the reaction due to the hinges
on the laminar sheet is zero during the impact. Initially the laminar sheet hits
one ofthe obstacles with an angular velocity 1 rad/s and turns back. Ifthe impu
lse on the sheet due to each obstacle is 6 N-s. (a) Find the location of the cen
tre ofmass ofthe laminar sheet from AB. (b) At what angular velocity does the la
minar sheet come back after the first impact ? (c) After how many impacts, does
the laminar sheet come to rest ? [JEE 2001] Q.27 One quarter sector is cut from
a uniform circular disc of radius R. This sector csJ has mass M. It is made to r
otate about a line perpendicular to its plane and passing through the centre of
the original disc. Its moment of inertia about the axis ofrotation is [JEE(Scr)2
001 ]
2
(A) ^ M R
2
(B) - MR
v
2
' 4
(C)^MR
2
(D) V^MR
2
Q.28 Three particles A, B and C, each of mass m, are connected to each other by
three y* massless rigid rods to form a rigid, equilateral triangular body of sid
e /. This body is placed on a horizontal frictionless table (x-y plane) and is h
inged to it at the point A so that it can move withoutfrictionabout the vertical
axis through A (seefigure).The body is set into rotational motion on the table
about Awith a constant angular velocity co. Find the magnitude of the horizontal
force exerted by the hinge on the body. (a) (b) At time T, when the side BC is
parallel to the x-axis, a force F is applied on B along BC (as shown). Obtain th
e x-component and the y-component ofthe force exterted by the hinge on the body,
immediately after time T. [JEE 2002] Q.29 A particle is moving in a horizontal
uniform circular motion. The angular momentum ofthe particle is conserved about
the point: [JEE(Scr)2003] (A) Centre of the circle (B) Outside the circle (C) In
side the circle (D) Point on circumference Q.30 Two particles each of mass M are
connected by a massless rod oflength /. The rod is lying on the smooth sufrace.
If one of the particle is given an impulse MV as shown in thefigurethen angular
velocity ofthe rod would be: [JEE(Scr)2003] (A) v// (B)2v// (C)v/2/ (D) None Mv
M Q.31 A disc is rolling (without slipping) on a horizontal surface. C is its c
enter and Q and P are two points equidistant from C. Let V , V and V be the magn
itude ofvelocities of points P, Q and C respectively, then * [JEE 2004 (Scr)] (A
)V >V >V (B)V <V <Vp 1 (D)V <V >V ( C ) v Vp,V : vwwwTwftuwuu Q.32 A child is st
anding with folded hands at the center of a platform rotating about its central
axis. The kinetic energy of the system is K. The child now stretches his arms so
that the moment of inertia of the system doubles. The kinetic energy of the sys
tem now is [JEE 2004 (Scr)]
p Q c Q c p Q c c c q c p
(A) 2K
(B)f
(C)*
(D)4K
^Bansal Classes
[13]
Q. 3 3 Ablock ofmass m is heldfixedagainst a wall by a applying a horizontal for
ce F. Which ofthe following option is incorrect: (A)frictionforce = mg (B) F wil
l not produce torque (C) normal will not produce torque (D) normal reaction = F
R Q. 34 A disc has mass 9m. A hole of radius — is cut from it as shown in the figu
re. The moment ofinertia of remaining part about an axis passing through the cen
tre 'O' of the disc and perpendicular to the plane ofthe disc is: 40 37 (D) — mR (
A) 8 mR (B) 4 mR (C) — mR [JEE'2005 (Scr)] Q. 3 5 A particle moves in circular pat
h with decreasing speed. Which of the following is correct (A) L is constant (B)
only direction of L is constant (C) acceleration a is toward s the centre (D) i
t will move in a spiral and finally reach the centre [JEE'2005 (Scr)]
2 2 2 2
[JEE2005 (Scr)]
Q. 36 A wooden log of mass M and length L is hinged by a frictionless nail at O.
A bullet ofmass m strikes with velocity v and sticks to it. Find angular veloci
ty of the system immediately after the collision about 0. [JEE 2005]
jj
M
m - -<^3 v
Q. 3 7 A cylinder of mass m and radius R rolls down an inclined plane of inclina
tion 9. Calculate the linear acceleration ofthe axis of cylinder. [JEE 2005] Q.
3 8 Two identical ladders, each of mass M and length L are resting on the rough
horizontal surface as shown in thefigure.Ablock ofmass m hangsfromP. If the Syst
em is in equilibrium,findthe magnitude and the direction offrictionalforce atAan
dB. [JEE 2005]
^Bansal Classes
[14]
ANSWER KEY
EXER CISE-I
3
Q.l
mu sin 0cos0
3 2 2
Q
2
[3 ^7
2
s h
Q
'
, — ^ v /g
6 r 2
Q-
4
^(A3 Q.8 4
h
Q.5 «• m/s 5 Q.9 — 12x
r-
Q.6
4F /M
Q.7 Q.ll
®/3, — m©R /
n
Q.10 2mcoV
2
Q.12 5V5 m/s Q. 15 2 N Q.19 1.4 ms"
2
Q.13 2hi 2 kg m /s, remains constant 28mg Q.16 y y Q.17 2mg/3 mv Q.20 — Q.21 4 Q.2
4 (aMgL/4 Q.25 a 15 , b 4 Q.28 7 = 77 ~ = T Q 29 b 14 c 3 72 V 7T 24MV Q 31 (a)
y y (b) y i , (c) — uRm Q.33 ( a ) t = — ; (, b ) s =71R —
2 A B 1
571 Q.14— 6 5co Q.18 - y -
A/3 * 1 2 ms" ,0.8 N Q.22 — (-k) N-m Q.23 3- m 8 10 4tz y cm Q.26 — Q.27 M(R +r )/2
J37 V37 5N Q.30 (a) a>/3, (b) -—mcoR, (c) 3 mcoR 3 Q.32 a /b
2 2 2 2
Q.34 0.3m/s
x y 2
Q.35 (l/2)MRAco Q.36 T=1000/3N, F = 800/3N, F = 0 Q.37 J \ 5 ft/sec Q.38 T = 175
0 N ; T = 1525 N Q.39 (a) 5 m/s ->, (b) 0.3 < h< 1.5 m Q.40x = 2L/3
EXER CISE-II
Q.l Q.2
(i)(a)— (cw)(b)- 03. (i + 2 j)g (ii)(a) 24g/17c(cw)(b)12g/17l (iii)(a)2.4g/c(cw)(b
)0.5gl
f \ 1 f i—\ co = ,1 + 2m co TTT t o R2 1 + 2m Q.3 W=—mco M/ M V
ly±
2
3 rad/s, 9/7 m/s along horizontal JfgR 150 , 44
x
Q.6 Q.7 1.018 W
2
Q.8 (a)
m/s, (b) — m
Q.9 (i)(a) 5g/9 I ( b ) g i (c)0 (ii)(a) ^ I (b) gi (c) I Q.10 - J 1 +V3 7t + 37
t 2 Q. 12 w= ^R- ( V 2 - l ) Q.13 T = 2mgsin0cos0/(l+3sin 0 ), a = 6Tsin0/ml
x 2
(^jâwsa/ Classes
Rotational Dynamics
[IS]
200 Q.14 [10,-4.75m]w.r.t.initialpositionoflowerendofrod, - j - rad with upward
vertical
Q 1 r-\ Q.15 (i) (a) 3 g/L (cw) (b) [ f ?i _L ijjI rg == 11.323 crg /Z d49.1° f (c
) + r ^.TX
0
(v'3
i - 2 jj g = 2.18g Z-66.6
2 2
0
(ii) (a) g/L (cw) (b) - ( f ) g i (c) - ( f i + j) g = 1.323 g Z -130.9° Q.16 w =
200 rpm(ccw), w = 300rpm(cw) Q.17 8 rad/s , sV2 ^ s , 8^2 N
A B
6an Q.18 (i) = - ^ ; ( i i )
t
+
+
Q.19 2//3
M r— 4mg 3mg = Vl5 Q.21 - f , m 25 25 Q.22 2tan9 Q.23 g/2b Q.24 2.3 m Q.27 (i) 3.7
5 ms" , (ii) 30 rad sec" , (iii) Normal reaction=5.75 N, friction=3. OON Interac
tion force = 6.49 N Q.28 (a)2P/5m=a ->,a =16P/5m-^ Q.30 (a) 0.706m/s->, (b) 1.23
5 m/s-> Q.20
2 2 A B
EXERCISE-III
C 1
• y QI. x=0, —— + 2L i Q2. 1.63N,1.224m Q3. 6.3m/s [M-f ^ Q.4 C Q.5 (a) 0 = cos" (4/7)
, (b) v = fi/TgR , (c) K / K = 6 Q6.B Q.7 Mg sin 9/3, up ^
2 2
=
T
R
Q.8
(i)2v /3, (ii)t= v / 3 p g , W = ^ [ 3 p m g t - 2 p m g t v ] (t < t ), W = - j
m ^ | t > t )
0 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 s
Q9. 6N,-0.6j±0.6k Q10. w(d-x)/d, wx/d Q11.4.8Ma Q.12 A Q.13 A, B, C Q14. v=- /5gR
Q15.A Q16. C Q17. C 4F 8F SmjF mF ' c= ( 3 m j + 8 m ) ' p ( 3 m + 8 m ) i (3m +
8m ")' ^ (3m +8m ) Q19. C Q.20 D Q21. B m 1 2L v Q22. ( a ) — ; ( b ) x - T 2 V ^
Q.23 -77 kgwtm Q.24 60°
t Q 1 8 a 2 a = 1 2 ; f = t 2 = 1 2 0 ; ( c )
3mg 4 Q27. A Q.29 A Q.25 Q.34 B
Q26. (a) 1 = 0.1m; (b) w' = 1 rad/s; (c) laminar sheet will never come to rest Q
.28 (a) V^mo) /,(b)F = F/4, F = ^ m © / Q.31 A Q.32 B Q.33 C Q.30 A 3mv 2g sin 9 Q
.35 B -(3m M)L Q" axis2 x 2 Q 3 6 ffl + 37a 3
Q.38 f = (M+m) g
cot0
Bansal Classes
Rotational Dynamics
[16]
Q.22 A particle ofmass 0.1 kg is projected with a velocity 7l0 m/s making an ang
le of30° with the horizontal in the xy plane. Find the moment of the weight of the
particle about the point of projection when it is at one fourth of its range. A
solid cylinder is released from rest from the top of an inclined plane of incli
nation 60° where friction 2-3x coefficient varies with distance x as p = • Find the
distance travelled by the cylinder on incline before it starts slipping. Q. 24 A
uniform rod placed on a horizontal floor and imparted an angular velocity about
a vertical axis passing through its mid point. The mass of the rod is M, length
L and friction coefficient with the surface is p. Then, find the total retardin
g torque offrictionforces. Q. 2 5 Four point masses 2 kg, 4 kg, 6 kg & 8 kg are
placed at four corners of a square of side 10 cm. Find the radius ofgyration of
system about an axis passing through centre O and perpendicular to square plane.
J5". 26 Two men, each of mass 75 kg, stand on the rim of a horizontal large dis
c, diametrically opposite to each other. The disc has a mass 450 kg and isfreeto
rotate about its axis. Each man simultaneously start along the rim clockwise wi
th the same speed and reaches their original starting points on the disc. Find t
he angle turned through by the disc with respect to the ground. Q. 27 Find the m
oment of inertia of a disc ofuniform thickness of mass M and internal and extern
al radii r and R respectively about an axis through it centre perpendicular to t
he plane of the disc. Q. 28 A solid sphere of radius 3R, a solid disc ofradius 2
R and a ring of radius R (all are of mass m) roll down a rough inclined plane. T
heir acclerations are a, b and c respectively. Find the ratio of a/b and b/c. Q.
29 A uniform disc ofradius 1 m and mass 2kg is mounted on an axle supported on
fixedfrictionlessbearings. A light cord is wrapped around the rim of the disc an
d a mass of 1kg is tied to the free end. If it is releasedfromrest, then find th
e tension in the cord. , Q 30 A uniform disc of mass M and radius R rotates abou
t afixedvertical axis passing through its centre with angular velocity co. A par
ticle of same mass m and having velocity 2CDR towards centre of the disc collide
s with the disc moving horizontally and sticks to its rim. Find the angular velo
city ofthe disc, the impulse on the particle due to disc, the impulse on the dis
c due to hinge. Arod AC of length L and mass m is kept on a horizontal smooth pl
ane. It isfreeto rotate and move. A particle of same mass m moving with velocity
v strikes rod at point B whichis at a distance L/4frommid point making angle 37°
with the rod. The collision is elastic. After collision find B c the angular vel
ocity ofthe rod. *7/4 the distance which centre of the rod will travel in the ti
me in which it makes halfrotation. the impulse ofthe impact force.
A
(a) (b) (c)
Q. 3 2 A person pulls along a rope wound up around a pulley with a constant forc
e F for a time interval of t seconds. If a and b are the radii ofthe inner and t
he outer circumference (a < b), thenfindthe ratio ofwork done by the person in t
he two cases shown in the figure is W /W .
] 2
Case I
Case II
^Bansal Classes
[14]
BANSAL CLASSES
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XI(P,Q,R,S)
r IIT-JEE ^S SCREENING 2007
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
QUESTION BANK ON
There are 82 questions in this question bank.
Objective Question Bank On Rotational Dynamics
Q. 1 Three bodies have equal masses m. B ody A is solid cylinder of radius R, bo
dy B has a square lamina of side R, and body C has a solid spherte of radius R.
Which body has the smallest moment of inertia about an axis passing through thei
r centre of mass and perpendicular to the plane (in case of lamina) (A) A (B)B (
C)C (D) A and C both Q.2 A point mass m is connected to a point mass m by a mass
less rod oflength / as shown in thefigure.It is observed that the ratio ofthe mo
ment ofinertia ofthe system about the two axes BB and AA which is parallel to ea
ch other and perpendicular to the -4> m Igg ! ! rod is 7 =3. The distance of the
centre of mass of the systemfromthe mass A is
A B B
l
Q.3 Q4 Q.5 Q.6
Q.7
Q.8
(C) (1/2) I (D)(l/4)/ A horizontal force F = mg/3 is applied on the upper surfac
e of a uniform cube of mass'm' and side' a' which is resting on a rough horizont
al surface having p = 1/2. The distance between lines of action of 'mg' and norm
al reaction 'N' is: (A) a/2 (B) a/3 (C)a/4 (D)None For the same total mass which
of the following will have the largest moment of inertia about an axis passing
through its centre of mass and perpendicular to the plane of the body (A) a disc
of radius a (B) a ring of radius a (C) a square lamina of side 2a (D) four rods
forming a square of side 2a A straight rod oflength L is released on africtionl
esshorizontalfloorin a vertical position. As it falls + slips, the distance of a
point on the rodfromthe lower end, which follows a quarter circular locus is (A
) L/2 (B) L/4 (C) L/8 (D) None A block of mass m is attached to a pulley disc of
equal mass m, radius r by means of a slack string as shown. The pulley is hinge
d about its centre on a horizontal table and the block is projected with an init
ial velocity of 5 m/s. Its velocity when the string becomes taut will be (A) 3 m
/s (B) 2.5 m/s (C) 5/3 m/s (D) 10/3 m/s Find the moment of inertia of a plate cu
t in shape of a right angled triangle of mass M, side AC = BC = a about an axis
perpendicular to the plane of the plate and passing through the mid point of sid
e AB 2Ma' Ma^ Ma Ma" (A) 12 (D) (B) (C)
s
(A) (3/4)/
AA
(B) (2/3) /
A
B
A man can move on a plank supported symmetrically as shown. The A variation of n
ormal reaction on support A with distance x of the man from the end of the plank
is best represented by: lm N N N N (C) (B) (A) CD)
B
4m
lm
feBansal Classes
[10]
Q.9
A uniform rod of mass m and length / hinged at its end is released from rest whe
n it is in the horizontal position. The normal reaction at the hinge when the ro
d becomes vertical is : Mg 3Mg 5Mg (D) 2 Mg (A) (C) (B)
Q.10 Two particles of mass m each arefixedat the opposite ends of a massless rod
oflength 5m which is oriented vertically on a smooth horizontal surface and rel
eased. Find the displacement of the lower mass on the ground when the rod makes
an angle of 3 7° with the vertical. (A) 1.5 m (B)2m (C)2.5m (D)3.5m Q.ll A small b
ead of mass m moving with velocity v gets threaded on a stationary semicircular
ring of mass m and radius R kept on a horizontal table. Theringcanfreelyrotate a
bout its centre. The bead comes to rest relative to the ring. What will be thefi
nalangular velocity ofthe system? (A) v/R (B) 2v/R (C) v/2R (D) 3v/R Q.12 A sphe
re ofmass m is held between two smooth inclined walls. The normal reaction ofthe
wall 2 is equal to (A)mg (B) mg sin 74° (C) mg cos 74° (D) None Q.13 ABCD is a squa
re plate with centre 0. The moments of inertia ofthe plate about the perpendicul
ar axis through O is I and about the axes 1, 2, 3 & 4 are I,, I ,1 & I respectiv
ely. It follows that: (A) I = I, (B) I = Ij +1 (C) I = I + I (D) !^
2 3 4 2 4 2 4 1
\
Q.14 A body weighs 6 gms when placed in one pan and 24 gms when placed on the ot
her pan ofa false balance. Ifthe beam is horizontal when both the pans are empty
, the true weight of the body is : (A) 13 gm (B) 12 gm (C)15.5gm (D)15gm Q.15 A
particle startsfromthe point (Om, 8m) and moves with uniform velocity of 3 m/s 3
i m/s. After 5 seconds, the angular velocity ofthe particle about the origin T
SM will be: II a (B) - rad/s ( D ) - rad/s (A) 2.89 rad/s ( O H rad/
s
/\ /
\
Q.16 Ahinged construction consists of three rhombs with the ratio of sides 5:3:2
. Vertex A moves in the horizontal direction at a velocity v. Velocity of A, is
3
(A) 2.5 V (ofv
(B) 1.5 V (D) 0.8 V
Q.17 A block of mass m moves on a horizontal rough surface with initial velocity
v. The height ofthe centre of mass of the block is h from the surface. Consider
a point A on the surface. (A) angular momentum about Ais mvh initially (B) the
velocity of the block decreases at time passes. (C) torque of the forces acting
on block is zero about A (D) angular mometum is not conserved about A.
^Bansal Classes
[3]
Q.18 A rod ofweight w is supported by two parallel knife edges A and B and is in
equilibrium in a horizontal position. The knives are at a distance dfromeach ot
her. The centre of mass ofthe rod is at a distance x from A. wx w(d-x) (A) the n
ormal reaction at Ais y (B) the normal reaction at Ais ~ wx (C) the normal react
ion at B is — . w(d-x) (D) the normal reaction at B is -
Q. 19 Two spheres are rolling with same velocity (for their C, M.) their ratio o
f kinetic energy is 2 :1 & radius ratio is 2 : 1, their mass ratio will be : (A)
2: 1 (B) 4 : 1 (C) 8 : 1 (D) 2^2 : 1 Q. 20 Three identical thin rods each of ma
ss m & length / are placed along x, y & z-axis respectively they are placed such
that, one end of each rod is at origin 'O'. Then moment of inertia of this syst
em about z-axis is
^ (C) m/„ (D) mf 3 4 Q.21 Twoidentical circular loops are moving with same kinetic
energy one rolls & other slides. Theratioof their speed is: (A) 2 : 3 (B) 2 : V
2 (C) 4 l : 2 (D) V5 : yfl Q.22 A paritcle falls freely near the surface of the
earth. Consider afixedpoint O (not vertically below the particle) on the ground.
(A) Angular momentum of the particle about O is increasing. (B) Torque of the g
ravitational force on the particle about O is decreasing. (C) The moment of iner
tia of the particle about O is decreasing. (D) The angular velocity of the parti
cle about O is increasing. Q.23 A yo-yo is resting on a rough horizontal table.
Forces F F and'F areapplied separately as shown. The correct statement is (A) wh
en F is applied the centre of mass will move to the right. (B) when F is applied
the centre of mass will move to the left. (C) when F, is applied the centre of
mass will move to the right. nnililTiiinn (D) when F is applied the centre of ma
ss will move to the right. Q.24 Ablock with a square base measuring axa and heig
ht h, is placed on an inclined plane. The coefficient of friction is m. The angl
e of inclination (9) ofthe plane is gradually increased. The block will a a (A)
topple before sliding if p > — (B) topple before sliding if p < •— a a (C) slide befor
e toppling if p > n — (D) slide before toppling if p < n — Q. 25 Inner and outer rad
ii of a spool are r and R respectively. A thread is wound over its inner surface
and placed over a rough horizontal surface. Thread is pulled by a force F as sh
own infig.then in case of pure rolling (A) Thread unwinds, spool rotates anticlo
ckwise and friction act leftwards (B) Thread winds, spool rotates clockwise andf
rictionacts leftwards (C) Thread winds, spool moves to therightand friction act
rightwards (D) Thread winds, spool moves to the right andfrictiondoes not come i
nto existence. _ (B)
mf (A) —3
2mf
2
l5
2
3
3
2
2
feBansal Classes
[10]
Q.26 Adiscof circumference s is at rest at a point A on a horizontal surface whe
n a constant horizontal force begins to act on its centre. Between A and B there
is sufficient friction to prevent slipping, and the surface is smooth to ( . )
, the right of B. AB = s. The disc movesfromA to B in time T. To the right ofB,
(A) the angular acceleration ofthe disc will disappear, linear acceleration will
remain unchanged (B) linear acceleration ofthe disc will increase (C) the disc
will make one rotation in time T/2 (D) the disc will cover a distance greater th
an s in further time T.
rorcc
Q.27 A weightless rod is acted on by upward parallel forces of 2N and 4N ends A
and B respectively. The total length ofthe rod AB = 3 m. To keep the rod in equi
librium a force of 6N should act in the following manner: (A) Downwards at any p
oint between Aand B. (B) Downwards at mid point ofAB. (C) Downwards at a point C
such that AC = lm. (D) Downwards at a point D such that BD = lm. Q.28 Awheel of
radiusr rolling on a straight line, the velocity ofits centre being v. At a cert
ain instant thepoint of contact of the wheel with the grounds is M and N is the
highest point on the wheel (diametrically opposite to M). The incorrect statemen
t is: (A) The velocity of any point P of the wheel is proportional to MP. (B) Po
ints ofthe wheel moving with velocity greater than v form a larger area ofthe wh
eel than points moving with velocity less than v. (C) The point of contact M is
instantaneously at rest. (D) The velocities of any two parts of the wheel which
are equidistant from centre are equal. Q.29 A small object is attached to a ligh
t string which passes through a hollow tube. The tube is held by one hand and th
e string by the other. The object is stet into rotation in a circle of radius r,
. The string is then pulled down, shortening the radius of the circle to r . The
ratio of the new kinetic energy to original kinetic energy is
2
(A) ~O
1
(B) 1
(C) 1
f
\
2
r
Q.30 Consider a sphere of mass'm' radius'R' doing pure rolling motion on a rough
surface having velocity v as shown in the Fig. It makes an elastic impact with
the smooth wall and moves back and starts pure rolling after some time again. (A
) Change in angular momentum about 'O' in the entire motion equals 2mv R in magn
itude. (B) Moment of impulse provided by the wall during impact about O equals 2
mv Rin magnitude. 3_ (C) Final velocity of ball will be — v
0 0 0 0
\hj
(D)
h
\
2
V ri J
(D) Final velocity of ball will be - — v
3
0
Q.31 Two rods of equal mass m and length / lie along the x axis and y axis with
their centres origin. What isthemoment f inertia of both about the line x=y:
feBansal Classes
(A)— 3
W
w
(B)4 —
W
( C 12^ )
( D )6I ^
[10]
Q.32 A plank with a uniform sphere placed on it, rests on a smooth horizontal pl
ane. Plank is pulled to right by a constant force F. If the sphere does not slip
over the plank. (A) acceleration of centre of sphere is less than that of the p
lank //11111111111 nm (B) acceleration of centre of sphere is greater than the p
lank because friction acts rightward on the sphere (C) acceleration ofthe centre
of sphere may be towards left. (D) acceleration of the centre of sphere relativ
e to plank may be greater than that ofthe plank relative to floor. Q.33 A hollow
sphere of radius R and mass M isfollyfilledwith water ofmass m. It is rolled do
wn a horizontal plane such that its centre of mass moves with a velocity v. If i
t purely rolls Orl (A) Kinetic energy of the sphere is — mv v\ M 4 (B) Kinetic ene
rgy of the sphere is — mv
2
2
2
(C) Angular momentum of the sphere about afixedpoint on ground is — mvR 14 (D) Ang
ular momentum of the sphere about afixedpoint on ground is — mvR Q.34 Portion AB o
f the wedge shown in figure is rough and BC is smooth. A solid cylinder rolls wi
thout slipping from Ato B. The ratio of translational kinetic energy to rotation
al kinetic energy, when the cylinder reaches point C is : (A) 3/4 (B) 5 (C) 7/5
(D) 8/3 - AB=BC Q.3 5 Two equal masses each of mass M are joined by a massless r
od oflength L. Now an impulse MV is given to the mass M making an angle of 30° wit
h the length ofthe rod. The angular veloctiy ofthe rod just after imparting the
impulse is M M 2v (B) ( A )L t MV v (D) none of these. (C) 2L Q.36 A thin unifor
m straight rod of mass 2 kg and length 1 m isfreeto rotate about its upper w////
///////, end when at rest. It receives an impulsive blow of 10 Ns at its lowest
point, normal to its length as shown in figure, The kinetic energy of rod just a
fter impact is IONS (A) 75 J (B) 100 J (C) 200 J (D)none Q.37 Aman, sittingfirml
yover a rotating stool has his amis streched. Ifhe folds his arms, the work done
by the man is (A) zero (B) positive (C) negative (D) may be positive or negativ
e. Q.38 A disc of radius r is rotating about its centre with an angular speed co
. It is gently placed on a rough horizontal surface. After what time it will be
in pure rolling ? co r 3Qr ®o£ (D) 2 Mg mti/Wmmi (C) Mg (A) 2,ug (B) 3pg
D V 0 n 0
feBansal Classes
[10]
Q.39 A 5 m long pole of 3 kg mass is placed against a smooth vertical well as sh
own in thefigure.Under equilibrium condition, ifthe pole makes an angle of 37° wit
h the horizontal, thefrictionalforce between the pole and horizontal surface is
(A) 20 N (B) 30 N (C) 20 pN (D) 30 pN
n=o
5m
''iiimiiniiiiunuhiiwuiiniiiui
37°/V * H*
0
Q.40 Two points of a rigid body are moving as shown. The angular velocity ofthe
body is: o o 2o 2u (B) R (A) 2R (D) 3R Q. 41 A plank of mass M is placed over sm
ooth inclined plane and a sphere is also placed over the plank. Friction is suff
icient between sphere and plank. If plank and sphere are released from rest, the
frictionalforce on sphere is: (A) up the plane (B) down the plane (C) horizontal
(D) zero Q. 42 Two uniform rods of equal length but different masses are rigidl
y joined to form an L-shaped body, which is then pivoted as shown. If in equilib
rium the body is in the shown configuration, ratio M/m will be: (A) 2 (B) 3 (C)
V2 (D) V'3
A
Q. 43 In thefigureshown, the plank is being pulled to the right with a constant
speed v. If the cylinder does not slip then: (A) the speed of the centre of mass
ofthe cylinder is 2v. (B) the speed of the centre of mass of the cylinder is ze
ro. (C) the angular velocity of the cylinder is v/R. (D) the angular velocity of
the cylinder is zero. I ; I iI i I T Q. 44 A plank with a uniform sphere placed
on it rests on a smooth horizontal plane. Plank is pulled to right by a constan
t force F. If sphere does not slip over the plank. Which of the following is inc
orrect. (A) Acceleration of the centre of sphere is less than that of the plank.
(B) Work done by friction acting on the sphere is equal to its total kinetic en
ergy. I I ! ! i l l (C) Total kinetic energy of the system is equal to work done
by the force F (D) None of the above Q.45 Moment of inertia of a rectangular pl
ate about an axis passing through P and P perpendicular to the plate is I. Then
moment ofPQR about an axis perpendicular to the plane of the plate: (A) about P
= 1/2 (B) about R = I/2 s (C) about P > 1/2 (D) about R > 1/2 Q. 46 A rod ofleng
th / is given two velocities v, and v in opposite directions at its two ends at
right angles to the length. The distance of the instantaneous axis ofrotation fr
om v, is:
2
(A) zero
(B) v, + v
2
I
( C ) V, + "
vxl
V-
(D)//2
feBansal Classes
[10]
Q.47 A ball of mass m moving with velocity v, collide with the wall elastically
as shown in thefigure.After impact the change in angular momentum about P is: (A
) 2 mvd (B) 2 mvd cosQ (C)2mv<isinG (D)zero Q.48 Auniform rod AB oflength L and
mass M is lying on a smooth table. A small particle of mass m strike the rod wit
h a velocity v at point C at a distance x from the centre O. The particle comes
to rest after collision. The value ofx, so that point Aof the rod remains ststio
nary just after collision is: (A) L/3 (B) L/6 (C) L/4 (D)L/12
0
a i
ni Jo
T
Q.49 Two particles of equal mass m at A and B are connected by a rigid light rod
AB lying on a smooth horizontal table. An impulse J is applied at A in the plan
e ofthe table and perpendicular at AB. Then the velocity of particle at A is: J
2J (D) zero (B) m (C) m Q.50 A time varying force F = 2t is applied on a spool a
s shown infigure.The angular momentum ofthe spool at time t about bottommost poi
nt is: rt ( B ) <MlL t2 (C) (R + r)t (D) data is insufficient (A) ~FT
2
F=2t
iiiiinTnTfiiiiiiiin
Q.51 A ring of mass m and radius R has three particles attached to the ring as s
hown in the figure. The centre of the ring has a speed v . The kinetic energy of
the system is: (Slipping is absent) (A) 6 mvo (B) 12 mv (C)4 mv (D) 8 mvo
0 2 2
/V ^V
/ 2m
m
m\
1 1 l l l
rx /v rv
Q.52 A particle of mass 2 kg located at the position (i + j) m has a velocity 2
(+i - j + k) m/s. Its angular momentum about z-axis in kg-m /s is: (A) zero (B)+
8 (C) 12 (D)-8
2
Q.53 The linear speed ofa uniform spherical shell after rolling down an inclined
plane ofvertical height h from rest, is: lOgh [4gh 6gh (A) (C) (B) \J 5 (P) /2g
h Q. 54 Aright triangular plate ABC of mass m is free to rotate in the vertical
plane about afixedhorizontal axis through A. It is supported by a string such th
at the A, sideAB is horizontal. The reaction at the support Ais: ^ mg mg 2mg (D)
mg (A) (B) (Q
feBansal Classes
[10]
Q. 5 5 A uniform sphere of radius R is placed on a rough horizontal surface and
given a linear velocity v angular velocity © as shown. The sphere comes to rest af
ter moving some distance to the right. It follows that: •a>„ (A)v = a R (B) 2 V = 5© R
(C)5V = 2q R (D) 2 = CD R Q. 56 A particle is moving in a circular orbit of rad
ius r, with an angular velocity co,. It jumps to another circular orbit of radiu
s r and attains an angular velocity co . Ifr = 0.5 r, and assuming that no exter
nal torque is applied to the system, then the angular velocity © , is given by : (
D) ©2 = ©, (A) ® 4 © (C) ©, = 2© (B) co = 3 co
0 0 0 0
0
;
0
0
0
0
V
2
2
?
2
2
=
Q.57 Let Ij, I and I be the moment of inertia of a uniform square plate about ax
es AOC, xDx' and yBy' respectively as shown in the figure. The moments of inerti
a of the plate Ij: I :1 are in the ratio. 12 12 ]_ (B)l: 7 7 (A) 1: ~ : 7
2 3 2 3
7_
' 12
(D)1:7 : 7
Q.58 A solid uniform disk of mass m rolls without slipping down afixedinclined p
lane with an acceleration a. Thefrictionalforce on the disk due to surface of th
e plane is : (A) 2 ma (B) 3/2 ma (C)ma (D) 1/2 ma Q.59 Auniform solid disc is ro
lling on a horizontal surface. At a certain instant B is the point of contact an
d Ais at height 2Rfromground, where R is radius of disc. (A) The magnitude ofthe
angular momentum of the disc about B is thrice that about A. (B) The angular mo
mentum ofthe disc about Ais anticlockwise. (C) The angular momentum ofthe disc a
bout B is clockwise (D) The angular momentum of the disc about Ais equal to that
about B. Q.60 If a person sitting on a rotating stool with his hands outstretch
ed, suddenly lowers his hands, then his (A) Kinetic energy will decrease (B) Mom
ent of inertia will decrease (C) Angular momentum will increase (D) Angular velo
city will remain constant Q. 61 A man is sitting in a smooth groove on a horizon
tal circular table at the edge by holding a rope joined to the centre. The momen
t of inertia oftable is I. Mass ofman = M. Man now pulls the rope so that he com
es to the centre. The angular velocity of the table: (A) must increase (B) may i
ncrease (C) must decrease (D) may decrease Q. 62 A sphere ofmass M and radius R
is attached by a light rod oflength 1 to a point P. The sphere rolls without sli
pping on a circular track as shown. It is releasedfromthe horizontal position, t
he angular momentum ofthe system about P when the rod becomes vertical is : (A)
M ^ y g / [/ + R] (C) m J j § /
J+-R
5
(B) M f f g ' /+—R 5 (D) none of the above
feBansal Classes
[10]
Q.63 In an experiment with a beam balance on unknown mass m is balanced by two k
nown mass m is balanced by two known masses of 16 kg and 4 kg as shown in figure
. -»H0 The value of the unknown mass m is (A) 10 kg (B) 6 kg
16kg
0
illillll)!
4 kg
(C) 8 kg
(D) 12 kg
Q. 64 Athin uniform rod of mass M and length L has its moment ofinertia I, about
its perpendicular bisector. The rod is bend in the form of a semicircular arc.
Now its moment of" inertia through the centre ofthe semi circular arc and perpen
dicular to its plane is I . The ratio of I,: I will be _ _ _ _ _ (A) < 1 (B) > 1
(C)=l ~ (D) can't be said
2 2
Q.65 A body kept on a smooth horizontal surface is pulled by a constant horizont
al force applied at the top point of the body. If the body rolls purely on the s
urface, its shape can be : (A) thin pipe (B) uniform cylinder (C) uniform sphere
(D) thin spherical shell Q.66 A particle ofmass m is projected with a velocity
u making an angle 45° with the horizontal. The magnitude ofthe torque due to weigh
t of the projectile, when the particle is at its maximum height, about a point a
t u a time ~ on the trajectory is : (A) mu
2
Q. 67 A rod is hinged at its centre and rotated by applying a constant torque st
arting from rest. The power developed by the external torque as a function of ti
me is :
• ext • ext
1
(B) -4 mu
2
(C) ~ mu
2
1 (D) - mu
2
ext
ext
(A)
time
(B)
time
(C)
time
(D)
time
Q.68 The moment of inertia of semicircular plate of radius R and mass M about ax
is AA' in its plane passing through its centre is MR MR" cos e MR' (c) MR' sin 9
(A) 2 (D) (B)
2 2
Q. 69 A pulley is hinged at the centre and a massless thread is wrapped around i
t. The thread is pulled with a constant force F startingfromrest. As the time in
creases, (A) its angular velocity increases, but force on hinge remains constant
(B) its angular velocity remains same, but force on hinge increases (C) its ang
ular velocity increases and force on hinge increases (D) its angular velocity re
mains same and force on hinge is constant Q. 70 If a cylinder is rolling down th
e incline with sliding. (A) after some time it may start pure rolling (B) after
sometime it will start pure rolling (C) it may be possible that it will never st
art pure rolling (D) none of these
&
A A'
feBansal Classes
[10]
Q.71 A horizontal force F = mg/3 is applied on the upper surface of a uniform cu
be of mass'm' and side' a' which is resting on a rough horizontal surface having
p = 1/2. The distance between lines of action of 'mg' and normal reaction 'N' i
s: (A) a/2 (B) a/3 (C)a/4 (D)None B Q.72 Auniform rod AB of length L and mass M
is lying on a smooth table. A small m C particle of mass m strike the rod with a
velocity v at point C a distance x from the centre 0. The particle comes to res
t after collision. The value of x, so that O point A of the rod remains stationa
ry just after collision, is : (A) L/3 (B) L/6 (C) L/4 (D)L/12 AU
s 0
Q.73 Auniform cube of side 'b' and mass M rest on a rough horizontal table. A ho
rizontal force F is applied normal to one of the face at a point, at a height 3b
/4 above the base. What should be the coefficient of friction (p) between cube a
nd table so that is will tip about an edge before it starts slipping? (A) p > (B
)P>J (C)p > (D) none
3b/4
ifniiiniiniiiiimi
Q.74 A homogeneous cubical brick lies motionless on a rough inclined surface. Th
e half of the brick which applies greater pressure on the plane is : (A) left ha
lf (B)righthalf (C) both applies equal pressure (D) the answer depend upon coeff
icient of friction Q.75 A body weighs 6 gms when placed in one pan and 24 gms wh
en placed on the other pan of a false balance. Ifthe beam is horizontal when bot
h the pans are empty, the true weight ofthe body is: (A) 13 gm (B) 12 gm (C)15.5
gm (D)15gm Q.76 In the triangular sheet given PQ = QR = /. IfM is the mass ofthe
sheet. What is the moment of inertial about PR Mr Mr Mf Ml2 (A) 24 (B) 12 (C) (
D) 18 Q.77 A slender uniform rod of length £ is balanced vertically at a point P o
n a horizontal surface having some friction. Ifthe top of the rod is displaced s
lightly to theright,the position ofits centre of mass at the time when the rod b
ecomes horizontal: (A) lies at some point to the right of P (B) lies at some poi
nt to the left of P (C) must be £/2 to therightof P (D) lies at P Q.78 A solid sph
ere with a velocity (of centre of mass) v and angular velocity co is gently plac
ed on a rough horizontal surface. Thefrictionalforce on the sphere: (A) must be
forward (in direction ofv) (B) must be backward (opposite to v) (C) cannot be ze
ro (D) none of the above Q.79 A ball is attached to an end of a light inextensib
le string, the other end ofwhich isfixedat the origin. The ball moves in vertica
l x-y plane where x is along horizontal and y along vertical. At the top ofits t
rajectory, it's velocity is *Js i m/s. The angular velocity vector when ball is
at the bottom ofthe trajectory is: [length of string = 0.5 m] (A) 10 k rad/s (B)
V5 k rad/s (C) 5 j rad/s (D) - 10 k rad/s
^Bansal Classes
[11]
Q. 80 Moment of inertia of a thin semicircular disc (mass=M & radius = R) about
an axis through point O and perpendicular to plane of disc, is given by: (A) 7 M
R 4
2
(B) -2 MR
2
(C) 7 MR 8
2
(D) MR
2
Q.81 Moment ofinertia of a semicircular ring of radius R and mass M; about an ax
is passing through A and perpendicular to the plane of the paper is ^ 2 5 ( A )
j- M R (B)MR (C)71 MR — (D) 2MR
2 2 2 2
Q. 82 Which ofthe following statements are correct. (A)frictionacting on a cylin
der without sliding on an inclined surface is always upward along the incline ir
respective of any external force acting on it. (B)frictionacting on a cylinder w
ithout sliding on an inclined surface is may be upward may be downwards dependin
g on the external force acting on it. (C)frictionacting on a cylinder rolling wi
thout sliding may be zero depending on the external force acting on it. (D) noth
ing can be said exactly about it as it depends on thefrictioncoefficient on incl
ined plane.
A N S W E R K E Y
Q.l Q.6 Q.ll Q.16 Q.21 Q.26 Q.31 Q.36 Q.41 Q.46 Q.51 Q.56 Q.61 Q.66 Q.71 Q.76 Q.
81
B D C D C B,C,D C A D B A A B C B B D
Q2 Q.7 Q.12 Q.17 Q.22 Q.27 Q.32 Q.37 Q.42 Q.47 Q.52 Q.57 Q.62 Q.67 Q.72 Q.77 Q.8
2
D B A A B, D A, C, D D A B D B D D D B B A B,C
B B A, B, C, D B,C C D C B B, C B C D C D A D
D C B A A,D C B A D B B A B, C A A A D
Q5 B Q.10 A Q.15 C Q.20 B Q.25 B Q.30 A, B, D Q.35 C Q.40 B Q.45 C Q.50 C Q.55 C
Q.60 B Q 65 A Q.70 A, C Q.75 B Q.80 B
feBansal Classes
[10]
BANSAL CLASSES
TARGET IIT JEE 2007
XI (P,Q,R,S & J)
#
SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
CONTENTS
Q.l Q.2 (a) (b) (c) Q.3 Q.4 Q.5
A body is in SHM with period T when oscillated from a freely suspended spring. I
f this spring is cut in two parts oflength ratio 1 : 3 & again oscillated from t
he two parts separately, thenfindthe periods are Tj & T, then T,/T The system sh
own in the figure can move on a smooth surface. The spring is initially compress
ed by 6 cm and then released.Find k-800N/m 6 kg time period of sum amplitude of
3 kg block inininimm/ir maximum momentum of 6 kg block A body undergoing SHM abo
ut the origin has its equation is given by x = 0.2 cos 5rct. Find its average sp
eed from t = 0 to t = 0.7 sec. A bead of mass m is fixed at the centre of the st
ring oflength L fixed at both the ends in a gravity free space. The tension in t
he string is T. If the bead is displaced slightly from it's position in a direct
ion perpendicular to the string thenfindthe period of small oscillation about th
e mean position. If velocity of a particle moving along a straight line changes
sinusoidally with time as shown in the given graph, its average velocity over ti
me interval t=0 to t=2(2n -1) seconds, n being any +ve integer, will be
r
7777777 777
EXERCISE-I
4m/s - 4m/s
/4s
8s
Q.6 Q.7 Q.8
Two blocks A (5kg) and B(2kg) attached to the ends of a spring constant 1120N/m
are placed on a smooth horizontal plane with the spring undeformed. Simultaneous
ly velocities of 3m/s and 1 Om/s along the line of the spring in the same direct
ion are imparted to A and B then 3m/s lOm/s find the maximum extension ofthe spr
ing, (a) (b) when does the first maximum compression occurs after start. Q.10 A
block of mass lOOgm attached to a spring of spring constant lOON/m is lying on a
frcitionless floor as shown. The block is moved to compress the spring by 10cm
and then released. If the collisions with the wall infrontare elastic then find
-mwmhu* wuuuwumvw the time period ofthe motion. Q.ll A particle is performing SH
M with accleration a = 8 71 - 4 7T X where x is coordinate of the particle w.r.t
. the origin.The parameters are in S.I. units. The particle is at rest at x = -2
at t=0. Find coordinate of the particle w.r.t. origin at any time.
2 2
Q.9
a - a O -P Two particles Aand B execute SHM along the same line with the same am
plitude a, samefrequencyand same equilibrium position O. If the phase difference
between them is <j) = 7 oin (0.9), then find the maximum distance between the t
wo. A block of mass 0.9 kg attached to a spring of force constant K is lying on
a frictionless floor as shown in the figure. The spring is compressed to 2 cm an
d the block is at a distance \ j 4 l cmfromthe wall. When the block TOW is relea
sed, it makes elastic collision with the wall and its period of motion I* is 0.2
sec. Find the approximate value of K. The acceleration-displacement (a-x) graph
of a particle executing simple harmonic motion is shown in the figure. Find the
frequency of oscillation.
-1
V7777777777777777777777777777777777777777777
1/V2 (
<§Bansal Classes
[8]
Q.12 Two identical rods each of mass m and length L, are rigidly joined and then
suspended in a vertical plane so as to oscillate freely about an axis normal to
the plane of paper passing through'S' (point of supension). Find the time perio
d of such small oscillations.
s
Q.13 A body A of mass m, = 1 kg and a body B of mass m, = 4 kg are attached to t
he ends of a spring. The body Aperforms vertical simple harmonic oscillations of
amplitude a~ 1.5 cm and angular frequency co=25 rad/s. Neglecting the mass ofthe
spring determine the maximum and minimum values of force the system exerts on t
he surface on which it rests. [Take g= 10 m/s ] Q.14 Consider a fixed ring shape
d uniform body of linear mass density p and radius R. A particle at the centre o
f ring is displaced along the axis by a small distance, show that the particle w
ill execute SHM under gravitation of ring & find its time period neglecting othe
r forces. Q. 15 Assume that a tunnel is dug across the earth (radius = R) passin
g through its centre. Find the time a particle takes to reach centre of earth if
it is projected into the tunnel from surface of earth with speed needed for it
to escape the gravitational field of earth. Q.16 A force f = - 10 x + 2 acts on
a particle of mass 0.1 kg, where ' k' is in m and F in newton. If it is released
from rest at x = - 2 m , find: (a) amplitude; (b) time period; (c) equation ofm
otion. Q.17 Potential Energy (U) of a body of unit mass moving in a one-dimensio
n conservative forcefieldis given by, U = ( x - 4 x + 3). All units are in S.I.
(i) Find the equilibrium position ofthe body. (ii) Show that oscillations ofthe
body about this equilibrium position is simple harmonic motion & find its time p
eriod. (iii) Find the amplitude of oscillations if speed of the body at equilibr
ium position is 2V6 m/s. Q.18 A spring of force constant k is cut into two parts
whose lengths are in the ratio 1:2. The two pails are now connected in parallel
and a block of mass m is suspended at the end of the combined spring. Find the
period of oscillation performed by the block. Q. 19(a) Find the time period of o
scillations of a torsional pendulum, if the torsional constant of the wire is K
= 1 OTCJ/rad. The moment of inertia of rigid body is 10 kg m about the axis of r
otation. (b) A simple pendulum of length 1 = 0.5 m is hanging from ceiling of a
car. The car is kept on a horizontal plane. The car starts accelerating on the h
orizontal road with acceleration of 5 m/s . Find the time period of oscillations
of the pendulum for small amplitudes about the mean position. Q.20 Two springs
of same spring constants are arranged as shown in figure. A block of mass m stri
kes one of the spring with velocity v. Find the -P0000000009K K -P0000000009peri
od of oscillation of the block.
2 2 2 2 2
V
Q.21 The resulting amplitude A' and the phase ofthe vibrations 8 A cot + — h t/ A
\ — .,,„ t£\ + — cos(cot + 7Tj + A cos( ©t + — = A' cos (cot + §) are __ o V 1' S =Acos(wt)
" v 2 j 4
f + c o s
and
respectively. Q.22 A body is executing SHM under the action of force whose maxim
um magnitude is 50N. Find the magnitude of force acting on the particle at the t
ime when its energy is half kinetic and half potential. Q.23 The motion of a par
ticle is described by x = 30 sin(7rt + TT/6), where x is in cm and t in sec. Pot
ential energy ofthe particle is twice ofkinetic energy for the first time after
t=0 when the particle is at position after time.
<§Bansal Classes
[8]
Q.24 The figure shows the displacement - time graph of a particle executing SHM.
If the time period of oscillation is 2s, then the equation of motion is given b
y x = . Q.25 A simple pendulum has a time period T = 2 sec when it swings freely
. The pendulum is hung as shown in figure, so that only one-fourth of its total
length isfreeto swing to the left of obstacle. It is displaced to position Aand
released. How long does it take to swing to extreme displacement B and return to
A? Assume that dispalcement angle is always small. Q.l Q.2 Q.3 Q.4 A point part
icle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM with amplitude of 0.1 m. When the particle
passes through the mean position, its K.E. is 8 x 10 J. Obtain the equation of m
otion of this particle ifthe initial phase of oscillation is 45°. The particle exe
cuting SHM in a straight line has velocities 8 m/s, 7 m/s, 4 m/s at three points
distant one metrefromeach other. What will be the maximum velocity ofthe partic
le? At the moment t = 0 a particle starts moving rectilinearly so that it's velo
city varies as v 25cos7it cm/s where t is expressed in seconds. Find tlie distan
ce that this particle covers during t = 2.80 s after the start. One end of an id
eal spring isfixedto a wall at origin O and the axis of spring is parallel to x-
axis. A block of mass m • 1 kg is attached to free end of the spring and it is per
forming SHM. Equation ofposition ofblock in coordinate system shown is x =10 + 3
sinl Ot, t is in second and x in cm. Another block of mass M = 3kg, moving towar
ds the origin with velocity 3 Ocm/c collides with the block performing SHM at t
0 and gets struck to it, calculate : 1kg 3kg new amplitude of oscillations, -MDM
DMMW new equation for position of the combined body, loss of energy during colli
sion. Neglect friction. A mass M is in static equilibrium on a massless vertical
spring as shown in the figure. A ball of mass m droppedfromcertain height stick
s to the mass M after colliding with it. The oscillations they perform reach to
height 'a' above the original level of scales & depth 'b' below it. Find the con
stant of force of the spring.; (b) Find the oscillation frequency. What is the h
eight above the initial levelfromwhich the mass m was dropped ? Aparticle of mas
s m moves on a horizontal smooth line AB oflength a such that when particle is a
t any general point P on the line two forces act on it. A force mg(AP)/a towards
A and another force 2mg(BP)/a towards B. Show that particle performs SHM on the
line when left from rest from mid-point of line AB. Find its time period and am
plitude. Find the minimum distance of the particle fj'oin B during the motion. I
fthe force acting towards A stops acting when the particle is nearest to B then
find the velocity with which it crosses point B. ////////// The rod AB of mass M
is attached as shown to a spring of constant K. A small block of mass m is plac
ed on the rod at its free end A. n if end A is moved down through a small distan
ce d and released, rm<<— determine the period of vibration, determine the largest
allowable value of d ifthe block m is to remain at all times in contact with the
rod. Two blocks A(2kg) and B(3kg) rest up on a smooth horizontal surface are co
nnected by a spring of stiffness 120 N/m. Initially the spring is undeformed. Ai
s imparted a velocity of 2m/s along the line ofthe spring 3ka 2m/s awayfromB. Fi
nd the displacement ofAt seconds later.
-3 : 1
I
EXERCISE-II
(i) © (iii) Q.5
(a) (c)
Q.6
Q.7
(a)
(b) Q.8
^Bansal Classes
[4]
Q.9
(a) (b) (c) Q.10
(i) (ii) Q.ll Q.12 Q.13
Q.14 Being a punctual man, a lift operator hung an exact pendulum clock on the l
ift wall to know the end ofthe working day.Tlie lift moves with an upwards and d
ownwards accelaration during the same time (according to the stationary clock on
the ground), the magnitudes ofthe accelarations remain unchanged. Will the oper
ator finish his working day in time, or will he work more(less) than required Q.
15 Two elastic strings obeying hooks law each ofunstretched length I, each has o
ne end attached to a particle ofmass m lying on smooth horizontal floor. The oth
er ends ofthe string are attached at points A & B which are at a distance 3 / ap
art. Each would be doubled in length by a tension 2 mg. The particle is held at
rest V2 + sm at A and then released. Show that after released that particle firs
t reaches B at time Q.16 A body A of mass m is connected to a light spring Sj of
spring constant k. At the right of A' there is a second light spring s, of spri
ng constant 5 k and having a massless vertical pan (P) attached to itsfreeend as
shown in the figure. Distance between the pan and the block when both the sprin
gs are in the relaxed position is I. Body Ais moved by 3 / distance to left from
the configuration of static equilibrium and then released. What is the period o
f oscillation ofthe body ? What is the maximum force experienced by the body A ?
Two identical balls A and B each of mass 0.1 kg are attached to two identical ma
ssless springs. The spring mass system is constrained to move inside a rigid smo
oth pipe in the form ofa circle as in fig. The pipe is fixed in a horizontal pla
ne. The centres ofthe ball can move in a circle of radius 0.06m. Each spring has
a natural length 0.0671 m and force constant 0.1 N/m.Initially both the balls a
re displaced by an angle of 0 = 7t/6 radian with respect to diameter PQ ofthe ci
rcle and released from rest Calculate the frequency of oscillation ofthe ball B.
What is the total energy of the system. Find the speed of the ball A when A and
B are at the two ends of the diameter PQ. A rectangular tank having base 15cm x
20cm is filled with water (p = 1000kg/m ) upto 20cm height. One end of an ideal
spring of natural length l = 20cm and force constant k=280N/m is fixed to the b
ottom of a tank so that spring remains vertical. This system is in an elevator m
oving downwards with acceleration a = 2m/s . A cubical block of side / = 10cm an
d mass m = 2kg gently placed over the spring and 20c released gradually, (as sho
wn) Calculate compression of the spring in equilibrium position. Ifblock is slig
htly down from equilibrium position and released calculate the frequency ofits v
ertical oscillations. An ideal gas is enclosed in a vertical cylindrical contain
er and supports afreelymoving piston ofmass m. The piston and the cylinder have
equal cross-sectional area A, atmospheric pressure is P and when the piston is i
n equilibrium position. Show that the piston executes SHM and find the frequency
ofoscillation (system is completely isolatedfromthe surrounding), y=Cp/Cv. Heig
ht ofthe gas in equilibrium position is h. Find the angular frequency of the sma
ll oscillations of the cylinder of mass M containing water of mass m. The spring
has a constant K and cylinder executes pure rolling. What happens when the wate
r in the cylinder freezes? A massless rod is hinged at O. A string carrying a ma
ss m at one end is attached to point A on the rod so that OA = a. At another poi
nt B (OB= b) of the rod, a horizontal spring of force constant k is attached ^fl
frawnmA as shown. Find the period of small vertical oscillations ofmass m around
its equilibrium position. What can be the maximum amplitude of its THrnr TtTTTV
T oscillation so that its motion may remain simple harmonic.
3 fl 2 0
•flWTOft-
s
A
TTH
P S,
I40000 0004SK |
fe Bansal Classes
[5]
An object of mass 0.2 kg executes SHM along the x-axis with frequency of (25/TT)
HZ. At the point x = 0.04m the object has KE 0.5 J and PE 0.4 J. The amplitude
of oscillation is . [JEE' 94] Q.2 A body of mass 1 kg is suspended from a weight
less spring having force constant 600N/m. Another body of mass 0.5 kg moving ver
tically upwards hits the suspended body with a velocity of 3.0m/s and get embedd
ed in it. Find thefrequencyof oscillations and amplitude of motion. [REE' 94] Q.
3 State whether true or false "Two simple harmonic motions are represented by t
he equations x, = 5sin[2rct + tt/4] and x = 5 V2 (sin27it + cos27Tt) their ampli
tudes are in the ratio 1 : 2" [REE' 96] Q.4 Ablock is kept on a horizontal table
. The table is undergoing simple harmonic motion offrequency3Hz in a horizontal
plane. The coefficient of staticfrictionbetween block and the table surface is 0
.72. Find the maximum amplitude of the table at which the block does not slip on
the surface. [REE' 96] Q.5 A particle of mass m is executing oscillations about
the origin on the x-axis. Its potential energy is V(x) = k|x| where k is a posi
tive constant. If the amplitude of oscillations is a, then its time period T is
(A) proportional to 1/Va (B) independent of a (C) proportional to Va (D) proport
ional to a [JEE' 98] Q.6 A particlefreeto move along the x-axis has potential en
ergy given by U(x) = k[ 1 -exp(-x )] for -oo < x < +oo, where k is a positive co
nstant of appropriate dimensions. Then (A) at point awayfromthe origin, the part
icle is in unstable equilibrium. (B) for any finite nonzero value of x, there is
a force directed away from the origin. (C) if its total mechanical energy is k/
2, it has its minimum kinetic energy at the origin. (D) for small displacementsf
romx=0, the motion is simple harmonic. [JEE' 99] Q. 7 Three simple harmonic moti
ons in the same direction having the same amplitude a and same period are superp
osed. If each differs in phasefromthe next by 45°, then (A) the resultant amplitud
e is (1+V2)a (B) the phase of the resultant motion relative to the first is 90°. (
C) the energy associated with the resulting motion is (3 + 2^2) times the energy
associated with a y single motion. (D) the resulting motion is not simple harmo
nic. [JEE'99] Q.8 The period of oscillation of simple pendulum of length L suspe
ndedfromthe roof of a vehicle which moves withoutfrictiondown an inclined plane
of inclination a is given by [JEE' 2000]
2 3 3/2 2
Q. 1
EXER CISE-III
(A) 2 tygcosa ( B ) ygsma c J — (C) 2n\ -g (D) \|gtana Q.9 A bob of mass M is atta
ched to the lower end of a vertical string of length L and cross sectional area
A. The Young's modulus ofthe material ofthe string is Y. Ifthe bob executes SHM
in the vertical direction, find thefrequencyof these oscillations. [REE' 2000] Q
.10 A particle executes simple harmonic motion between x = -A and x = +A. The ti
me taken for it to go from 0 to A/2 is T, and to go from A/2 to A is Tr Then [JE
E (Scr)' 2001 ] (A)T,<T (B)T >T (C) T, = T (D) T, = 2T
v 7 2 t 2 2 2
<§Bansal Classes
[8]
Q.ll A diatomic molecule has atoms of masses m, and m . The potential energy of
the molecule for the interatomic separation r is given by V(r) = -A + B(r - r )
, where r is the equilibrium separation, and A and B are positive constants. The
atoms are compressed towards each other from their equilibrium positions and re
leased. What is the vibrational frequency of the molecule? [REE' 2001 ] Q.12 A p
article is executing SHM according to y = a cos cot. Then which of the graphs re
presents variations ofpotential energy: [JEE (Scr)' 2003]
2 0 2 0
P.E.
(A) (I) & (III) (B) (II) & (IV) (C) (I) & (IV) (D) (II) & (III) Q.13 Two masses
m, and m, connected by a light spring of natural length l is compressed complete
ly and tied by a string. This system while moving with a velocity v along +ve x-
axis pass through the origin at t = 0. At this position the string snaps. Positi
on of mass mj at time t is given by the equation. Xj (t) = v t - A (1 - coswt) C
alculate: (a) Position ofthe particle m, as a function of time. " [JEE' 2003] (b
) /„ in terms ofA. Q.14 A block P of mass m is placed on afiictionlesshorizontal s
urface. Another block Q of same mass is kept on P and connected to tlie wall wit
h the help of a spring of spring constant k as shown in the figure. p is the coe
fficient offrictionbetween P and Q. The blocks move together performing SHM of a
mplitude A. The maximum value ofthefrictionforce between P and Q is WMWMflMy Q k
A smooth (A)kA (B) — /77777777777777777777T77777 (C) zero (D)p mg [JEE'2004] Q.15
A simple pendulum has time period T,. When the point of suspension moves vertica
lly up according to the equation y = kt where k = 1 m/'s and't' is time then the
time period of the pendulum is T then
Q Q Q s
x-»
t
s
2
2
2
•\
2
V27
T
is
( B )
[JEE' 2005 (Scr)] Io
11
(C*)
(D)
Q.16 A small body attached to one end of a vertically hanging spring is performi
ng SHM about it's mean position with angularfrequencyco and amplitude a. If at a
height y* from the mean position the body gets detachedfromthe spring, calculat
e the value of y* so that the height H attained by the mass is maximum. The body
does not interact with the spring during it's subsequent motionafter detachment
, (aco > g). [JEE 2005]
2
r1
<§Bansal Classes
[8]
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE-I
Q.l Q.5
Q.10
l/V3 Q.2 7r(2n-l)
0.133 sec. 8
(a)
sec, (b) 4 cm, (c) 2.40 kg m/s.
1
Q.3
2 m/s Q.4
T=n
I mL T
1 P Q.6 2n\a Q.7 1.8 a
Q.ll 2 - 4 COS2TT t Q . 1 2
Q.8 100 Nm" Q.9 (a) 25cm, (b) 3tt/56 seconds
2n
17L 18g
Q.13 60N, 40N Q.14
2nR/
Gp
' 1^ R Q.15 T = sin" vV3y —
0
e
11 71 11 Q.16 — m,(b)-sec.,(c)x = 0.2-ycoscot Q18 T=2W(2m/9k) K v
Q.21 3^5 A 8
t
Q.17 (i)x = 2m;(ii)T= V2 ^sec.;(iii) 2V3
Q.19 (a) 2 sec, (b) T = - [ T J sec
2
Q.20
^ lm 2£ 2tcJ—+—
tan
v^y
Q.22 25V2 N
Q.23 Q.l
1 . 10V6cm,-
_i
s m
nr\ 1 — sec J S 6
r
3
Q.24 x = lOsin (71I: + 7t/6) Q.25 - sec
EXERCISE-II
Q.2 ^65 m/s Q.3 s = 0.4m Q.4 3cm, x= 10-3sin5t; AE = 0.135J ab 1 2mg Q.5 (a)K =
b^- ;a ( c ) m b - a ' 2ti V(b-a)(M + m) R |M + 3m gR (M + 3m) Q.7 T= 27t — V" ' 3
K d < 3KbJ Q.6 T = 27rVa73g,A = a/6,a/6, l / 6 V ^ g b 5V2 Q.8 0.8t + 0.12 sin l
Ot Q.9 f = 7T; E=47rxl0- J;v=27cxl0- m/s Q.10 x = 4cm.f= T C 2K K Q.12 co 2M + m
; co' =, (4M + 3m) Q.ll f= 1 y(P +mg/A)A 2tc mh Q.13 (27ia/b)(m/k) , a mg/b k Q
.14 works more Q.16 (m/k) %+2sin- (l/3)]+(m/6k) [7i-2sin- (l/7)];F =7k/
v 7 5 2 n 1/2 2 2 I 1 ,/2 I max
y = 0.1sin(4t + 7i/4)
Q.l 0.06m Q.2 10/TI Hz, 5cm 1 YA Q.9 2TT VML Q.10 A
v 0 0
Q.3 T Q.4 2cm
EXERCISE-III
Q.5 A Q.6 D Q.7 A, C
2
Q.8 A
m{m2 Q.ll 27C 2B(mj + m ) f \
Q.12 A
< a
z
Q.13 (a) x,2 = vo t + — A(1 - cos cot), (b) L m
mg g —- + 1 A Q.14 B Q.15 C Q.16 y* = " k =co^ 7 V2 j
m
<§Bansal Classes
[8]
BANSAL CLASSES
TARGET IIT JEE 2007 XI (P,Q,R,S & J)
SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
QUESTION BANK ON
There are 53 questions in this question
Objective Question Bank On Simple Harmonic Motion
bank.
Q. 1 Two particles arc in SHM on same straight line with amplitude Aand 2A and w
ith same angular frequency ©. It is observed that when first particle is at a dist
ance A / f r o m origin and going toward mean position, other particle is at ext
reme position on other side of mean position. Find phase difference between the
two particles Q.2 Aparticle is executing SHM of amplitude A about the mean posit
ion x = 0. Which of the following cannot be a possible phase difference between
the positions of the particle at x = + A/2 and M ' x = -A/V2. (A) 75° (B) 165° (C) 1
35° (D) 195° Find the ratio of time periods of two identical springs if they arefirs
tjoined in series & then in parallel & a mass m is suspended from them: (A) 4 (B
) 2 (C)l (D)3 A simple harmonic motion having an amplitude A and time .period T
is represented by the equation: y = 5 sin 7i(t + 4) m Then the values ofA (in m)
and T (in sec) are : (A) A= 5; T = 2 • ( B ) A = 1 0 ; T = 1 (C)A=5;T=1 (D)A=10;T
= 2 A particle is subjected to two mutually perpendicular simple harmonic motio
ns such that its x and y coordinates are given by x = 2 sin cot ; y = 2 sin V©t +
4 J The path ofthe particle will be: (A) an ellipse (B) a straight line (C) a pa
rabola (D) a circle In an elevator, a spring clock oftime period T (mass attache
d to a spring) and u pendulum clock oftime period T are kept. If the elevator ac
celerates upwards (A) T well as T increases (B) T remain same, T increases (C) T
remains same, T decreases (D) T as well as T decreases A man is swinging on a s
wing made of 2 ropes of equal length L and in luiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiuiui direction pe
rpendicular to the plane of paper. The time period of the small oscillations abo
ut the mean position is L\\ //L IT [V3L (B) 2TC 2g (A) 271
s p s p s p s p s p
(A) 45°
(B) 90°
(C) 135°
(D)180°
Q.3 Q.4 Q.5
Q.6 Q.7
(C) 2k Q. 8
(D)7l
Two bodies P & Q of equal mass are suspended from two separate massless springs
of force constants kj & kj respectively. If the maximum velocity of them are equ
al during their motion, the ratio of amplitude of P to Q is : k ki (D) I*!. (B)
k kT
2 ( C ) 2
<!§Bansal Classes
Question Bank On Simple Harmonic Motion
[5]
Q. 9
The magnitude ofthe force acting on a particle ofmass m during its motion in x-y
plane according to the x = a sin cot, y = b cos cot, where a, b and co are cons
tants is (A)mco / +y (B)m©^/ +y (C)mo(x + y ) (D) ma (x + y) Q.10 Speed v of a par
ticle moving along a straight line, when it is at a distance x from afixedpoint
on the line is given by v = 108 - 9x (all quantities in S.I. unit). Then (A) The
motion is uniformly accelerated along the straight line (B) The magnitude of th
e acceleration at a distance 3 cm from thefixedpoint is 0.27 m/s . (C) The motio
n is simple harmonic about x = m. (D) The maximum displacementfromthefixedpoint
is 4 cm. Q.ll A particle performing SHM is found at its equilibrium at t = 1 sec
. and it is found to have a speed of 0.25 m/s at t = 2 sec. If the period of osc
illationis 6 sec. Calculate amplitude of oscillation
2 A x 2 2 x 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Q. 12 Q.13
Q. 14 Q.15
<A>im The displacement of a body executing SHMis given by x=Asin(27tt + 7t/3). T
he first timefromt = 0 when the velocity is maximum is (A) 0.33 sec (B) 0.16 sec
(C) 0.25 sec (D) 0.5 sec The maximum acceleration of a particle in SHM is made
two times keeping the maximum speed to be constant. It is possible when (A) ampl
itude of oscillation is doubled whilefrequencyremains constant (B) amplitude is
doubled whilefrequencyis halved (C) frequency is doubled while amplitude is halv
ed (D)frequencyis doubled while amplitude remains constant The potential energy
of a simple harmonic oscillator of mass 2 kg in its mean position is 5 J. If its
total energy is 9J and its amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period would be (A) 71
/10 sec (B) tt/20 sec (C) 7T/50 sec (D) u/100 sec A 2 Kg block moving with 10 m/
s strikes a spring of constant n N/m attached to 2 Kg block at rest kept on a sm
ooth floor. The time for which rear moving block remain in contact with spring w
ill be •10m/s 1 2kg -ggflRRftfo-2kg (A) v'2 sec (B) sec vrnmrUuuwwuuuuuvuu S
2
(C) 1 sec
(D) ~ sec
Q.16 In the above question, the velocity of the rear 2 kg block after its separa
tesfromthe spring will be : (A) 0 m/s (B) 5 m/s (C) 10 m/s (D) 7.5 m/s Q.17 Two
particle execute SHM with amplitude A and 2A and angular frequency © and 2© respecti
vely. At t = 0 they starts with some initial phase difference. At t = 3— . They ar
e in same phase. There initial phase © difference is: (A)(B) (Q— (D)TC Q.18 A plank
with a small block on top of it under going vertical SHM. Its period in 2 sec. T
he minimum amplitude at which the block will separatefrompiston is: 10 20 71 (A)
(B)(C)^ (D)t n 2 7
271
71
2tc
4TC
<!§Bansal Classes
[5]
Q.19 A particle starts oscillating simple harmonically from its equilibrium posi
tion then, the ratio of kinetic energy and potential energy of the particle at t
he time T/12 is: (T = time period) (A)2 : 1 (B)3 : 1 (C)4:l (D) 1 : 4 Q.20 Time
period of a particle executing SHM is 8 sec. At t = 0 it is at the mean position
. The ratio ofthe distance covered by the particle in the 1 st second to the 2nd
second is: (A) (B)V2 (C)^ (D)V2 + 1 Q.21 Two particles are in SHM with same ang
ular frequency and amplitudes A and 2Arespectively along same straight line with
same mean position. They cross each other at position A/2 distance from mean po
sition in opposite direction. The phase between them is: 571 _ (A) — - s i n -1 _
( B ) n- s i n -1 ( C )5n- c o s -l y (D) 6 -cos -l T 4J V4y w Q. 22 A system is
oscillating with undamped simple harmonic motion. Then the (A) average total en
ergy per cycle of the motion is its maximum kinetic energy. 1 (B) average total
energy per cycle ofthe motion is y times its maximum kinetic energy. 1 (C) root
mean square velocity is times its maximum velocity (D) mean velocity is 1 /2 ofm
aximum velocity. Q.23 A particle executing a simple harmonic motion ofperiod 2s.
When it is at its extreme displacement from its mean position, it receives an a
dditional energy equal to what it had in its mean position. Due to this, in its
subsequent motion, (A) its amplitude will change and become equal to 4 l times i
ts previous amplitude (B) its periodic time will become doubled i.e. 4s (C) its
potential energy will be decreased (D) it will continue to execute simple harmon
ic motion of the same amplitude and period as before receiving the additional en
ergy. Q. 24 The amplitude of the vibrating particle due to superposition of two
SHMs, Yj = sin ^co t + | and y = sin co t is :
71 7 2
(A) 1 (B) V2 (C) V3 (D) 2 Q. 25 A particle of mass m performs SHM along a straig
ht line with frequency f and amplitude A. (A) The average kinetic energy of the
particle2is zero. (B) The average potential energy is m n2f A . (C) The frequenc
y of ocillation of kinetic energy is 2f. (D) Velocity function leads acceleratio
n by %/2. dy Q. 26 The angularfrequencyofmotion whose equation is 4 —— + 9y = 0 is (
y = displacement and t = time) dt 9 4 3 2 (A)(B)(C)(D)Q. 27 The time taken by a
particle performing SHM to pass from point A to B where its velocities are same
is 2 seconds. After another 2 seconds it returns to B. The time period of oscill
ation is (in seconds) (A) 2 (B) 8 (C) 6 (D)4
2
<!§Bansal Classes
[5]
Q.28 A block is placed on a horizontal plank. The plank is performing SHM along
a vertical line with amplitude of 40cm. The block just loses contact with the pl
ank when the plank is momentarily at rest. Then: (A) the period of its oscillati
ons is 2TT/5 sec. (B) the block weighs on the plank double its weight, when the
plank is at one ofthe positions ofmomentary rest. (C) the block weighs 1.5 times
its weight on the plank halfway down from the mean position. (D) the block weig
hs its true weight on the plank, when velocity of the plank is maximum. Q.29 A l
inear harmonic oscillator offorce constant 2 x 10 Nm and amplitude 0.01 m has a
total mechanical energy of 160 J. Its (A) maximum potential energy is 100 J (B)
maximum kinetic energy is 100 J (C) maximum p otential energy is 160 J (D) minim
um potential energy is zero. Q.30 Abody executes SHM whose period is 16s. Two se
conds after it passes the equilibrium position, its velocity is 1ms™. The amplitud
e of SHM is (A) 6.3 m (B) 1.8 m (C)3.6m (D)2.4m Q.31 The displacement-time graph
of a p article executing SHM is shown. Which ofthe following statements is/are
true? (A) The velocity is maximum att = T/2 (B) The acceleration is maximum at t
= T (C) The force is zero at t = 3T/4 (D) The potential energy equals the oscil
lation energy at t = T/2. Q.32 The potential energy of a particle of mass 0.1 kg
, moving along x-axis, is given by U = 5x(x-4) J where x is in metres. It can be
concluded that (A) the particle is acted upon by a constant force. (B) the spee
d of the particle is maximum at x = 2 m (C) the particle executes simple harmoni
c motion (D) the period of oscillation of the particle is TC/5 S. Q.33 A mass of
0.2kg is attached to the lower end of a massless spring offorce-constant 200 N/
m, the upper end ofwhich isfixedto a rigid support. Which ofthe following statem
ents is/are true? (A) In equilibrium, the spring will be stretched by 1cm. (B) I
f the mass is raised till the spring is unstretched state and then released, it
will go down by 2cm before moving upwards. (C) The frequency of oscillation will
be nearly 5 Hz. (D) Ifthe system is taken to the moon, the frequency of oscilla
tion will be the same as on the earth. Q.34 Aparticle is executing SHM with ampl
itude A time period T, maximum acceleration a and maximum velocity v . Its start
s from mean position at t=0 and at time t , it has the displacement A/2, acceler
ation a and velocity v then (A) t=T/12 (B) a=a /2 (C)v=v /2 (D)t=T/8 Q.35 Two bl
ocks of masses 3 kg and 6 kg rest on a horizontal smooth surface. The 3 kg block
is attached to a spring with a force constant k = 900 Nm" which is compressed 2
mfrombeyond the equilibrium ; —600000^- 3kg 6kg position.The 6 kg mass is at rest
at l mfrommean position.3kg mass ' equilibrium strikes the 6 kg mass and the tw
o stick together. position (A) velocity of the combinedmasses immediately after
the collision is 10 ms" / •, ^ j f . O (B) velocity of the combined masses immedia
tely after thecollision is 5 ms" (C) Amplitude ofthe resulting oscillation is V2
m (D) Amplitude ofthe resulting oscillation is A/5/2 m.
6 4 1 0 0 0 0 ; 1 1 1
<!§Bansal Classes
[5]
Q.36 Vertical displacement of a plank with a body of mass'm' on it is varying ac
cording to law y = sin cot + 73 cos cot. The minimum value of © for which the mass
just breaks off the plank and the moment it occursfirstafter t = 0 are given by
: (y is positive vertically upwards) ^ V2 n g 2 [% (D) V^Sx (A) 6 Vg Q.37 A ring
of diameter 2m oscillates as a compound pendulum about a horizontal axis passin
g through a point at its rim. It oscillates such that its centre move in a plane
which is perpendicular to the plane ofthe ring. The equivalent length of the si
mple pendulum is (A) 2m (B)4m (C)1.5m (D)3m Q.38 The amplitude of a particle exe
cuting SHM about O is 10 cm. Then: (A) When the K.E. is 0.64 of its max. K.E. it
s displacement is 6cm from O. ry< (B) When the displacement is 5 cm from O its K
.E. is 0.75 of its max.P.E. I (C) Its total energy at any point is equal to its
maximum K.E. (D) Its velocity is halfthe maximum velocity when its displacement
is halfthe maximum displacement. Q.39 The displacement of a particle varies acco
rding to the relationx=3 sin 1 OOt + 8 cos 50t. Which of the following is/are co
rrect about this motion. (A) the motion of the particle is not S .H.M. (B) theam
plitude ofthe S .H.M. ofthe particle is 5 units (C) the amplitude of the resulta
nt S.H. M. is A/73 units (D) the maximum displacement of the particle from the o
rigin is 9 units. Q.40 A spring mass system preforms S .H.M. If the mass is doub
led keeping amplitude same, then the total energy of S.H.M. will become : (A) do
uble (B) half (CJ unchanged (D) 4 times Q.41 The graph plotted between phase ang
le (<j>) and displacement of a particle from equilibrium position (y) is a sinus
oidal curve as shown below. Then the best matching is Column B Column A
2 y l1
(a) (b) (c)
K. E. versus phase angle curve P.E. versus phase angle curve T.E. versus phase a
ngle curve
(d)
Velocity versus phase angle curve (A) (a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii) & (d)-(iv) (C
) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv) & (d)-(iii)
(iv) o (B) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iii) & (d)-(iv) (a)-(ii), (b)-(iii), (c)-(iv)
& (d)-(i)
<!§Bansal Classes
[5]
Q. 42 Aliquid ofmass m is oscillating with time period T in a U-tube of area of
cross-section A. Ifthe liquid is placed in another tube ofA/4 cross section area
then the time period will be (A)T (B)2T (C) T/2 (D) none ofthese Q, 43 Two part
icles are in SHM in a straight line. Amplitude Aand time period T ofboth the par
ticles are equal. At time t=0, one particle is at displacement y{= +A and the ot
her at y = -A/2, and they are approaching towards each other. After what time th
ey cross each other ? (A) T/3 (B) T/4 (C) 5T/6 (D)T/6 Q. 44 Time period of small
oscillation (in a vertical plane normal to the plaen of strings) of the bob in
the arrangement shown will be:
2
(A) 2ji (C) 2ti
(B) 2TZ(D)2TT-
I
V2g
Q. 45 A particle performs SHM in a straight line. In thefirstsecond, startingfro
mrest, it travels a distance a and in the next second it travels a distance b in
the same direction. The amplitude ofthe SHM is: 2a-b 2a^ (A) a - b (D) none oft
hese (B) (C) 3 a - b Q. 46 In thefigure,the block ofmass m, attached to the spri
ng of stiffness k is in contact with the completely elastic wall, and the compre
ssion in the spring is 'e'. The spring is compressed further by 'e' by displacin
g the blocktowards left and is then released. Ifthe collision between the block
and the wall is completely elastic then the time period of oscillations of the b
lock will be: -tmnrcisMiraw 7C /m 7i m TT (C) 3 V k (D) Q.47 The potential energ
y of a harmonic oscillator of mass 2 kg in its mean position is 5 J. If its tota
l energy is 9J, and its amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period would be: (A) (7i/1
00)s (B)(TC/50)S (C) (TT/20)S (D)(TI/10)S Q.48 The angular frequency of a spring
block system is co .This system is suspended from the ceiling of an elevator mo
ving downwards with a constant speed v . The block is at rest relative to the el
evator. Lift is suddenly stopped. Assuming the downwards as a positive direction
, choose the wrong statement:
0 0
(A)-AT
2% m
(B) 21 J— 7
Wall
(A) The amplitude of the block is © r (B) The initial phase of the block is n. (C)
The equation of motion for the block is fflf' sm co t. (D) The maximum speed of
the block is v . Q. 49 Two pendulums have time periods T and 5T/4, They start S
HM at the same timefromthe mean position. After how many oscillations of the sma
ller pendulum they will be again in the same phase: (A) 5 (B) 4 (C)ll (D)9
0 Q
<!§Bansal Classes
[5]
Q.50 In SHM, acceleration versus displacement (from mean position) graph: (A) is
always a straight line passing through origin and slope -1 (B) is always a stra
ight line passing through origin and slope+1 (C) is a straight line not necessar
ily passing through origin (D) none of the above Q.51 Two simple harmonic motion
s y j = A sin cot and y = A cos cot are superimposed on a particle ofmass m. The
total mechanical energy ofthe particle is:
2
'
(A) — mco A
2
2
(B) mco A
2 0
2
(C)-mco A
2
2
(D)zero
Q.52 A small ball of density p is released from rest from the surface of a liqui
d whose density varies with Po depth h as p = — (a + J3h). Mass of the ball is m.
Select the most appropriate one option. (A) The particle will execute SHM (B) Th
e maximum speed ofthe ball is (C) Both (A) and (B) are correct (D) Both (A) and
(B) are wrong (Here a and (3 are positive constant of proper dimensions with a <
2) Q.53 The maximum acceleration of a particle in SHM is made two times keeping
the maximum speed to be constant. It is possible when: (A) amplitude of oscilla
tion is doubled whilefrequencyremains constant (B) amplitude is doubled while fr
equency is halved. (C)frequencyis doubled while amplitude is halved. (D) frequen
cy of oscillation is doubled while amplitude remains constant
2-q
ANSWER KEY
Q.l Q.5 Q.9 Q.13 Q.17 Q.21 Q.25 Q.29 Q.33 Q.37 Q.41 Q.45 Q.49 Q.53 C A A C B,C A
B,C B,C A B, C, D C B C A C Q2 Q.6 Q.10 Q.14 Q.18 Q.22 Q.26 Q.30 Q.34 Q.38 Q.42
Q.46 Q.50 C B D A
c
.
AB A B, C B A D
Ac c c
Q3 Q.7 Q.ll Q.15 Q.19 Q.23 Q.27 Q.31 Q.35 Q.39 Q.43 Q.47 Q.51
B B A C B A B B, C, D AC B,D D A B
Q.4 Q.8 Q.12 Q.16 Q.20 Q.24 Q.28 Q.32 Q.36 Q.40 Q.44 Q.48 Q.52
A B A A D C A B, C, D B, C, D A C B B A
<!§Bansal Classes
[5]
BANSAL CLASSES
TARGET IIT JEE 2007 XI (P, Q, R, S)
UNITS & DIMENSIONS & BASIC MATHEMATICS
CONTENTS
EXERCISE ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE
Q.l " " Q.2 ' If force, acceleration and time are taken as fundamental quantitie
s, then the dimensions of length will be: (A) FT (B)F A T"' (C)FA T (Uf^T In a c
ertain system ofunits, 1 unit oftime is 5 sec, 1 unit of mass is 20 kg and unit
oflength is 10 m. In this system, one unit ofpower will correspond to
2 -1 2 2 2
<A) 16 watts (B) ~ watts (C) 25 watts (D) none ofthese Q.3\l Three forces P, Q &
R are acting at a point in the plane. The angle between P & Q and Q & R are 150°
& 120° respectively, then for equilibrium, forces P, Q & R are in the ratio
(A) 1 : 2 : 3 (B)l:2:&
0
(C) 3 :2 :1
0
(D)
:2:1
Q.4 J The resultant of two forces F, and F is P. If F is reversed, then resultan
t is Q. Then the value of (P + Q ) in terms of Fj and F is (A) 2(F, + F ) (B)F,
+ F (C)(F,+F ) (D) none of these Q.5 A man rows a boat with a speed of 18km/hr i
n northwest direction. The shoreline makes an angle of 15° south ofwest. Obtain th
e component ofthe velocity of the boat along the shoreline.
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
(A)9km/hr Q.6
( B ) 1 8 y km/hr
M
(C) 18cosl5°km/hr (D) 18cos75°km/hr
A bird moves from point (1,-2,3) to (4,2,3). If the speed of the bird is lOm/sec
, then the velocity vector ofthe bird is: (A) 5 |-2j+3k) (B) 5 (4i+2j+3k) (C) 0.
6i+0.8j (D) 6i+8j
-1 2
Q.7 ^ The dimensions ML T" can correspond to : (A) moment of a force or torque (
B) surface tension (C) pressure (D) co-efficient ofviscosity. (useful relation a
re t = r x F , S = F//, F = 6 n r) rv, where symbols have usual meaning) Q.8 The
10 N/m of 10 dyne/cm N/m (A) pressure (B) 10 is equivalent to 10 N/m (C)
6 5 2 2 6 2 7 2
(D) 10 N/m
8
2
Q.9.J If area (A) velocity (v) and density (p) are base units, then the dimensio
nal formula of force can be represented as. (A)Avp (B)Av p (C)Avp (D)A vp
2 2 2
Q.10 If the resultant of two forces of magnitudes P and Q acting at a point at a
n angle of 60° is V7Q, then P/Qis (A) 1 (B) 3 / 2 (C)2 (D)4 Q.ll For a particle mo
ving in a straight line, the position ofthe particle at time (t) is given by x =
t - 6t + 3t + 7 what is the velocity ofthe particle when it's acceleration is z
ero ? (A)-9 ms(B)-12 ms (C) 3 ms" (D)42ms3 2 1 -1 1 1
4§Bansal Classes
Unit & Dimensions & Basic Mathematics
[4]
Q.12 If the angle between the unit vectors a and b is 60°, then | a - b j is (A)0
(B)l (C)2 (D)4 Q. 1 I n a book, the answer for a particular question is expresse
d as ma L™ ~k ! ma here m represents mass, a represents accelerations, / represent
s length. The unit ofb should be (A) m/s (B) m/s (C) meter (D)/sec.
b =
2
Q. 14 J The resultant oftwo forces, one double the other in magnitude is perpend
icular to the smaller ofthe two forces. The angle between the two forces is (A)
150° (B) 90° (C) 60° (D) 120° Q.15 Which ofthe following can be a set of fundamental qua
ntities (A) length, velocity, time (B) momentum, mass, velocity (C) force, mass,
velocity (D) momentum, time, frequency 1 Q. 16-/ If 1 unit ofmass=4 kg; 1 unit
oflength = — m and 1 unit oftime=5 sec, then 1 Joule=x units of energy in this sys
tem (A) 100 units where x = 0.01 units (B) (C) 200 units (D) 0.02 units Q.17/ A
man moves towards 3 m north then 4 m towards east and finally 5m towards south w
est. His displacement from origin is (A) 5-\/2 m (B)Orn (C)12m (D)5m Q. 18 J Kin
etic energy (K) depends upon momentum (p) and mass (m) of a body as K a p m " (A
) a=l; b=l (B)a=2;b = - 1 (C)a=2;b=l (D)a=l;b=2
a b
Q J 9 Use the approximation (1 + x) « 1 + nx, j x | « 1, to find approximate value f
or
n
/
\ /
(a) V99 (b) (c) 124 Q.20 A particle is in a uni-directional potential field wher
e the potential energy (U) ofa particle depends on the x-cordinate given by U =
k (1 - cos ax) & k and 'a' are constants. Find the physical dimensions of'a' & k
.
1/3 x
Q.2 V An enclosed ideal gas A has its pressure P as a function of its volume V a
s P = P - aV , where P & a are constants. Find the physical dimensions of a .
0 2 0
Q.22 Ûse the small angle approximations tofindapproximate values for (a) sin 8° a
nd (b) tan 5° Q.23 When two forces of magnitude P and Q are perpendicular to each
other, their resultant is of magnitude R R. When they are at an angle of 180° to e
ach other their resultant is of magnitude ~j,= . Find the ratio of P and Q.
4§Bansal Classes
[4]
Q.24 A particle moves along the space curve ? = (t +1) i + (3t - 2) j + (2t - 4t
) k .(t in sec, r in m) Find at time t = 2 the (a) velocity, (b) acceleration,
(c) speed or magnitude of velocity and (d) magnitude of acceleration .
2 3 2
Q.25 The time period (T) of a spnng mass system depends upon mass (m) & spring c
onstant (k) & length of W Force the spring (/) [k = j ]• Find the relation among,
(T), (m), (/) & (k) using dimensional method.
e
Q.26 A body acted upon by 3 given forces is under equilibrium, (a) If IF, I = 10
Nt., |F | = 6 Nt. Find the values of & angle (6). (b) Express F, in unit vector
form.
2
—» —»
F
2 \ 3 7 /
/ F i
X
'F,
/\ /S _» /N /v A
Q.27 A particle is acted upon by the forces F, =2i + aj-3k, F = 5i + cj-bk,F =bi
+ 5j-7k, F = ci + 6 j - ak, • Find the values ofthe constants a, b, c in order th
at the particle will be in equilibrium. Q. 2^- A satellite is orbiting around a
planet. Its orbital velocity (v ) is found to depend upon (a) Radius of orbit (R
) (b) Mass of planet (M) (c) Universal gravitation constant (G) Using dimensiona
l analysis find an expression relating orbital velocity (v ) to the above physic
al quant ilie; J / Q.29 Ifthe four forces as shown are in equilibrium 15 N -10 N
Express F, & F in unit vector form. IT( •i 1 a Q.30 The equation of state for a r
eal gas at high temperature is given byP= nRT - ^1/2y^T"-,.
2 3 4 0 Q 2
£
F
where n, P, V & T are number of moles, pressure, volume & temperature respective
ly & R is the universal gas constant. Find the dimensions of constant 'a' in the
above equation. Q.31 The distance moved by a particle in time tfromcentre of a
ring under the influence of its gravity is given by x = a sincot where a & co ar
e constants. If co is found to depend on the radius ofthe ring (r), its mass (m)
and universal gravitational constant (G),findusing dimensional analysis an expr
ession for co in terms of r, m and G. Q.32 Ifthe velocity oflight c, Gravitation
al constant G & Plank's constant h be chosen as fundamental units, find the dime
nsion of mass, length & time in the new system.
4§Bansal Classes
[4]
Q. 3 3 A plane body has perpendicular axes OX and OY marked on it and is acted o
n by following forces 5P in the direction OY 4P in the direction OX 1 OP in the
direction OA where A is the point (3 a, 4a) 15P in the direction AB where B is t
he point (- a, a) Express each force in the unit vector form & calculate the mag
nitude & direction of sum ofthe vector of these forces. Q.34 Two vectors have ma
gnitudes 3 unit and 4 unit respectively. What should be the angle between them i
f the magnitude ofthe resultant is (a) 1 unit, (b) 5 unit and (c) 7 unit. Q. 3 5
A vector A of length 10 units makes an angle of 60° with a vector B of length 6 u
nits. Find the magnitude ofthe vector difference A - B & the angle it makes with
vector A. Q.36 At timet the position vector ofa particle ofmassm = 3kg is given
by f = 6ti - t j + cost k-Find the
3
resultant force F (t), magnitude of its acceleration when t = — & speed when t = n
. Q. 3 7 Given that the position vector of a particle moving in x-y plane is giv
en by r = (t - 4 ) i + (t-4) j. Find (a) Equation of trajectory ofthe particle (
b) Time when it crosses x-axis and y-axis
2
n
Q.38 The velocity time graph of a body moving in a straight line is shown. Find
its (a) instantaneous velocity at t - 1.5 sec. (b) average acceleration from t =
1.5 sec. to t = 2.5 sec. (c) draw its acceleration time graph fromt = 0 tot = 2
.5 sec
x 2
|
2 2 5se •
T
time in sec
Q.3 9 The curvilinear motion of a particle is defined by v =50-16t and y=100-4t
, where v is in metres per second, y is in metres and t is in seconds. It is als
o known that x=0 when t=0. Determine the velocity (v) and acceleration(a) when t
he position y=0 is reached.
x
Q.40 The force acting on a body moving in a straight line is given by F=(3t —4t+1)
Newton where t is in sec. If mass ofthe body is 1kg and initially it was at res
t at origin. Find (a) displacement between time t = 0 and t = 2 sec. (b) distanc
e travelled between time t = 0 and t = 2 sec.
2
i
fa Bansal Classes
[5]
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE # I
Q.l Q.6
D D
Q.2 Q.7
A C
Q.3 Q.8
D A
Q.4 Q.9
A B
Q.5
A
Q.10 C Q.15 C
Q.ll A Q.16 A
Q.12 B Q.17 B
2 2
Q.13 C Q.18 B
Q.14 D
7 2
Q.19 (a) 9.95, (b) 0.99, (c) 4.986
Q.23 2 ± S Q.24 (a) 5i + 3j + 8k, (b) 2i + 16k, (c) 7^2 , (d) 2^65 Im Q.25 T= a J —
Q.26 (a) F- = 14 N, (b) F = - 6 i
3 2
Q.20 L-\ML T~
Q.21 ML~ T~
Q.22 0.14, 0.09
Q.27 a = - 7, b = -3, c = - 4
[GM' Q.28 o = l J ~ j p ,
v k 5 2 1/2
Q.29 F, (29-12^3 ) (-j) Q.30 ML T" K Q.31 co = ] Q.32 [M] = [h -c -G~ ]; [L] = [
h - c ^ G " ] ; [T] = [h • - • G ]
1/2 1/2 ,/2 1/2 2 1/2 C 5/2 1/2
If
Q-33 5p j,4P i,6P i + 8P j, -12P i - 9P j, V20, tan [-2] with the +ve x axis
-1
Q.34 (a) ISO®, (b) 90°„ (c) 0 Q.36 -18t j-3cost k;3ji;3V4 4
+ 7r
Q.35 2^19 ôs" j j ^
1
Q.37 (a) y + 8y +12 = x ; (b) crosses x axis when t = 4 sec., crosses y axis whe
n t = + 2 sec.
2
1 V3 Q.38 (a) - = m / s , (b)-^--m/s ,( )
2 C
1
tin sec
2 2.5
Q.39 v = - 3 0 i - 4 0 j , a = - 1 6 i - 8 j
Q.40 ( a ) 3 m , (b) t = 0, 1 -
<4§.Bansal Classes
[61
BANSALCLASSES TARGETIIT JEE 2007
— •Mm
IS
(ALL)
list
OUESmm BANK ON w a
SHORT
QUESTIONS
Q.l Q.2 Q.3 QA Q.5 Q.6 Q. 7 Q.8 Q. 9
A person wets his eyeglass to clean them. As the water evaporates he notices tha
t tor a short time the glass become markedly more non reflecting. Explain. A len
s is coated to reduce reflection. What happens to the energy that had previously
been reflected Is it absorbed by the coating?
9
If interference between light waves of different frequencies is possible, one sh
ould observe light beats, just as one obtains sound beats from two sources of so
und with slightly differentfrequencies.Discuss how one might experimentally look
for this possibility. What is the shape of interference fringes as seen on a sc
reen perpendicular to the line joining the sources in Young's interference exper
iment if the source are (a) pinholes, (b) slits? In Young's double slit experime
nt why must the slits be close and of same width? In Young's double slit experim
ent why do we use monochromatic light ? Ifwhite light is used, how would the pat
tern change? Will interference be observed in Young's double-slit experiment ift
he lightfroma source falls directly on the two slits? In what direction will the
fringe system shift ifa glass plate is interposed inthe path of one of the inte
rfering beams? Suppose that a radio station broadcasts simultaneouslyfromtwo tra
nsmitting antennas at two different locations. Is it clear that your radio will
have better reception with two transmitting antennas rather than one? Justify yo
ur answer.
feBansal Classes
Question Bank On Wave Optics
[2]
ONLY ONE OPTION IS Take approx. 2 minutes for answering each question.
CORRECT
Q. 1 Figure, shows wave fronts in still water, moving in tlie direction ofthe ar
row towards the interface PQ between a shallow region and a deep(denser) region.
Which of the lines shown may represent one of the wave fronts in the deep regio
n? (AJ1 (B) II (C) III Q.2 Q.3 Two coherent monochromatic light beams of intensi
ties 1 and 41 are superposed. The maximum and minimum possible intensities in th
e resulting beam are: (A) 51 and I (B) 51 and 31 (C) 91 and I (D) 91 and 31 Two
point monochromatic and coherent sources oflight of wavelength 1 are placed on t
he dotted line in front of an large screen. The source emit waves in phase with
each other. The distance between S, and S is'd' while their distancefromthe scre
en is much larger. Then, (1) If d = 1X12,O will be a minima r (2) -»lfd = 4.3X, th
ere will be a total of 8 minima on y axis. _ ~ (3) -> If d = IX, O will be a max
ima. ' 2 5° (4) If d = X, there will be only one maxima on the screen. ^ Which is
the set of correct statement: (A) 1, 2 & 3 (B) 2, 3 & 4 (C)l,2,3&4 (D)l,3&4
2 y s s
Q.4
Figure shown plane waves refracted for air to water using Huygen's principle a,
b, c, d, e are lengths on the diagram. The refractive index of water wrt air is
the ratio. (A) a/e (B) b/e (C) b/d (D)d/b Q.5 When light is refracted into a den
ser medium, (A) its wavelength andfrequenyboth increases (B) its wavelength incr
ease but freqnency remains unchanged (C) its wavelength decrease butfreqnencyrem
ains unchanged (D) its wavelength and freqnency both decrease. Q. 6 Two point so
urce separated by d = 5 pm emit light of wavelength X = 2 pm in phase. Acircular
wire of radius 20 pm is placed around the source as shown in figure. (A) Point
Aand B are dark and points C and D are bright. (B) Points Aand B are bright and
point C and D are dark. (C) Points Aand C are dark and points B and D are bright
. (D) Points A and C are bright and points B and D are dark. Q. 7
A
fa Bansal Classes
Plane microwavesfroma transmitter are directed normally towards a plane reflecto
r. A detector moves along the normal to the reflector. Between positions of 14 s
uccessive maxima, the detector travels a distance 0.13 m. If the velocity ofligh
t is 3 * 10 m/s,findthe frequency of the transmitter. (A) 1.5 x 10 Hz (B) IO Hz
(C)3*10 Hz (D)6xl0 Hz Two monochromatic (wavelength = a/5) and coherent sources
of electromagnetic waves are placed on the x-axis at the points (2a, 0) and (-a,
0). A detector moves in a circle of radius R(»2a) whose centre is at the origin.
The number of maximas detected during one circular revolution by the detector ar
e (A) 60 ' (B) 15 . (C) 64 (D)None
8 ,0 10 lo 10
[91
Two coherent narrow slits emitting light of wavelength X in the same phase are p
laced parallel to each other at a small separation of 3X. The light is collected
on a screen S which is placed at a distance D ( » X)fromthe slits. The smallest d
istance x such that the P is a mpama ,p (A)V3D ' (B)V8D D S,M WS (C)V5D (D)V5
r
3
t
Q.10 Two coherent sources oflight are placed at points (- 5a , 0) and (+ 5a 0).
Wavelengtli of the light is — —, JL 4a X = — . How many maximas will be obtained on a
CD planar circle of large radius with centre at origin. (A) 12 (B) 15 (C) 16 (D)
14 Q 11 In YDSE how many maxima can be obtained on the screen ifwavelength ofli
ght used is 200nm and d = 700 nm: ^ (A) 12 (B) 7 (C) 18 (D) none ofthese Q.l? In
a YDSE, the central brightfringecan be identified: (A) as it has greater intens
ity than the other bright fringes. (B) as it is wider than the other bright frin
ges. (C) as it is narrower than the other bright fringes. (D) by using white lig
ht instead ofsingle wavelength light. Q. 13 In Young's double slit experiment, t
he wavelength of red light is 7800 A and that of blue light is 5200 A. The value
of n for which n bright band due to red light coincides with (n+1)* bright band
due to blue light, is: (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 .(D) 4
A
Q.14 If the Young's double slit experiment is performed with white light, then w
hich ofthe following is not true. (A) the central maximum will be white (B) ther
e will not be a completely dark fringe (C) thefringenext to the central will be
red (D) thefringenext to the central will be violet Q.15 Imagine a Young's doubl
e slit interference experiment performed with waves associated with fast moving
electrons producedfroman electron gun. The distance between successive maxima wi
ll decrease maximum if (A) the accelerating voltage in the electron gun is decre
ased (B) the accelerating voltage is increased and the distance of the screenfro
mthe slits is decreased (C) the distance of the screenfromthe slits is increased
. (D) the distance between the slits is decreased. Q.16 Two identical narrow sli
ts S, and S are illuminated by light of wavelength X from a point source P.
2
If, as shown in the diagram above the light is then allowed tofellon a screen, a
nd if n is a positive integer, the condition for destructive interference at Q i
s that (A) (/, -1 ) = (2n + 1 )X/2 (B) (/ - / ) = (2n + 1 )X/2 (C) (/, + / ) - (
/ + l ) = nX . (D) (/, + / ) - (/ +1 ) = (2n + \)X/2
2
3 4 2 2
4
3
2
4
fa Bansal Classes
[91
In Young's double slit experiment, the two slits act as coherent sources of equa
l amplitude Aand wavelength X. In another experiment with the same setup the two
slits are sources of equal amplitude Aand wavelength X but are incoherent. The
ratio ofthe intensity oflight at the midpoint of the screen in thefirstcase to t
hat in the second case is (A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 4 : 1 (D) none ofthese Q.18 1
n a Young's double slit experiment, a small detector measures an intensity of il
lumination of I units at the centre ofthe fringe pattern. If one of the two (ide
ntical) slits is now covered, the measured intensity will be (A) 21 (B) I (C)I/4
(D) 1/2 Q.19 A student is asked to measure the wavelength of monochromatic ligh
t. He sets up the apparatus sketched below. S S , S are narrow parallel slits, L
is a sodium lamp and M is a microscope eyepiece. The student fails to observe i
nterference fringes. Yourfirstadvice to him will be Q s, 5cm (A) increase the wi
dth ofS, (B) decrease the distance between S„ and S (C) replace L with a white lig
ht source "tocm"' 60cm" (D) replace M with a telescope (E) make S and S wider.
v 2 3 3 2 3
T (M
Q.20 Light of wavelength 520 nm passing through a double slit, produces interfer
ence pattern of relative intensity versus deflection angle 9 as shown in the fig
ure. The separation d between the slits is (A) 2 x 10" mm (B) 5 x 10" mm (C)4.5
x io- mm (D) 1.1 x 10- mm
2 2 2 2
e
Q.21 In Young's double slit experiment the slits are 0.5 mm apart and the interf
erence is observed on a screen at a distance of 100 cm from the slit. It is foun
d that the 9th brightfringeis at a distance of 7.5 mm from the second darkfringe
fromthe centre of thefringepattern. The wavelength ofthe light used is , 2500 .
(A). — A s (B), 2500 A (C) 5000 A ( D )5000- A -— !
8
Q. 22 In a YDSE apparatus, two identical slits are separated by 1 mm and distanc
e between slits and screen is 1 m. The wavelength oflight used is 6000 A. The mi
nimum distance between two points on the screen having 75% intensity of the maxi
mum intensity is: (A) 0.45 mm (B) 0.40 mm (C) 0.30 mm (D) 0.20 mm Q.23 In a youn
g double slit experiment D equals the distance of screen and d is the separation
between the slit. The distance of the nearest point to-the central maximum wher
e the intensity is same as that due to a single slit, is equal to (A)
DX
DX
(C) 3d
Ul
D^
(D)
2DX
th
Q.24 A beam oflight consisting of two wavelength 6300 A and X A is used to obtai
n interference fringes in a Young's double slit experiment. If 4 bright fringe o
f6300 A coincides with 5 darkfringeof X A, the value of X (in A) is (A) 5200 (B)
4800 (C) 6200 (D) 5600
fa Bansal Classes
[91
Q.25 A beam oflight consisting of two wavelengths 6500A and 5200A is used to obt
ain interference fringes in Young's double slit experiment. The distance between
slits is 2 mm and the distance of screen from slits is 120 cm. What is the leas
t distancefromcentral maximum where the bright due to both wavelength coincide?
(A) 0.156 cm (B) 0.312 cm (C) 0.078 cm (D) 0.468 cm Q.26 In a two slit experimen
t with monochromatic light, fringes are obtained on a screen placed at some dist
ancefromthe slits. If the screen is moved by 5 * 10 m towards the slits, the cha
nge infringewidth is 3 x 10~ m. If separation between the slits is 10~ m, the wa
velength oflight used is: (A) 6000 A (B) 5000 A (C) 3000 A ' (D) 4500 A
2 5 3
Q.27 The ratio ofthe intensity at the centre of a bright fringe to the intensity
at a point one-quarter ofthe fringwidthfromthe centre is (A) 2 (B) 1/2 (C) 4 (D
) 16 Q.28 InYDSE, letS, and S be the two slits, and C be the centre ofthe screen
. IfG is the angle S,CS and X is the wavelength, thefringewidth will be:
2 2
(A)-
X
(B)xe
(O—
2X
(D)
X
—
Q.29 In a Young's Double slit experiment,firstmaxima is observed at afixedpoint
P on the screen. Now the screen is continuously moved awayfromthe plane of slits
. The ratio of intensity at point P to the intensity at point O (centre of the s
creen) (A) remains constant (B) keeps on decreasing . o (C) first decreases and
then increases (D) First decreases and then becomes constant j p*"]" Q.30 In a d
ouble slit experiment, the separation between the slits is d = 0.25 cm and the d
istance ofthe screen D = 100 cm from the slits. If the wavelength oflight used i
s X = 6000A and I is the intensity of the central brightfringe,the intensity at
a distance x = 4 * 10~ mfromthe central maximum is (A)I (B)I /2 (C)3I /4 (D)I /3
0 5 0 0 0 0
Q.31 A monochromatic light source ofwavelength displaced at S. ThreeslitsS,, S a
nd S are equidistant from the source S and the point P on the screen. S, P - S P
= X/6 and S, P - S P = 2X/3. If I be the intensity at P when only one slit is o
pen, the intensity at P when all the three slits are open is s^
2 3 2 3
( A ) 31
(C) 81
(D) zero
(B) 5 I
'
T3
*
D
*|Screen
(D>>X)
Q.32 In young's double slit experiment, the value of X, = 500 nm. The value of d
= 1 mm, D = 1 m. Then the minimum distancefrcimcentral maximum for which the in
tensity is half the maximum intensity will be (A) 2.5 x 10" m ' ( B ) 2 x l 0 ^
m (C) 1.25 x KT m (D)10^m Q.33 Two slits are separated by 0.3 mm. Abeam of 500 n
m light strikes the slits producing an interference pattern. The number ofmaxima
observed in the angular range - 30° < 8 < 30°. (A) 300 ' (B) 150 (C) 599 - (D) 149
4 4
feBansal Classes
[6]
Q.34 In thefigureshown if a parallel beam of white light is incident on the plan
e ofthe slits then the distance of the white spot on the screen from 0 is [Assum
e d « D, X « d] (A)0 (B) d/2 (C) d/3 (D) d/6
2d/3
o
K r Q 3 5 In the above question ifthe light incident is monochromatic and point
O is a maxima, then the wavelength of the light incident cannot be (A) d /3D (B)
d /6D (C)d /l2D (D)d /l8D
2 x 2 2 2
Q. 3 6 In Young's double slit arrangement, water isfilledin the space between sc
reen and slits. Then: (A)fringepattern shifts upwards butfringewidth remains unc
hanged. (B)fringewidth decreases and central brightfringeshifts upwards. (C)frin
gewidth increases and central brightfringedoes not shift. (D)fringewidth decreas
es and central brightfringedoes not shift. Q. 3 7 A parallel beam oflight 500nm
is incident at an angle 30° with the normal to the slit plane in a young's double
slit experiment. The intensity due to each slit is Io. Point O is equidistantfro
mS, and S . The distance between slits is 1 mm. (A) the intensity at O is 4Io (B
) the intensity at O is zero. (C) the intensity at a point on the screen 4mmfrom
O is 4Io (D) the intensity at a point on the screen 4mmfromO is zero.
2
O-Sm
6'
Screen
Q. 3 8 Light ofwavelength X in air enters a medium ofrefractive index p. Two poi
nts in this medium, lying along the path of this light, are at a distance x apar
t. The phase difference between these points is: 2 7CX 271 x 2?cpx 2n(fi - l ) x
(A) (B) px (C) (D) Q.39 In YDSE, the source placed symmetrically with respect t
o the slit is •s now moved parallel to the plane of the slits so that it is closer
to the upper slit, as shown. Then, ]s (A) thefringewidth will increase andfring
epattern will shift down. (B) thefringewidth will remain same butfringepattern w
ill shift up. (C) thefringewidth will decrease and fringe pattern will shift dow
n. (D) thefringewidth will remain same butfringepattern will shift down. Q. 40 I
n the figure shown in YDSE, a parallel beam oflight is incident on the slit from
a medium of refractive index n,. The wavelength oflight in this medium is X . A
transparent slab of thickness't' and refractive index n is put infront of one sl
it. The medium between the screen and the plane of the slits is i^. The phase di
fference between the light waves reaching point 'O' (symmetrical, relative to th
e slits) is: 271 271 n | (B) Y " ( n - r^)!
2 ] 3 ( 3
fa Bansal Classes
27in, (C) n X,] n
2 v
27in,
2
n,)t
[91
Q.41
In a YDSE experiment if a slab whose refractive index can be varied is placed in
frontof one of the slits then the variation of resultant intensity at mid-point
of screen with 'p' will be best represented by (p £ 1). [Assume slits of equal wid
th and there is no absorption by slab] io (A)
(B)
n = <
(D)
Q.42 Young's double slit experiment is carried with two thin sheets of thickness
10.4 pm each and refractive index 1.52 and = 1.40 covering the slits 0 S, and S
, respectively. Ifwhite light of range 400 nm to 780 nm is used then which -o w
avelength will form maxima exactly at point O, the centre of the screen ? 0 (A)
416 nm only (B) 624 nm only Screen (C) 416 nm and 624 nm only (D) none ofthese Q
.43 A light ofwavelength 6300A shine on a two narrow slits separated by a distan
ce 1.0 mm and illuminates a screen at a distance 1.5 m away. When one slit is co
vered by a thin glass of refractive index 1.8 and other slit by a thin glass pla
te ofrefractive index p, the central maxima shifts by 6°. Both plates have same th
ickness of 0.5 mm. The value of refractive index p of the plate is (A) 1.6 (B) 1
.7 (C) 1.5 (D) 1.4 3 Q.44 Minimum thickness of a mica sheet having p=— which shoul
e be placed in front of one ofthe slits in YDSE is required to reduce the intens
ity at the centre of screen to half ofmaximum intensity is (A) XIA (B) m (C) X/2
(D) X/3 Q.45 In the YDSE shown the two slits are covered with thin sheets havin
g thickness t & 2t and refractive index 2p and p. Find the position (y) of centr
al maxima
2
(A)zero
i
tD (D) None d Q.46 In a YDSE with two identical slits, when the upper slits is c
overed with a thin, perfectly transparent sheet of mica, the intensity at the ce
ntre of screen reduces to 75% of the initial value. Second minima is observed to
be above this point and third maxima below it. Which ofthe following can not be
a possible value of phase difference caused by the mica sheet K 1371 1 lTC 17tc
(D) 3 (C) 3 (B) (A) 3 3 Q.47 The figure shows a transparent slab oflength 1 m p
laced in air whose refractive index in x direction varies as |_i = 1 + x (0 < x
< 1). The optical path length of ray R will be JL (A) 1 m m (B) (C)
2
« f
43Bansal Classes
(C)|m (D) V2 m Q 48 Two monochromatic and coherent point sources oflight are pla
ced at a certain distancefromeach other in the horizontal plane. The locus ofall
those points in the horizontal plane which have construct interference will be
(A) a hyperbola (B) family of hyperbolas (C) family of straight lines "" (D) fam
ily of parabolas
tr-
im X
Q. 49 A thin slice is cut out of a glass cylinder along a plane parallel to its
axis. The slice is placed on a flat glass plate with the curved surface downward
s. Monochromatic light is incident normallyfromthe top. The observed interferenc
efringesfromthis combination do not follow one ofthe following statements. (A) t
he fringes are straight and parallel to the length ofthe piece. (B) the line of
contact ofthe cylindrical glass piece and the glass plate appears dark. (C) thef
ringespacing increases as we go outwards. (D) thefringesare formed due to the in
terference oflight rays reflected from the curved surface of the cylindrical pie
ce and the top surface of the glass plate. Q. 50 A circular planar wire loop is
dipped in a soap solution and after taking it out, held with its plane vertical
in air. Assuming thickness of film at the top very small, as sunlight falls on t
he soap film, & observer receive reflected light (A) the top portion appears dar
k while thefirstcolour to be observed as one moves down is red. (B) the top port
ion appears violet while thefirstcolour to be observed as one moves down is indi
go. (C) the top portion appears dark while thefirstcolour to be observed as one
move down is violet. (D) the top portion appears dark while the first colour to
be observed as one move down depends on the refractive index ofthe soap solution
. ^ >? , , i^ i Q.51 A thinfilmofthickness t and index of refraction 1.33 coats
a glass with index of refraction 1.50. What is >• + k ' - > the least thickness t
that will strongly reflect light with wavelength 600 nm incident normally? 2 (A)
225 nm (B) 300 nm (C) 400 nm (D) 450 nm It is necessary to coat a glass lens wi
th a non-reflecting layer. Ifthe wavelength of the light in the coating is X, th
e best choice is a layer of material having an index ofrefraction between those
of glass and air and a thickness of
?
3
2 8 Q.53 Radio waves coming at Z a to vertical are recieved by a radar after ref
lection from a nearby water surface & directly. What should be height of antenna
from water surface so that it records a maximum intensity, (wavelength = X). 2
cos a (C) 4 sin a 4 cos a Q.54 In a biprism experiment the distance of source fr
om biprism is 1 m and the distance of screen from biprism is 4 metres. The angle
of refraction of biprism is 2 x 10 radians, p of biprism is 1.5 and the wavelen
gth oflight used is 6000A. How many fringes will be seen on the screen? (A) 4 (B
) 5 (C)3 (D)6 Q.55 In a biprism experiment using sodiumfightX = 6000 A an interf
erence pattern is obtained in which 20 fringes occupy 2 cm. On replacing sodium
light by another source of wavelength X without making any other change 30 fring
es occupy 2.7 cm on the screen. What is the value of X ? (A) 4500 A (B) 5400 A (
C) 5600 A (D) 4200 A
(D)
3 2 2
(B) —
(C)
3X
(D)X
X
(B):
2sina
X
Q. 56 A parallel coherent beam oflight falls on fresnel biprism of refractive in
dex p and angle a. The fringe width on a screen at a distance Dfrombiprism will
be (wavelength = X) XD D (D)none (A) 2 ( P - I ) a (C) 2(p - l)a (B) 2(p-l)a
fa Bansal Classes
[91
ONE OR MORE THAN ONE OPTION MAYBE Take approx. 3 minutes for answering each ques
tion.
CORRECT
Q.l
To observe a stationary interference pattern formed by two light waves, it is no
t necessary that they must have: (A) the same frequency (B) same amplitude (C) a
constant phase difference (D) the same intensity A light of wavelength 600nm in
air enters a medium of refractive index 1.5. Inside the medium : (A) itsfrequen
cyis 5 * 10 Hz ' (B) its frequency is 7.5 * 10 Hz (C) its wavelength is 400nm (D
) its wavelength is 900nm
14 14
Q.2 Q. 3 \)
Four monochromatic and coherent sources oflight, emitting waves in phase ofwavel
ength A, are placed at the points -»x = 0, d, 2d and 3d on the x-axis. Then (A) po
ints having | x | » d appear dark if d = A/4 (B) points having | x | » d appear dark
if d = A/8 points having | x | >> d appear maximum bright if d = X/4 (D) points
having | xj>>d appear maximum bright if d = A/8 In the above question, the inte
nsity of the waves reaching a point P far away on the +x axisfromeach of the fou
r sources is almost the same, and equal to I . Then, Q (A) If d = X/4, the inten
sity at P is 4I . (B) If d = A/6, the intensity at P is 3I . (C)Ifd = A/2, the i
ntensity at Pis 31 . (D) none ofthese is true.
0 0 0
Q.4
Q. 5 Thefigureshows two points source which emit light of wavelength A in phase
with each other and are at • a distance d = 5.5 A apart along a line which is perp
endicular to a large screen at a distance L from the centre of the source. Assum
e that d is much less than L. Which of the following statement is (are) correct?
Screen (A) Onlyfivebright fringes appeajr on the screen (B) Only six brightfrin
gesappear on the screen (0.0) (C) Point y = 0 corresponds to bright fringe (D) P
oint y = 0 corresponds to dark fringe. Q.6 White light is used to illuminate two
slits in a YDSE. The separation between the slits is d and the screen is at a d
istance D (D » d) from the slits. At a point on the screen directly infrontof one
ofthe slits, which of the following wavelengths are missing. (A) — (B)^ (D)^ V D D
/C/ 3D 3D In a YDSE apparatus, we use white light then : (A) thefringenext to t
he central will be red (B) the centralfringewill be white. (C) the fringe next t
o the central will be violet (D) there will not be a completely dark fringe.
w
Q.7 Q.8
If the source oflight used in a Young's Double Slit Experiment is changed from r
ed to blue, then (A) thefringeswill become brighter (B) consecutivefringeswill c
ome closer (C) the number of maxima formed on the screen increases (D) the centr
al brightfringewill become a dark fringe.
feBansal Classes
[10]
Q.9
In a Young's double slit experiment, green light is incident on the two slits. T
he interference pattern is observed on a screen. Which of the following changes
would cause the observed fringes to be more closely spaced? (A) Reducing the sep
aration between the slits (B) Using blue light instead ofgreen light (C) Used re
d light instead of green light (D) Moving the light source further away from the
slits.
fringes
incoming light waves
$ < <
Q. 10 In a Young's double-slit experiment, let Aand B be the two slits. Athin fi
lm ofthickness t and refractive index p is placed in front ofA. Let P = fringe w
idth. The central maximum will shift : (A) towards A ( C ) b y t ( p - l ) P (D)
by p t P (B) towards B
X
Q.ll In the previous question,filmsof thicknesses t and t and refractive indices
p and p , are placcd in front ofA and B respectively. If p t = p t , the centra
l maximum will: (A) not shifty (B) shift towards A (C) shift towards B (D) optio
n (B),ift >t ; option (C) if t < t
A n A B A A B B B A B A
Q.12 In a double slit experiment, instead of taking slits of equal widths, one s
lit is made twice as wide as the other. Then in the interference pattern: (A) th
e intensities of both the maxima and minima increase. (B) the intensity ofthe ma
xima increases and the minima has zero intensity. (C) the intensity of the maxim
a decreases and that of minima increases. (D) the intensity of the maxima decrea
ses and the minima has zero intensity. Q. 13 In a YDSE, if the siits are of uneq
ual width : (A) fringes will not be formed (B) the positions of minimum intensit
y will not be completely dark (C) bright fringe will not be formed at the centre
of the screen. (D) distance between two consecutive bright fringes will not be
equal to the distance between two consecutive dark fringes. Q.14 If one of the s
lits of a standard YDSE apparatus is covered by a thin parallel sided glass slab
so that it transmit only one half ofthe light intensity of the other, then: (A)
the fringe pattern will get shifted towards the covered slit. (B) the fringe pa
ttern will get shifted away from the covered slit. (C) the bright fringes will b
e less bright and the dark ones will be more bright. (D) the fringe width will r
emain unchanged. Q.15 To make the central fringe at the centre O, a mica sheet o
f refractive index 1.5 is introduced. Choose the correct statements (s). „ < S, J
(A) The thickness of sheet is 2(42 -1) d infront of Sj. d V M (B) The thickness
of sheet is 2 - l)d infront of S . (C) The thickness of sheet is 2 42 d infront
of Sj. (D) The thickness of sheet is (2^2-l)d infront of S,.
2
—
ST
fa Bansal Classes
[91
Q.16
Q.17
Q.18
Q.19
The figure shows a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of Young's Double S
lit Experiment ^ o; Screen Choose the correct statement(s) related to the wavele
ngth oflight used (A) Larger the wavelength oflight larger the fringe width (B)
The position of central maxima depends on the wavelength oflight used (C) Ifwhit
e light is used in YDSE, then the violet colour forms its first maxima closest t
o the central maxima (D) The central maxima of all the wavelengths coincide I If
the distance D is varied, then choose the correct statement(s) I (A) The angular
fringe width does not change (B) The fringe width changes in direct proportion
' (C) The change in fringe width is same for all wavelengths (L)) The position o
f central maxima remains unchanged If the distance d is varied, then identify th
e correct statement (A) The angular width does not change (B) The fringe width c
hanges in inverse proportion (C) The positions of all maxima change (D) The posi
tions of all minima change 1 dcntify tlie correct statement(s) if the source sli
t S moved closer to S, S , i.e. the distance I. decreases 0 k ) nothing happens
tofringepattern JB) fiinge pattern may gets less sharp
2
Answer Key
CI'3 V 91 0 V Zlb 3' 0 8 b 9 a'3'a
6i Q v si b v
Vb
a'3'a
L'b * zb
£5 0 V 9t>'b a 6£'b 3 zzb V srb 3 si b a nb 3 vb
SI NOIIdO
a ' a 81 b a'3 V M b 3'v orb
3V
3'V V a V V a a a 3
9b
zb
a'QV A I Q 9 £i b Q eb aV s b a'a \b
3NO
ID3UU0D
33 A VIM NOlid O 3N0 NVHI 3U01M ¥0
V 9Sb 3 ovb 3 zvb V srb V 8 Zb 3 i zb 3 w b V Lb
a ss b a 8 vb 3 ivb a \7Zb V Lib V 0 zb a Zlb a 9b
a 3 V 3 V a a 3
LVb
t?sb 017-Q, ££ b 9 Zb 6ib
a
zs b srb 8 Zb
Zl b
sb
izb t?zb Lib orb zb
V 3 V 3 3 a a 3
isO t?rb
LZb 0 zb zzb zb
9ib 6b
3 os b V zvb a 9£b 3 6 tb a zzb a sib V 8b V rb
ID3HH0D
3NO A3 NO
fa Bansal Classes
[91

Bansal CLasses Physics Study Material For IIT JEE

Cargado por

Información del documento

Descripción original:

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Bansal CLasses Physics Study Material For IIT JEE

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

BANSAL CLASSES

TARGET LIT JEE 2007

También podría gustarte